texlive[65552] Master/texmf-dist/doc: latex2e-help-texinfo (15jan23)
commits+karl at tug.org
commits+karl at tug.org
Sun Jan 15 21:55:58 CET 2023
Revision: 65552
http://tug.org/svn/texlive?view=revision&revision=65552
Author: karl
Date: 2023-01-15 21:55:58 +0100 (Sun, 15 Jan 2023)
Log Message:
-----------
latex2e-help-texinfo (15jan23)
Modified Paths:
--------------
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/info/latex2e.info
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/ChangeLog
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/Makefile
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/NEWS
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/aspell.en.pws
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/common.texi
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.dbk
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.html
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.texi
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.txt
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.xml
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/info/latex2e.info
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/info/latex2e.info 2023-01-15 20:55:35 UTC (rev 65551)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/info/latex2e.info 2023-01-15 20:55:58 UTC (rev 65552)
@@ -1,17 +1,17 @@
-This is latex2e.info, produced by makeinfo version 6.8 from
+This is latex2e.info, produced by makeinfo version 7.0.1 from
latex2e.texi.
This document is an unofficial reference manual for LaTeX, a document
-preparation system, version of January 2022.
+preparation system, version of January 2023.
- This manual was originally translated from 'LATEX.HLP' v1.0a in the
+ This manual was originally translated from ‘LATEX.HLP’ v1.0a in the
VMS Help Library. The pre-translation version was written by George D.
Greenwade of Sam Houston State University. The LaTeX 2.09 version was
written by Stephen Gilmore. The LaTeX2e version was adapted from this
by Torsten Martinsen. Karl Berry made further updates and additions,
-and gratefully acknowledges using 'Hypertext Help with LaTeX', by
-Sheldon Green, and 'LaTeX Command Summary' (for LaTeX 2.09) by L. Botway
-and C. Biemesderfer (published by the TeX Users Group as 'TeXniques'
+and gratefully acknowledges using ‘Hypertext Help with LaTeX’, by
+Sheldon Green, and ‘LaTeX Command Summary’ (for LaTeX 2.09) by L. Botway
+and C. Biemesderfer (published by the TeX Users Group as ‘TeXniques’
number 10), as reference material. We also gratefully acknowledge
additional material appearing in latex2e-reference by Martin Herbert
Dietze. (From these references no text was directly copied.)
@@ -45,7 +45,7 @@
***************************************
This document is an unofficial reference manual (version of January
-2022) for LaTeX2e, a document preparation system.
+2023) for LaTeX2e, a document preparation system.
* Menu:
@@ -74,7 +74,7 @@
* Special insertions:: Inserting reserved and special characters.
* Splitting the input:: Dealing with big files by splitting.
* Front/back matter:: Tables of contents, glossaries, indexes.
-* Letters:: The 'letter' class.
+* Letters:: The ‘letter’ class.
* Input/output:: User interaction.
* Command line interface:: Common command-line options.
* Document templates:: Starter templates for various document classes.
@@ -90,14 +90,14 @@
preparation system, which is a macro package for the TeX typesetting
program (*note Overview::).
- This document's home page is <https://latexref.xyz>; it has separate
+ This document’s home page is <https://latexref.xyz>; it has separate
web pages for each topic. Alternatively.
<https://latexref.xyz/dev/latex2e.html> has the entire document on a
single page. For other output formats, the sources, and plenty more
information, see <https://latexref.xyz/dev/>.
- In this document, we will mostly just use 'LaTeX' rather than
-'LaTeX2e', since the previous version of LaTeX (2.09) was frozen decades
+ In this document, we will mostly just use ‘LaTeX’ rather than
+‘LaTeX2e’, since the previous version of LaTeX (2.09) was frozen decades
ago.
LaTeX is maintained by a group of volunteers
@@ -142,9 +142,9 @@
(as of 2018). The commands specify, for example, how the text should be
formatted.
- LaTeX is implemented as a set of related so-called "macros" which use
-Donald E. Knuth's TeX typesetting program or one of its derivatives,
-collectively known as "engines". Thus, the user produces output,
+ LaTeX is implemented as a set of related so-called “macros” which use
+Donald E. Knuth’s TeX typesetting program or one of its derivatives,
+collectively known as “engines”. Thus, the user produces output,
typically PDF, by giving the input file to a TeX engine. (The following
sections describe all this in more detail.)
@@ -152,10 +152,10 @@
the input document is marked up, that is, to mean the set of commands
available to a LaTeX user.
- The name LaTeX is short for "Lamport TeX". It is pronounced LAH-teck
+ The name LaTeX is short for “Lamport TeX”. It is pronounced LAH-teck
or LAY-teck, or sometimes LAY-tecks. Inside a document, produce the
-logo with '\LaTeX'. Where use of the logo is not sensible, such as in
-plain text, write it as 'LaTeX'.
+logo with ‘\LaTeX’. Where use of the logo is not sensible, such as in
+plain text, write it as ‘LaTeX’.
* Menu:
@@ -180,19 +180,19 @@
Hello, \LaTeX\ world.
\end{document}
-Every LaTeX document has a '\begin{document}' line and an
-'\end{document}' line.
+Every LaTeX document has a ‘\begin{document}’ line and an
+‘\end{document}’ line.
-Here, the 'article' is the "document class". It is implemented in a
-file 'article.cls'. You can use any document class on your system. A
+Here, the ‘article’ is the “document class”. It is implemented in a
+file ‘article.cls’. You can use any document class on your system. A
few document classes are defined by LaTeX itself, and vast array of
others are widely available. *Note Document classes::.
- You can include other LaTeX commands between the '\documentclass' and
-the '\begin{document}' commands. This area is called the "preamble".
+ You can include other LaTeX commands between the ‘\documentclass’ and
+the ‘\begin{document}’ commands. This area is called the “preamble”.
- The '\begin{document}', '\end{document}' pair defines an
-"environment"; the 'document' environment (and no others) is required in
+ The ‘\begin{document}’, ‘\end{document}’ pair defines an
+“environment”; the ‘document’ environment (and no others) is required in
all LaTeX documents (*note document::). LaTeX make available to you
many environments that are documented here (*note Environments::). Many
more are available to you from external packages, most importantly those
@@ -208,20 +208,20 @@
================
LaTeX produces a main output file and at least two auxiliary files. The
-main output file's name ends in either '.dvi' or '.pdf'.
+main output file’s name ends in either ‘.dvi’ or ‘.pdf’.
-'.dvi'
- If LaTeX is invoked with the system command 'latex' then it
- produces a DeVice Independent file, with extension '.dvi'. You can
- view this file with a command such as 'xdvi', or convert it to a
- PostScript '.ps' file with 'dvips' or to a Portable Document Format
- '.pdf' file with 'dvipdfmx'. The contents of the file can be
- dumped in human-readable form with 'dvitype'. A vast array of
+‘.dvi’
+ If LaTeX is invoked with the system command ‘latex’ then it
+ produces a DeVice Independent file, with extension ‘.dvi’. You can
+ view this file with a command such as ‘xdvi’, or convert it to a
+ PostScript ‘.ps’ file with ‘dvips’ or to a Portable Document Format
+ ‘.pdf’ file with ‘dvipdfmx’. The contents of the file can be
+ dumped in human-readable form with ‘dvitype’. A vast array of
other DVI utility programs are available
(<https://mirror.ctan.org/dviware>).
-'.pdf'
- If LaTeX is invoked via the system command 'pdflatex', among other
+‘.pdf’
+ If LaTeX is invoked via the system command ‘pdflatex’, among other
commands (*note TeX engines::), then the main output is a Portable
Document Format (PDF) file. Typically this is a self-contained
file, with all fonts and images included.
@@ -228,25 +228,25 @@
LaTeX always produces at least two additional files.
-'.log'
+‘.log’
This transcript file contains summary information such as a list of
loaded packages. It also includes diagnostic messages and perhaps
additional information for any errors.
-'.aux'
+‘.aux’
Auxiliary information is used by LaTeX for things such as cross
references. For example, the first time that LaTeX finds a forward
- reference--a cross reference to something that has not yet appeared
- in the source--it will appear in the output as a doubled question
- mark '??'. When the referred-to spot does eventually appear in the
- source then LaTeX writes its location information to this '.aux'
+ reference—a cross reference to something that has not yet appeared
+ in the source—it will appear in the output as a doubled question
+ mark ‘??’. When the referred-to spot does eventually appear in the
+ source then LaTeX writes its location information to this ‘.aux’
file. On the next invocation, LaTeX reads the location information
from this file and uses it to resolve the reference, replacing the
double question mark with the remembered location.
LaTeX may produce yet more files, characterized by the filename
-ending. These include a '.lof' file that is used to make a list of
-figures, a '.lot' file used to make a list of tables, and a '.toc' file
+ending. These include a ‘.lof’ file that is used to make a list of
+figures, a ‘.lot’ file used to make a list of tables, and a ‘.toc’ file
used to make a table of contents (*note Table of contents etc.::). A
particular class may create others; the list is open-ended.
@@ -257,77 +257,77 @@
===============
LaTeX is a large set of commands that is executed by a TeX program
-(*note Overview::). Such a set of commands is called a "format", and is
-embodied in a binary '.fmt' file, which can be read much more quickly
+(*note Overview::). Such a set of commands is called a “format”, and is
+embodied in a binary ‘.fmt’ file, which can be read much more quickly
than the corresponding TeX source.
This section gives a terse overview of the TeX programs that are
commonly available (see also *note Command line interface::).
-'latex'
-'pdflatex'
+‘latex’
+‘pdflatex’
In TeX Live (<https://tug.org/texlive>), if LaTeX is invoked via
- either the system command 'latex' or 'pdflatex', then the pdfTeX
+ either the system command ‘latex’ or ‘pdflatex’, then the pdfTeX
engine is run (<https://ctan.org/pkg/pdftex>). When invoked as
- 'latex', the main output is a '.dvi' file; as 'pdflatex', the main
- output is a '.pdf' file.
+ ‘latex’, the main output is a ‘.dvi’ file; as ‘pdflatex’, the main
+ output is a ‘.pdf’ file.
- pdfTeX incorporates the e-TeX extensions to Knuth's original
+ pdfTeX incorporates the e-TeX extensions to Knuth’s original
program (<https://ctan.org/pkg/etex>), including additional
programming features and bi-directional typesetting, and has plenty
of extensions of its own. e-TeX is available on its own as the
- system command 'etex', but this is plain TeX (and produces '.dvi').
+ system command ‘etex’, but this is plain TeX (and produces ‘.dvi’).
- In other TeX distributions, 'latex' may invoke e-TeX rather than
+ In other TeX distributions, ‘latex’ may invoke e-TeX rather than
pdfTeX. In any case, the e-TeX extensions can be assumed to be
available in LaTeX.
-'lualatex'
- If LaTeX is invoked via the system command 'lualatex', the LuaTeX
+‘lualatex’
+ If LaTeX is invoked via the system command ‘lualatex’, the LuaTeX
engine is run (<https://ctan.org/pkg/luatex>). This program allows
code written in the scripting language Lua (<http://luatex.org>) to
- interact with TeX's typesetting. LuaTeX handles UTF-8 Unicode
+ interact with TeX’s typesetting. LuaTeX handles UTF-8 Unicode
input natively, can handle OpenType and TrueType fonts, and
- produces a '.pdf' file by default. There is also 'dvilualatex' to
- produce a '.dvi' file.
+ produces a ‘.pdf’ file by default. There is also ‘dvilualatex’ to
+ produce a ‘.dvi’ file.
-'xelatex'
- If LaTeX is invoked with the system command 'xelatex', the XeTeX
+‘xelatex’
+ If LaTeX is invoked with the system command ‘xelatex’, the XeTeX
engine is run (<https://tug.org/xetex>). Like LuaTeX, XeTeX
natively supports UTF-8 Unicode and TrueType and OpenType fonts,
though the implementation is completely different, mainly using
external libraries instead of internal code. XeTeX produces a
- '.pdf' file as output; it does not support DVI output.
+ ‘.pdf’ file as output; it does not support DVI output.
- Internally, XeTeX creates an '.xdv' file, a variant of DVI, and
- translates that to PDF using the ('x')'dvipdfmx' program, but this
- process is automatic. The '.xdv' file is only useful for
+ Internally, XeTeX creates an ‘.xdv’ file, a variant of DVI, and
+ translates that to PDF using the (‘x’)‘dvipdfmx’ program, but this
+ process is automatic. The ‘.xdv’ file is only useful for
debugging.
-'platex'
-'uplatex'
+‘platex’
+‘uplatex’
These commands provide significant additional support for Japanese
- and other languages; the 'u' variant supports Unicode. See
+ and other languages; the ‘u’ variant supports Unicode. See
<https://ctan.org/pkg/ptex> and <https://ctan.org/pkg/uptex>.
- As of 2019, there is a companion '-dev' command and format for all of
+ As of 2019, there is a companion ‘-dev’ command and format for all of
the above:
-'dvilualatex-dev'
-'latex-dev'
-'lualatex-dev'
-'pdflatex-dev'
-'platex-dev'
-'uplatex-dev'
-'xelatex-dev'
+‘dvilualatex-dev’
+‘latex-dev’
+‘lualatex-dev’
+‘pdflatex-dev’
+‘platex-dev’
+‘uplatex-dev’
+‘xelatex-dev’
These are candidates for an upcoming LaTeX release. The main
purpose is to find and address compatibility problems before an
official release.
- These '-dev' formats make it easy for anyone to help test documents
- and code: you can run, say, 'pdflatex-dev' instead of 'pdflatex',
+ These ‘-dev’ formats make it easy for anyone to help test documents
+ and code: you can run, say, ‘pdflatex-dev’ instead of ‘pdflatex’,
without changing anything else in your environment. Indeed, it is
- easiest and most helpful to always run the '-dev' versions instead
+ easiest and most helpful to always run the ‘-dev’ versions instead
of bothering to switch back and forth. During quiet times after a
release, the commands will be equivalent.
@@ -335,8 +335,8 @@
undergo the same extensive regression testing by the LaTeX team
before being released.
- For more information, see "The LaTeX release workflow and the LaTeX
- 'dev' formats" by Frank Mittelbach, 'TUGboat' 40:2,
+ For more information, see “The LaTeX release workflow and the LaTeX
+ ‘dev’ formats” by Frank Mittelbach, ‘TUGboat’ 40:2,
<https://tug.org/TUGboat/tb40-2/tb125mitt-dev.pdf>.
@@ -346,37 +346,37 @@
========================
In the LaTeX input file, a command name starts with a backslash
-character, '\'. The name itself then consists of either (a) a string of
+character, ‘\’. The name itself then consists of either (a) a string of
letters or (b) a single non-letter.
- LaTeX commands names are case sensitive so that '\pagebreak' differs
-from '\Pagebreak' (the latter is not a standard command). Most command
+ LaTeX commands names are case sensitive so that ‘\pagebreak’ differs
+from ‘\Pagebreak’ (the latter is not a standard command). Most command
names are lowercase, but in any event you must enter all commands in the
same case as they are defined.
A command may be followed by zero, one, or more arguments. These
arguments may be either required or optional. Required arguments are
-contained in curly braces, '{...}'. Optional arguments are contained in
-square brackets, '[...]'. Generally, but not universally, if the
+contained in curly braces, ‘{...}’. Optional arguments are contained in
+square brackets, ‘[...]’. Generally, but not universally, if the
command accepts an optional argument, it comes first, before any
required arguments.
Inside of an optional argument, to use the character close square
-bracket (']') hide it inside curly braces, as in '\item[closing bracket
-{]}]'. Similarly, if an optional argument comes last, with no required
+bracket (‘]’) hide it inside curly braces, as in ‘\item[closing bracket
+{]}]’. Similarly, if an optional argument comes last, with no required
argument after it, then to make the first character of the following
text be an open square bracket, hide it inside curly braces.
- LaTeX has the convention that some commands have a '*' form that is
-related to the form without a '*', such as '\chapter' and '\chapter*'.
+ LaTeX has the convention that some commands have a ‘*’ form that is
+related to the form without a ‘*’, such as ‘\chapter’ and ‘\chapter*’.
The exact difference in behavior varies from command to command.
- This manual describes all accepted options and '*'-forms for the
+ This manual describes all accepted options and ‘*’-forms for the
commands it covers (barring unintentional omissions, a.k.a. bugs).
- As of the 2020-10-01 release of LaTeX, the 'expl3' and 'xparse'
+ As of the 2020-10-01 release of LaTeX, the ‘expl3’ and ‘xparse’
packages are part of the LaTeX2e format. They provide a completely
-different underlying programming language syntax. We won't try to cover
+different underlying programming language syntax. We won’t try to cover
them in this document; see the related package documentation and other
LaTeX manuals.
@@ -392,9 +392,9 @@
...
\end{ENVIRONMENT-NAME}
- An "environment" is an area of LaTeX source, inside of which there is
+ An “environment” is an area of LaTeX source, inside of which there is
a distinct behavior. For instance, for poetry in LaTeX put the lines
-between '\begin{verse}' and '\end{verse}'.
+between ‘\begin{verse}’ and ‘\end{verse}’.
\begin{verse}
There once was a man from Nantucket \\
@@ -402,12 +402,12 @@
\end{verse}
*Note Environments::, for a list of environments. Particularly
-notable is that every LaTeX document must have a 'document' environment,
-a '\begin{document} ... \end{document}' pair.
+notable is that every LaTeX document must have a ‘document’ environment,
+a ‘\begin{document} ... \end{document}’ pair.
The ENVIRONMENT-NAME at the beginning must exactly match that at the
end. This includes the case where ENVIRONMENT-NAME ends in a
-star ('*'); both the '\begin' and '\end' texts must include the star.
+star (‘*’); both the ‘\begin’ and ‘\end’ texts must include the star.
Environments may have arguments, including optional arguments. This
example produces a table. The first argument is optional (and causes
@@ -425,7 +425,7 @@
===============================================
The Comprehensive TeX Archive Network, CTAN, is the TeX and LaTeX
-community's repository of free material. It is a set of Internet sites
+community’s repository of free material. It is a set of Internet sites
around the world that offer material related to LaTeX for download.
Visit CTAN on the web at <https://ctan.org>.
@@ -432,14 +432,14 @@
This material is organized into packages, discrete bundles that
typically offer some coherent functionality and are maintained by one
person or a small number of people. For instance, many publishers have
-a package that allows authors to format papers to that publisher's
+a package that allows authors to format papers to that publisher’s
specifications.
- In addition to the massive holdings, the 'ctan.org' web site offers
+ In addition to the massive holdings, the ‘ctan.org’ web site offers
features such as search by name or by functionality.
CTAN is not a single host, but instead is a set of hosts, one of
-which is the so-called "master". The master host actively manages the
+which is the so-called “master”. The master host actively manages the
material, for instance, by accepting uploads of new or updated packages.
For many years, it has been hosted by the German TeX group, DANTE e.V.
@@ -455,7 +455,7 @@
3 Document classes
******************
-The document's overall class is defined with this command, which is
+The document’s overall class is defined with this command, which is
normally the first command in a LaTeX source file.
\documentclass[OPTIONS]{CLASS}
@@ -463,27 +463,27 @@
The following document CLASS names are built into LaTeX. (Many other
document classes are available as separate packages; *note Overview::.)
-'article'
+‘article’
For a journal article, a presentation, and miscellaneous general
use.
-'book'
+‘book’
Full-length books, including chapters and possibly including front
matter, such as a preface, and back matter, such as an appendix
(*note Front/back matter::).
-'letter'
+‘letter’
Mail, optionally including mailing labels (*note Letters::).
-'report'
- For documents of length between an 'article' and a 'book', such as
+‘report’
+ For documents of length between an ‘article’ and a ‘book’, such as
technical reports or theses, which may contain several chapters.
-'slides'
- For slide presentations--rarely used nowadays. The 'beamer'
- package is perhaps the most prevalent
- (<https://ctan.org/pkg/beamer>). *Note beamer template::, for a
- small template for a beamer document.
+‘slides’
+ For slide presentations—rarely used nowadays. The ‘beamer’ package
+ is perhaps the most prevalent (<https://ctan.org/pkg/beamer>).
+ *Note beamer template::, for a small template for a beamer
+ document.
Standard OPTIONS are described in the next section.
@@ -499,8 +499,8 @@
3.1 Document class options
==========================
-You can specify "global options" or "class options" to the
-'\documentclass' command by enclosing them in square brackets. To
+You can specify “global options” or “class options” to the
+‘\documentclass’ command by enclosing them in square brackets. To
specify more than one OPTION, separate them with a comma.
\documentclass[OPTION1,OPTION2,...]{CLASS}
@@ -507,8 +507,8 @@
Here is the list of the standard class options.
- All of the standard classes except 'slides' accept the following
-options for selecting the typeface size (default is '10pt'):
+ All of the standard classes except ‘slides’ accept the following
+options for selecting the typeface size (default is ‘10pt’):
10pt 11pt 12pt
@@ -515,84 +515,84 @@
All of the standard classes accept these options for selecting the
paper size (these show height by width):
-'a4paper'
+‘a4paper’
210 by 297mm (about 8.25 by 11.75 inches)
-'a5paper'
+‘a5paper’
148 by 210mm (about 5.8 by 8.3 inches)
-'b5paper'
+‘b5paper’
176 by 250mm (about 6.9 by 9.8 inches)
-'executivepaper'
+‘executivepaper’
7.25 by 10.5 inches
-'legalpaper'
+‘legalpaper’
8.5 by 14 inches
-'letterpaper'
+‘letterpaper’
8.5 by 11 inches (the default)
When using one of the engines pdfLaTeX, LuaLaTeX, or XeLaTeX (*note
-TeX engines::), options other than 'letterpaper' set the print area but
+TeX engines::), options other than ‘letterpaper’ set the print area but
you must also set the physical paper size. One way to do that is to put
-'\pdfpagewidth=\paperwidth' and '\pdfpageheight=\paperheight' in your
-document's preamble.
+‘\pdfpagewidth=\paperwidth’ and ‘\pdfpageheight=\paperheight’ in your
+document’s preamble.
- The 'geometry' package provides flexible ways of setting the print
+ The ‘geometry’ package provides flexible ways of setting the print
area and physical page size.
Miscellaneous other options:
-'draft'
-'final'
- Mark ('draft') or do not mark ('final') overfull boxes with a black
- box in the margin; default is 'final'.
+‘draft’
+‘final’
+ Mark (‘draft’) or do not mark (‘final’) overfull boxes with a black
+ box in the margin; default is ‘final’.
-'fleqn'
+‘fleqn’
Put displayed formulas flush left; default is centered.
-'landscape'
+‘landscape’
Selects landscape format; default is portrait.
-'leqno'
+‘leqno’
Put equation numbers on the left side of equations; default is the
right side.
-'openbib'
- Use "open" bibliography format.
+‘openbib’
+ Use “open” bibliography format.
-'titlepage'
-'notitlepage'
+‘titlepage’
+‘notitlepage’
Specifies whether there is a separate page for the title
information and for the abstract also, if there is one. The
- default for the 'report' class is 'titlepage', for the other
- classes it is 'notitlepage'.
+ default for the ‘report’ class is ‘titlepage’, for the other
+ classes it is ‘notitlepage’.
- The following options are not available with the 'slides' class.
+ The following options are not available with the ‘slides’ class.
-'onecolumn'
-'twocolumn'
- Typeset in one or two columns; default is 'onecolumn'.
+‘onecolumn’
+‘twocolumn’
+ Typeset in one or two columns; default is ‘onecolumn’.
-'oneside'
-'twoside'
- Selects one- or two-sided layout; default is 'oneside', except that
- in the 'book' class the default is 'twoside'.
+‘oneside’
+‘twoside’
+ Selects one- or two-sided layout; default is ‘oneside’, except that
+ in the ‘book’ class the default is ‘twoside’.
For one-sided printing, the text is centered on the page. For
- two-sided printing, the '\evensidemargin' ('\oddsidemargin')
+ two-sided printing, the ‘\evensidemargin’ (‘\oddsidemargin’)
parameter determines the distance on even (odd) numbered pages
- between the left side of the page and the text's left margin, with
- '\oddsidemargin' being 40% of the difference between '\paperwidth'
- and '\textwidth', and '\evensidemargin' is the remainder.
+ between the left side of the page and the text’s left margin, with
+ ‘\oddsidemargin’ being 40% of the difference between ‘\paperwidth’
+ and ‘\textwidth’, and ‘\evensidemargin’ is the remainder.
-'openright'
-'openany'
+‘openright’
+‘openany’
Determines if a chapter should start on a right-hand page; default
- is 'openright' for 'book', and 'openany' for 'report'.
+ is ‘openright’ for ‘book’, and ‘openany’ for ‘report’.
- The 'slides' class offers the option 'clock' for printing the time at
+ The ‘slides’ class offers the option ‘clock’ for printing the time at
the bottom of each note.
@@ -607,12 +607,12 @@
\usepackage[OPTIONS]{PKG}.
To specify more than one package you can separate them with a comma,
-as in '\usepackage{PKG1,PKG2,...}', or use multiple '\usepackage'
+as in ‘\usepackage{PKG1,PKG2,...}’, or use multiple ‘\usepackage’
commands.
- Any options given in the '\documentclass' command that are unknown to
+ Any options given in the ‘\documentclass’ command that are unknown to
the selected document class are passed on to the packages loaded with
-'\usepackage'.
+‘\usepackage’.
File: latex2e.info, Node: Class and package construction, Prev: Additional packages, Up: Document classes
@@ -622,23 +622,23 @@
You can create new document classes and new packages. For instance, if
your memos must satisfy some local requirements, such as a standard
-header for each page, then you could create a new class 'smcmemo.cls'
-and begin your documents with '\documentclass{smcmemo}'.
+header for each page, then you could create a new class ‘smcmemo.cls’
+and begin your documents with ‘\documentclass{smcmemo}’.
What separates a package from a document class is that the commands
in a package are useful across classes while those in a document class
are specific to that class. Thus, a command to set page headers is for
-a package while a command to make the page headers say 'Memo from the
-SMC Math Department' is for a class.
+a package while a command to make the page headers say ‘Memo from the
+SMC Math Department’ is for a class.
- Inside of a class or package file you can use the at-sign '@' as a
+ Inside of a class or package file you can use the at-sign ‘@’ as a
character in command names without having to surround the code
-containing that command with '\makeatletter' and '\makeatother'. *Note
+containing that command with ‘\makeatletter’ and ‘\makeatother’. *Note
\makeatletter & \makeatother::. This allow you to create commands that
users will not accidentally redefine. Another technique is to preface
class- or package-specific commands with some string to prevent your
class or package from interfering with others. For instance, the class
-'smcmemo' might have commands '\smc at tolist', '\smc at fromlist', etc.
+‘smcmemo’ might have commands ‘\smc at tolist’, ‘\smc at fromlist’, etc.
* Menu:
@@ -652,31 +652,31 @@
---------------------------------
A class file or package file typically has four parts.
- 1. In the "identification part", the file says that it is a LaTeX
- package or class and describes itself, using the '\NeedsTeXFormat'
- and '\ProvidesClass' or '\ProvidesPackage' commands.
+ 1. In the “identification part”, the file says that it is a LaTeX
+ package or class and describes itself, using the ‘\NeedsTeXFormat’
+ and ‘\ProvidesClass’ or ‘\ProvidesPackage’ commands.
- 2. The "preliminary declarations part" declares some commands and can
+ 2. The “preliminary declarations part” declares some commands and can
also load other files. Usually these commands will be those needed
- for the code used in the next part. For example, an 'smcmemo'
+ for the code used in the next part. For example, an ‘smcmemo’
class might be called with an option to read in a file with a list
- of people for the to-head, as '\documentclass[mathto]{smcmemo}',
+ of people for the to-head, as ‘\documentclass[mathto]{smcmemo}’,
and therefore needs to define a command
- '\newcommand{\setto}[1]{\def\@tolist{#1}}' used in that file.
+ ‘\newcommand{\setto}[1]{\def\@tolist{#1}}’ used in that file.
- 3. In the "handle options part" the class or package declares and
+ 3. In the “handle options part” the class or package declares and
processes its options. Class options allow a user to start their
- document as '\documentclass[OPTION LIST]{CLASS NAME}', to modify
+ document as ‘\documentclass[OPTION LIST]{CLASS NAME}’, to modify
the behavior of the class. An example is when you declare
- '\documentclass[11pt]{article}' to set the default document font
+ ‘\documentclass[11pt]{article}’ to set the default document font
size.
- 4. Finally, in the "more declarations part" the class or package
+ 4. Finally, in the “more declarations part” the class or package
usually does most of its work: declaring new variables, commands
and fonts, and loading other files.
- Here is a starting class file, which should be saved as 'stub.cls'
-where LaTeX can find it, for example in the same directory as the '.tex'
+ Here is a starting class file, which should be saved as ‘stub.cls’
+where LaTeX can find it, for example in the same directory as the ‘.tex’
file.
\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
@@ -686,8 +686,8 @@
\LoadClass{article}
It identifies itself, handles the class options via the default of
-passing them all to the 'article' class, and then loads the 'article'
-class to provide the basis for this class's code.
+passing them all to the ‘article’ class, and then loads the ‘article’
+class to provide the basis for this class’s code.
For more, see the official guide for class and package writers, the
Class Guide, at
@@ -703,76 +703,76 @@
These are the commands designed to help writers of classes or packages.
-'\AtBeginDvi{specials}'
- Save in a box register things that are written to the '.dvi' file
+‘\AtBeginDvi{specials}’
+ Save in a box register things that are written to the ‘.dvi’ file
at the beginning of the shipout of the first page of the document.
-'\AtEndOfClass{CODE}'
-'\AtEndOfPackage{CODE}'
+‘\AtEndOfClass{CODE}’
+‘\AtEndOfPackage{CODE}’
Hook to insert CODE to be executed when LaTeX finishes processing
the current class or package. You can use these hooks multiple
- times; the 'code' will be executed in the order that you called it.
+ times; the ‘code’ will be executed in the order that you called it.
See also *note \AtBeginDocument::.
-'\CheckCommand{CMD}[NUM][DEFAULT]{DEFINITION}'
-'\CheckCommand*{CMD}[NUM][DEFAULT]{DEFINITION}'
- Like '\newcommand' (*note \newcommand & \renewcommand::) but does
+‘\CheckCommand{CMD}[NUM][DEFAULT]{DEFINITION}’
+‘\CheckCommand*{CMD}[NUM][DEFAULT]{DEFINITION}’
+ Like ‘\newcommand’ (*note \newcommand & \renewcommand::) but does
not define CMD; instead it checks that the current definition of
- CMD is exactly as given by DEFINITION and is or is not "long" as
- expected. A long command is a command that accepts '\par' within
+ CMD is exactly as given by DEFINITION and is or is not “long” as
+ expected. A long command is a command that accepts ‘\par’ within
an argument. The CMD command is expected to be long with the
- unstarred version of '\CheckCommand'. Raises an error when the
+ unstarred version of ‘\CheckCommand’. Raises an error when the
check fails. This allows you to check before you start redefining
- 'cmd' yourself that no other package has already redefined this
+ ‘cmd’ yourself that no other package has already redefined this
command.
-'\ClassError{CLASS NAME}{ERROR TEXT}{HELP TEXT}'
-'\PackageError{PACKAGE NAME}{ERROR TEXT}{HELP TEXT}'
-'\ClassWarning{CLASS NAME}{WARNING TEXT}'
-'\PackageWarning{PACKAGE NAME}{WARNING TEXT}'
-'\ClassWarningNoLine{CLASS NAME}{WARNING TEXT}'
-'\PackageWarningNoLine{PACKAGE NAME}{WARNING TEXT}'
-'\ClassInfo{CLASS NAME}{INFO TEXT}'
-'\PackageInfo{PACKAGE NAME}{INFO TEXT}'
-'\ClassInfoNoLine{CLASS NAME}{INFO TEXT}'
-'\PackageInfoNoLine{PACKAGE NAME}{INFO TEXT}'
+‘\ClassError{CLASS NAME}{ERROR TEXT}{HELP TEXT}’
+‘\ClassWarning{CLASS NAME}{WARNING TEXT}’
+‘\ClassWarningNoLine{CLASS NAME}{WARNING TEXT}’
+‘\ClassInfo{CLASS NAME}{INFO TEXT}’
+‘\ClassInfoNoLine{CLASS NAME}{INFO TEXT}’
+‘\PackageError{PACKAGE NAME}{ERROR TEXT}{HELP TEXT}’
+‘\PackageWarning{PACKAGE NAME}{WARNING TEXT}’
+‘\PackageWarningNoLine{PACKAGE NAME}{WARNING TEXT}’
+‘\PackageInfo{PACKAGE NAME}{INFO TEXT}’
+‘\PackageInfoNoLine{PACKAGE NAME}{INFO TEXT}’
Produce an error message, or warning or informational messages.
- For '\ClassError' and '\PackageError' the message is ERROR TEXT,
- followed by TeX's '?' error prompt. If the user then asks for help
- by typing 'h', they see the HELP TEXT.
+ For ‘\ClassError’ and ‘\PackageError’ the message is ERROR TEXT,
+ followed by TeX’s ‘?’ error prompt. If the user then asks for help
+ by typing ‘h’, they see the HELP TEXT.
The four warning commands are similar except that they write
WARNING TEXT on the screen with no error prompt. The four info
- commands write INFO TEXT only in the transcript file. The 'NoLine'
+ commands write INFO TEXT only in the transcript file. The ‘NoLine’
versions do not show the number of the line generating the message,
while the other versions do show that number.
- To format the messages, including the HELP TEXT: use '\protect' to
+ To format the messages, including the HELP TEXT: use ‘\protect’ to
stop a command from expanding, get a line break with
- '\MessageBreak', and get a space with '\space' when a space
+ ‘\MessageBreak’, and get a space with ‘\space’ when a space
character does not allow it, like after a command. Note that LaTeX
appends a period to the messages.
-'\CurrentOption'
+‘\CurrentOption’
Expands to the name of the currently-being-processed option. Can
- only be used within the CODE argument of either '\DeclareOption' or
- '\DeclareOption*'.
+ only be used within the CODE argument of either ‘\DeclareOption’ or
+ ‘\DeclareOption*’.
-'\DeclareOption{OPTION}{CODE}'
-'\DeclareOption*{CODE}'
+‘\DeclareOption{OPTION}{CODE}’
+‘\DeclareOption*{CODE}’
Make an option available to a user to invoke in their
- '\documentclass' command. For example, the 'smcmemo' class could
- have an option '\documentclass[logo]{smcmemo}' allowing users to
+ ‘\documentclass’ command. For example, the ‘smcmemo’ class could
+ have an option ‘\documentclass[logo]{smcmemo}’ allowing users to
put the institutional logo on the first page. The class file must
- contain '\DeclareOption{logo}{CODE}' (and later,
- '\ProcessOptions').
+ contain ‘\DeclareOption{logo}{CODE}’ (and later,
+ ‘\ProcessOptions’).
If you request an option that has not been declared, by default
- this will produce a warning like 'Unused global option(s):
- [badoption].' Change this behavior with the starred version
- '\DeclareOption*{CODE}'. For example, many classes extend an
- existing class, using a command such as '\LoadClass{article}', and
+ this will produce a warning like ‘Unused global option(s):
+ [badoption].’ Change this behavior with the starred version
+ ‘\DeclareOption*{CODE}’. For example, many classes extend an
+ existing class, using a command such as ‘\LoadClass{article}’, and
for passing extra options to the underlying class use code such as
this.
@@ -780,50 +780,50 @@
\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{article}%
}
- Another example is that the class 'smcmemo' may allow users to keep
+ Another example is that the class ‘smcmemo’ may allow users to keep
lists of memo recipients in external files. Then the user could
- invoke '\documentclass[math]{smcmemo}' and it will read the file
- 'math.memo'. This code handles the file if it exists and otherwise
- passes the option to the 'article' class.
+ invoke ‘\documentclass[math]{smcmemo}’ and it will read the file
+ ‘math.memo’. This code handles the file if it exists and otherwise
+ passes the option to the ‘article’ class.
\DeclareOption*{\InputIfFileExists{\CurrentOption.memo}{}{%
\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{article}}}
-'\DeclareRobustCommand{CMD}[NUM][DEFAULT]{DEFINITION}'
-'\DeclareRobustCommand*{CMD}[NUM][DEFAULT]{DEFINITION}'
- Like '\newcommand' and '\newcommand*' (*note \newcommand &
+‘\DeclareRobustCommand{CMD}[NUM][DEFAULT]{DEFINITION}’
+‘* \DeclareRobustCommand*{CMD}[NUM][DEFAULT]{DEFINITION}’
+ Like ‘\newcommand’ and ‘\newcommand*’ (*note \newcommand &
\renewcommand::) but these declare a robust command, even if some
code within the DEFINITION is fragile. (For a discussion of robust
and fragile commands *note \protect::.) Use this command to define
new robust commands or to redefine existing commands and make them
- robust. Unlike '\newcommand' these do not give an error if macro
+ robust. Unlike ‘\newcommand’ these do not give an error if macro
CMD already exists; instead, a log message is put into the
transcript file if a command is redefined.
Commands defined this way are a bit less efficient than those
- defined using '\newcommand' so unless the command's data is fragile
+ defined using ‘\newcommand’ so unless the command’s data is fragile
and the command is used within a moving argument, use
- '\newcommand'.
+ ‘\newcommand’.
- The 'etoolbox' package offers the commands '\newrobustcmd',
- '\newrobustcmd*', as well as the commands '\renewrobustcmd',
- '\renewrobustcmd*', and the commands '\providerobustcmd', and
- '\providerobustcmd*'. These are similar to '\newcommand',
- '\newcommand*', '\renewcommand', '\renewcommand*',
- '\providecommand', and '\providecommand*', but define a robust CMD
- with two advantages as compared to '\DeclareRobustCommand':
+ The ‘etoolbox’ package offers the commands ‘\newrobustcmd’,
+ ‘\newrobustcmd*’, as well as the commands ‘\renewrobustcmd’,
+ ‘\renewrobustcmd*’, and the commands ‘\providerobustcmd’, and
+ ‘\providerobustcmd*’. These are similar to ‘\newcommand’,
+ ‘\newcommand*’, ‘\renewcommand’, ‘\renewcommand*’,
+ ‘\providecommand’, and ‘\providecommand*’, but define a robust CMD
+ with two advantages as compared to ‘\DeclareRobustCommand’:
1. They use the low-level e-TeX protection mechanism rather than
- the higher level LaTeX '\protect' mechanism, so they do not
+ the higher level LaTeX ‘\protect’ mechanism, so they do not
incur the slight loss of performance mentioned above, and
- 2. They make the same distinction between '\new...', '\renew...',
- and '\provide...', as the standard commands, so they do not
+ 2. They make the same distinction between ‘\new...’, ‘\renew...’,
+ and ‘\provide...’, as the standard commands, so they do not
just make a log message when you redefine CMD that already
- exists, in that case you need to use either '\renew...' or
- '\provide...' or you get an error.
+ exists, in that case you need to use either ‘\renew...’ or
+ ‘\provide...’ or you get an error.
-'\IfFileExists{FILENAME}{TRUE CODE}{FALSE CODE}'
-'\InputIfFileExists{FILENAME}{TRUE CODE}{FALSE CODE}'
- Execute TRUE CODE if LaTeX finds the file 'FILE NAME' or FALSE CODE
+‘\IfFileExists{FILENAME}{TRUE CODE}{FALSE CODE}’
+‘\InputIfFileExists{FILENAME}{TRUE CODE}{FALSE CODE}’
+ Execute TRUE CODE if LaTeX finds the file ‘FILE NAME’ or FALSE CODE
otherwise. In the first case it executing TRUE CODE and then
inputs the file. Thus the command
@@ -830,22 +830,22 @@
\IfFileExists{img.pdf}{%
\includegraphics{img.pdf}}{\typeout{!! img.pdf not found}
- will include the graphic 'img.pdf' if it is found and otherwise
+ will include the graphic ‘img.pdf’ if it is found and otherwise
give a warning.
This command looks for the file in all search paths that LaTeX
uses, not only in the current directory. To look only in the
- current directory do something like '\IfFileExists{./filename}{TRUE
- CODE}{FALSE CODE}'. If you ask for a filename without a '.tex'
+ current directory do something like ‘\IfFileExists{./filename}{TRUE
+ CODE}{FALSE CODE}’. If you ask for a filename without a ‘.tex’
extension then LaTeX will first look for the file by appending the
- '.tex'; for more on how LaTeX handles file extensions see *note
+ ‘.tex’; for more on how LaTeX handles file extensions see *note
\input::.
-'\LoadClass[OPTIONS LIST]{CLASS NAME}[RELEASE DATE]'
-'\LoadClassWithOptions{CLASS NAME}[RELEASE DATE]'
- Load a class, as with '\documentclass[OPTIONS LIST]{CLASS
- NAME}[RELEASE INFO]'. An example is
- '\LoadClass[twoside]{article}'.
+‘\LoadClass[OPTIONS LIST]{CLASS NAME}[RELEASE DATE]’
+‘\LoadClassWithOptions{CLASS NAME}[RELEASE DATE]’
+ Load a class, as with ‘\documentclass[OPTIONS LIST]{CLASS
+ NAME}[RELEASE INFO]’. An example is
+ ‘\LoadClass[twoside]{article}’.
The OPTIONS LIST, if present, is a comma-separated list. The
RELEASE DATE is optional. If present it must have the form
@@ -859,35 +859,35 @@
document class article, but only version `2014/09/29 v1.4h
Standard LaTeX document class' is available.
- The command version '\LoadClassWithOptions' uses the list of
+ The command version ‘\LoadClassWithOptions’ uses the list of
options for the current class. This means it ignores any options
- passed to it via '\PassOptionsToClass'. This is a convenience
+ passed to it via ‘\PassOptionsToClass’. This is a convenience
command that lets you build classes on existing ones, such as the
- standard 'article' class, without having to track which options
+ standard ‘article’ class, without having to track which options
were passed.
-'\ExecuteOptions{OPTIONS-LIST}'
+‘\ExecuteOptions{OPTIONS-LIST}’
For each option OPTION in the OPTIONS-LIST, in order, this command
- executes the command '\ds at OPTION'. If this command is not defined
+ executes the command ‘\ds at OPTION’. If this command is not defined
then that option is silently ignored.
It can be used to provide a default option list before
- '\ProcessOptions'. For example, if in a class file you want the
+ ‘\ProcessOptions’. For example, if in a class file you want the
default to be 11pt fonts then you could specify
- '\ExecuteOptions{11pt}\ProcessOptions\relax'.
+ ‘\ExecuteOptions{11pt}\ProcessOptions\relax’.
-'\NeedsTeXFormat{FORMAT}[FORMAT DATE]'
+‘\NeedsTeXFormat{FORMAT}[FORMAT DATE]’
Specifies the format that this class must be run under. Often
issued as the first line of a class file, and most often used as:
- '\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}'. When a document using that class is
+ ‘\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}’. When a document using that class is
processed, the format name given here must match the format that is
actually being run (including that the FORMAT string is case
sensitive). If it does not match then execution stops with an
- error like 'This file needs format `LaTeX2e' but this is `xxx'.'
+ error like ‘This file needs format `LaTeX2e' but this is `xxx'.’
To specify a version of the format that you know to have certain
features, include the optional FORMAT DATE on which those features
- were implemented. If present it must be in the form 'YYYY/MM/DD'.
+ were implemented. If present it must be in the form ‘YYYY/MM/DD’.
If the format version installed on your system is earlier than
FORMAT DATE then you get a warning like this.
@@ -894,154 +894,154 @@
You have requested release `2038/01/20' of LaTeX, but only
release `2016/02/01' is available.
-'\OptionNotUsed'
+‘\OptionNotUsed’
Adds the current option to the list of unused options. Can only be
- used within the CODE argument of either '\DeclareOption' or
- '\DeclareOption*'.
+ used within the CODE argument of either ‘\DeclareOption’ or
+ ‘\DeclareOption*’.
-'\PassOptionsToClass{OPTION LIST}{CLASS NAME}'
-'\PassOptionsToPackage{OPTION LIST}{PACKAGE NAME}'
+‘\PassOptionsToClass{OPTION LIST}{CLASS NAME}’
+‘\PassOptionsToPackage{OPTION LIST}{PACKAGE NAME}’
Adds the options in the comma-separated list OPTION LIST to the
- options used by any future '\RequirePackage' or '\usepackage'
+ options used by any future ‘\RequirePackage’ or ‘\usepackage’
command for package PACKAGE NAME or the class CLASS NAME.
The reason for these commands is: you may load a package any number
of times with no options but if you want options then you may only
supply them when you first load the package. Loading a package
- with options more than once will get you an error like 'Option
- clash for package foo.' (LaTeX throws an error even if there is no
+ with options more than once will get you an error like ‘Option
+ clash for package foo.’ (LaTeX throws an error even if there is no
conflict between the options.)
If your own code is bringing in a package twice then you can
collapse that to once, for example replacing the two
- '\RequirePackage[landscape]{geometry}' and
- '\RequirePackage[margins=1in]{geometry}' with the single command
- '\RequirePackage[landscape,margins=1in]{geometry}'.
+ ‘\RequirePackage[landscape]{geometry}’ and
+ ‘\RequirePackage[margins=1in]{geometry}’ with the single command
+ ‘\RequirePackage[landscape,margins=1in]{geometry}’.
- However, imagine that you are loading 'firstpkg' and inside that
- package it loads 'secondpkg', and you need the second package to be
- loaded with option 'draft'. Then before doing the first package
+ However, imagine that you are loading ‘firstpkg’ and inside that
+ package it loads ‘secondpkg’, and you need the second package to be
+ loaded with option ‘draft’. Then before doing the first package
you must queue up the options for the second package, like this.
\PassOptionsToPackage{draft}{secondpkg}
\RequirePackage{firstpkg}
- (If 'firstpkg.sty' loads an option in conflict with what you want
+ (If ‘firstpkg.sty’ loads an option in conflict with what you want
then you may have to alter its source.)
These commands are useful for general users as well as class and
package writers. For instance, suppose a user wants to load the
- 'graphicx' package with the option 'draft' and also wants to use a
- class 'foo' that loads the 'graphicx' package, but without that
+ ‘graphicx’ package with the option ‘draft’ and also wants to use a
+ class ‘foo’ that loads the ‘graphicx’ package, but without that
option. The user could start their LaTeX file with
- '\PassOptionsToPackage{draft}{graphicx}\documentclass{foo}'.
+ ‘\PassOptionsToPackage{draft}{graphicx}\documentclass{foo}’.
-'\ProcessOptions'
-'\ProcessOptions*\@OPTIONS'
+‘\ProcessOptions’
+‘\ProcessOptions*\@OPTIONS’
Execute the code for each option that the user has invoked.
- Include it in the class file as '\ProcessOptions\relax' (because of
+ Include it in the class file as ‘\ProcessOptions\relax’ (because of
the existence of the starred command).
- Options come in two types. "Local options" have been specified for
+ Options come in two types. “Local options” have been specified for
this particular package in the OPTIONS argument of
- '\PassOptionsToPackage{OPTIONS}', '\usepackage[OPTIONS]', or
- '\RequirePackage[OPTIONS]'. "Global options" are those given by
- the class user in '\documentclass[OPTIONS]' (If an option is
+ ‘\PassOptionsToPackage{OPTIONS}’, ‘\usepackage[OPTIONS]’, or
+ ‘\RequirePackage[OPTIONS]’. “Global options” are those given by
+ the class user in ‘\documentclass[OPTIONS]’ (If an option is
specified both locally and globally then it is local.)
- When '\ProcessOptions' is called for a package 'pkg.sty', the
+ When ‘\ProcessOptions’ is called for a package ‘pkg.sty’, the
following happens:
- 1. For each option OPTION so far declared with '\DeclareOption',
+ 1. For each option OPTION so far declared with ‘\DeclareOption’,
it looks to see if that option is either a global or a local
- option for 'pkg'. If so then it executes the declared code.
+ option for ‘pkg’. If so then it executes the declared code.
This is done in the order in which these options were given in
- 'pkg.sty'.
+ ‘pkg.sty’.
2. For each remaining local option, it executes the command
- '\ds@'OPTION if it has been defined somewhere (other than by a
- '\DeclareOption'); otherwise, it executes the default option
- code given in '\DeclareOption*'. If no default option code
+ ‘\ds@’OPTION if it has been defined somewhere (other than by a
+ ‘\DeclareOption’); otherwise, it executes the default option
+ code given in ‘\DeclareOption*’. If no default option code
has been declared then it gives an error message. This is
done in the order in which these options were specified.
- When '\ProcessOptions' is called for a class it works in the same
+ When ‘\ProcessOptions’ is called for a class it works in the same
way except that all options are local, and the default CODE for
- '\DeclareOption*' is '\OptionNotUsed' rather than an error.
+ ‘\DeclareOption*’ is ‘\OptionNotUsed’ rather than an error.
- The starred version '\ProcessOptions*' executes the options in the
+ The starred version ‘\ProcessOptions*’ executes the options in the
order specified in the calling commands, rather than in the order
of declaration in the class or package. For a package this means
that the global options are processed first.
-'\ProvidesClass{CLASS NAME}[RELEASE DATE BRIEF ADDITIONAL INFORMATION]'
-'\ProvidesClass{CLASS NAME}[RELEASE DATE]'
-'\ProvidesPackage{PACKAGE NAME}[RELEASE DATE BRIEF ADDITIONAL INFORMATION]'
-'\ProvidesPackage{PACKAGE NAME}[RELEASE DATE]'
+‘\ProvidesClass{CLASS NAME}[RELEASE DATE BRIEF ADDITIONAL INFORMATION]’
+‘\ProvidesClass{CLASS NAME}[RELEASE DATE]’
+‘\ProvidesPackage{PACKAGE NAME}[RELEASE DATE BRIEF ADDITIONAL INFORMATION]’
+‘\ProvidesPackage{PACKAGE NAME}[RELEASE DATE]’
Identifies the class or package, printing a message to the screen
and the log file.
When you load a class or package, for example with
- '\documentclass{smcmemo}' or '\usepackage{test}', LaTeX inputs a
+ ‘\documentclass{smcmemo}’ or ‘\usepackage{test}’, LaTeX inputs a
file. If the name of the file does not match the class or package
name declared in it then you get a warning. Thus, if you invoke
- '\documentclass{smcmemo}', and the file 'smcmemo.cls' has the
- statement '\ProvidesClass{xxx}' then you get a warning like 'You
+ ‘\documentclass{smcmemo}’, and the file ‘smcmemo.cls’ has the
+ statement ‘\ProvidesClass{xxx}’ then you get a warning like ‘You
have requested document class `smcmemo', but the document class
- provides 'xxx'.' This warning does not prevent LaTeX from
+ provides 'xxx'.’ This warning does not prevent LaTeX from
processing the rest of the class file normally.
If you include the optional argument then you must include a date,
- before any spaces, of the form 'YYYY/MM/DD'. The rest of the
+ before any spaces, of the form ‘YYYY/MM/DD’. The rest of the
optional argument is free-form, although it traditionally
identifies the class, and is written to the screen during
- compilation and to the log file. Thus, if your file 'smcmemo.cls'
- contains the line '\ProvidesClass{smcmemo}[2008/06/01 v1.0 SMC memo
- class]' and your document's first line is '\documentclass{smcmemo}'
- then you will see 'Document Class: smcmemo 2008/06/01 v1.0 SMC memo
- class'.
+ compilation and to the log file. Thus, if your file ‘smcmemo.cls’
+ contains the line ‘\ProvidesClass{smcmemo}[2008/06/01 v1.0 SMC memo
+ class]’ and your document’s first line is ‘\documentclass{smcmemo}’
+ then you will see ‘Document Class: smcmemo 2008/06/01 v1.0 SMC memo
+ class’.
The date in the optional argument allows class and package users to
ask to be warned if the version of the class or package is earlier
than RELEASE DATE. For instance, a user could enter
- '\documentclass{smcmemo}[2018/10/12]' or
- '\usepackage{foo}[[2017/07/07]]' to require a class or package with
+ ‘\documentclass{smcmemo}[2018/10/12]’ or
+ ‘\usepackage{foo}[[2017/07/07]]’ to require a class or package with
certain features by specifying that it must be released no earlier
than the given date. (Although, in practice package users only
rarely include a date, and class users almost never do.)
-'\ProvidesFile{FILENAME}[ADDITIONAL INFORMATION]'
+‘\ProvidesFile{FILENAME}[ADDITIONAL INFORMATION]’
Declare a file other than the main class and package files, such as
configuration files or font definition files. Put this command in
- that file and you get in the log a string like 'File: test.config
- 2017/10/12 config file for test.cls' for FILENAME equal to
- 'test.config' and ADDITIONAL INFORMATION equal to '2017/10/12
- config file for test.cls'.
+ that file and you get in the log a string like ‘File: test.config
+ 2017/10/12 config file for test.cls’ for FILENAME equal to
+ ‘test.config’ and ADDITIONAL INFORMATION equal to ‘2017/10/12
+ config file for test.cls’.
-'\RequirePackage[OPTION LIST]{PACKAGE NAME}[RELEASE DATE]'
-'\RequirePackageWithOptions{PACKAGE NAME}[RELEASE DATE]'
- Load a package, like the command '\usepackage' (*note Additional
+‘\RequirePackage[OPTION LIST]{PACKAGE NAME}[RELEASE DATE]’
+‘\RequirePackageWithOptions{PACKAGE NAME}[RELEASE DATE]’
+ Load a package, like the command ‘\usepackage’ (*note Additional
packages::). The LaTeX development team strongly recommends use of
- these commands over Plain TeX's '\input'; see the Class Guide. An
- example is '\RequirePackage[landscape,margin=1in]{geometry}'.
+ these commands over Plain TeX’s ‘\input’; see the Class Guide. An
+ example is ‘\RequirePackage[landscape,margin=1in]{geometry}’.
The OPTION LIST, if present, is a comma-separated list. The
RELEASE DATE, if present, must have the form YYYY/MM/DD. If the
release date of the package as installed on your system is earlier
- than RELEASE DATE then you get a warning like 'You have requested,
+ than RELEASE DATE then you get a warning like ‘You have requested,
on input line 9, version `2017/07/03' of package jhtest, but only
- version `2000/01/01' is available'.
+ version `2000/01/01' is available’.
- The '\RequirePackageWithOptions' version uses the list of options
+ The ‘\RequirePackageWithOptions’ version uses the list of options
for the current class. This means it ignores any options passed to
- it via '\PassOptionsToClass'. This is a convenience command to
+ it via ‘\PassOptionsToClass’. This is a convenience command to
allow easily building classes on existing ones without having to
track which options were passed.
- The difference between '\usepackage' and '\RequirePackage' is
- small. The '\usepackage' command is intended for the document file
- while '\RequirePackage' is intended for package and class files.
- Thus, using '\usepackage' before the '\documentclass' command
- causes LaTeX to give error like '\usepackage before
- \documentclass', but you can use '\RequirePackage' there.
+ The difference between ‘\usepackage’ and ‘\RequirePackage’ is
+ small. The ‘\usepackage’ command is intended for the document file
+ while ‘\RequirePackage’ is intended for package and class files.
+ Thus, using ‘\usepackage’ before the ‘\documentclass’ command
+ causes LaTeX to give error like ‘\usepackage before
+ \documentclass’, but you can use ‘\RequirePackage’ there.
File: latex2e.info, Node: Fonts, Next: Layout, Prev: Document classes, Up: Top
@@ -1071,7 +1071,7 @@
\usepackage[bigdelims,vvarbb]{newpxmath} % bb from STIX
\usepackage[cal=boondoxo]{mathalfa} % mathcal
-In addition, the 'xelatex' or 'lualatex' engines allow you to use any
+In addition, the ‘xelatex’ or ‘lualatex’ engines allow you to use any
fonts on your system that are in OpenType or TrueType format (*note TeX
engines::).
@@ -1093,7 +1093,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: fontenc package, Next: Font styles, Up: Fonts
-4.1 'fontenc' package
+4.1 ‘fontenc’ package
=====================
Synopsis:
@@ -1107,15 +1107,15 @@
Specify the font encodings. A font encoding is a mapping of the
character codes to the font glyphs that are used to typeset your output.
- This package only applies if you use the 'pdflatex' engine (*note TeX
-engines::). If you use the 'xelatex' or 'lualatex' engine then instead
-use the 'fontspec' package.
+ This package only applies if you use the ‘pdflatex’ engine (*note TeX
+engines::). If you use the ‘xelatex’ or ‘lualatex’ engine then instead
+use the ‘fontspec’ package.
- TeX's original font family, Computer Modern, has a limited character
+ TeX’s original font family, Computer Modern, has a limited character
set. For instance, to make common accented characters you must use
-'\accent' (*note \accent::) but this disables hyphenation. TeX users
+‘\accent’ (*note \accent::) but this disables hyphenation. TeX users
have agreed on a number of standards to access the larger sets of
-characters provided by modern fonts. If you are using 'pdflatex' then
+characters provided by modern fonts. If you are using ‘pdflatex’ then
put this in the preamble
\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
@@ -1126,53 +1126,53 @@
output can be copied and pasted. (The optional second line allows you
to directly enter accented characters into your source file.)
- If you are using an encoding such as 'T1' and the characters appear
+ If you are using an encoding such as ‘T1’ and the characters appear
blurry or do not magnify well then your fonts may be bitmapped,
sometimes called raster or Type 3. You want vector fonts. Use a
-package such as 'lmodern' or 'cm-super' to get a font that extends
-LaTeX's default using vector fonts.
+package such as ‘lmodern’ or ‘cm-super’ to get a font that extends
+LaTeX’s default using vector fonts.
For each FONT_ENCODING given as an option but not already declared,
this package loads the encoding definition files, named
-'FONT_ENCODINGenc.def'. It also sets '\encodingdefault' to be the last
+‘FONT_ENCODINGenc.def’. It also sets ‘\encodingdefault’ to be the last
encoding in the option list.
These are the common values for FONT_ENCODING.
-'OT1'
+‘OT1’
The original encoding for TeX. Limited to mostly English
characters.
-'OMS, OML'
+‘OMS, OML’
Math symbols and math letters encoding.
-'T1'
+‘T1’
TeX text extended. Sometimes called the Cork encoding for the
Users Group meeting where it was developed. Gives access to most
European accented characters. The most common option for this
package.
-'TS1'
+‘TS1’
Text Companion encoding.
-LaTeX's default is to load 'OML', 'T1', 'OT1', and then 'OMS', and set
-the default to 'OT1'.
+LaTeX’s default is to load ‘OML’, ‘T1’, ‘OT1’, and then ‘OMS’, and set
+the default to ‘OT1’.
Even if you do not use accented letters, you may need to specify a
font encoding if your font requires it.
- If you use 'T1' encoded fonts other than the default Computer Modern
+ If you use ‘T1’ encoded fonts other than the default Computer Modern
family then you may need to load the package that selects your fonts
-before loading 'fontenc', to prevent the system from loading any
-'T1' encoded fonts from the default.
+before loading ‘fontenc’, to prevent the system from loading any
+‘T1’ encoded fonts from the default.
- The LaTeX team reserve encoding names starting with: 'T' for the
-standard text encodings with 256 characters, 'TS' for symbols that
-extend the corresponding T encodings, 'X' for test encodings, 'M' for
-standard math encodings with 256 characters, 'A' for special
-applications, 'OT' for standard text encodings with 128 characters, and
-'OM' for standard math encodings with 128 characters ('O' stands for
-'obsolete').
+ The LaTeX team reserve encoding names starting with: ‘T’ for the
+standard text encodings with 256 characters, ‘TS’ for symbols that
+extend the corresponding T encodings, ‘X’ for test encodings, ‘M’ for
+standard math encodings with 256 characters, ‘A’ for special
+applications, ‘OT’ for standard text encodings with 128 characters, and
+‘OM’ for standard math encodings with 128 characters (‘O’ stands for
+‘obsolete’).
This package provides a number of commands, detailed below. Many of
them are encoding-specific, so if you have defined a command that works
@@ -1196,7 +1196,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \DeclareFontEncoding, Next: \DeclareTextAccent, Up: fontenc package
-4.1.1 '\DeclareFontEncoding'
+4.1.1 ‘\DeclareFontEncoding’
----------------------------
Synopsis:
@@ -1204,15 +1204,15 @@
\DeclareFontEncoding{ENCODING}{TEXT-SETTINGS}{MATH-SETTINGS}
Declare the font encoding ENCODING. It also saves the value of
-ENCODING in '\LastDeclaredEncoding' (*note \LastDeclaredEncoding::).
+ENCODING in ‘\LastDeclaredEncoding’ (*note \LastDeclaredEncoding::).
- The file 't1enc.def' contains this line (followed by many others).
+ The file ‘t1enc.def’ contains this line (followed by many others).
\DeclareFontEncoding{T1}{}{}
The TEXT-SETTINGS are the commands that LaTeX will run every time it
-switches from one encoding to another with the '\selectfont' and
-'\fontencoding' commands. The MATH-SETTINGS are the commands that LaTeX
+switches from one encoding to another with the ‘\selectfont’ and
+‘\fontencoding’ commands. The MATH-SETTINGS are the commands that LaTeX
will use whenever the font is accessed as a math alphabet.
LaTeX ignores any space characters inside TEXT-SETTINGS and
@@ -1219,14 +1219,14 @@
MATH-SETTINGS, to prevent unintended spaces in the output.
If you invent an encoding you should pick a two or three letter name
-starting with 'L' for 'local', or 'E' for 'experimental'.
+starting with ‘L’ for ‘local’, or ‘E’ for ‘experimental’.
Note that output encoding files may be read several times by LaTeX so
-using, e.g., '\newcommand' may cause an error. In addition, such files
-should contain '\ProvidesFile' line (*note Class and package
+using, e.g., ‘\newcommand’ may cause an error. In addition, such files
+should contain ‘\ProvidesFile’ line (*note Class and package
commands::).
- Note also that you should use the '\...Default' commands only in a
+ Note also that you should use the ‘\...Default’ commands only in a
package, not in the encoding definition files, since those files should
only contain declarations specific to that encoding.
@@ -1233,7 +1233,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \DeclareTextAccent, Next: \DeclareTextAccentDefault, Prev: \DeclareFontEncoding, Up: fontenc package
-4.1.2 '\DeclareTextAccent'
+4.1.2 ‘\DeclareTextAccent’
--------------------------
Synopsis:
@@ -1243,24 +1243,24 @@
Define an accent, to be put on top of other glyphs, in the encoding
ENCODING at the location SLOT.
- A "slot" is the number identifying a glyph within a font.
+ A “slot” is the number identifying a glyph within a font.
- This line from 't1enc.def' declares that to make a circumflex accent
-as in '\^A', the system will put the accent in slot 2 over the 'A'
+ This line from ‘t1enc.def’ declares that to make a circumflex accent
+as in ‘\^A’, the system will put the accent in slot 2 over the ‘A’
character, which is represented in ASCII as 65. (This holds unless
-there is a relevant 'DeclareTextComposite' or
-'\DeclareTextCompositeCommand' declaration; *note
+there is a relevant ‘DeclareTextComposite’ or
+‘\DeclareTextCompositeCommand’ declaration; *note
\DeclareTextComposite::.)
\DeclareTextAccent{\^}{T1}{2}
- If CMD has already been defined then '\DeclareTextAccent' does not
+ If CMD has already been defined then ‘\DeclareTextAccent’ does not
give an error but it does log the redefinition in the transcript file.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \DeclareTextAccentDefault, Next: \DeclareTextCommand & \ProvideTextCommand, Prev: \DeclareTextAccent, Up: fontenc package
-4.1.3 '\DeclareTextAccentDefault'
+4.1.3 ‘\DeclareTextAccentDefault’
---------------------------------
Synopsis:
@@ -1268,16 +1268,16 @@
\DeclareTextAccentDefault{\CMD}{ENCODING}
If there is an encoding-specific accent command \CMD but there is no
-associated '\DeclareTextAccent' for that encoding then this command will
+associated ‘\DeclareTextAccent’ for that encoding then this command will
pick up the slack, by saying to use it as described for ENCODING.
- For example, to make the encoding 'OT1' be the default encoding for
-the accent '\"', declare this.
+ For example, to make the encoding ‘OT1’ be the default encoding for
+the accent ‘\"’, declare this.
\DeclareTextAccentDefault{\"}{OT1}
-If you issue a '\"' when the current encoding does not have a definition
-for that accent then LaTeX will use the definition from 'OT1'
+If you issue a ‘\"’ when the current encoding does not have a definition
+for that accent then LaTeX will use the definition from ‘OT1’
That is, this command is equivalent to this call (*note
\UseTextSymbol & \UseTextAccent::).
@@ -1285,13 +1285,13 @@
\DeclareTextCommandDefault[1]{\CMD}
{\UseTextAccent{ENCODING}{\CMD}{#1}}
- Note that '\DeclareTextAccentDefault' works for any one-argument
-'fontenc' command, not just the accent command.
+ Note that ‘\DeclareTextAccentDefault’ works for any one-argument
+‘fontenc’ command, not just the accent command.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \DeclareTextCommand & \ProvideTextCommand, Next: \DeclareTextCommandDefault & \ProvideTextCommandDefault, Prev: \DeclareTextAccentDefault, Up: fontenc package
-4.1.4 '\DeclareTextCommand' & '\ProvideTextCommand'
+4.1.4 ‘\DeclareTextCommand’ & ‘\ProvideTextCommand’
---------------------------------------------------
Synopsis, one of:
@@ -1306,13 +1306,13 @@
\ProvideTextCommand{\CMD}{ENCODING}[NARGS]{DEFN}
\ProvideTextCommand{\CMD}{ENCODING}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{DEFN}
- Define the command '\CMD', which will be specific to one encoding.
-The command name CMD must be preceded by a backslash, '\'. These
+ Define the command ‘\CMD’, which will be specific to one encoding.
+The command name CMD must be preceded by a backslash, ‘\’. These
commands can only appear in the preamble. Redefining \CMD does not
cause an error. The defined command will be robust even if the code in
DEFN is fragile (*note \protect::).
- For example, the file 't1enc.def' contains this line.
+ For example, the file ‘t1enc.def’ contains this line.
\DeclareTextCommand{\textperthousand}{T1}{\%\char 24 }
@@ -1322,28 +1322,28 @@
...
Legal limit is \( 0.8 \)\textperthousand.
-If you change the font encoding to 'OT1' then you get an error like
-'LaTeX Error: Command \textperthousand unavailable in encoding OT1'.
+If you change the font encoding to ‘OT1’ then you get an error like
+‘LaTeX Error: Command \textperthousand unavailable in encoding OT1’.
- The '\ProvideTextCommand' variant does the same, except that it does
-nothing if '\CMD' is already defined. The '\DeclareTextSymbol' command
+ The ‘\ProvideTextCommand’ variant does the same, except that it does
+nothing if ‘\CMD’ is already defined. The ‘\DeclareTextSymbol’ command
is faster than this one for simple slot-to-glyph association (*note
\DeclareTextSymbol::)
The optional NARGS and OPTARGDEFAULT arguments play the same role
-here as in '\newcommand' (*note \newcommand & \renewcommand::).
+here as in ‘\newcommand’ (*note \newcommand & \renewcommand::).
Briefly, NARGS is an integer from 0 to 9 specifying the number of
-arguments that the defined command '\CMD' takes. This number includes
+arguments that the defined command ‘\CMD’ takes. This number includes
any optional argument. Omitting this argument is the same as specifying
-0, meaning that '\CMD' will have no arguments. And, if OPTARGDEFAULT is
-present then the first argument of '\CMD' is optional, with default
+0, meaning that ‘\CMD’ will have no arguments. And, if OPTARGDEFAULT is
+present then the first argument of ‘\CMD’ is optional, with default
value OPTARGDEFAULT (which may be the empty string). If OPTARGDEFAULT
-is not present then '\CMD' does not take an optional argument.
+is not present then ‘\CMD’ does not take an optional argument.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \DeclareTextCommandDefault & \ProvideTextCommandDefault, Next: \DeclareTextComposite, Prev: \DeclareTextCommand & \ProvideTextCommand, Up: fontenc package
-4.1.5 '\DeclareTextCommandDefault' & '\ProvideTextCommandDefault '
+4.1.5 ‘\DeclareTextCommandDefault’ & ‘\ProvideTextCommandDefault ’
------------------------------------------------------------------
Synopsis:
@@ -1354,23 +1354,23 @@
\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\CMD}{DEFN}
- Give a default definition for '\CMD', for when that command is not
+ Give a default definition for ‘\CMD’, for when that command is not
defined in the encoding currently in force. This default should only
use encodings known to be available.
- This makes '\copyright' available.
+ This makes ‘\copyright’ available.
\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\copyright}{\textcircled{c}}
It uses only an encoding (OMS) that is always available.
- The '\DeclareTextCommandDefault' should not occur in the encoding
+ The ‘\DeclareTextCommandDefault’ should not occur in the encoding
definition files since those files should declare only commands for use
when you select that encoding. It should instead be in a package.
As with the related non-default commands, the
-'\ProvideTextCommandDefault' has exactly the same behavior as
-'\DeclareTextCommandDefault' except that it does nothing if '\CMD' is
+‘\ProvideTextCommandDefault’ has exactly the same behavior as
+‘\DeclareTextCommandDefault’ except that it does nothing if ‘\CMD’ is
already defined (*note \DeclareTextCommand & \ProvideTextCommand::).
So, packages can use it to provide fallbacks that other packages can
improve upon.
@@ -1378,7 +1378,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \DeclareTextComposite, Next: \DeclareTextCompositeCommand, Prev: \DeclareTextCommandDefault & \ProvideTextCommandDefault, Up: fontenc package
-4.1.6 '\DeclareTextComposite'
+4.1.6 ‘\DeclareTextComposite’
-----------------------------
Synopsis:
@@ -1388,8 +1388,8 @@
Access an accented glyph directly, that is, without having to put an
accent over a separate character.
- This line from 't1enc.def' means that '\^o' will cause LaTeX to
-typeset lowercase 'o' by taking the character directly from slot 224 in
+ This line from ‘t1enc.def’ means that ‘\^o’ will cause LaTeX to
+typeset lowercase ‘o’ by taking the character directly from slot 224 in
the font.
\DeclareTextComposite{\^}{T1}{o}{244}
@@ -1398,14 +1398,14 @@
SIMPLE_OBJECT should be a single character or a single command. The
SLOT argument is usually a positive integer represented in decimal
(although octal or hexadecimal are possible). Normally \CMD has already
-been declared for this encoding, either with '\DeclareTextAccent' or
-with a one-argument '\DeclareTextCommand'. In 't1enc.def', the above
-line follows the '\DeclareTextAccent{\^}{T1}{2}' command.
+been declared for this encoding, either with ‘\DeclareTextAccent’ or
+with a one-argument ‘\DeclareTextCommand’. In ‘t1enc.def’, the above
+line follows the ‘\DeclareTextAccent{\^}{T1}{2}’ command.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \DeclareTextCompositeCommand, Next: \DeclareTextSymbol, Prev: \DeclareTextComposite, Up: fontenc package
-4.1.7 '\DeclareTextCompositeCommand'
+4.1.7 ‘\DeclareTextCompositeCommand’
------------------------------------
Synopsis:
@@ -1412,21 +1412,21 @@
\DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\CMD}{ENCODING}{ARG}{CODE}
- A more general version of '\DeclareTextComposite' that runs arbitrary
-code with '\CMD'.
+ A more general version of ‘\DeclareTextComposite’ that runs arbitrary
+code with ‘\CMD’.
- This allows accents on 'i' to act like accents on dotless i, '\i'.
+ This allows accents on ‘i’ to act like accents on dotless i, ‘\i’.
\DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\'}{OT1}{i}{\'\i}
*Note fontenc package::, for a list of common encodings. Normally
-'\CMD' will have already been declared with '\DeclareTextAccent' or as a
-one argument '\DeclareTextCommand'.
+‘\CMD’ will have already been declared with ‘\DeclareTextAccent’ or as a
+one argument ‘\DeclareTextCommand’.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \DeclareTextSymbol, Next: \DeclareTextSymbolDefault, Prev: \DeclareTextCompositeCommand, Up: fontenc package
-4.1.8 '\DeclareTextSymbol'
+4.1.8 ‘\DeclareTextSymbol’
--------------------------
Synopsis:
@@ -1436,27 +1436,27 @@
Define a symbol in the encoding ENCODING at the location SLOT.
Symbols defined in this way are for use in text, not mathematics.
- For example, this line from 't1enc.def' declares the number of the
+ For example, this line from ‘t1enc.def’ declares the number of the
glyph to use for «, the left guillemet.
\DeclareTextSymbol{\guillemotleft}{T1}{19}
-The command '\DeclareTextCommand{\guillemotleft}{T1}{\char 19}' has the
+The command ‘\DeclareTextCommand{\guillemotleft}{T1}{\char 19}’ has the
same effect but is slower (*note \DeclareTextCommand &
\ProvideTextCommand::).
*Note fontenc package::, for a list of common encodings. The SLOT
-can be specified in decimal, or octal (as in ''023'), or hexadecimal (as
-in '"13'), although decimal has the advantage that single quote or
+can be specified in decimal, or octal (as in ‘'023’), or hexadecimal (as
+in ‘"13’), although decimal has the advantage that single quote or
double quote could be redefined by another package.
- If '\CMD' has already been defined then '\DeclareTextSymbol' does not
+ If ‘\CMD’ has already been defined then ‘\DeclareTextSymbol’ does not
give an error but it does log the redefinition in the transcript file.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \DeclareTextSymbolDefault, Next: \LastDeclaredEncoding, Prev: \DeclareTextSymbol, Up: fontenc package
-4.1.9 '\DeclareTextSymbolDefault'
+4.1.9 ‘\DeclareTextSymbolDefault’
---------------------------------
Synopsis:
@@ -1463,13 +1463,13 @@
\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\CMD}{ENCODING}
- If there is an encoding-specific symbol command '\CMD' but there is
-no associated '\DeclareTextSymbol' for that encoding, then this command
+ If there is an encoding-specific symbol command ‘\CMD’ but there is
+no associated ‘\DeclareTextSymbol’ for that encoding, then this command
will pick up the slack, by saying to get the symbol as described for
ENCODING.
For example, to declare that if the current encoding has no meaning
-for '\textdollar' then use the one from 'OT1', declare this.
+for ‘\textdollar’ then use the one from ‘OT1’, declare this.
\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textdollar}{OT1}
@@ -1479,13 +1479,13 @@
\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\CMD}
{\UseTextSymbol{ENCODING}{\CMD}}
- Note that '\DeclareTextSymbolDefault' can be used to define a default
-for any zero-argument 'fontenc' command.
+ Note that ‘\DeclareTextSymbolDefault’ can be used to define a default
+for any zero-argument ‘fontenc’ command.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \LastDeclaredEncoding, Next: \UseTextSymbol & \UseTextAccent, Prev: \DeclareTextSymbolDefault, Up: fontenc package
-4.1.10 '\LastDeclaredEncoding'
+4.1.10 ‘\LastDeclaredEncoding’
------------------------------
Synopsis:
@@ -1493,10 +1493,10 @@
\LastDeclaredEncoding
Get the name of the most recently declared encoding. The
-'\DeclareFontEncoding' command stores the name so that it can be
+‘\DeclareFontEncoding’ command stores the name so that it can be
retrieved with this command (*note \DeclareFontEncoding::).
- This relies on '\LastDeclaredEncoding' rather than give the name of
+ This relies on ‘\LastDeclaredEncoding’ rather than give the name of
the encoding explicitly.
\DeclareFontEncoding{JH1}{}{}
@@ -1505,7 +1505,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \UseTextSymbol & \UseTextAccent, Prev: \LastDeclaredEncoding, Up: fontenc package
-4.1.11 '\UseTextSymbol' & '\UseTextAccent'
+4.1.11 ‘\UseTextSymbol’ & ‘\UseTextAccent’
------------------------------------------
Synopsis:
@@ -1518,7 +1518,7 @@
Use a symbol or accent not from the current encoding.
- In general, to use a 'fontenc' command in an encoding where it is not
+ In general, to use a ‘fontenc’ command in an encoding where it is not
defined, and if the command has no arguments, then you can use it like
this:
@@ -1525,11 +1525,11 @@
\UseTextSymbol{OT1}{\ss}
which is equivalent to this (note the outer braces form a group, so
-LaTeX reverts back to the prior encoding after the '\ss'):
+LaTeX reverts back to the prior encoding after the ‘\ss’):
{\fontencoding{OT1}\selectfont\ss}
- Similarly, to use a 'fontenc' command in an encoding where it is not
+ Similarly, to use a ‘fontenc’ command in an encoding where it is not
defined, and if the command has one argument, you can use it like this:
\UseTextAccent{OT1}{\'}{a}
@@ -1540,8 +1540,8 @@
{fontencoding{OT1}\selectfont\'{\fontencoding{ENC_IN_USE}\selectfont a}}
Here, ENC_IN_USE is the encoding in force before this sequence of
-commands, so that 'a' is typeset using the current encoding and only the
-accent is taken from 'OT1'.
+commands, so that ‘a’ is typeset using the current encoding and only the
+accent is taken from ‘OT1’.
File: latex2e.info, Node: Font styles, Next: Font sizes, Prev: fontenc package, Up: Fonts
@@ -1551,67 +1551,67 @@
The following type style commands are supported by LaTeX.
- In the table below the listed commands, the '\text...' commands, are
-used with an argument as in '\textit{TEXT}'. This is the preferred
+ In the table below the listed commands, the ‘\text...’ commands, are
+used with an argument as in ‘\textit{TEXT}’. This is the preferred
form. But shown after it in parenthesis is the corresponding
-"declaration form", which is often useful. This form takes no
-arguments, as in '{\itshape TEXT}'. The scope of the declaration form
+“declaration form”, which is often useful. This form takes no
+arguments, as in ‘{\itshape TEXT}’. The scope of the declaration form
lasts until the next type style command or the end of the current group.
In addition, each has an environment form such as
-'\begin{itshape}...\end{itshape}', which we'll describe further at the
+‘\begin{itshape}...\end{itshape}’, which we’ll describe further at the
end of the section.
These commands, in any of the three forms, are cumulative; for
instance you can get bold sans serif by saying either of
-'\sffamily\bfseries' or '\bfseries\sffamily'.
+‘\sffamily\bfseries’ or ‘\bfseries\sffamily’.
One advantage of these commands is that they automatically insert
italic corrections if needed (*note \/::). Specifically, they insert
the italic correction unless the following character is in the list
-'\nocorrlist', which by default consists of period and comma. To
-suppress the automatic insertion of italic correction, use '\nocorr' at
-the start or end of the command argument, such as '\textit{\nocorr
-text}' or '\textsc{text \nocorr}'.
+‘\nocorrlist’, which by default consists of period and comma. To
+suppress the automatic insertion of italic correction, use ‘\nocorr’ at
+the start or end of the command argument, such as ‘\textit{\nocorr
+text}’ or ‘\textsc{text \nocorr}’.
-'\textrm (\rmfamily)'
+‘\textrm (\rmfamily)’
Roman.
-'\textit (\itshape)'
+‘\textit (\itshape)’
Italics.
-'\textmd (\mdseries)'
+‘\textmd (\mdseries)’
Medium weight (default).
-'\textbf (\bfseries)'
+‘\textbf (\bfseries)’
Boldface.
-'\textup (\upshape)'
+‘\textup (\upshape)’
Upright (default).
-'\textsl (\slshape)'
+‘\textsl (\slshape)’
Slanted.
-'\textsf (\sffamily)'
+‘\textsf (\sffamily)’
Sans serif.
-'\textsc (\scshape)'
+‘\textsc (\scshape)’
Small caps.
-'\texttt (\ttfamily)'
+‘\texttt (\ttfamily)’
Typewriter.
-'\textnormal (\normalfont)'
+‘\textnormal (\normalfont)’
Main document font.
- Although it also changes fonts, the '\emph{TEXT}' command is
-semantic, for text to be emphasized, and should not be used as a
-substitute for '\textit'. For example, '\emph{START TEXT \emph{MIDDLE
-TEXT} END TEXT}' will result in the START TEXT and END TEXT in italics,
+ Although it also changes fonts, the ‘\emph{TEXT}’ command is
+semantic, for TEXT to be emphasized, and should not be used as a
+substitute for ‘\textit’. For example, ‘\emph{START TEXT \emph{MIDDLE
+TEXT} END TEXT}’ will result in the START TEXT and END TEXT in italics,
but MIDDLE TEXT will be in roman.
LaTeX also provides the following commands, which unconditionally
switch to the given style, that is, are _not_ cumulative. They are used
-as declarations: '{\CMD...}' instead of '\CMD{...}'.
+as declarations: ‘{\CMD...}’ instead of ‘\CMD{...}’.
(The unconditional commands below are an older version of font
switching. The earlier commands are an improvement in most
@@ -1618,69 +1618,69 @@
circumstances. But sometimes an unconditional font switch is what is
needed.)
-'\bf'
+‘\bf’
Switch to bold face.
-'\cal'
+‘\cal’
Switch to calligraphic letters for math.
-'\it'
+‘\it’
Italics.
-'\rm'
+‘\rm’
Roman.
-'\sc'
+‘\sc’
Small caps.
-'\sf'
+‘\sf’
Sans serif.
-'\sl'
+‘\sl’
Slanted (oblique).
-'\tt'
+‘\tt’
Typewriter (monospace, fixed-width).
- The '\em' command is the unconditional version of '\emph'.
+ The ‘\em’ command is the unconditional version of ‘\emph’.
The following commands are for use in math mode. They are not
-cumulative, so '\mathbf{\mathit{SYMBOL}}' does not create a boldface and
+cumulative, so ‘\mathbf{\mathit{SYMBOL}}’ does not create a boldface and
italic SYMBOL; instead, it will just be in italics. This is because
typically math symbols need consistent typographic treatment, regardless
of the surrounding environment.
-'\mathrm'
+‘\mathrm’
Roman, for use in math mode.
-'\mathbf'
+‘\mathbf’
Boldface, for use in math mode.
-'\mathsf'
+‘\mathsf’
Sans serif, for use in math mode.
-'\mathtt'
+‘\mathtt’
Typewriter, for use in math mode.
-'\mathit'
-'(\mit)'
+‘\mathit’
+‘(\mit)’
Italics, for use in math mode.
-'\mathnormal'
+‘\mathnormal’
For use in math mode, e.g., inside another type style declaration.
-'\mathcal'
+‘\mathcal’
Calligraphic letters, for use in math mode.
- In addition, the command '\mathversion{bold}' can be used for
+ In addition, the command ‘\mathversion{bold}’ can be used for
switching to bold letters and symbols in formulas.
-'\mathversion{normal}' restores the default.
+‘\mathversion{normal}’ restores the default.
- Finally, the command '\oldstylenums{NUMERALS}' will typeset so-called
-"old-style" numerals, which have differing heights and depths (and
-sometimes widths) from the standard "lining" numerals, which all have
-the same height as uppercase letters. LaTeX's default fonts support
-this, and will respect '\textbf' (but not other styles; there are no
+ Finally, the command ‘\oldstylenums{NUMERALS}’ will typeset so-called
+“old-style” numerals, which have differing heights and depths (and
+sometimes widths) from the standard “lining” numerals, which all have
+the same height as uppercase letters. LaTeX’s default fonts support
+this, and will respect ‘\textbf’ (but not other styles; there are no
italic old-style numerals in Computer Modern). Many other fonts have
old-style numerals also; sometimes package options are provided to make
them the default. FAQ entry: <https://www.texfaq.org/FAQ-osf>.
@@ -1693,21 +1693,21 @@
The following standard type size commands are supported by LaTeX. The
table shows the command name and the corresponding actual font size used
-(in points) with the '10pt', '11pt', and '12pt' document size options,
+(in points) with the ‘10pt’, ‘11pt’, and ‘12pt’ document size options,
respectively (*note Document class options::).
-Command '10pt' '11pt' '12pt'
+Command ‘10pt’ ‘11pt’ ‘12pt’
--------------------------------------------------------
-'\tiny' 5 6 6
-'\scriptsize' 7 8 8
-'\footnotesize' 8 9 10
-'\small' 9 10 10.95
-'\normalsize' (default) 10 10.95 12
-'\large' 12 12 14.4
-'\Large' 14.4 14.4 17.28
-'\LARGE' 17.28 17.28 20.74
-'\huge' 20.74 20.74 24.88
-'\Huge' 24.88 24.88 24.88
+‘\tiny’ 5 6 6
+‘\scriptsize’ 7 8 8
+‘\footnotesize’ 8 9 10
+‘\small’ 9 10 10.95
+‘\normalsize’ (default) 10 10.95 12
+‘\large’ 12 12 14.4
+‘\Large’ 14.4 14.4 17.28
+‘\LARGE’ 17.28 17.28 20.74
+‘\huge’ 20.74 20.74 24.88
+‘\Huge’ 24.88 24.88 24.88
The commands are listed here in declaration (not environment) form,
since that is how they are typically used. For example.
@@ -1716,30 +1716,30 @@
The Tao that can be named is not the eternal Tao.
\end{quotation}
-Here, the scope of the '\small' lasts until the end of the 'quotation'
+Here, the scope of the ‘\small’ lasts until the end of the ‘quotation’
environment. It would also end at the next type style command or the
end of the current group, so you could enclose it in curly braces
-'{\small This text is typeset in the small font.}'.
+‘{\small This text is typeset in the small font.}’.
- Trying to use these commands in math, as with '$\small mv^2/2$',
-results in 'LaTeX Font Warning: Command \small invalid in math mode',
-and the font size doesn't change. To work with a too-large formula,
-often the best option is to use the 'displaymath' environment (*note
-Math formulas::), or one of the environments from the 'amsmath' package.
+ Trying to use these commands in math, as with ‘$\small mv^2/2$’,
+results in ‘LaTeX Font Warning: Command \small invalid in math mode’,
+and the font size doesn’t change. To work with a too-large formula,
+often the best option is to use the ‘displaymath’ environment (*note
+Math formulas::), or one of the environments from the ‘amsmath’ package.
For inline mathematics, such as in a table of formulas, an alternative
-is something like '{\small $mv^2/2$}'. (Sometimes '\scriptsize' and
-'\scriptstyle' are confused. Both change the font size, but the latter
+is something like ‘{\small $mv^2/2$}’. (Sometimes ‘\scriptsize’ and
+‘\scriptstyle’ are confused. Both change the font size, but the latter
also changes a number of other aspects of how mathematics is typeset.
*Note Math styles::.)
- An "environment form" of each of these commands is also defined; for
-instance, '\begin{tiny}...\end{tiny}'. However, in practice this form
+ An “environment form” of each of these commands is also defined; for
+instance, ‘\begin{tiny}...\end{tiny}’. However, in practice this form
can easily lead to unwanted spaces at the beginning and/or end of the
-environment without careful consideration, so it's generally less
+environment without careful consideration, so it’s generally less
error-prone to stick to the declaration form.
- (Aside: Technically, due to the way LaTeX defines '\begin' and
-'\end', nearly every command that does not take an argument technically
+ (Aside: Technically, due to the way LaTeX defines ‘\begin’ and
+‘\end’, nearly every command that does not take an argument technically
has an environment form. But in almost all cases, it would only cause
confusion to use it. The reason for mentioning the environment form of
the font size declarations specifically is that this particular use is
@@ -1755,125 +1755,125 @@
packages. The commands listed here are only a subset of the available
ones.
-'\fontencoding{ENCODING}'
+‘\fontencoding{ENCODING}’
Select the font encoding, the encoding of the output font. There
- are a large number of valid encodings. The most common are 'OT1',
- Knuth's original encoding for Computer Modern (the default), and
- 'T1', also known as the Cork encoding, which has support for the
+ are a large number of valid encodings. The most common are ‘OT1’,
+ Knuth’s original encoding for Computer Modern (the default), and
+ ‘T1’, also known as the Cork encoding, which has support for the
accented characters used by the most widespread European languages
(German, French, Italian, Polish and others), which allows TeX to
hyphenate words containing accented letters. For more, see
<https://ctan.org/pkg/encguide>.
-'\fontfamily{FAMILY}'
+‘\fontfamily{FAMILY}’
Select the font family. The web page
<https://tug.org/FontCatalogue/> provides one way to browse through
many of the fonts easily used with LaTeX. Here are examples of
some common families.
- 'pag' Avant Garde
- 'fvs' Bitstream Vera Sans
- 'pbk' Bookman
- 'bch' Charter
- 'ccr' Computer Concrete
- 'cmr' Computer Modern
- 'cmss' Computer Modern Sans Serif
- 'cmtt' Computer Modern Typewriter
- 'pcr' Courier
- 'phv' Helvetica
- 'fi4' Inconsolata
- 'lmr' Latin Modern
- 'lmss' Latin Modern Sans
- 'lmtt' Latin Modern Typewriter
- 'pnc' New Century Schoolbook
- 'ppl' Palatino
- 'ptm' Times
- 'uncl' Uncial
- 'put' Utopia
- 'pzc' Zapf Chancery
+ ‘pag’ Avant Garde
+ ‘fvs’ Bitstream Vera Sans
+ ‘pbk’ Bookman
+ ‘bch’ Charter
+ ‘ccr’ Computer Concrete
+ ‘cmr’ Computer Modern
+ ‘cmss’ Computer Modern Sans Serif
+ ‘cmtt’ Computer Modern Typewriter
+ ‘pcr’ Courier
+ ‘phv’ Helvetica
+ ‘fi4’ Inconsolata
+ ‘lmr’ Latin Modern
+ ‘lmss’ Latin Modern Sans
+ ‘lmtt’ Latin Modern Typewriter
+ ‘pnc’ New Century Schoolbook
+ ‘ppl’ Palatino
+ ‘ptm’ Times
+ ‘uncl’ Uncial
+ ‘put’ Utopia
+ ‘pzc’ Zapf Chancery
-'\fontseries{SERIES}'
- Select the font series. A "series" combines a "weight" and a
- "width". Typically, a font supports only a few of the possible
+‘\fontseries{SERIES}’
+ Select the font series. A “series” combines a “weight” and a
+ “width”. Typically, a font supports only a few of the possible
combinations. Some common combined series values include:
- 'm' Medium (normal)
- 'b' Bold
- 'c' Condensed
- 'bc' Bold condensed
- 'bx' Bold extended
+ ‘m’ Medium (normal)
+ ‘b’ Bold
+ ‘c’ Condensed
+ ‘bc’ Bold condensed
+ ‘bx’ Bold extended
The possible values for weight, individually, are:
- 'ul' Ultra light
- 'el' Extra light
- 'l' Light
- 'sl' Semi light
- 'm' Medium (normal)
- 'sb' Semi bold
- 'b' Bold
- 'eb' Extra bold
- 'ub' Ultra bold
+ ‘ul’ Ultra light
+ ‘el’ Extra light
+ ‘l’ Light
+ ‘sl’ Semi light
+ ‘m’ Medium (normal)
+ ‘sb’ Semi bold
+ ‘b’ Bold
+ ‘eb’ Extra bold
+ ‘ub’ Ultra bold
The possible values for width, individually, are (the meaning and
relationship of these terms varies with individual typefaces):
- 'uc' Ultra condensed
- 'ec' Extra condensed
- 'c' Condensed
- 'sc' Semi condensed
- 'm' Medium
- 'sx' Semi expanded
- 'x' Expanded
- 'ex' Extra expanded
- 'ux' Ultra expanded
+ ‘uc’ Ultra condensed
+ ‘ec’ Extra condensed
+ ‘c’ Condensed
+ ‘sc’ Semi condensed
+ ‘m’ Medium
+ ‘sx’ Semi expanded
+ ‘x’ Expanded
+ ‘ex’ Extra expanded
+ ‘ux’ Ultra expanded
When forming the SERIES string from the weight and width, drop the
- 'm' that stands for medium weight or medium width, unless both
- weight and width are 'm', in which case use just one (''m'').
+ ‘m’ that stands for medium weight or medium width, unless both
+ weight and width are ‘m’, in which case use just one (‘‘m’’).
-'\fontshape{SHAPE}'
+‘\fontshape{SHAPE}’
Select font shape. Valid shapes are:
- 'n' Upright (normal)
- 'it' Italic
- 'sl' Slanted (oblique)
- 'sc' Small caps
- 'ui' Upright italics
- 'ol' Outline
+ ‘n’ Upright (normal)
+ ‘it’ Italic
+ ‘sl’ Slanted (oblique)
+ ‘sc’ Small caps
+ ‘ui’ Upright italics
+ ‘ol’ Outline
The two last shapes are not available for most font families, and
small caps are often missing as well.
-'\fontsize{SIZE}{SKIP}'
+‘\fontsize{SIZE}{SKIP}’
Set the font size and the line spacing. The unit of both
- parameters defaults to points ('pt'). The line spacing is the
+ parameters defaults to points (‘pt’). The line spacing is the
nominal vertical space between lines, baseline to baseline. It is
- stored in the parameter '\baselineskip'. The default
- '\baselineskip' for the Computer Modern typeface is 1.2 times the
- '\fontsize'. Changing '\baselineskip' directly is inadvisable
+ stored in the parameter ‘\baselineskip’. The default
+ ‘\baselineskip’ for the Computer Modern typeface is 1.2 times the
+ ‘\fontsize’. Changing ‘\baselineskip’ directly is inadvisable
since its value is reset every time a size change happens; instead
- use '\baselinestretch'. (*note \baselineskip &
+ use ‘\baselinestretch’. (*note \baselineskip &
\baselinestretch::).
-'\linespread{FACTOR}'
- Equivalent to '\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{FACTOR}', and
- therefore must be followed by '\selectfont' to have any effect.
+‘\linespread{FACTOR}’
+ Equivalent to ‘\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{FACTOR}’, and
+ therefore must be followed by ‘\selectfont’ to have any effect.
Best specified in the preamble. *Note \baselineskip &
- \baselinestretch::, for using 'setspace' package instead.
+ \baselinestretch::, for using ‘setspace’ package instead.
-'\selectfont'
+‘\selectfont’
The effects of the font commands described above do not happen
- until '\selectfont' is called, as in
- '\fontfamily{FAMILYNAME}\selectfont'. It is often useful to put
+ until ‘\selectfont’ is called, as in
+ ‘\fontfamily{FAMILYNAME}\selectfont’. It is often useful to put
this in a macro:
- '\newcommand*{\myfont}{\fontfamily{FAMILYNAME}\selectfont}'
+ ‘\newcommand*{\myfont}{\fontfamily{FAMILYNAME}\selectfont}’
(*note \newcommand & \renewcommand::).
-'\usefont{ENC}{FAMILY}{SERIES}{SHAPE}'
- The same as invoking '\fontencoding', '\fontfamily', '\fontseries'
- and '\fontshape' with the given parameters, followed by
- '\selectfont'. For example:
+‘\usefont{ENC}{FAMILY}{SERIES}{SHAPE}’
+ The same as invoking ‘\fontencoding’, ‘\fontfamily’, ‘\fontseries’
+ and ‘\fontshape’ with the given parameters, followed by
+ ‘\selectfont’. For example:
\usefont{ot1}{cmr}{m}{n}
@@ -1891,7 +1891,7 @@
* \twocolumn:: Use two-column layout.
* \flushbottom:: Make all text pages the same height.
* \raggedbottom:: Allow text pages of differing height.
-* Page layout parameters:: '\headheight' '\footskip'.
+* Page layout parameters:: ‘\headheight’ ‘\footskip’.
* \baselineskip & \baselinestretch:: Space between lines.
* Floats:: Figures, tables, etc.
@@ -1898,7 +1898,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \onecolumn, Next: \twocolumn, Up: Layout
-5.1 '\onecolumn'
+5.1 ‘\onecolumn’
================
Synopsis:
@@ -1906,7 +1906,7 @@
\onecolumn
Start a new page and produce single-column output. If the document
-is given the class option 'onecolumn' then this is the default behavior
+is given the class option ‘onecolumn’ then this is the default behavior
(*note Document class options::). This command is fragile (*note
\protect::).
@@ -1913,7 +1913,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \twocolumn, Next: \flushbottom, Prev: \onecolumn, Up: Layout
-5.2 '\twocolumn'
+5.2 ‘\twocolumn’
================
Synopses:
@@ -1922,7 +1922,7 @@
\twocolumn[PRELIM ONE COLUMN TEXT]
Start a new page and produce two-column output. If the document is
-given the class option 'twocolumn' then this is the default (*note
+given the class option ‘twocolumn’ then this is the default (*note
Document class options::). This command is fragile (*note \protect::).
If the optional PRELIM ONE COLUMN TEXT argument is present, it is
@@ -1930,76 +1930,76 @@
These parameters control typesetting in two-column output:
-'\columnsep'
+‘\columnsep’
The distance between columns. The default is 35pt. Change it with
- a command such as '\setlength{\columnsep}{40pt}'. You must change
+ a command such as ‘\setlength{\columnsep}{40pt}’. You must change
it before the two column mode starts; in the preamble is a good
place.
-'\columnseprule'
+‘\columnseprule’
The width of the rule between columns. The default is 0pt, meaning
that there is no rule. Otherwise, the rule appears halfway between
the two columns. Change it with a command such as
- '\setlength{\columnseprule}{0.4pt}', before the two-column mode
+ ‘\setlength{\columnseprule}{0.4pt}’, before the two-column mode
starts.
-'\columnwidth'
+‘\columnwidth’
The width of a single column. In one-column mode this is equal to
- '\textwidth'. In two-column mode by default LaTeX sets the width
- of each of the two columns, '\columnwidth', to be half of
- '\textwidth' minus '\columnsep'.
+ ‘\textwidth’. In two-column mode by default LaTeX sets the width
+ of each of the two columns, ‘\columnwidth’, to be half of
+ ‘\textwidth’ minus ‘\columnsep’.
- In a two-column document, the starred environments 'table*' and
-'figure*' are two columns wide, whereas the unstarred environments
-'table' and 'figure' take up only one column (*note figure:: and *note
+ In a two-column document, the starred environments ‘table*’ and
+‘figure*’ are two columns wide, whereas the unstarred environments
+‘table’ and ‘figure’ take up only one column (*note figure:: and *note
table::). LaTeX places starred floats at the top of a page. The
following parameters control float behavior of two-column output.
-'\dbltopfraction'
+‘\dbltopfraction’
The maximum fraction at the top of a two-column page that may be
occupied by two-column wide floats. The default is 0.7, meaning
- that the height of a 'table*' or 'figure*' environment must not
- exceed '0.7\textheight'. If the height of your starred float
+ that the height of a ‘table*’ or ‘figure*’ environment must not
+ exceed ‘0.7\textheight’. If the height of your starred float
environment exceeds this then you can take one of the following
actions to prevent it from floating all the way to the back of the
document:
- * Use the '[tp]' location specifier to tell LaTeX to try to put
+ • Use the ‘[tp]’ location specifier to tell LaTeX to try to put
the bulky float on a page by itself, as well as at the top of
a page.
- * Use the '[t!]' location specifier to override the effect of
- '\dbltopfraction' for this particular float.
+ • Use the ‘[t!]’ location specifier to override the effect of
+ ‘\dbltopfraction’ for this particular float.
- * Increase the value of '\dbltopfraction' to a suitably large
+ • Increase the value of ‘\dbltopfraction’ to a suitably large
number, to avoid going to float pages so soon.
- You can redefine it, as with '\renewcommand{\dbltopfraction}{0.9}'.
+ You can redefine it, as with ‘\renewcommand{\dbltopfraction}{0.9}’.
-'\dblfloatpagefraction'
+‘\dblfloatpagefraction’
For a float page of two-column wide floats, this is the minimum
fraction that must be occupied by floats, limiting the amount of
- blank space. LaTeX's default is '0.5'. Change it with
- '\renewcommand'.
+ blank space. LaTeX’s default is ‘0.5’. Change it with
+ ‘\renewcommand’.
-'\dblfloatsep'
+‘\dblfloatsep’
On a float page of two-column wide floats, this length is the
distance between floats, at both the top and bottom of the page.
- The default is '12pt plus2pt minus2pt' for a document set at '10pt'
- or '11pt', and '14pt plus2pt minus4pt' for a document set at
- '12pt'.
+ The default is ‘12pt plus2pt minus2pt’ for a document set at ‘10pt’
+ or ‘11pt’, and ‘14pt plus2pt minus4pt’ for a document set at
+ ‘12pt’.
-'\dbltextfloatsep'
+‘\dbltextfloatsep’
This length is the distance between a multi-column float at the top
- or bottom of a page and the main text. The default is '20pt
- plus2pt minus4pt'.
+ or bottom of a page and the main text. The default is ‘20pt
+ plus2pt minus4pt’.
-'\dbltopnumber'
+‘\dbltopnumber’
On a float page of two-column wide floats, this counter gives the
maximum number of floats allowed at the top of the page. The LaTeX
- default is '2'.
+ default is ‘2’.
- This example uses '\twocolumn''s optional argument of to create a
+ This example uses ‘\twocolumn’’s optional argument of to create a
title that spans the two-column article:
\documentclass[twocolumn]{article}
@@ -2023,39 +2023,40 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \flushbottom, Next: \raggedbottom, Prev: \twocolumn, Up: Layout
-5.3 '\flushbottom'
+5.3 ‘\flushbottom’
==================
-Make all pages in the documents after this declaration have the same
+Make all pages in the document after this declaration have the same
height, by stretching the vertical space where necessary to fill out the
page. This is most often used when making two-sided documents since the
differences in facing pages can be glaring.
If TeX cannot satisfactorily stretch the vertical space in a page
-then you get a message like 'Underfull \vbox (badness 10000) has
-occurred while \output is active'. If you get that, one option is to
-change to '\raggedbottom' (*note \raggedbottom::). Alternatively, you
-can adjust the 'textheight' to make compatible pages, or you can add
+then you get a message like ‘Underfull \vbox (badness 10000) has
+occurred while \output is active’. If you get that, one option is to
+change to ‘\raggedbottom’ (*note \raggedbottom::). Alternatively, you
+can adjust the ‘textheight’ to make compatible pages, or you can add
some vertical stretch glue between lines or between paragraphs, as in
-'\setlength{\parskip}{0ex plus0.1ex}'. Your last option is to, in a
+‘\setlength{\parskip}{0ex plus0.1ex}’. Your last option is to, in a
final editing stage, adjust the height of individual pages (*note
\enlargethispage::).
- The '\flushbottom' state is the default only if you select the
-'twoside' document class option (*note Document class options::).
+ The ‘\flushbottom’ state is the default only if you select the
+‘twocolumn’ document class option (*note Document class options::), and
+for indexes made using ‘makeidx’.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \raggedbottom, Next: Page layout parameters, Prev: \flushbottom, Up: Layout
-5.4 '\raggedbottom'
+5.4 ‘\raggedbottom’
===================
Make all later pages the natural height of the material on that page; no
rubber vertical lengths will be stretched. Thus, in a two-sided
document the facing pages may be different heights. This command can go
-at any point in the document body. See *note \flushbottom::.
+at any point in the document body. *Note \flushbottom::.
- This is the default unless you select the 'twoside' document class
+ This is the default unless you select the ‘twocolumn’ document class
option (*note Document class options::).
@@ -2064,171 +2065,171 @@
5.5 Page layout parameters
==========================
-'\columnsep'
-'\columnseprule'
-'\columnwidth'
+‘\columnsep’
+‘\columnseprule’
+‘\columnwidth’
The distance between the two columns, the width of a rule between
the columns, and the width of the columns, when the document class
- option 'twocolumn' is in effect (*note Document class options::).
+ option ‘twocolumn’ is in effect (*note Document class options::).
*Note \twocolumn::.
-'\headheight'
+‘\headheight’
Height of the box that contains the running head. The default in
- the 'article', 'report', and 'book' classes is '12pt', at all type
+ the ‘article’, ‘report’, and ‘book’ classes is ‘12pt’, at all type
sizes.
-'\headsep'
+‘\headsep’
Vertical distance between the bottom of the header line and the top
- of the main text. The default in the 'article' and 'report'
- classes is '25pt'. In the 'book' class the default is: if the
- document is set at 10pt then it is '0.25in', and at 11pt or 12pt it
- is '0.275in'.
+ of the main text. The default in the ‘article’ and ‘report’
+ classes is ‘25pt’. In the ‘book’ class the default is: if the
+ document is set at 10pt then it is ‘0.25in’, and at 11pt or 12pt it
+ is ‘0.275in’.
-'\footskip'
+‘\footskip’
Distance from the baseline of the last line of text to the baseline
- of the page footer. The default in the 'article' and 'report'
- classes is '30pt'. In the 'book' class the default is: when the
- type size is 10pt the default is '0.35in', while at 11pt it is
- '0.38in', and at 12pt it is '30pt'.
+ of the page footer. The default in the ‘article’ and ‘report’
+ classes is ‘30pt’. In the ‘book’ class the default is: when the
+ type size is 10pt the default is ‘0.35in’, while at 11pt it is
+ ‘0.38in’, and at 12pt it is ‘30pt’.
-'\linewidth'
- Width of the current line, decreased for each nested 'list' (*note
- list::). That is, the nominal value for '\linewidth' is to equal
- '\textwidth' but for each nested list the '\linewidth' is decreased
- by the sum of that list's '\leftmargin' and '\rightmargin' (*note
+‘\linewidth’
+ Width of the current line, decreased for each nested ‘list’ (*note
+ list::). That is, the nominal value for ‘\linewidth’ is to equal
+ ‘\textwidth’ but for each nested list the ‘\linewidth’ is decreased
+ by the sum of that list’s ‘\leftmargin’ and ‘\rightmargin’ (*note
itemize::).
-'\marginparpush'
-'\marginsep'
-'\marginparwidth'
+‘\marginparpush’
+‘\marginsep’
+‘\marginparwidth’
The minimum vertical space between two marginal notes, the
horizontal space between the text body and the marginal notes, and
the horizontal width of the notes.
Normally marginal notes appear on the outside of the page, but the
- declaration '\reversemarginpar' changes that (and
- '\normalmarginpar' changes it back).
+ declaration ‘\reversemarginpar’ changes that (and
+ ‘\normalmarginpar’ changes it back).
- The defaults for '\marginparpush' in both 'book' and 'article'
- classes are: '7pt' if the document is set at 12pt, and '5pt' if the
+ The defaults for ‘\marginparpush’ in both ‘book’ and ‘article’
+ classes are: ‘7pt’ if the document is set at 12pt, and ‘5pt’ if the
document is set at 11pt or 10pt.
- For '\marginsep', in 'article' class the default is '10pt' except
+ For ‘\marginsep’, in ‘article’ class the default is ‘10pt’ except
if the document is set at 10pt and in two-column mode where the
- default is '11pt'.
+ default is ‘11pt’.
- For '\marginsep' in 'book' class the default is '10pt' in
- two-column mode and '7pt' in one-column mode.
+ For ‘\marginsep’ in ‘book’ class the default is ‘10pt’ in
+ two-column mode and ‘7pt’ in one-column mode.
- For '\marginparwidth' in both 'book' and 'article' classes, in
- two-column mode the default is 60% of '\paperwidth - \textwidth',
+ For ‘\marginparwidth’ in both ‘book’ and ‘article’ classes, in
+ two-column mode the default is 60% of ‘\paperwidth − \textwidth’,
while in one-column mode it is 50% of that distance.
-'\oddsidemargin'
-'\evensidemargin'
- The '\oddsidemargin' length is the extra distance between the left
- side of the page and the text's left margin, on odd-numbered pages
- when the document class option 'twoside' is chosen and on all pages
- when 'oneside' is in effect. When 'twoside' is in effect, on
+‘\oddsidemargin’
+‘\evensidemargin’
+ The ‘\oddsidemargin’ length is the extra distance between the left
+ side of the page and the text’s left margin, on odd-numbered pages
+ when the document class option ‘twoside’ is chosen and on all pages
+ when ‘oneside’ is in effect. When ‘twoside’ is in effect, on
even-numbered pages the extra distance on the left is
- '\evensidemargin'.
+ ‘\evensidemargin’.
- LaTeX's default is that '\oddsidemargin' is 40% of the difference
- between '\paperwidth' and '\textwidth', and '\evensidemargin' is
+ LaTeX’s default is that ‘\oddsidemargin’ is 40% of the difference
+ between ‘\paperwidth’ and ‘\textwidth’, and ‘\evensidemargin’ is
the remainder.
-'\paperheight'
+‘\paperheight’
The height of the paper, as distinct from the height of the print
area. Normally set with a document class option, as in
- '\documentclass[a4paper]{article}' (*note Document class
+ ‘\documentclass[a4paper]{article}’ (*note Document class
options::).
-'\paperwidth'
+‘\paperwidth’
The width of the paper, as distinct from the width of the print
area. Normally set with a document class option, as in
- '\documentclass[a4paper]{article}' (*note Document class
+ ‘\documentclass[a4paper]{article}’ (*note Document class
options::).
-'\textheight'
+‘\textheight’
The normal vertical height of the page body. If the document is
- set at a nominal type size of 10pt then for an 'article' or
- 'report' the default is '43\baselineskip', while for a 'book' it is
- '41\baselineskip'. At a type size of 11pt the default is
- '38\baselineskip' for all document classes. At 12pt it is
- '36\baselineskip' for all classes.
+ set at a nominal type size of 10pt then for an ‘article’ or
+ ‘report’ the default is ‘43\baselineskip’, while for a ‘book’ it is
+ ‘41\baselineskip’. At a type size of 11pt the default is
+ ‘38\baselineskip’ for all document classes. At 12pt it is
+ ‘36\baselineskip’ for all classes.
-'\textwidth'
+‘\textwidth’
The full horizontal width of the entire page body. For an
- 'article' or 'report' document, the default is '345pt' when the
- chosen type size is 10pt, the default is '360pt' at 11pt, and it is
- '390pt' at 12pt. For a 'book' document, the default is '4.5in' at
- a type size of 10pt, and '5in' at 11pt or 12pt.
+ ‘article’ or ‘report’ document, the default is ‘345pt’ when the
+ chosen type size is 10pt, the default is ‘360pt’ at 11pt, and it is
+ ‘390pt’ at 12pt. For a ‘book’ document, the default is ‘4.5in’ at
+ a type size of 10pt, and ‘5in’ at 11pt or 12pt.
- In multi-column output, '\textwidth' remains the width of the
- entire page body, while '\columnwidth' is the width of one column
+ In multi-column output, ‘\textwidth’ remains the width of the
+ entire page body, while ‘\columnwidth’ is the width of one column
(*note \twocolumn::).
- In lists (*note list::), '\textwidth' remains the width of the
- entire page body (and '\columnwidth' the width of the entire
- column), while '\linewidth' may decrease for nested lists.
+ In lists (*note list::), ‘\textwidth’ remains the width of the
+ entire page body (and ‘\columnwidth’ the width of the entire
+ column), while ‘\linewidth’ may decrease for nested lists.
- Inside a minipage (*note minipage::) or '\parbox' (*note
+ Inside a minipage (*note minipage::) or ‘\parbox’ (*note
\parbox::), all the width-related parameters are set to the
specified width, and revert to their normal values at the end of
- the 'minipage' or '\parbox'.
+ the ‘minipage’ or ‘\parbox’.
-'\hsize'
- This entry is included for completeness: '\hsize' is the TeX
+‘\hsize’
+ This entry is included for completeness: ‘\hsize’ is the TeX
primitive parameter used when text is broken into lines. It should
not be used in normal LaTeX documents.
-'\topmargin'
+‘\topmargin’
Space between the top of the TeX page (one inch from the top of the
paper, by default) and the top of the header. The value is
- computed based on many other parameters: '\paperheight - 2in -
- \headheight - \headsep - \textheight - \footskip', and then divided
+ computed based on many other parameters: ‘\paperheight − 2in −
+ \headheight − \headsep − \textheight − \footskip’, and then divided
by two.
-'\topskip'
+‘\topskip’
Minimum distance between the top of the page body and the baseline
of the first line of text. For the standard classes, the default
- is the same as the font size, e.g., '10pt' at a type size of 10pt.
+ is the same as the font size, e.g., ‘10pt’ at a type size of 10pt.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \baselineskip & \baselinestretch, Next: Floats, Prev: Page layout parameters, Up: Layout
-5.6 '\baselineskip' & '\baselinestretch'
+5.6 ‘\baselineskip’ & ‘\baselinestretch’
========================================
-The '\baselineskip' is a rubber length (*note Lengths::). It gives the
-"leading", the normal distance between lines in a paragraph, from
+The ‘\baselineskip’ is a rubber length (*note Lengths::). It gives the
+“leading”, the normal distance between lines in a paragraph, from
baseline to baseline.
- Ordinarily document authors do not directly change '\baselineskip'
+ Ordinarily document authors do not directly change ‘\baselineskip’
while writing. Instead, it is set by the low level font selection
-command '\fontsize' (*note low level font commands fontsize::). The
-'\baselineskip''s value is reset every time a font change happens and so
-any direct change to '\baselineskip' would vanish the next time there
+command ‘\fontsize’ (*note low level font commands fontsize::). The
+‘\baselineskip’’s value is reset every time a font change happens and so
+any direct change to ‘\baselineskip’ would vanish the next time there
was a font switch. For how to influence line spacing, see the
-discussion of '\baselinestretch' below.
+discussion of ‘\baselinestretch’ below.
- Usually, a font's size and baseline skip is assigned by the font
+ Usually, a font’s size and baseline skip is assigned by the font
designer. These numbers are nominal in the sense that if, for instance,
-a font's style file has the command '\fontsize{10pt}{12pt}' then that
+a font’s style file has the command ‘\fontsize{10pt}{12pt}’ then that
does not mean that the characters in the font are 10pt tall; for
instance, parentheses and accented capitals may be taller. Nor does it
mean that if the lines are spaced less than 12pt apart then they risk
touching. Rather these numbers are typographic judgements. (Often, the
-'\baselineskip' is about twenty percent larger than the font size.)
+‘\baselineskip’ is about twenty percent larger than the font size.)
- The '\baselineskip' is not a property of each line but of the entire
+ The ‘\baselineskip’ is not a property of each line but of the entire
paragraph. As a result, large text in the middle of a paragraph, such
-as a single '{\Huge Q}', will be squashed into its line. TeX will make
-sure it doesn't scrape up against the line above but won't change the
-'\baselineskip' for that one line to make extra room above. For the
-fix, use a '\strut' (*note \strut::).
+as a single ‘{\Huge Q}’, will be squashed into its line. TeX will make
+sure it doesn’t scrape up against the line above but won’t change the
+‘\baselineskip’ for that one line to make extra room above. For the
+fix, use a ‘\strut’ (*note \strut::).
- The value of '\baselineskip' that TeX uses for the paragraph is the
+ The value of ‘\baselineskip’ that TeX uses for the paragraph is the
value in effect at the blank line or command that ends the paragraph
unit. So if a document contains this paragraph then its lines will be
scrunched together, compared to lines in surrounding paragraphs.
@@ -2241,17 +2242,17 @@
The process for making paragraphs is that when a new line is added,
if the depth of the previous line plus the height of the new line is
-less than '\baselineskip' then TeX inserts vertical glue to make up the
+less than ‘\baselineskip’ then TeX inserts vertical glue to make up the
difference. There are two fine points. The first is that if the lines
-would be too close together, closer than '\lineskiplimit', then TeX
-instead uses '\lineskip' as the interline glue. The second is that TeX
-doesn't actually use the depth of the previous line. Instead it uses
-'\prevdepth', which usually contains that depth. But at the beginning
+would be too close together, closer than ‘\lineskiplimit’, then TeX
+instead uses ‘\lineskip’ as the interline glue. The second is that TeX
+doesn’t actually use the depth of the previous line. Instead it uses
+‘\prevdepth’, which usually contains that depth. But at the beginning
of the paragraph (or any vertical list) or just after a rule,
-'\prevdepth' has the value -1000pt and this special value tells TeX not
+‘\prevdepth’ has the value -1000pt and this special value tells TeX not
to insert any interline glue at the paragraph start.
- In the standard classes '\lineskiplimit' is 0pt and '\lineskip' is
+ In the standard classes ‘\lineskiplimit’ is 0pt and ‘\lineskip’ is
1pt. By the prior paragraph then, the distance between lines can
approach zero but if it becomes zero (or less than zero) then the lines
jump to 1pt apart.
@@ -2258,22 +2259,23 @@
Sometimes authors must, for editing purposes, put the document in
double space or one-and-a-half space. The right way to influence the
-interline distance is via '\baselinestretch'. It scales
-'\baselineskip', and has a default value of 1.0. It is a command, not a
-length, so change the scale factor as in
-'\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{1.5}\selectfont'.
+interline distance is via ‘\baselinestretch’. It scales
+‘\baselineskip’, and has a default value of 1.0. It is a command, not a
+length, and does not take effect until a font change happens, so set the
+scale factor like this:
+‘\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{1.5}\selectfont’.
The most straightforward way to change the line spacing for an entire
-document is to put '\linespread{FACTOR}' in the preamble. For double
+document is to put ‘\linespread{FACTOR}’ in the preamble. For double
spacing, take FACTOR to be 1.6 and for one-and-a-half spacing use 1.3.
-These number are rough: for instance, since the '\baselineskip' is about
-1.2 times the font size, multiplying by 1.6 gives a baseline skip to
-font size ratio of about 2. (The '\linespread' command is defined as
-'\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{FACTOR}' so it won't take effect until
-a font setting happens. But that always takes place at the start of a
-document, so there you don't need to follow it with '\selectfont'.)
+These numbers are rough: for instance, since the ‘\baselineskip’ is
+about 1.2 times the font size, multiplying by 1.6 gives a baseline skip
+to font size ratio of about 2. (The ‘\linespread’ command is defined as
+‘\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{FACTOR}’ so it also won’t take effect
+until a font setting happens. But that always takes place at the start
+of a document, so there you don’t need to follow it with ‘\selectfont’.)
- A simpler approach is the 'setspace' package. The basic example:
+ A simpler approach is the ‘setspace’ package. The basic example:
\usepackage{setspace}
\doublespacing % or \onehalfspacing for 1.5
@@ -2281,11 +2283,11 @@
In the preamble these will start the document off with that sizing. But
you can also use these declarations in the document body to change the
spacing from that point forward, and consequently there is
-'\singlespacing' to return the spacing to normal. In the document body,
+‘\singlespacing’ to return the spacing to normal. In the document body,
a better practice than using the declarations is to use environments,
-such as '\begin{doublespace} ... \end{doublespace}'. The package also
-has commands to do arbitrary spacing: '\setstretch{FACTOR}' and
-'\begin{spacing}{FACTOR} ... \end{spacing}'. This package also keeps
+such as ‘\begin{doublespace} ... \end{doublespace}’. The package also
+has commands to do arbitrary spacing: ‘\setstretch{FACTOR}’ and
+‘\begin{spacing}{FACTOR} ... \end{spacing}’. This package also keeps
the line spacing single-spaced in places where that is typically
desirable, such as footnotes and figure captions. See the package
documentation.
@@ -2301,9 +2303,9 @@
for instance floating to the top of a later page.
LaTeX can have a number of different classes of floating material.
-The default is the two classes, 'figure' (*note figure::) and 'table'
+The default is the two classes, ‘figure’ (*note figure::) and ‘table’
(*note table::), but you can create a new class with the package
-'float'.
+‘float’.
Within any one float class LaTeX always respects the order, so that
the first figure in a document source must be typeset before the second
@@ -2324,123 +2326,123 @@
In addition to changing the parameters, for each float you can tweak
where the float placement algorithm tries to place it by using its
PLACEMENT argument. The possible values are a sequence of the letters
-below. The default for both 'figure' and 'table', in both 'article' and
-'book' classes, is 'tbp'.
+below. The default for both ‘figure’ and ‘table’, in both ‘article’ and
+‘book’ classes, is ‘tbp’.
-'t'
- (Top)--at the top of a text page.
+‘t’
+ (Top)—at the top of a text page.
-'b'
- (Bottom)--at the bottom of a text page. (However, 'b' is not
- allowed for full-width floats ('figure*') with double-column
- output. To ameliorate this, use the 'stfloats' or 'dblfloatfix'
+‘b’
+ (Bottom)—at the bottom of a text page. (However, ‘b’ is not
+ allowed for full-width floats (‘figure*’) with double-column
+ output. To ameliorate this, use the ‘stfloats’ or ‘dblfloatfix’
package, but see the discussion at caveats in the FAQ:
<https://www.texfaq.org/FAQ-2colfloat>.
-'h'
- (Here)--at the position in the text where the 'figure' environment
- appears. However, 'h' is not allowed by itself; 't' is
+‘h’
+ (Here)—at the position in the text where the ‘figure’ environment
+ appears. However, ‘h’ is not allowed by itself; ‘t’ is
automatically added.
- To absolutely force a float to appear "here", you can
- '\usepackage{float}' and use the 'H' specifier which it defines.
+ To absolutely force a float to appear “here”, you can
+ ‘\usepackage{float}’ and use the ‘H’ specifier which it defines.
For further discussion, see the FAQ entry at
<https://www.texfaq.org/FAQ-figurehere>.
-'p'
- (Page of floats)--on a separate "float page", which is a page
+‘p’
+ (Page of floats)—on a separate “float page”, which is a page
containing no text, only floats.
-'!'
+‘!’
Used in addition to one of the above; for this float only, LaTeX
ignores the restrictions on both the number of floats that can
appear and the relative amounts of float and non-float text on the
- page. The '!' specifier does _not_ mean "put the float here"; see
+ page. The ‘!’ specifier does _not_ mean “put the float here”; see
above.
Note: the order in which letters appear in the PLACEMENT argument
does not change the order in which LaTeX tries to place the float; for
-instance, 'btp' has the same effect as 'tbp'. All that PLACEMENT does
+instance, ‘btp’ has the same effect as ‘tbp’. All that PLACEMENT does
is that if a letter is not present then the algorithm does not try that
-location. Thus, LaTeX's default of 'tbp' is to try every location
+location. Thus, LaTeX’s default of ‘tbp’ is to try every location
except placing the float where it occurs in the source.
To prevent LaTeX from moving floats to the end of the document or a
-chapter you can use a '\clearpage' command to start a new page and
+chapter you can use a ‘\clearpage’ command to start a new page and
insert all pending floats. If a pagebreak is undesirable then you can
-use the 'afterpage' package and issue '\afterpage{\clearpage}'. This
+use the ‘afterpage’ package and issue ‘\afterpage{\clearpage}’. This
will wait until the current page is finished and then flush all
outstanding floats.
LaTeX can typeset a float before where it appears in the source
-(although on the same output page) if there is a 't' specifier in the
-PLACEMENT parameter. If this is not desired, and deleting the 't' is
+(although on the same output page) if there is a ‘t’ specifier in the
+PLACEMENT parameter. If this is not desired, and deleting the ‘t’ is
not acceptable as it keeps the float from being placed at the top of the
-next page, then you can prevent it by either using the 'flafter' package
-or using the command '\suppressfloats[t]', which causes floats for the
+next page, then you can prevent it by either using the ‘flafter’ package
+or using the command ‘\suppressfloats[t]’, which causes floats for the
top position on this page to moved to the next page.
Parameters relating to fractions of pages occupied by float and
-non-float text (change them with '\renewcommand{PARAMETER}{DECIMAL
-BETWEEN 0 AND 1}'):
+non-float text (change them with ‘\renewcommand{PARAMETER}{DECIMAL
+BETWEEN 0 AND 1}’):
-'\bottomfraction'
+‘\bottomfraction’
The maximum fraction of the page allowed to be occupied by floats
- at the bottom; default '.3'.
+ at the bottom; default ‘.3’.
-'\floatpagefraction'
+‘\floatpagefraction’
The minimum fraction of a float page that must be occupied by
- floats; default '.5'.
+ floats; default ‘.5’.
-'\textfraction'
+‘\textfraction’
Minimum fraction of a page that must be text; if floats take up too
much space to preserve this much text, floats will be moved to a
- different page. The default is '.2'.
+ different page. The default is ‘.2’.
-'\topfraction'
+‘\topfraction’
Maximum fraction at the top of a page that may be occupied before
- floats; default '.7'.
+ floats; default ‘.7’.
Parameters relating to vertical space around floats (change them with
-a command of the form '\setlength{PARAMETER}{LENGTH EXPRESSION}'):
+a command of the form ‘\setlength{PARAMETER}{LENGTH EXPRESSION}’):
-'\floatsep'
- Space between floats at the top or bottom of a page; default '12pt
- plus2pt minus2pt'.
+‘\floatsep’
+ Space between floats at the top or bottom of a page; default ‘12pt
+ plus2pt minus2pt’.
-'\intextsep'
+‘\intextsep’
Space above and below a float in the middle of the main text;
- default '12pt plus2pt minus2pt' for 10 point and 11 point
- documents, and '14pt plus4pt minus4pt' for 12 point documents.
+ default ‘12pt plus2pt minus2pt’ for 10 point and 11 point
+ documents, and ‘14pt plus4pt minus4pt’ for 12 point documents.
-'\textfloatsep'
+‘\textfloatsep’
Space between the last (first) float at the top (bottom) of a page;
- default '20pt plus2pt minus4pt'.
+ default ‘20pt plus2pt minus4pt’.
Counters relating to the number of floats on a page (change them with
-a command of the form '\setcounter{CTRNAME}{NATURAL NUMBER}'):
+a command of the form ‘\setcounter{CTRNAME}{NATURAL NUMBER}’):
-'bottomnumber'
+‘bottomnumber’
Maximum number of floats that can appear at the bottom of a text
page; default 1.
-'dbltopnumber'
+‘dbltopnumber’
Maximum number of full-sized floats that can appear at the top of a
two-column page; default 2.
-'topnumber'
+‘topnumber’
Maximum number of floats that can appear at the top of a text page;
default 2.
-'totalnumber'
+‘totalnumber’
Maximum number of floats that can appear on a text page; default 3.
The principal TeX FAQ entry relating to floats
<https://www.texfaq.org/FAQ-floats> contains suggestions for relaxing
-LaTeX's default parameters to reduce the problem of floats being pushed
+LaTeX’s default parameters to reduce the problem of floats being pushed
to the end. A full explanation of the float placement algorithm is in
-Frank Mittelbach's article "How to influence the position of float
-environments like figure and table in LaTeX?"
+Frank Mittelbach’s article “How to influence the position of float
+environments like figure and table in LaTeX?”
(<https://www.latex-project.org/publications/2014-FMi-TUB-tb111mitt-float-placement.pdf>).
* Menu:
@@ -2450,7 +2452,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \caption, Up: Floats
-5.7.1 '\caption'
+5.7.1 ‘\caption’
----------------
Synopsis:
@@ -2461,8 +2463,8 @@
\caption[SHORT-CAPTION-TEXT]{CAPTION-TEXT}
- Make a caption for a floating environment, such as a 'figure' or
-'table' environment (*note figure:: or *note table::).
+ Make a caption for a floating environment, such as a ‘figure’ or
+‘table’ environment (*note figure:: or *note table::).
In this example, LaTeX places a caption below the vertical blank
space that is left by the author for the later inclusion of a picture.
@@ -2473,16 +2475,16 @@
\label{fig:CushingPic}
\end{figure}
-The '\caption' command will label the CAPTION-TEXT with something like
-'Figure 1:' for an article or 'Figure 1.1:' for a book. The text is
+The ‘\caption’ command will label the CAPTION-TEXT with something like
+‘Figure 1:’ for an article or ‘Figure 1.1:’ for a book. The text is
centered if it is shorter than the text width, or set as an unindented
paragraph if it takes more than one line.
- In addition to placing the CAPTION-TEXT in the output, the '\caption'
+ In addition to placing the CAPTION-TEXT in the output, the ‘\caption’
command also saves that information for use in a list of figures or list
of tables (*note Table of contents etc.::).
- Here the '\caption' command uses the optional SHORT-CAPTION-TEXT, so
+ Here the ‘\caption’ command uses the optional SHORT-CAPTION-TEXT, so
that the shorter text appears in the list of tables, rather than the
longer CAPTION-TEXT.
@@ -2501,25 +2503,25 @@
\label{tab:LoShu}
\end{table}
-LaTeX will label the CAPTION-TEXT with something like 'Table 1:' for an
-article or 'Table 1.1:' for a book.
+LaTeX will label the CAPTION-TEXT with something like ‘Table 1:’ for an
+article or ‘Table 1.1:’ for a book.
- The caption can appear at the top of the 'figure' or 'table'. For
+ The caption can appear at the top of the ‘figure’ or ‘table’. For
instance, that would happen in the prior example by putting the
-'\caption' between the '\centering' and the '\begin{tabular}'.
+‘\caption’ between the ‘\centering’ and the ‘\begin{tabular}’.
Different floating environments are numbered separately, by default.
-It is '\caption' that updates the counter, and so any '\label' must come
-after the '\caption'. The counter for the 'figure' environment is named
-'figure', and similarly the counter for the 'table' environment is
-'table'.
+It is ‘\caption’ that updates the counter, and so any ‘\label’ must come
+after the ‘\caption’. The counter for the ‘figure’ environment is named
+‘figure’, and similarly the counter for the ‘table’ environment is
+‘table’.
The text that will be put in the list of figures or list of tables is
-moving argument. If you get the LaTeX error '! Argument of \@caption
-has an extra }' then you must put '\protect' in front of any fragile
+moving argument. If you get the LaTeX error ‘! Argument of \@caption
+has an extra }’ then you must put ‘\protect’ in front of any fragile
commands. *Note \protect::.
- The 'caption' package has many options to adjust how the caption
+ The ‘caption’ package has many options to adjust how the caption
appears, for example changing the font size, making the caption be
hanging text rather than set as a paragraph, or making the caption
always set as a paragraph rather than centered when it is short.
@@ -2538,30 +2540,30 @@
SECTIONING-COMMAND[TOC-TITLE]{TITLE}
For instance, declare the start of a subsection as with
-'\subsection{Motivation}'.
+‘\subsection{Motivation}’.
The table has each SECTIONING-COMMAND in LaTeX. All are available in
-all of LaTeX's standard document classes 'book', 'report',
-and 'article', except that '\chapter' is not available in 'article'.
+all of LaTeX’s standard document classes ‘book’, ‘report’,
+and ‘article’, except that ‘\chapter’ is not available in ‘article’.
Sectioning unit Command Level
--------------------------------------------------------------------
-Part '\part' -1 ('book', 'report'), 0
- ('article')
-Chapter '\chapter' 0
-Section '\section' 1
-Subsection '\subsection' 2
-Subsubsection '\subsubsection' 3
-Paragraph '\paragraph' 4
-Subparagraph '\subparagraph' 5
+Part ‘\part’ -1 (‘book’, ‘report’), 0
+ (‘article’)
+Chapter ‘\chapter’ 0
+Section ‘\section’ 1
+Subsection ‘\subsection’ 2
+Subsubsection ‘\subsubsection’ 3
+Paragraph ‘\paragraph’ 4
+Subparagraph ‘\subparagraph’ 5
- All these commands have a '*'-form that prints TITLE as usual but
+ All these commands have a ‘*’-form that prints TITLE as usual but
does not number it and does not make an entry in the table of contents.
-An example of using this is for an appendix in an 'article'. The input
-'\appendix\section{Appendix}' gives the output 'A Appendix' (*note
-\appendix::). You can lose the numbering 'A' by instead entering
-'\section*{Appendix}' (articles often omit a table of contents and have
-simple page headers so the other differences from the '\section' command
+An example of using this is for an appendix in an ‘article’. The input
+‘\appendix\section{Appendix}’ gives the output ‘A Appendix’ (*note
+\appendix::). You can lose the numbering ‘A’ by instead entering
+‘\section*{Appendix}’ (articles often omit a table of contents and have
+simple page headers so the other differences from the ‘\section’ command
may not matter).
The section title TITLE provides the heading in the main text, but it
@@ -2572,46 +2574,47 @@
The level number in the table above determines which sectional units
are numbered, and which appear in the table of contents. If the
-sectioning command's LEVEL is less than or equal to the value of the
-counter 'secnumdepth' then the titles for this sectioning command will
+sectioning command’s LEVEL is less than or equal to the value of the
+counter ‘secnumdepth’ then the titles for this sectioning command will
be numbered (*note Sectioning/secnumdepth::). And, if LEVEL is less
-than or equal to the value of the counter 'tocdepth' then the table of
+than or equal to the value of the counter ‘tocdepth’ then the table of
contents will have an entry for this sectioning unit (*note
Sectioning/tocdepth::).
- LaTeX expects that before you have a '\subsection' you will have a
-'\section' and, in a 'book' class document, that before a '\section' you
-will have a '\chapter'. Otherwise you can get something like a
-subsection numbered '3.0.1'.
+ LaTeX expects that before you have a ‘\subsection’ you will have a
+‘\section’ and, in a ‘book’ class document, that before a ‘\section’ you
+will have a ‘\chapter’. Otherwise you can get something like a
+subsection numbered ‘3.0.1’.
LaTeX lets you change the appearance of the sectional units. As a
-simple example, you can change the section numbering to upper-case
-letters with '\renewcommand\thesection{\Alph{section}}' in the preamble
-(*note \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol::). CTAN has many
-packages that make this adjustment easier, notably 'titlesec'.
+simple example, you can change the section numbering to uppercase
+letters with this (in the preamble):
+‘\renewcommand\thesection{\Alph{section}}’ . (*Note \alph \Alph \arabic
+\roman \Roman \fnsymbol::.) CTAN has many packages that make this
+adjustment easier, notably ‘titlesec’.
Two counters relate to the appearance of headings made by sectioning
commands.
-'secnumdepth'
+‘secnumdepth’
Controls which sectioning unit are numbered. Setting the counter
- with '\setcounter{secnumdepth}{LEVEL}' will suppress numbering of
+ with ‘\setcounter{secnumdepth}{LEVEL}’ will suppress numbering of
sectioning at any depth greater than LEVEL (*note \setcounter::).
See the above table for the level numbers. For instance, if the
- 'secnumdepth' is 1 in an 'article' then a '\section{Introduction}'
- command will produce output like '1 Introduction' while
- '\subsection{Discussion}' will produce output like 'Discussion',
- without the number. LaTeX's default 'secnumdepth' is 3 in
- 'article' class and 2 in the 'book' and 'report' classes.
+ ‘secnumdepth’ is 1 in an ‘article’ then a ‘\section{Introduction}’
+ command will produce output like ‘1 Introduction’ while
+ ‘\subsection{Discussion}’ will produce output like ‘Discussion’,
+ without the number. LaTeX’s default ‘secnumdepth’ is 3 in
+ ‘article’ class and 2 in the ‘book’ and ‘report’ classes.
-'tocdepth'
+‘tocdepth’
Controls which sectioning units are listed in the table of
- contents. The setting '\setcounter{tocdepth}{LEVEL}' makes the
+ contents. The setting ‘\setcounter{tocdepth}{LEVEL}’ makes the
sectioning units at LEVEL be the smallest ones listed (*note
\setcounter::). See the above table for the level numbers. For
- instance, if 'tocdepth' is 1 then the table of contents will list
- sections but not subsections. LaTeX's default 'tocdepth' is 3 in
- 'article' class and 2 in the 'book' and 'report' classes.
+ instance, if ‘tocdepth’ is 1 then the table of contents will list
+ sections but not subsections. LaTeX’s default ‘tocdepth’ is 3 in
+ ‘article’ class and 2 in the ‘book’ and ‘report’ classes.
* Menu:
@@ -2627,7 +2630,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \part, Next: \chapter, Up: Sectioning
-6.1 '\part'
+6.1 ‘\part’
===========
Synopsis, one of:
@@ -2636,8 +2639,8 @@
\part*{TITLE}
\part[TOC-TITLE]{TITLE}
- Start a document part. The standard LaTeX classes 'book', 'report',
-and 'article', all have this command.
+ Start a document part. The standard LaTeX classes ‘book’, ‘report’,
+and ‘article’, all have this command.
This produces a document part, in a book.
@@ -2647,19 +2650,19 @@
My family is American, and has been for generations,
in all its branches, direct and collateral.
- In each standard class the '\part' command outputs a part number such
-as 'Part I', alone on its line, in boldface, and in large type. Then
+ In each standard class the ‘\part’ command outputs a part number such
+as ‘Part I’, alone on its line, in boldface, and in large type. Then
LaTeX outputs TITLE, also alone on its line, in bold and in even larger
-type. In class 'book', the LaTeX default puts each part alone on its
+type. In class ‘book’, the LaTeX default puts each part alone on its
own page. If the book is two-sided then LaTeX will skip a page if
-needed to have the new part on an odd-numbered page. In 'report' it is
-again alone on a page, but LaTeX won't force it onto an odd-numbered
-page. In an 'article' LaTeX does not put it on a fresh page, but
+needed to have the new part on an odd-numbered page. In ‘report’ it is
+again alone on a page, but LaTeX won’t force it onto an odd-numbered
+page. In an ‘article’ LaTeX does not put it on a fresh page, but
instead outputs the part number and part title onto the main document
page.
- The '*' form shows TITLE but it does not show the part number, does
-not increment the 'part' counter, and produces no table of contents
+ The ‘*’ form shows TITLE but it does not show the part number, does
+not increment the ‘part’ counter, and produces no table of contents
entry.
The optional argument TOC-TITLE will appear as the part title in the
@@ -2674,17 +2677,17 @@
in the table of contents, the level number of a part is -1 (*note
Sectioning/secnumdepth::, and *note Sectioning/tocdepth::).
- In the class 'article', if a paragraph immediately follows the part
+ In the class ‘article’, if a paragraph immediately follows the part
title then it is not indented. To get an indent you can use the package
-'indentfirst'.
+‘indentfirst’.
- One package to change the behavior of '\part' is 'titlesec'. See its
+ One package to change the behavior of ‘\part’ is ‘titlesec’. See its
documentation on CTAN.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \chapter, Next: \section, Prev: \part, Up: Sectioning
-6.2 '\chapter'
+6.2 ‘\chapter’
==============
Synopsis, one of:
@@ -2693,8 +2696,8 @@
\chapter*{TITLE}
\chapter[TOC-TITLE]{TITLE}
- Start a chapter. The standard LaTeX classes 'book' and 'report' have
-this command but 'article' does not.
+ Start a chapter. The standard LaTeX classes ‘book’ and ‘report’ have
+this command but ‘article’ does not.
This produces a chapter.
@@ -2707,16 +2710,16 @@
The LaTeX default starts each chapter on a fresh page, an
odd-numbered page if the document is two-sided. It produces a chapter
-number such as 'Chapter 1' in large boldface type (the size is '\huge').
+number such as ‘Chapter 1’ in large boldface type (the size is ‘\huge’).
It then puts TITLE on a fresh line, in boldface type that is still
-larger (size '\Huge'). It also increments the 'chapter' counter, adds
+larger (size ‘\Huge’). It also increments the ‘chapter’ counter, adds
an entry to the table of contents (*note Table of contents etc.::), and
sets the running header information (*note Page styles::).
- The '*' form shows TITLE on a fresh line, in boldface. But it does
-not show the chapter number, does not increment the 'chapter' counter,
+ The ‘*’ form shows TITLE on a fresh line, in boldface. But it does
+not show the chapter number, does not increment the ‘chapter’ counter,
produces no table of contents entry, and does not affect the running
-header. (If you use the page style 'headings' in a two-sided document
+header. (If you use the page style ‘headings’ in a two-sided document
then the header will be from the prior chapter.) This example
illustrates.
@@ -2729,8 +2732,8 @@
\chapter[Weyl]{Hermann Klaus Hugo (Peter) Weyl (1885--1955)}
-but only 'Weyl' on the contents page. This puts a line break in the
-title but that doesn't work well with running headers so it omits the
+but only ‘Weyl’ on the contents page. This puts a line break in the
+title but that doesn’t work well with running headers so it omits the
break in the contents
\chapter[Given it all; my story]{Given it all\\ my story}
@@ -2741,11 +2744,11 @@
The paragraph that follows the chapter title is not indented, as is a
standard typographical practice. To get an indent use the package
-'indentfirst'.
+‘indentfirst’.
You can change what is shown for the chapter number. To change it to
-something like 'Lecture 1', put in the preamble either
-'\renewcommand{\chaptername}{Lecture}' or this (*note \makeatletter &
+something like ‘Lecture 1’, put in the preamble either
+‘\renewcommand{\chaptername}{Lecture}’ or this (*note \makeatletter &
\makeatother::).
\makeatletter
@@ -2753,7 +2756,7 @@
\makeatother
To make this change because of the primary language for the document,
-see the package 'babel'.
+see the package ‘babel’.
In a two-sided document LaTeX puts a chapter on odd-numbered page, if
necessary leaving an even-numbered page that is blank except for any
@@ -2760,9 +2763,9 @@
running headers. To make that page completely blank, see *note
\clearpage & \cleardoublepage::.
- To change the behavior of the '\chapter' command, you can copy its
+ To change the behavior of the ‘\chapter’ command, you can copy its
definition from the LaTeX format file and make adjustments. But there
-are also many packages on CTAN that address this. One is 'titlesec'.
+are also many packages on CTAN that address this. One is ‘titlesec’.
See its documentation, but the example below gives a sense of what it
can do.
@@ -2773,14 +2776,14 @@
{0pt} % length of separation between label and title
{} % before-code hook
-This omits the chapter number 'Chapter 1' from the page but unlike
-'\chapter*' it keeps the chapter in the table of contents and the
+This omits the chapter number ‘Chapter 1’ from the page but unlike
+‘\chapter*’ it keeps the chapter in the table of contents and the
running headers.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \section, Next: \subsection, Prev: \chapter, Up: Sectioning
-6.3 '\section'
+6.3 ‘\section’
==============
Synopsis, one of:
@@ -2789,8 +2792,8 @@
\section*{TITLE}
\section[TOC-TITLE]{TITLE}
- Start a section. The standard LaTeX classes 'article', 'book', and
-'report' all have this command.
+ Start a section. The standard LaTeX classes ‘article’, ‘book’, and
+‘report’ all have this command.
This produces a section.
@@ -2804,16 +2807,16 @@
first step toward defining the set of computable functions
is to reflect on the details of what mechanisms can do.
- For the standard LaTeX classes 'book' and 'report' the default output
-is like '1.2 TITLE' (for chapter 1, section 2), alone on its line and
-flush left, in boldface and a larger type (the type size is '\Large').
-The same holds in 'article' except that there are no chapters in that
-class so it looks like '2 TITLE'.
+ For the standard LaTeX classes ‘book’ and ‘report’ the default output
+is like ‘1.2 TITLE’ (for chapter 1, section 2), alone on its line and
+flush left, in boldface and a larger type (the type size is ‘\Large’).
+The same holds in ‘article’ except that there are no chapters in that
+class so it looks like ‘2 TITLE’.
- The '*' form shows TITLE. But it does not show the section number,
-does not increment the 'section' counter, produces no table of contents
+ The ‘*’ form shows TITLE. But it does not show the section number,
+does not increment the ‘section’ counter, produces no table of contents
entry, and does not affect the running header. (If you use the page
-style 'headings' in a two-sided document then the header will be from
+style ‘headings’ in a two-sided document then the header will be from
the prior section.)
The optional argument TOC-TITLE will appear as the section title in
@@ -2826,7 +2829,7 @@
Canada and Her other Realms and Territories Queen,
Head of the Commonwealth, Defender of the Faith.}
-but only 'Elizabeth II' on the contents page and in the headers. This
+but only ‘Elizabeth II’ on the contents page and in the headers. This
has a line break in TITLE but that does not work with headers so it is
omitted from the contents and headers.
@@ -2839,12 +2842,12 @@
The paragraph that follows the section title is not indented, as is a
standard typographical practice. One way to get an indent is to use the
-package 'indentfirst'.
+package ‘indentfirst’.
- In general, to change the behavior of the '\section' command, there
-are a number of options. One is the '\@startsection' command (*note
+ In general, to change the behavior of the ‘\section’ command, there
+are a number of options. One is the ‘\@startsection’ command (*note
\@startsection::). There are also many packages on CTAN that address
-this, including 'titlesec'. See the documentation but the example below
+this, including ‘titlesec’. See the documentation but the example below
gives a sense of what they can do.
\usepackage{titlesec} % in preamble
@@ -2861,7 +2864,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \subsection, Next: \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph, Prev: \section, Up: Sectioning
-6.4 '\subsection'
+6.4 ‘\subsection’
=================
Synopsis, one of:
@@ -2870,8 +2873,8 @@
\subsection*{TITLE}
\subsection[TOC-TITLE]{TITLE}
- Start a subsection. The standard LaTeX classes 'article', 'book',
-and 'report' all have this command.
+ Start a subsection. The standard LaTeX classes ‘article’, ‘book’,
+and ‘report’ all have this command.
This produces a subsection.
@@ -2882,14 +2885,14 @@
dramatize the challenge to our intuition posed by comparing the sizes of
infinite sets.
- For the standard LaTeX classes 'book' and 'report' the default output
-is like '1.2.3 TITLE' (for chapter 1, section 2, subsection 3), alone on
+ For the standard LaTeX classes ‘book’ and ‘report’ the default output
+is like ‘1.2.3 TITLE’ (for chapter 1, section 2, subsection 3), alone on
its line and flush left, in boldface and a larger type (the type size is
-'\large'). The same holds in 'article' except that there are no
-chapters in that class so it looks like '2.3 TITLE'.
+‘\large’). The same holds in ‘article’ except that there are no
+chapters in that class so it looks like ‘2.3 TITLE’.
- The '*' form shows TITLE. But it does not show the subsection
-number, does not increment the 'subsection' counter, and produces no
+ The ‘*’ form shows TITLE. But it does not show the subsection
+number, does not increment the ‘subsection’ counter, and produces no
table of contents entry.
The optional argument TOC-TITLE will appear as the subsection title
@@ -2900,7 +2903,7 @@
\subsection[$\alpha,\beta,\gamma$ paper]{\textit{The Origin of
Chemical Elements} by R.A.~Alpher, H.~Bethe, and G.~Gamow}
-but only 'α,β,γ paper' on the contents page.
+but only ‘α,β,γ paper’ on the contents page.
For determining which sectional units are numbered and which appear
in the table of contents, the level number of a subsection is 2 (*note
@@ -2908,12 +2911,12 @@
The paragraph that follows the subsection title is not indented, as
is a standard typographical practice. One way to get an indent is to
-use the package 'indentfirst'.
+use the package ‘indentfirst’.
There are a number of ways to change the behavior of the
-'\subsection' command. One is the '\@startsection' command (*note
+‘\subsection’ command. One is the ‘\@startsection’ command (*note
\@startsection::). There are also many packages on CTAN that address
-this, including 'titlesec'. See the documentation but the example below
+this, including ‘titlesec’. See the documentation but the example below
gives a sense of what they can do.
\usepackage{titlesec} % in preamble
@@ -2928,7 +2931,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph, Next: \appendix, Prev: \subsection, Up: Sectioning
-6.5 '\subsubsection', '\paragraph', '\subparagraph'
+6.5 ‘\subsubsection’, ‘\paragraph’, ‘\subparagraph’
===================================================
Synopsis, one of:
@@ -2950,7 +2953,7 @@
\subparagraph[TOC-TITLE]{TITLE}
Start a subsubsection, paragraph, or subparagraph. The standard
-LaTeX classes 'article', 'book', and 'report' all have these commands,
+LaTeX classes ‘article’, ‘book’, and ‘report’ all have these commands,
although they are not commonly used.
This produces a subsubsection.
@@ -2961,19 +2964,19 @@
consumer-grade gasoline engine piston rings.
The default output of each of the three does not change over the
-standard LaTeX classes 'article', 'book', and 'report'. For
-'\subsubsection' the TITLE is alone on its line, in boldface and normal
-size type. For '\paragraph' the TITLE is inline with the text, not
-indented, in boldface and normal size type. For '\subparagraph' the
+standard LaTeX classes ‘article’, ‘book’, and ‘report’. For
+‘\subsubsection’ the TITLE is alone on its line, in boldface and normal
+size type. For ‘\paragraph’ the TITLE is inline with the text, not
+indented, in boldface and normal size type. For ‘\subparagraph’ the
TITLE is inline with the text, with a paragraph indent, in boldface and
-normal size type (Because an 'article' has no chapters its
-subsubsections are numbered and so it looks like '1.2.3 TITLE', for
+normal size type (Because an ‘article’ has no chapters its
+subsubsections are numbered and so it looks like ‘1.2.3 TITLE’, for
section 1, subsection 2, and subsubsection 3. The other two divisions
are not numbered.)
- The '*' form shows TITLE. But it does not increment the associated
+ The ‘*’ form shows TITLE. But it does not increment the associated
counter and produces no table of contents entry (and does not show the
-number for '\subsubsection').
+number for ‘\subsubsection’).
The optional argument TOC-TITLE will appear as the division title in
the table of contents (*note Table of contents etc.::). If it is not
@@ -2986,17 +2989,17 @@
The paragraph that follows the subsubsection title is not indented,
as is a standard typographical practice. One way to get an indent is to
-use the package 'indentfirst'.
+use the package ‘indentfirst’.
There are a number of ways to change the behavior of the these
-commands. One is the '\@startsection' command (*note \@startsection::).
+commands. One is the ‘\@startsection’ command (*note \@startsection::).
There are also many packages on CTAN that address this, including
-'titlesec'. See the documentation on CTAN.
+‘titlesec’. See the documentation on CTAN.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \appendix, Next: \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter, Prev: \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph, Up: Sectioning
-6.6 '\appendix'
+6.6 ‘\appendix’
===============
Synopsis:
@@ -3003,11 +3006,12 @@
\appendix
- This does not directly produce any output. But in a book or report
-it declares that subsequent '\chapter' commands start an appendix. In
-an article it does the same, for '\section' commands. It also resets
-the 'chapter' and 'section' counters to 0 in a book or report, and in an
-article resets the 'section' and 'subsection' counters.
+ This does not directly produce any output. But in a ‘book’ or
+‘report’ document it declares that subsequent ‘\chapter’ commands start
+an appendix. In an article it does the same, for ‘\section’ commands.
+It also resets the ‘chapter’ and ‘section’ counters to 0 in a book or
+report, and in an article resets the ‘section’ and ‘subsection’
+counters.
In this book
@@ -3018,21 +3022,21 @@
\chapter{Three} ...
\chapter{Four} ...
-the first two will generate output numbered 'Chapter 1' and 'Chapter 2'.
-After the '\appendix' the numbering will be 'Appendix A' and 'Appendix
-B'. *Note Larger book template::, for another example.
+the first two will generate output numbered ‘Chapter 1’ and ‘Chapter 2’.
+After the ‘\appendix’ the numbering will be ‘Appendix A’ and ‘Appendix
+B’. *Note Larger book template::, for another example.
- The 'appendix' package adds the command '\appendixpage' to put a
-separate 'Appendices' in the document body before the first appendix,
-and the command '\addappheadtotoc' to do the same in the table of
-contents. You can reset the name 'Appendices' with a command like
-'\renewcommand{\appendixname}{Specification}', as well as a number of
+ The ‘appendix’ package adds the command ‘\appendixpage’ to put a
+separate ‘Appendices’ in the document body before the first appendix,
+and the command ‘\addappheadtotoc’ to do the same in the table of
+contents. You can reset the name ‘Appendices’ with a command like
+‘\renewcommand{\appendixname}{Specification}’, as well as a number of
other features. See the documentation on CTAN.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter, Next: \@startsection, Prev: \appendix, Up: Sectioning
-6.7 '\frontmatter', '\mainmatter', '\backmatter'
+6.7 ‘\frontmatter’, ‘\mainmatter’, ‘\backmatter’
================================================
Synopsis, one or more of:
@@ -3044,10 +3048,10 @@
\backmatter
...
- Format a 'book' class document differently according to which part of
+ Format a ‘book’ class document differently according to which part of
the document is being produced. All three commands are optional.
- Traditionally, a book's front matter contains such things as the
+ Traditionally, a book’s front matter contains such things as the
title page, an abstract, a table of contents, a preface, a list of
notations, a list of figures, and a list of tables. (Some of these
front matter pages, such as the title page, are traditionally not
@@ -3054,15 +3058,15 @@
numbered.) The back matter may contain such things as a glossary,
notes, a bibliography, and an index.
- The '\frontmatter' command makes the pages numbered in lowercase
-roman, and makes chapters not numbered, although each chapter's title
+ The ‘\frontmatter’ command makes the pages numbered in lowercase
+roman, and makes chapters not numbered, although each chapter’s title
appears in the table of contents; if you use other sectioning commands
-here, use the '*'-version (*note Sectioning::).
+here, use the ‘*’-version (*note Sectioning::).
- The '\mainmatter' command changes the behavior back to the expected
+ The ‘\mainmatter’ command changes the behavior back to the expected
version, and resets the page number.
- The '\backmatter' command leaves the page numbering alone but
+ The ‘\backmatter’ command leaves the page numbering alone but
switches the chapters back to being not numbered.
*Note Larger book template::, for an example using these three
@@ -3071,7 +3075,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \@startsection, Prev: \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter, Up: Sectioning
-6.8 '\@startsection', typesetting sectional unit headings
+6.8 ‘\@startsection’, typesetting sectional unit headings
=========================================================
Synopsis:
@@ -3079,16 +3083,16 @@
\@startsection{NAME}{LEVEL}{INDENT}{BEFORESKIP}{AFTERSKIP}{STYLE}
Used to help redefine the behavior of commands that start sectioning
-divisions such as '\section' or '\subsection'.
+divisions such as ‘\section’ or ‘\subsection’.
- Note that the 'titlesec' package makes manipulation of sectioning
+ Note that the ‘titlesec’ package makes manipulation of sectioning
easier. Further, while most requirements for sectioning commands can be
-satisfied with '\@startsection', some cannot. For instance, in the
-standard LaTeX 'book' and 'report' classes the commands '\chapter' and
-'\report' are not constructed in this way. To make such a command you
-may want to use the '\secdef' command.
+satisfied with ‘\@startsection’, some cannot. For instance, in the
+standard LaTeX ‘book’ and ‘report’ classes the commands ‘\chapter’ and
+‘\report’ are not constructed in this way. To make such a command you
+may want to use the ‘\secdef’ command.
- Technically, '\@startsection' has the form
+ Technically, ‘\@startsection’ has the form
\@startsection{NAME}
{LEVEL}
@@ -3106,20 +3110,20 @@
{AFTERSKIP}
{STYLE}}
-redefines '\section' while keeping its standard calling form
-'\section*[TOCTITLE]{TITLE}' (in which, for reminder, the star '*' is
+redefines ‘\section’ while keeping its standard calling form
+‘\section*[TOCTITLE]{TITLE}’ (in which, for reminder, the star ‘*’ is
optional). *Note Sectioning::. This implies that when you write a
-command like '\renewcommand{\section}{...}', the '\@startsection{...}'
+command like ‘\renewcommand{\section}{...}’, the ‘\@startsection{...}’
must come last in the definition. See the examples below.
NAME
Name of the counter used to number the sectioning header. This
counter must be defined separately. Most commonly this is either
- 'section', 'subsection', or 'paragraph'. Although in those cases
+ ‘section’, ‘subsection’, or ‘paragraph’. Although in those cases
the counter name is the same as the sectioning command itself, you
- don't have to use the same name.
+ don’t have to use the same name.
- Then '\the'NAME displays the title number and '\'NAME'mark' is for
+ Then ‘\the’NAME displays the title number and ‘\’NAME‘mark’ is for
the page headers. See the third example below.
LEVEL
@@ -3127,16 +3131,16 @@
Sectioning::, for the list of standard level numbers.
If LEVEL is less than or equal to the value of the counter
- 'secnumdepth' then titles for this sectioning command will be
+ ‘secnumdepth’ then titles for this sectioning command will be
numbered (*note Sectioning/secnumdepth::). For instance, if
- 'secnumdepth' is 1 in an 'article' then the command
- '\section{Introduction}' will produce output like "1 Introduction"
- while '\subsection{Discussion}' will produce output like
- "Discussion", without the number prefix.
+ ‘secnumdepth’ is 1 in an ‘article’ then the command
+ ‘\section{Introduction}’ will produce output like “1 Introduction”
+ while ‘\subsection{Discussion}’ will produce output like
+ “Discussion”, without the number prefix.
If LEVEL is less than or equal to the value of the counter TOCDEPTH
then the table of contents will have an entry for this sectioning
- unit (*note Sectioning/tocdepth::). For instance, in an 'article',
+ unit (*note Sectioning/tocdepth::). For instance, in an ‘article’,
if TOCDEPTH is 1 then the table of contents will list sections but
not subsections.
@@ -3143,30 +3147,30 @@
INDENT
A length giving the indentation of all of the title lines with
respect to the left margin. To have the title flush with the
- margin use '0pt'. A negative indentation such as '-\parindent'
+ margin use ‘0pt’. A negative indentation such as ‘-\parindent’
will move the title into the left margin.
BEFORESKIP
The absolute value of this length is the amount of vertical space
- that is inserted before this sectioning unit's title. This space
+ that is inserted before this sectioning unit’s title. This space
will be discarded if the sectioning unit happens to start at the
beginning of a page. If this number is negative then the first
paragraph following the header is not indented, if it is
non-negative then the first paragraph is indented. (Note that the
- negative of '1pt plus 2pt minus 3pt' is '-1pt plus -2pt minus
- -3pt'.)
+ negative of ‘1pt plus 2pt minus 3pt’ is ‘-1pt plus -2pt minus
+ -3pt’.)
- For example, if BEFORESKIP is '-3.5ex plus -1ex minus -0.2ex' then
+ For example, if BEFORESKIP is ‘-3.5ex plus -1ex minus -0.2ex’ then
to start the new sectioning unit, LaTeX will add about 3.5 times
the height of a letter x in vertical space, and the first paragraph
in the section will not be indented. Using a rubber length, with
- 'plus' and 'minus', is good practice here since it gives LaTeX more
+ ‘plus’ and ‘minus’, is good practice here since it gives LaTeX more
flexibility in making up the page (*note Lengths::).
The full accounting of the vertical space between the baseline of
- the line prior to this sectioning unit's header and the baseline of
- the header is that it is the sum of the '\parskip' of the text
- font, the '\baselineskip' of the title font, and the absolute value
+ the line prior to this sectioning unit’s header and the baseline of
+ the header is that it is the sum of the ‘\parskip’ of the text
+ font, the ‘\baselineskip’ of the title font, and the absolute value
of the BEFORESKIP. This space is typically rubber so it may
stretch or shrink. (If the sectioning unit starts on a fresh page
so that the vertical space is discarded then the baseline of the
@@ -3175,65 +3179,65 @@
AFTERSKIP
This is a length. If AFTERSKIP is non-negative then this is the
- vertical space inserted after the sectioning unit's title header.
+ vertical space inserted after the sectioning unit’s title header.
If it is negative then the title header becomes a run-in header, so
that it becomes part of the next paragraph. In this case the
absolute value of the length gives the horizontal space between the
end of the title and the beginning of the following paragraph.
- (Note that the negative of '1pt plus 2pt minus 3pt' is '-1pt plus
- -2pt minus -3pt'.)
+ (Note that the negative of ‘1pt plus 2pt minus 3pt’ is ‘-1pt plus
+ -2pt minus -3pt’.)
- As with BEFORESKIP, using a rubber length, with 'plus' and 'minus'
+ As with BEFORESKIP, using a rubber length, with ‘plus’ and ‘minus’
components, is good practice here since it gives LaTeX more
flexibility in putting together the page.
- If 'afterskip' is non-negative then the full accounting of the
- vertical space between the baseline of the sectioning unit's header
+ If ‘afterskip’ is non-negative then the full accounting of the
+ vertical space between the baseline of the sectioning unit’s header
and the baseline of the first line of the following paragraph is
- that it is the sum of the '\parskip' of the title font, the
- '\baselineskip' of the text font, and the value of AFTER. That
+ that it is the sum of the ‘\parskip’ of the title font, the
+ ‘\baselineskip’ of the text font, and the value of AFTER. That
space is typically rubber so it may stretch or shrink. (Note that
- because the sign of 'afterskip' changes the sectioning unit
- header's from standalone to run-in, you cannot use a negative
- 'afterskip' to cancel part of the '\parskip'.)
+ because the sign of ‘afterskip’ changes the sectioning unit
+ header’s from standalone to run-in, you cannot use a negative
+ ‘afterskip’ to cancel part of the ‘\parskip’.)
STYLE
Controls the styling of the title. See the examples below.
- Typical commands to use here are '\centering', '\raggedright',
- '\normalfont', '\hrule', or '\newpage'. The last command in STYLE
- may be one that takes one argument, such as '\MakeUppercase' or
- '\fbox' that takes one argument. The section title will be
+ Typical commands to use here are ‘\centering’, ‘\raggedright’,
+ ‘\normalfont’, ‘\hrule’, or ‘\newpage’. The last command in STYLE
+ may be one that takes one argument, such as ‘\MakeUppercase’ or
+ ‘\fbox’ that takes one argument. The section title will be
supplied as the argument to this command. For instance, setting
- STYLE to '\bfseries\MakeUppercase' would produce titles that are
+ STYLE to ‘\bfseries\MakeUppercase’ would produce titles that are
bold and uppercase.
- These are LaTeX's defaults for the first three sectioning units that
-are defined with '\@startsection', for the 'article', 'book', and
-'report' classes.
+ These are LaTeX’s defaults for the first three sectioning units that
+are defined with ‘\@startsection’, for the ‘article’, ‘book’, and
+‘report’ classes.
- * For 'section': LEVEL is 1, INDENT is 0pt, BEFORESKIP is '-3.5ex
- plus -1ex minus -0.2ex', AFTERSKIP is '2.3ex plus 0.2ex', and STYLE
- is '\normalfont\Large\bfseries'.
+ • For ‘section’: LEVEL is 1, INDENT is 0pt, BEFORESKIP is ‘-3.5ex
+ plus -1ex minus -0.2ex’, AFTERSKIP is ‘2.3ex plus 0.2ex’, and STYLE
+ is ‘\normalfont\Large\bfseries’.
- * For 'subsection': LEVEL is 2, INDENT is 0pt, BEFORESKIP is '-3.25ex
- plus -1ex minus -0.2ex', AFTERSKIP is '1.5ex plus 0.2ex', and STYLE
- is '\normalfont\large\bfseries'.
+ • For ‘subsection’: LEVEL is 2, INDENT is 0pt, BEFORESKIP is ‘-3.25ex
+ plus -1ex minus -0.2ex’, AFTERSKIP is ‘1.5ex plus 0.2ex’, and STYLE
+ is ‘\normalfont\large\bfseries’.
- * For 'subsubsection': LEVEL is 3, INDENT is 0pt, BEFORESKIP is
- '-3.25ex plus -1ex minus -0.2ex', AFTERSKIP is '1.5ex plus 0.2ex',
- and STYLE is '\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries'.
+ • For ‘subsubsection’: LEVEL is 3, INDENT is 0pt, BEFORESKIP is
+ ‘-3.25ex plus -1ex minus -0.2ex’, AFTERSKIP is ‘1.5ex plus 0.2ex’,
+ and STYLE is ‘\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries’.
Some examples follow. These go either in a package or class file or
in the preamble of a LaTeX document. If you put them in the preamble
-they must go between a '\makeatletter' command and a '\makeatother'.
-(Probably the error message 'You can't use `\spacefactor' in vertical
-mode.' means that you forgot this.) *Note \makeatletter &
+they must go between a ‘\makeatletter’ command and a ‘\makeatother’.
+(Probably the error message ‘You can't use `\spacefactor' in vertical
+mode.’ means that you forgot this.) *Note \makeatletter &
\makeatother::.
This will put section titles in large boldface type, centered. It
-says '\renewcommand' because LaTeX's standard classes have already
-defined a '\section'. For the same reason it does not define a
-'section' counter, or the commands '\thesection' and '\l at section'.
+says ‘\renewcommand’ because LaTeX’s standard classes have already
+defined a ‘\section’. For the same reason it does not define a
+‘section’ counter, or the commands ‘\thesection’ and ‘\l at section’.
\renewcommand\section{%
\@startsection{section}% *note NAME: \@startsection/name.
@@ -3244,7 +3248,7 @@
{\centering\normalfont\Large\bfseries}% *note STYLE: \@startsection/style.
}
- This will put 'subsection' titles in small caps type, inline with the
+ This will put ‘subsection’ titles in small caps type, inline with the
paragraph.
\renewcommand\subsection{%
@@ -3280,10 +3284,10 @@
7 Cross references
******************
-We often want something like 'See Theorem~31'. But by-hand typing the
-31 is poor practice. Instead you should write a "label" such as
-'\label{eq:GreensThm}' and then "reference" it, as with 'See
-equation~\ref{eq:GreensThm}'. LaTeX will automatically work out the
+We often want something like ‘See Theorem~31’. But by-hand typing the
+31 is poor practice. Instead you should write a “label” such as
+‘\label{eq:GreensThm}’ and then “reference” it, as with ‘See
+equation~\ref{eq:GreensThm}’. LaTeX will automatically work out the
number, put it into the output, and will change that number later if
needed.
@@ -3296,26 +3300,26 @@
See Theorem~\ref{th:GreensThm} on page~\pageref{th:GreensThm}.
LaTeX tracks cross reference information in a file having the
-extension '.aux' and with the same base name as the file containing the
-'\label'. So if '\label' is in 'calculus.tex' then the information is
-in 'calculus.aux'. LaTeX puts the information in that file every time
-it runs across a '\label'.
+extension ‘.aux’ and with the same base name as the file containing the
+‘\label’. So if ‘\label’ is in ‘calculus.tex’ then the information is
+in ‘calculus.aux’. LaTeX puts the information in that file every time
+it runs across a ‘\label’.
The behavior described in the prior paragraph results in a quirk that
-happens when your document has a "forward reference", a '\ref' that
-appears before the associated '\label'. If this is the first time that
-you are compiling the document then you will get 'LaTeX Warning:
-Label(s) may have changed. Rerun to get cross references right' and in
-the output the forward reference will appear as two question marks '??',
+happens when your document has a “forward reference”, a ‘\ref’ that
+appears before the associated ‘\label’. If this is the first time that
+you are compiling the document then you will get ‘LaTeX Warning:
+Label(s) may have changed. Rerun to get cross references right’ and in
+the output the forward reference will appear as two question marks ‘??’,
in boldface. A similar thing happens if you change some things so the
references changes; you get the same warning and the output contains the
old reference information. In both cases, resolve this by compiling the
document a second time.
- The 'cleveref' package enhances LaTeX's cross referencing features.
+ The ‘cleveref’ package enhances LaTeX’s cross referencing features.
You can arrange that if you enter
-'\begin{thm}\label{th:Nerode}...\end{thm}' then '\cref{th:Nerode}' will
-output 'Theorem 3.21', without you having to enter the "Theorem."
+‘\begin{thm}\label{th:Nerode}...\end{thm}’ then ‘\cref{th:Nerode}’ will
+output ‘Theorem 3.21’, without you having to enter the “Theorem.”
* Menu:
@@ -3327,7 +3331,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \label, Next: \pageref, Up: Cross references
-7.1 '\label'
+7.1 ‘\label’
============
Synopsis:
@@ -3334,11 +3338,11 @@
\label{KEY}
- Assign a reference number to KEY. In ordinary text '\label{KEY}'
+ Assign a reference number to KEY. In ordinary text ‘\label{KEY}’
assigns to KEY the number of the current sectional unit. Inside an
-environment with numbering, such as a 'table' or 'theorem' environment,
-'\label{KEY}' assigns to KEY the number of that environment. Retrieve
-the assigned number with the '\ref{KEY}' command (*note \ref::).
+environment with numbering, such as a ‘table’ or ‘theorem’ environment,
+‘\label{KEY}’ assigns to KEY the number of that environment. Retrieve
+the assigned number with the ‘\ref{KEY}’ command (*note \ref::).
A key name can consist of any sequence of letters, digits, or common
punctuation characters. Upper and lowercase letters are distinguished,
@@ -3345,34 +3349,34 @@
as usual.
A common convention is to use labels consisting of a prefix and a
-suffix separated by a colon or period. Thus, '\label{fig:Post}' is a
+suffix separated by a colon or period. Thus, ‘\label{fig:Post}’ is a
label for a figure with a portrait of Emil Post. This helps to avoid
accidentally creating two labels with the same name, and makes your
source more readable. Some commonly-used prefixes:
-'ch'
+‘ch’
for chapters
-'sec'
-'subsec'
+‘sec’
+‘subsec’
for lower-level sectioning commands
-'fig'
+‘fig’
for figures
-'tab'
+‘tab’
for tables
-'eq'
+‘eq’
for equations
In the auxiliary file the reference information is kept as the text
-of a command of the form '\newlabel{LABEL}{{CURRENTLABEL}{PAGENUMBER}}'.
-Here CURRENTLABEL is the current value of the macro '\@currentlabel'
-that is usually updated whenever you call '\refstepcounter{COUNTER}'.
+of a command of the form ‘\newlabel{LABEL}{{CURRENTLABEL}{PAGENUMBER}}’.
+Here CURRENTLABEL is the current value of the macro ‘\@currentlabel’
+that is usually updated whenever you call ‘\refstepcounter{COUNTER}’.
- Below, the key 'sec:test' will get the number of the current section
-and the key 'fig:test' will get the number of the figure.
+ Below, the key ‘sec:test’ will get the number of the current section
+and the key ‘fig:test’ will get the number of the figure.
(Incidentally, put labels after captions in figures and tables.)
\section{section name}
@@ -3388,7 +3392,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \pageref, Next: \ref, Prev: \label, Up: Cross references
-7.2 '\pageref'
+7.2 ‘\pageref’
==============
Synopsis:
@@ -3396,12 +3400,12 @@
\pageref{KEY}
Produce the page number of the place in the text where the
-corresponding '\label'{KEY} command appears.
+corresponding ‘\label’{KEY} command appears.
- If there is no '\label{KEY}' then you get something like 'LaTeX
-Warning: Reference `th:GrensThm' on page 1 undefined on input line 11.'
+ If there is no ‘\label{KEY}’ then you get something like ‘LaTeX
+Warning: Reference `th:GrensThm' on page 1 undefined on input line 11.’
- Below, the '\label{eq:main}' is used both for the formula number and
+ Below, the ‘\label{eq:main}’ is used both for the formula number and
for the page number. (Note that the two references are forward
references so this document would need to be compiled twice to resolve
those.)
@@ -3415,7 +3419,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \ref, Next: xr package, Prev: \pageref, Up: Cross references
-7.3 '\ref'
+7.3 ‘\ref’
==========
Synopsis:
@@ -3423,15 +3427,15 @@
\ref{KEY}
Produces the number of the sectional unit, equation, footnote,
-figure, ..., of the corresponding '\label' command (*note \label::). It
-does not produce any text, such as the word 'Section' or 'Figure', just
+figure, ..., of the corresponding ‘\label’ command (*note \label::). It
+does not produce any text, such as the word ‘Section’ or ‘Figure’, just
the bare number itself.
- If there is no '\label{KEY}' then you get something like 'LaTeX
-Warning: Reference `th:GrensThm' on page 1 undefined on input line 11.'
+ If there is no ‘\label{KEY}’ then you get something like ‘LaTeX
+Warning: Reference `th:GrensThm' on page 1 undefined on input line 11.’
- In this example the '\ref{popular}' produces '2'. Note that it is a
-forward reference since it comes before '\label{popular}' so this
+ In this example the ‘\ref{popular}’ produces ‘2’. Note that it is a
+forward reference since it comes before ‘\label{popular}’ so this
document would have to be compiled twice.
The most widely-used format is item number~\ref{popular}.
@@ -3441,13 +3445,13 @@
\item Con\TeX t
\end{enumerate}
- The 'cleveref' package includes text such as 'Theorem' in the
+ The ‘cleveref’ package includes text such as ‘Theorem’ in the
reference. See the documentation on CTAN.
File: latex2e.info, Node: xr package, Prev: \ref, Up: Cross references
-7.4 'xr' package
+7.4 ‘xr’ package
================
Synopsis:
@@ -3461,9 +3465,9 @@
\externaldocument[REFERENCE-PREFIX]{DOCUMENT-BASENAME}
Make cross references to the external document
-'DOCUMENT-BASENAME.tex'.
+‘DOCUMENT-BASENAME.tex’.
- Here is an example. If 'lectures.tex' has this in the preamble
+ Here is an example. If ‘lectures.tex’ has this in the preamble
\usepackage{xr}
\externaldocument{exercises}
@@ -3471,34 +3475,34 @@
\externaldocument{answers}
then it can use cross reference labels from the other three documents.
-Suppose that 'exercises.tex' has an enumerated list containing this,
+Suppose that ‘exercises.tex’ has an enumerated list containing this,
\item \label{exer:EulersThm} What if every vertex has odd degree?
-and 'hints.tex' has an enumerated list with this,
+and ‘hints.tex’ has an enumerated list with this,
\item \label{exer:EulersThm} Distinguish the case of two vertices.
-and 'answers.tex' has an enumerated list with this,
+and ‘answers.tex’ has an enumerated list with this,
\item \label{ans:EulersThm} There is no Euler path, except if there
are exactly two vertices.
After compiling the exercises, hints, and answers documents, entering
-this in the body of 'lectures.tex' will result in the lectures getting
+this in the body of ‘lectures.tex’ will result in the lectures getting
the reference numbers used in the other documents.
See Exercise~\ref{exer:EulersThm}, with Hint~\ref{H-exer:EulersThm}.
The solution is Answer~\ref{ans:EulersThm}.
- The prefix 'H-' for the reference from the hints file is needed
+ The prefix ‘H-’ for the reference from the hints file is needed
because the label in the hints file is the same as the label in the
exercises file. Without that prefix, both references would get the
number from the later file.
- Note: if the document uses the 'hyperref' package then in place of
-'xr', put '\usepackage{xr-hyper}' before the '\usepackage{hyperref}'.
-Also, if any of the multiple documents uses 'hyperref' then they all
+ Note: if the document uses the ‘hyperref’ package then in place of
+‘xr’, put ‘\usepackage{xr-hyper}’ before the ‘\usepackage{hyperref}’.
+Also, if any of the multiple documents uses ‘hyperref’ then they all
must use it.
@@ -3508,7 +3512,7 @@
**************
LaTeX provides many environments for delimiting certain behavior. An
-environment begins with '\begin' and ends with '\end', like this:
+environment begins with ‘\begin’ and ends with ‘\end’, like this:
\begin{ENVIRONMENT-NAME}
...
@@ -3515,9 +3519,9 @@
\end{ENVIRONMENT-NAME}
The ENVIRONMENT-NAME at the beginning must exactly match that at the
-end. For instance, the input '\begin{table*}...\end{table}' will cause
-an error like: '! LaTeX Error: \begin{table*} on input line 5 ended by
-\end{table}.'
+end. For instance, the input ‘\begin{table*}...\end{table}’ will cause
+an error like: ‘! LaTeX Error: \begin{table*} on input line 5 ended by
+\end{table}.’
Environments are executed within a group.
@@ -3555,7 +3559,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: abstract, Next: array, Up: Environments
-8.1 'abstract'
+8.1 ‘abstract’
==============
Synopsis:
@@ -3565,13 +3569,13 @@
\end{abstract}
Produce an abstract, possibly of multiple paragraphs. This
-environment is only defined in the 'article' and 'report' document
+environment is only defined in the ‘article’ and ‘report’ document
classes (*note Document classes::).
- Using the example below in the 'article' class produces a displayed
-paragraph. Document class option 'titlepage' causes the abstract to be
+ Using the example below in the ‘article’ class produces a displayed
+paragraph. Document class option ‘titlepage’ causes the abstract to be
on a separate page (*note Document class options::); this is the default
-only in the 'report' class.
+only in the ‘report’ class.
\begin{abstract}
We compare all known accounts of the proposal made by Porter Alexander
@@ -3580,7 +3584,7 @@
\end{abstract}
The next example produces a one column abstract in a two column
-document (for a more flexible solution, use the package 'abstract').
+document (for a more flexible solution, use the package ‘abstract’).
\documentclass[twocolumn]{article}
...
@@ -3604,7 +3608,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: array, Next: center, Prev: abstract, Up: Environments
-8.2 'array'
+8.2 ‘array’
===========
Synopsis:
@@ -3623,8 +3627,8 @@
Produce a mathematical array. This environment can only be used in
math mode (*note Modes::), and normally appears within a displayed
-mathematics environment such as 'equation' (*note equation::). Inside
-of each row the column entries are separated by an ampersand, ('&').
+mathematics environment such as ‘equation’ (*note equation::). Inside
+of each row the column entries are separated by an ampersand, (‘&’).
Rows are terminated with double-backslashes (*note \\::).
This example shows a three by three array.
@@ -3642,29 +3646,29 @@
The required argument COLS describes the number of columns, their
alignment, and the formatting of the intercolumn regions. For instance,
-'\begin{array}{rcl}...\end{array}' gives three columns: the first flush
+‘\begin{array}{rcl}...\end{array}’ gives three columns: the first flush
right, the second centered, and the third flush left. See *note
tabular:: for the complete description of COLS and of the other common
features of the two environments, including the optional POS argument.
- There are two ways that 'array' diverges from 'tabular'. The first
-is that 'array' entries are typeset in math mode, in textstyle (*note
+ There are two ways that ‘array’ diverges from ‘tabular’. The first
+is that ‘array’ entries are typeset in math mode, in textstyle (*note
Math styles::) except if the COLS definition specifies the column with
-'p{...}', which causes the entry to be typeset in text mode. The second
-is that, instead of 'tabular''s parameter '\tabcolsep', LaTeX's
-intercolumn space in an 'array' is governed by '\arraycolsep', which
-gives half the width between columns. The default for this is '5pt' so
+‘p{...}’, which causes the entry to be typeset in text mode. The second
+is that, instead of ‘tabular’’s parameter ‘\tabcolsep’, LaTeX’s
+intercolumn space in an ‘array’ is governed by ‘\arraycolsep’, which
+gives half the width between columns. The default for this is ‘5pt’ so
that between two columns comes 10pt of space.
- To obtain arrays with braces the standard is to use the 'amsmath'
-package. It comes with environments 'pmatrix' for an array surrounded
-by parentheses '(...)', 'bmatrix' for an array surrounded by square
-brackets '[...]', 'Bmatrix' for an array surrounded by curly
-braces '{...}', 'vmatrix' for an array surrounded by vertical
-bars '|...|', and 'Vmatrix' for an array surrounded by double vertical
-bars '||...||', along with a number of other array constructs.
+ To obtain arrays with braces the standard is to use the ‘amsmath’
+package. It comes with environments ‘pmatrix’ for an array surrounded
+by parentheses ‘(...)’, ‘bmatrix’ for an array surrounded by square
+brackets ‘[...]’, ‘Bmatrix’ for an array surrounded by curly
+braces ‘{...}’, ‘vmatrix’ for an array surrounded by vertical
+bars ‘|...|’, and ‘Vmatrix’ for an array surrounded by double vertical
+bars ‘||...||’, along with a number of other array constructs.
- The next example uses the 'amsmath' package.
+ The next example uses the ‘amsmath’ package.
\usepackage{amsmath} % in preamble
@@ -3675,8 +3679,8 @@
\end{vmatrix}=ad-bc
\end{equation}
- There are many packages concerning arrays. The 'array' package has
-many useful extensions, including more column types. The 'dcolumn'
+ There are many packages concerning arrays. The ‘array’ package has
+many useful extensions, including more column types. The ‘dcolumn’
package adds a column type to center on a decimal point. For both see
the documentation on CTAN.
@@ -3683,7 +3687,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: center, Next: description, Prev: array, Up: Environments
-8.3 'center'
+8.3 ‘center’
============
Synopsis:
@@ -3695,13 +3699,13 @@
\end{center}
Create a new paragraph consisting of a sequence of lines that are
-centered within the left and right margins. Use double-backslash, '\\',
+centered within the left and right margins. Use double-backslash, ‘\\’,
to get a line break (*note \\::). If some text is too long to fit on a
line then LaTeX will insert line breaks that avoid hyphenation and avoid
stretching or shrinking any interword space.
This environment inserts space above and below the text body. See
-*note \centering:: to avoid such space, for example inside a 'figure'
+*note \centering:: to avoid such space, for example inside a ‘figure’
environment.
This example produces three centered lines. There is extra vertical
@@ -3713,7 +3717,7 @@
the School of Environmental Engineering
\end{center}
- In this example, depending on the page's line width, LaTeX may choose
+ In this example, depending on the page’s line width, LaTeX may choose
a line break for the part before the double backslash. If so, it will
center each of the two lines and if not it will center the single line.
Then LaTeX will break at the double backslash, and will center the
@@ -3726,7 +3730,7 @@
\end{center}
A double backslash after the final line is optional. If present it
-doesn't add any vertical space.
+doesn’t add any vertical space.
In a two-column document the text is centered in a column, not in the
entire page.
@@ -3733,12 +3737,12 @@
* Menu:
-* \centering:: Declaration form of the 'center' environment.
+* \centering:: Declaration form of the ‘center’ environment.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \centering, Up: center
-8.3.1 '\centering'
+8.3.1 ‘\centering’
------------------
Synopsis:
@@ -3752,9 +3756,9 @@
\end{group}
Center the material in its scope. It is most often used inside an
-environment such as 'figure', or in a 'parbox'.
+environment such as ‘figure’, or in a ‘parbox’.
- This example's '\centering' declaration causes the graphic to be
+ This example’s ‘\centering’ declaration causes the graphic to be
horizontally centered.
\begin{figure}
@@ -3763,27 +3767,27 @@
\caption{CTAN Lion} \label{fig:CTANLion}
\end{figure}
-The scope of this '\centering' ends with the '\end{figure}'.
+The scope of this ‘\centering’ ends with the ‘\end{figure}’.
- Unlike the 'center' environment, the '\centering' command does not
-add vertical space above and below the text. That's its advantage in
+ Unlike the ‘center’ environment, the ‘\centering’ command does not
+add vertical space above and below the text. That’s its advantage in
the above example; there is not an excess of space.
It also does not start a new paragraph; it simply changes how LaTeX
-formats paragraph units. If 'ww {\centering xx \\ yy} zz' is surrounded
-by blank lines then LaTeX will create a paragraph whose first line 'ww
-xx' is centered and whose second line, not centered, contains 'yy zz'.
+formats paragraph units. If ‘ww {\centering xx \\ yy} zz’ is surrounded
+by blank lines then LaTeX will create a paragraph whose first line ‘ww
+xx’ is centered and whose second line, not centered, contains ‘yy zz’.
Usually what is desired is for the scope of the declaration to contain a
-blank line or the '\end' command of an environment such as 'figure' or
-'table' that ends the paragraph unit. Thus, if '{\centering xx \\
-yy\par} zz' is surrounded by blank lines then it makes a new paragraph
-with two centered lines 'xx' and 'yy', followed by a new paragraph with
-'zz' that is formatted as usual.
+blank line or the ‘\end’ command of an environment such as ‘figure’ or
+‘table’ that ends the paragraph unit. Thus, if ‘{\centering xx \\
+yy\par} zz’ is surrounded by blank lines then it makes a new paragraph
+with two centered lines ‘xx’ and ‘yy’, followed by a new paragraph with
+‘zz’ that is formatted as usual.
File: latex2e.info, Node: description, Next: displaymath, Prev: center, Up: Environments
-8.4 'description'
+8.4 ‘description’
=================
Synopsis:
@@ -3794,11 +3798,11 @@
...
\end{description}
- Environment to make a list of labeled items. Each item's LABEL is
+ Environment to make a list of labeled items. Each item’s LABEL is
typeset in bold and is flush left, so that long labels continue into the
first line of the item text. There must be at least one item; having
-none causes the LaTeX error 'Something's wrong--perhaps a missing
-\item'.
+none causes the LaTeX error ‘Something's wrong--perhaps a missing
+\item’.
This example shows the environment used for a sequence of
definitions.
@@ -3808,31 +3812,31 @@
\item[llama] A beast.
\end{description}
-The labels 'lama' and 'llama' are output in boldface, with the left edge
+The labels ‘lama’ and ‘llama’ are output in boldface, with the left edge
on the left margin.
- Start list items with the '\item' command (*note \item::). Use the
-optional labels, as in '\item[Main point]', because there is no sensible
-default. Following the '\item' is optional text, which may contain
+ Start list items with the ‘\item’ command (*note \item::). Use the
+optional labels, as in ‘\item[Main point]’, because there is no sensible
+default. Following the ‘\item’ is optional text, which may contain
multiple paragraphs.
Since the labels are in bold style, if the label text calls for a
font change given in argument style (see *note Font styles::) then it
will come out bold. For instance, if the label text calls for
-typewriter with '\item[\texttt{label text}]' then it will appear in bold
+typewriter with ‘\item[\texttt{label text}]’ then it will appear in bold
typewriter, if that is available. The simplest way around this, in this
example to get non-bold typewriter, is to use declarative style:
-'\item[{\tt label text}]'. Similarly, get the standard roman font with
-'\item[{\rm label text}]'.
+‘\item[{\tt label text}]’. Similarly, get the standard roman font with
+‘\item[{\rm label text}]’.
For other major LaTeX labelled list environments, see *note itemize::
-and *note enumerate::. Unlike those environments, nesting 'description'
+and *note enumerate::. Unlike those environments, nesting ‘description’
environments does not change the default label; it is boldface and flush
left at all levels.
For information about list layout parameters, including the default
values, and for information about customizing list layout, see *note
-list::. The package 'enumitem' is useful for customizing lists.
+list::. The package ‘enumitem’ is useful for customizing lists.
This example changes the description labels to small caps.
@@ -3842,7 +3846,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: displaymath, Next: document, Prev: description, Up: Environments
-8.5 'displaymath'
+8.5 ‘displaymath’
=================
Synopsis:
@@ -3853,29 +3857,29 @@
Environment to typeset the MATHEMATICAL TEXT on its own line, in
display style and centered. To make the text be flush-left use the
-global option 'fleqn'; see *note Document class options::.
+global option ‘fleqn’; see *note Document class options::.
- In the 'displaymath' environment no equation number is added to the
-math text. One way to get an equation number is to use the 'equation'
+ In the ‘displaymath’ environment no equation number is added to the
+math text. One way to get an equation number is to use the ‘equation’
environment (*note equation::).
LaTeX will not break the MATH TEXT across lines.
- Note that the 'amsmath' package has significantly more extensive
+ Note that the ‘amsmath’ package has significantly more extensive
displayed equation facilities. For example, there are a number of ways
in that package for having math text broken across lines.
- The construct '\[MATH\]' is a synonym for the environment
-'\begin{displaymath} MATH \end{displaymath}' but the latter is easier to
+ The construct ‘\[MATH\]’ is a synonym for the environment
+‘\begin{displaymath} MATH \end{displaymath}’ but the latter is easier to
work with in the source; for instance, searching for a square bracket
-may get false positives but the word 'displaymath' will likely be
+may get false positives but the word ‘displaymath’ will likely be
unique.
- (Aside: The construct '$$MATH$$' from Plain TeX is sometimes
-mistakenly used as a synonym for 'displaymath'. It is not a synonym,
-and is not officially supported in LaTeX at all; '$$' doesn't support
-the 'fleqn' option (*note Document class options::), has different
-vertical spacing, and doesn't perform consistency checks.)
+ (Aside: The construct ‘$$MATH$$’ from Plain TeX is sometimes
+mistakenly used as a synonym for ‘displaymath’. It is not a synonym,
+and is not officially supported in LaTeX at all; ‘$$’ doesn’t support
+the ‘fleqn’ option (*note Document class options::), has different
+vertical spacing, and doesn’t perform consistency checks.)
The output from this example is centered and alone on its line.
@@ -3883,16 +3887,16 @@
\int_1^2 x^2\,dx=7/3
\end{displaymath}
-Also, the integral sign is larger than the inline version '\( \int_1^2
-x^2\,dx=7/3 \)' produces.
+Also, the integral sign is larger than the inline version ‘\( \int_1^2
+x^2\,dx=7/3 \)’ produces.
File: latex2e.info, Node: document, Next: enumerate, Prev: displaymath, Up: Environments
-8.6 'document'
+8.6 ‘document’
==============
-The 'document' environment encloses the entire body of a document. It
+The ‘document’ environment encloses the entire body of a document. It
is required in every LaTeX document. *Note Starting and ending::.
* Menu:
@@ -3903,7 +3907,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \AtBeginDocument, Next: \AtEndDocument, Up: document
-8.6.1 '\AtBeginDocument'
+8.6.1 ‘\AtBeginDocument’
------------------------
Synopsis:
@@ -3910,7 +3914,7 @@
\AtBeginDocument{CODE}
- Save CODE and execute it when '\begin{document}' is executed, at the
+ Save CODE and execute it when ‘\begin{document}’ is executed, at the
very end of the preamble. The code is executed after the font selection
tables have been set up, so the normal font for the document is the
current font. However, the code is executed as part of the preamble so
@@ -3922,7 +3926,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \AtEndDocument, Prev: \AtBeginDocument, Up: document
-8.6.2 '\AtEndDocument'
+8.6.2 ‘\AtEndDocument’
----------------------
Synopsis:
@@ -3930,10 +3934,10 @@
\AtEndDocument{CODE}
Save CODE and execute it near the end of the document. Specifically,
-it is executed when '\end{document}' is executed, before the final page
+it is executed when ‘\end{document}’ is executed, before the final page
is finished and before any leftover floating environments are processed.
If you want some of the code to be executed after these two processes
-then include a '\clearpage' at the appropriate point in CODE.
+then include a ‘\clearpage’ at the appropriate point in CODE.
You can issue this command more than once; the successive code lines
will be executed in the order that you gave them.
@@ -3941,7 +3945,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: enumerate, Next: eqnarray, Prev: document, Up: Environments
-8.7 'enumerate'
+8.7 ‘enumerate’
===============
Synopsis:
@@ -3954,13 +3958,13 @@
Environment to produce a numbered list of items. The format of the
label numbering depends on the nesting level of this environment; see
-below. The default top-level numbering is '1.', '2.', etc. Each
-'enumerate' list environment must have at least one item; having none
-causes the LaTeX error 'Something's wrong--perhaps a missing \item'.
+below. The default top-level numbering is ‘1.’, ‘2.’, etc. Each
+‘enumerate’ list environment must have at least one item; having none
+causes the LaTeX error ‘Something's wrong--perhaps a missing \item’.
This example gives the first two finishers in the 1908 Olympic
-marathon. As a top-level list the labels would come out as '1.' and
-'2.'.
+marathon. As a top-level list the labels would come out as ‘1.’ and
+‘2.’.
\begin{enumerate}
\item Johnny Hayes (USA)
@@ -3967,36 +3971,36 @@
\item Charles Hefferon (RSA)
\end{enumerate}
- Start list items with the '\item' command (*note \item::). If you
-give '\item' an optional argument by following it with square brackets,
-as in '\item[Interstitial label]', then the next item will continue the
+ Start list items with the ‘\item’ command (*note \item::). If you
+give ‘\item’ an optional argument by following it with square brackets,
+as in ‘\item[Interstitial label]’, then the next item will continue the
interrupted sequence (*note \item::). That is, you will get labels like
-'1.', then 'Interstitial label', then '2.'. Following the '\item' is
+‘1.’, then ‘Interstitial label’, then ‘2.’. Following the ‘\item’ is
optional text, which may contain multiple paragraphs.
- Enumerations may be nested within other 'enumerate' environments, or
-within any paragraph-making environment such as 'itemize' (*note
-itemize::), up to four levels deep. This gives LaTeX's default for the
+ Enumerations may be nested within other ‘enumerate’ environments, or
+within any paragraph-making environment such as ‘itemize’ (*note
+itemize::), up to four levels deep. This gives LaTeX’s default for the
format at each nesting level, where 1 is the top level, the outermost
level.
- 1. arabic number followed by a period: '1.', '2.', ...
- 2. lowercase letter inside parentheses: '(a)', '(b)' ...
- 3. lowercase roman numeral followed by a period: 'i.', 'ii.', ...
- 4. uppercase letter followed by a period: 'A.', 'B.', ...
+ 1. arabic number followed by a period: ‘1.’, ‘2.’, ...
+ 2. lowercase letter inside parentheses: ‘(a)’, ‘(b)’ ...
+ 3. lowercase roman numeral followed by a period: ‘i.’, ‘ii.’, ...
+ 4. uppercase letter followed by a period: ‘A.’, ‘B.’, ...
- The 'enumerate' environment uses the counters '\enumi' through
-'\enumiv' (*note Counters::).
+ The ‘enumerate’ environment uses the counters ‘\enumi’ through
+‘\enumiv’ (*note Counters::).
For other major LaTeX labeled list environments, see *note
description:: and *note itemize::. For information about list layout
parameters, including the default values, and for information about
-customizing list layout, see *note list::. The package 'enumitem' is
+customizing list layout, see *note list::. The package ‘enumitem’ is
useful for customizing lists.
- To change the format of the label use '\renewcommand' (*note
-\newcommand & \renewcommand::) on the commands '\labelenumi' through
-'\labelenumiv'. For instance, this first level list will be labelled
+ To change the format of the label use ‘\renewcommand’ (*note
+\newcommand & \renewcommand::) on the commands ‘\labelenumi’ through
+‘\labelenumiv’. For instance, this first level list will be labelled
with uppercase letters, in boldface, and without a trailing period.
\renewcommand{\labelenumi}{\textbf{\Alph{enumi}}}
@@ -4011,15 +4015,15 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: eqnarray, Next: equation, Prev: enumerate, Up: Environments
-8.8 'eqnarray'
+8.8 ‘eqnarray’
==============
-The 'eqnarray' environment is obsolete. It has infelicities, including
+The ‘eqnarray’ environment is obsolete. It has infelicities, including
spacing that is inconsistent with other mathematics elements. (See
-"Avoid eqnarray!" by Lars Madsen
+“Avoid eqnarray!” by Lars Madsen
<https://tug.org/TUGboat/tb33-1/tb103madsen.pdf>). New documents should
-include the 'amsmath' package and use the displayed mathematics
-environments provided there, such as the 'align' environment. We
+include the ‘amsmath’ package and use the displayed mathematics
+environments provided there, such as the ‘align’ environment. We
include a description only for completeness and for working with old
documents.
@@ -4041,18 +4045,18 @@
sides are typeset in display mode, while the middle is typeset in text
mode.
- It is similar to a three-column 'array' environment, with items
-within a row separated by an ampersand ('&'), and with rows separated by
-double backslash '\\'). The starred form of line break ('\\*') can
+ It is similar to a three-column ‘array’ environment, with items
+within a row separated by an ampersand (‘&’), and with rows separated by
+double backslash ‘\\’). The starred form of line break (‘\\*’) can
also be used to separate equations, and will disallow a page break there
(*note \\::).
- The unstarred form 'eqnarray' places an equation number on every line
-(using the 'equation' counter), unless that line contains a '\nonumber'
-command. The starred form 'eqnarray*' omits equation numbering, while
+ The unstarred form ‘eqnarray’ places an equation number on every line
+(using the ‘equation’ counter), unless that line contains a ‘\nonumber’
+command. The starred form ‘eqnarray*’ omits equation numbering, while
otherwise being the same.
- The command '\lefteqn' is used for splitting long formulas across
+ The command ‘\lefteqn’ is used for splitting long formulas across
lines. It typesets its argument in display style flush left in a box of
zero width.
@@ -4068,7 +4072,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: equation, Next: figure, Prev: eqnarray, Up: Environments
-8.9 'equation'
+8.9 ‘equation’
==============
Synopsis:
@@ -4077,21 +4081,21 @@
MATHEMATICAL TEXT
\end{equation}
- The same as a 'displaymath' environment (*note displaymath::) except
+ The same as a ‘displaymath’ environment (*note displaymath::) except
that LaTeX puts an equation number flush to the right margin. The
-equation number is generated using the 'equation' counter.
+equation number is generated using the ‘equation’ counter.
- You should have no blank lines between '\begin{equation}' and
-'\begin{equation}', or LaTeX will tell you that there is a missing
+ You should have no blank lines between ‘\begin{equation}’ and
+‘\begin{equation}’, or LaTeX will tell you that there is a missing
dollar sign.
- The package 'amsmath' package has extensive displayed equation
+ The package ‘amsmath’ package has extensive displayed equation
facilities. New documents should include this package.
File: latex2e.info, Node: figure, Next: filecontents, Prev: equation, Up: Environments
-8.10 'figure'
+8.10 ‘figure’
=============
Synopsis:
@@ -4113,26 +4117,26 @@
Figures are for material that is not part of the normal text. An
example is material that you cannot have split between two pages, such
as a graphic. Because of this, LaTeX does not typeset figures in
-sequence with normal text but instead "floats" them to a convenient
+sequence with normal text but instead “floats” them to a convenient
place, such as the top of a following page (*note Floats::).
The FIGURE BODY can consist of imported graphics (*note Graphics::),
-or text, LaTeX commands, etc. It is typeset in a 'parbox' of width
-'\textwidth'.
+or text, LaTeX commands, etc. It is typeset in a ‘parbox’ of width
+‘\textwidth’.
- The possible values of PLACEMENT are 'h' for 'here', 't' for 'top',
-'b' for 'bottom', and 'p' for 'on a separate page of floats'. For the
+ The possible values of PLACEMENT are ‘h’ for ‘here’, ‘t’ for ‘top’,
+‘b’ for ‘bottom’, and ‘p’ for ‘on a separate page of floats’. For the
effect of these options on the float placement algorithm, see *note
Floats::.
- The starred form 'figure*' is used when a document is in
+ The starred form ‘figure*’ is used when a document is in
double-column mode (*note \twocolumn::). It produces a figure that
spans both columns, at the top of the page. To add the possibility of
-placing at a page bottom see the discussion of PLACEMENT 'b' in *note
+placing at a page bottom see the discussion of PLACEMENT ‘b’ in *note
Floats::.
The label is optional; it is used for cross references (*note Cross
-references::). The optional '\caption' command specifies caption text
+references::). The optional ‘\caption’ command specifies caption text
for the figure (*note \caption::). By default it is numbered. If
LOFTITLE is present, it is used in the list of figures instead of TITLE
(*note Table of contents etc.::).
@@ -4152,7 +4156,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: filecontents, Next: flushleft, Prev: figure, Up: Environments
-8.11 'filecontents'
+8.11 ‘filecontents’
===================
Synopsis:
@@ -4171,21 +4175,21 @@
directory, if specified; *note output directory::) and write TEXT to it.
By default, an existing file is not overwritten.
- The unstarred version of the environment 'filecontents' prefixes the
+ The unstarred version of the environment ‘filecontents’ prefixes the
content of the created file with a header of TeX comments; see the
-example below. The starred version 'filecontents*' does not include the
+example below. The starred version ‘filecontents*’ does not include the
header.
The possible options are:
-'force'
-'overwrite'
+‘force’
+‘overwrite’
Overwrite an existing file.
-'noheader'
- Omit the header. Equivalent to using 'filecontents*'.
+‘noheader’
+ Omit the header. Equivalent to using ‘filecontents*’.
-'nosearch'
+‘nosearch’
Only check the current directory (and the output directory, if
specified) for an existing file, not the entire search path.
@@ -4192,8 +4196,8 @@
These options were added in a 2019 release of LaTeX.
This environment can be used anywhere in the preamble, although it
-often appears before the '\documentclass' command. It is commonly used
-to create a '.bib' or other such data file from the main document
+often appears before the ‘\documentclass’ command. It is commonly used
+to create a ‘.bib’ or other such data file from the main document
source, to make the source file self-contained. Similarly, it can be
used to create a custom style or class file, again making the source
self-contained.
@@ -4209,7 +4213,7 @@
Article by \myname.
\end{document}
-produces this file 'JH.sty':
+produces this file ‘JH.sty’:
%% LaTeX2e file `JH.sty'
%% generated by the `filecontents' environment
@@ -4220,7 +4224,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: flushleft, Next: flushright, Prev: filecontents, Up: Environments
-8.12 'flushleft'
+8.12 ‘flushleft’
================
Synopsis:
@@ -4235,7 +4239,7 @@
left-hand margin, and ragged right. If you have lines that are too long
then LaTeX will linebreak them in a way that avoids hyphenation and
stretching or shrinking interword spaces. To force a new line use a
-double backslash, '\\'. For the declaration form see *note
+double backslash, ‘\\’. For the declaration form see *note
\raggedright::.
This creates a box of text that is at most 3 inches wide, with the
@@ -4251,12 +4255,12 @@
* Menu:
-* \raggedright:: Declaration form of the 'flushleft' environment.
+* \raggedright:: Declaration form of the ‘flushleft’ environment.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \raggedright, Up: flushleft
-8.12.1 '\raggedright'
+8.12.1 ‘\raggedright’
---------------------
Synopses:
@@ -4270,18 +4274,18 @@
\end{ENVIRONMENT}
A declaration which causes lines to be flush to the left margin and
-ragged right. It can be used inside an ENVIRONMENT such as 'quote' or
-in a 'parbox'. For the environment form see *note flushleft::.
+ragged right. It can be used inside an ENVIRONMENT such as ‘quote’ or
+in a ‘parbox’. For the environment form see *note flushleft::.
- Unlike the 'flushleft' environment, the '\raggedright' command does
+ Unlike the ‘flushleft’ environment, the ‘\raggedright’ command does
not start a new paragraph; it only changes how LaTeX formats paragraph
-units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of the
-declaration must contain the blank line or '\end' command that ends the
+units. To affect a paragraph unit’s format, the scope of the
+declaration must contain the blank line or ‘\end’ command that ends the
paragraph unit.
- Here '\raggedright' in each second column keeps LaTeX from doing very
+ Here ‘\raggedright’ in each second column keeps LaTeX from doing
awkward typesetting to fit the text into the narrow column. Note that
-'\raggedright' is inside the curly braces '{...}' to delimit its effect.
+‘\raggedright’ is inside the curly braces ‘{...}’ to delimit its effect.
\begin{tabular}{rp{2in}}
Team alpha &{\raggedright This team does all the real work.} \\
@@ -4292,7 +4296,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: flushright, Next: itemize, Prev: flushleft, Up: Environments
-8.13 'flushright'
+8.13 ‘flushright’
=================
\begin{flushright}
@@ -4305,21 +4309,21 @@
right-hand margin and ragged left. If you have lines that are too long
to fit the margins then LaTeX will linebreak them in a way that avoids
hyphenation and stretching or shrinking inter-word spaces. To force a
-new line use a double backslash, '\\'. For the declaration form
+new line use a double backslash, ‘\\’. For the declaration form
see *note \raggedleft::.
For an example related to this environment, see *note flushleft::,
-where one just have mutatis mutandis to replace 'flushleft' by
-'flushright'.
+where one just have mutatis mutandis to replace ‘flushleft’ by
+‘flushright’.
* Menu:
-* \raggedleft:: Declaration form of the 'flushright' environment.
+* \raggedleft:: Declaration form of the ‘flushright’ environment.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \raggedleft, Up: flushright
-8.13.1 '\raggedleft'
+8.13.1 ‘\raggedleft’
--------------------
Synopses:
@@ -4333,23 +4337,23 @@
\end{ENVIRONMENT}
A declaration which causes lines to be flush to the right margin and
-ragged left. It can be used inside an ENVIRONMENT such as 'quote' or in
-a 'parbox'. For the environment form see *note flushright::.
+ragged left. It can be used inside an ENVIRONMENT such as ‘quote’ or in
+a ‘parbox’. For the environment form see *note flushright::.
- Unlike the 'flushright' environment, the '\raggedleft' command does
+ Unlike the ‘flushright’ environment, the ‘\raggedleft’ command does
not start a new paragraph; it only changes how LaTeX formats paragraph
-units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of the
-declaration must contain the blank line or '\end' command that ends the
+units. To affect a paragraph unit’s format, the scope of the
+declaration must contain the blank line or ‘\end’ command that ends the
paragraph unit.
For an example related to this environment, see *note \raggedright::,
-where one just have mutatis mutandis to replace '\raggedright' by
-'\raggedleft'.
+where one just have mutatis mutandis to replace ‘\raggedright’ by
+‘\raggedleft’.
File: latex2e.info, Node: itemize, Next: letter, Prev: flushright, Up: Environments
-8.14 'itemize'
+8.14 ‘itemize’
==============
Synopsis:
@@ -4360,9 +4364,9 @@
...
\end{itemize}
- Produce an "unordered list", sometimes called a bullet list. There
-must be at least one '\item' within the environment; having none causes
-the LaTeX error 'Something's wrong--perhaps a missing \item'.
+ Produce an “unordered list”, sometimes called a bullet list. There
+must be at least one ‘\item’ within the environment; having none causes
+the LaTeX error ‘Something's wrong--perhaps a missing \item’.
This gives a two-item list.
@@ -4371,52 +4375,52 @@
\item Rice portrait
\end{itemize}
-With the default locale--without loading e.g. 'babel' package with
-another language than USenglish--as a top-level list each label would
-come out as a bullet, *. The format of the labeling depends on the
+With the default locale—without loading e.g. ‘babel’ package with
+another language than USenglish—as a top-level list each label would
+come out as a bullet, •. The format of the labeling depends on the
nesting level; see below.
- Start list items with the '\item' command (*note \item::). If you
-give '\item' an optional argument by following it with square brackets,
-as in '\item[OPTIONAL LABEL]', then by default OPTIONAL LABEL will
+ Start list items with the ‘\item’ command (*note \item::). If you
+give ‘\item’ an optional argument by following it with square brackets,
+as in ‘\item[OPTIONAL LABEL]’, then by default OPTIONAL LABEL will
appear in bold and be flush right, so it could extend into the left
margin. For labels that are flush left see the *note description::
-environment. Following the '\item' is the text of the item, which may
+environment. Following the ‘\item’ is the text of the item, which may
be empty or contain multiple paragraphs.
Unordered lists can be nested within one another, up to four levels
deep. They can also be nested within other paragraph-making
-environments, such as 'enumerate' (*note enumerate::).
+environments, such as ‘enumerate’ (*note enumerate::).
- The 'itemize' environment uses the commands '\labelitemi' through
-'\labelitemiv' to produce the default label (note the convention of
+ The ‘itemize’ environment uses the commands ‘\labelitemi’ through
+‘\labelitemiv’ to produce the default label (note the convention of
lowercase roman numerals at the end of the command names that signify
the nesting level). These are the default marks at each level.
- 1. * (bullet, from '\textbullet')
- 2. -- (bold en-dash, from '\normalfont\bfseries\textendash')
- 3. * (asterisk, from '\textasteriskcentered')
+ 1. • (bullet, from ‘\textbullet’)
+ 2. -- (bold en-dash, from ‘\normalfont\bfseries\textendash’)
+ 3. * (asterisk, from ‘\textasteriskcentered’)
4. . (vertically centered dot, rendered here as a period, from
- '\textperiodcentered')
+ ‘\textperiodcentered’)
- Change the labels with '\renewcommand'. For instance, this makes the
+ Change the labels with ‘\renewcommand’. For instance, this makes the
first level use diamonds.
\renewcommand{\labelitemi}{$\diamond$}
The distance between the left margin of the enclosing environment and
-the left margin of the 'itemize' list is determined by the parameters
-'\leftmargini' through '\leftmarginvi'. (This also uses the convention
+the left margin of the ‘itemize’ list is determined by the parameters
+‘\leftmargini’ through ‘\leftmarginvi’. (This also uses the convention
of using lowercase roman numerals a the end of the command name to
-denote the nesting level.) The defaults are: '2.5em' in level 1 ('2em'
-in two-column mode), '2.2em' in level 2, '1.87em' in level 3, and
-'1.7em' in level 4, with smaller values for more deeply nested levels.
+denote the nesting level.) The defaults are: ‘2.5em’ in level 1 (‘2em’
+in two-column mode), ‘2.2em’ in level 2, ‘1.87em’ in level 3, and
+‘1.7em’ in level 4, with smaller values for more deeply nested levels.
For other major LaTeX labeled list environments, see *note
-description:: and *note enumerate::. The 'itemize', 'enumerate' and
-'description' environment use the same list layout parameters. For a
+description:: and *note enumerate::. The ‘itemize’, ‘enumerate’ and
+‘description’ environment use the same list layout parameters. For a
description, including the default values, and for information about
-customizing list layout, see *note list::. The package 'enumitem' is
+customizing list layout, see *note list::. The package ‘enumitem’ is
useful for customizing lists.
This example greatly reduces the margin space for outermost itemized
@@ -4425,9 +4429,9 @@
\setlength{\leftmargini}{1.25em} % default 2.5em
Especially for lists with short items, it may be desirable to elide
-space between items. Here is an example defining an 'itemize*'
+space between items. Here is an example defining an ‘itemize*’
environment with no extra spacing between items, or between paragraphs
-within a single item ('\parskip' is not list-specific, *note \parindent
+within a single item (‘\parskip’ is not list-specific, *note \parindent
& \parskip::):
\newenvironment{itemize*}%
@@ -4440,7 +4444,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: letter, Next: list, Prev: itemize, Up: Environments
-8.15 'letter' environment: writing letters
+8.15 ‘letter’ environment: writing letters
==========================================
This environment is used for creating letters. *Note Letters::.
@@ -4448,7 +4452,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: list, Next: math, Prev: letter, Up: Environments
-8.16 'list'
+8.16 ‘list’
===========
Synopsis:
@@ -4463,15 +4467,15 @@
Note that this environment does not typically appear in the document
body. Most lists created by LaTeX authors are the ones that come
-standard: the 'description', 'enumerate', and 'itemize' environments
+standard: the ‘description’, ‘enumerate’, and ‘itemize’ environments
(*note description::, *note enumerate::, and *note itemize::).
- Instead, the 'list' environment is most often used in macros. For
+ Instead, the ‘list’ environment is most often used in macros. For
example, many standard LaTeX environments that do not immediately appear
-to be lists are in fact constructed using 'list', including 'quotation',
-'quote', and 'center' (*note quotation & quote::, *note center::).
+to be lists are in fact constructed using ‘list’, including ‘quotation’,
+‘quote’, and ‘center’ (*note quotation & quote::, *note center::).
- This uses the 'list' environment to define a new custom environment.
+ This uses the ‘list’ environment to define a new custom environment.
\newcounter{namedlistcounter} % number the items
\newenvironment{named}
@@ -4490,148 +4494,148 @@
The mandatory first argument LABELING specifies the default labeling
of list items. It can contain text and LaTeX commands, as above where
-it contains both 'Item' and '\Roman{...}'. LaTeX forms the label by
-putting the LABELING argument in a box of width '\labelwidth'. If the
+it contains both ‘Item’ and ‘\Roman{...}’. LaTeX forms the label by
+putting the LABELING argument in a box of width ‘\labelwidth’. If the
label is wider than that, the additional material extends to the right.
-When making an instance of a 'list' you can override the default
-labeling by giving '\item' an optional argument by including square
-braces and the text, as in the above '\item[Special label.]'; *note
+When making an instance of a ‘list’ you can override the default
+labeling by giving ‘\item’ an optional argument by including square
+braces and the text, as in the above ‘\item[Special label.]’; *note
\item::.
The mandatory second argument SPACING has a list of commands. This
list can be empty. A command that can go in here is
-'\usecounter{COUNTERNAME}' (*note \usecounter::). Use this to tell
+‘\usecounter{COUNTERNAME}’ (*note \usecounter::). Use this to tell
LaTeX to number the items using the given counter. The counter will be
reset to zero each time LaTeX enters the environment, and the counter is
-incremented by one each time LaTeX encounters an '\item' that does not
+incremented by one each time LaTeX encounters an ‘\item’ that does not
have an optional argument.
- Another command that can go in SPACING is '\makelabel', which
+ Another command that can go in SPACING is ‘\makelabel’, which
constructs the label box. By default it puts the contents flush right.
Its only argument is the label, which it typesets in LR mode (*note
Modes::). One example of changing its definition is that to the above
-'named' example, before the definition of the environment add
-'\newcommand{\namedmakelabel}[1]{\textsc{#1}}', and between the
-'\setlength' command and the parenthesis that closes the SPACING
-argument also add '\let\makelabel\namedmakelabel'. Then the labels will
+‘named’ example, before the definition of the environment add
+‘\newcommand{\namedmakelabel}[1]{\textsc{#1}}’, and between the
+‘\setlength’ command and the parenthesis that closes the SPACING
+argument also add ‘\let\makelabel\namedmakelabel’. Then the labels will
be typeset in small caps. Similarly, changing the second code line to
-'\let\makelabel\fbox' puts the labels inside a framed box. Another
-example of the '\makelabel' command is below, in the definition of the
-'redlabel' environment.
+‘\let\makelabel\fbox’ puts the labels inside a framed box. Another
+example of the ‘\makelabel’ command is below, in the definition of the
+‘redlabel’ environment.
Also often in SPACING are commands to redefine the spacing for the
list. Below are the spacing parameters with their default values.
-(Default values for derived environments such as 'itemize' can be
+(Default values for derived environments such as ‘itemize’ can be
different than the values shown here.) See also the figure that follows
the list. Each is a length (*note Lengths::). The vertical spaces are
-normally rubber lengths, with 'plus' and 'minus' components, to give TeX
+normally rubber lengths, with ‘plus’ and ‘minus’ components, to give TeX
flexibility in setting the page. Change each with a command such as
-'\setlength{itemsep}{2pt plus1pt minus1pt}'. For some effects these
+‘\setlength{itemsep}{2pt plus1pt minus1pt}’. For some effects these
lengths should be zero or negative.
-'\itemindent'
- Extra horizontal space indentation, beyond 'leftmargin', of the
- first line each item. Its default value is '0pt'.
+‘\itemindent’
+ Extra horizontal space indentation, beyond ‘leftmargin’, of the
+ first line each item. Its default value is ‘0pt’.
-'\itemsep'
- Vertical space between items, beyond the '\parsep'. The defaults
- for the first three levels in LaTeX's 'article', 'book', and
- 'report' classes at 10 point size are: '4pt plus2pt minus1pt',
- '\parsep' (that is, '2pt plus1pt minus1pt'), and '\topsep' (that
- is, '2pt plus1pt minus1pt'). The defaults at 11 point are: '4.5pt
- plus2pt minus1pt', '\parsep' (that is, '2pt plus1pt minus1pt'), and
- '\topsep' (that is, '2pt plus1pt minus1pt'). The defaults at 12
- point are: '5pt plus2.5pt minus1pt', '\parsep' (that is, '2.5pt
- plus1pt minus1pt'), and '\topsep' (that is, '2.5pt plus1pt
- minus1pt').
+‘\itemsep’
+ Vertical space between items, beyond the ‘\parsep’. The defaults
+ for the first three levels in LaTeX’s ‘article’, ‘book’, and
+ ‘report’ classes at 10 point size are: ‘4pt plus2pt minus1pt’,
+ ‘\parsep’ (that is, ‘2pt plus1pt minus1pt’), and ‘\topsep’ (that
+ is, ‘2pt plus1pt minus1pt’). The defaults at 11 point are: ‘4.5pt
+ plus2pt minus1pt’, ‘\parsep’ (that is, ‘2pt plus1pt minus1pt’), and
+ ‘\topsep’ (that is, ‘2pt plus1pt minus1pt’). The defaults at 12
+ point are: ‘5pt plus2.5pt minus1pt’, ‘\parsep’ (that is, ‘2.5pt
+ plus1pt minus1pt’), and ‘\topsep’ (that is, ‘2.5pt plus1pt
+ minus1pt’).
-'\labelsep'
+‘\labelsep’
Horizontal space between the label and text of an item. The
- default for LaTeX's 'article', 'book', and 'report' classes is
- '0.5em'.
+ default for LaTeX’s ‘article’, ‘book’, and ‘report’ classes is
+ ‘0.5em’.
-'\labelwidth'
+‘\labelwidth’
Horizontal width. The box containing the label is nominally this
- wide. If '\makelabel' returns text that is wider than this then
+ wide. If ‘\makelabel’ returns text that is wider than this then
the first line of the item will be indented to make room for this
- extra material. If '\makelabel' returns text of width less than or
- equal to '\labelwidth' then LaTeX's default is that the label is
+ extra material. If ‘\makelabel’ returns text of width less than or
+ equal to ‘\labelwidth’ then LaTeX’s default is that the label is
typeset flush right in a box of this width.
The left edge of the label box is
- '\leftmargin'+'\itemindent'-'\labelsep'-'\labelwidth' from the left
+ ‘\leftmargin’+‘\itemindent’-‘\labelsep’-‘\labelwidth’ from the left
margin of the enclosing environment.
- The default for LaTeX's 'article', 'book', and 'report' classes at
- the top level is '\leftmargini'-'\labelsep', (which is '2em' in one
- column mode and '1.5em' in two column mode). At the second level
- it is '\leftmarginii'-'\labelsep', and at the third level it is
- '\leftmarginiii'-'\labelsep'. These definitions make the label's
+ The default for LaTeX’s ‘article’, ‘book’, and ‘report’ classes at
+ the top level is ‘\leftmargini’-‘\labelsep’, (which is ‘2em’ in one
+ column mode and ‘1.5em’ in two column mode). At the second level
+ it is ‘\leftmarginii’-‘\labelsep’, and at the third level it is
+ ‘\leftmarginiii’-‘\labelsep’. These definitions make the label’s
left edge coincide with the left margin of the enclosing
environment.
-'\leftmargin'
+‘\leftmargin’
Horizontal space between the left margin of the enclosing
environment (or the left margin of the page if this is a top-level
list), and the left margin of this list. It must be non-negative.
In the standard LaTeX document classes, a top-level list has this
- set to the value of '\leftmargini', while a list that is nested
- inside a top-level list has this margin set to '\leftmarginii'.
- More deeply nested lists get the values of '\leftmarginiii' through
- '\leftmarginvi'. (Nesting greater than level five generates the
- error message 'Too deeply nested'.)
+ set to the value of ‘\leftmargini’, while a list that is nested
+ inside a top-level list has this margin set to ‘\leftmarginii’.
+ More deeply nested lists get the values of ‘\leftmarginiii’ through
+ ‘\leftmarginvi’. (Nesting greater than level five generates the
+ error message ‘Too deeply nested’.)
- The defaults for the first three levels in LaTeX's 'article',
- 'book', and 'report' classes are: '\leftmargini' is '2.5em' (in two
- column mode, '2em'), '\leftmarginii' is '2.2em', and
- '\leftmarginiii' is '1.87em'.
+ The defaults for the first three levels in LaTeX’s ‘article’,
+ ‘book’, and ‘report’ classes are: ‘\leftmargini’ is ‘2.5em’ (in two
+ column mode, ‘2em’), ‘\leftmarginii’ is ‘2.2em’, and
+ ‘\leftmarginiii’ is ‘1.87em’.
-'\listparindent'
+‘\listparindent’
Horizontal space of additional line indentation, beyond
- '\leftmargin', for second and subsequent paragraphs within a list
- item. A negative value makes this an "outdent". Its default value
- is '0pt'.
+ ‘\leftmargin’, for second and subsequent paragraphs within a list
+ item. A negative value makes this an “outdent”. Its default value
+ is ‘0pt’.
-'\parsep'
+‘\parsep’
Vertical space between paragraphs within an item. The defaults for
- the first three levels in LaTeX's 'article', 'book', and 'report'
- classes at 10 point size are: '4pt plus2pt minus1pt', '2pt plus1pt
- minus1pt', and '0pt'. The defaults at 11 point size are: '4.5pt
- plus2pt minus1pt', '2pt plus1pt minus1pt', and '0pt'. The defaults
- at 12 point size are: '5pt plus2.5pt minus1pt', '2.5pt plus1pt
- minus1pt', and '0pt'.
+ the first three levels in LaTeX’s ‘article’, ‘book’, and ‘report’
+ classes at 10 point size are: ‘4pt plus2pt minus1pt’, ‘2pt plus1pt
+ minus1pt’, and ‘0pt’. The defaults at 11 point size are: ‘4.5pt
+ plus2pt minus1pt’, ‘2pt plus1pt minus1pt’, and ‘0pt’. The defaults
+ at 12 point size are: ‘5pt plus2.5pt minus1pt’, ‘2.5pt plus1pt
+ minus1pt’, and ‘0pt’.
-'\partopsep'
- Vertical space added, beyond '\topsep'+'\parskip', to the top and
+‘\partopsep’
+ Vertical space added, beyond ‘\topsep’+‘\parskip’, to the top and
bottom of the entire environment if the list instance is preceded
by a blank line. (A blank line in the LaTeX source before the list
changes spacing at both the top and bottom of the list; whether the
line following the list is blank does not matter.)
- The defaults for the first three levels in LaTeX's 'article',
- 'book', and 'report' classes at 10 point size are: '2pt plus1
- minus1pt', '2pt plus1pt minus1pt', and '1pt plus0pt minus1pt'. The
- defaults at 11 point are: '3pt plus1pt minus1pt', '3pt plus1pt
- minus1pt', and '1pt plus0pt minus1pt'). The defaults at 12 point
- are: '3pt plus2pt minus3pt', '3pt plus2pt minus2pt', and '1pt
- plus0pt minus1pt'.
+ The defaults for the first three levels in LaTeX’s ‘article’,
+ ‘book’, and ‘report’ classes at 10 point size are: ‘2pt plus1
+ minus1pt’, ‘2pt plus1pt minus1pt’, and ‘1pt plus0pt minus1pt’. The
+ defaults at 11 point are: ‘3pt plus1pt minus1pt’, ‘3pt plus1pt
+ minus1pt’, and ‘1pt plus0pt minus1pt’). The defaults at 12 point
+ are: ‘3pt plus2pt minus3pt’, ‘3pt plus2pt minus2pt’, and ‘1pt
+ plus0pt minus1pt’.
-'\rightmargin'
+‘\rightmargin’
Horizontal space between the right margin of the list and the right
- margin of the enclosing environment. Its default value is '0pt'.
+ margin of the enclosing environment. Its default value is ‘0pt’.
It must be non-negative.
-'\topsep'
+‘\topsep’
Vertical space added to both the top and bottom of the list, in
- addition to '\parskip' (*note \parindent & \parskip::). The
- defaults for the first three levels in LaTeX's 'article', 'book',
- and 'report' classes at 10 point size are: '8pt plus2pt minus4pt',
- '4pt plus2pt minus1pt', and '2pt plus1pt minus1pt'. The defaults
- at 11 point are: '9pt plus3pt minus5pt', '4.5pt plus2pt minus1pt',
- and '2pt plus1pt minus1pt'. The defaults at 12 point are: '10pt
- plus4pt minus6pt', '5pt plus2.5pt minus1pt', and '2.5pt plus1pt
- minus1pt'.
+ addition to ‘\parskip’ (*note \parindent & \parskip::). The
+ defaults for the first three levels in LaTeX’s ‘article’, ‘book’,
+ and ‘report’ classes at 10 point size are: ‘8pt plus2pt minus4pt’,
+ ‘4pt plus2pt minus1pt’, and ‘2pt plus1pt minus1pt’. The defaults
+ at 11 point are: ‘9pt plus3pt minus5pt’, ‘4.5pt plus2pt minus1pt’,
+ and ‘2pt plus1pt minus1pt’. The defaults at 12 point are: ‘10pt
+ plus4pt minus6pt’, ‘5pt plus2.5pt minus1pt’, and ‘2.5pt plus1pt
+ minus1pt’.
This shows the horizontal and vertical distances.
@@ -4660,14 +4664,14 @@
for H4, so that the left edge of the label box is at H3+H4-(H0+H1).
V0
- '\topsep' + '\parskip' if the list environment does not start a new
- paragraph, and '\topsep'+'\parskip'+'\partopsep' if it does
+ ‘\topsep’ + ‘\parskip’ if the list environment does not start a new
+ paragraph, and ‘\topsep’+‘\parskip’+‘\partopsep’ if it does
V1
- '\parsep'
+ ‘\parsep’
V2
- '\itemsep'+'\parsep'
+ ‘\itemsep’+‘\parsep’
V3
Same as V0. (This space is affected by whether a blank line
@@ -4675,50 +4679,50 @@
appears in the source below the environment does not matter.)
H0
- '\labelwidth'
+ ‘\labelwidth’
H1
- '\labelsep'
+ ‘\labelsep’
H2
- '\listparindent'
+ ‘\listparindent’
H3
- '\leftmargin'
+ ‘\leftmargin’
H4
- '\itemindent'
+ ‘\itemindent’
H5
- '\rightmargin'
+ ‘\rightmargin’
- The list's left and right margins, shown above as H3 and H5, are with
+ The list’s left and right margins, shown above as H3 and H5, are with
respect to the ones provided by the surrounding environment, or with
respect to the page margins for a top-level list. The line width used
-for typesetting the list items is '\linewidth' (*note Page layout
-parameters::). For instance, set the list's left margin to be one
+for typesetting the list items is ‘\linewidth’ (*note Page layout
+parameters::). For instance, set the list’s left margin to be one
quarter of the distance between the left and right margins of the
-enclosing environment with '\setlength{\leftmargin}{0.25\linewidth}'.
+enclosing environment with ‘\setlength{\leftmargin}{0.25\linewidth}’.
Page breaking in a list structure is controlled by the three
-parameters below. For each, the LaTeX default is '-\@lowpenalty', that
-is, '-51'. Because it is negative, it somewhat encourages a page break
-at each spot. Change it with, e.g., '\@beginparpenalty=9999'; a value
+parameters below. For each, the LaTeX default is ‘-\@lowpenalty’, that
+is, ‘-51’. Because it is negative, it somewhat encourages a page break
+at each spot. Change it with, e.g., ‘\@beginparpenalty=9999’; a value
of 10000 prohibits a page break.
-'\@beginparpenalty'
+‘\@beginparpenalty’
The page breaking penalty for breaking before the list (default
- '-51').
+ ‘-51’).
-'\@itempenalty'
+‘\@itempenalty’
The page breaking penalty for breaking before a list item (default
- '-51').
+ ‘-51’).
-'\@endparpenalty'
+‘\@endparpenalty’
The page breaking penalty for breaking after a list (default
- '-51').
+ ‘-51’).
- The package 'enumitem' is useful for customizing lists.
+ The package ‘enumitem’ is useful for customizing lists.
This example has the labels in red. They are numbered, and the left
edge of the label lines up with the left edge of the item text. *Note
@@ -4743,12 +4747,12 @@
* Menu:
* \item:: An entry in a list.
-* trivlist:: A restricted form of 'list'.
+* trivlist:: A restricted form of ‘list’.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \item, Next: trivlist, Up: list
-8.16.1 '\item': An entry in a list
+8.16.1 ‘\item’: An entry in a list
----------------------------------
Synopsis:
@@ -4762,15 +4766,15 @@
An entry in a list. The entries are prefixed by a label, whose
default depends on the list type.
- Because the optional label is surrounded by square brackets '[...]',
+ Because the optional label is surrounded by square brackets ‘[...]’,
if you have an item whose text starts with [, you have to hide the
-bracket inside curly braces, as in: '\item {[} is an open square
-bracket'; otherwise, LaTeX will think it marks the start of an optional
+bracket inside curly braces, as in: ‘\item {[} is an open square
+bracket’; otherwise, LaTeX will think it marks the start of an optional
label.
Similarly, if the item does have the optional label and you need a
close square bracket inside that label, you must hide it in the same
-way: '\item[Close square bracket, {]}]'. *Note LaTeX command syntax::.
+way: ‘\item[Close square bracket, {]}]’. *Note LaTeX command syntax::.
In this example the enumerate list has two items that use the default
label and one that uses the optional label.
@@ -4781,14 +4785,14 @@
\item Larry
\end{enumerate}
- The first item is labelled '1.', the second item is labelled
-'sometimes', and the third item is labelled '2.'. Because of the
-optional label in the second item, the third item is not labelled '3.'.
+ The first item is labelled ‘1.’, the second item is labelled
+‘sometimes’, and the third item is labelled ‘2.’. Because of the
+optional label in the second item, the third item is not labelled ‘3.’.
File: latex2e.info, Node: trivlist, Prev: \item, Up: list
-8.16.2 'trivlist': A restricted form of 'list'
+8.16.2 ‘trivlist’: A restricted form of ‘list’
----------------------------------------------
Synopsis:
@@ -4798,24 +4802,24 @@
\end{trivlist}
A restricted version of the list environment, in which margins are
-not indented and an '\item' without an optional argument produces no
+not indented and an ‘\item’ without an optional argument produces no
text. It is most often used in macros, to define an environment where
-the '\item' command is part of the environment's definition. For
-instance, the 'center' environment is defined essentially like this:
+the ‘\item’ command is part of the environment’s definition. For
+instance, the ‘center’ environment is defined essentially like this:
\newenvironment{center}
{\begin{trivlist}\centering\item\relax}
{\end{trivlist}}
- Using 'trivlist' in this way allows the macro to inherit some common
+ Using ‘trivlist’ in this way allows the macro to inherit some common
code: combining vertical space of two adjacent environments; detecting
whether the text following the environment should be considered a new
paragraph or a continuation of the previous one; adjusting the left and
right margins for possible nested list environments.
- Specifically, 'trivlist' uses the current values of the list
-parameters (*note list::), except that '\parsep' is set to the value of
-'\parskip', and '\leftmargin', '\labelwidth', and '\itemindent' are set
+ Specifically, ‘trivlist’ uses the current values of the list
+parameters (*note list::), except that ‘\parsep’ is set to the value of
+‘\parskip’, and ‘\leftmargin’, ‘\labelwidth’, and ‘\itemindent’ are set
to zero.
This example outputs the items as two paragraphs, except that (by
@@ -4829,7 +4833,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: math, Next: minipage, Prev: list, Up: Environments
-8.17 'math'
+8.17 ‘math’
===========
Synopsis:
@@ -4838,13 +4842,13 @@
MATH
\end{math}
- The 'math' environment inserts given MATH material within the running
-text. '\(...\)' and '$...$' are synonyms. *Note Math formulas::.
+ The ‘math’ environment inserts given MATH material within the running
+text. ‘\(...\)’ and ‘$...$’ are synonyms. *Note Math formulas::.
File: latex2e.info, Node: minipage, Next: picture, Prev: math, Up: Environments
-8.18 'minipage'
+8.18 ‘minipage’
===============
Synopses:
@@ -4862,8 +4866,8 @@
Put CONTENTS into a box that is WIDTH wide. This is like a small
version of a page; it can contain its own footnotes, itemized lists,
etc. (There are some restrictions, including that it cannot have
-floats.) This box will not be broken across pages. So 'minipage' is
-similar to '\parbox' (*note \parbox::) but here you can have paragraphs.
+floats.) This box will not be broken across pages. So ‘minipage’ is
+similar to ‘\parbox’ (*note \parbox::) but here you can have paragraphs.
This example will be 3 inches wide, and has two paragraphs.
@@ -4875,7 +4879,7 @@
and won the National Medal of Science.
\end{minipage}
-See below for a discussion of the paragraph indent inside a 'minipage'.
+See below for a discussion of the paragraph indent inside a ‘minipage’.
The required argument WIDTH is a rigid length (*note Lengths::). It
gives the width of the box into which CONTENTS are typeset.
@@ -4882,24 +4886,24 @@
There are three optional arguments, POSITION, HEIGHT, and INNER-POS.
You need not include all three. For example, get the default POSITION
-and set the HEIGHT with '\begin{minipage}[c][2.54cm]{\columnwidth}
-CONTENTS \end{minipage}'. (Get the natural height with an empty
-argument, '[]'.)
+and set the HEIGHT with ‘\begin{minipage}[c][2.54cm]{\columnwidth}
+CONTENTS \end{minipage}’. (Get the natural height with an empty
+argument, ‘[]’.)
- The optional argument POSITION governs how the 'minipage' vertically
+ The optional argument POSITION governs how the ‘minipage’ vertically
aligns with the surrounding material.
-'c'
- (synonym 'm') Default. Positions the 'minipage' so its vertical
+‘c’
+ (synonym ‘m’) Default. Positions the ‘minipage’ so its vertical
center lines up with the center of the adjacent text line.
-'t'
- Align the baseline of the top line in the 'minipage' with the
- baseline of the surrounding text (plain TeX's '\vtop').
+‘t’
+ Align the baseline of the top line in the ‘minipage’ with the
+ baseline of the surrounding text (plain TeX’s ‘\vtop’).
-'b'
- Align the baseline of the bottom line in the 'minipage' with the
- baseline of the surrounding text (plain TeX's '\vbox').
+‘b’
+ Align the baseline of the bottom line in the ‘minipage’ with the
+ baseline of the surrounding text (plain TeX’s ‘\vbox’).
To see the effects of these, contrast running this
@@ -4907,11 +4911,11 @@
first\\ second\\ third
\end{minipage}
-with the results of changing 'c' to 'b' or 't'.
+with the results of changing ‘c’ to ‘b’ or ‘t’.
The optional argument HEIGHT is a rigid length (*note Lengths::). It
-sets the height of the 'minipage'. You can enter any value larger than,
-or equal to, or smaller than the 'minipage''s natural height and LaTeX
+sets the height of the ‘minipage’. You can enter any value larger than,
+or equal to, or smaller than the ‘minipage’’s natural height and LaTeX
will not give an error or warning. You can also set it to a height of
zero or a negative value.
@@ -4919,22 +4923,22 @@
CONTENTS inside the box. These are the possible values are (the default
is the value of POSITION).
-'t'
+‘t’
Place CONTENTS at the top of the box.
-'c'
+‘c’
Place it in the vertical center.
-'b'
+‘b’
Place it at the box bottom.
-'s'
+‘s’
Stretch CONTENTS out vertically; it must contain vertically
stretchable space.
The INNER-POS argument makes sense when the HEIGHT option is set to a
-value larger than the 'minipage''s natural height. To see the effect of
-the options, run this example with the various choices in place of 'b'.
+value larger than the ‘minipage’’s natural height. To see the effect of
+the options, run this example with the various choices in place of ‘b’.
Text before
\begin{center}
@@ -4944,15 +4948,15 @@
\end{center}
Text after
- By default paragraphs are not indented in a 'minipage'. Change that
-with a command such as '\setlength{\parindent}{1pc}' at the start of
+ By default paragraphs are not indented in a ‘minipage’. Change that
+with a command such as ‘\setlength{\parindent}{1pc}’ at the start of
CONTENTS.
- Footnotes in a 'minipage' environment are handled in a way that is
+ Footnotes in a ‘minipage’ environment are handled in a way that is
particularly useful for putting footnotes in figures or tables. A
-'\footnote' or '\footnotetext' command puts the footnote at the bottom
+‘\footnote’ or ‘\footnotetext’ command puts the footnote at the bottom
of the minipage instead of at the bottom of the page, and it uses the
-'\mpfootnote' counter instead of the ordinary 'footnote' counter (*note
+‘\mpfootnote’ counter instead of the ordinary ‘footnote’ counter (*note
Counters::).
This puts the footnote at the bottom of the table, not the bottom of
@@ -4973,7 +4977,7 @@
If you nest minipages then there is an oddness when using footnotes.
Footnotes appear at the bottom of the text ended by the next
-'\end{minipage}' which may not be their logical place.
+‘\end{minipage}’ which may not be their logical place.
This puts a table containing data side by side with a map graphic.
They are vertically centered.
@@ -5005,7 +5009,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: picture, Next: quotation & quote, Prev: minipage, Up: Environments
-8.19 'picture'
+8.19 ‘picture’
==============
Synopses:
@@ -5019,7 +5023,7 @@
PICTURE COMMAND
\end{picture}
-Where there may be any number of PICTURE COMMAND's.
+Where there may be any number of PICTURE COMMAND’s.
An environment to create simple pictures containing lines, arrows,
boxes, circles, and text. This environment is not obsolete, but new
@@ -5027,7 +5031,7 @@
such as TikZ, PSTricks, MetaPost, or Asymptote. None of these are
covered in this document; see CTAN.
- To start, here's an example showing the parallelogram law for adding
+ To start, here’s an example showing the parallelogram law for adding
vectors.
\setlength{\unitlength}{1cm}
@@ -5040,26 +5044,26 @@
\put(3,3){\makebox(0,0)[r]{sum\ }}
\end{picture}
- The 'picture' environment has one required argument, a pair of
+ The ‘picture’ environment has one required argument, a pair of
positive real numbers (WIDTH,HEIGHT). Multiply these by the value
-'\unitlength' to get the nominal size of the output, i.e. the space that
+‘\unitlength’ to get the nominal size of the output, i.e. the space that
LaTeX reserves on the output page. This nominal size need not be how
large the picture really is; LaTeX will draw things from the picture
-outside the picture's box.
+outside the picture’s box.
This environment also has an optional argument (XOFFSET,YOFFSET). It
is used to shift the origin. Unlike most optional arguments, this one
is not contained in square brackets. As with the required argument, it
consists of a pair of two real numbers, but these may also be negative
-or null. Multiply these by '\unitlength' to get the coordinates of the
+or null. Multiply these by ‘\unitlength’ to get the coordinates of the
point at the lower-left corner of the picture.
- For example, if '\unitlength' has been set to '1mm', the command
+ For example, if ‘\unitlength’ has been set to ‘1mm’, the command
\begin{picture}(100,200)(10,20)
produces a box of width 100 millimeters and height 200 millimeters. The
-picture's origin is the point (10mm,20mm) and so the lower-left corner
+picture’s origin is the point (10mm,20mm) and so the lower-left corner
is there, and the upper-right corner is at (110mm,220mm). When you
first draw a picture you typically omit the optional argument, leaving
the origin at the lower-left corner. If you then want to modify your
@@ -5067,38 +5071,38 @@
optional argument.
Each PICTURE COMMAND tells LaTeX where to put something by providing
-its position. A "position" is a pair such as '(2.4,-5)' giving the x-
-and y-coordinates. A "coordinate" is a not a length, it is a real
+its position. A “position” is a pair such as ‘(2.4,-5)’ giving the x-
+and y-coordinates. A “coordinate” is a not a length, it is a real
number (it may have a decimal point or a minus sign). It specifies a
-length in multiples of the unit length '\unitlength', so if
-'\unitlength' has been set to '1cm', then the coordinate '2.54'
+length in multiples of the unit length ‘\unitlength’, so if
+‘\unitlength’ has been set to ‘1cm’, then the coordinate ‘2.54’
specifies a length of 2.54 centimeters.
- LaTeX's default for '\unitlength' is '1pt'. It is a rigid length
-(*note Lengths::). Change it with the '\setlength' command (*note
-\setlength::). Make this change only outside of a 'picture'
+ LaTeX’s default for ‘\unitlength’ is ‘1pt’. It is a rigid length
+(*note Lengths::). Change it with the ‘\setlength’ command (*note
+\setlength::). Make this change only outside of a ‘picture’
environment.
- The 'picture' environment supports using standard arithmetic
+ The ‘picture’ environment supports using standard arithmetic
expressions as well as numbers.
Coordinates are given with respect to an origin, which is by default
at the lower-left corner of the picture. Note that when a position
-appears as an argument, as with '\put(1,2){...}', it is not enclosed in
+appears as an argument, as with ‘\put(1,2){...}’, it is not enclosed in
braces since the parentheses serve to delimit the argument. Also,
unlike in some computer graphics systems, larger y-coordinates are
further up the page, for example, y = 1 is _above_ y = 0.
- There are four ways to put things in a picture: '\put', '\multiput',
-'\qbezier', and '\graphpaper'. The most often used is '\put'. This
+ There are four ways to put things in a picture: ‘\put’, ‘\multiput’,
+‘\qbezier’, and ‘\graphpaper’. The most often used is ‘\put’. This
\put(11.3,-0.3){...}
places the object with its reference point at coordinates (11.3,-0.3).
The reference points for various objects will be described below. The
-'\put' command creates an "LR box" (*note Modes::). Anything that can
-go in an '\mbox' (*note \mbox & \makebox::) can go in the text argument
-of the '\put' command. The reference point will be the lower left
+‘\put’ command creates an “LR box” (*note Modes::). Anything that can
+go in an ‘\mbox’ (*note \mbox & \makebox::) can go in the text argument
+of the ‘\put’ command. The reference point will be the lower left
corner of the box. In this picture
\setlength{\unitlength}{1cm}
@@ -5108,10 +5112,10 @@
\end{picture}
the three dots are just slightly left of the point of the angle formed
-by the two lines. (Also, '\line(1,1){1}' does not call for a line of
+by the two lines. (Also, ‘\line(1,1){1}’ does not call for a line of
length one; rather the line has a change in the x coordinate of 1.)
- The '\multiput', 'qbezier', and 'graphpaper' commands are described
+ The ‘\multiput’, ‘qbezier’, and ‘graphpaper’ commands are described
below.
You can also use this environment to place arbitrary material at an
@@ -5127,10 +5131,10 @@
\end{picture}
\end{center}
-The red X will be precisely a quarter of the '\textwidth' from the left
-margin, and '0.35\textwidth' up from the bottom of the picture. Another
+The red X will be precisely a quarter of the ‘\textwidth’ from the left
+margin, and ‘0.35\textwidth’ up from the bottom of the picture. Another
example of this usage is to put similar code in the page header to get
-repeat material on each of a document's pages.
+repeat material on each of a document’s pages.
* Menu:
@@ -5154,7 +5158,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \put, Next: \multiput, Up: picture
-8.19.1 '\put'
+8.19.1 ‘\put’
-------------
Synopsis:
@@ -5162,20 +5166,20 @@
\put(XCOORD,YCOORD){CONTENT}
Place CONTENT at the coordinate (XCOORD,YCOORD). See the discussion
-of coordinates and '\unitlength' in *note picture::. The CONTENT is
+of coordinates and ‘\unitlength’ in *note picture::. The CONTENT is
processed in LR mode (*note Modes::) so it cannot contain line breaks.
- This includes the text into the 'picture'.
+ This includes the text into the ‘picture’.
\put(4.5,2.5){Apply the \textit{unpoke} move}
The reference point, the location (4.5,2.5), is the lower left of the
-text, at the bottom left of the 'A'.
+text, at the bottom left of the ‘A’.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \multiput, Next: \qbezier, Prev: \put, Up: picture
-8.19.2 '\multiput'
+8.19.2 ‘\multiput’
------------------
Synopsis:
@@ -5201,7 +5205,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \qbezier, Next: \graphpaper, Prev: \multiput, Up: picture
-8.19.3 '\qbezier'
+8.19.3 ‘\qbezier’
-----------------
Synopsis:
@@ -5210,7 +5214,7 @@
\qbezier[NUM](X1,Y1)(X2,Y2)(X3,Y3)
Draw a quadratic Bezier curve whose control points are given by the
-three required arguments '(X1,Y1)', '(X2,Y2)', and '(X3,Y3)'. That is,
+three required arguments ‘(X1,Y1)’, ‘(X2,Y2)’, and ‘(X3,Y3)’. That is,
the curve runs from (X1,Y1) to (X3,Y3), is quadratic, and is such that
the tangent line at (X1,Y1) passes through (X2,Y2), as does the tangent
line at (X3,Y3).
@@ -5219,14 +5223,14 @@
\qbezier(1,1)(1.25,0.75)(1,0)
-The curve's tangent line at (1,1) contains (1.25,0.75), as does the
-curve's tangent line at (1,0).
+The curve’s tangent line at (1,1) contains (1.25,0.75), as does the
+curve’s tangent line at (1,0).
The optional argument NUM gives the number of calculated intermediate
points. The default is to draw a smooth curve whose maximum number of
-points is '\qbeziermax' (change this value with '\renewcommand').
+points is ‘\qbeziermax’ (change this value with ‘\renewcommand’).
- This draws a rectangle with a wavy top, using '\qbezier' for that
+ This draws a rectangle with a wavy top, using ‘\qbezier’ for that
curve.
\begin{picture}(8,4)
@@ -5244,7 +5248,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \graphpaper, Next: \line, Prev: \qbezier, Up: picture
-8.19.4 '\graphpaper'
+8.19.4 ‘\graphpaper’
--------------------
Synopsis:
@@ -5252,8 +5256,8 @@
\graphpaper(X_INIT,Y_INIT)(X_DIMEN,Y_DIMEN)
\graphpaper[SPACING](X_INIT,Y_INIT)(X_DIMEN,Y_DIMEN)
- Draw a coordinate grid. Requires the 'graphpap' package. The grid's
-origin is '(X_INIT,Y_INIT)'. Grid lines come every SPACING units (the
+ Draw a coordinate grid. Requires the ‘graphpap’ package. The grid’s
+origin is ‘(X_INIT,Y_INIT)’. Grid lines come every SPACING units (the
default is 10). The grid extends X_DIMEN units to the right and Y_DIMEN
units up. All arguments must be positive integers.
@@ -5271,7 +5275,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \line, Next: \linethickness, Prev: \graphpaper, Up: picture
-8.19.5 '\line'
+8.19.5 ‘\line’
--------------
Synopsis:
@@ -5279,8 +5283,8 @@
\line(X_RUN,Y_RISE){TRAVEL}
Draw a line. It slopes such that it vertically rises Y_RISE for
-every horizontal X_RUN. The TRAVEL is the total horizontal change--it
-is not the length of the vector, it is the change in x. In the special
+every horizontal X_RUN. The TRAVEL is the total horizontal change—it is
+not the length of the vector, it is the change in x. In the special
case of vertical lines, where (X_RUN,Y_RISE)=(0,1), the TRAVEL gives the
change in y.
@@ -5295,22 +5299,22 @@
The arguments X_RUN and Y_RISE are integers that can be positive,
negative, or zero. (If both are 0 then LaTeX treats the second as 1.)
-With '\put(X_INIT,Y_INIT){\line(X_RUN,Y_RISE){TRAVEL}}', if X_RUN is
-negative then the line's ending point has a first coordinate that is
-less than X_INIT. If Y_RISE is negative then the line's ending point
+With ‘\put(X_INIT,Y_INIT){\line(X_RUN,Y_RISE){TRAVEL}}’, if X_RUN is
+negative then the line’s ending point has a first coordinate that is
+less than X_INIT. If Y_RISE is negative then the line’s ending point
has a second coordinate that is less than Y_INIT.
- If TRAVEL is negative then you get 'LaTeX Error: Bad \line or \vector
-argument.'
+ If TRAVEL is negative then you get ‘LaTeX Error: Bad \line or \vector
+argument.’
Standard LaTeX can only draw lines with a limited range of slopes
because these lines are made by putting together line segments from
pre-made fonts. The two numbers X_RUN and Y_RISE must have integer
-values from -6 through 6. Also, they must be relatively prime, so that
+values from −6 through 6. Also, they must be relatively prime, so that
(X_RUN,Y_RISE) can be (2,1) but not (4,2) (if you choose the latter then
instead of lines you get sequences of arrowheads; the solution is to
switch to the former). To get lines of arbitrary slope and plenty of
-other shapes in a system like 'picture', see the package 'pict2e'
+other shapes in a system like ‘picture’, see the package ‘pict2e’
(<https://ctan.org/pkg/pict2e>). Another solution is to use a
full-featured graphics system such as TikZ, PSTricks, MetaPost, or
Asymptote.
@@ -5318,7 +5322,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \linethickness, Next: \thinlines, Prev: \line, Up: picture
-8.19.6 '\linethickness'
+8.19.6 ‘\linethickness’
-----------------------
Synopsis:
@@ -5327,7 +5331,7 @@
Declares the thickness of subsequent horizontal and vertical lines in
a picture to be DIM, which must be a positive length (*note Lengths::).
-It differs from '\thinlines' and '\thicklines' in that it does not
+It differs from ‘\thinlines’ and ‘\thicklines’ in that it does not
affect the thickness of slanted lines, circles, or ovals (*note
\oval::).
@@ -5334,7 +5338,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \thinlines, Next: \thicklines, Prev: \linethickness, Up: picture
-8.19.7 '\thinlines'
+8.19.7 ‘\thinlines’
-------------------
Declaration to set the thickness of subsequent lines, circles, and ovals
@@ -5345,7 +5349,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \thicklines, Next: \circle, Prev: \thinlines, Up: picture
-8.19.8 '\thicklines'
+8.19.8 ‘\thicklines’
--------------------
Declaration to set the thickness of subsequent lines, circles, and ovals
@@ -5356,7 +5360,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \circle, Next: \oval, Prev: \thicklines, Up: picture
-8.19.9 '\circle'
+8.19.9 ‘\circle’
----------------
Synopsis:
@@ -5365,20 +5369,20 @@
\circle*{DIAMETER}
Produces a circle with a diameter as close as possible to the
-specified one. The '*' form produces a filled-in circle.
+specified one. The ‘*’ form produces a filled-in circle.
- This draws a circle of radius 6, centered at '(5,7)'.
+ This draws a circle of radius 6, centered at ‘(5,7)’.
\put(5,7){\circle{6}}
- The available radii for '\circle' are, in points, the even numbers
-from 2 to 20, inclusive. For '\circle*' they are all the integers from
+ The available radii for ‘\circle’ are, in points, the even numbers
+from 2 to 20, inclusive. For ‘\circle*’ they are all the integers from
1 to 15.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \oval, Next: \shortstack, Prev: \circle, Up: picture
-8.19.10 '\oval'
+8.19.10 ‘\oval’
---------------
Synopsis:
@@ -5387,21 +5391,21 @@
\oval(WIDTH,HEIGHT)[PORTION]
Produce a rectangle with rounded corners, hereinafter referred to as
-an "oval". The optional argument PORTION allows you to produce only
+an “oval”. The optional argument PORTION allows you to produce only
half or a quarter of the oval. For half an oval take PORTION to be one
of these.
-'t'
+‘t’
top half
-'b'
+‘b’
bottom half
-'r'
+‘r’
right half
-'l'
+‘l’
left half
- Produce only one quarter of the oval by setting PORTION to 'tr',
-'br', 'bl', or 'tl'.
+ Produce only one quarter of the oval by setting PORTION to ‘tr’,
+‘br’, ‘bl’, or ‘tl’.
This draws the top half of an oval that is 3 wide and 7 tall.
@@ -5418,7 +5422,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \shortstack, Next: \vector, Prev: \oval, Up: picture
-8.19.11 '\shortstack'
+8.19.11 ‘\shortstack’
---------------------
Synopsis:
@@ -5427,7 +5431,7 @@
Produce a vertical stack of objects.
- This labels the y axis by writing the word 'y' above the word 'axis'.
+ This labels the y axis by writing the word ‘y’ above the word ‘axis’.
\setlength{\unitlength}{1cm}
\begin{picture}(5,2.5)(-0.75,0)
@@ -5437,37 +5441,37 @@
\end{picture}
For a short stack, the reference point is the lower left of the stack.
-In the above example the '\makebox' (*note \mbox & \makebox::) puts the
+In the above example the ‘\makebox’ (*note \mbox & \makebox::) puts the
stack flush right in a zero width box so in total the short stack sits
slightly to the left of the y axis.
The valid positions are:
-'r'
+‘r’
Make objects flush right
-'l'
+‘l’
Make objects flush left
-'c'
+‘c’
Center objects (default)
- Separate objects into lines with '\\'. These stacks are short in
-that, unlike in a 'tabular' or 'array' environment, here the rows are
+ Separate objects into lines with ‘\\’. These stacks are short in
+that, unlike in a ‘tabular’ or ‘array’ environment, here the rows are
not spaced out to be of even baseline skips. Thus, in
-'\shortstack{X\\o\\o\\X}' the first and last rows are taller than the
+‘\shortstack{X\\o\\o\\X}’ the first and last rows are taller than the
middle two, and therefore the baseline skip between the two middle rows
is smaller than that between the third and last row. You can adjust row
heights and depths either by putting in the usual interline spacing with
-'\shortstack{X\\ \strut o\\o\\X}' (*note \strut::), or explicitly, via
-an zero-width box '\shortstack{X \\ \rule{0pt}{12pt} o\\o\\X}' or by
-using '\\''s optional argument '\shortstack{X\\[2pt] o\\o\\X}'.
+‘\shortstack{X\\ \strut o\\o\\X}’ (*note \strut::), or explicitly, via
+an zero-width box ‘\shortstack{X \\ \rule{0pt}{12pt} o\\o\\X}’ or by
+using ‘\\’’s optional argument ‘\shortstack{X\\[2pt] o\\o\\X}’.
- The '\shortstack' command is also available outside the 'picture'
+ The ‘\shortstack’ command is also available outside the ‘picture’
environment.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \vector, Next: \makebox (picture), Prev: \shortstack, Up: picture
-8.19.12 '\vector'
+8.19.12 ‘\vector’
-----------------
Synopsis:
@@ -5476,7 +5480,7 @@
Draw a line ending in an arrow. The slope of that line is: it
vertically rises Y_RISE for every horizontal X_RUN. The TRAVEL is the
-total horizontal change--it is not the length of the vector, it is the
+total horizontal change—it is not the length of the vector, it is the
change in x. In the special case of vertical vectors, if
(X_RUN,Y_RISE)=(0,1), then TRAVEL gives the change in y.
@@ -5483,16 +5487,16 @@
For an example see *note picture::.
For elaboration on X_RUN and Y_RISE see *note \line::. As there, the
-values of X_RUN and Y_RISE are limited. For '\vector' you must chooses
-integers between -4 and 4, inclusive. Also, the two you choose must be
-relatively prime. Thus, '\vector(2,1){4}' is acceptable but
-'\vector(4,2){4}' is not (if you use the latter then you get a sequence
+values of X_RUN and Y_RISE are limited. For ‘\vector’ you must chooses
+integers between −4 and 4, inclusive. Also, the two you choose must be
+relatively prime. Thus, ‘\vector(2,1){4}’ is acceptable but
+‘\vector(4,2){4}’ is not (if you use the latter then you get a sequence
of arrowheads).
File: latex2e.info, Node: \makebox (picture), Next: \framebox (picture), Prev: \vector, Up: picture
-8.19.13 '\makebox' (picture)
+8.19.13 ‘\makebox’ (picture)
----------------------------
Synopsis:
@@ -5500,40 +5504,40 @@
\makebox(REC-WIDTH,REC-HEIGHT){TEXT}
\makebox(REC-WIDTH,REC-HEIGHT)[POSITION]{TEXT}
- Make a box to hold TEXT. This command fits with the 'picture'
+ Make a box to hold TEXT. This command fits with the ‘picture’
environment, although you can use it outside of there, because REC-WIDTH
and REC-HEIGHT are numbers specifying distances in terms of the
-'\unitlength' (*note picture::). This command is similar to the normal
-'\makebox' command (*note \mbox & \makebox::) except here that you must
+‘\unitlength’ (*note picture::). This command is similar to the normal
+‘\makebox’ command (*note \mbox & \makebox::) except here that you must
specify the width and height. This command is fragile (*note
\protect::).
- This makes a box of length 3.5 times '\unitlength' and height 4 times
-'\unitlength'.
+ This makes a box of length 3.5 times ‘\unitlength’ and height 4 times
+‘\unitlength’.
\put(1,2){\makebox(3.5,4){...}}
- The optional argument 'POSITION' specifies where in the box the TEXT
+ The optional argument ‘POSITION’ specifies where in the box the TEXT
appears. The default is to center it, both horizontally and vertically.
To place it somewhere else, use a string with one or two of these
letters.
-'t'
+‘t’
Puts TEXT the top of the box.
-'b'
+‘b’
Put TEXT at the bottom.
-'l'
+‘l’
Put TEXT on the left.
-'r'
+‘r’
Put TEXT on the right.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \framebox (picture), Next: \frame, Prev: \makebox (picture), Up: picture
-8.19.14 '\framebox' (picture)
+8.19.14 ‘\framebox’ (picture)
-----------------------------
Synopsis:
@@ -5544,9 +5548,9 @@
This is the same as *note \makebox (picture):: except that it puts a
frame around the outside of the box that it creates. The reference
point is the bottom left corner of the frame. This command fits with
-the 'picture' environment, although you can use it outside of there,
+the ‘picture’ environment, although you can use it outside of there,
because lengths are numbers specifying the distance in terms of the
-'\unitlength' (*note picture::). This command is fragile (*note
+‘\unitlength’ (*note picture::). This command is fragile (*note
\protect::).
This example creates a frame 2.5 inches by 3 inches and puts the text
@@ -5561,18 +5565,18 @@
The optional argument POSITION specifies the position of TEXT; see
*note \makebox (picture):: for the values that it can take.
- The rule has thickness '\fboxrule' and there is a blank space
-'\fboxsep' between the frame and the contents of the box.
+ The rule has thickness ‘\fboxrule’ and there is a blank space
+‘\fboxsep’ between the frame and the contents of the box.
For this command, you must specify the WIDTH and HEIGHT. If you want
to just put a frame around some contents whose dimension is determined
-in some other way then either use '\fbox' (*note \fbox & \framebox::) or
-'\frame' (*note \frame::).
+in some other way then either use ‘\fbox’ (*note \fbox & \framebox::) or
+‘\frame’ (*note \frame::).
File: latex2e.info, Node: \frame, Next: \dashbox, Prev: \framebox (picture), Up: picture
-8.19.15 '\frame'
+8.19.15 ‘\frame’
----------------
Synopsis:
@@ -5580,14 +5584,14 @@
\frame{CONTENTS}
Puts a rectangular frame around CONTENTS. The reference point is the
-bottom left corner of the frame. In contrast to '\framebox' (*note
-\framebox (picture)::), this command puts no extra space is put between
-the frame and the object. It is fragile (*note \protect::).
+bottom left corner of the frame. In contrast to ‘\framebox’ (*note
+\framebox (picture)::), this command puts no extra space between the
+frame and the object. It is fragile (*note \protect::).
File: latex2e.info, Node: \dashbox, Prev: \frame, Up: picture
-8.19.16 '\dashbox'
+8.19.16 ‘\dashbox’
------------------
Synopsis:
@@ -5596,9 +5600,9 @@
\dashbox{DASH-LEN}(RECT-WIDTH,RECT-HEIGHT)[POSITION]{TEXT}
Create a dashed rectangle around TEXT. This command fits with the
-'picture' environment, although you can use it outside of there, because
+‘picture’ environment, although you can use it outside of there, because
lengths are numbers specifying the distance in terms of the
-'\unitlength' (*note picture::).
+‘\unitlength’ (*note picture::).
The required arguments are: dashes are DASH-LEN units long, with the
same length gap, and the rectangle has overall width RECT-WIDTH units
@@ -5611,8 +5615,8 @@
\put(0,0){\dashbox{0.1}(5,0.5){My hovercraft is full of eels.}}
-Each dash will be '0.1\unitlength' long, the box's width is
-'5\unitlength' and its height is '0.5\unitlength'.
+Each dash will be ‘0.1\unitlength’ long, the box’s width is
+‘5\unitlength’ and its height is ‘0.5\unitlength’.
As in that example, a dashed box looks best when RECT-WIDTH and
RECT-HEIGHT are multiples of the DASH-LEN.
@@ -5620,7 +5624,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: quotation & quote, Next: tabbing, Prev: picture, Up: Environments
-8.20 'quotation' & 'quote'
+8.20 ‘quotation’ & ‘quote’
==========================
Synopsis:
@@ -5636,13 +5640,13 @@
\end{quote}
Include a quotation. Both environments indent margins on both sides
-by '\leftmargin' and the text is right-justified.
+by ‘\leftmargin’ and the text is right-justified.
- They differ in how they treat paragraphs. In the 'quotation'
+ They differ in how they treat paragraphs. In the ‘quotation’
environment, paragraphs are indented by 1.5em and the space between
-paragraphs is small, '0pt plus 1pt'. In the 'quote' environment,
+paragraphs is small, ‘0pt plus 1pt’. In the ‘quote’ environment,
paragraphs are not indented and there is vertical space between
-paragraphs (it is the rubber length '\parsep').
+paragraphs (it is the rubber length ‘\parsep’).
\begin{quotation} \small\it
Four score and seven years ago
@@ -5653,7 +5657,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: tabbing, Next: table, Prev: quotation & quote, Up: Environments
-8.21 'tabbing'
+8.21 ‘tabbing’
==============
Synopsis:
@@ -5666,12 +5670,12 @@
Align text in columns, by setting tab stops and tabbing to them much
as was done on a typewriter. This is less often used than the
-environments 'tabular' (*note tabular::) or 'array' (*note array::)
+environments ‘tabular’ (*note tabular::) or ‘array’ (*note array::)
because in those the width of each column need not be constant and need
not be known in advance.
This example has a first line where the tab stops are set to explicit
-widths, ended by a '\kill' command (which is described below):
+widths, ended by a ‘\kill’ command (which is described below):
\begin{tabbing}
\hspace{1.2in}\=\hspace{1in}\=\kill
@@ -5682,27 +5686,27 @@
\textit{Surprise} \>28 \>1805 \\
\end{tabbing}
- Both the 'tabbing' environment and the more widely-used 'tabular'
+ Both the ‘tabbing’ environment and the more widely-used ‘tabular’
environment put text in columns. The most important distinction is that
-in 'tabular' the width of columns is determined automatically by LaTeX,
-while in 'tabbing' the user sets the tab stops. Another distinction is
-that 'tabular' generates a box, but 'tabbing' can be broken across
-pages. Finally, while 'tabular' can be used in any mode, 'tabbing' can
+in ‘tabular’ the width of columns is determined automatically by LaTeX,
+while in ‘tabbing’ the user sets the tab stops. Another distinction is
+that ‘tabular’ generates a box, but ‘tabbing’ can be broken across
+pages. Finally, while ‘tabular’ can be used in any mode, ‘tabbing’ can
be used only in paragraph mode and it always starts a new paragraph,
without indentation.
Moreover, as shown in the example above, there is no need to use the
-starred form of the '\hspace' command at the beginning of a tabbed row.
-The right margin of the 'tabbing' environment is the end of line, so
-that the width of the environment is '\linewidth'.
+starred form of the ‘\hspace’ command at the beginning of a tabbed row.
+The right margin of the ‘tabbing’ environment is the end of line, so
+that the width of the environment is ‘\linewidth’.
- The 'tabbing' environment contains a sequence of "tabbed rows". The
-first tabbed row begins immediately after '\begin{tabbing}' and each row
-ends with '\\' or '\kill'. The last row may omit the '\\' and end with
-just '\end{tabbing}'.
+ The ‘tabbing’ environment contains a sequence of “tabbed rows”. The
+first tabbed row begins immediately after ‘\begin{tabbing}’ and each row
+ends with ‘\\’ or ‘\kill’. The last row may omit the ‘\\’ and end with
+just ‘\end{tabbing}’.
- At any point the 'tabbing' environment has a "current tab stop
-pattern", a sequence of N > 0 tab stops, numbered 0, 1, etc. These
+ At any point the ‘tabbing’ environment has a “current tab stop
+pattern”, a sequence of N > 0 tab stops, numbered 0, 1, etc. These
create N corresponding columns. Tab stop 0 is always the left margin,
defined by the enclosing environment. Tab stop number I is set if it is
assigned a horizontal position on the page. Tab stop number I can only
@@ -5709,70 +5713,70 @@
be set if all the stops 0, ..., i-1 have already been set; normally
later stops are to the right of earlier ones.
- By default any text typeset in a 'tabbing' environment is typeset
+ By default any text typeset in a ‘tabbing’ environment is typeset
ragged right and left-aligned on the current tab stop. Typesetting is
done in LR mode (*note Modes::).
- The following commands can be used inside a 'tabbing' environment.
+ The following commands can be used inside a ‘tabbing’ environment.
They are all fragile (*note \protect::).
-'\\ (tabbing)'
+‘\\ (tabbing)’
End a tabbed line and typeset it.
-'\= (tabbing)'
+‘\= (tabbing)’
Sets a tab stop at the current position.
-'\> (tabbing)'
+‘\> (tabbing)’
Advances to the next tab stop.
-'\<'
+‘\<’
Put following text to the left of the local margin (without
changing the margin). Can only be used at the start of the line.
-'\+'
+‘\+’
Moves the left margin of the next and all the following commands
one tab stop to the right, beginning tabbed line if necessary.
-'\-'
+‘\-’
Moves the left margin of the next and all the following commands
one tab stop to the left, beginning tabbed line if necessary.
-'\' (tabbing)'
+‘\' (tabbing)’
Moves everything that you have typed so far in the current column,
- i.e., everything from the most recent '\>', '\<', '\'', '\\', or
- '\kill' command, to the previous column and aligned to the right,
- flush against the current column's tab stop.
+ i.e., everything from the most recent ‘\>’, ‘\<’, ‘\'’, ‘\\’, or
+ ‘\kill’ command, to the previous column and aligned to the right,
+ flush against the current column’s tab stop.
-'\` (tabbing)'
+‘\` (tabbing)’
Allows you to put text flush right against any tab stop, including
- tab stop 0. However, it can't move text to the right of the last
- column because there's no tab stop there. The '\`' command moves
- all the text that follows it, up to the '\\' or '\end{tabbing}'
- command that ends the line, to the right margin of the 'tabbing'
- environment. There must be no '\>' or '\'' command between the
- '\`' and the '\\' or '\end{tabbing}' command that ends the line.
+ tab stop 0. However, it can’t move text to the right of the last
+ column because there’s no tab stop there. The ‘\`’ command moves
+ all the text that follows it, up to the ‘\\’ or ‘\end{tabbing}’
+ command that ends the line, to the right margin of the ‘tabbing’
+ environment. There must be no ‘\>’ or ‘\'’ command between the
+ ‘\`’ and the ‘\\’ or ‘\end{tabbing}’ command that ends the line.
-'\a (tabbing)'
- In a 'tabbing' environment, the commands '\=', '\'' and '\`' do not
+‘\a (tabbing)’
+ In a ‘tabbing’ environment, the commands ‘\=’, ‘\'’ and ‘\`’ do not
produce accents as usual (*note Accents::). Instead, use the
- commands '\a=', '\a'' and '\a`'.
+ commands ‘\a=’, ‘\a'’ and ‘\a`’.
-'\kill'
- Sets tab stops without producing text. Works just like '\\' except
+‘\kill’
+ Sets tab stops without producing text. Works just like ‘\\’ except
that it throws away the current line instead of producing output
- for it. Any '\=', '\+' or '\-' commands in that line remain in
+ for it. Any ‘\=’, ‘\+’ or ‘\-’ commands in that line remain in
effect.
-'\poptabs'
- Restores the tab stop positions saved by the last '\pushtabs'.
+‘\poptabs’
+ Restores the tab stop positions saved by the last ‘\pushtabs’.
-'\pushtabs'
+‘\pushtabs’
Saves all current tab stop positions. Useful for temporarily
- changing tab stop positions in the middle of a 'tabbing'
+ changing tab stop positions in the middle of a ‘tabbing’
environment.
-'\tabbingsep'
- Distance of the text moved by '\'' to left of current tab stop.
+‘\tabbingsep’
+ Distance of the text moved by ‘\'’ to left of current tab stop.
This example typesets a Pascal function:
@@ -5799,13 +5803,13 @@
This example is just for illustration of the environment. To actually
typeset computer code in typewriter like this, a verbatim environment
(*note verbatim::) would normally be best. For pretty-printed code,
-there are quite a few packages, including 'algorithm2e', 'fancyvrb',
-'listings', and 'minted'.
+there are quite a few packages, including ‘algorithm2e’, ‘fancyvrb’,
+‘listings’, and ‘minted’.
File: latex2e.info, Node: table, Next: tabular, Prev: tabbing, Up: Environments
-8.22 'table'
+8.22 ‘table’
============
Synopsis:
@@ -5821,7 +5825,7 @@
instead are floated to a convenient place, such as the top of a
following page.
- This example 'table' environment contains a 'tabular'
+ This example ‘table’ environment contains a ‘tabular’
\begin{table}
\centering\small
@@ -5836,15 +5840,15 @@
\label{tab:cello}
\end{table}
-but you can put many different kinds of content in a 'table': the TABLE
+but you can put many different kinds of content in a ‘table’: the TABLE
BODY may contain text, LaTeX commands, graphics, etc. It is typeset in
-a 'parbox' of width '\textwidth'.
+a ‘parbox’ of width ‘\textwidth’.
For the possible values of PLACEMENT and their effect on the float
placement algorithm, see *note Floats::.
The label is optional; it is used for cross references (*note Cross
-references::). The '\caption' command is also optional. It specifies
+references::). The ‘\caption’ command is also optional. It specifies
caption text TITLE for the table (*note \caption::). By default it is
numbered. If its optional LOTTITLE is present then that text is used in
the list of tables instead of TITLE (*note Table of contents etc.::).
@@ -5866,7 +5870,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: tabular, Next: thebibliography, Prev: table, Up: Environments
-8.23 'tabular'
+8.23 ‘tabular’
==============
Synopsis:
@@ -5895,24 +5899,24 @@
\end{tabular}
The output will have two left-aligned columns with a vertical bar
-between them. This is specified in 'tabular''s argument '{l|l}'. Put
+between them. This is specified in ‘tabular’’s argument ‘{l|l}’. Put
the entries into different columns by separating them with an ampersand,
-'&'. The end of each row is marked with a double backslash, '\\'. Put
-a horizontal rule below a row, after a double backslash, with '\hline'.
-After the last row the '\\' is optional, unless an '\hline' command
+‘&’. The end of each row is marked with a double backslash, ‘\\’. Put
+a horizontal rule below a row, after a double backslash, with ‘\hline’.
+After the last row the ‘\\’ is optional, unless an ‘\hline’ command
follows to put a rule below the table.
- The required and optional arguments to 'tabular' consist of:
+ The required and optional arguments to ‘tabular’ consist of:
POS
- Optional. Specifies the table's vertical position. The default is
+ Optional. Specifies the table’s vertical position. The default is
to align the table so its vertical center matches the baseline of
- the surrounding text. There are two other possible alignments: 't'
+ the surrounding text. There are two other possible alignments: ‘t’
aligns the table so its top row matches the baseline of the
- surrounding text, and 'b' aligns on the bottom row.
+ surrounding text, and ‘b’ aligns on the bottom row.
This only has an effect if there is other text. In the common case
- of a 'tabular' alone in a 'center' environment this option makes no
+ of a ‘tabular’ alone in a ‘center’ environment this option makes no
difference.
COLS
@@ -5920,38 +5924,38 @@
sequence of the following specifiers, corresponding to the types of
column and intercolumn material.
- 'l'
+ ‘l’
A column of left-aligned items.
- 'r'
+ ‘r’
A column of right-aligned items.
- 'c'
+ ‘c’
A column of centered items.
- '|'
+ ‘|’
A vertical line the full height and depth of the environment.
- '@{TEXT OR SPACE}'
+ ‘@{TEXT OR SPACE}’
Insert TEXT OR SPACE at this location in every row. The TEXT
OR SPACE material is typeset in LR mode. This text is fragile
(*note \protect::).
- If between two columns there is no @-expression then LaTeX's
- 'book', 'article', and 'report' classes will put on either
- side of each column a space of length '\tabcolsep', which by
- default is 6pt. That is, by default adjacent columns are
- separated by 12pt (so '\tabcolsep' is misleadingly named since
- it is only half of the separation between tabular columns).
- In addition, a space of 6pt also comes before the first column
- and after the final column, unless you put a '@{...}' or '|'
- there.
+ If between two column specifiers there is no @-expression then
+ LaTeX’s ‘book’, ‘article’, and ‘report’ classes will put on
+ either side of each column a space of width ‘\tabcolsep’,
+ which by default is 6pt. That is, by default adjacent columns
+ are separated by 12pt (so ‘\tabcolsep’ is misleadingly named
+ since it is only half of the separation between tabular
+ columns). In addition, a space of ‘\tabcolsep’ also comes
+ before the first column and after the final column, unless you
+ put a ‘@{...}’ there.
If you override the default and use an @-expression then LaTeX
- does not insert '\tabcolsep' so you must insert any desired
- space yourself, as in '@{\hspace{1em}}'.
+ does not insert ‘\tabcolsep’ so you must insert any desired
+ space yourself, as in ‘@{\hspace{1em}}’.
- An empty expression '@{}' will eliminate the space. In
+ An empty expression ‘@{}’ will eliminate the space. In
particular, sometimes you want to eliminate the space before
the first column or after the last one, as in the example
below where the tabular lines need to lie on the left margin.
@@ -5971,12 +5975,12 @@
$9$ &$80665$
\end{tabular}
- An '\extracolsep{WD}' command in an @-expression causes an
+ An ‘\extracolsep{WD}’ command in an @-expression causes an
extra space of width WD to appear to the left of all
subsequent columns, until countermanded by another
- '\extracolsep'. Unlike ordinary intercolumn space, this extra
- space is not suppressed by an @-expression. An '\extracolsep'
- command can be used only in an @-expression in the 'cols'
+ ‘\extracolsep’. Unlike ordinary intercolumn space, this extra
+ space is not suppressed by an @-expression. An ‘\extracolsep’
+ command can be used only in an @-expression in the ‘cols’
argument. Below, LaTeX inserts the right amount of
intercolumn space to make the entire table 4 inches wide.
@@ -5986,60 +5990,60 @@
\end{tabular*}
To insert commands that are automatically executed before a
- given column, load the 'array' package and use the '>{...}'
+ given column, load the ‘array’ package and use the ‘>{...}’
specifier.
- 'p{WD}'
+ ‘p{WD}’
Each item in the column is typeset in a parbox of width WD, as
- if it were the argument of a '\parbox[t]{wd}{...}' command.
+ if it were the argument of a ‘\parbox[t]{wd}{...}’ command.
- A line break double backslash '\\' may not appear in the item,
- except inside an environment like 'minipage', 'array', or
- 'tabular', or inside an explicit '\parbox', or in the scope of
- a '\centering', '\raggedright', or '\raggedleft' declaration
- (when used in a 'p'-column element these declarations must
- appear inside braces, as with '{\centering .. \\ ..}').
+ A line break double backslash ‘\\’ may not appear in the item,
+ except inside an environment like ‘minipage’, ‘array’, or
+ ‘tabular’, or inside an explicit ‘\parbox’, or in the scope of
+ a ‘\centering’, ‘\raggedright’, or ‘\raggedleft’ declaration
+ (when used in a ‘p’-column element these declarations must
+ appear inside braces, as with ‘{\centering .. \\ ..}’).
Otherwise LaTeX will misinterpret the double backslash as
ending the tabular row. Instead, to get a line break in there
- use '\newline' (*note \newline::).
+ use ‘\newline’ (*note \newline::).
- '*{NUM}{COLS}'
+ ‘*{NUM}{COLS}’
Equivalent to NUM copies of COLS, where NUM is a positive
integer and COLS is a list of specifiers. Thus the specifier
- '\begin{tabular}{|*{3}{l|r}|}' is equivalent to the specifier
- '\begin{tabular}{|l|rl|rl|r|}'. Note that COLS may contain
- another '*'-expression.
+ ‘\begin{tabular}{|*{3}{l|r}|}’ is equivalent to the specifier
+ ‘\begin{tabular}{|l|rl|rl|r|}’. Note that COLS may contain
+ another ‘*’-expression.
WIDTH
- Required for 'tabular*', not allowed for 'tabular'. Specifies the
- width of the 'tabular*' environment. The space between columns
- should be rubber, as with '@{\extracolsep{\fill}}', to allow the
+ Required for ‘tabular*’, not allowed for ‘tabular’. Specifies the
+ width of the ‘tabular*’ environment. The space between columns
+ should be rubber, as with ‘@{\extracolsep{\fill}}’, to allow the
table to stretch or shrink to make the specified width, or else you
- are likely to get the 'Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in alignment
- ...' warning.
+ are likely to get the ‘Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in alignment
+ ...’ warning.
Parameters that control formatting:
-'\arrayrulewidth'
- A length that is the thickness of the rule created by '|',
- '\hline', and '\vline' in the 'tabular' and 'array' environments.
- The default is '.4pt'. Change it as in
- '\setlength{\arrayrulewidth}{0.8pt}'.
+‘\arrayrulewidth’
+ A length that is the thickness of the rule created by ‘|’,
+ ‘\hline’, and ‘\vline’ in the ‘tabular’ and ‘array’ environments.
+ The default is ‘.4pt’. Change it as in
+ ‘\setlength{\arrayrulewidth}{0.8pt}’.
-'\arraystretch'
- A factor by which the spacing between rows in the 'tabular' and
- 'array' environments is multiplied. The default is '1', for no
- scaling. Change it as '\renewcommand{\arraystretch}{1.2}'.
+‘\arraystretch’
+ A factor by which the spacing between rows in the ‘tabular’ and
+ ‘array’ environments is multiplied. The default is ‘1’, for no
+ scaling. Change it as ‘\renewcommand{\arraystretch}{1.2}’.
-'\doublerulesep'
+‘\doublerulesep’
A length that is the distance between the vertical rules produced
- by the '||' specifier. The default is '2pt'.
+ by the ‘||’ specifier. The default is ‘2pt’.
-'\tabcolsep'
+‘\tabcolsep’
A length that is half of the space between columns. The default is
- '6pt'. Change it with '\setlength'.
+ ‘6pt’. Change it with ‘\setlength’.
- The following commands can be used inside the body of a 'tabular'
+ The following commands can be used inside the body of a ‘tabular’
environment, the first two inside an entry and the second two between
lines:
@@ -6053,7 +6057,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \multicolumn, Next: \vline, Up: tabular
-8.23.1 '\multicolumn'
+8.23.1 ‘\multicolumn’
---------------------
Synopsis:
@@ -6060,14 +6064,14 @@
\multicolumn{NUMCOLS}{COLS}{TEXT}
- Make an 'array' or 'tabular' entry that spans several columns. The
+ Make an ‘array’ or ‘tabular’ entry that spans several columns. The
first argument NUMCOLS gives the number of columns to span. The second
-argument COLS specifies the formatting of the entry, with 'c' for
-centered, 'l' for flush left, or 'r' for flush right. The third
+argument COLS specifies the formatting of the entry, with ‘c’ for
+centered, ‘l’ for flush left, or ‘r’ for flush right. The third
argument TEXT gives the contents of that entry.
In this example, in the first row, the second and third columns are
-spanned by the single heading 'Name'.
+spanned by the single heading ‘Name’.
\begin{tabular}{lccl}
\textit{ID} &\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textit{Name}} &\textit{Age} \\
@@ -6077,16 +6081,16 @@
\end{tabular}
What counts as a column is: the column format specifier for the
-'array' or 'tabular' environment is broken into parts, where each part
-(except the first) begins with 'l', 'c', 'r', or 'p'. So from
-'\begin{tabular}{|r|ccp{1.5in}|}' the parts are '|r|', 'c', 'c',
-and 'p{1.5in}|'.
+‘array’ or ‘tabular’ environment is broken into parts, where each part
+(except the first) begins with ‘l’, ‘c’, ‘r’, or ‘p’. So from
+‘\begin{tabular}{|r|ccp{1.5in}|}’ the parts are ‘|r|’, ‘c’, ‘c’,
+and ‘p{1.5in}|’.
- The COLS argument overrides the 'array' or 'tabular' environment's
+ The COLS argument overrides the ‘array’ or ‘tabular’ environment’s
intercolumn area default adjoining this multicolumn entry. To affect
-that area, this argument can contain vertical bars '|' indicating the
-placement of vertical rules, and '@{...}' expressions. Thus if COLS is
-'|c|' then this multicolumn entry will be centered and a vertical rule
+that area, this argument can contain vertical bars ‘|’ indicating the
+placement of vertical rules, and ‘@{...}’ expressions. Thus if COLS is
+‘|c|’ then this multicolumn entry will be centered and a vertical rule
will come in the intercolumn area before it and after it. This table
details the exact behavior.
@@ -6098,27 +6102,27 @@
\end{tabular}
Before the first entry the output will not have a vertical rule because
-the '\multicolumn' has the COLS specifier 'r' with no initial vertical
+the ‘\multicolumn’ has the COLS specifier ‘r’ with no initial vertical
bar. Between entry one and entry two there will be a vertical rule;
although the first COLS does not have an ending vertical bar, the second
COLS does have a starting one. Between entry two and entry three there
is a single vertical rule; despite that the COLS in both of the
-surrounding 'multicolumn''s call for a vertical rule, you only get one
+surrounding ‘multicolumn’’s call for a vertical rule, you only get one
rule. Between entry three and entry four there is no vertical rule; the
-default calls for one but the COLS in the entry three '\multicolumn'
+default calls for one but the COLS in the entry three ‘\multicolumn’
leaves it out, and that takes precedence. Finally, following entry four
there is a vertical rule because of the default.
The number of spanned columns NUMCOLS can be 1. Besides giving the
ability to change the horizontal alignment, this also is useful to
-override for one row the 'tabular' definition's default intercolumn area
+override for one row the ‘tabular’ definition’s default intercolumn area
specification, including the placement of vertical rules.
- In the example below, in the 'tabular' definition the first column is
+ In the example below, in the ‘tabular’ definition the first column is
specified to default to left justified but in the first row the entry is
-centered with '\multicolumn{1}{c}{\textsc{Period}}'. Also in the first
+centered with ‘\multicolumn{1}{c}{\textsc{Period}}’. Also in the first
row, the second and third columns are spanned by a single entry with
-'\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textsc{Span}}', overriding the specification to
+‘\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textsc{Span}}’, overriding the specification to
center those two columns on the page range en-dash.
\begin{tabular}{l|r@{--}l}
@@ -6130,34 +6134,34 @@
Impressionistic &1875 &1925
\end{tabular}
-Although the 'tabular' specification by default puts a vertical rule
+Although the ‘tabular’ specification by default puts a vertical rule
between the first and second columns, no such vertical rule appears in
-the first row here. That's because there is no vertical bar in the COLS
-part of the first row's first '\multicolumn' command.
+the first row here. That’s because there is no vertical bar in the COLS
+part of the first row’s first ‘\multicolumn’ command.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \vline, Next: \cline, Prev: \multicolumn, Up: tabular
-8.23.2 '\vline'
+8.23.2 ‘\vline’
---------------
-Draw a vertical line in a 'tabular' or 'array' environment extending the
-full height and depth of an entry's row. Can also be used in an
- at -expression, although its synonym vertical bar '|' is more common.
-This command is rarely used in the body of a table; typically a table's
-vertical lines are specified in 'tabular''s COLS argument and overridden
-as needed with '\multicolumn' (*note tabular::).
+Draw a vertical line in a ‘tabular’ or ‘array’ environment extending the
+full height and depth of an entry’s row. Can also be used in an
+ at -expression, although its synonym vertical bar ‘|’ is more common.
+This command is rarely used in the body of a table; typically a table’s
+vertical lines are specified in ‘tabular’’s COLS argument and overridden
+as needed with ‘\multicolumn’ (*note tabular::).
- The example below illustrates some pitfalls. In the first row's
-second entry the '\hfill' moves the '\vline' to the left edge of the
+ The example below illustrates some pitfalls. In the first row’s
+second entry the ‘\hfill’ moves the ‘\vline’ to the left edge of the
cell. But that is different than putting it halfway between the two
columns, so between the first and second columns there are two vertical
-rules, with the one from the '{c|cc}' specifier coming before the one
-produced by the '\vline\hfill'. In contrast, the first row's third
+rules, with the one from the ‘{c|cc}’ specifier coming before the one
+produced by the ‘\vline\hfill’. In contrast, the first row’s third
entry shows the usual way to put a vertical bar between two columns. In
-the second row, the 'ghi' is the widest entry in its column so in the
-'\vline\hfill' the '\hfill' has no effect and the vertical line in that
-entry appears immediately next to the 'g', with no whitespace.
+the second row, the ‘ghi’ is the widest entry in its column so in the
+‘\vline\hfill’ the ‘\hfill’ has no effect and the vertical line in that
+entry appears immediately next to the ‘g’, with no whitespace.
\begin{tabular}{c|cc}
x &\vline\hfill y &\multicolumn{1}{|r}{z} \\ % row 1
@@ -6167,7 +6171,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \cline, Next: \hline, Prev: \vline, Up: tabular
-8.23.3 '\cline'
+8.23.3 ‘\cline’
---------------
Synopsis:
@@ -6174,10 +6178,10 @@
\cline{I-J}
- In an 'array' or 'tabular' environment, draw a horizontal rule
-beginning in column I and ending in column J. The dash, '-', must
+ In an ‘array’ or ‘tabular’ environment, draw a horizontal rule
+beginning in column I and ending in column J. The dash, ‘-’, must
appear in the mandatory argument. To span a single column use the
-number twice, as with '\cline{2-2}'.
+number twice, as with ‘\cline{2-2}’.
This example puts two horizontal lines between the first and second
rows, one line in the first column only, and the other spanning the
@@ -6192,17 +6196,17 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \hline, Prev: \cline, Up: tabular
-8.23.4 '\hline'
+8.23.4 ‘\hline’
---------------
-Draw a horizontal line the width of the enclosing 'tabular' or 'array'
-environment. It's most commonly used to draw a line at the top, bottom,
+Draw a horizontal line the width of the enclosing ‘tabular’ or ‘array’
+environment. It’s most commonly used to draw a line at the top, bottom,
and between the rows of a table.
In this example the top of the table has two horizontal rules, one
above the other, that span both columns. The bottom of the table has a
-single rule spanning both columns. Because of the '\hline', the
-'tabular' second row's line ending double backslash '\\' is required.
+single rule spanning both columns. Because of the ‘\hline’, the
+‘tabular’ second row’s line ending double backslash ‘\\’ is required.
\begin{tabular}{ll} \hline\hline
Baseball &Red Sox \\
@@ -6212,7 +6216,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: thebibliography, Next: theorem, Prev: tabular, Up: Environments
-8.24 'thebibliography'
+8.24 ‘thebibliography’
======================
Synopsis:
@@ -6243,27 +6247,27 @@
Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1983.
\end{thebibliography}
-This styles the first reference as '[1] Leslie ...', and so that '...
-based on \cite{latexdps}' produces the matching '... based on [1]'. The
-second '\cite' produces '[1, 2]'. You must compile the document twice
+This styles the first reference as ‘[1] Leslie ...’, and so that ‘...
+based on \cite{latexdps}’ produces the matching ‘... based on [1]’. The
+second ‘\cite’ produces ‘[1, 2]’. You must compile the document twice
to resolve these references.
The mandatory argument WIDEST-LABEL is text that, when typeset, is as
-wide as the widest item label produced by the '\bibitem' commands. The
-tradition is to use '9' for bibliographies with less than 10 references,
-'99' for ones with less than 100, etc.
+wide as the widest item label produced by the ‘\bibitem’ commands. The
+tradition is to use ‘9’ for bibliographies with less than 10 references,
+‘99’ for ones with less than 100, etc.
- The bibliographic list is headed by a title such as 'Bibliography'.
-To change it there are two cases. In the 'book' and 'report' classes,
-where the top level sectioning is '\chapter' and the default title is
-'Bibliography', that title is in the macro '\bibname'. For 'article',
-where the class's top level sectioning is '\section' and the default is
-'References', the title is in macro '\refname'. Change it by redefining
-the command, as with '\renewcommand{\refname}{Cited references}', after
-'\begin{document}'.
+ The bibliographic list is headed by a title such as ‘Bibliography’.
+To change it there are two cases. In the ‘book’ and ‘report’ classes,
+where the top level sectioning is ‘\chapter’ and the default title is
+‘Bibliography’, that title is in the macro ‘\bibname’. For ‘article’,
+where the class’s top level sectioning is ‘\section’ and the default is
+‘References’, the title is in macro ‘\refname’. Change it by redefining
+the command, as with ‘\renewcommand{\refname}{Cited references}’, after
+‘\begin{document}’.
- Language support packages such as 'babel' will automatically redefine
-'\refname' or '\bibname' to fit the selected language.
+ Language support packages such as ‘babel’ will automatically redefine
+‘\refname’ or ‘\bibname’ to fit the selected language.
*Note list::, for the list layout control parameters.
@@ -6277,7 +6281,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \bibitem, Next: \cite, Up: thebibliography
-8.24.1 '\bibitem'
+8.24.1 ‘\bibitem’
-----------------
Synopsis:
@@ -6289,13 +6293,13 @@
\bibitem[LABEL]{CITE_KEY}
Generate an entry labeled by default by a number generated using the
-'enumi' counter. The "citation key" CITE_KEY can be any string of
+‘enumi’ counter. The “citation key” CITE_KEY can be any string of
letters, numbers, and punctuation symbols (but not comma).
*Note thebibliography::, for an example.
When provided, the optional LABEL becomes the entry label and the
-'enumi' counter is not incremented. With this
+‘enumi’ counter is not incremented. With this
\begin{thebibliography}
\bibitem[Lamport 1993]{latexdps}
@@ -6308,37 +6312,37 @@
Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1983.
\end{thebibliography}
-the first entry will be styled as '[Lamport 1993] Leslie ...' (The
+the first entry will be styled as ‘[Lamport 1993] Leslie ...’ (The
amount of horizontal space that LaTeX leaves for the label depends on
-the WIDEST-LABEL argument of the 'thebibliography' environment; see
-*note thebibliography::.) Similarly, '... based on \cite{latexdps}'
-will produce '... based on [Lamport 1994]'.
+the WIDEST-LABEL argument of the ‘thebibliography’ environment; see
+*note thebibliography::.) Similarly, ‘... based on \cite{latexdps}’
+will produce ‘... based on [Lamport 1994]’.
- If you mix '\bibitem' entries having a LABEL with those that do not
+ If you mix ‘\bibitem’ entries having a LABEL with those that do not
then LaTeX will number the unlabelled ones sequentially. In the example
-above the 'texbook' entry will appear as '[1] Donald ...', despite that
+above the ‘texbook’ entry will appear as ‘[1] Donald ...’, despite that
it is the second entry.
- If you use the same CITE_KEY twice then you get 'LaTeX Warning: There
-were multiply-defined labels'.
+ If you use the same CITE_KEY twice then you get ‘LaTeX Warning: There
+were multiply-defined labels’.
Under the hood, LaTeX remembers the CITE_KEY and LABEL information
-because '\bibitem' writes it to the auxiliary file 'JOBNAME.aux' (*note
+because ‘\bibitem’ writes it to the auxiliary file ‘JOBNAME.aux’ (*note
Jobname::). For instance, the above example causes the two
-'\bibcite{latexdps}{Lamport, 1993}' and '\bibcite{texbook}{1}' to appear
-in that file. The '.aux' file is read by the '\begin{document}' command
-and then the information is available for '\cite' commands. This
+‘\bibcite{latexdps}{Lamport, 1993}’ and ‘\bibcite{texbook}{1}’ to appear
+in that file. The ‘.aux’ file is read by the ‘\begin{document}’ command
+and then the information is available for ‘\cite’ commands. This
explains why you need to run LaTeX twice to resolve references: once to
write it out and once to read it in.
- Because of this two-pass algorithm, when you add a '\bibitem' or
-change its CITE_KEY you may get 'LaTeX Warning: Label(s) may have
-changed. Rerun to get cross-references right'. Fix it by recompiling.
+ Because of this two-pass algorithm, when you add a ‘\bibitem’ or
+change its CITE_KEY you may get ‘LaTeX Warning: Label(s) may have
+changed. Rerun to get cross-references right’. Fix it by recompiling.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \cite, Next: \nocite, Prev: \bibitem, Up: thebibliography
-8.24.2 '\cite'
+8.24.2 ‘\cite’
--------------
Synopsis:
@@ -6364,34 +6368,34 @@
Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1983.
\end{thebibliography}
-produces output like '... source is [1]'. You can change the appearance
+produces output like ‘... source is [1]’. You can change the appearance
of the citation and of the reference by using bibliography styles if you
-generate automatically the 'thebibliography' environment. More
+generate automatically the ‘thebibliography’ environment. More
information in *note Using BibTeX::.
The optional argument SUBCITE is appended to the citation. For
-example, 'See 14.3 in \cite[p.~314]{texbook}' might produce 'See 14.3 in
-[1, p. 314]'.
+example, ‘See 14.3 in \cite[p.~314]{texbook}’ might produce ‘See 14.3 in
+[1, p. 314]’.
- In addition to what appears in the output, '\cite' writes information
-to the auxiliary file 'JOBNAME.aux' (*note Jobname::). For instance,
-'\cite{latexdps}' writes '\citation{latexdps}' to that file. This
+ In addition to what appears in the output, ‘\cite’ writes information
+to the auxiliary file ‘JOBNAME.aux’ (*note Jobname::). For instance,
+‘\cite{latexdps}’ writes ‘\citation{latexdps}’ to that file. This
information is used by BibTeX to include in your reference list only
those works that you have actually cited; see *note \nocite:: also.
- If KEYS is not in your bibliography information then you get 'LaTeX
-Warning: There were undefined references', and in the output the
+ If KEYS is not in your bibliography information then you get ‘LaTeX
+Warning: There were undefined references’, and in the output the
citation shows as a boldface question mark between square brackets.
There are two possible causes. If you have mistyped something, as in
-'\cite{texbok}' then you need to correct the spelling. On the other
+‘\cite{texbok}’ then you need to correct the spelling. On the other
hand, if you have just added or modified the bibliographic information
-and so changed the '.aux' file (*note \bibitem::) then the fix may be to
+and so changed the ‘.aux’ file (*note \bibitem::) then the fix may be to
run LaTeX again.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \nocite, Next: Using BibTeX, Prev: \cite, Up: thebibliography
-8.24.3 '\nocite'
+8.24.3 ‘\nocite’
----------------
Synopsis:
@@ -6399,7 +6403,7 @@
\nocite{KEYS}
Produces no output but writes KEYS to the auxiliary file
-'JOBNAME.aux' (*note Jobname::).
+‘JOBNAME.aux’ (*note Jobname::).
The mandatory argument KEYS is a comma-separated list of one or more
citation keys (*note \bibitem::). This information is used by BibTeX to
@@ -6412,38 +6416,38 @@
8.24.4 Using BibTeX
-------------------
-As described in 'thebibliography' (*note thebibliography::), a
+As described in ‘thebibliography’ (*note thebibliography::), a
sophisticated approach to managing bibliographies is provided by the
BibTeX program. This is only an introduction; see the full
documentation on CTAN (*note CTAN::).
- With BibTeX, you don't use the 'thebibliography' environment directly
+ With BibTeX, you don’t use the ‘thebibliography’ environment directly
(*note thebibliography::). Instead, include these lines:
\bibliographystyle{BIBSTYLE}
\bibliography{BIBFILE1, BIBFILE2, ...}
-The BIBSTYLE refers to a file 'BIBSTYLE.bst', which defines how your
-citations will look. The standard BIBSTYLE's distributed with BibTeX
+The BIBSTYLE refers to a file ‘BIBSTYLE.bst’, which defines how your
+citations will look. The standard BIBSTYLE’s distributed with BibTeX
are:
-'alpha'
+‘alpha’
Labels are formed from name of author and year of publication. The
bibliographic items are sorted alphabetically.
-'plain'
+‘plain’
Labels are integers. Sort the bibliographic items alphabetically.
-'unsrt'
- Like 'plain', but entries are in order of citation.
-'abbrv'
- Like 'plain', but more compact labels.
+‘unsrt’
+ Like ‘plain’, but entries are in order of citation.
+‘abbrv’
+ Like ‘plain’, but more compact labels.
Many, many other BibTeX style files exist, tailored to the demands of
various publications. See the CTAN topic
<https://ctan.org/topic/bibtex-sty>.
- The '\bibliography' command is what actually produces the
+ The ‘\bibliography’ command is what actually produces the
bibliography. Its argument is a comma-separated list, referring to
-files named 'BIBFILE1.bib', 'BIBFILE2.bib', ... These contain your
+files named ‘BIBFILE1.bib’, ‘BIBFILE2.bib’, ... These contain your
database in BibTeX format. This shows a typical couple of entries in
that format.
@@ -6462,13 +6466,13 @@
publisher = {Bantam Books}
}
- Only the bibliographic entries referred to via '\cite' and '\nocite'
-will be listed in the document's bibliography. Thus you can keep all
+ Only the bibliographic entries referred to via ‘\cite’ and ‘\nocite’
+will be listed in the document’s bibliography. Thus you can keep all
your sources together in one file, or a small number of files, and rely
on BibTeX to include in this document only those that you used.
- With BibTeX, the KEYS argument to '\nocite' can also be the single
-character '*'. This means to implicitly cite all entries from all given
+ With BibTeX, the KEYS argument to ‘\nocite’ can also be the single
+character ‘*’. This means to implicitly cite all entries from all given
bibliographies.
* Menu:
@@ -6481,26 +6485,26 @@
8.24.4.1 BibTeX error messages
..............................
-If you forget to use '\bibliography' or '\bibliographystyle' in your
-document (or, less likely, any '\cite' or '\nocite' command), BibTeX
+If you forget to use ‘\bibliography’ or ‘\bibliographystyle’ in your
+document (or, less likely, any ‘\cite’ or ‘\nocite’ command), BibTeX
will issue an error message. Because BibTeX can be used with any
program, not just LaTeX, the error messages refer to the internal
-commands read by BibTeX (from the '.aux' file), rather than the
+commands read by BibTeX (from the ‘.aux’ file), rather than the
user-level commands described above.
Here is a table showing internal commands mentioned in the BibTeX
errors, and the corresponding user-level commands.
-'\bibdata'
- '\bibliography'
+‘\bibdata’
+ ‘\bibliography’
-'\bibstyle'
- '\bibliographystyle'
+‘\bibstyle’
+ ‘\bibliographystyle’
-'\citation'
- '\cite', '\nocite'
+‘\citation’
+ ‘\cite’, ‘\nocite’
- For example, if your document has no '\bibliographystyle' command,
+ For example, if your document has no ‘\bibliographystyle’ command,
BibTeX complains as follows:
I found no \bibstyle command---while reading file DOCUMENT.aux
@@ -6508,7 +6512,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: theorem, Next: titlepage, Prev: thebibliography, Up: Environments
-8.25 'theorem'
+8.25 ‘theorem’
==============
Synopsis:
@@ -6517,8 +6521,8 @@
THEOREM BODY
\end{theorem}
- Produces 'Theorem N' in boldface followed by THEOREM BODY in italics.
-The numbering possibilities for N are described under '\newtheorem'
+ Produces ‘Theorem N’ in boldface followed by THEOREM BODY in italics.
+The numbering possibilities for N are described under ‘\newtheorem’
(*note \newtheorem::).
\newtheorem{lem}{Lemma} % in preamble
@@ -6533,7 +6537,7 @@
text of theorem
\end{thm}
- Most new documents use the packages 'amsthm' and 'amsmath' from the
+ Most new documents use the packages ‘amsthm’ and ‘amsmath’ from the
American Mathematical Society. Among other things these packages
include a large number of options for theorem environments, such as
styling options.
@@ -6541,7 +6545,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: titlepage, Next: verbatim, Prev: theorem, Up: Environments
-8.26 'titlepage'
+8.26 ‘titlepage’
================
Synopsis:
@@ -6577,13 +6581,13 @@
\vspace{\stretch{2}}
\end{titlepage}
- To instead produce a standard title page without a 'titlepage'
-environment, use '\maketitle' (*note \maketitle::).
+ To instead produce a standard title page without a ‘titlepage’
+environment, use ‘\maketitle’ (*note \maketitle::).
File: latex2e.info, Node: verbatim, Next: verse, Prev: titlepage, Up: Environments
-8.27 'verbatim'
+8.27 ‘verbatim’
===============
Synopsis:
@@ -6594,46 +6598,46 @@
A paragraph-making environment in which LaTeX produces as output
exactly what you type as input. For instance inside LITERAL-TEXT the
-backslash '\' character does not start commands, it produces a printed
-'\', and carriage returns and blanks are taken literally. The output
-appears in a monospaced typewriter-like font ('\tt').
+backslash ‘\’ character does not start commands, it produces a printed
+‘\’, and carriage returns and blanks are taken literally. The output
+appears in a monospaced typewriter-like font (‘\tt’).
\begin{verbatim}
Symbol swearing: %&$#?!.
\end{verbatim}
- The only restriction on 'literal-text' is that it cannot include the
-string '\end{verbatim}'.
+ The only restriction on ‘literal-text’ is that it cannot include the
+string ‘\end{verbatim}’.
You cannot use the verbatim environment in the argument to macros,
-for instance in the argument to a '\section'. This is not the same as
+for instance in the argument to a ‘\section’. This is not the same as
commands being fragile (*note \protect::), instead it just cannot work,
-as the 'verbatim' environment changes the catcode regime before
+as the ‘verbatim’ environment changes the catcode regime before
processing its contents, and restore it immediately afterward,
nevertheless with a macro argument the content of the argument has
already be converted to a token list along the catcode regime in effect
-when the macro was called. However, the 'cprotect' package can help
+when the macro was called. However, the ‘cprotect’ package can help
with this.
One common use of verbatim input is to typeset computer code. There
-are packages that are an improvement the 'verbatim' environment. For
+are packages that are an improvement the ‘verbatim’ environment. For
instance, one improvement is to allow the verbatim inclusion of external
-files, or parts of those files. Such packages include 'listings', and
-'minted'.
+files, or parts of those files. Such packages include ‘listings’, and
+‘minted’.
A package that provides many more options for verbatim environments
-is 'fancyvrb'. Another is 'verbatimbox'.
+is ‘fancyvrb’. Another is ‘verbatimbox’.
For a list of all the relevant packages, see CTAN (*note CTAN::).
* Menu:
-* \verb:: The macro form of the 'verbatim' environment.
+* \verb:: The macro form of the ‘verbatim’ environment.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \verb, Up: verbatim
-8.27.1 '\verb'
+8.27.1 ‘\verb’
--------------
Synopsis:
@@ -6642,52 +6646,52 @@
\verb* CHAR LITERAL-TEXT CHAR
Typeset LITERAL-TEXT as it is input, including special characters and
-spaces, using the typewriter ('\tt') font.
+spaces, using the typewriter (‘\tt’) font.
- This example shows two different invocations of '\verb'.
+ This example shows two different invocations of ‘\verb’.
This is \verb!literally! the biggest pumpkin ever.
And this is the best squash, \verb+literally!+
-The first '\verb' has its LITERAL-TEXT surrounded with exclamation
-point, '!'. The second instead uses plus, '+', because the exclamation
-point is part of 'literal-text'.
+The first ‘\verb’ has its LITERAL-TEXT surrounded with exclamation
+point, ‘!’. The second instead uses plus, ‘+’, because the exclamation
+point is part of ‘literal-text’.
- The single-character delimiter CHAR surrounds LITERAL-TEXT--it must
-be the same character before and after. No spaces come between '\verb'
-or '\verb*' and CHAR, or between CHAR and LITERAL-TEXT, or between
+ The single-character delimiter CHAR surrounds LITERAL-TEXT—it must be
+the same character before and after. No spaces come between ‘\verb’ or
+‘\verb*’ and CHAR, or between CHAR and LITERAL-TEXT, or between
LITERAL-TEXT and the second occurrence of CHAR (the synopsis shows a
space only to distinguish one component from the other). The delimiter
must not appear in LITERAL-TEXT. The LITERAL-TEXT cannot include a line
break.
- The '*'-form differs only in that spaces are printed with a visible
+ The ‘*’-form differs only in that spaces are printed with a visible
space character.
The output from this will include a visible space on both side of
-word 'with':
+word ‘with’:
The command's first argument is \verb*!filename with extension! and ...
- For typesetting Internet addresses, urls, the package 'url' is a
-better option than the '\verb' command, since it allows line breaks.
+ For typesetting Internet addresses, urls, the package ‘url’ is a
+better option than the ‘\verb’ command, since it allows line breaks.
For computer code there are many packages with advantages over
-'\verb'. One is 'listings', another is 'minted'.
+‘\verb’. One is ‘listings’, another is ‘minted’.
- You cannot use '\verb' in the argument to a macro, for instance in
-the argument to a '\section'. It is not a question of '\verb' being
-fragile (*note \protect::), instead it just cannot work, as the '\verb'
+ You cannot use ‘\verb’ in the argument to a macro, for instance in
+the argument to a ‘\section’. It is not a question of ‘\verb’ being
+fragile (*note \protect::), instead it just cannot work, as the ‘\verb’
command changes the catcode regime before reading its argument, and
restore it immediately afterward, nevertheless with a macro argument the
content of the argument has already be converted to a token list along
the catcode regime in effect when the macro was called. However, the
-'cprotect' package can help with this.
+‘cprotect’ package can help with this.
File: latex2e.info, Node: verse, Prev: verbatim, Up: Environments
-8.28 'verse'
+8.28 ‘verse’
============
Synopsis:
@@ -6700,12 +6704,12 @@
An environment for poetry.
- Here are two lines from Shakespeare's Romeo and Juliet.
+ Here are two lines from Shakespeare’s Romeo and Juliet.
Then plainly know my heart's dear love is set \\
On the fair daughter of rich Capulet.
- Separate the lines of each stanza with '\\', and use one or more
+ Separate the lines of each stanza with ‘\\’, and use one or more
blank lines to separate the stanzas.
\begin{verse}
@@ -6757,7 +6761,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \\, Next: \obeycr & \restorecr, Up: Line breaking
-9.1 '\\'
+9.1 ‘\\’
========
Synopsis, one of:
@@ -6779,35 +6783,35 @@
\title{My story: \\[0.25in]
a tale of woe}
-The starred form, '\\*', tells LaTeX not to start a new page between the
-two lines, by issuing a '\nobreak'.
+The starred form, ‘\\*’, tells LaTeX not to start a new page between the
+two lines, by issuing a ‘\nobreak’.
Explicit line breaks in the main text body are unusual in LaTeX. In
-particular, don't start new paragraphs with '\\'. Instead leave a blank
-line between the two paragraphs. And don't put in a sequence of '\\''s
-to make vertical space. Instead use '\vspace{LENGTH}', or
-'\leavevmode\vspace{LENGTH}', or '\vspace*{LENGTH}' if you want the
+particular, don’t start new paragraphs with ‘\\’. Instead leave a blank
+line between the two paragraphs. And don’t put in a sequence of ‘\\’’s
+to make vertical space. Instead use ‘\vspace{LENGTH}’, or
+‘\leavevmode\vspace{LENGTH}’, or ‘\vspace*{LENGTH}’ if you want the
space to not be thrown out at the top of a new page (*note \vspace::).
- The '\\' command is mostly used outside of the main flow of text such
-as in a 'tabular' or 'array' environment or in an equation environment.
+ The ‘\\’ command is mostly used outside of the main flow of text such
+as in a ‘tabular’ or ‘array’ environment or in an equation environment.
- The '\\' command is a synonym for '\newline' (*note \newline::) under
-ordinary circumstances (an example of an exception is the 'p{...}'
-column in a 'tabular' environment; *note tabular::).
+ The ‘\\’ command is a synonym for ‘\newline’ (*note \newline::) under
+ordinary circumstances (an example of an exception is the ‘p{...}’
+column in a ‘tabular’ environment; *note tabular::).
- The '\\' command is a macro, and its definition changes by context so
-that its definition in normal text, a 'center' environment, a
-'flushleft' environment, and a 'tabular' are all different. In normal
+ The ‘\\’ command is a macro, and its definition changes by context so
+that its definition in normal text, a ‘center’ environment, a
+‘flushleft’ environment, and a ‘tabular’ are all different. In normal
text when it forces a linebreak it is essentially a shorthand for
-'\newline'. It does not end horizontal mode or end the paragraph, it
+‘\newline’. It does not end horizontal mode or end the paragraph, it
just inserts some glue and penalties so that when the paragraph does end
a linebreak will occur at that point, with the short line padded with
white space.
- You get 'LaTeX Error: There's no line here to end' if you use '\\' to
+ You get ‘LaTeX Error: There's no line here to end’ if you use ‘\\’ to
ask for a new line, rather than to end the current line. An example is
-if you have '\begin{document}\\' or, more likely, something like this.
+if you have ‘\begin{document}\\’ or, more likely, something like this.
\begin{center}
\begin{minipage}{0.5\textwidth}
@@ -6817,23 +6821,23 @@
\end{center}
Fix it by replacing the double backslash with something like
-'\vspace{\baselineskip}'.
+‘\vspace{\baselineskip}’.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \obeycr & \restorecr, Next: \newline, Prev: \\, Up: Line breaking
-9.2 '\obeycr' & '\restorecr'
+9.2 ‘\obeycr’ & ‘\restorecr’
============================
-The '\obeycr' command makes a return in the input file ('^^M',
-internally) the same as '\\', followed by '\relax'. So each new line in
-the input will also be a new line in the output. The '\restorecr'
+The ‘\obeycr’ command makes a return in the input file (‘^^M’,
+internally) the same as ‘\\’, followed by ‘\relax’. So each new line in
+the input will also be a new line in the output. The ‘\restorecr’
command restores normal line-breaking behavior.
This is not the way to show verbatim text or computer code. Use
-'verbatim' (*note verbatim::) instead.
+‘verbatim’ (*note verbatim::) instead.
- With LaTeX's usual defaults, this
+ With LaTeX’s usual defaults, this
aaa
bbb
@@ -6865,22 +6869,22 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \newline, Next: \- (hyphenation), Prev: \obeycr & \restorecr, Up: Line breaking
-9.3 '\newline'
+9.3 ‘\newline’
==============
In ordinary text, this ends a line in a way that does not right-justify
it, so the text before the end of line is not stretched. That is, in
-paragraph mode (*note Modes::), the '\newline' command is equivalent to
+paragraph mode (*note Modes::), the ‘\newline’ command is equivalent to
double-backslash (*note \\::). This command is fragile (*note
\protect::).
- However, the two commands are different inside a 'tabular' or 'array'
+ However, the two commands are different inside a ‘tabular’ or ‘array’
environment. In a column with a specifier producing a paragraph box
-such as typically 'p{...}', '\newline' will insert a line end inside of
+such as typically ‘p{...}’, ‘\newline’ will insert a line end inside of
the column; that is, it does not break the entire tabular row. To break
-the entire row use '\\' or its equivalent '\tabularnewline'.
+the entire row use ‘\\’ or its equivalent ‘\tabularnewline’.
- This will print 'Name:' and 'Address:' as two lines in a single cell
+ This will print ‘Name:’ and ‘Address:’ as two lines in a single cell
of the table.
\begin{tabular}{p{1in}@{\hspace{2in}}p{1in}}
@@ -6887,21 +6891,21 @@
Name: \newline Address: &Date: \\ \hline
\end{tabular}
-The 'Date:' will be baseline-aligned with 'Name:'.
+The ‘Date:’ will be baseline-aligned with ‘Name:’.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \- (hyphenation), Next: \discretionary, Prev: \newline, Up: Line breaking
-9.4 '\-' (discretionary hyphen)
+9.4 ‘\-’ (discretionary hyphen)
===============================
Tell LaTeX that it may hyphenate the word at that point. When you
-insert '\-' commands in a word, the word will only be hyphenated at
+insert ‘\-’ commands in a word, the word will only be hyphenated at
those points and not at any of the other hyphenation points that LaTeX
might otherwise have chosen. This command is robust (*note \protect::).
LaTeX is good at hyphenating and usually finds most of the correct
-hyphenation points, while almost never using an incorrect one. The '\-'
+hyphenation points, while almost never using an incorrect one. The ‘\-’
command is for exceptional cases.
For example, LaTeX does not ordinarily hyphenate words containing a
@@ -6921,15 +6925,15 @@
Commenting out the third line and uncommenting the fourth makes a much
better fit.
- The '\-' command only allows LaTeX to break there, it does not
+ The ‘\-’ command only allows LaTeX to break there, it does not
require that it break there. You can force a split with something like
-'Hef-\linebreak feron'. Of course, if you later change the text then
-this forced break may look very odd, so this approach requires care.
+‘Hef-\linebreak feron’. Of course, if you later change the text then
+this forced break may look out of place, so this approach requires care.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \discretionary, Next: \fussy & \sloppy, Prev: \- (hyphenation), Up: Line breaking
-9.5 '\discretionary' (generalized hyphenation point)
+9.5 ‘\discretionary’ (generalized hyphenation point)
====================================================
Synopsis:
@@ -6939,33 +6943,33 @@
Handle word changes around hyphens. This command is not often used
in LaTeX documents.
- If a line break occurs at the point where '\discretionary' appears
+ If a line break occurs at the point where ‘\discretionary’ appears
then TeX puts PRE-BREAK at the end of the current line and puts
POST-BREAK at the start of the next line. If there is no line break
here then TeX puts NO-BREAK.
- In 'difficult' the three letters 'ffi' form a ligature. But TeX can
-nonetheless break between the two 'f''s with this.
+ In ‘difficult’ the three letters ‘ffi’ form a ligature. But TeX can
+nonetheless break between the two ‘f’’s with this.
di\discretionary{f-}{fi}{ffi}cult
Note that users do not have to do this. It is typically handled
-automatically by TeX's hyphenation algorithm.
+automatically by TeX’s hyphenation algorithm.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \fussy & \sloppy, Next: \hyphenation, Prev: \discretionary, Up: Line breaking
-9.6 '\fussy' & '\sloppy'
+9.6 ‘\fussy’ & ‘\sloppy’
========================
Declarations to make TeX more picky or less picky about line breaking.
-Declaring '\fussy' usually avoids too much space between words, at the
-cost of an occasional overfull box. Conversely, '\sloppy' avoids
+Declaring ‘\fussy’ usually avoids too much space between words, at the
+cost of an occasional overfull box. Conversely, ‘\sloppy’ avoids
overfull boxes while suffering loose interword spacing.
- The default is '\fussy'. Line breaking in a paragraph is controlled
+ The default is ‘\fussy’. Line breaking in a paragraph is controlled
by whichever declaration is current at the end of the paragraph, i.e.,
-at the blank line or '\par' or displayed equation ending that paragraph.
+at the blank line or ‘\par’ or displayed equation ending that paragraph.
So to affect the line breaks, include that paragraph-ending material in
the scope of the command.
@@ -6976,7 +6980,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: sloppypar, Up: \fussy & \sloppy
-9.6.1 'sloppypar'
+9.6.1 ‘sloppypar’
-----------------
Synopsis:
@@ -6985,9 +6989,9 @@
... paragraphs ...
\end{sloppypar}
- Typeset the paragraphs with '\sloppy' in effect (*note \fussy &
+ Typeset the paragraphs with ‘\sloppy’ in effect (*note \fussy &
\sloppy::). Use this to locally adjust line breaking, to avoid
-'Overfull box' or 'Underfull box' errors.
+‘Overfull box’ or ‘Underfull box’ errors.
The example is simple.
@@ -7007,7 +7011,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \hyphenation, Next: \linebreak & \nolinebreak, Prev: \fussy & \sloppy, Up: Line breaking
-9.7 '\hyphenation'
+9.7 ‘\hyphenation’
==================
Synopsis:
@@ -7016,7 +7020,7 @@
Declares allowed hyphenation points within the words in the list.
The words in that list are separated by spaces. Show permitted points
-for hyphenation with a dash character, '-'.
+for hyphenation with a dash character, ‘-’.
Here is an example:
@@ -7023,13 +7027,13 @@
\hyphenation{hat-er il-lit-e-ra-ti tru-th-i-ness}
Use lowercase letters. TeX will only hyphenate if the word matches
-exactly, no inflections are tried. Multiple '\hyphenation' commands
+exactly, no inflections are tried. Multiple ‘\hyphenation’ commands
accumulate.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \linebreak & \nolinebreak, Prev: \hyphenation, Up: Line breaking
-9.8 '\linebreak' & '\nolinebreak'
+9.8 ‘\linebreak’ & ‘\nolinebreak’
=================================
Synopses, one of:
@@ -7046,7 +7050,7 @@
an integer lying between 0 and 4 that allows you to soften the
instruction. The default is 4, so that without the optional argument
these commands entirely force or prevent the break. But for instance,
-'\nolinebreak[1]' is a suggestion that another place may be better. The
+‘\nolinebreak[1]’ is a suggestion that another place may be better. The
higher the number, the more insistent the request. Both commands are
fragile (*note \protect::).
@@ -7057,7 +7061,7 @@
We especially encourage applications from members of traditionally
underrepresented groups.
- When you issue '\linebreak', the spaces in the line are stretched out
+ When you issue ‘\linebreak’, the spaces in the line are stretched out
so that the break point reaches the right margin. *Note \\:: and *note
\newline::, to have the spaces not stretched out.
@@ -7072,24 +7076,24 @@
final version of a document, then you may need to understand how to
influence its actions.
- LaTeX's algorithm for splitting a document into pages is more complex
+ LaTeX’s algorithm for splitting a document into pages is more complex
than just waiting until there is enough material to fill a page and
outputting the result. Instead, LaTeX typesets more material than would
fit on the page and then chooses a break that is optimal in some way (it
-has the smallest badness). An example of the advantage of this approach
-is that if the page has some vertical space that can be stretched or
-shrunk, such as with rubber lengths between paragraphs, then LaTeX can
-use that to avoid widow lines (where a new page starts with the last
-line of a paragraph; LaTeX can squeeze the extra line onto the first
-page) and orphans (where the first line of paragraph is at the end of a
-page; LaTeX can stretch the material of the first page so the extra line
-falls on the second page). Another example is where LaTeX uses
-available vertical shrinkage to fit on a page not just the header for a
-new section but also the first two lines of that section.
+has the smallest “badness”). An example of the advantage of this
+approach is that if the page has some vertical space that can be
+stretched or shrunk, such as with rubber lengths between paragraphs,
+then LaTeX can use that to avoid widow lines (where a new page starts
+with the last line of a paragraph; LaTeX can squeeze the extra line onto
+the first page) and orphans (where the first line of paragraph is at the
+end of a page; LaTeX can stretch the material of the first page so the
+extra line falls on the second page). Another example is where LaTeX
+uses available vertical shrinkage to fit on a page not just the header
+for a new section but also the first two lines of that section.
- But LaTeX does not optimize over the entire document's set of page
+ But LaTeX does not optimize over the entire document’s set of page
breaks. So it can happen that the first page break is great but the
-second one is lousy; to break the current page LaTeX doesn't look as far
+second one is lousy; to break the current page LaTeX doesn’t look as far
ahead as the next page break. So occasionally you may want to influence
page breaks while preparing a final version of a document.
@@ -7105,7 +7109,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \clearpage & \cleardoublepage, Next: \newpage, Up: Page breaking
-10.1 '\clearpage' & '\cleardoublepage'
+10.1 ‘\clearpage’ & ‘\cleardoublepage’
======================================
Synopsis:
@@ -7119,16 +7123,16 @@
End the current page and output all of the pending floating figures
and tables (*note Floats::). If there are too many floats to fit on the
page then LaTeX will put in extra pages containing only floats. In
-two-sided printing, '\cleardoublepage' also makes the next page of
+two-sided printing, ‘\cleardoublepage’ also makes the next page of
content a right-hand page, an odd-numbered page, if necessary inserting
-a blank page. The '\clearpage' command is robust while
-'\cleardoublepage' is fragile (*note \protect::).
+a blank page. The ‘\clearpage’ command is robust while
+‘\cleardoublepage’ is fragile (*note \protect::).
- LaTeX's page breaks are optimized so ordinarily you only use this
+ LaTeX’s page breaks are optimized so ordinarily you only use this
command in a document body to polish the final version, or inside
commands.
- The '\cleardoublepage' command will put in a blank page, but it will
+ The ‘\cleardoublepage’ command will put in a blank page, but it will
have the running headers and footers. To get a really blank page, use
this command.
@@ -7138,18 +7142,19 @@
{\pagestyle{empty}\origdoublepage}%
}
-If you want LaTeX's standard '\chapter' command to do this then add the
-line '\let\cleardoublepage\clearemptydoublepage'.
+If you want LaTeX’s standard ‘\chapter’ command to do this then add the
+line ‘\let\cleardoublepage\clearemptydoublepage’. (Of course this
+affects all uses of ‘\cleardoublepage’, not just the one in ‘\chapter’.)
- The command '\newpage' (*note \newpage::) also ends the current page,
+ The command ‘\newpage’ (*note \newpage::) also ends the current page,
but without clearing pending floats. And, if LaTeX is in two-column
-mode then '\newpage' ends the current column while '\clearpage' and
-'\cleardoublepage' end the current page.
+mode then ‘\newpage’ ends the current column while ‘\clearpage’ and
+‘\cleardoublepage’ end the current page.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \newpage, Next: \enlargethispage, Prev: \clearpage & \cleardoublepage, Up: Page breaking
-10.2 '\newpage'
+10.2 ‘\newpage’
===============
Synopsis:
@@ -7158,18 +7163,18 @@
End the current page. This command is robust (*note \protect::).
- LaTeX's page breaks are optimized so ordinarily you only use this
+ LaTeX’s page breaks are optimized so ordinarily you only use this
command in a document body to polish the final version, or inside
commands.
- While the commands '\clearpage' and '\cleardoublepage' also end the
+ While the commands ‘\clearpage’ and ‘\cleardoublepage’ also end the
current page, in addition they clear pending floats (*note \clearpage &
\cleardoublepage::). And, if LaTeX is in two-column mode then
-'\clearpage' and '\cleardoublepage' end the current page, possibly
-leaving an empty column, while '\newpage' only ends the current column.
+‘\clearpage’ and ‘\cleardoublepage’ end the current page, possibly
+leaving an empty column, while ‘\newpage’ only ends the current column.
- In contrast with '\pagebreak' (*note \pagebreak & \nopagebreak::),
-the '\newpage' command will cause the new page to start right where
+ In contrast with ‘\pagebreak’ (*note \pagebreak & \nopagebreak::),
+the ‘\newpage’ command will cause the new page to start right where
requested. This
Four score and seven years ago our fathers brought forth on this
@@ -7178,22 +7183,22 @@
\noindent a new nation, conceived in Liberty, and dedicated to the
proposition that all men are created equal.
-makes a new page start after 'continent', and the cut-off line is not
-right justified. In addition, '\newpage' does not vertically stretch
-out the page, as '\pagebreak' does.
+makes a new page start after ‘continent’, and the cut-off line is not
+right justified. In addition, ‘\newpage’ does not vertically stretch
+out the page, as ‘\pagebreak’ does.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \enlargethispage, Next: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak, Prev: \newpage, Up: Page breaking
-10.3 '\enlargethispage'
+10.3 ‘\enlargethispage’
=======================
Synopsis, one of:
- \enlargethispage{size}
- \enlargethispage*{size}
+ \enlargethispage{SIZE}
+ \enlargethispage*{SIZE}
- Enlarge the '\textheight' for the current page. The required
+ Enlarge the ‘\textheight’ for the current page. The required
argument SIZE must be a rigid length (*note Lengths::). It may be
positive or negative. This command is fragile (*note \protect::).
@@ -7205,15 +7210,15 @@
\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}
- The starred form '\enlargesthispage*' tries to squeeze the material
+ The starred form ‘\enlargesthispage*’ tries to squeeze the material
together on the page as much as possible, for the common use case of
getting one more line on the page. This is often used together with an
-explicit '\pagebreak'.
+explicit ‘\pagebreak’.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak, Prev: \enlargethispage, Up: Page breaking
-10.4 '\pagebreak' & '\nopagebreak'
+10.4 ‘\pagebreak’ & ‘\nopagebreak’
==================================
Synopses:
@@ -7229,12 +7234,12 @@
Encourage or discourage a page break. The optional ZERO-TO-FOUR is
an integer that allows you to soften the request. The default is 4, so
that without the optional argument these commands entirely force or
-prevent the break. But for instance '\nopagebreak[1]' suggests to LaTeX
+prevent the break. But for instance ‘\nopagebreak[1]’ suggests to LaTeX
that another spot might be preferable. The higher the number, the more
insistent the request. Both commands are fragile (*note \protect::).
- LaTeX's page endings are optimized so ordinarily you only use this
-command in a document body to polish the final version, or inside
+ LaTeX’s page endings are optimized so ordinarily you only use these
+commands in a document body to polish the final version, or inside
commands.
If you use these inside a paragraph, they apply to the point
@@ -7246,17 +7251,17 @@
a new nation, conceived in Liberty, and dedicated to the proposition
that all men are created equal.
-does not give a page break at 'continent', but instead at 'nation',
+does not give a page break at ‘continent’, but instead at ‘nation’,
since that is where LaTeX breaks that line. In addition, with
-'\pagebreak' the vertical space on the page is stretched out where
+‘\pagebreak’ the vertical space on the page is stretched out where
possible so that it extends to the normal bottom margin. This can look
-strange, and if '\flushbottom' is in effect this can cause you to get
-'Underfull \vbox (badness 10000) has occurred while \output is active'.
+strange, and if ‘\flushbottom’ is in effect this can cause you to get
+‘Underfull \vbox (badness 10000) has occurred while \output is active’.
*Note \newpage::, for a command that does not have these effects.
- (There is an obsolete declaration '\samepage', which tries to only
+ (There is an obsolete declaration ‘\samepage’, which tries to only
allow a break between two paragraphs. There is a related environment
-'samepage', also obsolete. Neither of these work reliably. For more on
+‘samepage’, also obsolete. Neither of these work reliably. For more on
keeping material on the same page, see the FAQ entry
<https://texfaq.org/FAQ-nopagebrk>.)
@@ -7276,8 +7281,8 @@
You can put multiple footnotes on a page. If the footnote text
becomes too long then it will flow to the next page.
- You can also produce footnotes by combining the '\footnotemark' and
-the '\footnotetext' commands, which is useful in special circumstances.
+ You can also produce footnotes by combining the ‘\footnotemark’ and
+the ‘\footnotetext’ commands, which is useful in special circumstances.
To make bibliographic references come out as footnotes you need to
include a bibliographic style with that behavior (*note Using BibTeX::).
@@ -7294,7 +7299,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \footnote, Next: \footnotemark, Up: Footnotes
-11.1 '\footnote'
+11.1 ‘\footnote’
================
Synopsis, one of:
@@ -7312,24 +7317,24 @@
at the Margin or the Bottom of the Page.''}
The optional argument NUMBER allows you to specify the number of the
-footnote. If you use this then LaTeX does not increment the 'footnote'
+footnote. If you use this then LaTeX does not increment the ‘footnote’
counter.
By default, LaTeX uses arabic numbers as footnote markers. Change
this with something like
-'\renewcommand{\thefootnote}{\fnsymbol{footnote}}', which uses a
+‘\renewcommand{\thefootnote}{\fnsymbol{footnote}}’, which uses a
sequence of symbols (*note \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman
\fnsymbol::). To make this change global put that in the preamble. If
you make the change local then you may want to reset the counter with
-'\setcounter{footnote}{0}'.
+‘\setcounter{footnote}{0}’.
LaTeX determines the spacing of footnotes with two parameters.
-'\footnoterule'
+‘\footnoterule’
Produces the rule separating the main text on a page from the
- page's footnotes. Default dimensions in the standard document
- classes (except 'slides', where it does not appear) is: vertical
- thickness of '0.4pt', and horizontal size of '0.4\columnwidth'
+ page’s footnotes. Default dimensions in the standard document
+ classes (except ‘slides’, where it does not appear) is: vertical
+ thickness of ‘0.4pt’, and horizontal size of ‘0.4\columnwidth’
long. Change the rule with something like this.
\renewcommand{\footnoterule}{% Kerns avoid vertical space
@@ -7337,24 +7342,24 @@
\hrule width \textwidth height 1pt % of the sum of this 1
\kern 2pt} % and this 2
-'\footnotesep'
+‘\footnotesep’
The height of the strut placed at the beginning of the footnote
(*note \strut::). By default, this is set to the normal strut for
- '\footnotesize' fonts (*note Font sizes::), therefore there is no
- extra space between footnotes. This is '6.65pt' for '10pt',
- '7.7pt' for '11pt', and '8.4pt' for '12pt'. Change it as with
- '\setlength{\footnotesep}{11pt}'.
+ ‘\footnotesize’ fonts (*note Font sizes::), therefore there is no
+ extra space between footnotes. This is ‘6.65pt’ for ‘10pt’,
+ ‘7.7pt’ for ‘11pt’, and ‘8.4pt’ for ‘12pt’. Change it as with
+ ‘\setlength{\footnotesep}{11pt}’.
- The '\footnote' command is fragile (*note \protect::).
+ The ‘\footnote’ command is fragile (*note \protect::).
- LaTeX's default puts many restrictions on where you can use a
-'\footnote'; for instance, you cannot use it in an argument to a
-sectioning command such as '\chapter' (it can only be used in outer
+ LaTeX’s default puts many restrictions on where you can use a
+‘\footnote’; for instance, you cannot use it in an argument to a
+sectioning command such as ‘\chapter’ (it can only be used in outer
paragraph mode; *note Modes::). There are some workarounds; see
following sections.
- In a 'minipage' environment the '\footnote' command uses the
-'mpfootnote' counter instead of the 'footnote' counter, so they are
+ In a ‘minipage’ environment the ‘\footnote’ command uses the
+‘mpfootnote’ counter instead of the ‘footnote’ counter, so they are
numbered independently. They are shown at the bottom of the
environment, not at the bottom of the page. And by default they are
shown alphabetically. *Note minipage:: and *note Footnotes in a
@@ -7363,7 +7368,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \footnotemark, Next: \footnotetext, Prev: \footnote, Up: Footnotes
-11.2 '\footnotemark'
+11.2 ‘\footnotemark’
====================
Synopsis, one of:
@@ -7376,8 +7381,8 @@
NUMBER causes the command to use that number to determine the footnote
mark. This command can be used in inner paragraph mode (*note Modes::).
- If you use '\footnotemark' without the optional argument then it
-increments the 'footnote' counter, but if you use the optional NUMBER
+ If you use ‘\footnotemark’ without the optional argument then it
+increments the ‘footnote’ counter, but if you use the optional NUMBER
then it does not. The next example produces several consecutive
footnote markers referring to the same footnote.
@@ -7387,8 +7392,8 @@
If there are intervening footnotes then you must remember the value
of the number of the common mark. This example gives the same
-institutional affiliation to both the first and third authors ('\thanks'
-is a version of '\footnote'), by-hand giving the number of the footnote.
+institutional affiliation to both the first and third authors (‘\thanks’
+is a version of ‘\footnote’), by-hand giving the number of the footnote.
\title{A Treatise on the Binomial Theorem}
\author{J Moriarty\thanks{University of Leeds}
@@ -7408,7 +7413,7 @@
Illogical persons are despised.\footnotemark[\value{footnoteValueSaver}]
Therefore, anyone who can manage a crocodile is not a baby.
- This example accomplishes the same by using the package 'cleveref'.
+ This example accomplishes the same by using the package ‘cleveref’.
\usepackage{cleveref}[2012/02/15] % in preamble
\crefformat{footnote}{#2\footnotemark[#1]#3}
@@ -7417,12 +7422,12 @@
The corollary is from Chance.\footnote{Evers, Chance, 1990.}
But the key lemma is from Tinker.\cref{fn:TE}
- It will work with the package 'hyperref'.
+ It will work with the package ‘hyperref’.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \footnotetext, Next: Footnotes in section headings, Prev: \footnotemark, Up: Footnotes
-11.3 '\footnotetext'
+11.3 ‘\footnotetext’
====================
Synopsis, one of:
@@ -7431,7 +7436,7 @@
\footnotetext[NUMBER]{TEXT}
Place TEXT at the bottom of the page as a footnote. It pairs with
-'\footnotemark' (*note \footnotemark::) and can come anywhere after that
+‘\footnotemark’ (*note \footnotemark::) and can come anywhere after that
command, but must appear in outer paragraph mode (*note Modes::). The
optional argument NUMBER changes the number of the footnote mark.
@@ -7452,12 +7457,12 @@
section starts, as usual, but also at the bottom of the table of
contents, where it is not likely to be desired. The simplest way to
have it not appear on the table of contents is to use the optional
-argument to '\section'
+argument to ‘\section’
\section[Please]{Please\footnote{%
Don't footnote in chapter and section headers!}}
-No '\protect' is needed in front of '\footnote' here because what gets
+No ‘\protect’ is needed in front of ‘\footnote’ here because what gets
moved to the table of contents is the optional argument.
@@ -7466,9 +7471,9 @@
11.5 Footnotes in a table
=========================
-Inside a 'tabular' or 'array' environment the '\footnote' command does
+Inside a ‘tabular’ or ‘array’ environment the ‘\footnote’ command does
not work; there is a footnote mark in the table cell but the footnote
-text does not appear. The solution is to use a 'minipage' environment
+text does not appear. The solution is to use a ‘minipage’ environment
as here (*note minipage::).
\begin{center}
@@ -7484,15 +7489,15 @@
\end{minipage}
\end{center}
- Inside a 'minipage', footnote marks are lowercase letters. Change
+ Inside a ‘minipage’, footnote marks are lowercase letters. Change
that with something like
-'\renewcommand{\thempfootnote}{\arabic{mpfootnote}}' (*note \alph \Alph
+‘\renewcommand{\thempfootnote}{\arabic{mpfootnote}}’ (*note \alph \Alph
\arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol::).
The footnotes in the prior example appear at the bottom of the
-'minipage'. To have them appear at the bottom of the main page, as part
-of the regular footnote sequence, use the '\footnotemark' and
-'\footnotetext' pair and make a new counter.
+‘minipage’. To have them appear at the bottom of the main page, as part
+of the regular footnote sequence, use the ‘\footnotemark’ and
+‘\footnotetext’ pair and make a new counter.
\newcounter{mpFootnoteValueSaver}
\begin{center}
@@ -7513,8 +7518,8 @@
Relationship is unresolved in XXI.}
\end{center}
- For a floating 'table' environment (*note table::), use the
-'tablefootnote' package.
+ For a floating ‘table’ environment (*note table::), use the
+‘tablefootnote’ package.
\usepackage{tablefootnote} % in preamble
...
@@ -7541,7 +7546,7 @@
Particularly in the humanities, authors can have multiple classes of
footnotes, including having footnotes of footnotes. The package
-'bigfoot' extends LaTeX's default footnote mechanism in many ways,
+‘bigfoot’ extends LaTeX’s default footnote mechanism in many ways,
including allow these two, as in this example.
\usepackage{bigfoot} % in preamble
@@ -7579,10 +7584,10 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \newcommand & \renewcommand, Next: \providecommand, Up: Definitions
-12.1 '\newcommand' & '\renewcommand'
+12.1 ‘\newcommand’ & ‘\renewcommand’
====================================
-Synopses, one of:
+Synopses, one of (three regular forms, three starred forms):
\newcommand{\CMD}{DEFN}
\newcommand{\CMD}[NARGS]{DEFN}
@@ -7591,31 +7596,31 @@
\newcommand*{\CMD}[NARGS]{DEFN}
\newcommand*{\CMD}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{DEFN}
-or one of these.
+or all the same possibilities with ‘\renewcommand’ instead of
+‘\newcommand’:
+ \renewcommand{\CMD}{DEFN}
\renewcommand{\CMD}[NARGS]{DEFN}
- \renewcommand{\CMD}[NARGS]{DEFN}
\renewcommand{\CMD}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{DEFN}
\renewcommand*{\CMD}{DEFN}
\renewcommand*{\CMD}[NARGS]{DEFN}
\renewcommand*{\CMD}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{DEFN}
- Define or redefine a command (see also the discussion of
-'\DeclareRobustCommand' in *note Class and package commands::).
+ Define or redefine a command (see also ‘\DeclareRobustCommand’ in
+*note Class and package commands::).
The starred form of these two forbids the arguments from containing
-multiple paragraphs of text (in plain TeX terms, the commands are not
-'\long'). With the default form, arguments can be multiple paragraphs.
+multiple paragraphs of text (in plain TeX terms: the commands are not
+‘\long’). With the default form, arguments can be multiple paragraphs.
- These are the parameters:
+ These are the parameters (examples follow):
CMD
+ Required; ‘\CMD’ is the command name. It must begin with a
+ backslash, ‘\’, and must not begin with the four character string
+ ‘\end’. For ‘\newcommand’, it must not be already defined. For
+ ‘\renewcommand’, this name must already be defined.
- Required; '\CMD' is the command name. It must begin with a
- backslash, '\', and must not begin with the four character string
- '\end'. For '\newcommand', it must not be already defined. For
- '\renewcommand', this name must already be defined.
-
NARGS
Optional; an integer from 0 to 9, specifying the number of
arguments that the command takes, including any optional argument.
@@ -7626,64 +7631,79 @@
OPTARGDEFAULT
Optional; if this argument is present then the first argument of
- '\CMD' is optional, with default value OPTARGDEFAULT (which may be
- the empty string). If OPTARGSDEFAULT is not present then '\CMD'
+ ‘\CMD’ is optional, with default value OPTARGDEFAULT (which may be
+ the empty string). If OPTARGDEFAULT is not present then ‘\CMD’
does not take an optional argument.
- That is, if '\CMD' is used with square brackets, as in
- '\CMD[OPTVAL]{...}...', then within DEFN the parameter '#1' is set
- to the value of OPTVAL. On the other hand, if '\CMD' is called
- without the square brackets then within DEFN the parameter '#1' is
- set to the value of OPTARGDEFAULT. In either case, the required
- arguments start with '#2'.
+ That is, if ‘\CMD’ is called with a following argument in square
+ brackets, as in ‘\CMD[OPTVAL]{...}...’, then within DEFN the
+ parameter ‘#1’ is set to OPTVAL. On the other hand, if ‘\CMD’ is
+ called without following square brackets then within DEFN the
+ parameter ‘#1’ is set to OPTARGDEFAULT. In either case, the
+ required arguments start with ‘#2’.
- Omitting '[OPTARGDEFAULT]' is different from having the square
- brackets with no contents, as in '[]'. The former sets '#1' to the
- value of OPTARGDEFAULT; the latter sets '#1' to the empty string.
+ Omitting ‘[OPTARGDEFAULT]’ from the definition is entirely
+ different from giving the square brackets with empty contents, as
+ in ‘[]’. The former says the command being defined takes no
+ optional argument, so ‘#1’ is the first required argument (if NARGS
+ ≥ 1); the latter sets the optional argument ‘#1’ to the empty
+ string as the default, if no optional argument was given in the
+ call.
+ Similarly, omitting ‘[OPTVAL]’ from a call is also entirely
+ different from giving the square brackets with empty contents. The
+ former sets ‘#1’ to the value of OPTVAL (assuming the command was
+ defined to take an optional argument); the latter sets ‘#1’ to the
+ empty string, just as with any other value.
+
+ If a command is not defined to take an optional argument, but is
+ called with an optional argument, the results are unpredictable:
+ there may be a LaTeX error, there may be incorrect typeset output,
+ or both.
+
DEFN
Required; the text to be substituted for every occurrence of
- '\CMD'. The parameters '#1', '#2', ... '#NARGS' are replaced by
- the values that you supply when you call the command (or by the
- default value if there is an optional argument and you don't
- exercise the option).
+ ‘\CMD’. The parameters ‘#1’, ‘#2’, ..., ‘#NARGS’ are replaced by
+ the values supplied when the command is called (or by OPTARGDEFAULT
+ in the case of an optional argument not specified in the call, as
+ just explained).
TeX ignores blanks in the source following a control word (*note
-Control sequences::), as in '\cmd '. If you actually want a space
-there, one solution is to type '{}' after the command ('\cmd{} ', and
-another solution is to use an explicit control space ('\cmd\ ').
+Control sequences::), as in ‘\cmd ’. If you want a space there, one
+solution is to type ‘{}’ after the command (‘\cmd{} ’), and another
+solution is to use an explicit control space (‘\cmd\ ’).
- A simple example of defining a new command: '\newcommand{\RS}{Robin
-Smith}' results in '\RS' being replaced by the longer text. Redefining
-an existing command is similar: '\renewcommand{\qedsymbol}{{\small
-QED}}'.
+ A simple example of defining a new command: ‘\newcommand{\RS}{Robin
+Smith}’ results in ‘\RS’ being replaced by the longer text. Redefining
+an existing command is similar: ‘\renewcommand{\qedsymbol}{{\small
+QED}}’.
- If you try to define a command and the name has already been used
-then you get something like 'LaTeX Error: Command \fred already defined.
-Or name \end... illegal, see p.192 of the manual'. If you try to
-redefine a command and the name has not yet been used then you get
-something like 'LaTeX Error: \hank undefined'.
+ If you use ‘\newcommand’ and the command name has already been used
+then you get something like ‘LaTeX Error: Command \fred already defined.
+Or name \end... illegal, see p.192 of the manual’. Similarly, If you
+use ‘\renewcommand’ and the command name has not been defined then you
+get something like ‘LaTeX Error: \hank undefined’.
Here the first definition creates a command with no arguments, and
-the second, one with one required argument.
+the second, a command with one required argument:
\newcommand{\student}{Ms~O'Leary}
\newcommand{\defref}[1]{Definition~\ref{#1}}
-Use the first as in 'I highly recommend \student{} to you'. The second
-has a variable argument, so that '\defref{def:basis}' expands to
-'Definition~\ref{def:basis}', which ultimately expands to something like
-'Definition~3.14'.
+Use the first as in ‘I highly recommend \student{} to you’. The second
+has a variable argument, so that ‘\defref{def:basis}’ expands to
+‘Definition~\ref{def:basis}’, which ultimately expands to something like
+‘Definition~3.14’.
Similarly, but with two required arguments:
-'\newcommand{\nbym}[2]{$#1 \times #2$}' is invoked as '\nbym{2}{k}'.
+‘\newcommand{\nbym}[2]{$#1 \times #2$}’ is invoked as ‘\nbym{2}{k}’.
This example has an optional argument.
\newcommand{\salutation}[1][Sir or Madam]{Dear #1:}
-Then '\salutation' gives 'Dear Sir or Madam:' while '\salutation[John]'
-gives 'Dear John:'. And '\salutation[]' gives 'Dear :'.
+Then ‘\salutation’ gives ‘Dear Sir or Madam:’ while ‘\salutation[John]’
+gives ‘Dear John:’. And ‘\salutation[]’ gives ‘Dear :’.
This example has an optional argument and two required arguments.
@@ -7690,21 +7710,21 @@
\newcommand{\lawyers}[3][company]{#2, #3, and~#1}
I employ \lawyers[Howe]{Dewey}{Cheatem}.
-The output is 'I employ Dewey, Cheatem, and Howe'. The optional
-argument, the 'Howe', is associated with '#1', while 'Dewey' and
-'Cheatem' are associated with '#2' and '#3'. Because of the optional
-argument, '\lawyers{Dewey}{Cheatem}' will give the output 'I employ
-Dewey, Cheatem, and company'.
+The output is ‘I employ Dewey, Cheatem, and Howe.’. The optional
+argument, ‘Howe’, is associated with ‘#1’, while ‘Dewey’ and ‘Cheatem’
+are associated with ‘#2’ and ‘#3’. Because of the optional argument,
+‘\lawyers{Dewey}{Cheatem}’ will give the output ‘I employ Dewey,
+Cheatem, and company.’.
The braces around DEFN do not define a group, that is, they do not
delimit the scope of the result of expanding DEFN. For example, with
-'\newcommand{\shipname}[1]{\it #1}', in this sentence,
+‘\newcommand{\shipname}[1]{\it #1}’, in this sentence,
The \shipname{Monitor} met the \shipname{Merrimac}.
-the words 'met the' would incorrectly be in italics. The solution is to
-put another pair of braces inside the definition:
-'\newcommand{\shipname}[1]{{\it #1}}'.
+the words ‘met the’, and the period, would incorrectly be in italics.
+The solution is to put another pair of braces inside the definition:
+‘\newcommand{\shipname}[1]{{\it #1}}’.
* Menu:
@@ -7716,32 +7736,35 @@
12.1.1 Control sequence, control word and control symbol
--------------------------------------------------------
-When reading input TeX converts the sequences of read characters into a
-sequence of "tokens". When TeX sees a backslash '\', it will handle the
-following characters in a special way in order to make a "control
-sequence" token.
+When reading input TeX converts the stream of read characters into a
+sequence of “tokens”. When TeX sees a backslash ‘\’, it will handle the
+following characters in a special way in order to make a “control
+sequence” token.
The control sequences fall into two categories:
- * "control word", when the control sequence is gathered from a '\'
- followed by at least one ASCII letter, followed by at least one
- blank. The sequence of at least one ASCII letter is called the
- "control sequence name".
- * "control symbol", when the control sequence is gathered from a '\'
+ • “control word”, when the control sequence is gathered from a ‘\’
+ followed by at least one ASCII letter (‘A-Z’ and ‘a-z’), followed
+ by at least one non-letter.
+
+ • “control symbol”, when the control sequence is gathered from a ‘\’
followed by one non-letter character.
+ The sequence of characters so found after the ‘\’ is also called the
+“control sequence name”.
+
Blanks after a control word are ignored and do not produce any
whitespace in the output (*note \newcommand & \renewcommand:: and *note
\(SPACE)::).
- Just as the '\relax' command does nothing, the following will print
-'Hello!'--if you use the Emacs info viewer, turn on the whitespace-mode
-minor mode to see the trailing spaces:
+ Just as the ‘\relax’ command does nothing, the following input will
+simply print ‘Hello!’ (if you use the Emacs info viewer, turn on the
+‘whitespace-mode’ minor mode to see the trailing spaces):
Hel\relax
lo!
-This is because blanks after '\relax', including the newline are
+This is because blanks after ‘\relax’, including the newline, are
ignored, and blanks at the beginning of a line are also ignored (*note
Leading blanks::).
@@ -7748,7 +7771,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \providecommand, Next: \makeatletter & \makeatother, Prev: \newcommand & \renewcommand, Up: Definitions
-12.2 '\providecommand'
+12.2 ‘\providecommand’
======================
Synopses, one of:
@@ -7762,7 +7785,7 @@
Defines a command, as long as no command of this name already exists.
If no command of this name already exists then this has the same effect
-as '\newcommand'. If a command of this name already exists then this
+as ‘\newcommand’. If a command of this name already exists then this
definition does nothing. This is particularly useful in a file that may
be loaded more than once, such as a style file. *Note \newcommand &
\renewcommand::, for the description of the arguments.
@@ -7773,13 +7796,14 @@
\providecommand{\myaffiliation}{Lyc\'ee Henri IV}
From \myaffiliation.
-outputs 'From Saint Michael's College'. Unlike '\newcommand', the
-repeated use of '\providecommand' does not give an error.
+outputs ‘From Saint Michael's College.’. Unlike ‘\newcommand’, the
+repeated use of ‘\providecommand’ to (try to) define ‘\myaffiliation’
+does not give an error.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \makeatletter & \makeatother, Next: \@ifstar, Prev: \providecommand, Up: Definitions
-12.3 '\makeatletter' & '\makeatother'
+12.3 ‘\makeatletter’ & ‘\makeatother’
=====================================
Synopsis:
@@ -7789,37 +7813,37 @@
\makeatother
Use this pair when you redefine LaTeX commands that are named with an
-at-sign character ''@''. The '\makeatletter' declaration makes the
+at-sign character ‘‘@’’. The ‘\makeatletter’ declaration makes the
at-sign character have the category code of a letter, code 11. The
-'\makeatother' declaration sets the category code of the at-sign to
+‘\makeatother’ declaration sets the category code of the at-sign to
code 12, its default value.
As TeX reads characters, it assigns each one a category code, or
-"catcode". For instance, it assigns the backslash character ''\'' the
+“catcode”. For instance, it assigns the backslash character ‘‘\’’ the
catcode 0. Command names consist of a category 0 character, ordinarily
backslash, followed by letters, category 11 characters (except that a
command name can also consist of a category 0 character followed by a
single non-letter symbol).
- LaTeX's source code has the convention that some commands use '@' in
+ LaTeX’s source code has the convention that some commands use ‘@’ in
their name. These commands are mainly intended for package or class
writers. The convention prevents authors who are just using a package
or class from accidentally replacing such a command with one of their
own, because by default the at-sign has catcode 12.
- Use the pair '\makeatletter' and '\makeatother' inside a '.tex' file,
+ Use the pair ‘\makeatletter’ and ‘\makeatother’ inside a ‘.tex’ file,
typically in the preamble, when you are defining or redefining commands
-named with '@', by having them surround your definition. Don't use
-these inside '.sty' or '.cls' files since the '\usepackage' and
-'\documentclass' commands already arrange that the at-sign has the
+named with ‘@’, by having them surround your definition. Don’t use
+these inside ‘.sty’ or ‘.cls’ files since the ‘\usepackage’ and
+‘\documentclass’ commands already arrange that the at-sign has the
character code of a letter, catcode 11.
For a comprehensive list of macros with an at-sign in their names see
<https://ctan.org/pkg/macros2e>.
- In this example the class file has a command '\thesis at universityname'
+ In this example the class file has a command ‘\thesis at universityname’
that the user wants to change. These three lines should go in the
-preamble, before the '\begin{document}'.
+preamble, before the ‘\begin{document}’.
\makeatletter
\renewcommand{\thesis at universityname}{Saint Michael's College}
@@ -7828,7 +7852,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \@ifstar, Next: \newcounter, Prev: \makeatletter & \makeatother, Up: Definitions
-12.4 '\@ifstar'
+12.4 ‘\@ifstar’
===============
Synopsis:
@@ -7838,30 +7862,30 @@
\newcommand{\mycmd at star}[STAR-NUM-ARGS]{STAR-BODY}
Many standard LaTeX environments or commands have a variant with the
-same name but ending with a star character '*', an asterisk. Examples
-are the 'table' and 'table*' environments and the '\section' and
-'\section*' commands.
+same name but ending with a star character ‘*’, an asterisk. Examples
+are the ‘table’ and ‘table*’ environments and the ‘\section’ and
+‘\section*’ commands.
When defining environments, following this pattern is straightforward
-because '\newenvironment' and '\renewenvironment' allow the environment
+because ‘\newenvironment’ and ‘\renewenvironment’ allow the environment
name to contain a star. So you just have to write
-'\newenvironment{MYENV}' or '\newenvironment{MYENV*}' and continue the
+‘\newenvironment{MYENV}’ or ‘\newenvironment{MYENV*}’ and continue the
definition as usual. For commands the situation is more complex as the
star not being a letter cannot be part of the command name. As in the
synopsis above, there will be a user-called command, given above as
-'\mycmd', which peeks ahead to see if it is followed by a star. For
-instance, LaTeX does not really have a '\section*' command; instead, the
-'\section' command peeks ahead. This command does not accept arguments
+‘\mycmd’, which peeks ahead to see if it is followed by a star. For
+instance, LaTeX does not really have a ‘\section*’ command; instead, the
+‘\section’ command peeks ahead. This command does not accept arguments
but instead expands to one of two commands that do accept arguments. In
-the synopsis these two are '\mycmd at nostar' and '\mycmd at star'. They
+the synopsis these two are ‘\mycmd at nostar’ and ‘\mycmd at star’. They
could take the same number of arguments or a different number, or no
arguments at all. As always, in a LaTeX document a command using an
-at-sign '@' in its name must be enclosed inside a '\makeatletter ...
-\makeatother' block (*note \makeatletter & \makeatother::).
+at-sign ‘@’ in its name must be enclosed inside a ‘\makeatletter ...
+\makeatother’ block (*note \makeatletter & \makeatother::).
- This example of '\@ifstar' defines the command '\ciel' and a variant
-'\ciel*'. Both have one required argument. A call to '\ciel{blue}'
-will return "not starry blue sky" while '\ciel*{night}' will return
+ This example of ‘\@ifstar’ defines the command ‘\ciel’ and a variant
+‘\ciel*’. Both have one required argument. A call to ‘\ciel{blue}’
+will return "not starry blue sky" while ‘\ciel*{night}’ will return
"starry night sky".
\makeatletter
@@ -7871,10 +7895,10 @@
\makeatother
In the next example, the starred variant takes a different number of
-arguments than the unstarred one. With this definition, Agent 007's
-'``My name is \agentsecret*{Bond}, \agentsecret{James}{Bond}.''' is
-equivalent to entering the commands '``My name is \textsc{Bond},
-\textit{James} textsc{Bond}.'''
+arguments than the unstarred one. With this definition, Agent 007’s
+‘``My name is \agentsecret*{Bond}, \agentsecret{James}{Bond}.''’ is
+equivalent to entering the commands ‘``My name is \textsc{Bond},
+\textit{James} textsc{Bond}.''’
\newcommand*{\agentsecret at unstarred}[2]{\textit{#1} \textsc{#2}}
\newcommand*{\agentsecret at starred}[1]{\textsc{#1}}
@@ -7885,15 +7909,15 @@
argument. (This differs from environment names in which the star is
part of the name itself and as such could be in any position.) Thus, it
is technically possible to put any number of spaces between the command
-and the star. Thus '\agentsecret*{Bond}' and '\agentsecret *{Bond}' are
+and the star. Thus ‘\agentsecret*{Bond}’ and ‘\agentsecret *{Bond}’ are
equivalent. However, the standard practice is not to insert any such
spaces.
- There are two alternative ways to accomplish the work of '\@ifstar'.
-(1) The 'suffix' package allows the construct
-'\newcommand\mycommand{UNSTARRED-VARIANT}' followed by
-'\WithSuffix\newcommand\mycommand*{STARRED-VARIANT}'. (2) LaTeX
-provides the 'xparse' package, which allows this code:
+ There are two alternative ways to accomplish the work of ‘\@ifstar’.
+(1) The ‘suffix’ package allows the construct
+‘\newcommand\mycommand{UNSTARRED-VARIANT}’ followed by
+‘\WithSuffix\newcommand\mycommand*{STARRED-VARIANT}’. (2) LaTeX
+provides the ‘xparse’ package, which allows this code:
\NewDocumentCommand\foo{s}{\IfBooleanTF#1
{STARRED-VARIANT}%
@@ -7903,7 +7927,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \newcounter, Next: \newlength, Prev: \@ifstar, Up: Definitions
-12.5 '\newcounter': Allocating a counter
+12.5 ‘\newcounter’: Allocating a counter
========================================
Synopsis, one of:
@@ -7918,11 +7942,11 @@
with a backslash. This name must not already be in use by another
counter.
- When you use the optional argument '[SUPERCOUNTER]' then the counter
+ When you use the optional argument ‘[SUPERCOUNTER]’ then the counter
COUNTERNAME will be reset to zero whenever SUPERCOUNTER is incremented.
-For example, ordinarily 'subsection' is numbered within 'section' so
-that any time you increment SECTION, either with '\stepcounter' (*note
-\stepcounter::) or '\refstepcounter' (*note \refstepcounter::), then
+For example, ordinarily ‘subsection’ is numbered within ‘section’ so
+that any time you increment SECTION, either with ‘\stepcounter’ (*note
+\stepcounter::) or ‘\refstepcounter’ (*note \refstepcounter::), then
LaTeX will reset SUBSECTION to zero.
This example
@@ -7933,21 +7957,21 @@
\stepcounter{asuper}
Now asuper is \arabic{asuper} while asub is \arabic{asub}.
- produces 'The value of asuper is 1 and that of asub is 3' and 'Now
-asuper is 2 while asub is 0'.
+ produces ‘The value of asuper is 1 and that of asub is 3’ and ‘Now
+asuper is 2 while asub is 0’.
- If the counter already exists, for instance by entering 'asuper'
-twice, then you get something like 'LaTeX Error: Command \c at asuper
-already defined. Or name \end... illegal, see p.192 of the manual.'.
+ If the counter already exists, for instance by entering ‘asuper’
+twice, then you get something like ‘LaTeX Error: Command \c at asuper
+already defined. Or name \end... illegal, see p.192 of the manual.’.
If you use the optional argument then the super counter must already
-exist. Entering '\newcounter{jh}[lh]' when 'lh' is not a defined
-counter will get you 'LaTeX Error: No counter 'lh' defined.'
+exist. Entering ‘\newcounter{jh}[lh]’ when ‘lh’ is not a defined
+counter will get you ‘LaTeX Error: No counter 'lh' defined.’
File: latex2e.info, Node: \newlength, Next: \newsavebox, Prev: \newcounter, Up: Definitions
-12.6 '\newlength'
+12.6 ‘\newlength’
=================
Synopsis:
@@ -7955,26 +7979,26 @@
\newlength{\LEN}
Allocate a new length register (*note Lengths::). The required
-argument '\LEN' has to be a control sequence (*note Control
-sequences::), and as such must begin with a backslash, '\' under normal
-circumstances. The new register holds rubber lengths such as '72.27pt'
-or '1in plus.2in minus.1in' (a LaTeX length register is what plain TeX
-calls a 'skip' register). The initial value is zero. The control
-sequence '\LEN' must not be already defined.
+argument ‘\LEN’ has to be a control sequence (*note Control
+sequences::), and as such must begin with a backslash, ‘\’ under normal
+circumstances. The new register holds rubber lengths such as ‘72.27pt’
+or ‘1in plus.2in minus.1in’ (a LaTeX length register is what plain TeX
+calls a ‘skip’ register). The initial value is zero. The control
+sequence ‘\LEN’ must not be already defined.
An example:
\newlength{\graphichgt}
- If you forget the backslash then you get 'Missing control sequence
-inserted'. If the control sequence already exists then you get
-something like 'LaTeX Error: Command \graphichgt already defined. Or
-name \end... illegal, see p.192 of the manual'.
+ If you forget the backslash then you get ‘Missing control sequence
+inserted’. If the control sequence already exists then you get
+something like ‘LaTeX Error: Command \graphichgt already defined. Or
+name \end... illegal, see p.192 of the manual’.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \newsavebox, Next: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment, Prev: \newlength, Up: Definitions
-12.7 '\newsavebox'
+12.7 ‘\newsavebox’
==================
Synopsis:
@@ -7994,11 +8018,11 @@
\savebox{\logobox}{LoGo}
Our logo is \usebox{\logobox}.
-The output is 'Our logo is LoGo'.
+The output is ‘Our logo is LoGo’.
- If there is an already defined bin then you get something like 'LaTeX
+ If there is an already defined bin then you get something like ‘LaTeX
Error: Command \logobox already defined. Or name \end... illegal, see
-p.192 of the manual'.
+p.192 of the manual’.
The allocation of a box is global.
@@ -8005,7 +8029,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment, Next: \newtheorem, Prev: \newsavebox, Up: Definitions
-12.8 '\newenvironment' & '\renewenvironment'
+12.8 ‘\newenvironment’ & ‘\renewenvironment’
============================================
Synopses, one of:
@@ -8027,7 +8051,7 @@
\renewenvironment*{ENV}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{BEGDEF}{ENDDEF}
Define or redefine the environment ENV, that is, create the construct
-'\begin{ENV} ... BODY ... \end{ENV}'.
+‘\begin{ENV} ... BODY ... \end{ENV}’.
The starred form of these commands requires that the arguments not
contain multiple paragraphs of text. However, the body of these
@@ -8035,18 +8059,18 @@
ENV
Required; the environment name. It consists only of letters or the
- '*' character, and thus does not begin with backslash, '\'. It
- must not begin with the string 'end'. For '\newenvironment', the
+ ‘*’ character, and thus does not begin with backslash, ‘\’. It
+ must not begin with the string ‘end’. For ‘\newenvironment’, the
name ENV must not be the name of an already existing environment,
- and also the command '\ENV' must be undefined. For
- '\renewenvironment', ENV must be the name of an existing
+ and also the command ‘\ENV’ must be undefined. For
+ ‘\renewenvironment’, ENV must be the name of an existing
environment.
NARGS
Optional; an integer from 0 to 9 denoting the number of arguments
of that the environment takes. When you use the environment these
- arguments appear after the '\begin', as in '\begin{ENV}{ARG1} ...
- {ARGN}'. Omitting this is equivalent to setting it to 0; the
+ arguments appear after the ‘\begin’, as in ‘\begin{ENV}{ARG1} ...
+ {ARGN}’. Omitting this is equivalent to setting it to 0; the
environment will have no arguments. When redefining an
environment, the new version can have a different number of
arguments than the old version.
@@ -8059,41 +8083,41 @@
That is, when OPTARGDEFAULT is present in the definition of the
environment then you can start the environment with square
- brackets, as in '\begin{ENV}[OPTVAL]{...} ... \end{ENV}'. In this
- case, within BEGDEFN the parameter '#1' is set to the value of
- OPTVAL. If you call '\begin{ENV}' without square brackets, then
- within BEGDEFN the parameter '#1' is set to the value of the
+ brackets, as in ‘\begin{ENV}[OPTVAL]{...} ... \end{ENV}’. In this
+ case, within BEGDEFN the parameter ‘#1’ is set to the value of
+ OPTVAL. If you call ‘\begin{ENV}’ without square brackets, then
+ within BEGDEFN the parameter ‘#1’ is set to the value of the
default OPTARGDEFAULT. In either case, any required arguments
- start with '#2'.
+ start with ‘#2’.
- Omitting '[MYVAL]' in the call is different than having the square
- brackets with no contents, as in '[]'. The former results in '#1'
- expanding to OPTARGDEFAULT; the latter results in '#1' expanding to
+ Omitting ‘[MYVAL]’ in the call is different than having the square
+ brackets with no contents, as in ‘[]’. The former results in ‘#1’
+ expanding to OPTARGDEFAULT; the latter results in ‘#1’ expanding to
the empty string.
BEGDEF
- Required; the text expanded at every occurrence of '\begin{ENV}'.
- Within BEGDEF, the parameters '#1', '#2', ... '#NARGS', are
+ Required; the text expanded at every occurrence of ‘\begin{ENV}’.
+ Within BEGDEF, the parameters ‘#1’, ‘#2’, ... ‘#NARGS’, are
replaced by the values that you supply when you call the
environment; see the examples below.
ENDDEF
- Required; the text expanded at every occurrence of '\end{ENV}'.
- This may not contain any parameters, that is, you cannot use '#1',
- '#2', etc., here (but see the final example below).
+ Required; the text expanded at every occurrence of ‘\end{ENV}’.
+ This may not contain any parameters, that is, you cannot use ‘#1’,
+ ‘#2’, etc., here (but see the final example below).
All environments, that is to say the BEGDEF code, the environment
body, and the ENDDEF code, are processed within a group. Thus, in the
-first example below, the effect of the '\small' is limited to the quote
+first example below, the effect of the ‘\small’ is limited to the quote
and does not extend to material following the environment.
If you try to define an environment and the name has already been
-used then you get something like 'LaTeX Error: Command \fred already
-defined. Or name \end... illegal, see p.192 of the manual'. If you try
+used then you get something like ‘LaTeX Error: Command \fred already
+defined. Or name \end... illegal, see p.192 of the manual’. If you try
to redefine an environment and the name has not yet been used then you
-get something like 'LaTeX Error: Environment hank undefined.'.
+get something like ‘LaTeX Error: Environment hank undefined.’.
- This example gives an environment like LaTeX's 'quotation' except
+ This example gives an environment like LaTeX’s ‘quotation’ except
that it will be set in smaller type.
\newenvironment{smallquote}{%
@@ -8120,7 +8144,7 @@
\end{quotation}
}
-The author's name is optional, and defaults to 'Shakespeare'. In the
+The author’s name is optional, and defaults to ‘Shakespeare’. In the
document, use the environment like this.
\begin{citequote}[Lincoln]
@@ -8142,7 +8166,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \newtheorem, Next: \newfont, Prev: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment, Up: Definitions
-12.9 '\newtheorem'
+12.9 ‘\newtheorem’
==================
Synopses:
@@ -8154,15 +8178,15 @@
Define a new theorem-like environment. You can specify one of
NUMBERED_WITHIN and NUMBERED_LIKE, or neither, but not both.
- The first form, '\newtheorem{NAME}{TITLE}', creates an environment
+ The first form, ‘\newtheorem{NAME}{TITLE}’, creates an environment
that will be labelled with TITLE; see the first example below.
- The second form, '\newtheorem{NAME}{TITLE}[NUMBERED_WITHIN]', creates
+ The second form, ‘\newtheorem{NAME}{TITLE}[NUMBERED_WITHIN]’, creates
an environment whose counter is subordinate to the existing counter
NUMBERED_WITHIN, so this counter will be reset when NUMBERED_WITHIN is
reset. See the second example below.
- The third form '\newtheorem{NAME}[NUMBERED_LIKE]{TITLE}', with
+ The third form ‘\newtheorem{NAME}[NUMBERED_LIKE]{TITLE}’, with
optional argument between the two required arguments, creates an
environment whose counter will share the previously defined counter
NUMBERED_LIKE. See the third example.
@@ -8169,8 +8193,8 @@
This command creates a counter named NAME. In addition, unless the
optional argument NUMBERED_LIKE is used, inside of the theorem-like
-environment the current '\ref' value will be that of
-'\theNUMBERED_WITHIN' (*note \ref::).
+environment the current ‘\ref’ value will be that of
+‘\theNUMBERED_WITHIN’ (*note \ref::).
This declaration is global. It is fragile (*note \protect::).
@@ -8178,22 +8202,22 @@
NAME
The name of the environment. It is a string of letters. It must
- not begin with a backslash, '\'. It must not be the name of an
- existing environment, and the command name '\NAME' must not already
+ not begin with a backslash, ‘\’. It must not be the name of an
+ existing environment, and the command name ‘\NAME’ must not already
be defined.
TITLE
The text to be printed at the beginning of the environment, before
- the number. For example, 'Theorem'.
+ the number. For example, ‘Theorem’.
NUMBERED_WITHIN
Optional; the name of an already defined counter, usually a
- sectional unit such as 'chapter' or 'section'. When the
- NUMBERED_WITHIN counter is reset then the NAME environment's
+ sectional unit such as ‘chapter’ or ‘section’. When the
+ NUMBERED_WITHIN counter is reset then the NAME environment’s
counter will also be reset.
- If this optional argument is not used then the command '\theNAME'
- is set to '\arabic{NAME}'.
+ If this optional argument is not used then the command ‘\theNAME’
+ is set to ‘\arabic{NAME}’.
NUMBERED_LIKE
Optional; the name of an already defined theorem-like environment.
@@ -8202,7 +8226,7 @@
Without any optional arguments the environments are numbered
sequentially. The example below has a declaration in the preamble that
-results in 'Definition 1' and 'Definition 2' in the output.
+results in ‘Definition 1’ and ‘Definition 2’ in the output.
\newtheorem{defn}{Definition}
\begin{document}
@@ -8217,8 +8241,8 @@
\end{defn}
This example has the same document body as the prior one. But here
-'\newtheorem''s optional argument NUMBERED_WITHIN is given as 'section',
-so the output is like 'Definition 1.1' and 'Definition 2.1'.
+‘\newtheorem’’s optional argument NUMBERED_WITHIN is given as ‘section’,
+so the output is like ‘Definition 1.1’ and ‘Definition 2.1’.
\newtheorem{defn}{Definition}[section]
\begin{document}
@@ -8233,9 +8257,9 @@
\end{defn}
In the next example there are two declarations in the preamble, the
-second of which calls for the new 'thm' environment to use the same
-counter as 'defn'. It gives 'Definition 1.1', followed by 'Theorem 2.1'
-and 'Definition 2.2'.
+second of which calls for the new ‘thm’ environment to use the same
+counter as ‘defn’. It gives ‘Definition 1.1’, followed by ‘Theorem 2.1’
+and ‘Definition 2.2’.
\newtheorem{defn}{Definition}[section]
\newtheorem{thm}[defn]{Theorem}
@@ -8257,7 +8281,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \newfont, Next: \protect, Prev: \newtheorem, Up: Definitions
-12.10 '\newfont'
+12.10 ‘\newfont’
================
This command is obsolete. This description is here only to help with
@@ -8269,17 +8293,17 @@
\newfont{\CMD}{FONT DESCRIPTION}
- Define a command '\CMD' that will change the current font. The
+ Define a command ‘\CMD’ that will change the current font. The
control sequence must not already be defined. It must begin with a
-backslash, '\'.
+backslash, ‘\’.
- The FONT DESCRIPTION consists of a FONTNAME and an optional "at
-clause". LaTeX will look on your system for a file named
-'FONTNAME.tfm'. The at clause can have the form either 'at DIMEN' or
-'scaled FACTOR', where a FACTOR of '1000' means no scaling. For LaTeX's
+ The FONT DESCRIPTION consists of a FONTNAME and an optional “at
+clause”. LaTeX will look on your system for a file named
+‘FONTNAME.tfm’. The at clause can have the form either ‘at DIMEN’ or
+‘scaled FACTOR’, where a FACTOR of ‘1000’ means no scaling. For LaTeX’s
purposes, all this does is scale all the character and other font
-dimensions relative to the font's design size, which is a value defined
-in the '.tfm' file.
+dimensions relative to the font’s design size, which is a value defined
+in the ‘.tfm’ file.
This defines two equivalent fonts and typesets a few characters in
each.
@@ -8292,10 +8316,10 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \protect, Next: \ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterend, Prev: \newfont, Up: Definitions
-12.11 '\protect'
+12.11 ‘\protect’
================
-All LaTeX commands are either "fragile" or "robust". A fragile command
+All LaTeX commands are either “fragile” or “robust”. A fragile command
can break when it is used in the argument to certain other commands.
Commands that contain data that LaTeX writes to an auxiliary file and
re-reads later are fragile. This includes material that goes into a
@@ -8302,31 +8326,31 @@
table of contents, list of figures, list of tables, etc. Fragile
commands also include line breaks, any command that has an optional
argument, and many more. To prevent such commands from breaking, one
-solution is to preceded them with the command '\protect'.
+solution is to preceded them with the command ‘\protect’.
- For example, when LaTeX runs the '\section{SECTION NAME}' command it
-writes the SECTION NAME text to the '.aux' auxiliary file, moving it
+ For example, when LaTeX runs the ‘\section{SECTION NAME}’ command it
+writes the SECTION NAME text to the ‘.aux’ auxiliary file, moving it
there for use elsewhere in the document such as in the table of
contents. Any argument that is internally expanded by LaTeX without
-typesetting it directly is referred to as a "moving argument". A
+typesetting it directly is referred to as a “moving argument”. A
command is fragile if it can expand during this process into invalid TeX
code. Some examples of moving arguments are those that appear in the
-'\caption{...}' command (*note figure::), in the '\thanks{...}' command
-(*note \maketitle::), and in @-expressions in the 'tabular' and 'array'
+‘\caption{...}’ command (*note figure::), in the ‘\thanks{...}’ command
+(*note \maketitle::), and in @-expressions in the ‘tabular’ and ‘array’
environments (*note tabular::).
If you get strange errors from commands used in moving arguments, try
-preceding it with '\protect'. Every fragile commands must be protected
-with their own '\protect'.
+preceding it with ‘\protect’. Every fragile commands must be protected
+with their own ‘\protect’.
- Although usually a '\protect' command doesn't hurt, length commands
-are robust and should not be preceded by a '\protect' command. Nor can
-a '\protect' command be used in the argument to '\addtocounter' or
-'\setcounter' command.
+ Although usually a ‘\protect’ command doesn’t hurt, length commands
+are robust and should not be preceded by a ‘\protect’ command. Nor can
+a ‘\protect’ command be used in the argument to ‘\addtocounter’ or
+‘\setcounter’ command.
- In this example the '\caption' command gives a mysterious error about
-an extra curly brace. Fix the problem by preceding each '\raisebox'
-command with '\protect'.
+ In this example the ‘\caption’ command gives a mysterious error about
+an extra curly brace. Fix the problem by preceding each ‘\raisebox’
+command with ‘\protect’.
\begin{figure}
...
@@ -8333,10 +8357,10 @@
\caption{Company headquarters of A\raisebox{1pt}{B}\raisebox{-1pt}{C}}
\end{figure}
- In the next example the '\tableofcontents' command gives an error
-because the '\(..\)' in the section title expands to illegal TeX in the
-'.toc' file. You can solve this by changing '\(..\)' to
-'\protect\(..\protect\)'.
+ In the next example the ‘\tableofcontents’ command gives an error
+because the ‘\(..\)’ in the section title expands to illegal TeX in the
+‘.toc’ file. You can solve this by changing ‘\(..\)’ to
+‘\protect\(..\protect\)’.
\begin{document}
\tableofcontents
@@ -8347,7 +8371,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterend, Next: xspace package, Prev: \protect, Up: Definitions
-12.12 '\ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterend'
+12.12 ‘\ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterend’
=============================================
Synopsis:
@@ -8360,14 +8384,14 @@
Both commands cause LaTeX to ignore blanks (that is, characters of
catcode 10 such as space or tabulation) after the end of the command up
-to the first box or non-blank character. The first is a command from
-plain TeX, and the second is LaTeX-specific.
+to the first box or non-blank character. The first is a primitive
+command of TeX, and the second is LaTeX-specific.
- The '\ignorespaces' is often used when defining commands via
-'\newcommand', or '\newenvironment', or '\def'. The example below
+ The ‘\ignorespaces’ is often used when defining commands via
+‘\newcommand’, or ‘\newenvironment’, or ‘\def’. The example below
illustrates. It allows a user to show the points values for quiz
questions in the margin but it is inconvenient because, as shown in the
-'enumerate' list, users must not put any space between the command and
+‘enumerate’ list, users must not put any space between the command and
the question text.
\newcommand{\points}[1]{\makebox[0pt]{\makebox[10em][l]{#1~pts}}
@@ -8384,7 +8408,7 @@
A second example shows blanks being removed from the front of text.
The commands below allow a user to uniformly attach a title to names.
But, as given, if a title accidentally starts with a space then
-'\fullname' will reproduce that.
+‘\fullname’ will reproduce that.
\newcommand{\honorific}[1]{\def\honorific{#1}} % remember title
\newcommand{\fullname}[1]{\honorific~#1} % put title before name
@@ -8395,14 +8419,14 @@
\end{tabular}
To fix this, change to
-'\newcommand{\fullname}[1]{\ignorespaces\honorific~#1}'.
+‘\newcommand{\fullname}[1]{\ignorespaces\honorific~#1}’.
- The '\ignorespaces' is also often used in a '\newenvironment' at the
-end of the BEGIN clause, as in '\begin{newenvironment}{ENV NAME}{...
-\ignorespaces}{...}'.
+ The ‘\ignorespaces’ is also often used in a ‘\newenvironment’ at the
+end of the BEGIN clause, as in ‘\begin{newenvironment}{ENV NAME}{...
+\ignorespaces}{...}’.
To strip blanks off the end of an environment use
-'\ignorespacesafterend'. An example is that this will show a much
+‘\ignorespacesafterend’. An example is that this will show a much
larger vertical space between the first and second environments than
between the second and third.
@@ -8417,10 +8441,10 @@
E=IR
\end{equation}
- Putting a comment character '%' immediately after the '\end{eq}' will
+ Putting a comment character ‘%’ immediately after the ‘\end{eq}’ will
make the vertical space disappear, but that is inconvenient. The
solution is to change to
-'\newenvironment{eq}{\begin{equation}}{\end{equation}\ignorespacesafterend}'.
+‘\newenvironment{eq}{\begin{equation}}{\end{equation}\ignorespacesafterend}’.
File: latex2e.info, Node: xspace package, Prev: \ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterend, Up: Definitions
@@ -8434,14 +8458,14 @@
...
\newcommand{...}{...\xspace}
- The '\xspace' macro, when used at the end of a command definition,
+ The ‘\xspace’ macro, when used at the end of a command definition,
adds a space unless the command is followed by certain punctuation
characters.
After a command control sequence that is a control word (*note
-Control sequences::, as opposed to control symbols such as '\$'), TeX
+Control sequences::, as opposed to control symbols such as ‘\$’), TeX
gobbles blank characters. Thus, in the first sentence below, the output
-has 'Vermont' placed snugly against the period, without any intervening
+has ‘Vermont’ placed snugly against the period, without any intervening
space.
\newcommand{\VT}{Vermont}
@@ -8449,12 +8473,12 @@
The \VT{} summers are nice.
But because of the gobbling, the second sentence needs the empty
-curly braces or else there would be no space separating 'Vermont' from
-'summers'. (Many authors instead use a backslash-space '\ ' for this.
+curly braces or else there would be no space separating ‘Vermont’ from
+‘summers’. (Many authors instead use a backslash-space ‘\ ’ for this.
*Note \(SPACE)::.)
- The 'xspace' package provides '\xspace'. It is for writing commands
-which are designed to be used mainly in text. It must be place at the
+ The ‘xspace’ package provides ‘\xspace’. It is for writing commands
+which are designed to be used mainly in text. It must be placed at the
very end of the definition of these commands. It inserts a space after
that command unless what immediately follows is in a list of exceptions.
In this example, the empty braces are not needed.
@@ -8463,18 +8487,18 @@
Our college is in \VT .
\VT summers are nice.
- The default exception list contains the characters ',.'/?;:!~-)', the
+ The default exception list contains the characters ‘,.'/?;:!~-)’, the
open curly brace and the backslash-space command discussed above, and
-the commands '\footnote' or '\footnotemark'. Add to that list as with
-'\xspaceaddexceptions{\myfni \myfnii}' which adds '\myfni' and '\myfnii'
+the commands ‘\footnote’ or ‘\footnotemark’. Add to that list as with
+‘\xspaceaddexceptions{\myfni \myfnii}’ which adds ‘\myfni’ and ‘\myfnii’
to the list, and remove from that list as with
-'\xspaceremoveexception{!}'.
+‘\xspaceremoveexception{!}’.
- A comment: many experts prefer not to use '\xspace'. Putting it in a
+ A comment: many experts prefer not to use ‘\xspace’. Putting it in a
definition means that the command will usually get the spacing right.
-But it isn't easy to predict when to enter empty braces because
-'\xspace' will get it wrong, such as when it is followed by another
-command, and so '\xspace' can make editing material harder and more
+But it isn’t easy to predict when to enter empty braces because
+‘\xspace’ will get it wrong, such as when it is followed by another
+command, and so ‘\xspace’ can make editing material harder and more
error-prone than instead always inserting the empty braces.
@@ -8485,11 +8509,11 @@
Everything LaTeX numbers for you has a counter associated with it. The
name of the counter is often the same as the name of the environment or
-command associated with the number, except that the counter's name has
-no backslash '\'. Thus, associated with the '\chapter' command is the
-'chapter' counter that keeps track of the chapter number.
+command associated with the number, except that the counter’s name has
+no backslash ‘\’. Thus, associated with the ‘\chapter’ command is the
+‘chapter’ counter that keeps track of the chapter number.
- Below is a list of the counters used in LaTeX's standard document
+ Below is a list of the counters used in LaTeX’s standard document
classes to control numbering.
part paragraph figure enumi
@@ -8498,14 +8522,14 @@
subsection equation mpfootnote enumiv
subsubsection
- The 'mpfootnote' counter is used by the '\footnote' command inside of
-a minipage (*note minipage::). The counters 'enumi' through 'enumiv'
-are used in the 'enumerate' environment, for up to four levels of
+ The ‘mpfootnote’ counter is used by the ‘\footnote’ command inside of
+a minipage (*note minipage::). The counters ‘enumi’ through ‘enumiv’
+are used in the ‘enumerate’ environment, for up to four levels of
nesting (*note enumerate::).
Counters can have any integer value but they are typically positive.
- New counters are created with '\newcounter'. *Note \newcounter::.
+ New counters are created with ‘\newcounter’. *Note \newcounter::.
* Menu:
@@ -8521,46 +8545,46 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol, Next: \usecounter, Up: Counters
-13.1 '\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol': Printing counters
+13.1 ‘\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol’: Printing counters
=====================================================================
Print the value of a counter, in a specified style. For instance, if
-the counter COUNTER has the value 1 then a '\alph{COUNTER}' in your
+the counter COUNTER has the value 1 then a ‘\alph{COUNTER}’ in your
source will result in a lowercase letter a appearing in the output.
All of these commands take a single counter as an argument, for
-instance, '\alph{enumi}'. Note that the counter name does not start
+instance, ‘\alph{enumi}’. Note that the counter name does not start
with a backslash.
-'\alph{COUNTER}'
- Print the value of COUNTER in lowercase letters: 'a', 'b', ... If
- the counter's value is less than 1 or more than 26 then you get
- 'LaTeX Error: Counter too large.'
+‘\alph{COUNTER}’
+ Print the value of COUNTER in lowercase letters: ‘a’, ‘b’, ... If
+ the counter’s value is less than 1 or more than 26 then you get
+ ‘LaTeX Error: Counter too large.’
-'\Alph{COUNTER}'
- Print in uppercase letters: 'A', 'B', ... If the counter's value
- is less than 1 or more than 26 then you get 'LaTeX Error: Counter
- too large.'
+‘\Alph{COUNTER}’
+ Print in uppercase letters: ‘A’, ‘B’, ... If the counter’s value
+ is less than 1 or more than 26 then you get ‘LaTeX Error: Counter
+ too large.’
-'\arabic{COUNTER}'
- Print in Arabic numbers such as '5' or '-2'.
+‘\arabic{COUNTER}’
+ Print in Arabic numbers such as ‘5’ or ‘-2’.
-'\roman{COUNTER}'
- Print in lowercase roman numerals: 'i', 'ii', ... If the counter's
+‘\roman{COUNTER}’
+ Print in lowercase roman numerals: ‘i’, ‘ii’, ... If the counter’s
value is less than 1 then you get no warning or error but LaTeX
does not print anything in the output.
-'\Roman{COUNTER}'
- Print in uppercase roman numerals: 'I', 'II', ... If the counter's
+‘\Roman{COUNTER}’
+ Print in uppercase roman numerals: ‘I’, ‘II’, ... If the counter’s
value is less than 1 then you get no warning or error but LaTeX
does not print anything in the output.
-'\fnsymbol{COUNTER}'
+‘\fnsymbol{COUNTER}’
Prints the value of COUNTER using a sequence of nine symbols that
are traditionally used for labeling footnotes. The value of
- COUNTER should be between 1 and 9, inclusive. If the counter's
- value is less than 0 or more than 9 then you get 'LaTeX Error:
- Counter too large', while if it is 0 then you get no error or
+ COUNTER should be between 1 and 9, inclusive. If the counter’s
+ value is less than 0 or more than 9 then you get ‘LaTeX Error:
+ Counter too large’, while if it is 0 then you get no error or
warning but LaTeX does not output anything.
Here are the symbols:
@@ -8567,20 +8591,20 @@
Number Name Command Symbol
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
- 1 asterisk '\ast' *
- 2 dagger '\dagger' †
- 3 ddagger '\ddagger' ‡
- 4 section-sign '\S' §
- 5 paragraph-sign '\P' ¶
- 6 double-vert '\parallel' ‖
- 7 double-asterisk '\ast\ast' **
- 8 double-dagger '\dagger\dagger' ††
- 9 double-ddagger '\ddagger\ddagger' ‡‡
+ 1 asterisk ‘\ast’ *
+ 2 dagger ‘\dagger’ †
+ 3 ddagger ‘\ddagger’ ‡
+ 4 section-sign ‘\S’ §
+ 5 paragraph-sign ‘\P’ ¶
+ 6 double-vert ‘\parallel’ ‖
+ 7 double-asterisk ‘\ast\ast’ **
+ 8 double-dagger ‘\dagger\dagger’ ††
+ 9 double-ddagger ‘\ddagger\ddagger’ ‡‡
File: latex2e.info, Node: \usecounter, Next: \value, Prev: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol, Up: Counters
-13.2 '\usecounter'
+13.2 ‘\usecounter’
==================
Synopsis:
@@ -8587,11 +8611,11 @@
\usecounter{COUNTER}
- Used in the second argument of the 'list' environment (*note list::),
+ Used in the second argument of the ‘list’ environment (*note list::),
this declares that list items will be numbered by COUNTER. It
-initializes COUNTER to zero, and arranges that when '\item' is called
+initializes COUNTER to zero, and arranges that when ‘\item’ is called
without its optional argument then COUNTER is incremented by
-'\refstepcounter', making its value be the current 'ref' value (*note
+‘\refstepcounter’, making its value be the current ‘ref’ value (*note
\ref::). This command is fragile (*note \protect::).
Put in the document preamble, this example makes a new list
@@ -8609,7 +8633,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \value, Next: \setcounter, Prev: \usecounter, Up: Counters
-13.3 '\value'
+13.3 ‘\value’
=============
Synopsis:
@@ -8619,7 +8643,7 @@
Expands to the value of the counter COUNTER. (Note that the name of
a counter does not begin with a backslash.)
- This example outputs 'Test counter is 6. Other counter is 5.'.
+ This example outputs ‘Test counter is 6. Other counter is 5.’.
\newcounter{test} \setcounter{test}{5}
\newcounter{other} \setcounter{other}{\value{test}}
@@ -8628,16 +8652,16 @@
Test counter is \arabic{test}.
Other counter is \arabic{other}.
- The '\value' command is not used for typesetting the value of the
+ The ‘\value’ command is not used for typesetting the value of the
counter. For that, see *note \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman
\fnsymbol::.
- It is often used in '\setcounter' or '\addtocounter' but '\value' can
+ It is often used in ‘\setcounter’ or ‘\addtocounter’ but ‘\value’ can
be used anywhere that LaTeX expects a number, such as in
-'\hspace{\value{foo}\parindent}'. It must not be preceded by '\protect'
+‘\hspace{\value{foo}\parindent}’. It must not be preceded by ‘\protect’
(*note \protect::).
- This example inserts '\hspace{4\parindent}'.
+ This example inserts ‘\hspace{4\parindent}’.
\setcounter{myctr}{3} \addtocounter{myctr}{1}
\hspace{\value{myctr}\parindent}
@@ -8645,7 +8669,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \setcounter, Next: \addtocounter, Prev: \value, Up: Counters
-13.4 '\setcounter'
+13.4 ‘\setcounter’
==================
Synopsis:
@@ -8653,12 +8677,12 @@
\setcounter{COUNTER}{VALUE}
Globally set the counter COUNTER to have the value of the VALUE
-argument, which must be an integer. Thus, you can set a counter's value
-as '\setcounter{section}{5}'. Note that the counter name does not start
+argument, which must be an integer. Thus, you can set a counter’s value
+as ‘\setcounter{section}{5}’. Note that the counter name does not start
with a backslash.
- In this example if the counter 'theorem' has value 12 then the second
-line will print 'XII'.
+ In this example if the counter ‘theorem’ has value 12 then the second
+line will print ‘XII’.
\setcounter{exercise}{\value{theorem}}
Here it is in Roman: \Roman{exercise}.
@@ -8666,7 +8690,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \addtocounter, Next: \refstepcounter, Prev: \setcounter, Up: Counters
-13.5 '\addtocounter'
+13.5 ‘\addtocounter’
====================
Synopsis:
@@ -8676,7 +8700,7 @@
Globally increment COUNTER by the amount specified by the VALUE
argument, which may be negative.
- In this example the section value appears as 'VII'.
+ In this example the section value appears as ‘VII’.
\setcounter{section}{5}
\addtocounter{section}{2}
@@ -8685,7 +8709,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \refstepcounter, Next: \stepcounter, Prev: \addtocounter, Up: Counters
-13.6 '\refstepcounter'
+13.6 ‘\refstepcounter’
======================
Synopsis:
@@ -8693,20 +8717,20 @@
\refstepcounter{COUNTER}
Globally increments the value of COUNTER by one, as does
-'\stepcounter' (*note \stepcounter::). The difference is that this
+‘\stepcounter’ (*note \stepcounter::). The difference is that this
command resets the value of any counter numbered within it. (For the
-definition of "counters numbered within", *note \newcounter::.)
+definition of “counters numbered within”, *note \newcounter::.)
- In addition, this command also defines the current '\ref' value to be
-the result of '\thecounter'.
+ In addition, this command also defines the current ‘\ref’ value to be
+the result of ‘\thecounter’.
- While the counter value is set globally, the '\ref' value is set
+ While the counter value is set globally, the ‘\ref’ value is set
locally, i.e., inside the current group.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \stepcounter, Next: \day & \month & \year, Prev: \refstepcounter, Up: Counters
-13.7 '\stepcounter'
+13.7 ‘\stepcounter’
===================
Synopsis:
@@ -8714,24 +8738,24 @@
\stepcounter{COUNTER}
Globally adds one to COUNTER and resets all counters numbered within
-it. (For the definition of "counters numbered within", *note
+it. (For the definition of “counters numbered within”, *note
\newcounter::.)
- This command differs from '\refstepcounter' in that this one does not
-influence references; that is, it does not define the current '\ref'
-value to be the result of '\thecounter' (*note \refstepcounter::).
+ This command differs from ‘\refstepcounter’ in that this one does not
+influence references; that is, it does not define the current ‘\ref’
+value to be the result of ‘\thecounter’ (*note \refstepcounter::).
File: latex2e.info, Node: \day & \month & \year, Prev: \stepcounter, Up: Counters
-13.8 '\day' & '\month' & '\year'
+13.8 ‘\day’ & ‘\month’ & ‘\year’
================================
-LaTeX defines the counter '\day' for the day of the month (nominally
-with value between 1 and 31), '\month' for the month of the year
-(nominally with value between 1 and 12), and '\year' for the year. When
+LaTeX defines the counter ‘\day’ for the day of the month (nominally
+with value between 1 and 31), ‘\month’ for the month of the year
+(nominally with value between 1 and 12), and ‘\year’ for the year. When
TeX starts up, they are set from the current values on the system. The
-related command '\today' produces a string representing the current day
+related command ‘\today’ produces a string representing the current day
(*note \today::).
They counters are not updated as the job progresses so in principle
@@ -8740,7 +8764,7 @@
\day=-2 \month=13 \year=-4 \today
-gives no error or warning and results in the output '-2, -4' (the bogus
+gives no error or warning and results in the output ‘-2, -4’ (the bogus
month value produces no output).
*Note Command line input::, to force the date to a given value from
@@ -8752,15 +8776,15 @@
14 Lengths
**********
-A "length" is a measure of distance. Many LaTeX commands take a length
+A “length” is a measure of distance. Many LaTeX commands take a length
as an argument.
- Lengths come in two types. A "rigid length" such as '10pt' does not
-contain a 'plus' or 'minus' component. (Plain TeX calls this a
-"dimen".) A "rubber length" (what plain TeX calls a "skip" or "glue")
-such as with '1cm plus0.05cm minus0.01cm' can contain either or both of
-those components. In that rubber length, the '1cm' is the "natural
-length" while the other two, the 'plus' and 'minus' components, allow
+ Lengths come in two types. A “rigid length” such as ‘10pt’ does not
+contain a ‘plus’ or ‘minus’ component. (Plain TeX calls this a
+“dimen”.) A “rubber length” (what plain TeX calls a “skip” or “glue”)
+such as with ‘1cm plus0.05cm minus0.01cm’ can contain either or both of
+those components. In that rubber length, the ‘1cm’ is the “natural
+length” while the other two, the ‘plus’ and ‘minus’ components, allow
TeX to stretch or shrink the length to optimize placement.
The illustrations below use these two commands.
@@ -8773,12 +8797,12 @@
\fboxsep=0pt\fbox{\hbox to #1{#2}}}
This example uses those commands to show a black bar 100 points long
-between 'XXX' and 'YYY'. This length is rigid.
+between ‘XXX’ and ‘YYY’. This length is rigid.
XXX\showhbox{100pt}{\blackbar{100pt}}YYY
- As for rubber lengths, shrinking is simpler one: with '1cm minus
-0.05cm', the natural length is 1cm but TeX can shrink it down as far as
+ As for rubber lengths, shrinking is simpler one: with ‘1cm minus
+0.05cm’, the natural length is 1cm but TeX can shrink it down as far as
0.95cm. Beyond that, TeX refuses to shrink any more. Thus, below the
first one works fine, producing a space of 98 points between the two
bars.
@@ -8789,9 +8813,9 @@
XXX\showhbox{300pt}{%
\blackbar{105pt}\hspace{100pt minus 1pt}\blackbar{105pt}}YYY
-But the second one gets a warning like 'Overfull \hbox (1.0pt too wide)
-detected at line 17'. In the output the first 'Y' is overwritten by the
-end of the black bar, because the box's material is wider than the 300pt
+But the second one gets a warning like ‘Overfull \hbox (1.0pt too wide)
+detected at line 17’. In the output the first ‘Y’ is overwritten by the
+end of the black bar, because the box’s material is wider than the 300pt
allocated, as TeX has refused to shrink the total to less than
309 points.
@@ -8807,11 +8831,11 @@
In the second line TeX needs a stretch of 10 points and only 1 point was
specified. TeX stretches the space to the required length but it gives
-you a warning like 'Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) detected at line
-22'. (We won't discuss badness.)
+you a warning like ‘Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) detected at line
+22’. (We won’t discuss badness.)
- You can put both stretch and shrink in the same length, as in '1ex
-plus 0.05ex minus 0.02ex'.
+ You can put both stretch and shrink in the same length, as in ‘1ex
+plus 0.05ex minus 0.02ex’.
If TeX is setting two or more rubber lengths then it allocates the
stretch or shrink in proportion.
@@ -8822,12 +8846,12 @@
\blackbar{100pt}}YYY % right
The left and right bars take up 100 points, so the middle needs another
-100. The middle bar is 80 points so the two '\hspace''s must stretch
-20 points. Because the two are 'plus 50pt' and 'plus 10pt', TeX gets
+100. The middle bar is 80 points so the two ‘\hspace’’s must stretch
+20 points. Because the two are ‘plus 50pt’ and ‘plus 10pt’, TeX gets
5/6 of the stretch from the first space and 1/6 from the second.
- The 'plus' or 'minus' component of a rubber length can contain a
-"fill" component, as in '1in plus2fill'. This gives the length infinite
+ The ‘plus’ or ‘minus’ component of a rubber length can contain a
+“fill” component, as in ‘1in plus2fill’. This gives the length infinite
stretchability or shrinkability so that TeX could set it to any
distance. Here the two figures will be equal-spaced across the page.
@@ -8837,14 +8861,14 @@
\hspace{0pt plus 1fill}
\end{minipage}
- TeX has three levels of infinity for glue components: 'fil', 'fill',
-and 'filll'. The later ones are more infinite than the earlier ones.
+ TeX has three levels of infinity for glue components: ‘fil’, ‘fill’,
+and ‘filll’. The later ones are more infinite than the earlier ones.
Ordinarily document authors only use the middle one (*note \hfill:: and
*note \vfill::).
Multiplying a rubber length by a number turns it into a rigid length,
-so that after '\setlength{\ylength}{1in plus 0.2in}' and
-'\setlength{\zlength}{3\ylength}' then the value of '\zlength' is '3in'.
+so that after ‘\setlength{\ylength}{1in plus 0.2in}’ and
+‘\setlength{\zlength}{3\ylength}’ then the value of ‘\zlength’ is ‘3in’.
* Menu:
@@ -8866,58 +8890,58 @@
TeX and LaTeX know about these units both inside and outside of math
mode.
-'pt'
+‘pt’
Point, 1/72.27 inch. The (approximate) conversion to metric units
is 1point = .35146mm = .035146cm.
-'pc'
+‘pc’
Pica, 12 pt
-'in'
+‘in’
Inch, 72.27 pt
-'bp'
+‘bp’
Big point, 1/72 inch. This length is the definition of a point in
PostScript and many desktop publishing systems.
-'mm'
- Millimeter, 2.845 pt
+‘mm’
+ Millimeter, 2.845pt
-'cm'
- Centimeter, 10 mm
+‘cm’
+ Centimeter, 10mm
-'dd'
+‘dd’
Didot point, 1.07 pt
-'cc'
+‘cc’
Cicero, 12 dd
-'sp'
+‘sp’
Scaled point, 1/65536 pt
Three other units are defined according to the current font, rather
than being an absolute dimension.
-'ex'
- The x-height of the current font "ex", traditionally the height of
+‘ex’
+ The x-height of the current font “ex”, traditionally the height of
the lowercase letter x, is often used for vertical lengths.
-'em'
- Similarly "em", traditionally the width of the capital letter M, is
+‘em’
+ Similarly “em”, traditionally the width of the capital letter M, is
often used for horizontal lengths. This is also often the size of
the current font, e.g., a nominal 10pt font will have 1em = 10pt.
LaTeX has several commands to produce horizontal spaces based on
the em (*note \enspace & \quad & \qquad::).
-'mu'
+‘mu’
Finally, in math mode, many definitions are expressed in terms of
- the math unit "mu", defined by 1em = 18mu, where the em is taken
+ the math unit “mu”, defined by 1em = 18mu, where the em is taken
from the current math symbols family. *Note Spacing in math
mode::.
Using these units can help make a definition work better across font
changes. For example, a definition of the vertical space between list
-items given as '\setlength{\itemsep}{1ex plus 0.05ex minus 0.01ex}' is
+items given as ‘\setlength{\itemsep}{1ex plus 0.05ex minus 0.01ex}’ is
more likely to still be reasonable if the font is changed than a
definition given in points.
@@ -8924,7 +8948,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \setlength, Next: \addtolength, Prev: Units of length, Up: Lengths
-14.2 '\setlength'
+14.2 ‘\setlength’
=================
Synopsis:
@@ -8931,14 +8955,14 @@
\setlength{\LEN}{AMOUNT}
- Set the length \LEN to AMOUNT. The length name '\LEN' has to be a
+ Set the length \LEN to AMOUNT. The length name ‘\LEN’ has to be a
control sequence (*note Control sequences::), and as such must begin
-with a backslash, '\' under normal circumstances. The AMOUNT can be a
+with a backslash, ‘\’ under normal circumstances. The AMOUNT can be a
rubber length (*note Lengths::). It can be positive, negative or zero,
and can be in any units that LaTeX understands (*note Units of
length::).
- Below, with LaTeX's defaults the first paragraph will be indented
+ Below, with LaTeX’s defaults the first paragraph will be indented
while the second will not.
I told the doctor I broke my leg in two places.
@@ -8946,17 +8970,17 @@
\setlength{\parindent}{0em}
He said stop going to those places.
- If you did not declare \LEN with '\newlength', for example if you
+ If you did not declare \LEN with ‘\newlength’, for example if you
mistype it as in
-'\newlength{\specparindent}\setlength{\sepcparindent}{...}', then you
-get an error like 'Undefined control sequence. <argument> \sepcindent'.
+‘\newlength{\specparindent}\setlength{\sepcparindent}{...}’, then you
+get an error like ‘Undefined control sequence. <argument> \sepcindent’.
If you omit the backslash at the start of the length name then you get
-an error like 'Missing number, treated as zero.'.
+an error like ‘Missing number, treated as zero.’.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \addtolength, Next: \settodepth, Prev: \setlength, Up: Lengths
-14.3 '\addtolength'
+14.3 ‘\addtolength’
===================
Synopsis:
@@ -8963,14 +8987,14 @@
\addtolength{\LEN}{AMOUNT}
- Increment the length \LEN by AMOUNT. The length name '\LEN' has to
+ Increment the length \LEN by AMOUNT. The length name ‘\LEN’ has to
be a control sequence (*note Control sequences::), and as such must
-begin with a backslash, '\' under normal circumstances. The AMOUNT is a
+begin with a backslash, ‘\’ under normal circumstances. The AMOUNT is a
rubber length (*note Lengths::). It can be positive, negative or zero,
and can be in any units that LaTeX understands (*note Units of
length::).
- Below, if '\parskip' starts with the value '0pt plus 1pt'
+ Below, if ‘\parskip’ starts with the value ‘0pt plus 1pt’
Doctor: how is the boy who swallowed the silver dollar?
\addtolength{\parskip}{1pt}
@@ -8977,24 +9001,24 @@
Nurse: no change.
-then it has the value '1pt plus 1pt' for the second paragraph.
+then it has the value ‘1pt plus 1pt’ for the second paragraph.
- If you did not declare \LEN with '\newlength', for example if you
+ If you did not declare \LEN with ‘\newlength’, for example if you
mistype it as in
-'\newlength{\specparindent}\addtolength{\sepcparindent}{...}', then you
-get an error like 'Undefined control sequence. <argument> \sepcindent'.
+‘\newlength{\specparindent}\addtolength{\sepcparindent}{...}’, then you
+get an error like ‘Undefined control sequence. <argument> \sepcindent’.
If the AMOUNT uses some length that has not been declared, for instance
if for example you mistype the above as
-'\addtolength{\specparindent}{0.6\praindent}', then you get something
-like 'Undefined control sequence. <argument> \praindent'. If you leave
+‘\addtolength{\specparindent}{0.6\praindent}’, then you get something
+like ‘Undefined control sequence. <argument> \praindent’. If you leave
off the backslash at the start of \LEN, as in
-'\addtolength{parindent}{1pt}', then you get something like 'You can't
-use `the letter p' after \advance'.
+‘\addtolength{parindent}{1pt}’, then you get something like ‘You can't
+use `the letter p' after \advance’.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \settodepth, Next: \settoheight, Prev: \addtolength, Up: Lengths
-14.4 '\settodepth'
+14.4 ‘\settodepth’
==================
Synopsis:
@@ -9002,9 +9026,9 @@
\settodepth{\LEN}{TEXT}
Set the length \LEN to the depth of box that LaTeX gets on
-typesetting the TEXT argument. The length name '\LEN' has to be a
+typesetting the TEXT argument. The length name ‘\LEN’ has to be a
control sequence (*note Control sequences::), and as such must begin
-with a backslash, '\' under normal circumstances.
+with a backslash, ‘\’ under normal circumstances.
This will print how low the character descenders go.
@@ -9012,17 +9036,17 @@
\settodepth{\alphabetdepth}{abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz}
\the\alphabetdepth
- If you did not declare \LEN with '\newlength', if for example you
-mistype the above as '\settodepth{\aplhabetdepth}{abc...}', then you get
-something like 'Undefined control sequence. <argument> \aplhabetdepth'.
+ If you did not declare \LEN with ‘\newlength’, if for example you
+mistype the above as ‘\settodepth{\aplhabetdepth}{abc...}’, then you get
+something like ‘Undefined control sequence. <argument> \aplhabetdepth’.
If you leave the backslash out of \LEN, as in
-'\settodepth{alphabetdepth}{...}' then you get something like 'Missing
-number, treated as zero. <to be read again> \setbox'.
+‘\settodepth{alphabetdepth}{...}’ then you get something like ‘Missing
+number, treated as zero. <to be read again> \setbox’.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \settoheight, Next: \settowidth, Prev: \settodepth, Up: Lengths
-14.5 '\settoheight'
+14.5 ‘\settoheight’
===================
Synopsis:
@@ -9030,9 +9054,9 @@
\settoheight{\LEN}{text}
Sets the length \LEN to the height of box that LaTeX gets on
-typesetting the 'text' argument. The length name '\LEN' has to be a
+typesetting the ‘text’ argument. The length name ‘\LEN’ has to be a
control sequence (*note Control sequences::), and as such must begin
-with a backslash, '\' under normal circumstances.
+with a backslash, ‘\’ under normal circumstances.
This will print how high the characters go.
@@ -9040,17 +9064,17 @@
\settoheight{\alphabetheight}{abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz}
\the\alphabetheight
- If no such length \LEN has been declared with '\newlength', if for
-example you mistype as '\settoheight{\aplhabetheight}{abc...}', then you
-get something like 'Undefined control sequence. <argument>
-\alphabetheight'. If you leave the backslash out of \LEN, as in
-'\settoheight{alphabetheight}{...}' then you get something like 'Missing
-number, treated as zero. <to be read again> \setbox'.
+ If no such length \LEN has been declared with ‘\newlength’, if for
+example you mistype as ‘\settoheight{\aplhabetheight}{abc...}’, then you
+get something like ‘Undefined control sequence. <argument>
+\alphabetheight’. If you leave the backslash out of \LEN, as in
+‘\settoheight{alphabetheight}{...}’ then you get something like ‘Missing
+number, treated as zero. <to be read again> \setbox’.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \settowidth, Next: \stretch, Prev: \settoheight, Up: Lengths
-14.6 '\settowidth'
+14.6 ‘\settowidth’
==================
Synopsis:
@@ -9058,9 +9082,9 @@
\settowidth{\LEN}{TEXT}
Set the length \LEN to the width of the box that LaTeX gets on
-typesetting the TEXT argument. The length name '\LEN' has to be a
+typesetting the TEXT argument. The length name ‘\LEN’ has to be a
control sequence (*note Control sequences::), and as such must begin
-with a backslash, '\' under normal circumstances.
+with a backslash, ‘\’ under normal circumstances.
This prints the width of the lowercase ASCII alphabet.
@@ -9068,17 +9092,17 @@
\settowidth{\alphabetwidth}{abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz}
\the\alphabetwidth
- If no such length \LEN has been declared with '\newlength', if for
-example you mistype the above as '\settowidth{\aplhabetwidth}{abc...}',
-then you get something like 'Undefined control sequence. <argument>
-\aplhabetwidth'. If you leave the backslash out of \LEN, as in
-'\settoheight{alphabetwidth}{...}' then you get something like 'Missing
-number, treated as zero. <to be read again> \setbox'.
+ If no such length \LEN has been declared with ‘\newlength’, if for
+example you mistype the above as ‘\settowidth{\aplhabetwidth}{abc...}’,
+then you get something like ‘Undefined control sequence. <argument>
+\aplhabetwidth’. If you leave the backslash out of \LEN, as in
+‘\settoheight{alphabetwidth}{...}’ then you get something like ‘Missing
+number, treated as zero. <to be read again> \setbox’.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \stretch, Next: Expressions, Prev: \settowidth, Up: Lengths
-14.7 '\stretch'
+14.7 ‘\stretch’
===============
Synopsis:
@@ -9086,7 +9110,7 @@
\stretch{NUMBER}
Produces a rubber length with zero natural length and NUMBER times
-'\fill' units of stretchability (*note Lengths::). The NUMBER can be
+‘\fill’ units of stretchability (*note Lengths::). The NUMBER can be
positive or negative. This command is robust (*note \protect::).
It works for both vertical and horizontal spacing. In this
@@ -9098,7 +9122,7 @@
\rule{0.4pt}{1ex}\hspace{\stretch{1}}%
\rule{0.4pt}{1ex}
- In this vertical example, the 'We dedicate ...' will have three times
+ In this vertical example, the ‘We dedicate ...’ will have three times
as much space under it as above it.
\newenvironment{dedication}{% in document preamble
@@ -9131,18 +9155,18 @@
glue, or muglue, you can instead write an expression to compute that
type of quantity.
- An example is that '\the\dimexpr\linewidth-4pt\relax' will produce as
+ An example is that ‘\the\dimexpr\linewidth-4pt\relax’ will produce as
output the length that is four points less than width of a line (the
-only purpose of '\the' is to show the result in the document).
-Analogously, '\romannumeral\numexpr6+3\relax' will produce 'ix', and
-'\the\glueexpr 5pt plus 1pt * 2 \relax' will produce '10.0pt plus
-2.0pt'.
+only purpose of ‘\the’ is to show the result in the document).
+Analogously, ‘\romannumeral\numexpr6+3\relax’ will produce ‘ix’, and
+‘\the\glueexpr 5pt plus 1pt * 2 \relax’ will produce ‘10.0pt plus
+2.0pt’.
A convenience here over doing calculations by allocating registers
-and then using '\advance', etc., is that the evaluation of expressions
+and then using ‘\advance’, etc., is that the evaluation of expressions
does not involve assignments and can therefore be performed in places
where assignments are not allowed. The next example computes the width
-of the '\parbox'.
+of the ‘\parbox’.
\newlength{\offset}\setlength{\offset}{2em}
\begin{center}
@@ -9161,56 +9185,56 @@
is a type of number, dimension, etc., consists of a factor of that type,
optionally multiplied or divided by factors. A factor of a type is
either a quantity of that type or a parenthesized subexpression. The
-expression produces a result of the given type, so that '\numexpr'
-produces an integer, '\dimexpr' produces a dimension, etc.
+expression produces a result of the given type, so that ‘\numexpr’
+produces an integer, ‘\dimexpr’ produces a dimension, etc.
In the quotation example above, changing to
-'\dimexpr\linewidth-3*\offset' gives the error 'Illegal unit of measure
-(pt inserted)'. This is because for '\dimexpr' and '\glueexpr', the
+‘\dimexpr\linewidth-3*\offset’ gives the error ‘Illegal unit of measure
+(pt inserted)’. This is because for ‘\dimexpr’ and ‘\glueexpr’, the
input consists of a dimension or glue value followed by an optional
-multiplication factor, and not the other way around. Thus '\the\dimexpr
-1pt*10\relax' is valid and produces '10.0pt', but '\the\dimexpr
-10*1pt\relax' gives the 'Illegal unit' error.
+multiplication factor, and not the other way around. Thus ‘\the\dimexpr
+1pt*10\relax’ is valid and produces ‘10.0pt’, but ‘\the\dimexpr
+10*1pt\relax’ gives the ‘Illegal unit’ error.
The expressions absorb tokens and carry out appropriate mathematics
-up to a '\relax' (which will be absorbed), or up to the first non-valid
-token. Thus, '\the\numexpr2+3px' will print '5px', because LaTeX reads
-the '\numexpr2+3', which is made up of numbers, and then finds the
-letter 'p', which cannot be part of a number. It therefore terminates
-the expression and produces the '5', followed by the regular text 'px'.
+up to a ‘\relax’ (which will be absorbed), or up to the first non-valid
+token. Thus, ‘\the\numexpr2+3px’ will print ‘5px’, because LaTeX reads
+the ‘\numexpr2+3’, which is made up of numbers, and then finds the
+letter ‘p’, which cannot be part of a number. It therefore terminates
+the expression and produces the ‘5’, followed by the regular text ‘px’.
This termination behavior is useful in comparisons. In
-'\ifnum\numexpr\parindent*2 < 10pt Yes\else No\fi', the less than sign
-terminates the expression and the result is 'No' (in a standard LaTeX
+‘\ifnum\numexpr\parindent*2 < 10pt Yes\else No\fi’, the less than sign
+terminates the expression and the result is ‘No’ (in a standard LaTeX
article).
- Expressions may use the operators '+', '-', '*' and '/' along with
-parentheses for subexpressions, '(...)'. In glue expressions the 'plus'
-and 'minus' parts do not need parentheses to be affected by a factor.
-So '\the\glueexpr 5pt plus 1pt * 2 \relax' results in '10pt plus 2pt'.
+ Expressions may use the operators ‘+’, ‘-’, ‘*’ and ‘/’ along with
+parentheses for subexpressions, ‘(...)’. In glue expressions the ‘plus’
+and ‘minus’ parts do not need parentheses to be affected by a factor.
+So ‘\the\glueexpr 5pt plus 1pt * 2 \relax’ results in ‘10pt plus 2pt’.
TeX will coerce other numerical types in the same way as it does when
-doing register assignment. Thus '\the\numexpr\dimexpr 1pt\relax\relax'
-will result in '65536', which is '1pt' converted to scaled points (*note
-'sp': units of length sp, TeX's internal unit) and then coerced into an
-integer. With a '\glueexpr' here, the stretch and shrink would be
-dropped. Going the other way, a '\numexpr' inside a '\dimexpr' or
-'\glueexpr' will need appropriate units, as in '\the\dimexpr\numexpr 1 +
-2\relax pt\relax', which produces '3.0pt'.
+doing register assignment. Thus ‘\the\numexpr\dimexpr 1pt\relax\relax’
+will result in ‘65536’, which is ‘1pt’ converted to scaled points (*note
+‘sp’: units of length sp, TeX’s internal unit) and then coerced into an
+integer. With a ‘\glueexpr’ here, the stretch and shrink would be
+dropped. Going the other way, a ‘\numexpr’ inside a ‘\dimexpr’ or
+‘\glueexpr’ will need appropriate units, as in ‘\the\dimexpr\numexpr 1 +
+2\relax pt\relax’, which produces ‘3.0pt’.
The details of the arithmetic: each factor is checked to be in the
allowed range, numbers must be less than 2^{31} in absolute value, and
-dimensions or glue components must be less than 2^{14} points, or 'mu',
-or 'fil', etc. The arithmetic operations are performed individually,
+dimensions or glue components must be less than 2^{14} points, or ‘mu’,
+or ‘fil’, etc. The arithmetic operations are performed individually,
except for a scaling operation (a multiplication immediately followed by
a division) which is done as one combined operation with a 64-bit
product as intermediate value. The result of each operation is again
checked to be in the allowed range.
- Finally, division and scaling take place with rounding (unlike TeX's
-'\divide', which truncates). Thus '\the\dimexpr 5pt*(3/2)\relax' puts
-'10.0pt' in the document, because it rounds '3/2' to '2', while
-'\the\dimexpr 5pt*(4/3)\relax' produces '5.0pt'.
+ Finally, division and scaling take place with rounding (unlike TeX’s
+‘\divide’, which truncates). Thus ‘\the\dimexpr 5pt*(3/2)\relax’ puts
+‘10.0pt’ in the document, because it rounds ‘3/2’ to ‘2’, while
+‘\the\dimexpr 5pt*(4/3)\relax’ produces ‘5.0pt’.
File: latex2e.info, Node: Making paragraphs, Next: Math formulas, Prev: Lengths, Up: Top
@@ -9233,10 +9257,10 @@
``My dear Mr. Bennet,'' said his lady to him one day,
``have you heard that Netherfield Park is let at last?''
- A paragraph separator is made of a sequence of at least one blank
+ A paragraph separator can be made of a sequence of at least one blank
line, at least one of which is not terminated by a comment. A blank
line is a line that is empty or made only of blank characters such as
-space or tab. Comments in source code are started with a '%' and span
+space or tab. Comments in source code are started with a ‘%’ and span
up to the end of line. In the following example the two columns are
identical:
@@ -9253,13 +9277,13 @@
Second paragraph.
\end{document}
- Once LaTeX has gathered all of a paragraph's contents it divides that
+ Once LaTeX has gathered all of a paragraph’s contents it divides that
content into lines in a way that is optimized over the entire paragraph
(*note Line breaking::).
- There are places where a new paragraph is not permitted. Don't put a
+ There are places where a new paragraph is not permitted. Don’t put a
blank line in math mode (*note Modes::); here the blank line before the
-'\end{equation}'
+‘\end{equation}’
\begin{equation}
2^{|S|} > |S|
@@ -9266,15 +9290,15 @@
\end{equation}
-will get you the error 'Missing $ inserted'. Similarly, the blank line
-in this '\section' argument
+will get you the error ‘Missing $ inserted’. Similarly, the blank line
+in this ‘\section’ argument
\section{aaa
bbb}
-gets 'Runaway argument? {aaa ! Paragraph ended before \@sect was
-complete'.
+gets ‘Runaway argument? {aaa ! Paragraph ended before \@sect was
+complete’.
* Menu:
@@ -9286,42 +9310,42 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \par, Next: \indent & \noindent, Up: Making paragraphs
-15.1 '\par'
+15.1 ‘\par’
===========
Synopsis (note that while reading the input TeX converts any sequence of
-one or more blank lines to a '\par', *note Making paragraphs::):
+one or more blank lines to a ‘\par’, *note Making paragraphs::):
\par
End the current paragraph. The usual way to separate paragraphs is
-with a blank line but the '\par' command is entirely equivalent. This
+with a blank line but the ‘\par’ command is entirely equivalent. This
command is robust (*note \protect::).
- This example uses '\par' rather than a blank line simply for
+ This example uses ‘\par’ rather than a blank line simply for
readability.
\newcommand{\syllabusLegalese}{%
\whatCheatingIs\par\whatHappensWhenICatchYou}
- In LR mode the '\par' command does nothing and is ignored. In
-paragraph mode, the '\par' command terminates paragraph mode, switching
+ In LR mode the ‘\par’ command does nothing and is ignored. In
+paragraph mode, the ‘\par’ command terminates paragraph mode, switching
LaTeX to vertical mode (*note Modes::).
- You cannot use the '\par' command in a math mode. You also cannot
+ You cannot use the ‘\par’ command in a math mode. You also cannot
use it in the argument of many commands, such as the sectioning
-commands, e.g. '\section' (*note Making paragraphs:: and *note
+commands, e.g. ‘\section’ (*note Making paragraphs:: and *note
\newcommand & \renewcommand::).
- The '\par' command is not the same as the '\paragraph' command. The
-latter is, like '\section' or '\subsection', a sectioning command used
+ The ‘\par’ command is not the same as the ‘\paragraph’ command. The
+latter is, like ‘\section’ or ‘\subsection’, a sectioning command used
by the LaTeX document standard classes (*note \subsubsection &
\paragraph & \subparagraph::).
- The '\par' command is not the same as '\newline' or the line break
-double backslash, '\\'. The difference is that '\par' ends the
+ The ‘\par’ command is not the same as ‘\newline’ or the line break
+double backslash, ‘\\’. The difference is that ‘\par’ ends the
paragraph, not just the line, and also triggers the addition of the
-between-paragraph vertical space '\parskip' (*note \parindent &
+between-paragraph vertical space ‘\parskip’ (*note \parindent &
\parskip::).
The output from this example
@@ -9332,17 +9356,17 @@
\setlength{\parskip}{5in}
\noindent test\indent test1\par test2
-is: after 'xyz' there is a vertical skip of 5 inches and then 'test'
+is: after ‘xyz’ there is a vertical skip of 5 inches and then ‘test’
appears, aligned with the left margin. On the same line, there is an
-empty horizontal space of 3 inches and then 'test1' appears. Finally.
+empty horizontal space of 3 inches and then ‘test1’ appears. Finally.
there is a vertical space of 5 inches, followed by a fresh paragraph
with a paragraph indent of 3 inches, and then LaTeX puts the text
-'test2'.
+‘test2’.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \indent & \noindent, Next: \parindent & \parskip, Prev: \par, Up: Making paragraphs
-15.2 '\indent' & '\noindent'
+15.2 ‘\indent’ & ‘\noindent’
============================
Synopsis:
@@ -9353,18 +9377,18 @@
\noindent
- Go into horizontal mode (*note Modes::). The '\indent' command first
-outputs an empty box whose width is '\parindent'. These commands are
+ Go into horizontal mode (*note Modes::). The ‘\indent’ command first
+outputs an empty box whose width is ‘\parindent’. These commands are
robust (*note \protect::).
Ordinarily you create a new paragraph by putting in a blank line.
-*Note \par::, for the difference between this command and '\par'. To
+*Note \par::, for the difference between this command and ‘\par’. To
start a paragraph without an indent, or to continue an interrupted
-paragraph, use '\noindent'.
+paragraph, use ‘\noindent’.
- In the middle of a paragraph the '\noindent' command has no effect,
-because LaTeX is already in horizontal mode there. The '\indent'
-command's only effect is to output a space.
+ In the middle of a paragraph the ‘\noindent’ command has no effect,
+because LaTeX is already in horizontal mode there. The ‘\indent’
+command’s only effect is to output a space.
This example starts a fresh paragraph.
@@ -9383,18 +9407,18 @@
\noindent shows this clearly.
To omit indentation in the entire document put
-'\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}' in the preamble. If you do that, you may
-want to also set the length of spaces between paragraphs, '\parskip'
+‘\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}’ in the preamble. If you do that, you may
+want to also set the length of spaces between paragraphs, ‘\parskip’
(*note \parindent & \parskip::).
Default LaTeX styles have the first paragraph after a section that is
not indented, as is traditional typesetting in English. To change that,
-look on CTAN for the package 'indentfirst'.
+look on CTAN for the package ‘indentfirst’.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \parindent & \parskip, Next: Marginal notes, Prev: \indent & \noindent, Up: Making paragraphs
-15.3 '\parindent' & '\parskip'
+15.3 ‘\parindent’ & ‘\parskip’
==============================
Synopsis:
@@ -9413,18 +9437,18 @@
\setlength{\parskip}{1ex}
The document will have paragraphs that are not indented, but instead are
-vertically separated by about the height of a lowercase 'x'.
+vertically separated by about the height of a lowercase ‘x’.
- In LaTeX standard class documents, the default value for '\parindent'
-in one-column documents is '15pt' when the default text size is '10pt',
-'17pt' for '11pt', and '1.5em' for '12pt'. In two-column documents it
-is '1em'. (These values are set before LaTeX calls '\normalfont' so
-'em' is derived from the default font, Computer Modern. If you use a
-different font then to set '\parindent' to 1em matching that font, put
-'\AtBeginDocument{\setlength{\parindent}{1em}}' in the preamble.)
+ In LaTeX standard class documents, the default value for ‘\parindent’
+in one-column documents is ‘15pt’ when the default text size is ‘10pt’,
+‘17pt’ for ‘11pt’, and ‘1.5em’ for ‘12pt’. In two-column documents it
+is ‘1em’. (These values are set before LaTeX calls ‘\normalfont’ so
+‘em’ is derived from the default font, Computer Modern. If you use a
+different font then to set ‘\parindent’ to 1em matching that font, put
+‘\AtBeginDocument{\setlength{\parindent}{1em}}’ in the preamble.)
- The default value for '\parskip' in LaTeX's standard document classes
-is '0pt plus1pt'.
+ The default value for ‘\parskip’ in LaTeX’s standard document classes
+is ‘0pt plus1pt’.
File: latex2e.info, Node: Marginal notes, Prev: \parindent & \parskip, Up: Making paragraphs
@@ -9438,43 +9462,43 @@
\marginpar[LEFT]{RIGHT}
Create a note in the margin. The first line of the note will have
-the same baseline as the line in the text where the '\marginpar' occurs.
+the same baseline as the line in the text where the ‘\marginpar’ occurs.
The margin that LaTeX uses for the note depends on the current layout
-(*note Document class options::) and also on '\reversemarginpar' (see
-below). If you are using one-sided layout (document option 'oneside')
+(*note Document class options::) and also on ‘\reversemarginpar’ (see
+below). If you are using one-sided layout (document option ‘oneside’)
then it goes in the right margin. If you are using two-sided layout
-(document option 'twoside') then it goes in the outside margin. If you
-are in two-column layout (document option 'twocolumn') then it goes in
+(document option ‘twoside’) then it goes in the outside margin. If you
+are in two-column layout (document option ‘twocolumn’) then it goes in
the nearest margin.
- If you declare '\reversemarginpar' then LaTeX will place subsequent
+ If you declare ‘\reversemarginpar’ then LaTeX will place subsequent
marginal notes in the opposite margin to that given in the prior
-paragraph. Revert that to the default position with '\normalmarginpar'.
+paragraph. Revert that to the default position with ‘\normalmarginpar’.
When you specify the optional argument LEFT then it is used for a
note in the left margin, while the mandatory argument RIGHT is used for
a note in the right margin.
- Normally, a note's first word will not be hyphenated. You can enable
-hyphenation there by beginning LEFT or RIGHT with '\hspace{0pt}'.
+ Normally, a note’s first word will not be hyphenated. You can enable
+hyphenation there by beginning LEFT or RIGHT with ‘\hspace{0pt}’.
These parameters affect the formatting of the note:
-'\marginparpush'
- Minimum vertical space between notes; default '7pt' for '12pt'
- documents, '5pt' else. See also *note page layout parameters
+‘\marginparpush’
+ Minimum vertical space between notes; default ‘7pt’ for ‘12pt’
+ documents, ‘5pt’ else. See also *note page layout parameters
marginparpush::.
-'\marginparsep'
- Horizontal space between the main text and the note; default '11pt'
- for '10pt' documents, '10pt' else.
+‘\marginparsep’
+ Horizontal space between the main text and the note; default ‘11pt’
+ for ‘10pt’ documents, ‘10pt’ else.
-'\marginparwidth'
- Width of the note itself; default for a one-sided '10pt' document
- is '90pt', '83pt' for '11pt', and '68pt' for '12pt'; '17pt' more in
+‘\marginparwidth’
+ Width of the note itself; default for a one-sided ‘10pt’ document
+ is ‘90pt’, ‘83pt’ for ‘11pt’, and ‘68pt’ for ‘12pt’; ‘17pt’ more in
each case for a two-sided document. In two column mode, the
- default is '48pt'.
+ default is ‘48pt’.
The standard LaTeX routine for marginal notes does not prevent notes
from falling off the bottom of the page.
@@ -9495,9 +9519,9 @@
where \( \nabla^2 \) is the spatial Laplacian and \( c \) is constant.
Math mode is for inline mathematics. In the above example it is invoked
-by the starting '\(' and finished by the matching ending '\)'. Display
+by the starting ‘\(’ and finished by the matching ending ‘\)’. Display
math mode is for displayed equations and here is invoked by the
-'displaymath' environment. Note that any mathematical text whatever,
+‘displaymath’ environment. Note that any mathematical text whatever,
including mathematical text consisting of just one character, is handled
in math mode.
@@ -9518,7 +9542,7 @@
The first form is preferred and the second is quite common, but the
third form is rarely used. You can sometimes use one and sometimes
-another, as in '\(x\) and $y$'. You can use these in paragraph mode or
+another, as in ‘\(x\) and $y$’. You can use these in paragraph mode or
in LR mode (*note Modes::).
To make displayed formulas, put LaTeX into display math mode with
@@ -9535,15 +9559,15 @@
\end{equation}
(*note displaymath::, *note equation::). The only difference is that
-with the 'equation' environment, LaTeX puts a formula number alongside
-the formula. The construct '\[ MATH \]' is equivalent to
-'\begin{displaymath} MATH \end{displaymath}'. These environments can
+with the ‘equation’ environment, LaTeX puts a formula number alongside
+the formula. The construct ‘\[ MATH \]’ is equivalent to
+‘\begin{displaymath} MATH \end{displaymath}’. These environments can
only be used in paragraph mode (*note Modes::).
The American Mathematical Society has made freely available a set of
packages that greatly expand your options for writing mathematics,
-'amsmath' and 'amssymb' (also be aware of the 'mathtools' package that
-is an extension to, and loads, 'amsmath'). New documents that will have
+‘amsmath’ and ‘amssymb’ (also be aware of the ‘mathtools’ package that
+is an extension to, and loads, ‘amsmath’). New documents that will have
mathematical text should use these packages. Descriptions of these
packages is outside the scope of this document; see their documentation
on CTAN.
@@ -9557,7 +9581,7 @@
* Over- and Underlining:: Things over or under formulas.
* Spacing in math mode:: Thick, medium, thin, and negative spaces.
* Math styles:: Determine the size of things.
-* Math miscellany:: Stuff that doesn't fit anywhere else.
+* Math miscellany:: Stuff that doesn’t fit anywhere else.
File: latex2e.info, Node: Subscripts & superscripts, Next: Math symbols, Up: Math formulas
@@ -9576,16 +9600,16 @@
BASE_{EXP}
Make EXP appear as a superscript of BASE (with the caret
-character, '^') or a subscript (with underscore, '_').
+character, ‘^’) or a subscript (with underscore, ‘_’).
- In this example the '0''s and '1''s are subscripts while the '2''s
+ In this example the ‘0’’s and ‘1’’s are subscripts while the ‘2’’s
are superscripts.
\( (x_0+x_1)^2 \leq (x_0)^2+(x_1)^2 \)
To have the subscript or superscript contain more than one character,
-surround the expression with curly braces, as in 'e^{-2x}'. This
-example's fourth line shows curly braces used to group an expression for
+surround the expression with curly braces, as in ‘e^{-2x}’. This
+example’s fourth line shows curly braces used to group an expression for
the exponent.
\begin{displaymath}
@@ -9596,10 +9620,10 @@
LaTeX knows how to handle a superscript on a superscript, or a
subscript on a subscript, or supers on subs, or subs on supers. So,
-expressions such as 'e^{x^2}' and 'x_{i_0}' give correct output. Note
+expressions such as ‘e^{x^2}’ and ‘x_{i_0}’ give correct output. Note
the use in those expressions of curly braces to give the BASE a
-determined EXP. If you enter '\(3^3^3\)' then you get 'Double
-superscript'.
+determined EXP. If you enter ‘\(3^3^3\)’, this interpreted as
+‘\(3^{3}^{3}\)’ and then you get TeX error ‘Double superscript’.
LaTeX does the right thing when something has both a subscript and a
superscript. In this example the integral has both. They come out in
@@ -9609,21 +9633,21 @@
\int_{x=a}^b f'(x)\,dx = f(b)-f(a)
\end{displaymath}
-Note the parentheses around 'x=a' to make the entire expression a
+Note the curly braces around ‘x=a’ to make the entire expression a
subscript.
To put a superscript or subscript before a symbol, use a construct
-like '{}_t K^2'. The empty curly braces '{}' give the subscript
+like ‘{}_t K^2’. The empty curly braces ‘{}’ give the subscript
something to attach to and keeps it from accidentally attaching to a
prior symbols.
Using the subscript or superscript character outside of math mode or
-display math mode, as in 'the expression x^2', will get you the error
-'Missing $ inserted'.
+display math mode, as in ‘the expression x^2’, will get you the TeX
+error ‘Missing $ inserted’.
A common reason to want subscripts outside of a mathematics mode is
to typeset chemical formulas. There are packages for that, such as
-'mhchem'; see CTAN.
+‘mhchem’; see CTAN.
File: latex2e.info, Node: Math symbols, Next: Math functions, Prev: Subscripts & superscripts, Up: Math formulas
@@ -9632,8 +9656,8 @@
=================
LaTeX provides almost any mathematical or technical symbol that anyone
-uses. For example, if you include '$\pi$' in your source, you will get
-the pi symbol π. See the "Comprehensive LaTeX Symbol List" package at
+uses. For example, if you include ‘$\pi$’ in your source, you will get
+the pi symbol π. See the “Comprehensive LaTeX Symbol List” package at
<https://ctan.org/pkg/comprehensive>.
Here is a list of commonly-used symbols. It is by no means
@@ -9643,833 +9667,835 @@
be used only in math mode. To redefine a command so that it can be used
whatever the current mode, see *note \ensuremath::.
-'\|'
- ∥ Parallel (relation). Synonym: '\parallel'.
+‘\|’
+ ∥ Parallel (relation). Synonym: ‘\parallel’.
-'\aleph'
+‘\aleph’
ℵ Aleph, transfinite cardinal (ordinary).
-'\alpha'
+‘\alpha’
α Lowercase Greek letter alpha (ordinary).
-'\amalg'
+‘\amalg’
⨿ Disjoint union (binary)
-'\angle'
- ∠ Geometric angle (ordinary). Similar: less-than sign '<' and
- angle bracket '\langle'.
+‘\angle’
+ ∠ Geometric angle (ordinary). Similar: less-than sign ‘<’ and
+ angle bracket ‘\langle’.
-'\approx'
+‘\approx’
≈ Almost equal to (relation).
-'\ast'
+‘\ast’
∗ Asterisk operator, convolution, six-pointed (binary).
- Synonym: '*', which is often a superscript or subscript, as in the
- Kleene star. Similar: '\star', which is five-pointed, and is
+ Synonym: ‘*’, which is often a superscript or subscript, as in the
+ Kleene star. Similar: ‘\star’, which is five-pointed, and is
sometimes used as a general binary operation, and sometimes
reserved for cross-correlation.
-'\asymp'
+‘\asymp’
≍ Asymptotically equivalent (relation).
-'\backslash'
- \ Backslash (ordinary). Similar: set minus '\setminus', and
- '\textbackslash' for backslash outside of math mode.
+‘\backslash’
+ \ Backslash (ordinary). Similar: set minus ‘\setminus’, and
+ ‘\textbackslash’ for backslash outside of math mode.
-'\beta'
+‘\beta’
β Lowercase Greek letter beta (ordinary).
-'\bigcap'
+‘\bigcap’
⋂ Variable-sized, or n-ary, intersection (operator). Similar:
- binary intersection '\cap'.
+ binary intersection ‘\cap’.
-'\bigcirc'
- ⚪ Circle, larger (binary). Similar: function composition '\circ'.
+‘\bigcirc’
+ ⚪ Circle, larger (binary). Similar: function composition ‘\circ’.
-'\bigcup'
+‘\bigcup’
⋃ Variable-sized, or n-ary, union (operator). Similar: binary
- union '\cup'.
+ union ‘\cup’.
-'\bigodot'
+‘\bigodot’
⨀ Variable-sized, or n-ary, circled dot operator (operator).
-'\bigoplus'
+‘\bigoplus’
⨁ Variable-sized, or n-ary, circled plus operator (operator).
-'\bigotimes'
+‘\bigotimes’
⨂ Variable-sized, or n-ary, circled times operator (operator).
-'\bigtriangledown'
- ▽ Variable-sized, or n-ary, open triangle pointing down (operator).
+‘\bigtriangledown’
+ ▽ Variable-sized, or n-ary, open triangle pointing down (binary).
+ Synonym: \VARBIGTRIANGLEDOWN.
-'\bigtriangleup'
- △ Variable-sized, or n-ary, open triangle pointing up (operator).
+‘\bigtriangleup’
+ △ Variable-sized, or n-ary, open triangle pointing up (binary).
+ Synonym: \VARBIGTRIANGLEUP.
-'\bigsqcup'
+‘\bigsqcup’
⨆ Variable-sized, or n-ary, square union (operator).
-'\biguplus'
+‘\biguplus’
⨄ Variable-sized, or n-ary, union operator with a plus (operator).
(Note that the name has only one p.)
-'\bigvee'
+‘\bigvee’
⋁ Variable-sized, or n-ary, logical-or (operator).
-'\bigwedge'
+‘\bigwedge’
⋀ Variable-sized, or n-ary, logical-and (operator).
-'\bot'
+‘\bot’
⊥, Up tack, bottom, least element of a partially ordered set, or a
- contradiction (ordinary). See also '\top'.
+ contradiction (ordinary). See also ‘\top’.
-'\bowtie'
+‘\bowtie’
⋈ Natural join of two relations (relation).
-'\Box'
+‘\Box’
□ Modal operator for necessity; square open box (ordinary). Not
- available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the 'amssymb'
+ available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the ‘amssymb’
package.
-'\bullet'
- • Bullet (binary). Similar: multiplication dot '\cdot'.
+‘\bullet’
+ • Bullet (binary). Similar: multiplication dot ‘\cdot’.
-'\cap'
+‘\cap’
∩ Intersection of two sets (binary). Similar: variable-sized
- operator '\bigcap'.
+ operator ‘\bigcap’.
-'\cdot'
- ⋅ Multiplication (binary). Similar: Bullet dot '\bullet'.
+‘\cdot’
+ ⋅ Multiplication (binary). Similar: Bullet dot ‘\bullet’.
-'\chi'
+‘\chi’
χ Lowercase Greek chi (ordinary).
-'\circ'
+‘\circ’
∘ Function composition, ring operator (binary). Similar:
- variable-sized operator '\bigcirc'.
+ variable-sized operator ‘\bigcirc’.
-'\clubsuit'
+‘\clubsuit’
♣ Club card suit (ordinary).
-'\complement'
- ∁, Set complement, used as a superscript as in '$S^\complement$'
+‘\complement’
+ ∁, Set complement, used as a superscript as in ‘$S^\complement$’
(ordinary). Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load
- the 'amssymb' package. Also used: '$S^{\mathsf{c}}$'
- or '$\bar{S}$'.
+ the ‘amssymb’ package. Also used: ‘$S^{\mathsf{c}}$’
+ or ‘$\bar{S}$’.
-'\cong'
+‘\cong’
≅ Congruent (relation).
-'\coprod'
+‘\coprod’
∐ Coproduct (operator).
-'\cup'
+‘\cup’
∪ Union of two sets (binary). Similar: variable-sized
- operator '\bigcup'.
+ operator ‘\bigcup’.
-'\dagger'
+‘\dagger’
† Dagger relation (binary).
-'\dashv'
+‘\dashv’
⊣ Dash with vertical, reversed turnstile (relation). Similar:
- turnstile '\vdash'.
+ turnstile ‘\vdash’.
-'\ddagger'
+‘\ddagger’
‡ Double dagger relation (binary).
-'\Delta'
+‘\Delta’
Δ Greek uppercase delta, used for increment (ordinary).
-'\delta'
+‘\delta’
δ Greek lowercase delta (ordinary).
-'\Diamond'
+‘\Diamond’
◇ Large diamond operator (ordinary). Not available in plain TeX.
- In LaTeX you need to load the 'amssymb' package.
+ In LaTeX you need to load the ‘amssymb’ package.
-'\diamond'
- ⋄ Diamond operator (binary). Similar: large diamond '\Diamond',
- circle bullet '\bullet'.
+‘\diamond’
+ ⋄ Diamond operator (binary). Similar: large diamond ‘\Diamond’,
+ circle bullet ‘\bullet’.
-'\diamondsuit'
+‘\diamondsuit’
♢ Diamond card suit (ordinary).
-'\div'
+‘\div’
÷ Division sign (binary).
-'\doteq'
+‘\doteq’
≐ Approaches the limit (relation). Similar: geometrically equal
- to '\Doteq'.
+ to ‘\Doteq’.
-'\downarrow'
- ↓ Down arrow, converges (relation). Similar: '\Downarrow' double
+‘\downarrow’
+ ↓ Down arrow, converges (relation). Similar: ‘\Downarrow’ double
line down arrow.
-'\Downarrow'
- ⇓ Double line down arrow (relation). Similar: '\downarrow' single
+‘\Downarrow’
+ ⇓ Double line down arrow (relation). Similar: ‘\downarrow’ single
line down arrow.
-'\ell'
+‘\ell’
ℓ Lowercase cursive letter l (ordinary).
-'\emptyset'
- ∅ Empty set symbol (ordinary). The variant form is '\varnothing'.
+‘\emptyset’
+ ∅ Empty set symbol (ordinary). The variant form is ‘\varnothing’.
-'\epsilon'
+‘\epsilon’
ϵ Lowercase lunate epsilon (ordinary). Similar to Greek text
letter. More widely used in mathematics is the script small letter
- epsilon '\varepsilon' ε. Related: the set membership relation
- '\in' ∈.
+ epsilon ‘\varepsilon’ ε. Related: the set membership relation
+ ‘\in’ ∈.
-'\equiv'
+‘\equiv’
≡ Equivalence (relation).
-'\eta'
+‘\eta’
η Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
-'\exists'
+‘\exists’
∃ Existential quantifier (ordinary).
-'\flat'
+‘\flat’
♭ Musical flat (ordinary).
-'\forall'
+‘\forall’
∀ Universal quantifier (ordinary).
-'\frown'
+‘\frown’
⌢ Downward curving arc (ordinary).
-'\Gamma'
+‘\Gamma’
Γ uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
-'\gamma'
+‘\gamma’
γ Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
-'\ge'
+‘\ge’
≥ Greater than or equal to (relation). This is a synonym
- for '\geq'.
+ for ‘\geq’.
-'\geq'
+‘\geq’
≥ Greater than or equal to (relation). This is a synonym
- for '\ge'.
+ for ‘\ge’.
-'\gets'
- ← Is assigned the value (relation). Synonym: '\leftarrow'.
+‘\gets’
+ ← Is assigned the value (relation). Synonym: ‘\leftarrow’.
-'\gg'
- ≫ Much greater than (relation). Similar: much less than '\ll'.
+‘\gg’
+ ≫ Much greater than (relation). Similar: much less than ‘\ll’.
-'\hbar'
+‘\hbar’
ℏ Planck constant over two pi (ordinary).
-'\heartsuit'
+‘\heartsuit’
♡ Heart card suit (ordinary).
-'\hookleftarrow'
+‘\hookleftarrow’
↩ Hooked left arrow (relation).
-'\hookrightarrow'
+‘\hookrightarrow’
↪ Hooked right arrow (relation).
-'\iff'
- ⟷ If and only if (relation). It is '\Longleftrightarrow' with a
- '\thickmuskip' on either side.
+‘\iff’
+ ⟷ If and only if (relation). It is ‘\Longleftrightarrow’ with a
+ ‘\thickmuskip’ on either side.
-'\Im'
- ℑ Imaginary part (ordinary). See: real part '\Re'.
+‘\Im’
+ ℑ Imaginary part (ordinary). See: real part ‘\Re’.
-'\imath'
+‘\imath’
Dotless i; used when you are putting an accent on an i (*note Math
accents::).
-'\in'
+‘\in’
∈ Set element (relation). See also: lowercase lunate
- epsilon '\epsilon'ϵ and small letter script epsilon '\varepsilon'.
+ epsilon ‘\epsilon’ϵ and small letter script epsilon ‘\varepsilon’.
-'\infty'
+‘\infty’
∞ Infinity (ordinary).
-'\int'
+‘\int’
∫ Integral (operator).
-'\iota'
+‘\iota’
ι Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
-'\Join'
+‘\Join’
⨝ Condensed bowtie symbol (relation). Not available in Plain TeX.
-'\jmath'
+‘\jmath’
Dotless j; used when you are putting an accent on a j (*note Math
accents::).
-'\kappa'
+‘\kappa’
κ Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
-'\Lambda'
+‘\Lambda’
Λ uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
-'\lambda'
+‘\lambda’
λ Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
-'\land'
- ∧ Logical and (binary). Synonym: '\wedge'. See also
- logical or '\lor'.
+‘\land’
+ ∧ Logical and (binary). Synonym: ‘\wedge’. See also
+ logical or ‘\lor’.
-'\langle'
+‘\langle’
⟨ Left angle, or sequence, bracket (opening). Similar:
- less-than '<'. Matches '\rangle'.
+ less-than ‘<’. Matches ‘\rangle’.
-'\lbrace'
- { Left curly brace (opening). Synonym: '\{'. Matches '\rbrace'.
+‘\lbrace’
+ { Left curly brace (opening). Synonym: ‘\{’. Matches ‘\rbrace’.
-'\lbrack'
- [ Left square bracket (opening). Synonym: '['. Matches '\rbrack'.
+‘\lbrack’
+ [ Left square bracket (opening). Synonym: ‘[’. Matches ‘\rbrack’.
-'\lceil'
+‘\lceil’
⌈ Left ceiling bracket, like a square bracket but with the bottom
- shaved off (opening). Matches '\rceil'.
+ shaved off (opening). Matches ‘\rceil’.
-'\le'
- ≤ Less than or equal to (relation). This is a synonym for '\leq'.
+‘\le’
+ ≤ Less than or equal to (relation). This is a synonym for ‘\leq’.
-'\leadsto'
+‘\leadsto’
⇝ Squiggly right arrow (relation). To get this symbol outside of
math mode you can put
- '\newcommand*{\Leadsto}{\ensuremath{\leadsto}}' in the preamble and
- then use '\Leadsto' instead.
+ ‘\newcommand*{\Leadsto}{\ensuremath{\leadsto}}’ in the preamble and
+ then use ‘\Leadsto’ instead.
-'\Leftarrow'
+‘\Leftarrow’
⇐ Is implied by, double-line left arrow (relation). Similar:
- single-line left arrow '\leftarrow'.
+ single-line left arrow ‘\leftarrow’.
-'\leftarrow'
- ← Single-line left arrow (relation). Synonym: '\gets'. Similar:
- double-line left arrow '\Leftarrow'.
+‘\leftarrow’
+ ← Single-line left arrow (relation). Synonym: ‘\gets’. Similar:
+ double-line left arrow ‘\Leftarrow’.
-'\leftharpoondown'
+‘\leftharpoondown’
↽ Single-line left harpoon, barb under bar (relation).
-'\leftharpoonup'
+‘\leftharpoonup’
↼ Single-line left harpoon, barb over bar (relation).
-'\Leftrightarrow'
+‘\Leftrightarrow’
⇔ Bi-implication; double-line double-headed arrow (relation).
- Similar: single-line double headed arrow '\leftrightarrow'.
+ Similar: single-line double headed arrow ‘\leftrightarrow’.
-'\leftrightarrow'
+‘\leftrightarrow’
↔ Single-line double-headed arrow (relation). Similar: double-line
- double headed arrow '\Leftrightarrow'.
+ double headed arrow ‘\Leftrightarrow’.
-'\leq'
- ≤ Less than or equal to (relation). This is a synonym for '\le'.
+‘\leq’
+ ≤ Less than or equal to (relation). This is a synonym for ‘\le’.
-'\lfloor'
- ⌊ Left floor bracket (opening). Matches: '\floor'.
+‘\lfloor’
+ ⌊ Left floor bracket (opening). Matches: ‘\floor’.
-'\lhd'
+‘\lhd’
◁ Arrowhead, that is, triangle, pointing left (binary). For the
- normal subgroup symbol you should load 'amssymb' and
- use '\vartriangleleft' (which is a relation and so gives better
+ normal subgroup symbol you should load ‘amssymb’ and
+ use ‘\vartriangleleft’ (which is a relation and so gives better
spacing).
-'\ll'
- ≪ Much less than (relation). Similar: much greater than '\gg'.
+‘\ll’
+ ≪ Much less than (relation). Similar: much greater than ‘\gg’.
-'\lnot'
- ¬ Logical negation (ordinary). Synonym: '\neg'.
+‘\lnot’
+ ¬ Logical negation (ordinary). Synonym: ‘\neg’.
-'\longleftarrow'
+‘\longleftarrow’
⟵ Long single-line left arrow (relation). Similar: long
- double-line left arrow '\Longleftarrow'.
+ double-line left arrow ‘\Longleftarrow’.
-'\longleftrightarrow'
+‘\longleftrightarrow’
⟷ Long single-line double-headed arrow (relation). Similar: long
- double-line double-headed arrow '\Longleftrightarrow'.
+ double-line double-headed arrow ‘\Longleftrightarrow’.
-'\longmapsto'
+‘\longmapsto’
⟼ Long single-line left arrow starting with vertical bar
- (relation). Similar: shorter version '\mapsto'.
+ (relation). Similar: shorter version ‘\mapsto’.
-'\longrightarrow'
+‘\longrightarrow’
⟶ Long single-line right arrow (relation). Similar: long
- double-line right arrow '\Longrightarrow'.
+ double-line right arrow ‘\Longrightarrow’.
-'\lor'
- ∨ Logical or (binary). Synonym: '\vee'. See also
- logical and '\land'.
+‘\lor’
+ ∨ Logical or (binary). Synonym: ‘\vee’. See also
+ logical and ‘\land’.
-'\mapsto'
+‘\mapsto’
↦ Single-line left arrow starting with vertical bar (relation).
- Similar: longer version '\longmapsto'.
+ Similar: longer version ‘\longmapsto’.
-'\mho'
+‘\mho’
℧ Conductance, half-circle rotated capital omega (ordinary).
-'\mid'
- ∣ Single-line vertical bar (relation). A typical use of '\mid' is
- for a set '\{\, x \mid x\geq 5 \,\}'.
+‘\mid’
+ ∣ Single-line vertical bar (relation). A typical use of ‘\mid’ is
+ for a set ‘\{\, x \mid x\geq 5 \,\}’.
- Similar: '\vert' and '|' produce the same single-line vertical bar
+ Similar: ‘\vert’ and ‘|’ produce the same single-line vertical bar
symbol but without any spacing (they fall in class ordinary) and
you should not use them as relations but instead only as ordinals,
i.e., footnote symbols. For absolute value, see the entry
- for '\vert' and for norm see the entry for '\Vert'.
+ for ‘\vert’ and for norm see the entry for ‘\Vert’.
-'\models'
+‘\models’
⊨ Entails, or satisfies; double turnstile, short double dash
- (relation). Similar: long double dash '\vDash'.
+ (relation). Similar: long double dash ‘\vDash’.
-'\mp'
+‘\mp’
∓ Minus or plus (relation).
-'\mu'
+‘\mu’
μ Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
-'\nabla'
- ∇ Hamilton's del, or differential, operator (ordinary).
+‘\nabla’
+ ∇ Hamilton’s del, or differential, operator (ordinary).
-'\natural'
+‘\natural’
♮ Musical natural notation (ordinary).
-'\ne'
- ≠ Not equal (relation). Synonym: '\neq'.
+‘\ne’
+ ≠ Not equal (relation). Synonym: ‘\neq’.
-'\nearrow'
+‘\nearrow’
↗ North-east arrow (relation).
-'\neg'
- ¬ Logical negation (ordinary). Synonym: '\lnot'. Sometimes
- instead used for negation: '\sim'.
+‘\neg’
+ ¬ Logical negation (ordinary). Synonym: ‘\lnot’. Sometimes
+ instead used for negation: ‘\sim’.
-'\neq'
- ≠ Not equal (relation). Synonym: '\ne'.
+‘\neq’
+ ≠ Not equal (relation). Synonym: ‘\ne’.
-'\ni'
+‘\ni’
∋ Reflected membership epsilon; has the member (relation).
- Synonym: '\owns'. Similar: is a member of '\in'.
+ Synonym: ‘\owns’. Similar: is a member of ‘\in’.
-'\not'
+‘\not’
Long solidus, or slash, used to overstrike a following operator
(relation).
- Many negated operators are available that don't require '\not',
- particularly with the 'amssymb' package. For example, '\notin' is
- typographically preferable to '\not\in'.
+ Many negated operators are available that don’t require ‘\not’,
+ particularly with the ‘amssymb’ package. For example, ‘\notin’ is
+ typographically preferable to ‘\not\in’.
-'\notin'
+‘\notin’
∉ Not an element of (relation). Similar: not subset
- of '\nsubseteq'.
+ of ‘\nsubseteq’.
-'\nu'
+‘\nu’
ν Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
-'\nwarrow'
+‘\nwarrow’
↖ North-west arrow (relation).
-'\odot'
+‘\odot’
⊙ Dot inside a circle (binary). Similar: variable-sized
- operator '\bigodot'.
+ operator ‘\bigodot’.
-'\oint'
+‘\oint’
∮ Contour integral, integral with circle in the middle (operator).
-'\Omega'
+‘\Omega’
Ω uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
-'\omega'
+‘\omega’
ω Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
-'\ominus'
+‘\ominus’
⊖ Minus sign, or dash, inside a circle (binary).
-'\oplus'
+‘\oplus’
⊕ Plus sign inside a circle (binary). Similar: variable-sized
- operator '\bigoplus'.
+ operator ‘\bigoplus’.
-'\oslash'
+‘\oslash’
⊘ Solidus, or slash, inside a circle (binary).
-'\otimes'
+‘\otimes’
⊗ Times sign, or cross, inside a circle (binary). Similar:
- variable-sized operator '\bigotimes'.
+ variable-sized operator ‘\bigotimes’.
-'\owns'
+‘\owns’
∋ Reflected membership epsilon; has the member (relation).
- Synonym: '\ni'. Similar: is a member of '\in'.
+ Synonym: ‘\ni’. Similar: is a member of ‘\in’.
-'\parallel'
- ∥ Parallel (relation). Synonym: '\|'.
+‘\parallel’
+ ∥ Parallel (relation). Synonym: ‘\|’.
-'\partial'
+‘\partial’
∂ Partial differential (ordinary).
-'\perp'
- ⟂ Perpendicular (relation). Similar: '\bot' uses the same glyph
+‘\perp’
+ ⟂ Perpendicular (relation). Similar: ‘\bot’ uses the same glyph
but the spacing is different because it is in the class ordinary.
-'\Phi'
+‘\Phi’
Φ Uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
-'\phi'
+‘\phi’
ϕ Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is
- '\varphi' φ.
+ ‘\varphi’ φ.
-'\Pi'
+‘\Pi’
Π uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
-'\pi'
+‘\pi’
π Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is
- '\varpi' ϖ.
+ ‘\varpi’ ϖ.
-'\pm'
+‘\pm’
± Plus or minus (binary).
-'\prec'
- ≺ Precedes (relation). Similar: less than '<'.
+‘\prec’
+ ≺ Precedes (relation). Similar: less than ‘<’.
-'\preceq'
+‘\preceq’
⪯ Precedes or equals (relation). Similar: less than or
- equals '\leq'.
+ equals ‘\leq’.
-'\prime'
+‘\prime’
′ Prime, or minute in a time expression (ordinary). Typically used
- as a superscript: '$f^\prime$'; '$f^\prime$' and '$f'$' produce the
- same result. An advantage of the second is that '$f'''$' produces
+ as a superscript: ‘$f^\prime$’; ‘$f^\prime$’ and ‘$f'$’ produce the
+ same result. An advantage of the second is that ‘$f'''$’ produces
the desired symbol, that is, the same result as
- '$f^{\prime\prime\prime}$', but uses rather less typing. You can
- only use '\prime' in math mode. Using the right single quote '''
+ ‘$f^{\prime\prime\prime}$’, but uses rather less typing. You can
+ only use ‘\prime’ in math mode. Using the right single quote ‘'’
in text mode produces a different character (apostrophe).
-'\prod'
+‘\prod’
∏ Product (operator).
-'\propto'
+‘\propto’
∝ Is proportional to (relation)
-'\Psi'
+‘\Psi’
Ψ uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
-'\psi'
+‘\psi’
ψ Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
-'\rangle'
+‘\rangle’
⟩ Right angle, or sequence, bracket (closing). Similar: greater
- than '>'. Matches:'\langle'.
+ than ‘>’. Matches:‘\langle’.
-'\rbrace'
- } Right curly brace (closing). Synonym: '\}'. Matches '\lbrace'.
+‘\rbrace’
+ } Right curly brace (closing). Synonym: ‘\}’. Matches ‘\lbrace’.
-'\rbrack'
- ] Right square bracket (closing). Synonym: ']'.
- Matches '\lbrack'.
+‘\rbrack’
+ ] Right square bracket (closing). Synonym: ‘]’.
+ Matches ‘\lbrack’.
-'\rceil'
- ⌉ Right ceiling bracket (closing). Matches '\lceil'.
+‘\rceil’
+ ⌉ Right ceiling bracket (closing). Matches ‘\lceil’.
-'\Re'
+‘\Re’
ℜ Real part, real numbers, cursive capital R (ordinary). Related:
- double-line, or blackboard bold, R '\mathbb{R}'; to access this,
- load the 'amsfonts' package.
+ double-line, or blackboard bold, R ‘\mathbb{R}’; to access this,
+ load the ‘amsfonts’ package.
-'\restriction'
+‘\restriction’
↾, Restriction of a function (relation). Synonym:
- '\upharpoonright'. Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need
- to load the 'amssymb' package.
+ ‘\upharpoonright’. Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need
+ to load the ‘amssymb’ package.
-'\revemptyset'
- ⦰, Reversed empty set symbol (ordinary). Related: '\varnothing'.
- Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the 'stix'
+‘\revemptyset’
+ ⦰, Reversed empty set symbol (ordinary). Related: ‘\varnothing’.
+ Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the ‘stix’
package.
-'\rfloor'
+‘\rfloor’
⌋ Right floor bracket, a right square bracket with the top cut off
- (closing). Matches '\lfloor'.
+ (closing). Matches ‘\lfloor’.
-'\rhd'
+‘\rhd’
◁ Arrowhead, that is, triangle, pointing right (binary). For the
- normal subgroup symbol you should instead load 'amssymb' and
- use '\vartriangleright' (which is a relation and so gives better
+ normal subgroup symbol you should instead load ‘amssymb’ and
+ use ‘\vartriangleright’ (which is a relation and so gives better
spacing).
-'\rho'
+‘\rho’
ρ Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is
- '\varrho' ϱ.
+ ‘\varrho’ ϱ.
-'\Rightarrow'
+‘\Rightarrow’
⇒ Implies, right-pointing double line arrow (relation). Similar:
- right single-line arrow '\rightarrow'.
+ right single-line arrow ‘\rightarrow’.
-'\rightarrow'
- → Right-pointing single line arrow (relation). Synonym: '\to'.
- Similar: right double line arrow '\Rightarrow'.
+‘\rightarrow’
+ → Right-pointing single line arrow (relation). Synonym: ‘\to’.
+ Similar: right double line arrow ‘\Rightarrow’.
-'\rightharpoondown'
+‘\rightharpoondown’
⇁ Right-pointing harpoon with barb below the line (relation).
-'\rightharpoonup'
+‘\rightharpoonup’
⇀ Right-pointing harpoon with barb above the line (relation).
-'\rightleftharpoons'
+‘\rightleftharpoons’
⇌ Right harpoon up above left harpoon down (relation).
-'\searrow'
+‘\searrow’
↘ Arrow pointing southeast (relation).
-'\setminus'
+‘\setminus’
⧵ Set difference, reverse solidus or reverse slash, like \
- (binary). Similar: backslash '\backslash' and also
- '\textbackslash' outside of math mode.
+ (binary). Similar: backslash ‘\backslash’ and also
+ ‘\textbackslash’ outside of math mode.
-'\sharp'
+‘\sharp’
♯ Musical sharp (ordinary).
-'\Sigma'
+‘\Sigma’
Σ uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
-'\sigma'
+‘\sigma’
σ Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is
- '\varsigma' ς.
+ ‘\varsigma’ ς.
-'\sim'
+‘\sim’
∼ Similar, in a relation (relation).
-'\simeq'
+‘\simeq’
≃ Similar or equal to, in a relation (relation).
-'\smallint'
+‘\smallint’
∫ Integral sign that does not change to a larger size in a display
(operator).
-'\smile'
+‘\smile’
⌣ Upward curving arc, smile (ordinary).
-'\spadesuit'
+‘\spadesuit’
♠ Spade card suit (ordinary).
-'\sqcap'
+‘\sqcap’
⊓ Square intersection symbol (binary). Similar:
- intersection 'cap'.
+ intersection ‘cap’.
-'\sqcup'
- ⊔ Square union symbol (binary). Similar: union 'cup'. Related:
- variable-sized operator '\bigsqcup'.
+‘\sqcup’
+ ⊔ Square union symbol (binary). Similar: union ‘cup’. Related:
+ variable-sized operator ‘\bigsqcup’.
-'\sqsubset'
- ⊏, Square subset symbol (relation). Similar: subset '\subset'.
+‘\sqsubset’
+ ⊏, Square subset symbol (relation). Similar: subset ‘\subset’.
Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the
- 'amssymb' package.
+ ‘amssymb’ package.
-'\sqsubseteq'
+‘\sqsubseteq’
⊑ Square subset or equal symbol (binary). Similar: subset or equal
- to '\subseteq'.
+ to ‘\subseteq’.
-'\sqsupset'
- ⊐, Square superset symbol (relation). Similar: superset '\supset'.
+‘\sqsupset’
+ ⊐, Square superset symbol (relation). Similar: superset ‘\supset’.
Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the
- 'amssymb' package.
+ ‘amssymb’ package.
-'\sqsupseteq'
+‘\sqsupseteq’
⊒ Square superset or equal symbol (binary). Similar: superset or
- equal '\supseteq'.
+ equal ‘\supseteq’.
-'\star'
+‘\star’
⋆ Five-pointed star, sometimes used as a general binary operation
but sometimes reserved for cross-correlation (binary). Similar:
- the synonyms asterisk '*' and '\ast', which are six-pointed, and
+ the synonyms asterisk ‘*’ and ‘\ast’, which are six-pointed, and
more often appear as a superscript or subscript, as with the Kleene
star.
-'\subset'
+‘\subset’
⊂ Subset (occasionally, is implied by) (relation).
-'\subseteq'
+‘\subseteq’
⊆ Subset or equal to (relation).
-'\succ'
- ≻ Comes after, succeeds (relation). Similar: is less than '>'.
+‘\succ’
+ ≻ Comes after, succeeds (relation). Similar: is less than ‘>’.
-'\succeq'
+‘\succeq’
⪰ Succeeds or is equal to (relation). Similar: less than or equal
- to '\leq'.
+ to ‘\leq’.
-'\sum'
- ∑ Summation (operator). Similar: Greek capital sigma '\Sigma'.
+‘\sum’
+ ∑ Summation (operator). Similar: Greek capital sigma ‘\Sigma’.
-'\supset'
+‘\supset’
⊃ Superset (relation).
-'\supseteq'
+‘\supseteq’
⊇ Superset or equal to (relation).
-'\surd'
- √ Radical symbol (ordinary). The LaTeX command '\sqrt{...}'
+‘\surd’
+ √ Radical symbol (ordinary). The LaTeX command ‘\sqrt{...}’
typesets the square root of the argument, with a bar that extends
to cover the argument.
-'\swarrow'
+‘\swarrow’
↙ Southwest-pointing arrow (relation).
-'\tau'
+‘\tau’
τ Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
-'\theta'
+‘\theta’
θ Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is
- '\vartheta' ϑ.
+ ‘\vartheta’ ϑ.
-'\times'
- × Primary school multiplication sign (binary). See also '\cdot'.
+‘\times’
+ × Primary school multiplication sign (binary). See also ‘\cdot’.
-'\to'
+‘\to’
→ Right-pointing single line arrow (relation).
- Synonym: '\rightarrow'.
+ Synonym: ‘\rightarrow’.
-'\top'
+‘\top’
⊤ Top, greatest element of a partially ordered set (ordinary). See
- also '\bot'.
+ also ‘\bot’.
-'\triangle'
+‘\triangle’
△ Triangle (ordinary).
-'\triangleleft'
- ◁ Not-filled triangle pointing left (binary). Similar: '\lhd'.
- For the normal subgroup symbol you should load 'amssymb' and
- use '\vartriangleleft' (which is a relation and so gives better
+‘\triangleleft’
+ ◁ Not-filled triangle pointing left (binary). Similar: ‘\lhd’.
+ For the normal subgroup symbol you should load ‘amssymb’ and
+ use ‘\vartriangleleft’ (which is a relation and so gives better
spacing).
-'\triangleright'
+‘\triangleright’
▷ Not-filled triangle pointing right (binary). For the normal
- subgroup symbol you should instead load 'amssymb' and
- use '\vartriangleright' (which is a relation and so gives better
+ subgroup symbol you should instead load ‘amssymb’ and
+ use ‘\vartriangleright’ (which is a relation and so gives better
spacing).
-'\unlhd'
+‘\unlhd’
⊴ Left-pointing not-filled underlined arrowhead, that is, triangle,
with a line under (binary). For the normal subgroup symbol load
- 'amssymb' and use '\vartrianglelefteq' (which is a relation and so
+ ‘amssymb’ and use ‘\vartrianglelefteq’ (which is a relation and so
gives better spacing).
-'\unrhd'
+‘\unrhd’
⊵ Right-pointing not-filled underlined arrowhead, that is,
triangle, with a line under (binary). For the normal subgroup
- symbol load 'amssymb' and use '\vartrianglerighteq' (which is a
+ symbol load ‘amssymb’ and use ‘\vartrianglerighteq’ (which is a
relation and so gives better spacing).
-'\Uparrow'
+‘\Uparrow’
⇑ Double-line upward-pointing arrow (relation). Similar:
- single-line up-pointing arrow '\uparrow'.
+ single-line up-pointing arrow ‘\uparrow’.
-'\uparrow'
+‘\uparrow’
↑ Single-line upward-pointing arrow, diverges (relation). Similar:
- double-line up-pointing arrow '\Uparrow'.
+ double-line up-pointing arrow ‘\Uparrow’.
-'\Updownarrow'
+‘\Updownarrow’
⇕ Double-line upward-and-downward-pointing arrow (relation).
Similar: single-line upward-and-downward-pointing
- arrow '\updownarrow'.
+ arrow ‘\updownarrow’.
-'\updownarrow'
+‘\updownarrow’
↕ Single-line upward-and-downward-pointing arrow (relation).
Similar: double-line upward-and-downward-pointing
- arrow '\Updownarrow'.
+ arrow ‘\Updownarrow’.
-'\upharpoonright'
+‘\upharpoonright’
↾, Up harpoon, with barb on right side (relation).
- Synonym: '\restriction'. Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you
- need to load the 'amssymb' package.
+ Synonym: ‘\restriction’. Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you
+ need to load the ‘amssymb’ package.
-'\uplus'
+‘\uplus’
⊎ Multiset union, a union symbol with a plus symbol in the middle
- (binary). Similar: union '\cup'. Related: variable-sized
- operator '\biguplus'.
+ (binary). Similar: union ‘\cup’. Related: variable-sized
+ operator ‘\biguplus’.
-'\Upsilon'
+‘\Upsilon’
Υ uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
-'\upsilon'
+‘\upsilon’
υ Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
-'\varepsilon'
+‘\varepsilon’
ε Small letter script epsilon (ordinary). This is more widely used
in mathematics than the non-variant lunate epsilon form
- '\epsilon' ϵ. Related: set membership '\in'.
+ ‘\epsilon’ ϵ. Related: set membership ‘\in’.
-'\vanothing'
- ∅, Empty set symbol. Similar: '\emptyset'. Related:
- '\revemptyset'. Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to
- load the 'amssymb' package.
+‘\vanothing’
+ ∅, Empty set symbol. Similar: ‘\emptyset’. Related:
+ ‘\revemptyset’. Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to
+ load the ‘amssymb’ package.
-'\varphi'
+‘\varphi’
φ Variant on the lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The
- non-variant form is '\phi' ϕ.
+ non-variant form is ‘\phi’ ϕ.
-'\varpi'
+‘\varpi’
ϖ Variant on the lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The
- non-variant form is '\pi' π.
+ non-variant form is ‘\pi’ π.
-'\varrho'
+‘\varrho’
ϱ Variant on the lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The
- non-variant form is '\rho' ρ.
+ non-variant form is ‘\rho’ ρ.
-'\varsigma'
+‘\varsigma’
ς Variant on the lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The
- non-variant form is '\sigma' σ.
+ non-variant form is ‘\sigma’ σ.
-'\vartheta'
+‘\vartheta’
ϑ Variant on the lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The
- non-variant form is '\theta' θ.
+ non-variant form is ‘\theta’ θ.
-'\vdash'
+‘\vdash’
⊢ Provable; turnstile, vertical and a dash (relation). Similar:
- turnstile rotated a half-circle '\dashv'.
+ turnstile rotated a half-circle ‘\dashv’.
-'\vee'
+‘\vee’
∨ Logical or; a downwards v shape (binary). Related: logical
- and '\wedge'. Similar: variable-sized operator '\bigvee'.
+ and ‘\wedge’. Similar: variable-sized operator ‘\bigvee’.
-'\Vert'
+‘\Vert’
‖ Vertical double bar (ordinary). *Note Delimiters::, for how to
- use the 'mathtools' package to create flexibly-sized norm symbols.
+ use the ‘mathtools’ package to create flexibly-sized norm symbols.
-'\vert'
- | Single line vertical bar (ordinary). For "such that", as in the
- definition of a set, use '\mid' because it is a relation. *Note
- Delimiters::, for how to use the 'mathtools' package to create
+‘\vert’
+ | Single line vertical bar (ordinary). For “such that”, as in the
+ definition of a set, use ‘\mid’ because it is a relation. *Note
+ Delimiters::, for how to use the ‘mathtools’ package to create
flexibly-sized absolute-value symbols.
-'\wedge'
- ∧ Logical and (binary). Synonym: '\land'. See also logical or
- '\vee'. Similar: variable-sized operator '\bigwedge'.
+‘\wedge’
+ ∧ Logical and (binary). Synonym: ‘\land’. See also logical or
+ ‘\vee’. Similar: variable-sized operator ‘\bigwedge’.
-'\wp'
+‘\wp’
℘ Weierstrass p (ordinary).
-'\wr'
+‘\wr’
≀ Wreath product (binary).
-'\Xi'
+‘\Xi’
Ξ uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
-'\xi'
+‘\xi’
ξ Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
-'\zeta'
+‘\zeta’
ζ Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
The following symbols are most often used in plain text but LaTeX
provides versions to use in mathematical text.
-'\mathdollar'
+‘\mathdollar’
Dollar sign in math mode: $.
-'\mathparagraph'
+‘\mathparagraph’
Paragraph sign (pilcrow) in math mode, ¶.
-'\mathsection'
- Section sign in math mode §.
+‘\mathsection’
+ Section sign in math mode: §.
-'\mathsterling'
+‘\mathsterling’
Sterling sign in math mode: £.
-'\mathunderscore'
+‘\mathunderscore’
Underscore in math mode: _.
* Menu:
@@ -10488,48 +10514,48 @@
16.2.1 Arrows
-------------
-These are the arrows that come with standard LaTeX. The 'latexsym' and
-'amsfonts' packages contain many more.
+These are the arrows that come with standard LaTeX. The ‘latexsym’ and
+‘amsfonts’ packages contain many more.
Symbol Command
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-⇓ '\Downarrow'
-↓ '\downarrow'
-↩ '\hookleftarrow'
-↪ '\hookrightarrow'
-← '\leftarrow'
-⇐ '\Leftarrow'
-⇔ '\Leftrightarrow'
-↔ '\leftrightarrow'
-⟵ '\longleftarrow'
-⟸ '\Longleftarrow'
-⟷ '\longleftrightarrow'
-⟺ '\Longleftrightarrow'
-⟼ '\longmapsto'
-⟹ '\Longrightarrow'
-⟶ '\longrightarrow'
-↦ '\mapsto'
-↗ '\nearrow'
-↖ '\nwarrow'
-⇒ '\Rightarrow'
-→ '\rightarrow', or '\to'
-↘ '\searrow'
-↙ '\swarrow'
-↑ '\uparrow'
-⇑ '\Uparrow'
-↕ '\updownarrow'
-⇕ '\Updownarrow'
+⇓ ‘\Downarrow’
+↓ ‘\downarrow’
+↩ ‘\hookleftarrow’
+↪ ‘\hookrightarrow’
+← ‘\leftarrow’
+⇐ ‘\Leftarrow’
+⇔ ‘\Leftrightarrow’
+↔ ‘\leftrightarrow’
+⟵ ‘\longleftarrow’
+⟸ ‘\Longleftarrow’
+⟷ ‘\longleftrightarrow’
+⟺ ‘\Longleftrightarrow’
+⟼ ‘\longmapsto’
+⟹ ‘\Longrightarrow’
+⟶ ‘\longrightarrow’
+↦ ‘\mapsto’
+↗ ‘\nearrow’
+↖ ‘\nwarrow’
+⇒ ‘\Rightarrow’
+→ ‘\rightarrow’, or ‘\to’
+↘ ‘\searrow’
+↙ ‘\swarrow’
+↑ ‘\uparrow’
+⇑ ‘\Uparrow’
+↕ ‘\updownarrow’
+⇕ ‘\Updownarrow’
- An example of the difference between '\to' and '\mapsto' is: '\(
-f\colon D\to C \) given by \( n\mapsto n^2 \)'.
+ An example of the difference between ‘\to’ and ‘\mapsto’ is: ‘\(
+f\colon D\to C \) given by \( n\mapsto n^2 \)’.
For commutative diagrams there are a number of packages, including
-'tikz-cd' and 'amscd'.
+‘tikz-cd’ and ‘amscd’.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \boldmath & \unboldmath, Next: Blackboard bold, Prev: Arrows, Up: Math symbols
-16.2.2 '\boldmath' & '\unboldmath'
+16.2.2 ‘\boldmath’ & ‘\unboldmath’
----------------------------------
Synopsis (used in paragraph mode or LR mode):
@@ -10542,33 +10568,75 @@
Declarations to change the letters and symbols in MATH to be in a
bold font, or to countermand that and bring back the regular (non-bold)
-default. They must be used when not in math mode or display math mode
-(*note Modes::). Both commands are fragile (*note \protect::).
+default, respectively. They must be used when _not_ in math mode or
+display math mode (*note Modes::). Both commands are fragile (*note
+\protect::).
- In this example each '\boldmath' command takes place inside an
-'\mbox',
+ In this example each ‘\boldmath’ command takes place inside an
+‘\mbox’,
we have $\mbox{\boldmath \( v \)} = 5\cdot\mbox{\boldmath \( u \)$}$
-which means '\boldmath' is only called in a text mode, here LR mode, and
-explains why LaTeX must switch to math mode to set 'v' and 'u'.
+which means ‘\boldmath’ is only called in a text mode, here LR mode, and
+explains why we must switch LaTeX into math mode to set ‘v’ and ‘u’.
- If you use either command inside math mode, as with 'Trouble: \(
-\boldmath x \)', then you get something like 'LaTeX Font Warning:
-Command \boldmath invalid in math mode on input line 11' and 'LaTeX Font
-Warning: Command \mathversion invalid in math mode on input line 11'.
+ If you use either command inside math mode, as with ‘Trouble: \(
+\boldmath x \)’, then you get something like ‘LaTeX Font Warning:
+Command \boldmath invalid in math mode’ and ‘LaTeX Font Warning: Command
+\mathversion invalid in math mode’.
- There are many issues with '\boldmath'. New documents should use the
-'bm' package provided by the LaTeX Project team. A complete description
-is outside the scope of this document (see the full documentation on
-CTAN) but even this small example
+* Menu:
+* bm:: The ‘bm’ package for individual bold symbols.
+* OpenType bold math:: ‘FakeBold’ or ‘\symbf’.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: bm, Next: OpenType bold math, Up: \boldmath & \unboldmath
+
+16.2.2.1 ‘bm’: Individual bold math symbols
+...........................................
+
+Specifying ‘\boldmath’ is the best method for typesetting a whole math
+expression in bold. But to typeset individual symbols within an
+expression in bold, the ‘bm’ package provided by the LaTeX Project team
+is better. Its usage is outside the scope of this document (see its
+documentation at <https://ctan.org/pkg/bm> or in your installation) but
+the spacing in the output of this small example will show that it is an
+improvement over ‘\boldmath’ within an expression:
+
\usepackage{bm} % in preamble
...
we have $\bm{v} = 5\cdot\bm{u}$
-shows that it is an improvement over '\boldmath'.
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: OpenType bold math, Prev: bm, Up: \boldmath & \unboldmath
+16.2.2.2 OpenType bold math
+...........................
+
+Unfortunately, when using the Unicode engines (XeLaTeX, LuaLaTeX),
+neither ‘\boldmath’ nor ‘bm’ usually work well, because the OpenType
+math fonts normally used with those engines rarely come with a bold
+companion, and both ‘\boldmath’ and ‘bm’ require this. (The
+implementation of ‘bm’ relies on ‘\boldmath’, so the requirements are
+the same.) If you do have a bold math font, though, then ‘\boldmath’
+and ‘bm’ work fine.
+
+ If no such font is available, one alternative is to construct fake
+bold fonts with the ‘fontspec’ package’s ‘FakeBold=1’ parameter (see its
+documentation, <https://ctan.org/pkg/fontspec>). This may be acceptable
+for drafting or informal distribution, but the results are far from a
+true bold font.
+
+ Another alternative to handling bold for OpenType math fonts is to
+use the ‘\symbf’ (bold), ‘\symbfit’ (bold italic), and related commands
+from the ‘unicode-math’ package. These do not change the current font,
+but rather change the (Unicode) “alphabet” used, which in practice is
+more widely supported than a separate bold font. Many variations are
+possible, and so there are subtleties to getting the desired output. As
+usual, see the package documentation
+(<https://ctan.org/pkg/unicode-math>).
+
File: latex2e.info, Node: Blackboard bold, Next: Calligraphic, Prev: \boldmath & \unboldmath, Up: Math symbols
@@ -10589,11 +10657,12 @@
\( \forall n \in \mathbb{N}, n^2 \geq 0 \)
-the '\mathbb{N}' gives blackboard bold symbol ℕ, representing the
+the ‘\mathbb{N}’ gives blackboard bold symbol ℕ, representing the
natural numbers.
- If you use other than an uppercase letter then you do not get an
-error but you get strange results, including unexpected characters.
+ If the argument contains something other than an uppercase letter,
+you do not get an error but you do get strange results, including
+unexpected characters.
There are packages that give access to symbols other than just the
capital letters; look on CTAN.
@@ -10616,7 +10685,7 @@
If you use something other than an uppercase letter then you do not
get an error but you also do not get math calligraphic output. For
-instance, '\mathcal{g}' outputs a close curly brace symbol.
+instance, ‘\mathcal{g}’ outputs a close curly brace symbol.
File: latex2e.info, Node: Delimiters, Next: Dots, Prev: Calligraphic, Up: Math symbols
@@ -10630,45 +10699,45 @@
(z-z_0)^2 = (x-x_0)^2 + (y-y_0)^2
-The delimiters do not need to match, so you can enter '\( [0,1) \)'.
+The delimiters do not need to match, so you can enter ‘\( [0,1) \)’.
Here are the common delimiters:
DelimiterCommand Name
------------------------------------------------------
-( '(' Left parenthesis
-) ')' Right parenthesis
-\} '{' or Left brace
- '\lbrace'
-\{ '}' or Right brace
- '\rbrace'
-[ '[' or Left bracket
- '\lbrack'
-] ']' or Right bracket
- '\rbrack'
-⌊ '\lfloor' Left floor bracket
-⌋ '\rfloor' Right floor bracket
-⌈ '\lceil' Left ceiling bracket
-⌉ '\rceil' Right ceiling bracket
-⟨ '\langle' Left angle bracket
-⟩ '\rangle' Right angle bracket
-/ '/' Slash, or forward slash
-\ '\backslash' Reverse slash, or backslash
-| '|' or Vertical bar
- '\vert'
-‖ '\|' or Double vertical bar
- '\Vert'
+( ‘(’ Left parenthesis
+) ‘)’ Right parenthesis
+\} ‘{’ or Left brace
+ ‘\lbrace’
+\{ ‘}’ or Right brace
+ ‘\rbrace’
+[ ‘[’ or Left bracket
+ ‘\lbrack’
+] ‘]’ or Right bracket
+ ‘\rbrack’
+⌊ ‘\lfloor’ Left floor bracket
+⌋ ‘\rfloor’ Right floor bracket
+⌈ ‘\lceil’ Left ceiling bracket
+⌉ ‘\rceil’ Right ceiling bracket
+⟨ ‘\langle’ Left angle bracket
+⟩ ‘\rangle’ Right angle bracket
+/ ‘/’ Slash, or forward slash
+\ ‘\backslash’ Reverse slash, or backslash
+| ‘|’ or Vertical bar
+ ‘\vert’
+‖ ‘\|’ or Double vertical bar
+ ‘\Vert’
- The 'mathtools' package allows you to create commands for paired
+ The ‘mathtools’ package allows you to create commands for paired
delimiters. For instance, if you put
-'\DeclarePairedDelimiter\abs{\lvert}{\rvert}' in your preamble then you
+‘\DeclarePairedDelimiter\abs{\lvert}{\rvert}’ in your preamble then you
get two commands for single-line vertical bars (they only work in math
-mode). The starred form, such as '\abs*{\frac{22}{7}}', has the height
+mode). The starred form, such as ‘\abs*{\frac{22}{7}}’, has the height
of the vertical bars match the height of the argument. The unstarred
-form, such as '\abs{\frac{22}{7}}', has the bars fixed at a default
-height. This form accepts an optional argument, as in '\abs[SIZE
-COMMAND]{\frac{22}{7}}', where the height of the bars is given in SIZE
-COMMAND, such as '\Bigg'. Using instead '\lVert' and '\rVert' as the
+form, such as ‘\abs{\frac{22}{7}}’, has the bars fixed at a default
+height. This form accepts an optional argument, as in ‘\abs[SIZE
+COMMAND]{\frac{22}{7}}’, where the height of the bars is given in SIZE
+COMMAND, such as ‘\Bigg’. Using instead ‘\lVert’ and ‘\rVert’ as the
symbols will give you a norm symbol with the same behavior.
* Menu:
@@ -10679,7 +10748,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \left & \right, Next: \bigl & \bigr etc., Up: Delimiters
-16.2.5.1 '\left' & '\right'
+16.2.5.1 ‘\left’ & ‘\right’
...........................
Synopsis:
@@ -10702,13 +10771,13 @@
*Note Delimiters::, for a list of the common delimiters.
- Every '\left' must have a matching '\right'. In the above example,
-leaving out the '\left(' gets the error message 'Extra \right'. Leaving
-out the '\right)' gets 'You can't use `\eqno' in math mode'.
+ Every ‘\left’ must have a matching ‘\right’. In the above example,
+leaving out the ‘\left(’ gets the error message ‘Extra \right’. Leaving
+out the ‘\right)’ gets ‘You can't use `\eqno' in math mode’.
However, DELIMITER1 and DELIMITER2 need not match. A common case is
-that you want an unmatched brace, as below. Use a period, '.', as a
-null delimiter.
+that you want an unmatched brace, as below. Use a period, ‘.’, as a
+“null delimiter”.
\begin{equation}
f(n)=\left\{\begin{array}{ll}
@@ -10718,12 +10787,12 @@
\end{equation}
Note that to get a curly brace as a delimiter you must prefix it with a
-backslash, '\{' (*note Reserved characters::). (The packages 'amsmath'
-and 'mathtools' allow you to get the above construct through in a
-'cases' environment.)
+backslash, ‘\{’ (*note Reserved characters::). (The packages ‘amsmath’
+and ‘mathtools’ allow you to get the above construct through in a
+‘cases’ environment.)
- The '\left ... \right' pair make a group. One consequence is that
-the formula enclosed in the '\left ... \right' pair cannot have line
+ The ‘\left ... \right’ pair make a group. One consequence is that
+the formula enclosed in the ‘\left ... \right’ pair cannot have line
breaks in the output. This includes both manual line breaks and
LaTeX-generated automatic ones. In this example, LaTeX breaks the
equation to make the formula fit the margins.
@@ -10731,17 +10800,17 @@
Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet
\( (a+b+c+d+e+f+g+h+i+j+k+l+m+n+o+p+q+r+s+t+u+v+w+x+y+z) \)
-But with '\left' and '\right'
+But with ‘\left’ and ‘\right’
Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet
\( \left(a+b+c+d+e+f+g+h+i+j+k+l+m+n+o+p+q+r+s+t+u+v+w+x+y+z\right) \)
-LaTeX won't break the line, causing the formula to extend into the
+LaTeX won’t break the line, causing the formula to extend into the
margin.
- Because '\left ... \right' make a group, all the usual grouping rules
-hold. Here, the value of '\testlength' set inside the equation will be
-forgotten, and the output is '1.2pt'.
+ Because ‘\left ... \right’ make a group, all the usual grouping rules
+hold. Here, the value of ‘\testlength’ set inside the equation will be
+forgotten, and the output is ‘1.2pt’.
\newlength{\testlength} \setlength{\testlength}{1.2pt}
\begin{equation}
@@ -10749,11 +10818,11 @@
\the\testlength
\end{equation}
- The '\left ... \right' pair affect the horizontal spacing of the
-enclosed formula, in two ways. The first is that in '\( \sin(x) =
-\sin\left(x\right) \)' the one after the equals sign has more space
-around the 'x'. That's because '\left( ... \right)' inserts an inner
-node while '( ... )' inserts an opening node. The second way that the
+ The ‘\left ... \right’ pair affect the horizontal spacing of the
+enclosed formula, in two ways. The first is that in ‘\( \sin(x) =
+\sin\left(x\right) \)’ the one after the equals sign has more space
+around the ‘x’. That’s because ‘\left( ... \right)’ inserts an inner
+node while ‘( ... )’ inserts an opening node. The second way that the
pair affect the horizontal spacing is that because they form a group,
the enclosed subformula will be typeset at its natural width, with no
stretching or shrinking to make the line fit better.
@@ -10773,8 +10842,8 @@
\left( \rule{1pt}{1cm} \right)
\end{equation}
-TeX can choose delimiters that are too small, as in '\( \left| |x|+|y|
-\right| \)'. It can also choose delimiters that are too large, as here.
+TeX can choose delimiters that are too small, as in ‘\( \left| |x|+|y|
+\right| \)’. It can also choose delimiters that are too large, as here.
\begin{equation}
\left( \sum_{0\leq i<n} i^k \right)
@@ -10782,7 +10851,7 @@
A third awkward case is when a long displayed formula is on more than
one line and you must match the sizes of the opening and closing
-delimiter; you can't use '\left' on the first line and '\right' on the
+delimiter; you can’t use ‘\left’ on the first line and ‘\right’ on the
last because they must be paired.
To size the delimiters manually, see *note \bigl & \bigr etc.::.
@@ -10790,7 +10859,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \bigl & \bigr etc., Prev: \left & \right, Up: Delimiters
-16.2.5.2 '\bigl', '\bigr', etc.
+16.2.5.2 ‘\bigl’, ‘\bigr’, etc.
...............................
Synopsis, one of:
@@ -10800,7 +10869,7 @@
\biggl DELIMITER1 ... \biggr DELIMITER2
\Biggl DELIMITER1 ... \Biggr DELIMITER2
-(as with '\bigl[...\bigr]'; strictly speaking they need not be paired,
+(as with ‘\bigl[...\bigr]’; strictly speaking they need not be paired,
see below), or one of:
\bigm DELIMITER
@@ -10808,7 +10877,7 @@
\biggm DELIMITER
\Biggm DELIMITER
-(as with '\bigm|'), or one of:
+(as with ‘\bigm|’), or one of:
\big DELIMITER
\Big DELIMITER
@@ -10815,7 +10884,7 @@
\bigg DELIMITER
\Bigg DELIMITER
-(as with '\big[').
+(as with ‘\big[’).
Produce manually-sized delimiters. For delimiters that are
automatically sized see *note \left & \right::).
@@ -10825,17 +10894,17 @@
\bigl| |x|+|y| \bigr|
The commands above are listed in order of increasing size. You can
-use the smallest size such as '\bigl...\bigr' in a paragraph without
+use the smallest size such as ‘\bigl...\bigr’ in a paragraph without
causing LaTeX to spread the lines apart. The larger sizes are meant for
displayed equations.
*Note Delimiters::, for a list of the common delimiters. In the
-family of commands with 'l' or 'r', DELIMITER1 and DELIMITER2 need not
+family of commands with ‘l’ or ‘r’, DELIMITER1 and DELIMITER2 need not
match together.
- The 'l' and 'r' commands produce open and close delimiters that
+ The ‘l’ and ‘r’ commands produce open and close delimiters that
insert no horizontal space between a preceding atom and the delimiter,
-while the commands without 'l' and 'r' insert some space (because each
+while the commands without ‘l’ and ‘r’ insert some space (because each
delimiter is set as an ordinary variable). Compare these two.
\begin{tabular}{l}
@@ -10844,10 +10913,10 @@
\end{tabular}
The traditional typographic treatment is on the first line. On the
-second line the output will have some extra space between the '\sin' and
+second line the output will have some extra space between the ‘\sin’ and
the open parenthesis.
- Commands without 'l' or 'r' do give correct spacing in some
+ Commands without ‘l’ or ‘r’ do give correct spacing in some
circumstances, as with this large vertical line
\begin{equation}
@@ -10854,15 +10923,15 @@
\int_{x=a}^b x^2\,dx = \frac{1}{3} x^3 \Big|_{x=a}^b
\end{equation}
-(many authors would replace '\frac' with the '\tfrac' command from the
-'amsmath' package), and as with this larger slash.
+(many authors would replace ‘\frac’ with the ‘\tfrac’ command from the
+‘amsmath’ package), and as with this larger slash.
\begin{equation}
\lim_{n\to\infty}\pi(n) \big/ (n/\log n) = 1
\end{equation}
- Unlike the '\left...\right' pair (*note \left & \right::), the
-commands here with 'l' or 'r' do not make a group. Strictly speaking
+ Unlike the ‘\left...\right’ pair (*note \left & \right::), the
+commands here with ‘l’ or ‘r’ do not make a group. Strictly speaking
they need not be matched so you can write something like this.
\begin{equation}
@@ -10869,7 +10938,7 @@
\Biggl[ \pi/6 ]
\end{equation}
- The commands with 'm' are for relations, which are in the middle of
+ The commands with ‘m’ are for relations, which are in the middle of
formulas, as here.
\begin{equation}
@@ -10893,28 +10962,30 @@
LaTeX provides these.
-'\cdots'
+‘\cdots’
Horizontal ellipsis with the dots raised to the center of the line,
- as in ⋯. Used as: '\( a_0\cdot a_1\cdots a_{n-1} \)'.
+ as in ⋯. Used as: ‘\( a_0\cdot a_1\cdots a_{n-1} \)’.
-'\ddots'
+‘\ddots’
Diagonal ellipsis, ⋱. See the above array example for a usage.
-'\ldots'
- Ellipsis on the baseline, …. Used as: '\( x_0,\ldots x_{n-1} \)'.
- Another example is the above array example. A synonym is
- '\mathellipsis'. A synonym from the 'amsmath' package is '\hdots'.
+‘\ldots’
+‘\mathellipsis’
+‘\dots’
+ Ellipsis on the baseline, …. Used as: ‘\( x_0,\ldots x_{n-1} \)’.
+ Another example is the above array example. Synonyms are
+ ‘\mathellipsis’ and ‘\dots’. A synonym from the ‘amsmath’ package
+ is ‘\hdots’.
You can also use this command outside of mathematical text, as in
- 'The gears, brakes, \ldots{} are all broken'. (In a paragraph mode
- or LR mode a synonym for '\ldots' is '\dots'.)
+ ‘The gears, brakes, \ldots{} are all broken’.
-'\vdots'
+‘\vdots’
Vertical ellipsis, ⋮. See the above array example for a usage.
- The 'amsmath' package has the command '\dots' to semantically mark up
+ The ‘amsmath’ package has the command ‘\dots’ to semantically mark up
ellipses. This example produces two different-looking outputs for the
-first two uses of the '\dots' command.
+first two uses of the ‘\dots’ command.
\usepackage{amsmath} % in preamble
...
@@ -10923,16 +10994,31 @@
multiple of any \( p_i \).
Conclusion: there are infinitely many primes \( p_0, p_1, \dotsc \).
-In the first line LaTeX looks to the comma following '\dots' to
+In the first line LaTeX looks to the comma following ‘\dots’ to
determine that it should output an ellipsis on the baseline. The second
-line has a '\cdot' following '\dots' so LaTeX outputs an ellipsis that
+line has a ‘\cdot’ following ‘\dots’ so LaTeX outputs an ellipsis that
is on the math axis, vertically centered. However, the third usage has
no follow-on character so you have to tell LaTeX what to do. You can
-use one of the commands: '\dotsc' if you need the ellipsis appropriate
-for a comma following, '\dotsb' if you need the ellipses that fits when
-the dots are followed by a binary operator or relation symbol, '\dotsi'
-for dots with integrals, or '\dotso' for others.
+use one of the commands: ‘\dotsc’ if you need the ellipsis appropriate
+for a comma following, ‘\dotsb’ if you need the ellipses that fits when
+the dots are followed by a binary operator or relation symbol, ‘\dotsi’
+for dots with integrals, or ‘\dotso’ for others.
+ The ‘\dots’ command from ‘amsmath’ differs from the LaTeX kernel’s
+‘\dots’ command in another way: it outputs a thin space after the
+ellipsis. Furthermore, the ‘unicode-math’ package automatically loads
+‘amsmath’, so ‘amsmath’’s ‘\dots’ may be active even when you did not
+explicitly load it, thus changing the output from ‘\dots’ in both text
+and math mode.
+
+ Yet more about the ellipsis commands: when running under Unicode
+engines (‘lualatex’, ‘xelatex’), LaTeX will use the Unicode ellipsis
+character (U+2026) in the font if it’s available; under traditional TeX
+engines (‘pdflatex’, ‘latex’), it will typeset three spaced periods.
+Generally, the Unicode single-character ellipsis has almost no space
+between the three periods, while the spacing of the non-Unicode ellipsis
+is looser, more in accordance with traditional typography.
+
File: latex2e.info, Node: Greek letters, Prev: Dots, Up: Math symbols
@@ -10944,39 +11030,39 @@
Symbol Command Name
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-α '\alpha' Alpha
-β '\beta' Beta
-γ, Γ '\gamma', '\Gamma' Gamma
-δ, Δ '\delta', '\Delta' Delta
-ε, ϵ '\varepsilon', Epsilon
- '\epsilon'
-ζ '\zeta' Zeta
-η '\eta' Eta
-θ, ϑ '\theta', Theta
- '\vartheta'
-ι '\iota' Iota
-κ '\kappa' Kappa
-λ, Λ '\lambda', '\Lambda' Lambda
-μ '\mu' Mu
-ν '\nu' Nu
-ξ, Ξ '\xi', '\Xi' Xi
-π, Π '\pi', '\Pi' Pi
-ρ, ϱ '\rho', '\varrho' Rho
-σ, Σ '\sigma', '\Sigma' Sigma
-τ '\tau' Tau
-ϕ, φ, '\phi', '\varphi', Phi
-Φ '\Phi'
-χ '\chi' chi
-ψ, Ψ '\psi', '\Psi' Psi
-ω, Ω '\omega', '\Omega' Omega
+α ‘\alpha’ Alpha
+β ‘\beta’ Beta
+γ, Γ ‘\gamma’, ‘\Gamma’ Gamma
+δ, Δ ‘\delta’, ‘\Delta’ Delta
+ε, ϵ ‘\varepsilon’, Epsilon
+ ‘\epsilon’
+ζ ‘\zeta’ Zeta
+η ‘\eta’ Eta
+θ, ϑ ‘\theta’, Theta
+ ‘\vartheta’
+ι ‘\iota’ Iota
+κ ‘\kappa’ Kappa
+λ, Λ ‘\lambda’, ‘\Lambda’ Lambda
+μ ‘\mu’ Mu
+ν ‘\nu’ Nu
+ξ, Ξ ‘\xi’, ‘\Xi’ Xi
+π, Π ‘\pi’, ‘\Pi’ Pi
+ρ, ϱ ‘\rho’, ‘\varrho’ Rho
+σ, Σ ‘\sigma’, ‘\Sigma’ Sigma
+τ ‘\tau’ Tau
+ϕ, φ, ‘\phi’, ‘\varphi’, Phi
+Φ ‘\Phi’
+χ ‘\chi’ chi
+ψ, Ψ ‘\psi’, ‘\Psi’ Psi
+ω, Ω ‘\omega’, ‘\Omega’ Omega
- For omicron, if you are using LaTeX's default Computer Modern font
-then enter omicron just as 'o' or 'O'. If you like having the name or
+ For omicron, if you are using LaTeX’s default Computer Modern font
+then enter omicron just as ‘o’ or ‘O’. If you like having the name or
if your font shows a difference then you can use something like
-'\newcommand\omicron{o}'. The package 'unicode-math' has '\upomicron'
-for upright omicron and '\mitomicron' for math italic.
+‘\newcommand\omicron{o}’. The package ‘unicode-math’ has ‘\upomicron’
+for upright omicron and ‘\mitomicron’ for math italic.
- While the set membership relation symbol ∈ generated by '\in' is
+ While the set membership relation symbol ∈ generated by ‘\in’ is
related to epsilon, it is never used for a variable.
@@ -10988,115 +11074,115 @@
These commands produce roman function names in math mode with proper
spacing.
-'\arccos'
+‘\arccos’
Inverse cosine
-'\arcsin'
+‘\arcsin’
Inverse sine
-'\arctan'
+‘\arctan’
Inverse tangent
-'\arg'
+‘\arg’
Angle between the real axis and a point in the complex plane
-'\bmod'
- Binary modulo operator, used as in '\( 5\bmod 3=2 \)'
+‘\bmod’
+ Binary modulo operator, used as in ‘\( 5\bmod 3=2 \)’
-'\cos'
+‘\cos’
Cosine
-'\cosh'
+‘\cosh’
Hyperbolic cosine
-'\cot'
+‘\cot’
Cotangent
-'\coth'
+‘\coth’
Hyperbolic cotangent
-'\csc'
+‘\csc’
Cosecant
-'\deg'
+‘\deg’
Degrees
-'\det'
+‘\det’
Determinant
-'\dim'
+‘\dim’
Dimension
-'\exp'
+‘\exp’
Exponential
-'\gcd'
+‘\gcd’
Greatest common divisor
-'\hom'
+‘\hom’
Homomorphism
-'\inf'
- Infinum
+‘\inf’
+ Infimum
-'\ker'
+‘\ker’
Kernel
-'\lg'
+‘\lg’
Base 2 logarithm
-'\lim'
+‘\lim’
Limit
-'\liminf'
+‘\liminf’
Limit inferior
-'\limsup'
+‘\limsup’
Limit superior
-'\ln'
+‘\ln’
Natural logarithm
-'\log'
+‘\log’
Logarithm
-'\max'
+‘\max’
Maximum
-'\min'
+‘\min’
Minimum
-'\pmod'
- Parenthesized modulus, as used in '\( 5\equiv 2\pmod 3 \)'
+‘\pmod’
+ Parenthesized modulus, as used in ‘\( 5\equiv 2\pmod 3 \)’
-'\Pr'
+‘\Pr’
Probability
-'\sec'
+‘\sec’
Secant
-'\sin'
+‘\sin’
Sine
-'\sinh'
+‘\sinh’
Hyperbolic sine
-'\sup'
- sup
+‘\sup’
+ Supremum sup
-'\tan'
+‘\tan’
Tangent
-'\tanh'
+‘\tanh’
Hyperbolic tangent
- The 'amsmath' package adds improvements on some of these, and also
+ The ‘amsmath’ package adds improvements on some of these, and also
allows you to define your own. The full documentation is on CTAN, but
briefly, you can define an identity operator with
-'\DeclareMathOperator{\identity}{id}' that is like the ones above but
-prints as 'id'. The starred form '\DeclareMathOperator*{\op}{op}' sets
-any limits above and below, as is traditional with '\lim', '\sup', or
-'\max'.
+‘\DeclareMathOperator{\identity}{id}’ that is like the ones above but
+prints as ‘id’. The starred form ‘\DeclareMathOperator*{\op}{op}’ sets
+any superscript or subscript to be above and below, as is traditional
+with ‘\lim’, ‘\sup’, or ‘\max’.
File: latex2e.info, Node: Math accents, Next: Over- and Underlining, Prev: Math functions, Up: Math formulas
@@ -11108,47 +11194,47 @@
math. These are different from accents in normal text (*note
Accents::).
-'\acute'
+‘\acute’
Math acute accent
-'\bar'
+‘\bar’
Math bar-over accent
-'\breve'
+‘\breve’
Math breve accent
-'\check'
+‘\check’
Math háček (check) accent
-'\ddot'
+‘\ddot’
Math dieresis accent
-'\dot'
+‘\dot’
Math dot accent
-'\grave'
+‘\grave’
Math grave accent
-'\hat'
+‘\hat’
Math hat (circumflex) accent
-'\mathring'
+‘\mathring’
Math ring accent
-'\tilde'
+‘\tilde’
Math tilde accent
-'\vec'
+‘\vec’
Math vector symbol
-'\widehat'
+‘\widehat’
Math wide hat accent
-'\widetilde'
+‘\widetilde’
Math wide tilde accent
When you are putting an accent on an i or a j, the tradition is to
-use one without a dot, '\imath' or 'jmath' (*note Math symbols::).
+use one without a dot, ‘\imath’ or ‘jmath’ (*note Math symbols::).
File: latex2e.info, Node: Over- and Underlining, Next: Spacing in math mode, Prev: Math accents, Up: Math formulas
@@ -11159,27 +11245,27 @@
LaTeX provides commands for making overlines or underlines, or putting
braces over or under some material.
-'\underline{TEXT}'
+‘\underline{TEXT}’
Underline TEXT. Works inside math mode, and outside. The line is
always completely below the text, taking account of descenders, so
- in '\(\underline{y}\)' the line is lower than in
- '\(\underline{x}\)'. This command is fragile (*note \protect::).
+ in ‘\(\underline{y}\)’ the line is lower than in
+ ‘\(\underline{x}\)’. This command is fragile (*note \protect::).
- Note that the package 'ulem' does text mode underlining and allows
+ Note that the package ‘ulem’ does text mode underlining and allows
line breaking as well as a number of other features. See the
documentation on CTAN. See also *note \hrulefill & \dotfill:: for
producing a line, for such things as a signature.
-'\overline{TEXT}'
+‘\overline{TEXT}’
Put a horizontal line over TEXT. Works inside math mode, and
- outside. For example, '\overline{x+y}'. Note that this differs
- from the command '\bar' (*note Math accents::).
+ outside. For example, ‘\overline{x+y}’. Note that this differs
+ from the command ‘\bar’ (*note Math accents::).
-'\underbrace{MATH}'
+‘\underbrace{MATH}’
Put a brace under MATH. For example, this
- '(1-\underbrace{1/2)+(1/2}-1/3)' emphasizes the telescoping part.
- Attach text to the brace by using subscript, '_', or superscript,
- '^', as here.
+ ‘(1-\underbrace{1/2)+(1/2}-1/3)’ emphasizes the telescoping part.
+ Attach text to the brace by using the subscript command, ‘_’, or
+ superscript, ‘^’, as here.
\begin{displaymath}
1+1/2+\underbrace{1/3+1/4}_{>1/2}+
@@ -11189,12 +11275,12 @@
The superscript appears on top of the expression, and so can look
unconnected to the underbrace.
-'\overbrace{MATH}'
+‘\overbrace{MATH}’
Put a brace over MATH, as with
- '\overbrace{x+x+\cdots+x}^{\mbox{\(k\) times}}'. See also
- '\underbrace'.
+ ‘\overbrace{x+x+\cdots+x}^{\mbox{\(k\) times}}’. See also
+ ‘\underbrace’.
- The package 'mathtools' adds an over- and underbrace, as well as some
+ The package ‘mathtools’ adds an over- and underbrace, as well as some
improvements on the braces. See the documentation on CTAN.
@@ -11204,52 +11290,52 @@
=========================
When typesetting mathematics, LaTeX puts in spacing according to the
-normal rules for mathematics texts. If you enter 'y=m x' then LaTeX
+normal rules for mathematics texts. If you enter ‘y=m x’ then LaTeX
ignores the space and in the output the m is next to the x, as y=mx.
- But LaTeX's rules occasionally need tweaking. For example, in an
-integral the tradition is to put a small extra space between the 'f(x)'
-and the 'dx', here done with the '\,' command:
+ But LaTeX’s rules occasionally need tweaking. For example, in an
+integral the tradition is to put a small extra space between the ‘f(x)’
+and the ‘dx’, here done with the ‘\,’ command:
\int_0^1 f(x)\,dx
LaTeX provides the commands that follow for use in math mode. Many
of these spacing definitions are expressed in terms of the math unit
-"mu". It is defined as 1/18em, where the em is taken from the current
-math symbols family (*note Units of length::). Thus, a '\thickspace' is
-something like 5/18 times the width of a 'M'.
+“mu”. It is defined as 1/18em, where the em is taken from the current
+math symbols family (*note Units of length::). Thus, a ‘\thickspace’ is
+something like 5/18 times the width of a ‘M’.
-'\;'
+‘\;’
- Synonym: '\thickspace'. Normally '5.0mu plus 5.0mu'. With the
- 'amsmath' package, or as of the 2020-10-01 LaTeX release, can be
+ Synonym: ‘\thickspace’. Normally ‘5.0mu plus 5.0mu’. With the
+ ‘amsmath’ package, or as of the 2020-10-01 LaTeX release, can be
used in text mode as well as math mode; otherwise, in math mode
only.
-'\negthickspace'
- Normally '-5.0mu plus 2.0mu minus 4.0mu'. With the 'amsmath'
+‘\negthickspace’
+ Normally ‘-5.0mu plus 2.0mu minus 4.0mu’. With the ‘amsmath’
package, or as of the 2020-10-01 LaTeX release, can be used in text
mode as well as math mode; otherwise, in math mode only.
-'\:'
-'\>'
- Synonym: '\medspace'. Normally '4.0mu plus 2.0mu minus 4.0mu'.
- With the 'amsmath' package, or as of the 2020-10-01 LaTeX release,
+‘\:’
+‘\>’
+ Synonym: ‘\medspace’. Normally ‘4.0mu plus 2.0mu minus 4.0mu’.
+ With the ‘amsmath’ package, or as of the 2020-10-01 LaTeX release,
can be used in text mode as well as math mode; before that, in math
mode only.
-'\negmedspace'
- Normally '-4.0mu plus 2.0mu minus 4.0mu'. With the 'amsmath'
+‘\negmedspace’
+ Normally ‘-4.0mu plus 2.0mu minus 4.0mu’. With the ‘amsmath’
package, or as of the 2020-10-01 LaTeX release, can be used in text
mode as well as math mode; before that, in math mode only.
-'\,'
- Synonym: '\thinspace'. Normally '3mu', which is 1/6em. Can be
+‘\,’
+ Synonym: ‘\thinspace’. Normally ‘3mu’, which is 1/6em. Can be
used in both math mode and text mode (*note \thinspace &
\negthinspace::).
This space is widely used, for instance between the function and
- the infinitesimal in an integral '\int f(x)\,dx' and, if an author
+ the infinitesimal in an integral ‘\int f(x)\,dx’ and, if an author
does this, before punctuation in a displayed equation.
The antiderivative is
@@ -11257,21 +11343,21 @@
3x^{-1/2}+3^{1/2}\,.
\end{equation}
-'\!'
- Synonym: '\negthinspace'. A negative thin space. Normally '-3mu'.
- With the 'amsmath' package, or as of the 2020-10-01 LaTeX release,
- can be used in text mode as well as math mode; otherwise, the '\!'
- command is math mode only but the '\negthinspace' command has
+‘\!’
+ Synonym: ‘\negthinspace’. A negative thin space. Normally ‘-3mu’.
+ With the ‘amsmath’ package, or as of the 2020-10-01 LaTeX release,
+ can be used in text mode as well as math mode; otherwise, the ‘\!’
+ command is math mode only but the ‘\negthinspace’ command has
always also worked in text mode (*note \thinspace &
\negthinspace::).
-'\quad'
+‘\quad’
This is 18mu, that is, 1em. This is often used for space
surrounding equations or expressions, for instance for the space
- between two equations inside a 'displaymath' environment. It is
+ between two equations inside a ‘displaymath’ environment. It is
available in both text and math mode.
-'\qquad'
+‘\qquad’
A length of 2 quads, that is, 36mu = 2em. It is available in both
text and math mode.
@@ -11284,7 +11370,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \smash, Next: \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom, Up: Spacing in math mode
-16.6.1 '\smash'
+16.6.1 ‘\smash’
---------------
Synopsis:
@@ -11293,7 +11379,7 @@
Typeset SUBFORMULA as if its height and depth were zero.
- In this example the exponential is so tall that without the '\smash'
+ In this example the exponential is so tall that without the ‘\smash’
command LaTeX would separate its line from the line above it, and the
uneven line spacing might be unsightly.
@@ -11300,12 +11386,12 @@
To compute the tetration $\smash{2^{2^{2^2}}}$,
evaluate from the top down, as $2^{2^4}=2^{16}=65536$.
- (Because of the '\smash' the printed expression could run into the
+ (Because of the ‘\smash’ the printed expression could run into the
line above so you may want to wait until the final version of the
document to make such adjustments.)
- This pictures the effect of '\smash' by using '\fbox' to surround the
-box that LaTeX will put on the line. The '\blackbar' command makes a
+ This pictures the effect of ‘\smash’ by using ‘\fbox’ to surround the
+box that LaTeX will put on the line. The ‘\blackbar’ command makes a
bar extending from 10 points below the baseline to 20 points above.
\newcommand{\blackbar}{\rule[-10pt]{5pt}{30pt}}
@@ -11317,7 +11403,7 @@
depth, despite that the ink printed on the page still extends well above
and below the line.
- The '\smash' command appears often in mathematics to adjust the size
+ The ‘\smash’ command appears often in mathematics to adjust the size
of an element that surrounds a subformula. Here the first radical
extends below the baseline while the second lies just on the baseline.
@@ -11326,13 +11412,13 @@
\sqrt{\vphantom{\sum}\smash{\sum_{0\leq k< n}} f(k)}
\end{equation}
- Note the use of '\vphantom' to give the '\sqrt' command an argument
-with the height of the '\sum' (*note \phantom & \vphantom &
+ Note the use of ‘\vphantom’ to give the ‘\sqrt’ command an argument
+with the height of the ‘\sum’ (*note \phantom & \vphantom &
\hphantom::).
- While most often used in mathematics, the '\smash' command can appear
-in other contexts. However, it doesn't change into horizontal mode. So
-if it starts a paragraph then you should first put a '\leavevmode', as
+ While most often used in mathematics, the ‘\smash’ command can appear
+in other contexts. However, it doesn’t change into horizontal mode. So
+if it starts a paragraph then you should first put a ‘\leavevmode’, as
in the bottom line below.
xxx xxx xxx
@@ -11341,13 +11427,13 @@
\leavevmode\smash{zzz} % usual paragraph indent
- The package 'mathtools' has operators that provide even finer control
+ The package ‘mathtools’ has operators that provide even finer control
over smashing a subformula box.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom, Next: \mathstrut, Prev: \smash, Up: Spacing in math mode
-16.6.2 '\phantom' & '\vphantom' & '\hphantom'
+16.6.2 ‘\phantom’ & ‘\vphantom’ & ‘\hphantom’
---------------------------------------------
Synopsis:
@@ -11362,7 +11448,7 @@
\hphantom{SUBFORMULA}
- The '\phantom' command creates a box with the same height, depth, and
+ The ‘\phantom’ command creates a box with the same height, depth, and
width as SUBFORMULA, but empty. That is, this command causes LaTeX to
typeset the space but not fill it with the material. Here LaTeX will
put a blank line that is the correct width for the answer, but will not
@@ -11372,15 +11458,15 @@
\int x^2\,dx=\mbox{\underline{$\phantom{(1/3)x^3+C}$}}
\end{displaymath}
- The '\vphantom' variant produces an invisible box with the same
+ The ‘\vphantom’ variant produces an invisible box with the same
vertical size as SUBFORMULA, the same height and depth, but having zero
-width. And '\hphantom' makes a box with the same width as SUBFORMULA
+width. And ‘\hphantom’ makes a box with the same width as SUBFORMULA
but with zero height and depth.
In this example, the tower of exponents in the second summand
expression is so tall that TeX places this expression further down than
its default. Without adjustment, the two summand expressions would be
-at different levels. The '\vphantom' in the first expression tells TeX
+at different levels. The ‘\vphantom’ in the first expression tells TeX
to leave as much vertical room as it does for the tower, so the two
expressions come out at the same level.
@@ -11389,31 +11475,31 @@
\sum_{i\in\{0,\ldots\, 3^{3^{3^j}}\}} i\cdot j
\end{displaymath}
- These commands are often used in conjunction with '\smash'. *Note
-\smash::, which includes another example of '\vphantom'.
+ These commands are often used in conjunction with ‘\smash’. *Note
+\smash::, which includes another example of ‘\vphantom’.
The three phantom commands appear often but note that LaTeX provides
a suite of other commands to work with box sizes that may be more
-convenient, including '\makebox' (*note \mbox & \makebox::) as well as
-'\settodepth' (*note \settodepth::), '\settoheight' (*note
-\settoheight::), and '\settowidth' (*note \settowidth::). In addition,
-the 'mathtools' package has many commands that offer fine-grained
+convenient, including ‘\makebox’ (*note \mbox & \makebox::) as well as
+‘\settodepth’ (*note \settodepth::), ‘\settoheight’ (*note
+\settoheight::), and ‘\settowidth’ (*note \settowidth::). In addition,
+the ‘mathtools’ package has many commands that offer fine-grained
control over spacing.
All three commands produce an ordinary box, without any special
mathematics status. So to do something like attaching a superscript you
-should give it such a status, for example with the '\operatorname'
-command from the package 'amsmath'.
+should give it such a status, for example with the ‘\operatorname’
+command from the package ‘amsmath’.
While most often used in mathematics, these three can appear in other
-contexts. However, they don't cause LaTeX to change into horizontal
+contexts. However, they don’t cause LaTeX to change into horizontal
mode. So if one of these starts a paragraph then you should prefix it
-with '\leavevmode'.
+with ‘\leavevmode’.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \mathstrut, Prev: \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom, Up: Spacing in math mode
-16.6.3 '\mathstrut'
+16.6.3 ‘\mathstrut’
-------------------
Synopsis:
@@ -11420,20 +11506,20 @@
\mathstrut
- The analogue of '\strut' for mathematics. *Note \strut::.
+ The analogue of ‘\strut’ for mathematics. *Note \strut::.
- The input '$\sqrt{x} + \sqrt{x^i}$' gives output where the second
+ The input ‘$\sqrt{x} + \sqrt{x^i}$’ gives output where the second
radical is taller than the first. To add extra vertical space without
any horizontal space, so that the two have the same height, use
-'$\sqrt{x\mathstrut} + \sqrt{x^i\mathstrut}$'.
+‘$\sqrt{x\mathstrut} + \sqrt{x^i\mathstrut}$’.
- The '\mathstrut' command adds the vertical height of an open
-parenthesis, '(', but no horizontal space. It is defined as
-'\vphantom{(}', so see *note \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom:: for
-more. An advantage over '\strut' is that '\mathstrut' adds no depth,
+ The ‘\mathstrut’ command adds the vertical height of an open
+parenthesis, ‘(’, but no horizontal space. It is defined as
+‘\vphantom{(}’, so see *note \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom:: for
+more. An advantage over ‘\strut’ is that ‘\mathstrut’ adds no depth,
which is often the right thing for formulas. Using the height of an
open parenthesis is just a convention; for complete control over the
-amount of space, use '\rule' with a width of zero. *Note \rule::.
+amount of space, use ‘\rule’ with a width of zero. *Note \rule::.
File: latex2e.info, Node: Math styles, Next: Math miscellany, Prev: Spacing in math mode, Up: Math formulas
@@ -11441,12 +11527,12 @@
16.7 Math styles
================
-TeX's rules for typesetting a formula depend on the context. For
-example, inside a displayed equation, the input '\sum_{0\leq
-i<n}k^m=\frac{n^{m+1}}{m+1}+\mbox{lower order terms}' will give output
+TeX’s rules for typesetting a formula depend on the context. For
+example, inside a displayed equation, the input ‘\sum_{0\leq
+i<n}k^m=\frac{n^{m+1}}{m+1}+\mbox{lower order terms}’ will give output
with the summation index centered below the summation symbol. But if
that input is inline then the summation index is off to the right rather
-than below, so it won't push the lines apart. Similarly, in a displayed
+than below, so it won’t push the lines apart. Similarly, in a displayed
context, the symbols in the numerator and denominator will be larger
than for an inline context, and in display math subscripts and
superscripts are further apart then they are in inline math.
@@ -11453,22 +11539,22 @@
TeX uses four math styles.
- * Display style is for a formula displayed on a line by itself, such
- as with '\begin{equation} ... \end{equation}'.
+ • Display style is for a formula displayed on a line by itself, such
+ as with ‘\begin{equation} ... \end{equation}’.
- * Text style is for an inline formula, as with 'so we have $ ... $'.
+ • Text style is for an inline formula, as with ‘so we have $ ... $’.
- * Script style is for parts of a formula in a subscript or
+ • Script style is for parts of a formula in a subscript or
superscript.
- * Scriptscript style is for parts of a formula at a second level (or
+ • Scriptscript style is for parts of a formula at a second level (or
more) of subscript or superscript.
TeX determines a default math style but you can override it with a
-declaration of '\displaystyle', or '\textstyle', or '\scriptstyle', or
-'\scriptscriptstyle'.
+declaration of ‘\displaystyle’, or ‘\textstyle’, or ‘\scriptstyle’, or
+‘\scriptscriptstyle’.
- In this example, the 'Arithmetic' line's fraction will look
+ In this example, the ‘Arithmetic’ line’s fraction will look
scrunched.
\begin{tabular}{r|cc}
@@ -11479,7 +11565,7 @@
&$\displaystyle a\cdot\frac{1-b^n}{1-b}$ \\
\end{tabular}
-But because of the '\displaystyle' declaration, the 'Geometric' line's
+But because of the ‘\displaystyle’ declaration, the ‘Geometric’ line’s
fraction will be easy to read, with characters the same size as in the
rest of the line.
@@ -11490,8 +11576,8 @@
$\pi=2\cdot{\displaystyle\int_{x=0}^1 \sqrt{1-x^2}\,dx}$
will have an integral sign that is much taller. Note that here the
-'\displaystyle' applies to only part of the formula, and it is delimited
-by being inside curly braces, as '{\displaystyle ...}'.
+‘\displaystyle’ applies to only part of the formula, and it is delimited
+by being inside curly braces, as ‘{\displaystyle ...}’.
The last example is a continued fraction.
@@ -11502,8 +11588,8 @@
\displaystyle a_3}}}
\end{equation}
-Without the '\displaystyle' declarations, the denominators would be set
-in script style and scriptscript style. (The '\mathstrut' improves the
+Without the ‘\displaystyle’ declarations, the denominators would be set
+in script style and scriptscript style. (The ‘\mathstrut’ improves the
height of the denominators; *note \mathstrut::.)
@@ -11513,7 +11599,7 @@
====================
LaTeX contains a wide variety of mathematics facilities. Here are some
-that don't fit into other categories.
+that don’t fit into other categories.
* Menu:
@@ -11526,7 +11612,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: Colon character & \colon, Next: \*, Up: Math miscellany
-16.8.1 Colon character ':' & '\colon'
+16.8.1 Colon character ‘:’ & ‘\colon’
-------------------------------------
Synopsis, one of:
@@ -11534,22 +11620,22 @@
:
\colon
- In mathematics, the colon character, ':', is a relation.
+ In mathematics, the colon character, ‘:’, is a relation.
With side ratios \( 3:4 \) and \( 4:5 \), the triangle is right.
-Ordinary LaTeX defines '\colon' to produce the colon character with the
+Ordinary LaTeX defines ‘\colon’ to produce the colon character with the
spacing appropriate for punctuation, as in set-builder notation
-'\{x\colon 0\leq x<1\}'.
+‘\{x\colon 0\leq x<1\}’.
- But the widely-used 'amsmath' package defines '\colon' for use in the
-definition of functions 'f\colon D\to C'. So if you want the colon
-character as a punctuation then use '\mathpunct{:}'.
+ But the widely-used ‘amsmath’ package defines ‘\colon’ for use in the
+definition of functions ‘f\colon D\to C’. So if you want the colon
+character as a punctuation then use ‘\mathpunct{:}’.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \*, Next: \frac, Prev: Colon character & \colon, Up: Math miscellany
-16.8.2 '\*'
+16.8.2 ‘\*’
-----------
Synopsis:
@@ -11557,18 +11643,18 @@
\*
A multiplication symbol that allows a line break. If there is a
-break then LaTeX puts a '\times' symbol, ×, before that break.
+break then LaTeX puts a ‘\times’ symbol, ×, before that break.
- In '\( A_1\* A_2\* A_3\* A_4 \)', if there is no line break then
-LaTeX outputs it as though it were '\( A_1 A_2 A_3 A_4 \)'. If a line
+ In ‘\( A_1\* A_2\* A_3\* A_4 \)’, if there is no line break then
+LaTeX outputs it as though it were ‘\( A_1 A_2 A_3 A_4 \)’. If a line
break does happen, for example between the two middle ones, then LaTeX
-sets it like '\( A_1 A_2 \times \)', followed by the break, followed by
-'\( A_3 A_4 \)'.
+sets it like ‘\( A_1 A_2 \times \)’, followed by the break, followed by
+‘\( A_3 A_4 \)’.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \frac, Next: \sqrt, Prev: \*, Up: Math miscellany
-16.8.3 '\frac'
+16.8.3 ‘\frac’
--------------
Synopsis:
@@ -11575,15 +11661,15 @@
\frac{NUMERATOR}{DENOMINATOR}
- Produces the fraction. Used as: '\begin{displaymath}
-\frac{1}{\sqrt{2\pi\sigma}} \end{displaymath}'. In inline math mode it
-comes out small; see the discussion of '\displaystyle' (*note Math
+ Produces the fraction. Used as: ‘\begin{displaymath}
+\frac{1}{\sqrt{2\pi\sigma}} \end{displaymath}’. In inline math mode it
+comes out small; see the discussion of ‘\displaystyle’ (*note Math
formulas::).
File: latex2e.info, Node: \sqrt, Next: \stackrel, Prev: \frac, Up: Math miscellany
-16.8.4 '\sqrt'
+16.8.4 ‘\sqrt’
--------------
Synopsis, one of:
@@ -11592,25 +11678,26 @@
\sqrt[ROOT-NUMBER]{ARG}
The square root, or optionally other roots, of ARG. The optional
-argument ROOT-NUMBER gives the root, i.e., enter the cube root of 'x+y'
-as '\sqrt[3]{x+y}'. The radical grows with the size of ARG (as the
-height of the radical grows, the angle on the leftmost part gets
-steeper, until for a large enough 'arg', it is vertical).
+argument ROOT-NUMBER gives the root, i.e., enter the cube root of ‘x+y’
+as ‘\sqrt[3]{x+y}’. The size of the radical grows with that of ARG (as
+the height of the radical grows, the angle on the leftmost part gets
+steeper, until for a tall enough ‘arg’, it is vertical).
- LaTeX has a separate '\surd' character (*note Math symbols::).
+ LaTeX has a separate ‘\surd’ symbol for making a square root without
+ARG (*note Math symbols::).
File: latex2e.info, Node: \stackrel, Prev: \sqrt, Up: Math miscellany
-16.8.5 '\stackrel'
+16.8.5 ‘\stackrel’
------------------
-Synopsis, one of:
+Synopsis:
\stackrel{TEXT}{RELATION}
Put TEXT above RELATION. To put a function name above an arrow enter
-'\stackrel{f}{\longrightarrow}'.
+‘\stackrel{f}{\longrightarrow}’.
File: latex2e.info, Node: Modes, Next: Page styles, Prev: Math formulas, Up: Top
@@ -11624,50 +11711,50 @@
in one mode or another (in particular, many commands only work in one of
the math modes), and error messages will refer to these.
- * "Paragraph mode" (in plain TeX this is called "horizontal mode") is
+ • “Paragraph mode” (in plain TeX this is called “horizontal mode”) is
what LaTeX is in when processing ordinary text. It breaks the
input text into lines and finds the positions of line breaks, so
that in vertical mode page breaks can be done. This is the mode
LaTeX is in most of the time.
- "LR mode" (for left-to-right mode; in plain TeX this is called
- "restricted horizontal mode") is in effect when LaTeX starts making
- a box with an '\mbox' command. As in paragraph mode, LaTeX's
+ “LR mode” (for left-to-right mode; in plain TeX this is called
+ “restricted horizontal mode”) is in effect when LaTeX starts making
+ a box with an ‘\mbox’ command. As in paragraph mode, LaTeX’s
output is a string of words with spaces between them. Unlike in
paragraph mode, in LR mode LaTeX never starts a new line, it just
keeps going from left to right. (Although LaTeX will not complain
that the LR box is too long, when it is finished and next tries to
- put that box into a line, it could very well complain that the
- finished LR box won't fit there.)
+ put that box into a line, it might well complain that the finished
+ LR box won’t fit there.)
- * "Math mode" is when LaTeX is generating an inline mathematical
+ • “Math mode” is when LaTeX is generating an inline mathematical
formula.
- "Display math mode" is when LaTeX is generating a displayed
+ “Display math mode” is when LaTeX is generating a displayed
mathematical formula. (Displayed formulas differ somewhat from
inline ones. One example is that the placement of the subscript on
- '\int' differs in the two situations.)
+ ‘\int’ differs in the two situations.)
- * "Vertical mode" is when LaTeX is building the list of lines and
+ • “Vertical mode” is when LaTeX is building the list of lines and
other material making the output page, which comprises insertion of
page breaks. This is the mode LaTeX is in when it starts a
document.
- "Internal vertical mode" is in effect when LaTeX starts making a
- '\vbox'. It has not such thing as page breaks, and as such is the
+ “Internal vertical mode” is in effect when LaTeX starts making a
+ ‘\vbox’. It has not such thing as page breaks, and as such is the
vertical analogue of LR mode.
-For instance, if you begin a LaTeX article with 'Let \( x \) be ...'
+For instance, if you begin a LaTeX article with ‘Let \( x \) be ...’
then these are the modes: first LaTeX starts every document in vertical
-mode, then it reads the 'L' and switches to paragraph mode, then the
-next switch happens at the '\(' where LaTeX changes to math mode, and
+mode, then it reads the ‘L’ and switches to paragraph mode, then the
+next switch happens at the ‘\(’ where LaTeX changes to math mode, and
then when it leaves the formula it pops back to paragraph mode.
- Paragraph mode has two subcases. If you use a '\parbox' command or a
-'minipage' then LaTeX is put into paragraph mode. But it will not put a
-page break here. Inside one of these boxes, called a "parbox", LaTeX is
-in "inner paragraph mode". Its more usual situation, where it can put
-page breaks, is "outer paragraph mode" (*note Page breaking::).
+ Paragraph mode has two subcases. If you use a ‘\parbox’ command or a
+‘minipage’ then LaTeX is put into paragraph mode. But it will not put a
+page break here. Inside one of these boxes, called a “parbox”, LaTeX is
+in “inner paragraph mode”. Its more usual situation, where it can put
+page breaks, is “outer paragraph mode” (*note Page breaking::).
* Menu:
@@ -11676,7 +11763,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \ensuremath, Up: Modes
-17.1 '\ensuremath'
+17.1 ‘\ensuremath’
==================
Synopsis:
@@ -11692,7 +11779,7 @@
\newcommand{\dx}{\ensuremath{dx}}
In $\int f(x)\, \dx$, the \dx{} is an infinitesimal.
- Caution: the '\ensuremath' command is useful but not a panacea.
+ Caution: the ‘\ensuremath’ command is useful but not a panacea.
\newcommand{\alf}{\ensuremath{\alpha}}
You get an alpha in text mode: \alf.
@@ -11712,8 +11799,8 @@
such as the title page of a book, a page from an index, or the first
page of an article.
- The package 'fancyhdr' is very helpful for constructing page styles.
-See its documentation on CTAN.
+ The package ‘fancyhdr’ is commonly used for constructing page styles.
+See its documentation.
* Menu:
@@ -11725,7 +11812,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \maketitle, Next: \pagenumbering, Up: Page styles
-18.1 '\maketitle'
+18.1 ‘\maketitle’
=================
Synopsis:
@@ -11733,12 +11820,12 @@
\maketitle
Generate a title. In the standard classes the title appears on a
-separate page, except in the 'article' class where it is at the top of
+separate page, except in the ‘article’ class where it is at the top of
the first page. (*Note Document class options::, for information about
-the 'titlepage' document class option.)
+the ‘titlepage’ document class option.)
- This example shows '\maketitle' appearing in its usual place,
-immediately after '\begin{document}'.
+ This example shows ‘\maketitle’ appearing in its usual place,
+immediately after ‘\begin{document}’.
\documentclass{article}
\title{Constructing a Nuclear Reactor Using Only Coconuts}
@@ -11761,45 +11848,46 @@
...
You tell LaTeX the information used to produce the title by making
-the following declarations. These must come before the '\maketitle',
+the following declarations. These must come before the ‘\maketitle’,
either in the preamble or in the document body.
-'\author{NAME1 \and NAME2 \and ...}'
+‘\author{NAME1 \and NAME2 \and ...}’
Required. Declare the document author or authors. The argument is
- a list of authors separated by '\and' commands. To separate lines
- within a single author's entry, for instance to give the author's
- institution or address, use a double backslash, '\\'. If you omit
- the '\author' declaration then you get 'LaTeX Warning: No \author
- given'.
+ a list of authors separated by ‘\and’ commands. To separate lines
+ within a single author’s entry, for instance to give the author’s
+ institution or address, use a double backslash, ‘\\’. If you omit
+ the ‘\author’ declaration then you get ‘LaTeX Warning: No \author
+ given’.
-'\date{TEXT}'
- Optional. Declare TEXT to be the document's date. The TEXT
- doesn't need to be in a date format; it can be any text at all. If
- you omit '\date' then LaTeX uses the current date (*note \today::).
- To have no date, instead use '\date{}'.
+‘\date{TEXT}’
+ Optional. Declare TEXT to be the document’s date. The TEXT
+ doesn’t need to be in a date format; it can be any text at all. If
+ you omit ‘\date’ then LaTeX uses the current date (*note \today::).
+ To have no date, instead use ‘\date{}’.
-'\thanks{TEXT}'
+‘\thanks{TEXT}’
Optional. Produce a footnote. You can use it in the author
information for acknowledgements as illustrated above, but you can
- also use it in the title, or any place a footnote makes sense. It
- can be any text at all so you can use it for any purpose, such as
- to print an email address.
+ also use it in the title, or any place a footnote mark makes sense.
+ It can be any text at all so you can use it for any purpose, such
+ as to print an email address.
-'\title{TEXT}'
+‘\title{TEXT}’
Required. Declare TEXT to be the title of the document. Get line
- breaks inside TEXT with a double backslash, '\\'. If you omit the
- '\title' declaration then you get 'LaTeX Error: No \title given'.
+ breaks inside TEXT with a double backslash, ‘\\’. If you omit the
+ ‘\title’ declaration then the ‘\maketitle’ command yields error
+ ‘LaTeX Error: No \title given’.
To make your own title page, see *note titlepage::. You can either
create this as a one-off or you can include it as part of a renewed
-'\maketitle' command. (Many publishers will provide a class to use in
-place of 'article' that formats the title according to their house
+‘\maketitle’ command. (Many publishers will provide a class to use in
+place of ‘article’ that formats the title according to their house
requirements.)
File: latex2e.info, Node: \pagenumbering, Next: \pagestyle, Prev: \maketitle, Up: Page styles
-18.2 '\pagenumbering'
+18.2 ‘\pagenumbering’
=====================
Synopsis:
@@ -11809,11 +11897,12 @@
Specifies the style of page numbers, and resets the page number. The
numbering style is reflected on the page, and also in the table of
contents and other page references. This declaration has global scope
-so its effect is not delimited by braces or environments.
+so its effect is not stopped by an end of group such as a closing brace
+or an end of environment.
- In this example, before the Main section the pages are numbered 'a',
-etc. Starting on the page containing that section, the pages are
-numbered '1', etc.
+ In this example, before the ‘Main’ section the pages are numbered
+‘a’, etc. Starting on the page containing the ‘\pagenumbering’ call in
+that section, the pages are numbered ‘1’, etc.
\begin{document}\pagenumbering{alph}
...
@@ -11823,43 +11912,43 @@
The argument NUMBER-STYLE is one of the following (see also *note
\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol::).
-'arabic'
+‘arabic’
Arabic numerals: 1, 2, ...
-'roman'
+‘roman’
lowercase Roman numerals: i, ii, ...
-'Roman'
+‘Roman’
uppercase Roman numerals: I, II, ...
-'alph'
+‘alph’
lowercase letters: a, b, ... If you have more than 26 pages then
- you get 'LaTeX Error: Counter too large'.
+ you get ‘LaTeX Error: Counter too large’.
-'Alph'
+‘Alph’
uppercase letters: A, B, ... If you have more than 26 pages then
- you get 'LaTeX Error: Counter too large'.
+ you get ‘LaTeX Error: Counter too large’.
-'gobble'
+‘gobble’
LaTeX does not output a page number, although it does get reset.
References to that page also are blank. (This does not work with
- the popular package 'hyperref' so to have the page number not
- appear you may want to instead use '\pagestyle{empty}' or
- '\thispagestyle{empty}'.)
+ the popular package ‘hyperref’ so to have the page number not
+ appear you may want to instead use ‘\pagestyle{empty}’ or
+ ‘\thispagestyle{empty}’.)
- Traditionally, if a document has front matter--preface, table of
-contents, etc.--then it is numbered with lowercase Roman numerals. The
+ Traditionally, if a document has front matter—preface, table of
+contents, etc.—then it is numbered with lowercase Roman numerals. The
main matter of a document uses arabic. *Note \frontmatter & \mainmatter
& \backmatter::.
If you want to change where the page number appears on the page,
see *note \pagestyle::. If you want to change the value of the page
-number, then you manipulate the 'page' counter (*note Counters::).
+number, then you manipulate the ‘page’ counter (*note Counters::).
File: latex2e.info, Node: \pagestyle, Next: \thispagestyle, Prev: \pagenumbering, Up: Page styles
-18.3 '\pagestyle'
+18.3 ‘\pagestyle’
=================
Synopsis:
@@ -11870,35 +11959,35 @@
typeset, from the current page onwards.
A discussion with an example is below. Note first that the package
-'fancyhdr' is now the standard way to manipulate headers and footers.
+‘fancyhdr’ is now the standard way to manipulate headers and footers.
New documents that need to do anything other than one of the standard
options below should use this package. See its documentation on CTAN.
Values for STYLE:
-'plain'
+‘plain’
The header is empty. The footer contains only a page number,
centered.
-'empty'
+‘empty’
The header and footer are both empty.
-'headings'
+‘headings’
Put running headers and footers on each page. The document style
specifies what goes in there; see the discussion below.
-'myheadings'
- Custom headers, specified via the '\markboth' or the '\markright'
+‘myheadings’
+ Custom headers, specified via the ‘\markboth’ or the ‘\markright’
commands.
- Some discussion of the motivation for LaTeX's mechanism will help you
-work with the options 'headings' or 'myheadings'. The document source
-below produces an article, two-sided, with the pagestyle 'headings'. On
-this document's left hand pages, LaTeX wants (in addition to the page
+ Some discussion of the motivation for LaTeX’s mechanism will help you
+work with the options ‘headings’ or ‘myheadings’. The document source
+below produces an article, two-sided, with the pagestyle ‘headings’. On
+this document’s left hand pages, LaTeX wants (in addition to the page
number) the title of the current section. On its right hand pages LaTeX
wants the title of the current subsection. When it makes up a page,
-LaTeX gets this information from the commands '\leftmark' and
-'\rightmark'. So it is up to '\section' and '\subsection' to store that
+LaTeX gets this information from the commands ‘\leftmark’ and
+‘\rightmark’. So it is up to ‘\section’ and ‘\subsection’ to store that
information there.
\documentclass[twoside]{article}
@@ -11913,7 +12002,7 @@
...
Suppose that the second section falls on a left page. Although when the
-page starts it is in the first section, LaTeX will put 'Section 2' in
+page starts it is in the first section, LaTeX will put ‘Section 2’ in
the left page header. As to the right header, if no subsection starts
before the end of the right page then LaTeX blanks the right hand
header. If a subsection does appear before the right page finishes then
@@ -11924,29 +12013,30 @@
puts in the right hand header the title of the last subsection to start,
that is, the one in effect during the right hand page.
- To accomplish this, in a two-sided article, LaTeX has '\section'
-issue a command '\markboth', setting '\leftmark' to 'Section 2' and
-setting '\rightmark' to blank. And, LaTeX has '\subsection' issue a
-command '\markright', setting '\rightmark' to 'Subsection 2.1', etc.
+ To accomplish this, in a two-sided article, LaTeX has ‘\section’
+issue a command ‘\markboth’, setting ‘\leftmark’ to ‘Section 2’ and
+setting ‘\rightmark’ to an empty content. And, LaTeX has ‘\subsection’
+issue a command ‘\markright’, setting ‘\rightmark’ to ‘Subsection 2.1’,
+etc.
- Here are the descriptions of '\markboth' and '\markright':
+ Here are the descriptions of ‘\markboth’ and ‘\markright’:
-'\markboth{LEFT-HEAD}{RIGHT-HEAD}'
+‘\markboth{LEFT-HEAD}{RIGHT-HEAD}’
Sets both the right hand and left hand heading information for
- either a page style of 'headings' or 'myheadings'. A left hand
- page heading LEFT-HEAD is generated by the last '\markboth' command
+ either a page style of ‘headings’ or ‘myheadings’. A left hand
+ page heading LEFT-HEAD is generated by the last ‘\markboth’ command
before the end of the page. A right hand page heading RIGHT-HEAD
- is generated by the first '\markboth' or '\markright' that comes on
+ is generated by the first ‘\markboth’ or ‘\markright’ that comes on
the page if there is one, otherwise by the last one that came
before that page.
-'\markright{RIGHT}'
+‘\markright{RIGHT-HEAD}’
Sets the right hand page heading, leaving the left unchanged.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \thispagestyle, Prev: \pagestyle, Up: Page styles
-18.4 '\thispagestyle'
+18.4 ‘\thispagestyle’
=====================
Synopsis:
@@ -11953,7 +12043,7 @@
\thispagestyle{STYLE}
- Works in the same way as the '\pagestyle' (*note \pagestyle::),
+ Works in the same way as the ‘\pagestyle’ (*note \pagestyle::),
except that it changes to STYLE for the current page only. This
declaration has global scope, so its effect is not delimited by braces
or environments.
@@ -11960,7 +12050,7 @@
Often the first page of a chapter or section has a different style.
For example, this LaTeX book document has the first page of the first
-chapter in 'plain' style, as is the default (*note Page styles::).
+chapter in ‘plain’ style, as is the default (*note Page styles::).
\documentclass{book}
\pagestyle{headings}
@@ -11970,9 +12060,9 @@
\chapter{Second chapter}\thispagestyle{empty}
...
-The 'plain' style has a page number on it, centered in the footer. To
-make the page entirely empty, the command '\thispagestyle{empty}'
-immediately follows the second '\chapter'.
+The ‘plain’ style has a page number on it, centered in the footer. To
+make the page entirely empty, the command ‘\thispagestyle{empty}’
+immediately follows the second ‘\chapter’.
File: latex2e.info, Node: Spaces, Next: Boxes, Prev: Page styles, Up: Top
@@ -12009,7 +12099,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \enspace & \quad & \qquad, Next: \hspace, Up: Spaces
-19.1 '\enspace' & '\quad' & '\qquad'
+19.1 ‘\enspace’ & ‘\quad’ & ‘\qquad’
====================================
Synopsis, one of:
@@ -12031,15 +12121,15 @@
\qquad\includegraphics{mensmile.png}
\end{center}
-*Note Spacing in math mode::, for '\quad' and '\qquad'. These are
+*Note Spacing in math mode::, for ‘\quad’ and ‘\qquad’. These are
lengths from centuries of typesetting and so may be a better choice in
many circumstances than arbitrary lengths, such as you get with
-'\hspace'.
+‘\hspace’.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \hspace, Next: \hfill, Prev: \enspace & \quad & \qquad, Up: Spaces
-19.2 '\hspace'
+19.2 ‘\hspace’
==============
Synopsis, one of:
@@ -12049,17 +12139,17 @@
Insert the amount LENGTH of horizontal space. The LENGTH can be
positive, negative, or zero; adding a negative amount of space is like
-backspacing. It is a rubber length, that is, it may contain a 'plus' or
-'minus' component, or both (*note Lengths::). Because the space is
-stretchable and shrinkable, it is sometimes called "glue".
+backspacing. It is a rubber length, that is, it may contain a ‘plus’ or
+‘minus’ component, or both (*note Lengths::). Because the space is
+stretchable and shrinkable, it is sometimes called “glue”.
- This makes a line with 'Name:' an inch from the right margin.
+ This makes a line with ‘Name:’ an inch from the right margin.
\noindent\makebox[\linewidth][r]{Name:\hspace{1in}}
- The '*'-form inserts horizontal space that is non-discardable. More
-precisely, when TeX breaks a paragraph into lines any white space--glues
-and kerns--that come at a line break are discarded. The '*'-form avoids
+ The ‘*’-form inserts horizontal space that is non-discardable. More
+precisely, when TeX breaks a paragraph into lines any white space—glues
+and kerns—that come at a line break are discarded. The ‘*’-form avoids
that (technically, it adds a non-discardable invisible item in front of
the space).
@@ -12071,10 +12161,10 @@
conceived in \hspace*{1in}, and dedicated to the proposition
that all men are created \hspace*{1in}.}
-the 1 inch blank following 'conceived in' falls at the start of a line.
-If you erase the '*' then LaTeX discards the blank.
+the 1 inch blank following ‘conceived in’ falls at the start of a line.
+If you erase the ‘*’ then LaTeX discards the blank.
- Here, the '\hspace' separates the three graphics.
+ Here, the ‘\hspace’ separates the three graphics.
\begin{center}
\includegraphics{lion.png}% comment keeps out extra space
@@ -12082,14 +12172,14 @@
\hspace{1cm minus 0.25cm}\includegraphics{bear.png}
\end{center}
-Because the argument to each '\hspace' has 'minus 0.25cm', each can
-shrink a little if the three figures are too wide. But each space won't
+Because the argument to each ‘\hspace’ has ‘minus 0.25cm’, each can
+shrink a little if the three figures are too wide. But each space won’t
shrink more than 0.25cm (*note Lengths::).
File: latex2e.info, Node: \hfill, Next: \hss, Prev: \hspace, Up: Spaces
-19.3 '\hfill'
+19.3 ‘\hfill’
=============
Synopsis:
@@ -12099,14 +12189,14 @@
Produce a rubber length which has no natural space but that can
stretch horizontally as far as needed (*note Lengths::).
- This creates a one-line paragraph with 'Name:' on the left side of
-the page and 'Quiz One' on the right.
+ This creates a one-line paragraph with ‘Name:’ on the left side of
+the page and ‘Quiz One’ on the right.
\noindent Name:\hfill Quiz One
- The '\hfill' command is equivalent to '\hspace{\fill}' and so the
+ The ‘\hfill’ command is equivalent to ‘\hspace{\fill}’ and so the
space can be discarded at line breaks. To avoid that instead use
-'\hspace*{\fill}' (*note \hspace::).
+‘\hspace*{\fill}’ (*note \hspace::).
Here the graphs are evenly spaced in the middle of the figure.
@@ -12120,12 +12210,12 @@
\caption{Comparison of two graphs} \label{fig:twographs}
\end{figure}
-Note the '\hspace*''s where the space could otherwise be dropped.
+Note the ‘\hspace*’’s where the space could otherwise be dropped.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \hss, Next: \spacefactor, Prev: \hfill, Up: Spaces
-19.4 '\hss'
+19.4 ‘\hss’
===========
Synopsis:
@@ -12134,10 +12224,10 @@
Produce a horizontal space that is infinitely shrinkable as well as
infinitely stretchable (this command is a TeX primitive). LaTeX authors
-should reach first for the '\makebox' command to get the effects of
-'\hss' (*note \mbox & \makebox::).
+should reach first for the ‘\makebox’ command to get the effects of
+‘\hss’ (*note \mbox & \makebox::).
- Here, the first line's '\hss' makes the Z stick out to the right,
+ Here, the first line’s ‘\hss’ makes the Z stick out to the right,
overwriting the Y. In the second line the Z sticks out to the left,
overwriting the X.
@@ -12144,13 +12234,13 @@
X\hbox to 0pt{Z\hss}Y
X\hbox to 0pt{\hss Z}Y
-Without the '\hss' you get something like 'Overfull \hbox (6.11111pt too
-wide) detected at line 20'.
+Without the ‘\hss’ you get something like ‘Overfull \hbox (6.11111pt too
+wide) detected at line 20’.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \spacefactor, Next: \(SPACE), Prev: \hss, Up: Spaces
-19.5 '\spacefactor'
+19.5 ‘\spacefactor’
===================
Synopsis:
@@ -12157,17 +12247,17 @@
\spacefactor=INTEGER
- Influence LaTeX's glue stretch and shrink behavior. Most user-level
+ Influence LaTeX’s glue stretch and shrink behavior. Most user-level
documents do not use this command.
While LaTeX is laying out the material, it may stretch or shrink the
gaps between words. (This space is not a character; it is called the
-"interword glue"; *note \hspace::). The '\spacefactor' command (from
+“interword glue”; *note \hspace::). The ‘\spacefactor’ command (from
Plain TeX) allows you to, for instance, have the space after a period
stretch more than the space after a word-ending letter.
After LaTeX places each character, or rule or other box, it sets a
-parameter called the "space factor". If the next thing in the input is
+parameter called the “space factor”. If the next thing in the input is
a space then this parameter affects how much stretching or shrinking can
happen. A space factor that is larger than the normal value means that
the glue can stretch more and shrink less. Normally, the space factor
@@ -12178,19 +12268,19 @@
bracket, or closing double quote or single quote. Finally, it is 999
after a capital letter.
- If the space factor F is 1000 then the glue gap will be the font's
+ If the space factor F is 1000 then the glue gap will be the font’s
normal space value (for Computer Modern Roman 10 point this is
3.3333 points). Otherwise, if the space factor F is greater than 2000
-then TeX adds the font's extra space value (for Computer Modern Roman 10
-point this is 1.11111 points), and then the font's normal stretch value
+then TeX adds the font’s extra space value (for Computer Modern Roman 10
+point this is 1.11111 points), and then the font’s normal stretch value
is multiplied by f /1000 and the normal shrink value is multiplied by
1000/f (for Computer Modern Roman 10 point these are 1.66666 and
1.11111 points).
- For example, consider the period ending 'A man's best friend is his
-dog.' After it, TeX puts in a fixed extra space, and also allows the
+ For example, consider the period ending ‘A man's best friend is his
+dog.’ After it, TeX puts in a fixed extra space, and also allows the
glue to stretch 3 times as much and shrink 1/3 as much, as the glue
-after 'friend', which does not end in a period.
+after ‘friend’, which does not end in a period.
The rules for space factors are even more complex because they play
additional roles. In practice, there are two consequences. First, if a
@@ -12202,13 +12292,13 @@
ordinary space. This second case also affects abbreviations that do not
end in a capital letter (*note \@::).
- You can only use '\spacefactor' in paragraph mode or LR mode (*note
-Modes::). You can see the current value with '\the\spacefactor' or
-'\showthe\spacefactor'.
+ You can only use ‘\spacefactor’ in paragraph mode or LR mode (*note
+Modes::). You can see the current value with ‘\the\spacefactor’ or
+‘\showthe\spacefactor’.
- (Comment, not really related to '\spacefactor': if you get errors
-like 'You can't use `\spacefactor' in vertical mode', or 'You can't use
-`\spacefactor' in math mode.', or 'Improper \spacefactor' then you have
+ (Comment, not really related to ‘\spacefactor’: if you get errors
+like ‘You can't use `\spacefactor' in vertical mode’, or ‘You can't use
+`\spacefactor' in math mode.’, or ‘Improper \spacefactor’ then you have
probably tried to redefine an internal command. *Note \makeatletter &
\makeatother::.)
@@ -12221,7 +12311,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \@, Next: \frenchspacing & \nonfrenchspacing, Up: \spacefactor
-19.5.1 '\@'
+19.5.1 ‘\@’
-----------
Synopsis:
@@ -12241,12 +12331,12 @@
The songs \textit{Red Guitar}, etc.\ are by Loudon Wainwright~III\@.
The second period ends the sentence, despite that it is preceded by a
-capital. We tell LaTeX that it ends the sentence by putting '\@' before
-it. The first period ends the abbreviation 'etc.' but not the sentence.
-The backslash-space, '\ ', produces a mid-sentence space.
+capital. We tell LaTeX that it ends the sentence by putting ‘\@’ before
+it. The first period ends the abbreviation ‘etc.’ but not the sentence.
+The backslash-space, ‘\ ’, produces a mid-sentence space.
So: if you have a capital letter followed by a period that ends the
-sentence, then put '\@' before the period. This holds even if there is
+sentence, then put ‘\@’ before the period. This holds even if there is
an intervening right parenthesis or bracket, or right single or double
quote, because the spacing effect of that period carries through those
characters. For example, this
@@ -12256,21 +12346,21 @@
will have correct inter-sentence spacing after the period.
- The '\@' command is only for a text mode. If you use it outside of a
-text mode then you get 'You can't use `\spacefactor' in vertical mode'
+ The ‘\@’ command is only for a text mode. If you use it outside of a
+text mode then you get ‘You can't use `\spacefactor' in vertical mode’
(*note Modes::).
Comment: the converse case is a period ending an abbreviation whose
last letter is not a capital letter, and that abbreviation is not the
last word in the sentence. For that case follow the period with a
-backslash-space, ('\ '), or a tie, ('~'), or '\@'. Examples are 'Nat.\
-Acad.\ Science', and 'Mr.~Bean', and '(manure, etc.\@) for sale' (note
-in the last one that the '\@' comes before the closing parenthesis).
+backslash-space, (‘\ ’), or a tie, (‘~’), or ‘\@’. Examples are ‘Nat.\
+Acad.\ Science’, and ‘Mr.~Bean’, and ‘(manure, etc.\@) for sale’ (note
+in the last one that the ‘\@’ comes before the closing parenthesis).
File: latex2e.info, Node: \frenchspacing & \nonfrenchspacing, Next: \normalsfcodes, Prev: \@, Up: \spacefactor
-19.5.2 '\frenchspacing' & '\nonfrenchspacing'
+19.5.2 ‘\frenchspacing’ & ‘\nonfrenchspacing’
---------------------------------------------
Synopsis, one of:
@@ -12287,7 +12377,7 @@
Some typographic traditions, including English, prefer to adjust the
space between sentences (or spaces following a question mark,
exclamation point, comma, or colon) more than the space between words
-that are in the middle of a sentence. Declaring '\frenchspacing' (the
+that are in the middle of a sentence. Declaring ‘\frenchspacing’ (the
command is from plain TeX) switches to the tradition that all spaces are
treated equally.
@@ -12294,7 +12384,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \normalsfcodes, Prev: \frenchspacing & \nonfrenchspacing, Up: \spacefactor
-19.5.3 '\normalsfcodes'
+19.5.3 ‘\normalsfcodes’
-----------------------
Synopsis:
@@ -12307,7 +12397,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \(SPACE), Next: ~, Prev: \spacefactor, Up: Spaces
-19.6 Backslash-space, '\ '
+19.6 Backslash-space, ‘\ ’
==========================
This section refers to the command consisting of two characters, a
@@ -12336,35 +12426,35 @@
the bottom line asks for three spaces so the white area is wider. That
is, the backslash-space command creates a fixed amount of horizontal
space. (Note that you can define a horizontal space of any width at all
-with '\hspace'; see *note \hspace::.)
+with ‘\hspace’; see *note \hspace::.)
The backslash-space command has two main uses. It is often used
after control sequences to keep them from gobbling the blank that
-follows, as after '\TeX' in '\TeX\ (or \LaTeX)'. (But using curly
+follows, as after ‘\TeX’ in ‘\TeX\ (or \LaTeX)’. (But using curly
braces has the advantage of still working whether the next character is
-a blank or any other non-letter, as in '\TeX{} (or \LaTeX{})' in which
-'{}' can be added after '\LaTeX' as well as after '\TeX'.) The other
+a blank or any other non-letter, as in ‘\TeX{} (or \LaTeX{})’ in which
+‘{}’ can be added after ‘\LaTeX’ as well as after ‘\TeX’.) The other
common use is that it marks a period as ending an abbreviation instead
-of ending a sentence, as in 'Prof.\ Smith' or 'Jones et al.\ (1993)'
+of ending a sentence, as in ‘Prof.\ Smith’ or ‘Jones et al.\ (1993)’
(*note \@::).
- Under normal circumstances, '\'<TAB> and '\'<NEWLINE> are equivalent
-to backslash-space, '\ '.
+ Under normal circumstances, ‘\’<TAB> and ‘\’<NEWLINE> are equivalent
+to backslash-space, ‘\ ’.
Please also note that in order to allow source code indentation,
under normal circumstances, TeX ignores leading blanks in a line. So
-the following prints 'one word':
+the following prints ‘one word’:
one
word
-where the white space between 'one' and 'word' is produced by the
-newline after 'one', not by the space before 'word'.
+where the white space between ‘one’ and ‘word’ is produced by the
+newline after ‘one’, not by the space before ‘word’.
File: latex2e.info, Node: ~, Next: \thinspace & \negthinspace, Prev: \(SPACE), Up: Spaces
-19.7 '~'
+19.7 ‘~’
========
Synopsis:
@@ -12371,14 +12461,14 @@
BEFORE~AFTER
- The "tie" character, '~', produces a space between BEFORE and AFTER
+ The “tie” character, ‘~’, produces a space between BEFORE and AFTER
at which the line will not be broken. By default the white space has
length 3.33333pt plus 1.66666pt minus 1.11111pt (*note Lengths::).
- Note that the word 'tie' has this meaning in the TeX/Texinfo
-community; this differs from the typographic term "tie", which is a
-diacritic in the shape of an arc, called a "tie-after" accent in 'The
-TeXbook'.
+ Note that the word ‘tie’ has this meaning in the TeX/Texinfo
+community; this differs from the typographic term “tie”, which is a
+diacritic in the shape of an arc, called a “tie-after” accent in ‘The
+TeXbook’.
Here LaTeX will not break the line between the final two words:
@@ -12390,49 +12480,49 @@
Ties prevent the end of line separation of things where that could
cause confusion. They also still allow hyphenation (of either of the
tied words), so they are generally preferable to putting consecutive
-words in an '\mbox' (*note \mbox & \makebox::).
+words in an ‘\mbox’ (*note \mbox & \makebox::).
They are also matters of taste, sometimes alarmingly dogmatic taste,
among readers. Nevertheless, here are some usage models, many of them
-from 'The TeXbook'.
+from ‘The TeXbook’.
- * Between an enumerator label and number, such as in references:
- 'Chapter~12', or 'Theorem~\ref{th:Wilsons}', or
- 'Figure~\ref{fig:KGraph}'.
+ • Between an enumerator label and number, such as in references:
+ ‘Chapter~12’, or ‘Theorem~\ref{th:Wilsons}’, or
+ ‘Figure~\ref{fig:KGraph}’.
- * When cases are enumerated inline: '(b)~Show that $f(x)$ is
- (1)~continuous, and (2)~bounded'.
+ • When cases are enumerated inline: ‘(b)~Show that $f(x)$ is
+ (1)~continuous, and (2)~bounded’.
- * Between a number and its unit: '$745.7.8$~watts' (the 'siunitx'
- package has a special facility for this) or '144~eggs'. This
- includes between a month and day number in a date: 'October~12' or
- '12~Oct'. In general, in any expressions where numbers and
- abbreviations or symbols are separated by a space: 'AD~565', or
- '2:50~pm', or 'Boeing~747', or '268~Plains Road', or
- '\$$1.4$~billion'. Other common choices here are a thin space
+ • Between a number and its unit: ‘$745.7.8$~watts’ (the ‘siunitx’
+ package has a special facility for this) or ‘144~eggs’. This
+ includes between a month and day number in a date: ‘October~12’ or
+ ‘12~Oct’. In general, in any expressions where numbers and
+ abbreviations or symbols are separated by a space: ‘AD~565’, or
+ ‘2:50~pm’, or ‘Boeing~747’, or ‘268~Plains Road’, or
+ ‘\$$1.4$~billion’. Other common choices here are a thin space
(*note \thinspace & \negthinspace::) and no space at all.
- * When mathematical phrases are rendered in words: 'equals~$n$', or
- 'less than~$\epsilon$', or 'given~$X$', or 'modulo~$p^e$ for all
- large~$n$' (but compare 'is~$15$' with 'is $15$~times the height').
+ • When mathematical phrases are rendered in words: ‘equals~$n$’, or
+ ‘less than~$\epsilon$’, or ‘given~$X$’, or ‘modulo~$p^e$ for all
+ large~$n$’ (but compare ‘is~$15$’ with ‘is $15$~times the height’).
Between mathematical symbols in apposition with nouns:
- 'dimension~$d$' or 'function~$f(x)$' (but compare 'with length
- $l$~or more'). When a symbol is a tightly bound object of a
- preposition: 'of~$x$', or 'from $0$ to~$1$', or 'in common
- with~$m$'.
+ ‘dimension~$d$’ or ‘function~$f(x)$’ (but compare ‘with length
+ $l$~or more’). When a symbol is a tightly bound object of a
+ preposition: ‘of~$x$’, or ‘from $0$ to~$1$’, or ‘in common
+ with~$m$’.
- * Between symbols in series: '$1$,~$2$, or~$3$' or '$1$,~$2$,
- \ldots,~$n$'.
+ • Between symbols in series: ‘$1$,~$2$, or~$3$’ or ‘$1$,~$2$,
+ \ldots,~$n$’.
- * Between a person's given names and between multiple surnames:
- 'Donald~E. Knuth', or 'Luis~I. Trabb~Pardo', or 'Charles~XII'--but
- you must give TeX places to break the line so you might do 'Charles
- Louis Xavier~Joseph de~la Vall\'ee~Poussin'.
+ • Between a person’s given names and between multiple surnames:
+ ‘Donald~E. Knuth’, or ‘Luis~I. Trabb~Pardo’, or ‘Charles~XII’—but
+ you must give TeX places to break the line so you might do ‘Charles
+ Louis Xavier~Joseph de~la Vall\'ee~Poussin’.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \thinspace & \negthinspace, Next: \/, Prev: ~, Up: Spaces
-19.8 '\thinspace' & '\negthinspace'
+19.8 ‘\thinspace’ & ‘\negthinspace’
===================================
Synopsis, one of:
@@ -12441,30 +12531,30 @@
\negthinspace
These produce unbreakable and unstretchable spaces of 1/6em and
--1/6em, respectively. These are the text mode equivalents of '\,' and
-'\!' (*note Spacing in math mode/\thinspace::).
+-1/6em, respectively. These are the text mode equivalents of ‘\,’ and
+‘\!’ (*note Spacing in math mode/\thinspace::).
- You can use '\,' as a synonym for '\thinspace' in text mode.
+ You can use ‘\,’ as a synonym for ‘\thinspace’ in text mode.
- One common use of '\thinspace' is as the space between nested quotes:
+ One common use of ‘\thinspace’ is as the space between nested quotes:
Killick replied, ``I heard the Captain say, `Ahoy there.'\thinspace''
-Another use is that some style guides call for a '\thinspace' between an
+Another use is that some style guides call for a ‘\thinspace’ between an
ellipsis and a sentence ending period (other style guides, think the
three dots and/or four dots are plenty). Another style-specific use is
-between initials, as in 'D.\thinspace E.\ Knuth'.
+between initials, as in ‘D.\thinspace E.\ Knuth’.
LaTeX provides a variety of similar spacing commands for math mode
-(*note Spacing in math mode::). With the 'amsmath' package, or as of
+(*note Spacing in math mode::). With the ‘amsmath’ package, or as of
the 2020-10-01 LaTeX release, they can be used in text mode as well as
-math mode, including '\!' for '\negthinspace'; but otherwise, they are
+math mode, including ‘\!’ for ‘\negthinspace’; but otherwise, they are
available only in math mode.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \/, Next: \hrulefill & \dotfill, Prev: \thinspace & \negthinspace, Up: Spaces
-19.9 '\/'
+19.9 ‘\/’
=========
Synopsis:
@@ -12471,13 +12561,13 @@
BEFORE-CHARACTER\/AFTER-CHARACTER
- Insert an "italic correction", a small space defined by the font
+ Insert an “italic correction”, a small space defined by the font
designer for each character (possibly zero), to avoid the character
-colliding with whatever follows. When you use '\/', LaTeX takes the
+colliding with whatever follows. When you use ‘\/’, LaTeX takes the
correction from the font metric file, scales it by any scaling that has
been applied to the font, and then inserts that much horizontal space.
- Here, were it not for the '\/', the BEFORE-CHARACTER italic f would
+ Here, were it not for the ‘\/’, the BEFORE-CHARACTER italic f would
hit the AFTER-CHARACTER roman H
\newcommand{\companylogo}{{\it f}\/H}
@@ -12484,25 +12574,25 @@
because the italic letter f leans far to the right.
- If AFTER-CHARACTER is a period or comma then don't insert an italic
+ If AFTER-CHARACTER is a period or comma then don’t insert an italic
correction since those punctuation symbols are so low to the baseline
already. However, with semicolons or colons, as well as with normal
letters, the italic correction can help. It is typically used between a
switch from italic or slanted fonts to an upright font.
- When you use commands such as '\emph' and '\textit' and '\textsl' to
+ When you use commands such as ‘\emph’ and ‘\textit’ and ‘\textsl’ to
change fonts, LaTeX automatically inserts the italic correction when
-needed (*note Font styles::). However, declarations such as '\em' and
-'\itshape' and '\slshape' do not automatically insert italic
+needed (*note Font styles::). However, declarations such as ‘\em’ and
+‘\itshape’ and ‘\slshape’ do not automatically insert italic
corrections.
Upright characters can also have an italic correction. An example
-where this is needed is the name 'pdf\/\TeX'. However, most upright
+where this is needed is the name ‘pdf\/\TeX’. However, most upright
characters have a zero italic correction. Some font creators do not
include italic correction values even for italic fonts.
Technically, LaTeX uses another font-specific value, the so-called
-"slant parameter" (namely '\fontdimen1'), to determine whether to
+“slant parameter” (namely ‘\fontdimen1’), to determine whether to
possibly insert an italic correction, rather than tying the action to
particular font commands.
@@ -12512,7 +12602,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \hrulefill & \dotfill, Next: \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip, Prev: \/, Up: Spaces
-19.10 '\hrulefill' & '\dotfill'
+19.10 ‘\hrulefill’ & ‘\dotfill’
===============================
Synopsis, one of:
@@ -12534,10 +12624,10 @@
\noindent John Aubrey, RN \dotfill{} Melbury Lodge
- To make the rule or dots go to the line's end use '\null' at the
+ To make the rule or dots go to the line’s end use ‘\null’ at the
start or end.
- To change the rule's thickness, copy the definition and adjust it, as
+ To change the rule’s thickness, copy the definition and adjust it, as
here
\renewcommand{\hrulefill}{%
@@ -12564,7 +12654,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip, Next: \bigbreak & \medbreak & \smallbreak, Prev: \hrulefill & \dotfill, Up: Spaces
-19.11 '\bigskip' & '\medskip' & '\smallskip'
+19.11 ‘\bigskip’ & ‘\medskip’ & ‘\smallskip’
============================================
Synopsis, one of:
@@ -12577,7 +12667,7 @@
These commands are fragile (*note \protect::).
Here the skip suggests the passage of time (from The Golden Ocean by
-O'Brian).
+O’Brian).
Mr Saumarez would have something rude to say to him, no doubt: he
was at home again, and it was delightful.
@@ -12589,27 +12679,27 @@
Each command is associated with a length defined in the document
class file.
-'\bigskip'
- The same as '\vspace{\bigskipamount}', ordinarily about one line
- space, with stretch and shrink. The default for the 'book' and
- 'article' classes is '12pt plus 4pt minus 4pt'.
+‘\bigskip’
+ The same as ‘\vspace{\bigskipamount}’, ordinarily about one line
+ space, with stretch and shrink. The default for the ‘book’ and
+ ‘article’ classes is ‘12pt plus 4pt minus 4pt’.
-'\medskip'
- The same as '\vspace{\medskipamount}', ordinarily about half of a
- line space, with stretch and shrink. The default for the 'book'
- and 'article' classes is '6pt plus 2pt minus 2pt'.
+‘\medskip’
+ The same as ‘\vspace{\medskipamount}’, ordinarily about half of a
+ line space, with stretch and shrink. The default for the ‘book’
+ and ‘article’ classes is ‘6pt plus 2pt minus 2pt’.
-'\smallskip'
- The same as '\vspace{\smallskipamount}', ordinarily about a quarter
+‘\smallskip’
+ The same as ‘\vspace{\smallskipamount}’, ordinarily about a quarter
of a line space, with stretch and shrink. The default for the
- 'book' and 'article' classes is '3pt plus 1pt minus 1pt'.
+ ‘book’ and ‘article’ classes is ‘3pt plus 1pt minus 1pt’.
- Because each command is a '\vspace', if you use it in mid-paragraph
+ Because each command is a ‘\vspace’, if you use it in mid-paragraph
then it will insert its vertical space between the line in which you use
it and the next line, not necessarily at the place that you use it. So
these are best between paragraphs.
- The commands '\bigbreak', '\medbreak', and '\smallbreak' are similar
+ The commands ‘\bigbreak’, ‘\medbreak’, and ‘\smallbreak’ are similar
but also suggest to LaTeX that this is a good place to put a page break
(*note \bigbreak & \medbreak & \smallbreak::.
@@ -12616,7 +12706,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \bigbreak & \medbreak & \smallbreak, Next: \strut, Prev: \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip, Up: Spaces
-19.12 '\bigbreak' & '\medbreak' & '\smallbreak'
+19.12 ‘\bigbreak’ & ‘\medbreak’ & ‘\smallbreak’
===============================================
Synopsis, one of:
@@ -12627,12 +12717,12 @@
Produce a vertical space that is big or medium-sized or small, and
suggest to LaTeX that this is a good place to break the page. (The
-associated penalties are -200, -100, and -50.)
+associated penalties are respectively −200, −100, and −50.)
*Note \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip::, for more. These commands
produce the same vertical space but differ in that they also remove a
preceding vertical space if it is less than what they would insert (as
-with '\addvspace'). In addition, they terminate a paragraph where they
+with ‘\addvspace’). In addition, they terminate a paragraph where they
are used: this example
abc\bigbreak def ghi
@@ -12639,14 +12729,14 @@
jkl mno pqr
-will output three paragraphs, the first ending in 'abc' and the second
+will output three paragraphs, the first ending in ‘abc’ and the second
starting, after an extra vertical space and a paragraph indent, with
-'def'.
+‘def’.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \strut, Next: \vspace, Prev: \bigbreak & \medbreak & \smallbreak, Up: Spaces
-19.13 '\strut'
+19.13 ‘\strut’
==============
Synopsis:
@@ -12653,13 +12743,13 @@
\strut
- Ensure that the current line has height at least '0.7\baselineskip'
-and depth at least '0.3\baselineskip'. Essentially, LaTeX inserts into
+ Ensure that the current line has height at least ‘0.7\baselineskip’
+and depth at least ‘0.3\baselineskip’. Essentially, LaTeX inserts into
the line a rectangle having zero width,
-'\rule[-0.3\baselineskip]{0pt}{\baselineskip}' (*note \rule::). The
-'\baselineskip' changes with the current font or fontsize.
+‘\rule[-0.3\baselineskip]{0pt}{\baselineskip}’ (*note \rule::). The
+‘\baselineskip’ changes with the current font or fontsize.
- In this example the '\strut' keeps the box inside the frame from
+ In this example the ‘\strut’ keeps the box inside the frame from
having zero height.
\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}\framebox[2in]{\strut}
@@ -12666,7 +12756,7 @@
This example has four lists. In the first there is a much bigger gap
between items 2 and 3 than there is between items 1 and 2. The second
-list fixes that with a '\strut' at the end of its first item's second
+list fixes that with a ‘\strut’ at the end of its first item’s second
line.
\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}
@@ -12699,23 +12789,23 @@
\end{enumerate}
\end{minipage}%
-The final two lists use '\fbox' to show what's happening. The first
-item '\parbox' of the third list goes only to the bottom of its second
-'test', which happens not have any characters that descend below the
+The final two lists use ‘\fbox’ to show what’s happening. The first
+item ‘\parbox’ of the third list goes only to the bottom of its second
+‘test’, which happens not have any characters that descend below the
baseline. The fourth list adds the strut that gives the needed extra
below-baseline space.
- The '\strut' command is often useful in graphics, such as in 'TikZ'
-or 'Asymptote'. For instance, you may have a command such as
-'\graphnode{NODE-NAME}' that fits a circle around NODE-NAME. However,
-unless you are careful the NODE-NAME's 'x' and 'y' will produce
+ The ‘\strut’ command is often useful in graphics, such as in ‘TikZ’
+or ‘Asymptote’. For instance, you may have a command such as
+‘\graphnode{NODE-NAME}’ that fits a circle around NODE-NAME. However,
+unless you are careful the NODE-NAME’s ‘x’ and ‘y’ will produce
different-diameter circles because the characters are different sizes.
-A careful '\graphnode' might insert a '\strut', then NODE-NAME, and then
+A careful ‘\graphnode’ might insert a ‘\strut’, then NODE-NAME, and then
draw the circle.
- The general approach of using a zero width '\rule' is useful in many
+ The general approach of using a zero width ‘\rule’ is useful in many
circumstances. In this table, the zero-width rule keeps the top of the
-first integral from hitting the '\hline'. Similarly, the second rule
+first integral from hitting the ‘\hline’. Similarly, the second rule
keeps the second integral from hitting the first.
\begin{tabular}{rl}
@@ -12726,15 +12816,15 @@
\end{tabular}
(Although the line-ending double backslash command has an available
-optional argument to change the corresponding baseline skip, that won't
+optional argument to change the corresponding baseline skip, that won’t
solve this issue. Changing the first double backslash to something like
-'\\[2.5ex]' will put more room between the header line and the '\hline'
+‘\\[2.5ex]’ will put more room between the header line and the ‘\hline’
rule, and the integral would still hit the rule.)
File: latex2e.info, Node: \vspace, Next: \vfill, Prev: \strut, Up: Spaces
-19.14 '\vspace'
+19.14 ‘\vspace’
===============
Synopsis, one of:
@@ -12743,7 +12833,7 @@
\vspace*{LENGTH}
Add the vertical space LENGTH. The LENGTH can be positive, negative,
-or zero. It is a rubber length--it may contain a 'plus' or 'minus'
+or zero. It is a rubber length—it may contain a ‘plus’ or ‘minus’
component (*note Lengths::).
This puts space between the two paragraphs.
@@ -12756,9 +12846,9 @@
(*Note \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip::, for common inter-paragraph
spaces.)
- The '*'-form inserts vertical space that is non-discardable. More
+ The ‘*’-form inserts vertical space that is non-discardable. More
precisely, LaTeX discards vertical space at a page break and the
-'*'-form causes the space to stay. This example leaves space between
+‘*’-form causes the space to stay. This example leaves space between
the two questions.
Question: Find the integral of \( 5x^4+5 \).
@@ -12769,10 +12859,10 @@
That space will be present even if the page break happens to fall
between the questions.
- If you use '\vspace' in the middle of a paragraph (i.e., in
+ If you use ‘\vspace’ in the middle of a paragraph (i.e., in
horizontal mode) then the space is inserted after the line containing
-the '\vspace' command; it does not start a new paragraph at the
-'\vspace' command.
+the ‘\vspace’ command; it does not start a new paragraph at the
+‘\vspace’ command.
In this example the two questions will be evenly spaced vertically on
the page, with at least one inch of space below each.
@@ -12788,7 +12878,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \vfill, Next: \addvspace, Prev: \vspace, Up: Spaces
-19.15 '\vfill'
+19.15 ‘\vfill’
==============
Synopsis:
@@ -12799,14 +12889,14 @@
infinite, so it can stretch or shrink as far as needed (*note
Lengths::).
- It is often used in the same way as '\vspace{\fill}', except that
-'\vfill' ends the current paragraph whereas '\vspace{\fill}' adds the
+ It is often used in the same way as ‘\vspace{\fill}’, except that
+‘\vfill’ ends the current paragraph whereas ‘\vspace{\fill}’ adds the
infinite vertical space below its line, irrespective of the paragraph
structure. In both cases that space will disappear at a page boundary;
to circumvent this see the starred option in *note \vspace::.
In this example the page is filled, so the top and bottom lines
-contain the text 'Lost Dog!' and the second 'Lost Dog!' is exactly
+contain the text ‘Lost Dog!’ and the second ‘Lost Dog!’ is exactly
halfway between them.
\begin{document}
@@ -12820,7 +12910,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \addvspace, Prev: \vfill, Up: Spaces
-19.16 '\addvspace'
+19.16 ‘\addvspace’
==================
Synopsis:
@@ -12828,16 +12918,16 @@
\addvspace{VERT-LENGTH}
Add a vertical space of VERT-LENGTH. However, if there are two or
-more '\addvspace''s in a sequence then together they only add the space
+more ‘\addvspace’’s in a sequence then together they only add the space
needed to make the natural length equal to the maximum of the
-VERT-LENGTH's in that sequence. This command is fragile (*note
+VERT-LENGTH’s in that sequence. This command is fragile (*note
\protect::). The VERT-LENGTH is a rubber length (*note Lengths::).
- This example illustrates. The 'picture' draws a scale over which to
+ This example illustrates. The ‘picture’ draws a scale over which to
rules are placed. In a standard LaTeX article the length
-'\baselineskip' is 12pt. As shown by the scale, the two rules are 22pt
-apart: the sum of the '\baselineskip' and the 10pt from the first
-'\addvspace'.
+‘\baselineskip’ is 12pt. As shown by the scale, the two rules are 22pt
+apart: the sum of the ‘\baselineskip’ and the 10pt from the first
+‘\addvspace’.
\documentclass{article}
\usepackage{color}
@@ -12852,21 +12942,21 @@
\par\noindent\rule{0.25\linewidth}{0.1pt}%
\end{document}
-Now uncomment the second '\addvspace'. It does not make the gap 20pt
-longer; instead the gap is the sum of '\baselineskip' and 20pt. So
-'\addvspace' in a sense does the opposite of its name--it makes sure
-that multiple vertical spaces do not accumulate, but instead that only
-the largest one is used.
+Now uncomment the second ‘\addvspace’. It does not make the gap 20pt
+longer; instead the gap is the sum of ‘\baselineskip’ and 20pt. So
+‘\addvspace’ in a sense does the opposite of its name—it makes sure that
+multiple vertical spaces do not accumulate, but instead that only the
+largest one is used.
LaTeX uses this command to adjust the vertical space above or below
-an environment that starts a new paragraph. For instance, a 'theorem'
-environment begins and ends with '\addvspace' so that two consecutive
-'theorem''s are separated by one vertical space, not two.
+an environment that starts a new paragraph. For instance, a ‘theorem’
+environment begins and ends with ‘\addvspace’ so that two consecutive
+‘theorem’’s are separated by one vertical space, not two.
- A error 'Something's wrong--perhaps a missing \item' pointing to an
-'\addvspace' means that you were not in vertical mode when you hit this
-command. One way to change that is to precede '\addvspace' with a
-'\par' command (*note \par::), as in the above example.
+ A error ‘Something's wrong--perhaps a missing \item’ pointing to an
+‘\addvspace’ means that you were not in vertical mode when you hit this
+command. One way to change that is to precede ‘\addvspace’ with a
+‘\par’ command (*note \par::), as in the above example.
File: latex2e.info, Node: Boxes, Next: Color, Prev: Spaces, Up: Top
@@ -12878,7 +12968,7 @@
page. So these commands are central.
There are many packages on CTAN that are useful for manipulating
-boxes. One useful adjunct to the commands here is 'adjustbox'.
+boxes. One useful adjunct to the commands here is ‘adjustbox’.
* Menu:
@@ -12886,14 +12976,14 @@
* \fbox & \framebox:: Put a frame around a box.
* \parbox:: Box with text in paragraph mode.
* \raisebox:: Raise or lower text.
-* \sbox & \savebox:: Like '\makebox' but save the text for later.
-* lrbox:: Environment version of '\sbox'.
+* \sbox & \savebox:: Like ‘\makebox’ but save the text for later.
+* lrbox:: Environment version of ‘\sbox’.
* \usebox:: Print saved text.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \mbox & \makebox, Next: \fbox & \framebox, Up: Boxes
-20.1 '\mbox' & '\makebox'
+20.1 ‘\mbox’ & ‘\makebox’
=========================
Synopsis, one of:
@@ -12904,18 +12994,18 @@
\makebox[WIDTH][POSITION]{TEXT}
Create a box, a container for material. The TEXT is typeset in LR
-mode (*note Modes::) so it is not broken into lines. The '\mbox'
-command is robust, while '\makebox' is fragile (*note \protect::).
+mode (*note Modes::) so it is not broken into lines. The ‘\mbox’
+command is robust, while ‘\makebox’ is fragile (*note \protect::).
- Because 'text' is not broken into lines, you can use '\mbox' to
+ Because ‘text’ is not broken into lines, you can use ‘\mbox’ to
prevent hyphenation. In this example, LaTeX will not hyphenate the tank
-name, 'T-34'.
+name, ‘T-34’.
The soviet tank \mbox{T-34} is a symbol of victory against nazism.
- The first two command synopsis versions, '\mbox' and '\makebox', are
-roughly equivalent. They create a box just wide enough to contain the
-TEXT. (They are like plain TeX's '\hbox'.)
+ The first two command invocations shown, ‘\mbox’ and ‘\makebox’, are
+roughly the same. They create a box just wide enough to contain the
+TEXT. (They are like plain TeX’s ‘\hbox’.)
In the third version the optional argument WIDTH specifies the width
of the box. Note that the space occupied by the text need not equal the
@@ -12924,12 +13014,12 @@
\makebox[\linewidth]{Chapter Exam}
-with 'Chapter Exam' centered. But TEXT can also be too wide for WIDTH.
+with ‘Chapter Exam’ centered. But TEXT can also be too wide for WIDTH.
See the example below of zero-width boxes.
In the WIDTH argument you can use the following lengths that refer to
-the dimension of the box that LaTeX gets on typesetting TEXT: '\depth',
-'\height', '\width', '\totalheight' (this is the box's height plus its
+the dimension of the box that LaTeX gets on typesetting TEXT: ‘\depth’,
+‘\height’, ‘\width’, ‘\totalheight’ (this is the box’s height plus its
depth). For example, to make a box with the text stretched to double
the natural size you can say this.
@@ -12939,23 +13029,23 @@
POSITION gives position of the text within the box. It may take the
following values:
-'c'
+‘c’
The TEXT is centered (default).
-'l'
+‘l’
The TEXT is flush left.
-'r'
+‘r’
Flush right.
-'s'
+‘s’
Stretch the interword space in TEXT across the entire WIDTH. The
TEXT must contain stretchable space for this to work. For
instance, this could head a press release:
- '\noindent\makebox[\textwidth][s]{\large\hfil IMMEDIATE\hfil
- RELEASE\hfil}'
+ ‘\noindent\makebox[\textwidth][s]{\large\hfil IMMEDIATE\hfil
+ RELEASE\hfil}’
- A common use of '\makebox' is to make zero-width text boxes. This
+ A common use of ‘\makebox’ is to make zero-width text boxes. This
puts the value of the quiz questions to the left of those questions.
\newcommand{\pts}[1]{\makebox[0em][r]{#1 points\hspace*{1em}}}
@@ -12963,10 +13053,9 @@
\pts{90}An African or European swallow?
-
- The right edge of the output '10 points ' (note the ending space
-after 'points') will be just before the 'What'. You can use '\makebox'
-similarly when making graphics, such as in 'TikZ' or 'Asymptote', where
+ The right edge of the output ‘10 points ’ (note the ending space
+after ‘points’) will be just before the ‘What’. You can use ‘\makebox’
+similarly when making graphics, such as in ‘TikZ’ or ‘Asymptote’, where
you put the edge of the text at a known location, regardless of the
length of that text.
@@ -12973,20 +13062,20 @@
For boxes with frames see *note \fbox & \framebox::. For colors
see *note Colored boxes::.
- There is a related version of '\makebox' that is used within the
-'picture' environment, where the length is given in terms of
-'\unitlength' (*note \makebox (picture)::).
+ There is a related version of ‘\makebox’ that is used within the
+‘picture’ environment, where the length is given in terms of
+‘\unitlength’ (*note \makebox (picture)::).
- As TEXT is typeset in LR mode, neither a double backslash '\\' nor
-'\par' will give you a new line; for instance '\makebox{abc def \\ ghi}'
-outputs 'abc defghi' while '\makebox{abc def \par ghi}' outputs 'abc def
-ghi', both on a single line. To get multiple lines see *note \parbox::
+ As TEXT is typeset in LR mode, neither a double backslash ‘\\’ nor
+‘\par’ will give you a new line; for instance ‘\makebox{abc def \\ ghi}’
+outputs ‘abc defghi’ while ‘\makebox{abc def \par ghi}’ outputs ‘abc def
+ghi’, both on a single line. To get multiple lines see *note \parbox::
and *note minipage::.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \fbox & \framebox, Next: \parbox, Prev: \mbox & \makebox, Up: Boxes
-20.2 '\fbox' & '\framebox'
+20.2 ‘\fbox’ & ‘\framebox’
==========================
Synopses, one of:
@@ -12997,9 +13086,9 @@
\framebox[WIDTH][POSITION]{TEXT}
Create a box with an enclosing frame, four rules surrounding the
-TEXT. These commands are the same as '\mbox' and '\makebox' except for
-the frame (*note \mbox & \makebox::). The '\fbox' command is robust,
-the '\framebox' command is fragile (*note \protect::).
+TEXT. These commands are the same as ‘\mbox’ and ‘\makebox’ except for
+the frame (*note \mbox & \makebox::). The ‘\fbox’ command is robust,
+the ‘\framebox’ command is fragile (*note \protect::).
\fbox{Warning! No work shown, no credit given.}
@@ -13007,7 +13096,7 @@
that box, separated from it by a small gap, are four rules making a
frame.
- The first two command invocations, '\fbox{...}' and '\framebox{...}',
+ The first two command invocations, ‘\fbox{...}’ and ‘\framebox{...}’,
are roughly the same. As to the third and fourth invocations, the
optional arguments allow you to specify the box width as WIDTH and the
position of the text inside that box as POSITION. *Note \mbox &
@@ -13016,18 +13105,18 @@
\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}\framebox[0.25in]{\strut}}
-The '\strut' ensures a total height of '\baselineskip' (*note \strut::).
+The ‘\strut’ ensures a total height of ‘\baselineskip’ (*note \strut::).
These parameters determine the frame layout.
-'\fboxrule'
+‘\fboxrule’
The thickness of the rules around the enclosed box. The default is
0.2pt. Change it with a command such as
- '\setlength{\fboxrule}{0.8pt}' (*note \setlength::).
+ ‘\setlength{\fboxrule}{0.8pt}’ (*note \setlength::).
-'\fboxsep'
+‘\fboxsep’
The distance from the frame to the enclosed box. The default is
- 3pt. Change it with a command such as '\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}'
+ 3pt. Change it with a command such as ‘\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}’
(*note \setlength::). Setting it to 0pt is useful sometimes: this
will put a frame around the picture with no white border.
@@ -13035,9 +13124,9 @@
\framebox{%
\includegraphics[width=0.5\textwidth]{prudence.jpg}}}
- The extra curly braces keep the effect of the '\setlength' local.
+ The extra curly braces keep the effect of the ‘\setlength’ local.
- As with '\mbox' and '\makebox', LaTeX will not break lines in TEXT.
+ As with ‘\mbox’ and ‘\makebox’, LaTeX will not break lines in TEXT.
But this example has LaTeX break lines to make a paragraph, and then
frame the result.
@@ -13049,14 +13138,14 @@
*Note Colored boxes::, for colors other than black and white.
- The 'picture' environment has a version of the '\framebox' command
-where the units depend on 'picture''s '\unitlength' (*note \framebox
+ The ‘picture’ environment has a version of the ‘\framebox’ command
+where the units depend on ‘picture’’s ‘\unitlength’ (*note \framebox
(picture)::).
File: latex2e.info, Node: \parbox, Next: \raisebox, Prev: \fbox & \framebox, Up: Boxes
-20.3 '\parbox'
+20.3 ‘\parbox’
==============
Synopses, one of:
@@ -13078,11 +13167,11 @@
\end{picture}
The CONTENTS are processed in a text mode (*note Modes::) so LaTeX
-will break lines to make a paragraph. But it won't make multiple
-paragraphs; for that, use a 'minipage' environment (*note minipage::).
+will break lines to make a paragraph. But it won’t make multiple
+paragraphs; for that, use a ‘minipage’ environment (*note minipage::).
- The options for '\parbox' (except for CONTENTS) are the same as those
-for 'minipage'. For convenience a summary of the options is here but
+ The options for ‘\parbox’ (except for CONTENTS) are the same as those
+for ‘minipage’. For convenience a summary of the options is here but
see *note minipage:: for a complete description.
There are two required arguments. The WIDTH is a rigid length (*note
@@ -13091,26 +13180,26 @@
should not have any paragraph-making components.
There are three optional arguments, POSITION, HEIGHT, and INNER-POS.
-The POSITION gives the vertical alignment of the "parbox" with respect
-to the surrounding material. The supported values are 'c' or 'm' to
+The POSITION gives the vertical alignment of the “parbox” with respect
+to the surrounding material. The supported values are ‘c’ or ‘m’ to
make the vertical center of the parbox lines up with the center of the
-adjacent text line (this is the default), or 't' to match the top line
-of the parbox with the baseline of the surrounding material, or 'b' to
+adjacent text line (this is the default), or ‘t’ to match the top line
+of the parbox with the baseline of the surrounding material, or ‘b’ to
match the bottom line.
The optional argument HEIGHT overrides the natural height of the box.
The optional argument INNER-POS controls the placement of CONTENT
-inside the 'parbox'. Its default is the value of POSITION. Its
-possible values are: 't' to put the CONTENT at the top of the box, 'c'
-to put it in the vertical center, 'b' to put it at the bottom of the
-box, and 's' to stretch it out vertically (for this, the text must
+inside the ‘parbox’. Its default is the value of POSITION. Its
+possible values are: ‘t’ to put the CONTENT at the top of the box, ‘c’
+to put it in the vertical center, ‘b’ to put it at the bottom of the
+box, and ‘s’ to stretch it out vertically (for this, the text must
contain vertically stretchable space).
File: latex2e.info, Node: \raisebox, Next: \sbox & \savebox, Prev: \parbox, Up: Boxes
-20.4 '\raisebox'
+20.4 ‘\raisebox’
================
Synopsis, one of:
@@ -13138,8 +13227,8 @@
In the arguments DISTANCE, HEIGHT, and DEPTH you can use the
following lengths that refer to the dimension of the box that LaTeX gets
-on typesetting TEXT: '\depth', '\height', '\width', '\totalheight' (this
-is the box's height plus its depth).
+on typesetting TEXT: ‘\depth’, ‘\height’, ‘\width’, ‘\totalheight’ (this
+is the box’s height plus its depth).
This will align two graphics on their top (*note Graphics::).
@@ -13153,13 +13242,13 @@
\includegraphics[width=0.4\linewidth]{meta.png}}
\end{center}
-The first '\height' is the height of 'lion.png' while the second is the
-height of 'meta.png'.
+The first ‘\height’ is the height of ‘lion.png’ while the second is the
+height of ‘meta.png’.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \sbox & \savebox, Next: lrbox, Prev: \raisebox, Up: Boxes
-20.5 '\sbox' & '\savebox'
+20.5 ‘\sbox’ & ‘\savebox’
=========================
Synopsis, one of:
@@ -13169,12 +13258,12 @@
\savebox{BOX-CMD}[WIDTH]{TEXT}
\savebox{BOX-CMD}[WIDTH][POS]{TEXT}
- Typeset TEXT just as with '\makebox' (*note \mbox & \makebox::)
+ Typeset TEXT just as with ‘\makebox’ (*note \mbox & \makebox::)
except that LaTeX does not output it but instead saves it in a box
register referred to by a variable named BOX-CMD. The variable name
-BOX-CMD begins with a backslash, '\'. You must have previously
-allocated the box register BOX-CMD with '\newsavebox' (*note
-\newsavebox::). The '\sbox' command is robust while '\savebox' is
+BOX-CMD begins with a backslash, ‘\’. You must have previously
+allocated the box register BOX-CMD with ‘\newsavebox’ (*note
+\newsavebox::). The ‘\sbox’ command is robust while ‘\savebox’ is
fragile (*note \protect::).
This creates and uses a box register.
@@ -13186,23 +13275,23 @@
Whenever we go out, the people always shout!
There goes \usebox{\fullname}! Ya da da da da da da.
-One advantage of using and reusing a box register over a '\newcommand'
+One advantage of using and reusing a box register over a ‘\newcommand’
macro variable is efficiency, that LaTeX need not repeatedly retypeset
the contents. See the example below.
- The first two command invocations, '\sbox{BOX-CMD}{TEXT}' and
-'\savebox{BOX-CMD}{TEXT}', are roughly equivalent. As to the third and
-fourth, the optional arguments allow you to specify the box width as
+ The first two command invocations shown above, ‘\sbox{BOX-CMD}{TEXT}’
+and ‘\savebox{BOX-CMD}{TEXT}’, are roughly the same. As to the third
+and fourth, the optional arguments allow you to specify the box width as
WIDTH, and the position of the text inside that box as POSITION. *Note
\mbox & \makebox::, for the full description.
- In the '\sbox' and '\savebox' commands the TEXT is typeset in LR mode
+ In the ‘\sbox’ and ‘\savebox’ commands the TEXT is typeset in LR mode
so it does not have line breaks (*note Modes::). If you use these then
-LaTeX doesn't give you an error but it ignores what you want: if you
-enter '\sbox{\newreg}{test \\ test}' and '\usebox{\newreg}' then you get
-'testtest', while if you enter '\sbox{\newreg}{test \par test}' and
-'\usebox{\newreg}' then you get 'test test', but no error or warning.
-To fix this use a '\parbox' or 'minipage' as here.
+LaTeX doesn’t give you an error but it ignores what you want: if you
+enter ‘\sbox{\newreg}{test \\ test}’ and ‘\usebox{\newreg}’ then you get
+‘testtest’, while if you enter ‘\sbox{\newreg}{test \par test}’ and
+‘\usebox{\newreg}’ then you get ‘test test’, but no error or warning.
+To fix this use a ‘\parbox’ or ‘minipage’ as here.
\newsavebox{\areg}
\savebox{\areg}{%
@@ -13215,7 +13304,7 @@
...
\usebox{\areg}
- As an example of the efficiency of reusing a register's contents,
+ As an example of the efficiency of reusing a register’s contents,
this puts the same picture on each page of the document by putting it in
the header. LaTeX only typesets it once.
@@ -13234,15 +13323,15 @@
\markright{\usebox{\sealreg}}
\pagestyle{headings}
-The 'picture' environment is good for fine-tuning the placement.
+The ‘picture’ environment is good for fine-tuning the placement.
- If the register '\noreg' has not already been defined then you get
-something like 'Undefined control sequence. <argument> \noreg'.
+ If the register ‘\noreg’ has not already been defined then you get
+something like ‘Undefined control sequence. <argument> \noreg’.
File: latex2e.info, Node: lrbox, Next: \usebox, Prev: \sbox & \savebox, Up: Boxes
-20.6 'lrbox'
+20.6 ‘lrbox’
============
Synopsis:
@@ -13251,15 +13340,15 @@
TEXT
\end{lrbox}
- This is the environment form of the '\sbox' and '\savebox' commands,
+ This is the environment form of the ‘\sbox’ and ‘\savebox’ commands,
and is equivalent to them. *Note \sbox & \savebox::, for the full
description.
The TEXT inside the environment is saved in the box register referred
-to by variable 'BOX-CMD'. The variable name BOX-CMD must begin with a
-backslash, '\'. You must allocate this box register in advance with
-'\newsavebox' (*note \newsavebox::). In this example the environment is
-convenient for entering the 'tabular'.
+to by variable ‘BOX-CMD’. The variable name BOX-CMD must begin with a
+backslash, ‘\’. You must allocate this box register in advance with
+‘\newsavebox’ (*note \newsavebox::). In this example the environment is
+convenient for entering the ‘tabular’.
\newsavebox{\jhreg}
\begin{lrbox}{\jhreg}
@@ -13274,7 +13363,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \usebox, Prev: lrbox, Up: Boxes
-20.7 '\usebox'
+20.7 ‘\usebox’
==============
Synopsis:
@@ -13282,9 +13371,9 @@
\usebox{BOX-CMD}
Produce the box most recently saved in the box register BOX-CMD by
-the commands '\sbox' or '\savebox', or the 'lrbox' environment. For
+the commands ‘\sbox’ or ‘\savebox’, or the ‘lrbox’ environment. For
more information and examples, *note \sbox & \savebox::. (Note that the
-variable name BOX-CMD starts with a backslash, '\'.) This command is
+variable name BOX-CMD starts with a backslash, ‘\’.) This command is
robust (*note \protect::).
@@ -13297,13 +13386,13 @@
or on an entire page and write text on top of it.
Color support comes as an additional package. So put
-'\usepackage{color}' in your document preamble to use the commands
+‘\usepackage{color}’ in your document preamble to use the commands
described here.
- Many other packages also supplement LaTeX's color abilities.
-Particularly worth mentioning is 'xcolor', which is widely used and
+ Many other packages also supplement LaTeX’s color abilities.
+Particularly worth mentioning is ‘xcolor’, which is widely used and
significantly extends the capabilities described here, including adding
-'HTML' and 'Hsb' color models.
+‘HTML’ and ‘Hsb’ color models.
* Menu:
@@ -13314,7 +13403,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: Color package options, Next: Color models, Up: Color
-21.1 'color' package options
+21.1 ‘color’ package options
============================
Synopsis (must be in the document preamble):
@@ -13321,34 +13410,34 @@
\usepackage[COMMA-SEPARATED OPTION LIST]{color}
- When you load the 'color' package there are two kinds of available
+ When you load the ‘color’ package there are two kinds of available
options.
- The first specifies the "printer driver". LaTeX doesn't contain
+ The first specifies the “printer driver”. LaTeX doesn’t contain
information about different output systems but instead depends on
information stored in a file. Normally you should not specify the
-driver option in the document, and instead rely on your system's
+driver option in the document, and instead rely on your system’s
default. One advantage of this is that it makes the document portable
across systems. For completeness we include a list of the drivers. The
-currently relevant ones are: 'dvipdfmx', 'dvips', 'dvisvgm', 'luatex',
-'pdftex', 'xetex'. The two 'xdvi' and 'oztex' are essentially aliases
-for 'dvips' (and 'xdvi' is monochrome). Ones that should not be used
-for new systems are: 'dvipdf', 'dvipdfm', 'dviwin', 'dvipsone', 'emtex',
-'pctexps', 'pctexwin', 'pctexhp', 'pctex32', 'truetex', 'tcidvi', 'vtex'
-(and 'dviwindo' is an alias for 'dvipsone').
+currently relevant ones are: ‘dvipdfmx’, ‘dvips’, ‘dvisvgm’, ‘luatex’,
+‘pdftex’, ‘xetex’. The two ‘xdvi’ and ‘oztex’ are essentially aliases
+for ‘dvips’ (and ‘xdvi’ is monochrome). Ones that should not be used
+for new systems are: ‘dvipdf’, ‘dvipdfm’, ‘dviwin’, ‘dvipsone’, ‘emtex’,
+‘pctexps’, ‘pctexwin’, ‘pctexhp’, ‘pctex32’, ‘truetex’, ‘tcidvi’, ‘vtex’
+(and ‘dviwindo’ is an alias for ‘dvipsone’).
The second kind of options, beyond the drivers, are below.
-'monochrome'
+‘monochrome’
Disable the color commands, so that they do not generate errors but
do not generate color either.
-'dvipsnames'
+‘dvipsnames’
Make available a list of 68 color names that are often used,
particularly in legacy documents. These color names were
- originally provided by the 'dvips' driver, giving the option name.
+ originally provided by the ‘dvips’ driver, giving the option name.
-'nodvipsnames'
+‘nodvipsnames’
Do not load that list of color names, saving LaTeX a tiny amount of
memory space.
@@ -13358,9 +13447,9 @@
21.2 Color models
=================
-A "color model" is a way of representing colors. LaTeX's capabilities
-depend on the printer driver. However, the 'pdftex', 'xetex', and
-'luatex' printer drivers are today by far the most commonly used. The
+A “color model” is a way of representing colors. LaTeX’s capabilities
+depend on the printer driver. However, the ‘pdftex’, ‘xetex’, and
+‘luatex’ printer drivers are today by far the most commonly used. The
models below work for those drivers. All but one of these is also
supported by essentially all other printer drivers used today.
@@ -13370,7 +13459,7 @@
such as with inks, so that combining full intensity of cyan, magenta,
and yellow makes black.
-'cmyk'
+‘cmyk’
A comma-separated list with four real numbers between 0 and 1,
inclusive. The first number is the intensity of cyan, the second
is magenta, and the others are yellow and black. A number value of
@@ -13377,11 +13466,11 @@
0 means minimal intensity, while a 1 is for full intensity. This
model is often used in color printing. It is a subtractive model.
-'gray'
+‘gray’
A single real number between 0 and 1, inclusive. The colors are
shades of grey. The number 0 produces black while 1 gives white.
-'rgb'
+‘rgb’
A comma-separated list with three real numbers between 0 and 1,
inclusive. The first number is the intensity of the red component,
the second is green, and the third the blue. A number value of 0
@@ -13388,19 +13477,19 @@
means that none of that component is added in, while a 1 means full
intensity. This is an additive model.
-'RGB'
- ('pdftex', 'xetex', 'luatex' drivers) A comma-separated list with
+‘RGB’
+ (‘pdftex’, ‘xetex’, ‘luatex’ drivers) A comma-separated list with
three integers between 0 and 255, inclusive. This model is a
- convenience for using 'rgb' since outside of LaTeX colors are often
+ convenience for using ‘rgb’ since outside of LaTeX colors are often
described in a red-green-blue model using numbers in this range.
- The values entered here are converted to the 'rgb' model by
+ The values entered here are converted to the ‘rgb’ model by
dividing by 255.
-'named'
- Colors are accessed by name, such as 'PrussianBlue'. The list of
- names depends on the driver, but all support the names 'black',
- 'blue', 'cyan', 'green', 'magenta', 'red', 'white', and 'yellow'
- (See the 'dvipsnames' option in *note Color package options::).
+‘named’
+ Colors are accessed by name, such as ‘PrussianBlue’. The list of
+ names depends on the driver, but all support the names ‘black’,
+ ‘blue’, ‘cyan’, ‘green’, ‘magenta’, ‘red’, ‘white’, and ‘yellow’
+ (See the ‘dvipsnames’ option in *note Color package options::).
File: latex2e.info, Node: Commands for color, Prev: Color models, Up: Color
@@ -13408,7 +13497,7 @@
21.3 Commands for color
=======================
-These are the commands available with the 'color' package.
+These are the commands available with the ‘color’ package.
* Menu:
@@ -13431,7 +13520,7 @@
\definecolor{silver}{rgb}{0.75,0.75,0.74}
-you can use that color name with 'Hi ho, \textcolor{silver}{Silver}!'.
+you can use that color name with ‘Hi ho, \textcolor{silver}{Silver}!’.
This example gives the color a more abstract name, so it could change
and not be misleading.
@@ -13439,7 +13528,7 @@
\definecolor{logocolor}{RGB}{145,92,131} % RGB needs pdflatex
\newcommand{\logo}{\textcolor{logocolor}{Bob's Big Bagels}}
- Often a document's colors are defined in the preamble, or in the
+ Often a document’s colors are defined in the preamble, or in the
class or style, rather than in the document body.
@@ -13456,27 +13545,27 @@
or
\color{NAME}
- \color[COLOR MODEL]{SPECIFICATION}
+ \color[COLOR MODEL]{COLOR SPECIFICATION}
The affected text gets the color. This line
- \textcolor{magenta}{My name is Ozymandias, king of kings:}
+ \textcolor{magenta}{My name is Ozymandias, King of Kings;}
Look on my works, ye Mighty, and despair!
causes the first half to be in magenta while the rest is in black. You
-can use a color declared with '\definecolor' in exactly the same way
-that we just used the builtin color 'magenta'.
+can use a color declared with ‘\definecolor’ in exactly the same way
+that we just used the builtin color ‘magenta’.
\definecolor{MidlifeCrisisRed}{rgb}{1.0,0.11,0.0}
I'm thinking about getting a \textcolor{MidlifeCrisisRed}{sports car}.
- The two '\textcolor' and '\color' differ in that the first is a
+ The two ‘\textcolor’ and ‘\color’ differ in that the first is a
command form, enclosing the text to be colored as an argument. Often
this form is more convenient, or at least more explicit. The second
-form is a declaration, as in 'The moon is made of {\color{green} green}
-cheese', so it is in effect until the end of the current group or
+form is a declaration, as in ‘The moon is made of {\color{green} green}
+cheese’, so it is in effect until the end of the current group or
environment. This is sometimes useful when writing macros or as below
-where it colors everything inside the 'center' environment, including
+where it colors everything inside the ‘center’ environment, including
the vertical and horizontal lines.
\begin{center} \color{blue}
@@ -13505,7 +13594,7 @@
{\color[rgb]{0.72,0.60,0.37}Gold} for the team.
The format of COLOR SPECIFICATION depends on the color model (*note
-Color models::). For instance, while 'rgb' takes three numbers, 'gray'
+Color models::). For instance, while ‘rgb’ takes three numbers, ‘gray’
takes only one.
The selection was \textcolor[gray]{0.5}{grayed out}.
@@ -13532,22 +13621,22 @@
\fcolorbox{FRAME COLOR}{BOX BACKGROUND COLOR}{...}
\fcolorbox[MODEL NAME]{FRAME COLOR}{BOX BACKGROUND COLOR}{...}
- Make a box with the stated background color. The '\fcolorbox'
+ Make a box with the stated background color. The ‘\fcolorbox’
command puts a frame around the box. For instance this
Name:~\colorbox{cyan}{\makebox[5cm][l]{\strut}}
makes a cyan-colored box that is five centimeters long and gets its
-depth and height from the '\strut' (so the depth is '-.3\baselineskip'
-and the height is '\baselineskip'). This puts white text on a blue
+depth and height from the ‘\strut’ (so the depth is ‘-.3\baselineskip’
+and the height is ‘\baselineskip’). This puts white text on a blue
background.
\colorbox{blue}{\textcolor{white}{Welcome to the machine.}}
- The '\fcolorbox' commands use the same parameters as '\fbox' (*note
-\fbox & \framebox::), '\fboxrule' and '\fboxsep', to set the thickness
+ The ‘\fcolorbox’ commands use the same parameters as ‘\fbox’ (*note
+\fbox & \framebox::), ‘\fboxrule’ and ‘\fboxsep’, to set the thickness
of the rule and the boundary between the box interior and the
-surrounding rule. LaTeX's defaults are '0.4pt' and '3pt', respectively.
+surrounding rule. LaTeX’s defaults are ‘0.4pt’ and ‘3pt’, respectively.
This example changes the thickness of the border to 0.8 points. Note
that it is surrounded by curly braces so that the change ends at the end
@@ -13572,7 +13661,7 @@
pages, to the color. For an explanation of the specification in the
second form *note Colored text::. The third returns the background to
normal, which is a transparent background. (If that is not supported
-use '\pagecolor{white}', although that will make a white background
+use ‘\pagecolor{white}’, although that will make a white background
rather than the default transparent background.)
...
@@ -13595,14 +13684,14 @@
\includegraphics[width=0.5\linewidth]{plot.pdf}
To use the commands described here your document preamble must
-contain either '\usepackage{graphicx}' or '\usepackage{graphics}'. Most
-of the time, 'graphicx' is the better choice.
+contain either ‘\usepackage{graphicx}’ or ‘\usepackage{graphics}’. Most
+of the time, ‘graphicx’ is the better choice.
Graphics come in two main types, raster and vector. LaTeX can use
both. In raster graphics the file contains an entry for each location
in an array, describing what color it is. An example is a photograph in
JPG format. In vector graphics, the file contains a list of
-instructions such as 'draw a circle with this radius and that center'.
+instructions such as ‘draw a circle with this radius and that center’.
An example is a line drawing produced by the Asymptote program, in PDF
format. Generally vector graphics are more useful because you can
rescale their size without pixelation or other problems, and because
@@ -13610,7 +13699,7 @@
There are systems particularly well-suited to make graphics for a
LaTeX document. For example, these allow you to use the same fonts as
-in your document. LaTeX comes with a 'picture' environment (*note
+in your document. LaTeX comes with a ‘picture’ environment (*note
picture::) that has simple capabilities. Besides that, there are other
ways to include the graphic-making commands in the document. Two such
systems are the PSTricks and TikZ packages. There are also systems
@@ -13629,7 +13718,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: Graphics package options, Next: Graphics package configuration, Up: Graphics
-22.1 'graphics' package options
+22.1 ‘graphics’ package options
===============================
Synopsis (must be in the document preamble):
@@ -13640,63 +13729,63 @@
\usepackage[COMMA-SEPARATED OPTION LIST]{graphicx}
- The 'graphicx' package has a format for optional arguments to the
-'\includegraphics' command that is convenient (it is the key-value
+ The ‘graphicx’ package has a format for optional arguments to the
+‘\includegraphics’ command that is convenient (it is the key-value
format), so it is the better choice for new documents. When you load
-the 'graphics' or 'graphicx' package with '\usepackage' there are two
+the ‘graphics’ or ‘graphicx’ package with ‘\usepackage’ there are two
kinds of available options.
The first is that LaTeX does not contain information about different
-output systems but instead depends on information stored in a "printer
-driver" file. Normally you should not specify the driver option in the
-document, and instead rely on your system's default. One advantage of
+output systems but instead depends on information stored in a “printer
+driver” file. Normally you should not specify the driver option in the
+document, and instead rely on your system’s default. One advantage of
this is that it makes the document portable across systems.
For completeness here is a list of the drivers. The currently
-relevant ones are: 'dvipdfmx', 'dvips', 'dvisvgm', 'luatex', 'pdftex',
-'xetex'. The two 'xdvi' and 'oztex' are essentially aliases for 'dvips'
-(and 'xdvi' is monochrome). Ones that should not be used for new
-systems are: 'dvipdf', 'dvipdfm', 'dviwin', 'dvipsone', 'emtex',
-'pctexps', 'pctexwin', 'pctexhp', 'pctex32', 'truetex', 'tcidvi', 'vtex'
-(and 'dviwindo' is an alias for 'dvipsone'). These are stored in files
-with a '.def' extension, such as 'pdftex.def'.
+relevant ones are: ‘dvipdfmx’, ‘dvips’, ‘dvisvgm’, ‘luatex’, ‘pdftex’,
+‘xetex’. The two ‘xdvi’ and ‘oztex’ are essentially aliases for ‘dvips’
+(and ‘xdvi’ is monochrome). Ones that should not be used for new
+systems are: ‘dvipdf’, ‘dvipdfm’, ‘dviwin’, ‘dvipsone’, ‘emtex’,
+‘pctexps’, ‘pctexwin’, ‘pctexhp’, ‘pctex32’, ‘truetex’, ‘tcidvi’, ‘vtex’
+(and ‘dviwindo’ is an alias for ‘dvipsone’). These are stored in files
+with a ‘.def’ extension, such as ‘pdftex.def’.
The second kind of options are below.
-'demo'
+‘demo’
Instead of an image file, LaTeX puts in a 150 pt by 100 pt
rectangle (unless another size is specified in the
- '\includegraphics' command).
+ ‘\includegraphics’ command).
-'draft'
+‘draft’
For each graphic file, it is not shown but instead its file name is
printed in a box of the correct size. In order to determine the
size, the file must be present.
-'final'
- (Default) Override any previous 'draft' option, so that the
+‘final’
+ (Default) Override any previous ‘draft’ option, so that the
document shows the contents of the graphic files.
-'hiderotate'
+‘hiderotate’
Do not show rotated text. (This allows for the possibility that a
previewer does not have the capability to rotate text.)
-'hidescale'
+‘hidescale’
Do not show scaled text. (This allows for the possibility that a
previewer does not have the capability to scale.)
-'hiresbb'
+‘hiresbb’
In a PS or EPS file the graphic size may be specified in two ways.
- The '%%BoundingBox' lines describe the graphic size using integer
+ The ‘%%BoundingBox’ lines describe the graphic size using integer
multiples of a PostScript point, that is, integer multiples of 1/72
inch. A later addition to the PostScript language allows decimal
- multiples, such as 1.23, in '%%HiResBoundingBox' lines. This
+ multiples, such as 1.23, in ‘%%HiResBoundingBox’ lines. This
option has LaTeX to read the size from the latter.
File: latex2e.info, Node: Graphics package configuration, Next: Commands for graphics, Prev: Graphics package options, Up: Graphics
-22.2 'graphics' package configuration
+22.2 ‘graphics’ package configuration
=====================================
These commands configure the way LaTeX searches the file system for the
@@ -13705,8 +13794,8 @@
The behavior of file system search code is necessarily platform
dependent. In this document we cover GNU/Linux, Macintosh, and Windows,
as those systems are typically configured. For other situations consult
-the documentation in 'grfguide.pdf', or the LaTeX source, or your TeX
-distribution's documentation.
+the documentation in ‘grfguide.pdf’, or the LaTeX source, or your TeX
+distribution’s documentation.
* Menu:
@@ -13717,7 +13806,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \graphicspath, Next: \DeclareGraphicsExtensions, Up: Graphics package configuration
-22.2.1 '\graphicspath'
+22.2.1 ‘\graphicspath’
----------------------
Synopsis:
@@ -13725,31 +13814,31 @@
\graphicspath{LIST OF DIRECTORIES INSIDE CURLY BRACES}
Declare a list of directories to search for graphics files. This
-allows you to later say something like '\includegraphics{lion.png}'
+allows you to later say something like ‘\includegraphics{lion.png}’
instead of having to give its path.
LaTeX always looks for graphic files first in the current directory
(and the output directory, if specified; *note output directory::). The
declaration below tells the system to then look in the subdirectory
-'pix', and then '../pix'.
+‘pix’, and then ‘../pix’.
\usepackage{graphicx} % or graphics; put in preamble
...
\graphicspath{ {pix/} {../pix/} }
- The '\graphicspath' declaration is optional. If you don't include it
-then LaTeX's default is to search all of the places that it usually
-looks for a file (it uses LaTeX's '\input at path'). In particular, in
+ The ‘\graphicspath’ declaration is optional. If you don’t include it
+then LaTeX’s default is to search all of the places that it usually
+looks for a file (it uses LaTeX’s ‘\input at path’). In particular, in
this case one of the places it looks is the current directory.
Enclose each directory name in curly braces; for example, above it
-says ''{pix}''. Do this even if there is only one directory. Each
-directory name must end in a forward slash, '/'. This is true even on
+says ‘‘{pix}’’. Do this even if there is only one directory. Each
+directory name must end in a forward slash, ‘/’. This is true even on
Windows, where good practice is to use forward slashes for all the
directory separators since it makes the document portable to other
platforms. If you have spaces in your directory name then use double
-quotes, as with '{"my docs/"}'. Getting one of these rules wrong will
-cause LaTeX to report 'Error: File `FILENAME' not found'.
+quotes, as with ‘{"my docs/"}’. Getting one of these rules wrong will
+cause LaTeX to report ‘Error: File `FILENAME' not found’.
Basically, the algorithm is that with this example, after looking in
the current directory,
@@ -13759,31 +13848,31 @@
\usepackage{lion.png}
for each of the listed directories, LaTeX concatenates it with the
-filename and searches for the result, checking for 'pix/lion.png' and
-then '../pix/lion.png'. This algorithm means that the '\graphicspath'
+filename and searches for the result, checking for ‘pix/lion.png’ and
+then ‘../pix/lion.png’. This algorithm means that the ‘\graphicspath’
command does not recursively search subdirectories: if you issue
-'\graphicspath{{a/}}' and the graphic is in 'a/b/lion.png' then LaTeX
+‘\graphicspath{{a/}}’ and the graphic is in ‘a/b/lion.png’ then LaTeX
will not find it. It also means that you can use absolute paths such as
-'\graphicspath{{/home/jim/logos/}}' or
-'\graphicspath{{C:/Users/Albert/Pictures/}}'. However, using these
+‘\graphicspath{{/home/jim/logos/}}’ or
+‘\graphicspath{{C:/Users/Albert/Pictures/}}’. However, using these
means that the document is not portable. (You could preserve
portability by adjusting your TeX system settings configuration file
-parameter 'TEXINPUTS'; see the documentation of your system.)
+parameter ‘TEXINPUTS’; see the documentation of your system.)
- You can use '\graphicspath' anywhere in the document. You can use it
+ You can use ‘\graphicspath’ anywhere in the document. You can use it
more than once. Show its value with
-'\makeatletter\typeout{\Ginput at path}\makeatother'.
+‘\makeatletter\typeout{\Ginput at path}\makeatother’.
The directories are taken with respect to the base file. That is,
-suppose that you are working on a document based on 'book/book.tex' and
-it contains '\include{chapters/chap1}'. If in 'chap1.tex' you put
-'\graphicspath{{plots/}}' then LaTeX will not search for graphics in
-'book/chapters/plots', but instead in 'book/plots'.
+suppose that you are working on a document based on ‘book/book.tex’ and
+it contains ‘\include{chapters/chap1}’. If in ‘chap1.tex’ you put
+‘\graphicspath{{plots/}}’ then LaTeX will not search for graphics in
+‘book/chapters/plots’, but instead in ‘book/plots’.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \DeclareGraphicsExtensions, Next: \DeclareGraphicsRule, Prev: \graphicspath, Up: Graphics package configuration
-22.2.2 '\DeclareGraphicsExtensions'
+22.2.2 ‘\DeclareGraphicsExtensions’
-----------------------------------
Synopses:
@@ -13793,7 +13882,7 @@
Declare the filename extensions to try. This allows you to specify
the order in which to choose graphic formats when you include graphic
files by giving the filename without the extension, as in
-'\includegraphics{functionplot}'.
+‘\includegraphics{functionplot}’.
In this example, LaTeX will find files in the PNG format before PDF
files.
@@ -13802,11 +13891,11 @@
...
\includegraphics{lion} % will find lion.png before lion.pdf
-Because the filename 'lion' does not have a period, LaTeX uses the
+Because the filename ‘lion’ does not have a period, LaTeX uses the
extension list. For each directory in the graphics path (*note
\graphicspath::), LaTeX will try the extensions in the order given. If
it does not find such a file after trying all the directories and
-extensions then it reports '! LaTeX Error: File `'lion'' not found'.
+extensions then it reports ‘! LaTeX Error: File `‘lion’' not found’.
Note that you must include the periods at the start of the extensions.
Because GNU/Linux and Macintosh filenames are case sensitive, the
@@ -13813,22 +13902,22 @@
list of file extensions is case sensitive on those platforms. The
Windows platform is not case sensitive.
- You are not required to include '\DeclareGraphicsExtensions' in your
+ You are not required to include ‘\DeclareGraphicsExtensions’ in your
document; the printer driver has a sensible default. For example, the
-most recent 'pdftex.def' has this extension list.
+most recent ‘pdftex.def’ has this extension list.
.pdf,.png,.jpg,.mps,.jpeg,.jbig2,.jb2,.PDF,.PNG,.JPG,.JPEG,.JBIG2,.JB2
- To change the order, use the 'grfext' package.
+ To change the order, use the ‘grfext’ package.
You can use this command anywhere in the document. You can use it
more than once. Show its value with
-'\makeatletter\typeout{\Gin at extensions}\makeatother'.
+‘\makeatletter\typeout{\Gin at extensions}\makeatother’.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \DeclareGraphicsRule, Prev: \DeclareGraphicsExtensions, Up: Graphics package configuration
-22.2.3 '\DeclareGraphicsRule'
+22.2.3 ‘\DeclareGraphicsRule’
-----------------------------
Synopsis:
@@ -13838,7 +13927,7 @@
Declare how to handle graphic files whose names end in EXTENSION.
This example declares that all files with names of the form
-'filename-without-dot.mps' will be treated as output from MetaPost,
+‘filename-without-dot.mps’ will be treated as output from MetaPost,
meaning that the printer driver will use its MetaPost-handling code to
input the file.
@@ -13849,8 +13938,8 @@
\DeclareGraphicsRule{*}{mps}{*}{}
tells LaTeX that it should handle as MetaPost output any file with an
-extension not covered by another rule, so it covers 'filename.1',
-'filename.2', etc.
+extension not covered by another rule, so it covers ‘filename.1’,
+‘filename.2’, etc.
This describes the four arguments.
@@ -13857,16 +13946,16 @@
EXTENSION
The file extension to which this rule applies. The extension is
anything after and including the first dot in the filename. Use
- the Kleene star, '*', to denote the default behavior for all
+ the Kleene star, ‘*’, to denote the default behavior for all
undeclared extensions.
TYPE
The type of file involved. This type is a string that must be
defined in the printer driver. For instance, files with extensions
- '.ps', '.eps', or '.ps.gz' may all be classed as type 'eps'. All
+ ‘.ps’, ‘.eps’, or ‘.ps.gz’ may all be classed as type ‘eps’. All
files of the same type will be input with the same internal command
- by the printer driver. For example, the file types that 'pdftex'
- recognizes are: 'jpg', 'jbig2', 'mps', 'pdf', 'png', 'tif'.
+ by the printer driver. For example, the file types that ‘pdftex’
+ recognizes are: ‘jpg’, ‘jbig2’, ‘mps’, ‘pdf’, ‘png’, ‘tif’.
SIZE-FILE EXTENSION
The extension of the file to be read to determine the size of the
@@ -13874,26 +13963,26 @@
but it may be different.
As an example, consider a PostScript graphic. To make it smaller,
- it might be compressed into a '.ps.gz' file. Compressed files are
+ it might be compressed into a ‘.ps.gz’ file. Compressed files are
not easily read by LaTeX so you can put the bounding box
information in a separate file. If SIZE-FILE EXTENSION is empty
then you must specify size information in the arguments of
- '\includegraphics'.
+ ‘\includegraphics’.
If the driver file has a procedure for reading size files for
- 'type' then that will be used, otherwise it will use the procedure
- for reading '.eps' files. (Thus you may specify the size of bitmap
- files in a file with a PostScript style '%%BoundingBox' line if no
+ ‘type’ then that will be used, otherwise it will use the procedure
+ for reading ‘.eps’ files. (Thus you may specify the size of bitmap
+ files in a file with a PostScript style ‘%%BoundingBox’ line if no
other format is available.)
COMMAND
- A command that will be applied to the file. This is very often
- left empty. This command must start with a single backward quote.
- Thus, '\DeclareGraphicsRule{.eps.gz}{eps}{.eps.bb}{`gunzip -c #1}'
- specifies that any file with the extension '.eps.gz' should be
- treated as an 'eps' file, with the BoundingBox information stored
- in the file with extension '.eps.bb', and that the command 'gunzip
- -c' will run on your platform to decompresses the file.
+ A command that will be applied to the file. This is often left
+ empty. This command must start with a single backward quote.
+ Thus, ‘\DeclareGraphicsRule{.eps.gz}{eps}{.eps.bb}{`gunzip -c #1}’
+ specifies that any file with the extension ‘.eps.gz’ should be
+ treated as an ‘eps’ file, with the BoundingBox information stored
+ in the file with extension ‘.eps.bb’, and that the command ‘gunzip
+ -c’ will run on your platform to decompresses the file.
Such a command is specific to your platform. In addition, your TeX
system must allow you to run external commands; as a security
@@ -13907,7 +13996,7 @@
22.3 Commands for graphics
==========================
-These are the commands available with the 'graphics' and 'graphicx'
+These are the commands available with the ‘graphics’ and ‘graphicx’
packages.
* Menu:
@@ -13920,10 +14009,10 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \includegraphics, Next: \rotatebox, Up: Commands for graphics
-22.3.1 '\includegraphics'
+22.3.1 ‘\includegraphics’
-------------------------
-Synopses for 'graphics' package:
+Synopses for ‘graphics’ package:
\includegraphics{FILENAME}
\includegraphics[URX,URY]{FILENAME}
@@ -13932,7 +14021,7 @@
\includegraphics*[URX,URY]{FILENAME}
\includegraphics*[LLX,LLY][URX,URY]{FILENAME}
- Synopses for 'graphicx' package:
+ Synopses for ‘graphicx’ package:
\includegraphics{FILENAME}
\includegraphics[KEY-VALUE LIST]{FILENAME}
@@ -13939,7 +14028,7 @@
\includegraphics*{FILENAME}
\includegraphics*[KEY-VALUE LIST]{FILENAME}
- Include a graphics file. The starred form '\includegraphics*' will
+ Include a graphics file. The starred form ‘\includegraphics*’ will
clip the graphic to the size specified, while for the unstarred form any
part of the graphic that is outside the box of the specified size will
over-print the surrounding area.
@@ -13952,28 +14041,28 @@
\includegraphics{plot.pdf}
\end{center}
-will incorporate into the document the graphic in 'plot.pdf', centered
+will incorporate into the document the graphic in ‘plot.pdf’, centered
and at its nominal size. You can also give a path to the file, as with
-'\includegraphics{graphics/plot.pdf}'. To specify a list of locations
+‘\includegraphics{graphics/plot.pdf}’. To specify a list of locations
to search for the file, *note \graphicspath::.
If your filename includes spaces then put it in double quotes. An
-example is '\includegraphics{"sister picture.jpg"}'.
+example is ‘\includegraphics{"sister picture.jpg"}’.
- The '\includegraphics{FILENAME}' command decides on the type of
+ The ‘\includegraphics{FILENAME}’ command decides on the type of
graphic by splitting FILENAME on the first dot. You can instead use
-FILENAME with no dot, as in '\includegraphics{turing}', and then LaTeX
-tries a sequence of extensions such as '.png' and '.pdf' until it finds
+FILENAME with no dot, as in ‘\includegraphics{turing}’, and then LaTeX
+tries a sequence of extensions such as ‘.png’ and ‘.pdf’ until it finds
a file with that extension (*note \DeclareGraphicsExtensions::).
If your file name contains dots before the extension then you can
hide them with curly braces, as in
-'\includegraphics{{plot.2018.03.12.a}.pdf}'. Or, if you use the
-'graphicx' package then you can use the options 'type' and 'ext'; see
+‘\includegraphics{{plot.2018.03.12.a}.pdf}’. Or, if you use the
+‘graphicx’ package then you can use the options ‘type’ and ‘ext’; see
below. This and other filename issues are also handled with the package
-'grffile'.
+‘grffile’.
- This example puts a graphic in a 'figure' environment so LaTeX can
+ This example puts a graphic in a ‘figure’ environment so LaTeX can
move it to the next page if fitting it on the current page is awkward
(*note figure::).
@@ -14010,19 +14099,19 @@
\end{minipage}}
\end{center}
- If you use the 'graphics' package then the only options involve the
+ If you use the ‘graphics’ package then the only options involve the
size of the graphic (but see *note \rotatebox:: and *note \scalebox::).
-When one optional argument is present then it is '[URX,URY]' and it
+When one optional argument is present then it is ‘[URX,URY]’ and it
gives the coordinates of the top right corner of the image, as a pair of
TeX dimensions (*note Units of length::). If the units are omitted they
-default to 'bp'. In this case, the lower left corner of the image is
+default to ‘bp’. In this case, the lower left corner of the image is
assumed to be at (0,0). If two optional arguments are present then the
-leading one is '[LLX,LLY]', specifying the coordinates of the image's
-lower left. Thus, '\includegraphics[1in,0.618in]{...}' calls for the
+leading one is ‘[LLX,LLY]’, specifying the coordinates of the image’s
+lower left. Thus, ‘\includegraphics[1in,0.618in]{...}’ calls for the
graphic to be placed so it is 1 inch wide and 0.618 inches tall and so
its origin is at (0,0).
- The 'graphicx' package gives you many more options. Specify them in
+ The ‘graphicx’ package gives you many more options. Specify them in
a key-value form, as here.
\begin{center}
@@ -14039,108 +14128,108 @@
There are many options. The primary ones are listed first.
Note that a graphic is placed by LaTeX into a box, which is
-traditionally referred to as its "bounding box" (distinct from the
-PostScript BoundingBox described below). The graphic's printed area may
+traditionally referred to as its “bounding box” (distinct from the
+PostScript BoundingBox described below). The graphic’s printed area may
go beyond this box, or sit inside this box, but when LaTeX makes up a
page it puts together boxes and this is the box allocated for the
graphic.
-'width'
+‘width’
The graphic will be shown so its bounding box is this width. An
- example is '\includegraphics[width=1in]{plot}'. You can use the
+ example is ‘\includegraphics[width=1in]{plot}’. You can use the
standard TeX dimensions (*note Units of length::) and also
- convenient is '\linewidth', or in a two-column document,
- '\columnwidth' (*note Page layout parameters::). An example is
- that by using the 'calc' package you can make the graphic be 1 cm
+ convenient is ‘\linewidth’, or in a two-column document,
+ ‘\columnwidth’ (*note Page layout parameters::). An example is
+ that by using the ‘calc’ package you can make the graphic be 1 cm
narrower than the width of the text with
- '\includegraphics[width=\linewidth-1.0cm]{hefferon.jpg}'.
+ ‘\includegraphics[width=\linewidth-1.0cm]{hefferon.jpg}’.
-'height'
+‘height’
The graphic will be shown so its bounding box is this height. You
can use the standard TeX dimensions (*note Units of length::), and
- also convenient are '\pageheight' and '\textheight' (*note Page
+ also convenient are ‘\pageheight’ and ‘\textheight’ (*note Page
layout parameters::). For instance, the command
- '\includegraphics[height=0.25\textheight]{godel}' will make the
+ ‘\includegraphics[height=0.25\textheight]{godel}’ will make the
graphic a quarter of the height of the text area.
-'totalheight'
+‘totalheight’
The graphic will be shown so its bounding box has this height plus
depth. This differs from the height if the graphic was rotated.
For instance, if it has been rotated by -90 then it will have zero
height but a large depth.
-'keepaspectratio'
- If set to 'true', or just specified as here
+‘keepaspectratio’
+ If set to ‘true’, or just specified as here
\includegraphics[...,keepaspectratio,...]{...}
- and you give as options both 'width' and 'height' (or
- 'totalheight'), then LaTeX will make the graphic is as large as
+ and you give as options both ‘width’ and ‘height’ (or
+ ‘totalheight’), then LaTeX will make the graphic is as large as
possible without distortion. That is, LaTeX will ensure that
- neither is the graphic wider than 'width' nor taller than 'height'
- (or 'totalheight').
+ neither is the graphic wider than ‘width’ nor taller than ‘height’
+ (or ‘totalheight’).
-'scale'
+‘scale’
Factor by which to scale the graphic. To make a graphic twice its
- nominal size, enter '\includegraphics[scale=2.0]{...}'. This
+ nominal size, enter ‘\includegraphics[scale=2.0]{...}’. This
number may be any value; a number between 0 and 1 will shrink the
graphic and a negative number will reflect it.
-'angle'
+‘angle’
Rotate the graphic. The angle is taken in degrees and
- counterclockwise. The graphic is rotated about its 'origin'; see
+ counterclockwise. The graphic is rotated about its ‘origin’; see
that option. For a complete description of how rotated material is
typeset, *note \rotatebox::.
-'origin'
+‘origin’
The point of the graphic about which the rotation happens.
- Possible values are any string containing one or two of: 'l' for
- left, 'r' for right, 'b' for bottom, 'c' for center, 't' for top,
- and 'B' for baseline. Thus, entering the command
- '\includegraphics[angle=180,origin=c]{moon}' will turn the picture
- upside down about that picture's center, while the command
- '\includegraphics[angle=180,origin=lB]{LeBateau}' will turn its
- picture upside down about its left baseline. (The character 'c'
- gives the horizontal center in 'bc' or 'tc', but gives the vertical
- center in 'lc' or 'rc'.) The default is 'lB'.
+ Possible values are any string containing one or two of: ‘l’ for
+ left, ‘r’ for right, ‘b’ for bottom, ‘c’ for center, ‘t’ for top,
+ and ‘B’ for baseline. Thus, entering the command
+ ‘\includegraphics[angle=180,origin=c]{moon}’ will turn the picture
+ upside down about that picture’s center, while the command
+ ‘\includegraphics[angle=180,origin=lB]{LeBateau}’ will turn its
+ picture upside down about its left baseline. (The character ‘c’
+ gives the horizontal center in ‘bc’ or ‘tc’, but gives the vertical
+ center in ‘lc’ or ‘rc’.) The default is ‘lB’.
To rotate about an arbitrary point, *note \rotatebox::.
These are lesser-used options.
-'viewport'
+‘viewport’
Pick out a subregion of the graphic to show. Takes four arguments,
separated by spaces and given in TeX dimensions, as with
- '\includegraphics[.., viewport=0in 0in 1in 0.618in]{...}'. When
- the unit is omitted, the dimensions default to big points, 'bp'.
+ ‘\includegraphics[.., viewport=0in 0in 1in 0.618in]{...}’. When
+ the unit is omitted, the dimensions default to big points, ‘bp’.
They are taken relative to the origin specified by the bounding
- box. See also the 'trim' option.
+ box. See also the ‘trim’ option.
-'trim'
+‘trim’
Gives parts of the graphic to not show. Takes four arguments,
separated by spaces, that are given in TeX dimensions, as with
- '\includegraphics[.., trim= 0in 0.1in 0.2in 0.3in, ...]{...}'.
+ ‘\includegraphics[.., trim= 0in 0.1in 0.2in 0.3in, ...]{...}’.
These give the amounts of the graphic not to show, that is, LaTeX
will crop the picture by 0 inches on the left, 0.1 inches on the
bottom, 0.2 inches on the right, and 0.3 inches on the top. See
- also the 'viewport' option.
+ also the ‘viewport’ option.
-'clip'
- If set to 'true', or just specified as here
+‘clip’
+ If set to ‘true’, or just specified as here
\includegraphics[...,clip,...]{...}
then the graphic is cropped to the bounding box. This is the same
as using the starred form of the command,
- '\includegraphics*[...]{...}'.
+ ‘\includegraphics*[...]{...}’.
-'page'
+‘page’
Give the page number of a multi-page PDF file. The default is
- 'page=1'.
+ ‘page=1’.
-'pagebox'
+‘pagebox’
Specifies which bounding box to use for PDF files from among
- 'mediabox', 'cropbox', 'bleedbox', 'trimbox', or 'artbox'. PDF
+ ‘mediabox’, ‘cropbox’, ‘bleedbox’, ‘trimbox’, or ‘artbox’. PDF
files do not have the BoundingBox that PostScript files have, but
may specify up to four predefined rectangles. The MediaBox gives
the boundaries of the physical medium. The CropBox is the region
@@ -14147,25 +14236,25 @@
to which the contents of the page are to be clipped when displayed.
The BleedBox is the region to which the contents of the page should
be clipped in production. The TrimBox is the intended dimensions
- of the finished page. The ArtBox is the extent of the page's
+ of the finished page. The ArtBox is the extent of the page’s
meaningful content. The driver will set the image size based on
CropBox if present, otherwise it will not use one of the others,
with a driver-defined order of preference. MediaBox is always
present.
-'interpolate'
+‘interpolate’
Enable or disable interpolation of raster images by the viewer.
- Can be set with 'interpolate=true' or just specified as here.
+ Can be set with ‘interpolate=true’ or just specified as here.
\includegraphics[...,interpolate,...]{...}
-'quiet'
+‘quiet’
Do not write information to the log. You can set it with
- 'quiet=true' or just specified it with
- '\includegraphics[...,quiet,...]{...}',
+ ‘quiet=true’ or just specified it with
+ ‘\includegraphics[...,quiet,...]{...}’,
-'draft'
- If you set it with 'draft=true' or just specify it with
+‘draft’
+ If you set it with ‘draft=true’ or just specify it with
\includegraphics[...,draft,...]{...}
@@ -14174,78 +14263,78 @@
correct size with the filename printed in it.
These options address the bounding box for Encapsulated PostScript
-graphic files, which have a size specified with a line '%%BoundingBox'
+graphic files, which have a size specified with a line ‘%%BoundingBox’
that appears in the file. It has four values, giving the lower x
coordinate, lower y coordinate, upper x coordinate, and upper y
-coordinate. The units are PostScript points, equivalent to TeX's big
-points, 1/72 inch. For example, if an '.eps' file has the line
-'%%BoundingBox 10 20 40 80' then its natural size is 30/72 inch wide by
+coordinate. The units are PostScript points, equivalent to TeX’s big
+points, 1/72 inch. For example, if an ‘.eps’ file has the line
+‘%%BoundingBox 10 20 40 80’ then its natural size is 30/72 inch wide by
60/72 inch tall.
-'bb'
+‘bb’
Specify the bounding box of the displayed region. The argument is
- four dimensions separated by spaces, as with '\includegraphics[..,
- bb= 0in 0in 1in 0.618in]{...}'. Usually '\includegraphics' reads
+ four dimensions separated by spaces, as with ‘\includegraphics[..,
+ bb= 0in 0in 1in 0.618in]{...}’. Usually ‘\includegraphics’ reads
the BoundingBox numbers from the EPS file automatically, so this
option is only useful if the bounding box is missing from that file
or if you want to change it.
-'bbllx, bblly, bburx, bbury'
+‘bbllx, bblly, bburx, bbury’
Set the bounding box. These four are obsolete, but are retained
for compatibility with old packages.
-'natwidth, natheight'
- An alternative for 'bb'. Setting
+‘natwidth, natheight’
+ An alternative for ‘bb’. Setting
\includegraphics[...,natwidth=1in,natheight=0.618in,...]{...}
- is the same as setting 'bb=0 0 1in 0.618in'.
+ is the same as setting ‘bb=0 0 1in 0.618in’.
-'hiresbb'
- If set to 'true', or just specified as with
+‘hiresbb’
+ If set to ‘true’, or just specified as with
\includegraphics[...,hiresbb,...]{...}
- then LaTeX will look for '%%HiResBoundingBox' lines instead of
- '%%BoundingBox' lines. (The 'BoundingBox' lines use only natural
- numbers while the 'HiResBoundingBox' lines use decimals; both use
- units equivalent to TeX's big points, 1/72 inch.) To override a
- prior setting of 'true', you can set it to 'false'.
+ then LaTeX will look for ‘%%HiResBoundingBox’ lines instead of
+ ‘%%BoundingBox’ lines. (The ‘BoundingBox’ lines use only natural
+ numbers while the ‘HiResBoundingBox’ lines use decimals; both use
+ units equivalent to TeX’s big points, 1/72 inch.) To override a
+ prior setting of ‘true’, you can set it to ‘false’.
- These following options allow a user to override LaTeX's method of
+ These following options allow a user to override LaTeX’s method of
choosing the graphic type based on the filename extension. An example
-is that '\includegraphics[type=png,ext=.xxx,read=.xxx]{lion}' will read
-the file 'lion.xxx' as though it were 'lion.png'. For more on these,
+is that ‘\includegraphics[type=png,ext=.xxx,read=.xxx]{lion}’ will read
+the file ‘lion.xxx’ as though it were ‘lion.png’. For more on these,
*note \DeclareGraphicsRule::.
-'type'
+‘type’
Specify the graphics type.
-'ext'
+‘ext’
Specify the graphics extension. Only use this in conjunction with
- the option 'type'.
+ the option ‘type’.
-'read'
+‘read’
Specify the file extension of the read file. Only use this in
- conjunction with the option 'type'.
+ conjunction with the option ‘type’.
-'command'
+‘command’
Specify a command to be applied to this file. Only use this in
- conjunction with the option 'type'. *Note Command line options::,
- for a discussion of enabling the '\write18' functionality to run
+ conjunction with the option ‘type’. *Note Command line options::,
+ for a discussion of enabling the ‘\write18’ functionality to run
external commands.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \rotatebox, Next: \scalebox, Prev: \includegraphics, Up: Commands for graphics
-22.3.2 '\rotatebox'
+22.3.2 ‘\rotatebox’
-------------------
-Synopsis if you use the 'graphics' package:
+Synopsis if you use the ‘graphics’ package:
\rotatebox{ANGLE}{MATERIAL}
- Synopses if you use the 'graphicx' package:
+ Synopses if you use the ‘graphicx’ package:
\rotatebox{ANGLE}{MATERIAL}
\rotatebox[KEY-VALUE LIST]{ANGLE}{MATERIAL}
@@ -14274,17 +14363,17 @@
new position, is what LaTeX uses as the box when typesetting this
material.
- If you use the 'graphics' package then the rotation is about the
-reference point of the box. If you use the 'graphicx' package then
+ If you use the ‘graphics’ package then the rotation is about the
+reference point of the box. If you use the ‘graphicx’ package then
these are the options that can go in the KEY-VALUE LIST, but note that
you can get the same effect without needing this package, except for the
-'x' and 'y' options (*note \includegraphics::).
+‘x’ and ‘y’ options (*note \includegraphics::).
-'origin'
- The point of the MATERIAL's box about which the rotation happens.
- Possible value is any string containing one or two of: 'l' for
- left, 'r' for right, 'b' for bottom, 'c' for center, 't' for top,
- and 'B' for baseline. Thus, the first line here
+‘origin’
+ The point of the MATERIAL’s box about which the rotation happens.
+ Possible value is any string containing one or two of: ‘l’ for
+ left, ‘r’ for right, ‘b’ for bottom, ‘c’ for center, ‘t’ for top,
+ and ‘B’ for baseline. Thus, the first line here
\rotatebox[origin=c]{180}{moon}
\rotatebox[origin=lB]{180}{LeBateau}
@@ -14291,25 +14380,25 @@
will turn the picture upside down from the center while the second
will turn its picture upside down about its left baseline. (The
- character 'c' gives the horizontal center in 'bc' or 'tc' but gives
- the vertical center in 'lc' or 'rc', and gives both in 'c'.) The
- default is 'lB'.
+ character ‘c’ gives the horizontal center in ‘bc’ or ‘tc’ but gives
+ the vertical center in ‘lc’ or ‘rc’, and gives both in ‘c’.) The
+ default is ‘lB’.
-'x, y'
- Specify an arbitrary point of rotation with '\rotatebox[x=TeX
- DIMENSION,y=TeX DIMENSION]{...}' (*note Units of length::). These
- give the offset from the box's reference point.
+‘x, y’
+ Specify an arbitrary point of rotation with ‘\rotatebox[x=TeX
+ DIMENSION,y=TeX DIMENSION]{...}’ (*note Units of length::). These
+ give the offset from the box’s reference point.
-'units'
+‘units’
This key allows you to change the default of degrees
- counterclockwise. Setting 'units=-360' changes the direction to
- degrees clockwise and setting 'units=6.283185' changes to radians
+ counterclockwise. Setting ‘units=-360’ changes the direction to
+ degrees clockwise and setting ‘units=6.283185’ changes to radians
counterclockwise.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \scalebox, Next: \resizebox, Prev: \rotatebox, Up: Commands for graphics
-22.3.3 '\scalebox'
+22.3.3 ‘\scalebox’
------------------
Synopses:
@@ -14332,19 +14421,19 @@
\scalebox{0.5}{\includegraphics{lion}}
-If you use the 'graphicx' package then you can accomplish the same thing
-with optional arguments to '\includegraphics' (*note
+If you use the ‘graphicx’ package then you can accomplish the same thing
+with optional arguments to ‘\includegraphics’ (*note
\includegraphics::).
- The '\reflectbox' command abbreviates '\scalebox{-1}[1]{MATERIAL}'.
-Thus, 'Able was I\reflectbox{Able was I}' will show the phrase 'Able was
-I' immediately followed by its mirror reflection against a vertical
+ The ‘\reflectbox’ command abbreviates ‘\scalebox{-1}[1]{MATERIAL}’.
+Thus, ‘Able was I\reflectbox{Able was I}’ will show the phrase ‘Able was
+I’ immediately followed by its mirror reflection against a vertical
axis.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \resizebox, Prev: \scalebox, Up: Commands for graphics
-22.3.4 '\resizebox'
+22.3.4 ‘\resizebox’
-------------------
Synopses:
@@ -14352,9 +14441,9 @@
\resizebox{HORIZONTAL LENGTH}{VERTICAL LENGTH}{MATERIAL}
\resizebox*{HORIZONTAL LENGTH}{VERTICAL LENGTH}{MATERIAL}
- Given a size, such as '3cm', transform MATERIAL to make it that size.
+ Given a size, such as ‘3cm’, transform MATERIAL to make it that size.
If either HORIZONTAL LENGTH or VERTICAL LENGTH is an exclamation
-point '!' then the other argument is used to determine a scale factor
+point ‘!’ then the other argument is used to determine a scale factor
for both directions.
This example makes the graphic be a half inch wide and scales it
@@ -14362,16 +14451,16 @@
\resizebox{0.5in}{!}{\includegraphics{lion}}
- The unstarred form '\resizebox' takes VERTICAL LENGTH to be the box's
-height while the starred form '\resizebox*' takes it to be height+depth.
+ The unstarred form ‘\resizebox’ takes VERTICAL LENGTH to be the box’s
+height while the starred form ‘\resizebox*’ takes it to be height+depth.
For instance, make the text have a height+depth of a quarter-inch with
-'\resizebox*{!}{0.25in}{\parbox{3.5in}{This box has both height and
-depth.}}'.
+‘\resizebox*{!}{0.25in}{\parbox{3.5in}{This box has both height and
+depth.}}’.
- You can use '\depth', '\height', '\totalheight', and '\width' to
+ You can use ‘\depth’, ‘\height’, ‘\totalheight’, and ‘\width’ to
refer to the original size of the box. Thus, make the text two inches
-wide but keep the original height with '\resizebox{2in}{\height}{Two
-inches}'.
+wide but keep the original height with ‘\resizebox{2in}{\height}{Two
+inches}’.
File: latex2e.info, Node: Special insertions, Next: Splitting the input, Prev: Graphics, Up: Top
@@ -14384,7 +14473,7 @@
* Menu:
-* Reserved characters:: Inserting '# $ % & { } _ ~ ^ \'
+* Reserved characters:: Inserting ‘# $ % & { } _ ~ ^ \’
* Upper and lower case:: Make text upper or lower case.
* Symbols by font position:: Inserting font symbols by number.
* Text symbols:: Inserting other non-letter symbols in text.
@@ -14392,7 +14481,7 @@
* Additional Latin letters:: Inserting other non-English characters.
* inputenc package:: Set the input file text encoding.
* \rule:: Inserting lines and rectangles.
-* \today:: Inserting today's date.
+* \today:: Inserting today’s date.
File: latex2e.info, Node: Reserved characters, Next: Upper and lower case, Up: Special insertions
@@ -14401,8 +14490,8 @@
========================
LaTeX sets aside the following characters for special purposes. For
-example, the percent sign '%' is for comments. They are called
-"reserved characters" or "special characters". They are all discussed
+example, the percent sign ‘%’ is for comments. They are called
+“reserved characters” or “special characters”. They are all discussed
elsewhere in this manual.
# $ % & { } _ ~ ^ \
@@ -14409,18 +14498,18 @@
If you want a reserved character to be printed as itself, in the text
body font, for all but the final three characters in that list simply
-put a backslash '\' in front of the character. Thus, typing '\$1.23'
-will produce '$1.23' in your output.
+put a backslash ‘\’ in front of the character. Thus, typing ‘\$1.23’
+will produce ‘$1.23’ in your output.
As to the last three characters, to get a tilde in the text body font
-use '\~{}' (omitting the curly braces would result in the next character
+use ‘\~{}’ (omitting the curly braces would result in the next character
receiving a tilde accent). Similarly, to get a text body font
-circumflex use '\^{}'. To get a backslash in the font of the text body,
-enter '\textbackslash{}'.
+circumflex use ‘\^{}’. To get a backslash in the font of the text body,
+enter ‘\textbackslash{}’.
- To produce the reserved characters in a typewriter font use '\verb!!'
-as below (the double backslash '\\' is only there to split the lines in
-the output).
+ To produce the reserved characters in a typewriter font use ‘\verb!!’
+as below (the double backslash ‘\\’ in the example is only there to
+split the lines in the output).
\begin{center}
\# \$ \% \& \{ \} \_ \~{} \^{} \textbackslash \\
@@ -14441,20 +14530,20 @@
\MakeLowercase{TEXT}
Change the case of characters. The TeX primitive commands
-'\uppercase' and '\lowercase' are set up by default to work only with
-the 26 letters a-z and A-Z. The LaTeX commands '\MakeUppercase' and
-'\MakeLowercase' commands also change characters accessed by commands
-such as '\ae' or '\aa'. The commands '\MakeUppercase' and
-'\MakeLowercase' are robust but they have moving arguments (*note
+‘\uppercase’ and ‘\lowercase’ are set up by default to work only with
+the 26 letters a–z and A–Z. The LaTeX commands ‘\MakeUppercase’ and
+‘\MakeLowercase’ commands also change characters accessed by commands
+such as ‘\ae’ or ‘\aa’. The commands ‘\MakeUppercase’ and
+‘\MakeLowercase’ are robust but they have moving arguments (*note
\protect::).
These commands do not change the case of letters used in the name of
a command within TEXT. But they do change the case of every other Latin
-letter inside the argument TEXT. Thus, '\MakeUppercase{Let $y=f(x)$'}
-produces 'LET Y=F(X)'. Another example is that the name of an
-environment will be changed, so that '\MakeUppercase{\begin{tabular} ...
-\end{tabular}}' will produce an error because the first half is changed
-to '\begin{TABULAR}'.
+letter inside the argument TEXT. Thus, ‘\MakeUppercase{Let $y=f(x)$’}
+produces ‘LET Y=F(X)’. Another example is that the name of an
+environment will be changed, so that ‘\MakeUppercase{\begin{tabular} ...
+\end{tabular}}’ will produce an error because the first half is changed
+to ‘\begin{TABULAR}’.
LaTeX uses the same fixed table for changing case throughout a
document, The table used is designed for the font encoding T1; this
@@ -14462,24 +14551,24 @@
cause problems when using other alphabets.
To change the case of text that results from a macro inside TEXT you
-need to do expansion. Here the '\Schoolname' produces 'COLLEGE OF
-MATHEMATICS'.
+need to do expansion. Here the ‘\Schoolname’ produces ‘COLLEGE OF
+MATHEMATICS’.
\newcommand{\schoolname}{College of Mathematics}
\newcommand{\Schoolname}{\expandafter\MakeUppercase
\expandafter{\schoolname}}
- The 'textcase' package brings some of the missing feature of the
-standard LaTeX commands '\MakeUppercase' and '\MakeLowerCase'.
+ The ‘textcase’ package brings some of the missing feature of the
+standard LaTeX commands ‘\MakeUppercase’ and ‘\MakeLowerCase’.
To uppercase only the first letter of words, you can use the package
-'mfirstuc'.
+‘mfirstuc’.
Handling all the casing rules specified by Unicode, e.g., for
non-Latin scripts, is a much bigger job than anything envisioned in the
-original TeX and LaTeX. It has been implemented in the 'expl3' package
-as of 2020. The article "Case changing: From TeX primitives to the
-Unicode algorithm", (Joseph Wright, 'TUGboat' 41:1,
+original TeX and LaTeX. It has been implemented in the ‘expl3’ package
+as of 2020. The article “Case changing: From TeX primitives to the
+Unicode algorithm”, (Joseph Wright, ‘TUGboat’ 41:1,
<https://tug.org/TUGboat/tb41-1/tb127wright-case.pdf>), gives a good
overview of the topic, past and present.
@@ -14490,13 +14579,13 @@
=============================
You can access any character of the current font using its number with
-the '\symbol' command. For example, the visible space character used in
-the '\verb*' command has the code decimal 32 in the standard Computer
-Modern typewriter font, so it can be typed as '\symbol{32}'.
+the ‘\symbol’ command. For example, the visible space character used in
+the ‘\verb*’ command has the code decimal 32 in the standard Computer
+Modern typewriter font, so it can be typed as ‘\symbol{32}’.
- You can also specify numbers in octal (base 8) by using a ''' prefix,
-or hexadecimal (base 16) with a '"' prefix, so the visible space at 32
-decimal could also be written as '\symbol{'40}' or '\symbol{"20}'.
+ You can also specify numbers in octal (base 8) by using a ‘'’ prefix,
+or hexadecimal (base 16) with a ‘"’ prefix, so the visible space at 32
+decimal could also be written as ‘\symbol{'40}’ or ‘\symbol{"20}’.
File: latex2e.info, Node: Text symbols, Next: Accents, Prev: Symbols by font position, Up: Special insertions
@@ -14508,209 +14597,217 @@
running text. Some of these, especially the more obscure ones, are not
available in OT1. As of the LaTeX February 2020 release, all symbols
are available by default; before that, it was necessary to use the
-'textcomp' package for some (technically, those in the 'TS1' font
+‘textcomp’ package for some (technically, those in the ‘TS1’ font
encoding).
-'\copyright'
-'\textcopyright'
- (C) The copyright symbol.
+‘\copyright’
+‘\textcopyright’
+ © The copyright symbol.
-'\dag'
+‘\dag’
† The dagger symbol (in text).
-'\ddag'
+‘\ddag’
‡ The double dagger symbol (in text).
-'\LaTeX'
+‘\LaTeX’
The LaTeX logo.
-'\LaTeXe'
+‘\LaTeXe’
The LaTeX2e logo.
-'\guillemotleft («)'
-'\guillemotright (»)'
-'\guilsinglleft (‹)'
-'\guilsinglright (›)'
+‘\guillemotleft («)’
+‘\guillemotright (»)’
+‘\guilsinglleft (‹)’
+‘\guilsinglright (›)’
«, », ‹, › Double and single angle quotation marks, commonly used
in French.
-'\ldots'
-'\dots'
-'\textellipsis'
- ... An ellipsis (three dots at the baseline): '\ldots' and '\dots'
- also work in math mode.
+‘\ldots’
+‘\textellipsis’
+‘\dots’
+ ... An ellipsis (three dots at the baseline): ‘\ldots’ and ‘\dots’
+ also work in math mode (*note Dots::). See that math mode ellipsis
+ description for additional general information.
-'\lq'
- ' Left (opening) quote.
+‘\lq’
+ ‘ Left (opening) quote.
-'\P'
-'\textparagraph'
+‘\P’
+‘\textparagraph’
¶ Paragraph sign (pilcrow).
-'\pounds'
-'\textsterling'
+‘\pounds’
+‘\textsterling’
£ English pounds sterling.
-'\quotedblbase („)'
-'\quotesinglbase (‚)'
+‘\quotedblbase („)’
+‘\quotesinglbase (‚)’
„ and ‚ Double and single quotation marks on the baseline.
-'\rq'
- ' Right (closing) quote.
+‘\rq’
+ ’ Right (closing) quote.
-'\S'
-'\textsection'
+‘\S’
+‘\textsection’
§ Section sign.
-'\TeX'
+‘\TeX’
The TeX logo.
-'\textasciicircum'
+‘\textasciicircum’
^ ASCII circumflex.
-'\textasciitilde'
+‘\textasciitilde’
~ ASCII tilde.
-'\textasteriskcentered'
+‘\textasteriskcentered’
* Centered asterisk.
-'\textbackslash'
- \ Backslash.
+‘\textbackslash’
+ \ Backslash. However, ‘\texttt{\textbackslash}’ produces a roman
+ (not typewriter) backslash by default; for a typewriter backslash,
+ it is necessary to use the T1 (or other non-default) font encoding,
+ as in:
-'\textbar'
+ \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+
+‘\textbar’
| Vertical bar.
-'\textbardbl'
+‘\textbardbl’
⏸ Double vertical bar.
-'\textbigcircle'
+‘\textbigcircle’
◯, Big circle symbol.
-'\textbraceleft'
- { Left brace.
+‘\textbraceleft’
+ { Left brace. See remarks at ‘\textbackslash’ above about making
+ ‘\texttt{\textbraceleft}’ produce a typewriter brace.
-'\textbraceright'
- } Right brace.
+‘\textbraceright’
+ } Right brace. See remarks at ‘\textbackslash’ above about making
+ ‘\texttt{\textbraceright}’ produce a typewriter brace.
-'\textbullet'
- * Bullet.
+‘\textbullet’
+ • Bullet.
-'\textcircled{LETTER}'
+‘\textcircled{LETTER}’
Ⓐ, Circle around LETTER.
-'\textcompwordmark'
-'\textcapitalcompwordmark'
-'\textascendercompwordmark'
+‘\textcompwordmark’
+‘\textcapitalcompwordmark’
+‘\textascendercompwordmark’
Used to separate letters that would normally ligature. For
- example, 'f\textcompwordmark i' produces 'fi' without a ligature.
+ example, ‘f\textcompwordmark i’ produces ‘fi’ without a ligature.
This is most useful in non-English languages. The
- '\textcapitalcompwordmark' form has the cap height of the font
- while the '\textascendercompwordmark' form has the ascender height.
+ ‘\textcapitalcompwordmark’ form has the cap height of the font
+ while the ‘\textascendercompwordmark’ form has the ascender height.
-'\textdagger'
+‘\textdagger’
† Dagger.
-'\textdaggerdbl'
+‘\textdaggerdbl’
‡ Double dagger.
-'\textdollar (or '\$')'
+‘\textdollar (or ‘\$’)’
$ Dollar sign.
-'\textemdash (or '---')'
- -- Em-dash. Used for punctuation, usually similar to commas or
- parentheses, as in ''The playoffs---if you're lucky enough to make
- the playoffs---are more like a sprint.'' Conventions for spacing
+‘\textemdash (or ‘---’)’
+ — Em-dash. Used for punctuation, usually similar to commas or
+ parentheses, as in ‘‘The playoffs---if you're lucky enough to make
+ the playoffs---are more like a sprint.’’ Conventions for spacing
around em-dashes vary widely.
-'\textendash (or '--')'
- - En-dash. Used for ranges, as in ''see pages 12--14''.
+‘\textendash (or ‘--’)’
+ – En-dash. Used for ranges, as in ‘‘see pages 12--14’’.
-'\texteuro'
+‘\texteuro’
The Euro currency symbol: €.
- For an alternative glyph design, try the 'eurosym' package; also,
+ For an alternative glyph design, try the ‘eurosym’ package; also,
most fonts nowadays come with their own Euro symbol (Unicode
U+20AC).
-'\textexclamdown (or '!`')'
+‘\textexclamdown (or ‘!`’)’
¡ Upside down exclamation point.
-'\textfiguredash'
+‘\textfiguredash’
Dash used between numerals, Unicode U+2012. Defined in the June
2021 release of LaTeX. When used in pdfTeX, approximated by an
en-dash; with a Unicode engine, either typesets the glyph if
- available in the current font, or writes the usual "Missing
- character" warning to the log file.
+ available in the current font, or writes the usual “Missing
+ character” warning to the log file.
-'\textgreater'
+‘\textgreater’
> Greater than symbol.
-'\texthorizontalbar'
+‘\texthorizontalbar’
Horizontal bar character, Unicode U+2015. Defined in the June 2021
- release of LaTeX. Behavior as with '\textfiguredash' above; the
+ release of LaTeX. Behavior as with ‘\textfiguredash’ above; the
pdfTeX approximation is an em-dash.
-'\textless'
+‘\textless’
< Less than symbol.
-'\textleftarrow'
+‘\textleftarrow’
←, Left arrow.
-'\textnonbreakinghyphen'
+‘\textnonbreakinghyphen’
Non-breaking hyphen character, Unicode U+2011. Defined in the June
- 2021 release of LaTeX. Behavior as with '\textfiguredash' above;
+ 2021 release of LaTeX. Behavior as with ‘\textfiguredash’ above;
the pdfTeX approximation is a regular ASCII hyphen (with breaks
disallowed after).
-'\textordfeminine'
-'\textordmasculine'
+‘\textordfeminine’
+‘\textordmasculine’
ª, º Feminine and masculine ordinal symbols.
-'\textperiodcentered'
+‘\textperiodcentered’
· Centered period.
-'\textquestiondown (or '?`')'
+‘\textquestiondown (or ‘?`’)’
¿ Upside down question mark.
-'\textquotedblleft (or '``')'
- " Double left quote.
+‘\textquotedblleft (or ‘``’)’
+ “ Double left quote.
-'\textquotedblright (or '''')'
- " Double right quote.
+‘\textquotedblright (or ‘''’)’
+ ” Double right quote.
-'\textquoteleft (or '`')'
- ' Single left quote.
+‘\textquoteleft (or ‘`’)’
+ ‘ Single left quote.
-'\textquoteright (or ''')'
- ' Single right quote.
+‘\textquoteright (or ‘'’)’
+ ’ Single right quote.
-'\textquotesingle'
+‘\textquotesingle’
', Straight single quote. (From TS1 encoding.)
-'\textquotestraightbase'
-'\textquotestraightdblbase'
+‘\textquotestraightbase’
+‘\textquotestraightdblbase’
Single and double straight quotes on the baseline.
-'\textregistered'
- (R) Registered symbol.
+‘\textregistered’
+ ® Registered symbol.
-'\textrightarrow'
+‘\textrightarrow’
→, Right arrow.
-'\textthreequartersemdash'
- ﹘, "Three-quarters" em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash.
+‘\textthreequartersemdash’
+ ﹘, “Three-quarters” em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash.
-'\texttrademark'
+‘\texttrademark’
™ Trademark symbol.
-'\texttwelveudash'
- ﹘, "Two-thirds" em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash.
+‘\texttwelveudash’
+ ﹘, “Two-thirds” em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash.
-'\textunderscore'
+‘\textunderscore’
_ Underscore.
-'\textvisiblespace'
+‘\textvisiblespace’
␣, Visible space symbol.
@@ -14719,93 +14816,93 @@
23.5 Accents
============
-LaTeX has wide support for many of the world's scripts and languages,
-provided through the core 'babel' package, which supports pdfLaTeX,
-XeLaTeX and LuaLaTeX. The 'polyglossia' package provides similar
+LaTeX has wide support for many of the world’s scripts and languages,
+provided through the core ‘babel’ package, which supports pdfLaTeX,
+XeLaTeX and LuaLaTeX. The ‘polyglossia’ package provides similar
support with the latter two engines.
This section does not cover that support. It only lists the core
-LaTeX commands for creating accented characters. The '\capital...'
+LaTeX commands for creating accented characters. The ‘\capital...’
commands shown here produce alternative forms for use with capital
letters. These are not available with OT1.
Below, to make them easier to find, the accents are all illustrated
-with lowercase 'o'.
+with lowercase ‘o’.
- Note that '\i' produces a dotless i, and '\j' produces a dotless j.
+ Note that ‘\i’ produces a dotless i, and ‘\j’ produces a dotless j.
These are often used in place of their dotted counterparts when they are
accented.
-'\"'
-'\capitaldieresis'
+‘\"’
+‘\capitaldieresis’
ö Umlaut (dieresis).
-'\''
-'\capitalacute'
+‘\'’
+‘\capitalacute’
ó Acute accent.
-'\.'
+‘\.’
ȯ Dot accent.
-'\='
-'\capitalmacron'
+‘\=’
+‘\capitalmacron’
ō Macron (overbar) accent.
-'\^'
-'\capitalcircumflex'
+‘\^’
+‘\capitalcircumflex’
ô Circumflex (hat) accent.
-'\`'
-'\capitalgrave'
+‘\`’
+‘\capitalgrave’
ò Grave accent.
-'\~'
-'\capitaltilde'
+‘\~’
+‘\capitaltilde’
ñ Tilde accent.
-'\b'
+‘\b’
o̲ Bar accent underneath.
- Related to this, '\underbar{TEXT}' produces a bar under TEXT. The
+ Related to this, ‘\underbar{TEXT}’ produces a bar under TEXT. The
argument is always processed in LR mode (*note Modes::). The bar
is always a fixed position under the baseline, thus crossing
- through descenders. See also '\underline' in *note Math
- miscellany::.
+ through descenders. See also ‘\underline’ in *note Over- and
+ Underlining::.
-'\c'
-'\capitalcedilla'
+‘\c’
+‘\capitalcedilla’
ç Cedilla accent underneath.
-'\d'
-'\capitaldotaccent'
+‘\d’
+‘\capitaldotaccent’
ọ Dot accent underneath.
-'\H'
-'\capitalhungarumlaut'
+‘\H’
+‘\capitalhungarumlaut’
ő Long Hungarian umlaut accent.
-'\k'
-'\capitalogonek'
+‘\k’
+‘\capitalogonek’
ǫ Ogonek. Not available in the OT1 encoding.
-'\r'
-'\capitalring'
+‘\r’
+‘\capitalring’
o̊ Ring accent.
-'\t'
-'\capitaltie'
-'\newtie'
-'\capitalnewtie'
+‘\t’
+‘\capitaltie’
+‘\newtie’
+‘\capitalnewtie’
Tie-after accent (used for transliterating from Cyrillic, such as
in the ALA-LC romanization). It expects that the argument has two
- characters. The '\newtie' form is centered in its box.
+ characters. The ‘\newtie’ form is centered in its box.
-'\u'
-'\capitalbreve'
+‘\u’
+‘\capitalbreve’
ŏ Breve accent.
-'\v'
-'\capitalcaron'
+‘\v’
+‘\capitalcaron’
ǒ Háček (check, caron) accent.
* Menu:
@@ -14815,7 +14912,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \accent, Up: Accents
-23.5.1 '\accent'
+23.5.1 ‘\accent’
----------------
Synopsis:
@@ -14827,7 +14924,7 @@
numeric argument, followed by a space and then a CHARACTER argument to
construct the accented character in the current font.
- These are accented 'e' characters.
+ These are accented ‘e’ characters.
\accent18 e
\accent20 e
@@ -14839,25 +14936,25 @@
a macron, and the fifth a ring above.
The position of the accent is determined by the font designer and so
-the outcome of '\accent' use may differ between fonts. In LaTeX it is
+the outcome of ‘\accent’ use may differ between fonts. In LaTeX it is
desirable to have glyphs for accented characters rather than building
-them using '\accent'. Using glyphs that already contain the accented
+them using ‘\accent’. Using glyphs that already contain the accented
characters (as in T1 encoding) allows correct hyphenation whereas
-'\accent' disables hyphenation (specifically with OT1 font encoding
+‘\accent’ disables hyphenation (specifically with OT1 font encoding
where accented glyphs are absent).
There can be an optional font change between NUMBER and CHARACTER.
-Note also that this command sets the '\spacefactor' to 1000 (*note
+Note also that this command sets the ‘\spacefactor’ to 1000 (*note
\spacefactor::).
An unavoidable characteristic of some Cyrillic letters and the
majority of accented Cyrillic letters is that they must be assembled
-from multiple elements (accents, modifiers, etc.) while '\accent'
+from multiple elements (accents, modifiers, etc.) while ‘\accent’
provides for a single accent mark and a single letter combination.
There are also cases where accents must appear between letters that
\accent does not support. Still other cases exist where the letters I
and J have dots above their lowercase counterparts that conflict with
-dotted accent marks. The use of '\accent' in these cases will not work
+dotted accent marks. The use of ‘\accent’ in these cases will not work
as it cannot analyze upper/lower case.
@@ -14866,64 +14963,64 @@
23.6 Additional Latin letters
=============================
-Here are the basic LaTeX commands for inserting letters beyond A-Z that
+Here are the basic LaTeX commands for inserting letters beyond A–Z that
extend the Latin alphabet, used primarily in languages other than
English.
-'\aa'
-'\AA'
+‘\aa’
+‘\AA’
å and Å.
-'\ae'
-'\AE'
+‘\ae’
+‘\AE’
æ and Æ.
-'\dh'
-'\DH'
+‘\dh’
+‘\DH’
Icelandic letter eth: ð and Ð. Not available with OT1 encoding, you
- need the 'fontenc' package to select an alternate font encoding,
+ need the ‘fontenc’ package to select an alternate font encoding,
such as T1.
-'\dj'
-'\DJ'
+‘\dj’
+‘\DJ’
Crossed d and D, a.k.a. capital and small letter d with stroke.
- Not available with OT1 encoding, you need the 'fontenc' package to
+ Not available with OT1 encoding, you need the ‘fontenc’ package to
select an alternate font encoding, such as T1.
-'\ij'
-'\IJ'
+‘\ij’
+‘\IJ’
ij and IJ (except somewhat closer together than appears here).
-'\l'
-'\L'
+‘\l’
+‘\L’
ł and Ł.
-'\ng'
-'\NG'
+‘\ng’
+‘\NG’
Lappish letter eng, also used in phonetics.
-'\o'
-'\O'
+‘\o’
+‘\O’
ø and Ø.
-'\oe'
-'\OE'
+‘\oe’
+‘\OE’
œ and Œ.
-'\ss'
-'\SS'
+‘\ss’
+‘\SS’
ß and SS.
-'\th'
-'\TH'
+‘\th’
+‘\TH’
Icelandic letter thorn: þ and Þ. Not available with OT1 encoding,
- you need the 'fontenc' package to select an alternate font
+ you need the ‘fontenc’ package to select an alternate font
encoding, such as T1.
File: latex2e.info, Node: inputenc package, Next: \rule, Prev: Additional Latin letters, Up: Special insertions
-23.7 'inputenc' package
+23.7 ‘inputenc’ package
=======================
Synopsis:
@@ -14930,17 +15027,17 @@
\usepackage[ENCODING-NAME]{inputenc}
- Declare the input file's text encoding to be ENCODING-NAME. The
+ Declare the input file’s text encoding to be ENCODING-NAME. The
default, if this package is not loaded, is UTF-8. Technically,
specifying the encoding name is optional, but in practice it is not
useful to omit it.
In a computer file, the characters are stored according to a scheme
-called the "encoding". There are many different encodings. The
+called the “encoding”. There are many different encodings. The
simplest is ASCII, which supports 95 printable characters, not enough
-for most of the world's languages. For instance, to typeset the
-a-umlaut character 'ä' in an ASCII-encoded LaTeX source file, the
-sequence '\"a' is used. This would make source files for anything but
+for most of the world’s languages. For instance, to typeset the
+a-umlaut character ‘ä’ in an ASCII-encoded LaTeX source file, the
+sequence ‘\"a’ is used. This would make source files for anything but
English hard to read; even for English, often a more extensive encoding
is more convenient.
@@ -14948,24 +15045,24 @@
UTF-8, one of the representations of Unicode. This is the default for
LaTeX since 2018.
- The 'inputenc' package is how LaTeX knows what encoding is used. For
+ The ‘inputenc’ package is how LaTeX knows what encoding is used. For
instance, the following command explicitly says that the input file is
UTF-8 (note the lack of a dash).
\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
- Caution: use 'inputenc' only with the pdfTeX engine (*note TeX
+ Caution: use ‘inputenc’ only with the pdfTeX engine (*note TeX
engines::). (The XeTeX and LuaTeX engines assume that the input file is
-UTF-8 encoded.) If you invoke LaTeX with either the 'xelatex' command
-or the 'lualatex' command, and try to declare a non-UTF-8 encoding with
-'inputenc', such as 'latin1', then you will get the error 'inputenc is
-not designed for xetex or luatex'.
+UTF-8 encoded.) If you invoke LaTeX with either the ‘xelatex’ command
+or the ‘lualatex’ command, and try to declare a non-UTF-8 encoding with
+‘inputenc’, such as ‘latin1’, then you will get the error ‘inputenc is
+not designed for xetex or luatex’.
- An 'inputenc' package error such as 'Invalid UTF-8 byte "96' means
+ An ‘inputenc’ package error such as ‘Invalid UTF-8 byte "96’ means
that some of the material in the input file does not follow the encoding
scheme. Often these errors come from copying material from a document
that uses a different encoding than the input file; this one is a left
-single quote from a web page using 'latin1' inside a LaTeX input file
+single quote from a web page using ‘latin1’ inside a LaTeX input file
that uses UTF-8. The simplest solution is to replace the non-UTF-8
character with its UTF-8 equivalent, or use a LaTeX equivalent command
or character.
@@ -14972,14 +15069,14 @@
In some documents, such as a collection of journal articles from a
variety of authors, changing the encoding in mid-document may be
-necessary. Use the command '\inputencoding{ENCODING-NAME}'. The most
-common values for ENCODING-NAME are: 'ascii', 'latin1', 'latin2',
-'latin3', 'latin4', 'latin5', 'latin9', 'latin10', and 'utf8'.
+necessary. Use the command ‘\inputencoding{ENCODING-NAME}’. The most
+common values for ENCODING-NAME are: ‘ascii’, ‘latin1’, ‘latin2’,
+‘latin3’, ‘latin4’, ‘latin5’, ‘latin9’, ‘latin10’, and ‘utf8’.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \rule, Next: \today, Prev: inputenc package, Up: Special insertions
-23.8 '\rule'
+23.8 ‘\rule’
============
Synopsis, one of:
@@ -14987,14 +15084,14 @@
\rule{WIDTH}{THICKNESS}
\rule[RAISE]{WIDTH}{THICKNESS}
- Produce a "rule", a filled-in rectangle.
+ Produce a “rule”, a filled-in rectangle.
This example produces a rectangular blob, sometimes called a Halmos
-symbol, or just "qed", often used to mark the end of a proof:
+symbol, or just “qed”, often used to mark the end of a proof:
\newcommand{\qedsymbol}{\rule{0.4em}{2ex}}
-The 'amsthm' package includes this command, with a somewhat
+The ‘amsthm’ package includes this command, with a somewhat
different-looking symbol.
The mandatory arguments give the horizontal WIDTH and vertical
@@ -15017,7 +15114,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \today, Prev: \rule, Up: Special insertions
-23.9 '\today'
+23.9 ‘\today’
=============
Synopsis:
@@ -15024,12 +15121,12 @@
\today
- Produce today's date in the format 'MONTH DD, YYYY'. An example of a
-date in that format is 'July 4, 1976'.
+ Produce today’s date in the format ‘MONTH DD, YYYY’. An example of a
+date in that format is ‘July 4, 1976’.
- Multilingual packages such as 'babel' or 'polyglossia', or classes
-such as 'lettre', will localize '\today'. For example, the following
-will output '4 juillet 1976':
+ Multilingual packages such as ‘babel’ or ‘polyglossia’, or classes
+such as ‘lettre’, will localize ‘\today’. For example, the following
+will output ‘4 juillet 1976’:
\year=1976 \month=7 \day=4
\documentclass{minimal}
@@ -15038,10 +15135,10 @@
\today
\end{document}
-'\today' uses the counters '\day', '\month', and '\year' (*note \day &
+‘\today’ uses the counters ‘\day’, ‘\month’, and ‘\year’ (*note \day &
\month & \year::).
- A number of package on CTAN work with dates. One is 'datetime'
+ A number of package on CTAN work with dates. One is ‘datetime’
package which can produce a wide variety of date formats, including ISO
standards.
@@ -15059,7 +15156,7 @@
It can also speed processing.
Regardless of how many separate files you use, there is always one
-"root file", on which LaTeX compilation starts. This shows such a file
+“root file”, on which LaTeX compilation starts. This shows such a file
with five included files.
\documentclass{book}
@@ -15082,17 +15179,17 @@
\include{bib}
\end{document}
-This will bring in material from 'pref.tex', 'chap1.tex', 'chap2.tex',
-'append.tex', and 'bib.tex'. If you compile this file, and then comment
-out all of the lines inside '\includeonly{...}' except for 'chap1', and
+This will bring in material from ‘pref.tex’, ‘chap1.tex’, ‘chap2.tex’,
+‘append.tex’, and ‘bib.tex’. If you compile this file, and then comment
+out all of the lines inside ‘\includeonly{...}’ except for ‘chap1’, and
compile again, then LaTeX will only process the material in the first
chapter. Thus, your output will appear more quickly and be shorter to
-print. However, the advantage of the '\includeonly' command is that
+print. However, the advantage of the ‘\includeonly’ command is that
LaTeX will retain the page numbers and all of the cross reference
information from the other parts of the document so these will appear in
your output correctly.
- *Note Larger book template::, for another example of '\includeonly'.
+ *Note Larger book template::, for another example of ‘\includeonly’.
* Menu:
@@ -15103,7 +15200,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \endinput, Next: \include & \includeonly, Up: Splitting the input
-24.1 '\endinput'
+24.1 ‘\endinput’
================
Synopsis:
@@ -15110,12 +15207,12 @@
\endinput
- When you '\include{filename}', inside 'filename.tex' the material
-after '\endinput' will not be included. This command is optional; if
-'filename.tex' has no '\endinput' then LaTeX will read all of the file.
+ When you ‘\include{filename}’, inside ‘filename.tex’ the material
+after ‘\endinput’ will not be included. This command is optional; if
+‘filename.tex’ has no ‘\endinput’ then LaTeX will read all of the file.
- For example, suppose that a document's root file has '\input{chap1}'
-and this is 'chap1.tex'.
+ For example, suppose that a document’s root file has ‘\input{chap1}’
+and this is ‘chap1.tex’.
\chapter{One}
This material will appear in the document.
@@ -15125,20 +15222,20 @@
This can be useful for putting documentation or comments at the end
of a file, or for avoiding junk characters that can be added if the file
is transmitted in the body of an email. It is also useful for
-debugging: one strategy to localize errors is to put '\endinput' halfway
+debugging: one strategy to localize errors is to put ‘\endinput’ halfway
through the included file and see if the error disappears. Now, knowing
-which half contains the error, moving '\endinput' to halfway through
+which half contains the error, moving ‘\endinput’ to halfway through
that area further narrows down the location. This process rapidly finds
the offending line.
- After reading '\endinput', LaTeX continues to read to the end of the
+ After reading ‘\endinput’, LaTeX continues to read to the end of the
line, so something can follow this command and be read nonetheless.
-This allows you, for instance, to close an '\if...' with a '\fi'.
+This allows you, for instance, to close an ‘\if...’ with a ‘\fi’.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \include & \includeonly, Next: \input, Prev: \endinput, Up: Splitting the input
-24.2 '\include' & '\includeonly'
+24.2 ‘\include’ & ‘\includeonly’
================================
Synopsis:
@@ -15151,21 +15248,21 @@
...
\include{FILENAME} % in document body
- Bring material from the external file 'FILENAME.tex' into a LaTeX
+ Bring material from the external file ‘FILENAME.tex’ into a LaTeX
document.
- The '\include' command does three things: it executes '\clearpage'
+ The ‘\include’ command does three things: it executes ‘\clearpage’
(*note \clearpage & \cleardoublepage::), then it inputs the material
-from 'FILENAME.tex' into the document, and then it does another
-'\clearpage'. This command can only appear in the document body.
+from ‘FILENAME.tex’ into the document, and then it does another
+‘\clearpage’. This command can only appear in the document body.
- The '\includeonly' command controls which files will be read by LaTeX
-under subsequent '\include' commands. Its list of filenames is
+ The ‘\includeonly’ command controls which files will be read by LaTeX
+under subsequent ‘\include’ commands. Its list of filenames is
comma-separated. It must appear in the preamble or even earlier, e.g.,
-the command line; it can't appear in the document body.
+the command line; it can’t appear in the document body.
- This example root document, 'constitution.tex', brings in three
-files, 'preamble.tex', 'articles.tex', and 'amendments.tex'.
+ This example root document, ‘constitution.tex’, brings in three
+files, ‘preamble.tex’, ‘articles.tex’, and ‘amendments.tex’.
\documentclass{book}
\includeonly{
@@ -15179,8 +15276,8 @@
\include{amendments}
\end{document}
-The file 'preamble.tex' contains no special code; you have just
-excerpted the chapter from 'consitution.tex' and put it in a separate
+The file ‘preamble.tex’ contains no special code; you have just
+excerpted the chapter from ‘consitution.tex’ and put it in a separate
file just for editing convenience.
\chapter{Preamble}
@@ -15187,25 +15284,25 @@
We the People of the United States,
in Order to form a more perfect Union, ...
-Running LaTeX on 'constitution.tex' makes the material from the three
+Running LaTeX on ‘constitution.tex’ makes the material from the three
files appear in the document but also generates the auxiliary files
-'preamble.aux', 'articles.aux', and 'amendments.aux'. These contain
+‘preamble.aux’, ‘articles.aux’, and ‘amendments.aux’. These contain
information such as page numbers and cross-references (*note Cross
-references::). If you now comment out '\includeonly''s lines with
-'preamble' and 'amendments' and run LaTeX again then the resulting
-document shows only the material from 'articles.tex', not the material
-from 'preamble.tex' or 'amendments.tex'. Nonetheless, all of the
+references::). If you now comment out ‘\includeonly’’s lines with
+‘preamble’ and ‘amendments’ and run LaTeX again then the resulting
+document shows only the material from ‘articles.tex’, not the material
+from ‘preamble.tex’ or ‘amendments.tex’. Nonetheless, all of the
auxiliary information from the omitted files is still there, including
the starting page number of the chapter.
- If the document preamble does not have '\includeonly' then LaTeX will
-include all the files you call for with '\include' commands.
+ If the document preamble does not have ‘\includeonly’ then LaTeX will
+include all the files you call for with ‘\include’ commands.
- The '\include' command makes a new page. To avoid that, see *note
+ The ‘\include’ command makes a new page. To avoid that, see *note
\input:: (which, however, does not retain the auxiliary information).
- *Note Larger book template::, for another example using '\include'
-and '\includeonly'. That example also uses '\input' for some material
+ *Note Larger book template::, for another example using ‘\include’
+and ‘\includeonly’. That example also uses ‘\input’ for some material
that will not necessarily start on a new page.
File names can involve paths.
@@ -15220,7 +15317,7 @@
To make your document portable across distributions and platforms you
should avoid spaces in the file names. The tradition is to instead use
-dashes or underscores. Nevertheless, for the name 'amo amas amat', this
+dashes or underscores. Nevertheless, for the name ‘amo amas amat’, this
works under TeX Live on GNU/Linux:
\documentclass{book}
@@ -15241,26 +15338,26 @@
\include{{"amo amas amat"}}
\end{document}
- You cannot use '\include' inside a file that is being included or you
-get 'LaTeX Error: \include cannot be nested.' The '\include' command
-cannot appear in the document preamble; you will get 'LaTeX Error:
-Missing \begin{document}'.
+ You cannot use ‘\include’ inside a file that is being included or you
+get ‘LaTeX Error: \include cannot be nested.’ The ‘\include’ command
+cannot appear in the document preamble; you will get ‘LaTeX Error:
+Missing \begin{document}’.
- If a file that you '\include' does not exist, for instance if you
-'\include{athiesm}' but you meant '\include{atheism}', then LaTeX does
-not give you an error but will warn you 'No file athiesm.tex.' (It will
-also create 'athiesm.aux'.)
+ If a file that you ‘\include’ does not exist, for instance if you
+‘\include{athiesm}’ but you meant ‘\include{atheism}’, then LaTeX does
+not give you an error but will warn you ‘No file athiesm.tex.’ (It will
+also create ‘athiesm.aux’.)
- If you '\include' the root file in itself then you first get 'LaTeX
-Error: Can be used only in preamble.' Later runs get 'TeX capacity
-exceeded, sorry [text input levels=15]'. To fix this, you must remove
-the inclusion '\include{ROOT}' but also delete the file 'ROOT.aux' and
+ If you ‘\include’ the root file in itself then you first get ‘LaTeX
+Error: Can be used only in preamble.’ Later runs get ‘TeX capacity
+exceeded, sorry [text input levels=15]’. To fix this, you must remove
+the inclusion ‘\include{ROOT}’ but also delete the file ‘ROOT.aux’ and
rerun LaTeX.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \input, Prev: \include & \includeonly, Up: Splitting the input
-24.3 '\input'
+24.3 ‘\input’
=============
Synopsis:
@@ -15271,22 +15368,22 @@
current file. For a more sophisticated inclusion mechanism see *note
\include & \includeonly::.
- If FILENAME does not end in '.tex' then LaTeX first tries the
+ If FILENAME does not end in ‘.tex’ then LaTeX first tries the
filename with that extension; this is the usual case. If FILENAME ends
-with '.tex' then LaTeX looks for the filename as it is.
+with ‘.tex’ then LaTeX looks for the filename as it is.
For example, this
\input{macros}
-will cause LaTeX to first look for 'macros.tex'. If it finds that file
+will cause LaTeX to first look for ‘macros.tex’. If it finds that file
then it processes its contents as thought they had been copy-pasted in.
-If there is no file of the name 'macros.tex' then LaTeX tries the name
-'macros', without an extension. (This may vary by distribution.)
+If there is no file of the name ‘macros.tex’ then LaTeX tries the name
+‘macros’, without an extension. (This may vary by distribution.)
To make your document portable across distributions and platforms you
should avoid spaces in the file names. The tradition is to instead use
-dashes or underscores. Nevertheless, for the name 'amo amas amat', this
+dashes or underscores. Nevertheless, for the name ‘amo amas amat’, this
works under TeX Live on GNU/Linux:
\input{"amo\space amas\space amat"}
@@ -15323,10 +15420,10 @@
Put the command in the input file where you want the table or list to
go. You do not type the entries; for example, typically the table of
contents entries are automatically generated from the sectioning
-commands '\chapter', etc.
+commands ‘\chapter’, etc.
- This example illustrates the first command, '\tableofcontents'.
-LaTeX will produce a table of contents on the book's first page.
+ This example illustrates the first command, ‘\tableofcontents’.
+LaTeX will produce a table of contents on the book’s first page.
\documentclass{book}
% \setcounter{tocdepth}{1}
@@ -15342,20 +15439,20 @@
\end{document}
Uncommenting the second line would cause that table to contain chapter
-and section listings but not subsection listings, because the '\section'
+and section listings but not subsection listings, because the ‘\section’
command has level 1. *Note Sectioning::, for level numbers of the
-sectioning units. For more on the 'tocdepth' *note
+sectioning units. For more on the ‘tocdepth’ *note
Sectioning/tocdepth::.
- Another example of the use of '\tableofcontents' is in *note Larger
+ Another example of the use of ‘\tableofcontents’ is in *note Larger
book template::.
If you want a page break after the table of contents, write a
-'\newpage' command after the '\tableofcontents' command, as above.
+‘\newpage’ command after the ‘\tableofcontents’ command, as above.
To make the table of contents, LaTeX stores the information in an
-auxiliary file named 'ROOT-FILE.toc' (*note Splitting the input::). For
-example, this LaTeX file 'test.tex'
+auxiliary file named ‘ROOT-FILE.toc’ (*note Splitting the input::). For
+example, this LaTeX file ‘test.tex’
\documentclass{article}
\begin{document}
@@ -15364,74 +15461,73 @@
\subsection{First subsection}
...
-writes these lines to 'test.toc'.
+writes these lines to ‘test.toc’.
\contentsline {section}{\numberline {1}First section}{2}
\contentsline {subsection}{\numberline {1.1}First subsection}{2}
-Each line contains a single command, '\contentsline' (*note
-\contentsline::). The first argument, the 'section' or 'subsection', is
+Each line contains a single command, ‘\contentsline’ (*note
+\contentsline::). The first argument, the ‘section’ or ‘subsection’, is
the sectioning unit. The second argument has two components. The hook
-'\numberline' determines how the sectioning number, '1' or '1.1',
+‘\numberline’ determines how the sectioning number, ‘1’ or ‘1.1’,
appears in the table of contents (*note \numberline::). The remainder
-of the second argument of '\contentsline', 'First section' or 'First
-subsection', is the sectioning title text. Finally, the third argument,
-'2', is the page number on which this sectioning unit starts.
+of the second argument of ‘\contentsline’, ‘First section’ or ‘First
+subsection’, is the sectioning title text. Finally, the third argument,
+‘2’, is the page number on which this sectioning unit starts.
- To typeset these lines, the document class provides '\l at SECTION-UNIT'
-commands such as '\l at section{TEXT}{PAGENUMBER}' and
-'\l at subsection{TEXT}{PAGENUMBER}'. These commands often use the
-'\@dottedtocline' command (*note \@dottedtocline::).
+ To typeset these lines, the document class provides ‘\l at SECTION-UNIT’
+commands such as ‘\l at section{TEXT}{PAGENUMBER}’ and
+‘\l at subsection{TEXT}{PAGENUMBER}’. These commands often use the
+‘\@dottedtocline’ command (*note \@dottedtocline::).
- A consequence of LaTeX's strategy of using auxiliary files is that to
+ A consequence of LaTeX’s strategy of using auxiliary files is that to
get the correct information in the document you must run LaTeX twice,
once to store the information and the second time to retrieve it. In
the ordinary course of writing a document authors run LaTeX a number of
times, but you may notice that the first time that you compile a new
document, the table of contents page will be empty except for its
-'Contents' header. Just run LaTeX again.
+‘Contents’ header. Just run LaTeX again.
- The commands '\listoffigures' and '\listoftables' produce a list of
+ The commands ‘\listoffigures’ and ‘\listoftables’ produce a list of
figures and a list of tables. Their information is stored in files with
-extension '.lof' and '.lot'. They work the same way as
-'\tableofcontents' but the latter is more common, so we use it for most
+extension ‘.lof’ and ‘.lot’. They work the same way as
+‘\tableofcontents’ but the latter is more common, so we use it for most
examples.
You can manually add material to the table of contents, the list of
figures, and the list of tables. For instance, add a line about a
section to the table of contents with
-'\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{TEXT}'. (*note \addcontentsline::).
+‘\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{TEXT}’. (*note \addcontentsline::).
Add arbitrary material, that is, non-line material, with
-'\addtocontents', as with the command
-'\addtocontents{lof}{\protect\vspace{2ex}}', which adds vertical space
+‘\addtocontents’, as with the command
+‘\addtocontents{lof}{\protect\vspace{2ex}}’, which adds vertical space
to the list of figures (*note \addtocontents::).
Lines in the table of contents, the list of figures, and the list of
tables, have four parts. First is an indent. Next is a box into which
sectioning numbers are placed, and then the third box holds the title
-text, such as 'First section'. Finally there is a box up against the
+text, such as ‘First section’. Finally there is a box up against the
right margin, inside of which LaTeX puts the page number box. For the
indent and the width of the number box, *note \@dottedtocline::. The
-right margin box has width '\@tocrmarg' and the page number is flush
-right in that space, inside a box of width '\@pnumwidth'. By default
-'\@tocrmarg' is '2.55em' and '\@pnumwidth' is '1.55em'. Change these as
-with '\renewcommand{\@tocrmarg}{3.5em}'.
+right margin box has width ‘\@tocrmarg’ and the page number is flush
+right in that space, inside a box of width ‘\@pnumwidth’. By default
+‘\@tocrmarg’ is ‘2.55em’ and ‘\@pnumwidth’ is ‘1.55em’. Change these as
+with ‘\renewcommand{\@tocrmarg}{3.5em}’.
CTAN has many packages for the table of contents and lists of figures
-and tables (*note CTAN::). The package 'tocloft' is convenient for
+and tables (*note CTAN::). The package ‘tocloft’ is convenient for
adjusting some aspects of the default such as spacing. And,
-'tocbibbind' will automatically add the bibliography, index, etc. to
+‘tocbibbind’ will automatically add the bibliography, index, etc. to
the table of contents.
To change the header for the table of contents page, do something
-like these commands before you call '\tableofcontents', etc.
+like these commands before you call ‘\tableofcontents’, etc.
\renewcommand{\contentsname}{Table of Contents}
\renewcommand{\listfigurename}{Plots}
\renewcommand{\listtablename}{Specifications}
-
- Internationalization packages such as 'babel' or 'polyglossia' will
+ Internationalization packages such as ‘babel’ or ‘polyglossia’ will
change these headers depending on the chosen base language.
* Menu:
@@ -15446,7 +15542,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \@dottedtocline, Next: \addcontentsline, Up: Table of contents etc.
-25.1.1 '\@dottedtocline'
+25.1.1 ‘\@dottedtocline’
------------------------
Synopsis:
@@ -15455,10 +15551,10 @@
Used internally by LaTeX to format an entry line in the table of
contents, list of figures, or list of tables. Authors do not directly
-enter '\@dottedtocline' commands.
+enter ‘\@dottedtocline’ commands.
- This command is typically used by '\l at section', '\l at subsection',
-etc., to format the content lines. For example, the 'article.cls' file
+ This command is typically used by ‘\l at section’, ‘\l at subsection’,
+etc., to format the content lines. For example, the ‘article.cls’ file
contains these definitions:
\newcommand*\l at section{\@dottedtocline{1}{1.5em}{2.3em}}
@@ -15465,26 +15561,26 @@
\newcommand*\l at subsection{\@dottedtocline{2}{3.8em}{3.2em}}
\newcommand*\l at subsubsection{\@dottedtocline{3}{7.0em}{4.1em}}
-In this example, '\@dottedcline' appears to have been given only three
+In this example, ‘\@dottedcline’ appears to have been given only three
arguments. But tracing the internal code shows that it picks up the
final TEXT and PAGENUMBER arguments in the synopsis from a call to
-'\contentsline' (*note \contentsline::).
+‘\contentsline’ (*note \contentsline::).
Between the box for the title text of a section and the right margin
-box, these '\@dottedtocline' commands insert "leaders", that is,
+box, these ‘\@dottedtocline’ commands insert “leaders”, that is,
evenly-spaced dots. The dot-to-dot space is given by the command
-'\@dotsep'. By default it is 4.5 (it is in math units, aka. 'mu', which
-are '1/18' em. Change it using '\renewcommand', as in
-'\renewcommand{\@dotsep}{3.5}'.
+‘\@dotsep’. By default it is 4.5 (it is in math units, aka. ‘mu’, which
+are ‘1/18’ em. Change it using ‘\renewcommand’, as in
+‘\renewcommand{\@dotsep}{3.5}’.
- In the standard 'book' class, LaTeX does not use dotted leaders for
-the Part and Chapter table entries, and in the standard 'article' class
+ In the standard ‘book’ class, LaTeX does not use dotted leaders for
+the Part and Chapter table entries, and in the standard ‘article’ class
it does not use dotted leaders for Section entries.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \addcontentsline, Next: \addtocontents, Prev: \@dottedtocline, Up: Table of contents etc.
-25.1.2 '\addcontentsline'
+25.1.2 ‘\addcontentsline’
-------------------------
Synopsis:
@@ -15493,7 +15589,7 @@
Add an entry to the auxiliary file with extension EXT.
- The following will result in an 'Appendices' line in the table of
+ The following will result in an ‘Appendices’ line in the table of
contents.
\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\protect\textbf{Appendices}}
@@ -15502,33 +15598,33 @@
boldface, and will be assigned the page number associated with the point
where the command appears in the input file.
- The '\addcontentsline' command writes information to the file
-'ROOT-NAME.EXT', where ROOT-NAME is the file name of the root file
+ The ‘\addcontentsline’ command writes information to the file
+‘ROOT-NAME.EXT’, where ROOT-NAME is the file name of the root file
(*note Splitting the input::). It writes that information as the text
-of the command '\contentsline{UNIT}{TEXT}{NUM}', where 'NUM' is the
-current value of counter 'UNIT' (*note \contentsline::). The most
+of the command ‘\contentsline{UNIT}{TEXT}{NUM}’, where ‘NUM’ is the
+current value of counter ‘UNIT’ (*note \contentsline::). The most
common case is the table of contents and there NUM is the page number of
the first page of UNIT.
- This command is invoked by the sectioning commands '\chapter', etc.
-(*note Sectioning::), and also by '\caption' inside a float environment
+ This command is invoked by the sectioning commands ‘\chapter’, etc.
+(*note Sectioning::), and also by ‘\caption’ inside a float environment
(*note Floats::). But it is also directly used by authors. For
example, an author writing a book whose style is to have an unnumbered
-preface may use the starred '\chapter*'. But that command leaves out
+preface may use the starred ‘\chapter*’. But that command leaves out
table of contents information, which can be entered manually, as here.
\chapter*{Preface}
\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\protect\numberline{}Preface}
-In the 'ROOT-NAME.toc' file LaTeX will put the line '\contentsline
-{chapter}{\numberline {}Preface}{3}'; note that the page number '3' is
+In the ‘ROOT-NAME.toc’ file LaTeX will put the line ‘\contentsline
+{chapter}{\numberline {}Preface}{3}’; note that the page number ‘3’ is
automatically generated by the system, not entered manually.
- All of the arguments for '\addcontentsline' are required.
+ All of the arguments for ‘\addcontentsline’ are required.
EXT
- Typically one of the strings 'toc' for the table of contents, 'lof'
- for the list of figures, or 'lot' for the list of tables. The
+ Typically one of the strings ‘toc’ for the table of contents, ‘lof’
+ for the list of figures, or ‘lot’ for the list of tables. The
filename extension of the information file.
UNIT
@@ -15535,25 +15631,25 @@
A string that depends on the value of the EXT argument, typically
one of:
- 'toc'
+ ‘toc’
For the table of contents, this is the name of a sectional
- unit: 'part', 'chapter', 'section', 'subsection', etc.
+ unit: ‘part’, ‘chapter’, ‘section’, ‘subsection’, etc.
- 'lof'
- For the list of figures: 'figure'.
+ ‘lof’
+ For the list of figures: ‘figure’.
- 'lot'
- For the list of tables: 'table'.
+ ‘lot’
+ For the list of tables: ‘table’.
TEXT
- The text of the entry. You must '\protect' any fragile commands
+ The text of the entry. You must ‘\protect’ any fragile commands
(*note \protect::) used in it.
- The '\addcontentsline' command has an interaction with '\include'
+ The ‘\addcontentsline’ command has an interaction with ‘\include’
(*note \include & \includeonly::). If you use them at the same level,
-as with '\addcontentsline{...}{...}{...}\include{...}' then lines in the
+as with ‘\addcontentsline{...}{...}{...}\include{...}’ then lines in the
table of contents can come out in the wrong order. The solution is to
-move '\addcontentsline' into the file being included.
+move ‘\addcontentsline’ into the file being included.
If you use a UNIT that LaTeX does not recognize, as with the typo
here
@@ -15560,13 +15656,13 @@
\addcontentsline{toc}{setcion}{\protect\textbf{Appendices}}
-then you don't get an error but the formatting in the table of contents
+then you don’t get an error but the formatting in the table of contents
will not make sense.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \addtocontents, Next: \contentsline, Prev: \addcontentsline, Up: Table of contents etc.
-25.1.3 '\addtocontents'
+25.1.3 ‘\addtocontents’
-----------------------
Synopsis:
@@ -15579,12 +15675,12 @@
the list of figures and list of tables.
This will put some vertical space in the table of contents after the
-'Contents' header.
+‘Contents’ header.
\tableofcontents\newpage
\addtocontents{toc}{\protect\vspace*{3ex}}
-This puts the word 'Page', in boldface, above the column of page numbers
+This puts the word ‘Page’, in boldface, above the column of page numbers
and after the header.
\tableofcontents
@@ -15597,37 +15693,37 @@
\protect\vspace{2ex}
\textbf{Chapters by N. Other Author}\par}
- The difference between '\addtocontents' and '\addcontentsline' is
+ The difference between ‘\addtocontents’ and ‘\addcontentsline’ is
that the latter is strictly for lines, such as with a line giving the
page number for the start of a new subset of the chapters. As the above
-examples show, '\addtocontents' is for material such as spacing.
+examples show, ‘\addtocontents’ is for material such as spacing.
- The '\addtocontents' command has two arguments. Both are required.
+ The ‘\addtocontents’ command has two arguments. Both are required.
EXT
- Typically one of: 'toc' for the table of contents, 'lof' for the
- list of figures, or 'lot' for the list of tables. The extension of
+ Typically one of: ‘toc’ for the table of contents, ‘lof’ for the
+ list of figures, or ‘lot’ for the list of tables. The extension of
the file holding the information.
TEXT
The text, and possibly commands, to be written.
- The sectioning commands such as '\chapter' use the '\addcontentsline'
-command to store information. This command creates lines in the '.toc'
-auxiliary file containing the '\contentsline' command (*note
-\addcontentsline::). In contrast, the command '\addtocontents' puts
+ The sectioning commands such as ‘\chapter’ use the ‘\addcontentsline’
+command to store information. This command creates lines in the ‘.toc’
+auxiliary file containing the ‘\contentsline’ command (*note
+\addcontentsline::). In contrast, the command ‘\addtocontents’ puts
material directly in that file.
- The '\addtocontents' command has an interaction with '\include'
+ The ‘\addtocontents’ command has an interaction with ‘\include’
(*note \include & \includeonly::). If you use them at the same level,
-as with '\addtocontents{...}{...}\include{...}' then lines in the table
+as with ‘\addtocontents{...}{...}\include{...}’ then lines in the table
of contents can come out in the wrong order. The solution is to move
-'\addtocontents' into the file being included.
+‘\addtocontents’ into the file being included.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \contentsline, Next: \nofiles, Prev: \addtocontents, Up: Table of contents etc.
-25.1.4 '\contentsline'
+25.1.4 ‘\contentsline’
----------------------
Synopsis:
@@ -15636,42 +15732,42 @@
Used internally by LaTeX to typeset an entry of the table of
contents, list of figures, or list of tables (*note Table of contents
-etc.::). Authors do not directly enter '\contentsline' commands.
+etc.::). Authors do not directly enter ‘\contentsline’ commands.
Usually adding material to these lists is done automatically by the
-commands '\chapter', '\section', etc. for the table of contents, or by
-the '\caption' command inside of a '\figure' or '\table' environment
+commands ‘\chapter’, ‘\section’, etc. for the table of contents, or by
+the ‘\caption’ command inside of a ‘\figure’ or ‘\table’ environment
(*note figure:: and *note table::). Thus, where the root file is
-'thesis.tex', and contains the declaration '\tableofcontents', the
-command '\chapter{Chapter One}' produces something like this in the file
-'thesis.toc'.
+‘thesis.tex’, and contains the declaration ‘\tableofcontents’, the
+command ‘\chapter{Chapter One}’ produces something like this in the file
+‘thesis.toc’.
\contentsline {chapter}{\numberline {1}Chapter One}{3}
- If the file contains the declaration '\listoffigures' then a figure
-environment involving '\caption{Test}' will produce something like this
-in 'thesis.lof'.
+ If the file contains the declaration ‘\listoffigures’ then a figure
+environment involving ‘\caption{Test}’ will produce something like this
+in ‘thesis.lof’.
\contentsline {figure}{\numberline {1.1}{\ignorespaces Test}}{6}
To manually add material, use
-'\addcontentsline{FILETYPE}{UNIT}{TEXT}', where FILETYPE is 'toc',
-'lof', or 'lot' (*note \addcontentsline::).
+‘\addcontentsline{FILETYPE}{UNIT}{TEXT}’, where FILETYPE is ‘toc’,
+‘lof’, or ‘lot’ (*note \addcontentsline::).
- For manipulating how the '\contentline' material is typeset, see the
-'tocloft' package.
+ For manipulating how the ‘\contentline’ material is typeset, see the
+‘tocloft’ package.
- Note that the 'hyperref' package changes the definition of
-'\contentsline' (and '\addcontentsline') to add more arguments, to make
-hyperlinks. This is the source of the error 'Argument of \contentsline
-has an extra }' when one adds/remove the use of package 'hyperref' and a
-compilation was already run. Fix this error by deleting the '.toc' or
-'.lof' or '.lot' file, and running LaTeX again.
+ Note that the ‘hyperref’ package changes the definition of
+‘\contentsline’ (and ‘\addcontentsline’) to add more arguments, to make
+hyperlinks. This is the source of the error ‘Argument of \contentsline
+has an extra }’ when one adds/remove the use of package ‘hyperref’ and a
+compilation was already run. Fix this error by deleting the ‘.toc’ or
+‘.lof’ or ‘.lot’ file, and running LaTeX again.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \nofiles, Next: \numberline, Prev: \contentsline, Up: Table of contents etc.
-25.1.5 '\nofiles'
+25.1.5 ‘\nofiles’
-----------------
Synopsis:
@@ -15679,11 +15775,11 @@
\nofiles
Prevent LaTeX from writing any auxiliary files. The only output will
-be the '.log' and '.pdf' (or '.dvi') files. This command must go in the
+be the ‘.log’ and ‘.pdf’ (or ‘.dvi’) files. This command must go in the
preamble.
- Because of the '\nofiles' command this example will not produce a
-'.toc' file.
+ Because of the ‘\nofiles’ command this example will not produce a
+‘.toc’ file.
\documentclass{book}
\nofiles
@@ -15693,13 +15789,13 @@
...
LaTeX will not erase any existing auxiliary files, so if you insert the
-'\nofiles' command after you have run the file and gotten a '.toc' then
+‘\nofiles’ command after you have run the file and gotten a ‘.toc’ then
the table of contents page will continue to show the old information.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \numberline, Prev: \nofiles, Up: Table of contents etc.
-25.1.6 '\numberline'
+25.1.6 ‘\numberline’
--------------------
Synopsis:
@@ -15707,28 +15803,28 @@
\numberline{NUMBER}
Typeset its argument flush left in a box. This is used in a
-'\contentsline' command to typeset the section number (*note
+‘\contentsline’ command to typeset the section number (*note
\contentsline::).
- For example, this line in a '.toc' file causes the '1.1' to be
+ For example, this line in a ‘.toc’ file causes the ‘1.1’ to be
typeset flush left.
\contentsline {subsection}{\numberline {1.1}Motivation}{2}
By default, LaTeX typesets the section numbers in a box of length
-'\@tempdima'. That length is set by the commands '\l at section',
-'\l at subsection', etc. Put section numbers inside a natural-width box
-with '\renewcommand{\numberline}[1]{#1~}' before '\tableofcontents'.
+‘\@tempdima’. That length is set by the commands ‘\l at section’,
+‘\l at subsection’, etc. Put section numbers inside a natural-width box
+with ‘\renewcommand{\numberline}[1]{#1~}’ before ‘\tableofcontents’.
- This command is fragile so you may need to precede it with '\protect'
-(*note \protect::). An example is the use of '\protect' in this
+ This command is fragile so you may need to precede it with ‘\protect’
+(*note \protect::). An example is the use of ‘\protect’ in this
command,
\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\protect\numberline{}Summary}
-to get the '\numberline' into the '\contentsline' command in the '.toc'
-file: '\contentsline {section}{\numberline {}Summary}{6}' (the page
-number '6' is automatically added by LaTeX; *note \addcontentsline::).
+to get the ‘\numberline’ into the ‘\contentsline’ command in the ‘.toc’
+file: ‘\contentsline {section}{\numberline {}Summary}{6}’ (the page
+number ‘6’ is automatically added by LaTeX; *note \addcontentsline::).
File: latex2e.info, Node: Indexes, Next: Glossaries, Prev: Table of contents etc., Up: Front/back matter
@@ -15755,36 +15851,36 @@
\printindex
\end{document}
-As that shows, declare index entries with the '\index' command (*note
-\index::). When you run LaTeX, the '\index' writes its information,
-such as 'Wilson's Theorem' and the page number, to an auxiliary file
-whose name ends in '.idx'. Next, to alphabetize and do other
-manipulations, run an external command, typically 'makeindex' (*note
-makeindex::), which writes a file whose name ends in '.ind'. Finally,
-'\printindex' brings this manipulated information into the output (*note
+As that shows, declare index entries with the ‘\index’ command (*note
+\index::). When you run LaTeX, the ‘\index’ writes its information,
+such as ‘Wilson's Theorem’ and the page number, to an auxiliary file
+whose name ends in ‘.idx’. Next, to alphabetize and do other
+manipulations, run an external command, typically ‘makeindex’ (*note
+makeindex::), which writes a file whose name ends in ‘.ind’. Finally,
+‘\printindex’ brings this manipulated information into the output (*note
\printindex::).
- Thus, if the above example is in the file 'numth.tex' then running
-'pdflatex numth' will save index entry and page number information to
-'numth.idx'. Then running 'makeindex numth' will alphabetize and save
-the results to 'numth.ind'. Finally, again running 'pdflatex numth'
-will show the desired index, at the place where the '\printindex'
+ Thus, if the above example is in the file ‘numth.tex’ then running
+‘pdflatex numth’ will save index entry and page number information to
+‘numth.idx’. Then running ‘makeindex numth’ will alphabetize and save
+the results to ‘numth.ind’. Finally, again running ‘pdflatex numth’
+will show the desired index, at the place where the ‘\printindex’
command is in the source file.
There are many options for the output. An example is that the
-exclamation point in '\index{congruence!and Wilson's Theorem}' produces
-a main entry of 'congruence' with a subentry of 'and Wilson's Theorem'.
+exclamation point in ‘\index{congruence!and Wilson's Theorem}’ produces
+a main entry of ‘congruence’ with a subentry of ‘and Wilson's Theorem’.
For more, *note makeindex::.
- The '\makeindex' and '\printindex' commands are independent. Leaving
-out the '\makeindex' will stop LaTeX from saving the index entries to
-the auxiliary file. Leaving out the '\printindex' will cause LaTeX to
+ The ‘\makeindex’ and ‘\printindex’ commands are independent. Leaving
+out the ‘\makeindex’ will stop LaTeX from saving the index entries to
+the auxiliary file. Leaving out the ‘\printindex’ will cause LaTeX to
not show the index in the document output.
- There are many packages in the area of indexing. The 'showidx'
+ There are many packages in the area of indexing. The ‘showidx’
package causes each index entries to be shown in the margin on the page
-where the '\index' appears. This can help in preparing the index. The
-'multind' package, among others, supports multiple indexes. See also
+where the ‘\index’ appears. This can help in preparing the index. The
+‘multind’ package, among others, supports multiple indexes. See also
the TeX FAQ entry on this topic, <https://www.texfaq.org/FAQ-multind>,
and the CTAN topic, <https://ctan.org/topic/index-multi>.
@@ -15802,7 +15898,7 @@
---------------------------------
Documents that are small and static can have a manually produced index.
-This will make a separate page labeled 'Index', in twocolumn format.
+This will make a separate page labeled ‘Index’, in twocolumn format.
\begin{theindex}
\item acorn squash, 1
@@ -15814,21 +15910,21 @@
Note that the author must enter the page numbers, which is tedious
and which will result in wrong numbers if the document changes. This is
-why in most cases automated methods such as 'makeindex' are best. *Note
+why in most cases automated methods such as ‘makeindex’ are best. *Note
Indexes::.
However we cover the commands for completeness, and because the
automated methods are based on these commands. There are three levels
-of entries. As the example shows, a main entry uses '\item', subentries
-use '\subitem', and the lowest level uses '\subsubitem'. Blank lines
+of entries. As the example shows, a main entry uses ‘\item’, subentries
+use ‘\subitem’, and the lowest level uses ‘\subsubitem’. Blank lines
between entries have no effect. The example above includes
-'\indexspace' to produce vertical space in the output that some index
+‘\indexspace’ to produce vertical space in the output that some index
styles use before the first entry starting with a new letter.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \index, Next: makeindex, Prev: Produce the index manually, Up: Indexes
-25.2.2 '\index'
+25.2.2 ‘\index’
---------------
Synopsis:
@@ -15839,9 +15935,9 @@
\protect::).
For example, as described in *note Indexes::, one way to get an index
-from what's below is to compile the document with 'pdflatex test', then
-process the index entries with 'makeindex test', and then compile again
-with 'pdflatex test'.
+from what’s below is to compile the document with ‘pdflatex test’, then
+process the index entries with ‘makeindex test’, and then compile again
+with ‘pdflatex test’.
% file test.tex
...
@@ -15851,23 +15947,23 @@
...
rate of growth\index{Ackermann!function!growth rate}
-All three index entries will get a page number, such as 'Ackermann, 22'.
+All three index entries will get a page number, such as ‘Ackermann, 22’.
LaTeX will format the second as a subitem of the first, on the line
below it and indented, and the third as a subitem of the second. Three
levels deep is as far as you can nest subentries. (If you add
-'\index{Ackermann!function!growth rate!comparison}' then 'makeindex'
-says 'Scanning input file test.idx....done (4 entries accepted, 1
-rejected)' and the fourth level is silently missing from the index.)
+‘\index{Ackermann!function!growth rate!comparison}’ then ‘makeindex’
+says ‘Scanning input file test.idx....done (4 entries accepted, 1
+rejected)’ and the fourth level is silently missing from the index.)
- If you enter a second '\index' with the same INDEX-ENTRY-STRING then
+ If you enter a second ‘\index’ with the same INDEX-ENTRY-STRING then
you will get a single index entry with two page numbers (unless they
-happen to fall on the same page). Thus, adding 'as for
-Ackermann.\index{Ackermann}' later in the same document as above will
-give an index entry like 'Ackermann, 22, 151'. Also, you can enter the
-index entries in any order, so for instance '\index{Ackermann!function}'
-could come before '\index{Ackermann}'.
+happen to fall on the same page). Thus, adding ‘as for
+Ackermann.\index{Ackermann}’ later in the same document as above will
+give an index entry like ‘Ackermann, 22, 151’. Also, you can enter the
+index entries in any order, so for instance ‘\index{Ackermann!function}’
+could come before ‘\index{Ackermann}’.
- Get a page range in the output, like 'Hilbert, 23--27', as here.
+ Get a page range in the output, like ‘Hilbert, 23--27’, as here.
W~Ackermann (1896--1962).\index{Ackermann}
...
@@ -15879,25 +15975,25 @@
just gives a single page number, not a range.
If you index subentries but not a main entry, as with
-'\index{Jones!program}' and '\index{Jones!results}', then the output is
-the item 'Jones' with no comma or page number, followed by two subitems,
-like 'program, 50' and 'results, 51'.
+‘\index{Jones!program}’ and ‘\index{Jones!results}’, then the output is
+the item ‘Jones’ with no comma or page number, followed by two subitems,
+like ‘program, 50’ and ‘results, 51’.
- Generate a index entry that says 'see' by using a vertical bar
-character: '\index{Ackermann!function|see{P\'eter's function}}'. You
-can instead get 'see also' with 'seealso'. (The text 'see' is defined
-by '\seename', and 'see also' by '\alsoname'. You can redefine these
-either by using an internationalization package such as 'babel' or
-'polyglossia', or directly as with '\renewcommand{\alsoname}{Also
-see}'.)
+ Generate a index entry that says ‘see’ by using a vertical bar
+character: ‘\index{Ackermann!function|see{P\'eter's function}}’. You
+can instead get ‘see also’ with ‘seealso’. (The text ‘see’ is defined
+by ‘\seename’, and ‘see also’ by ‘\alsoname’. You can redefine these
+either by using an internationalization package such as ‘babel’ or
+‘polyglossia’, or directly as with ‘\renewcommand{\alsoname}{Also
+see}’.)
- The 'see' feature is part of a more general functionality. After the
+ The ‘see’ feature is part of a more general functionality. After the
vertical bar you can put the name of a one-input command, as in
-'\index{group|textit}' (note the missing backslash on the '\textit'
+‘\index{group|textit}’ (note the missing backslash on the ‘\textit’
command) and the system will apply that command to the page number, here
-giving something like '\textit{7}'. You can define your own one-input
-commands, such as '\newcommand{\definedpage}[1]{{\color{blue}#1}}' and
-then '\index{Ackermann!function|definedpage}' will give a blue page
+giving something like ‘\textit{7}’. You can define your own one-input
+commands, such as ‘\newcommand{\definedpage}[1]{{\color{blue}#1}}’ and
+then ‘\index{Ackermann!function|definedpage}’ will give a blue page
number (*note Color::). Another, less practical, example is this,
\newcommand\indexownpage[1]{#1, \thepage}
@@ -15911,35 +16007,35 @@
...
\index{Ackermann!function|)}
-which outputs an index entry like 'function, 23--27' where the page
+which outputs an index entry like ‘function, 23--27’ where the page
number range is in blue.
- Consider an index entry such as 'α-ring'. Entering it as
-'$\alpha$-ring' will cause it to be alphabetized according to the dollar
+ Consider an index entry such as ‘α-ring’. Entering it as
+‘$\alpha$-ring’ will cause it to be alphabetized according to the dollar
sign. You can instead enter it using an at-sign, as
-'\index{alpha-ring@$\alpha$-ring}'. If you specify an entry with an
-at-sign separating two strings, 'POS at TEXT', then POS gives the
+‘\index{alpha-ring@$\alpha$-ring}’. If you specify an entry with an
+at-sign separating two strings, ‘POS at TEXT’, then POS gives the
alphabetical position of the entry while TEXT produces the text of the
-entry. Another example is that '\index{Saint Michael's College at SMC}'
-produces an index entry 'SMC' alphabetized into a different location
+entry. Another example is that ‘\index{Saint Michael's College at SMC}’
+produces an index entry ‘SMC’ alphabetized into a different location
than its spelling would naturally give it.
- To put a '!', or '@', or '|', or '"' character in an index entry,
-escape it by preceding it with a double quote, '"'. (The double quote
+ To put a ‘!’, or ‘@’, or ‘|’, or ‘"’ character in an index entry,
+escape it by preceding it with a double quote, ‘"’. (The double quote
gets deleted before alphabetization.)
A number of packages on CTAN have additional functionality beyond
-that provided by 'makeidx'. One is 'index', which allows for multiple
-indices and contains a command '\index*{INDEX-ENTRY-STRING}' that prints
+that provided by ‘makeidx’. One is ‘index’, which allows for multiple
+indices and contains a command ‘\index*{INDEX-ENTRY-STRING}’ that prints
the INDEX-ENTRY-STRING as well as indexing it.
- The '\index' command writes the indexing information to the file
-'ROOT-NAME.idx' file. Specifically, it writes text of the command
-'\indexentry{INDEX-ENTRY-STRING}{PAGE-NUM}', where PAGE-NUM is the value
-of the '\thepage' counter. On occasion, when the '\printindex' command
+ The ‘\index’ command writes the indexing information to the file
+‘ROOT-NAME.idx’ file. Specifically, it writes text of the command
+‘\indexentry{INDEX-ENTRY-STRING}{PAGE-NUM}’, where PAGE-NUM is the value
+of the ‘\thepage’ counter. On occasion, when the ‘\printindex’ command
is confused, you have to delete this file to start with a fresh slate.
- If you omit the closing brace of an '\index' command then you get a
+ If you omit the closing brace of an ‘\index’ command then you get a
message like this.
Runaway argument? {Ackermann!function
@@ -15948,7 +16044,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: makeindex, Next: \printindex, Prev: \index, Up: Indexes
-25.2.3 'makeindex'
+25.2.3 ‘makeindex’
------------------
Synopsis, one of:
@@ -15959,16 +16055,16 @@
Sort, and otherwise process, the index information in the auxiliary
file FILENAME. This is a command line program. It takes one or more
-raw index files, 'FILENAME.idx' files, and produces the actual index
-file, the 'FILENAME.ind' file that is input by '\printindex' (*note
+raw index files, ‘FILENAME.idx’ files, and produces the actual index
+file, the ‘FILENAME.ind’ file that is input by ‘\printindex’ (*note
\printindex::).
The first form of the command suffices for many uses. The second
-allows you to format the index by using an "index style file", a '.isty'
+allows you to format the index by using an “index style file”, a ‘.isty’
file. The third form is the most general; see the full documentation on
CTAN.
- This is a simple '.isty' file.
+ This is a simple ‘.isty’ file.
% book.isty
% $ makeindex -s book.isty -p odd book.idx
@@ -15990,127 +16086,127 @@
A style file consists of a list of pairs: SPECIFIER and ATTRIBUTE.
These can appear in the file in any order. All of the ATTRIBUTEs are
strings, except where noted. Strings are surrounded with double quotes,
-'"', and the maximum length of a string is 144 characters. The '\n' is
-for a newline and '\t' is for a tab. Backslashes are escaped with
-another backslash, '\\'. If a line begins with a percent sign, '%',
+‘"’, and the maximum length of a string is 144 characters. The ‘\n’ is
+for a newline and ‘\t’ is for a tab. Backslashes are escaped with
+another backslash, ‘\\’. If a line begins with a percent sign, ‘%’,
then it is a comment.
-'preamble'
+‘preamble’
Preamble of the output index file. Defines the context in which
- the index is formatted. Default: '"\\begin{theindex}\n"'.
+ the index is formatted. Default: ‘"\\begin{theindex}\n"’.
-'postamble'
+‘postamble’
Postamble of the output index file. Default:
- '"\n\n\\end{theindex}\n"'.
+ ‘"\n\n\\end{theindex}\n"’.
-'group_skip'
+‘group_skip’
Traditionally index items are broken into groups, typically a group
- for entries starting with letter 'a', etc. This specifier gives
- what is inserted when a new group begins. Default: '"\n\n
- \\indexspace\n"' ('\indexspace' is a command inserting a rubber
- length, by default '10pt plus5pt minus3pt').
+ for entries starting with letter ‘a’, etc. This specifier gives
+ what is inserted when a new group begins. Default: ‘"\n\n
+ \\indexspace\n"’ (‘\indexspace’ is a command inserting a rubber
+ length, by default ‘10pt plus5pt minus3pt’).
-'lethead_flag'
+‘lethead_flag’
An integer. It governs what is inserted for a new group or letter.
- If it is 0 (which is the default) then other than 'group_skip'
+ If it is 0 (which is the default) then other than ‘group_skip’
nothing will be inserted before the group. If it is positive then
- at a new letter the 'lethead_prefix' and 'lethead_suffix' will be
+ at a new letter the ‘lethead_prefix’ and ‘lethead_suffix’ will be
inserted, with that letter in uppercase between them. If it is
negative then what will be inserted is the letter in lowercase.
The default is 0.
-'lethead_prefix'
+‘lethead_prefix’
If a new group begins with a different letter then this is the
- prefix inserted before the new letter header. Default: '""'
+ prefix inserted before the new letter header. Default: ‘""’
-'lethead_suffix'
+‘lethead_suffix’
If a group begins with a different letter then this is the suffix
- inserted after the new letter header. Default: '""'.
+ inserted after the new letter header. Default: ‘""’.
-'item_0'
- What is put between two level 0 items. Default: '"\n \\item "'.
+‘item_0’
+ What is put between two level 0 items. Default: ‘"\n \\item "’.
-'item_1'
- Put between two level 1 items. Default: '"\n \\subitem "'.
+‘item_1’
+ Put between two level 1 items. Default: ‘"\n \\subitem "’.
-'item_2'
- put between two level 2 items. Default: '"\n \\subsubitem "'.
+‘item_2’
+ put between two level 2 items. Default: ‘"\n \\subsubitem "’.
-'item_01'
+‘item_01’
What is put between a level 0 item and a level 1 item. Default:
- '"\n \\subitem "'.
+ ‘"\n \\subitem "’.
-'item_x1'
+‘item_x1’
What is put between a level 0 item and a level 1 item in the case
- that the level 0 item doesn't have any page numbers (as in
- '\index{aaa|see{bbb}}'). Default: '"\n \\subitem "'.
+ that the level 0 item doesn’t have any page numbers (as in
+ ‘\index{aaa|see{bbb}}’). Default: ‘"\n \\subitem "’.
-'item_12'
+‘item_12’
What is put between a level 1 item and a level 2 item. Default:
- '"\n \\subsubitem "'.
+ ‘"\n \\subsubitem "’.
-'item_x2'
+‘item_x2’
What is put between a level 1 item and a level 2 item, if the
- level 1 item doesn't have page numbers. Default: '"\n \\subsubitem
- "'.
+ level 1 item doesn’t have page numbers. Default: ‘"\n \\subsubitem
+ "’.
-'delim_0'
+‘delim_0’
Delimiter put between a level 0 key and its first page number.
- Default: a comma followed by a blank, '", "'.
+ Default: a comma followed by a blank, ‘", "’.
-'delim_1'
+‘delim_1’
Delimiter put between a level 1 key and its first page number.
- Default: a comma followed by a blank, '", "'.
+ Default: a comma followed by a blank, ‘", "’.
-'delim_2'
+‘delim_2’
Delimiter between a level 2 key and its first page number.
- Default: a comma followed by a blank, '", "'.
+ Default: a comma followed by a blank, ‘", "’.
-'delim_n'
+‘delim_n’
Delimiter between two page numbers for the same key (at any level).
- Default: a comma followed by a blank, '", "'.
+ Default: a comma followed by a blank, ‘", "’.
-'delim_r'
+‘delim_r’
What is put between the starting and ending page numbers of a
- range. Default: '"--"'.
+ range. Default: ‘"--"’.
-'line_max'
- An integer. Maximum length of an index entry's line in the output,
- beyond which the line wraps. Default: '72'.
+‘line_max’
+ An integer. Maximum length of an index entry’s line in the output,
+ beyond which the line wraps. Default: ‘72’.
-'indent_space'
+‘indent_space’
What is inserted at the start of a wrapped line. Default:
- '"\t\t"'.
+ ‘"\t\t"’.
-'indent_length'
+‘indent_length’
A number. The length of the wrapped line indentation. The default
- 'indent_space' is two tabs and each tab is eight spaces so the
- default here is '16'.
+ ‘indent_space’ is two tabs and each tab is eight spaces so the
+ default here is ‘16’.
-'page_precedence'
+‘page_precedence’
A document may have pages numbered in different ways. For example,
a book may have front matter pages numbered in lowercase roman
while main matter pages are in arabic. This string specifies the
- order in which they will appear in the index. The 'makeindex'
+ order in which they will appear in the index. The ‘makeindex’
command supports five different types of numerals: lowercase roman
- 'r', and numeric or arabic 'n', and lowercase alphabetic 'a', and
- uppercase roman 'R', and uppercase alphabetic 'A'. Default:
- '"rnaRA"'.
+ ‘r’, and numeric or arabic ‘n’, and lowercase alphabetic ‘a’, and
+ uppercase roman ‘R’, and uppercase alphabetic ‘A’. Default:
+ ‘"rnaRA"’.
- There are a number of other programs that do the job 'makeindex'
-does. One is 'xindy' (<https://ctan.org/pkg/xindy>), which does
+ There are a number of other programs that do the job ‘makeindex’
+does. One is ‘xindy’ (<https://ctan.org/pkg/xindy>), which does
internationalization and can process indexes for documents marked up
using LaTeX and a number of other languages. It is written in Lisp,
highly configurable, both in markup terms and in terms of the collating
order of the text, as described in its documentation.
- A more recent indexing program supporting Unicode is 'xindex',
+ A more recent indexing program supporting Unicode is ‘xindex’,
written in Lua (<https://ctan.org/pkg/xindex>).
File: latex2e.info, Node: \printindex, Prev: makeindex, Up: Indexes
-25.2.4 '\printindex'
+25.2.4 ‘\printindex’
--------------------
Synopsis:
@@ -16120,10 +16216,10 @@
Place the index into the output.
To get an index you must first include
-'\usepackage{makeidx}\makeindex' in the document preamble and compile
-the document, then run the system command 'makeindex', and then compile
+‘\usepackage{makeidx}\makeindex’ in the document preamble and compile
+the document, then run the system command ‘makeindex’, and then compile
the document again. *Note Indexes::, for further discussion and an
-example of the use of '\printindex'.
+example of the use of ‘\printindex’.
File: latex2e.info, Node: Glossaries, Prev: Indexes, Up: Front/back matter
@@ -16141,12 +16237,12 @@
...
\printglossaries
- The 'glossaries' package allows you to make glossaries, including
+ The ‘glossaries’ package allows you to make glossaries, including
multiple glossaries, as well as lists of acronyms.
To get the output from this example, compile the document (for
-instance with 'pdflatex filename'), then run the command line command
-'makeglossaries filename', and then compile the document again.
+instance with ‘pdflatex filename’), then run the command line command
+‘makeglossaries filename’, and then compile the document again.
\documentclass{...}
\usepackage{glossaries} \makeglossaries
@@ -16162,18 +16258,18 @@
\printglossaries
\end{document}
-That gives two things. In the main text it outputs '... definition of a
-Turing machine'. In addition, in a separate sectional unit headed
-'Glossary' there appears a description list. In boldface it says
-'Turing machine' and the rest of the item says in normal type 'A model
-of a machine ... Computer Science'.
+That gives two things. In the main text it outputs ‘... definition of a
+Turing machine’. In addition, in a separate sectional unit headed
+‘Glossary’ there appears a description list. In boldface it says
+‘Turing machine’ and the rest of the item says in normal type ‘A model
+of a machine ... Computer Science’.
- The command '\makeglossary' opens the file that will contain the
-entry information, 'ROOT-FILE.glo'. Put the '\printglossaries' command
+ The command ‘\makeglossary’ opens the file that will contain the
+entry information, ‘ROOT-FILE.glo’. Put the ‘\printglossaries’ command
where you want the glossaries to appear in your document.
- The 'glossaries' package is very powerful. For instance, besides the
-commands '\newglossaryentry' and '\gls', there are similar commands for
+ The ‘glossaries’ package is very powerful. For instance, besides the
+commands ‘\newglossaryentry’ and ‘\gls’, there are similar commands for
a list of acronyms. See the package documentations on CTAN.
* Menu:
@@ -16184,7 +16280,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \newglossaryentry, Next: \gls, Up: Glossaries
-25.3.1 '\newglossaryentry'
+25.3.1 ‘\newglossaryentry’
--------------------------
Synopsis, one of:
@@ -16207,7 +16303,7 @@
Declare a new entry for a glossary. The LABEL must be unique for the
document. The settings associated with the label are pairs:
-'KEY=VALUE'.
+‘KEY=VALUE’.
This puts the blackboard bold symbol for the real numbers ℝ, in the
glossary.
@@ -16224,29 +16320,29 @@
For a full list of KEYs see the package documentation on CTAN but
here are a few.
-'name'
+‘name’
(Required.) The word, phrase, or symbol that you are defining.
-'description'
+‘description’
(Required.) The description that will appear in the glossary. If
this has more than one paragraph then you must use the second
command form given in the synopsis.
-'plural'
- The plural form of NAME. Refer to the plural form using '\glspl'
- or '\Glspl' (*note \gls::).
+‘plural’
+ The plural form of NAME. Refer to the plural form using ‘\glspl’
+ or ‘\Glspl’ (*note \gls::).
-'sort'
+‘sort’
How to place this entry in the list of entries that the glossary
holds.
-'symbol'
+‘symbol’
A symbol, such as a mathematical symbol, besides the name.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \gls, Prev: \newglossaryentry, Up: Glossaries
-25.3.2 '\gls'
+25.3.2 ‘\gls’
-------------
Synopsis, one of:
@@ -16257,7 +16353,7 @@
\Glspl{LABEL}
Refer to a glossary entry. The entries are declared with
-'\newglossaryentry' (*note \newglossaryentry::).
+‘\newglossaryentry’ (*note \newglossaryentry::).
This
@@ -16269,10 +16365,10 @@
...
Consider \gls{N}.
-gives the output 'Consider the natural numbers'.
+gives the output ‘Consider the natural numbers’.
- The second command form '\glspl{LABEL}' produces the plural of NAME
-(by default it tries adding an 's'). The third form capitalizes the
+ The second command form ‘\glspl{LABEL}’ produces the plural of NAME
+(by default it tries adding an ‘s’). The third form capitalizes the
first letter of NAME, as does the fourth form, which also takes the
plural.
@@ -16298,9 +16394,9 @@
Produce one or more letters.
- Each letter is in a separate 'letter' environment, whose argument
+ Each letter is in a separate ‘letter’ environment, whose argument
RECIPIENT ADDRESS often contains multiple lines separated with a double
-backslash, ('\\'). For example, you might have:
+backslash, (‘\\’). For example, you might have:
\begin{letter}{Ninon de l'Enclos \\
l'h\^otel Sagonne}
@@ -16307,38 +16403,38 @@
...
\end{letter}
- The start of the 'letter' environment resets the page number to 1,
+ The start of the ‘letter’ environment resets the page number to 1,
and the footnote number to 1 also.
The SENDER ADDRESS and SENDER NAME are common to all of the letters,
whether there is one or more, so these are best put in the preamble. As
with the recipient address, often SENDER ADDRESS contains multiple lines
-separated by a double backslash ('\\'). LaTeX will put the SENDER NAME
+separated by a double backslash (‘\\’). LaTeX will put the SENDER NAME
under the closing, after a vertical space for the traditional
hand-written signature.
- Each 'letter' environment body begins with a required '\opening'
-command such as '\opening{Dear Madam or Sir:}'. The LETTER BODY text is
+ Each ‘letter’ environment body begins with a required ‘\opening’
+command such as ‘\opening{Dear Madam or Sir:}’. The LETTER BODY text is
ordinary LaTeX so it can contain everything from enumerated lists to
-displayed math, except that commands such as '\chapter' that make no
-sense in a letter are turned off. Each 'letter' environment body
-typically ends with a '\closing' command such as '\closing{Yours,}'.
+displayed math, except that commands such as ‘\chapter’ that make no
+sense in a letter are turned off. Each ‘letter’ environment body
+typically ends with a ‘\closing’ command such as ‘\closing{Yours,}’.
- Additional material may come after the '\closing'. You can say who
-is receiving a copy of the letter with a command like '\cc{the Boss \\
-the Boss's Boss}'. There's a similar '\encl' command for a list of
-enclosures. And, you can add a postscript with '\ps'.
+ Additional material may come after the ‘\closing’. You can say who
+is receiving a copy of the letter with a command like ‘\cc{the Boss \\
+the Boss's Boss}’. There’s a similar ‘\encl’ command for a list of
+enclosures. And, you can add a postscript with ‘\ps’.
- LaTeX's default is to indent the sender name and the closing above it
-by a length of '\longindentation'. By default this is '0.5\textwidth'.
-To make them flush left, put '\setlength{\longindentation}{0em}' in your
+ LaTeX’s default is to indent the sender name and the closing above it
+by a length of ‘\longindentation’. By default this is ‘0.5\textwidth’.
+To make them flush left, put ‘\setlength{\longindentation}{0em}’ in your
preamble.
To set a fixed date use something like
-'\renewcommand{\today}{1958-Oct-12}'. If put in your preamble then it
+‘\renewcommand{\today}{1958-Oct-12}’. If put in your preamble then it
will apply to all the letters.
- This example shows only one 'letter' environment. The three lines
+ This example shows only one ‘letter’ environment. The three lines
marked as optional are typically omitted.
\documentclass{letter}
@@ -16355,26 +16451,26 @@
\end{letter}
\end{document}
- These commands are used with the 'letter' class.
+ These commands are used with the ‘letter’ class.
* Menu:
-* \address:: Sender's return address.
+* \address:: Sender’s return address.
* \cc:: Carbon copy list.
* \closing:: Saying goodbye.
* \encl:: List of enclosed material.
-* \location:: Sender's organizational location.
+* \location:: Sender’s organizational location.
* \makelabels:: Make address labels.
-* \name:: Sender's name, for the return address.
+* \name:: Sender’s name, for the return address.
* \opening:: Saying hello.
* \ps:: Adding a postscript.
-* \signature:: Sender's signature.
-* \telephone:: Sender's phone number.
+* \signature:: Sender’s signature.
+* \telephone:: Sender’s phone number.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \address, Next: \cc, Up: Letters
-26.1 '\address'
+26.1 ‘\address’
===============
Synopsis:
@@ -16383,15 +16479,15 @@
Specify the return address, as it appears on the letter and on the
envelope. Separate multiple lines in SENDERS ADDRESS with a double
-backslash, '\\'.
+backslash, ‘\\’.
Because it can apply to multiple letters this declaration is often
put in the preamble. However, it can go anywhere, including inside an
-individual 'letter' environment.
+individual ‘letter’ environment.
This command is optional: if you do not use it then the letter is
formatted with some blank space on top, for copying onto pre-printed
-letterhead paper. If you do use the '\address' declaration then it is
+letterhead paper. If you do use the ‘\address’ declaration then it is
formatted as a personal letter.
Here is an example.
@@ -16402,7 +16498,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \cc, Next: \closing, Prev: \address, Up: Letters
-26.2 '\cc'
+26.2 ‘\cc’
==========
Synopsis:
@@ -16412,8 +16508,8 @@
Produce a list of names to which copies of the letter were sent.
This command is optional. If it appears then typically it comes after
-'\closing'. Put the names on different lines by separating them with a
-double backslash, '\\', as in:
+‘\closing’. Put the names on different lines by separating them with a
+double backslash, ‘\\’, as in:
\cc{President \\
Vice President}
@@ -16421,7 +16517,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \closing, Next: \encl, Prev: \cc, Up: Letters
-26.3 '\closing'
+26.3 ‘\closing’
===============
Synopsis:
@@ -16428,7 +16524,7 @@
\closing{TEXT}
- Produce the letter's closing. This is optional, but usual. It
+ Produce the letter’s closing. This is optional, but usual. It
appears at the end of a letter, above a handwritten signature. For
example:
@@ -16437,7 +16533,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \encl, Next: \location, Prev: \closing, Up: Letters
-26.4 '\encl'
+26.4 ‘\encl’
============
Synopsis:
@@ -16446,8 +16542,8 @@
... }
Produce a list of things included with the letter. This command is
-optional; when it is used, it typically is put after '\closing'.
-Separate multiple lines with a double backslash, '\\'.
+optional; when it is used, it typically is put after ‘\closing’.
+Separate multiple lines with a double backslash, ‘\\’.
\encl{License \\
Passport}
@@ -16455,7 +16551,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \location, Next: \makelabels, Prev: \encl, Up: Letters
-26.5 '\location'
+26.5 ‘\location’
================
Synopsis:
@@ -16463,12 +16559,12 @@
\location{TEXT}
The TEXT appears centered at the bottom of the page. It only appears
-if the page style is 'firstpage'.
+if the page style is ‘firstpage’.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \makelabels, Next: \name, Prev: \location, Up: Letters
-26.6 '\makelabels'
+26.6 ‘\makelabels’
==================
Synopsis:
@@ -16475,22 +16571,22 @@
\makelabels % in preamble
- Optional, for a document that contains 'letter' environments. If you
-just put '\makelabels' in the preamble then at the end of the document
+ Optional, for a document that contains ‘letter’ environments. If you
+just put ‘\makelabels’ in the preamble then at the end of the document
you will get a sheet with labels for all the recipients, one for each
letter environment, that you can copy to a sheet of peel-off address
labels.
- Customize the labels by redefining the commands '\startlabels',
-'\mlabel', and '\returnaddress' (and perhaps '\name') in the preamble.
-The command '\startlabels' sets the width, height, number of columns,
+ Customize the labels by redefining the commands ‘\startlabels’,
+‘\mlabel’, and ‘\returnaddress’ (and perhaps ‘\name’) in the preamble.
+The command ‘\startlabels’ sets the width, height, number of columns,
etc., of the page onto which the labels are printed. The command
-'\mlabel{RETURN ADDRESS}{RECIPIENT ADDRESS}' produces the two labels (or
+‘\mlabel{RETURN ADDRESS}{RECIPIENT ADDRESS}’ produces the two labels (or
one, if you choose to ignore the RETURN ADDRESS) for each letter
environment. The first argument, RETURN ADDRESS, is the value returned
-by the macro '\returnaddress'. The second argument, RECIPIENT ADDRESS,
-is the value passed in the argument to the 'letter' environment. By
-default '\mlabel' ignores the first argument, the RETURN ADDRESS,
+by the macro ‘\returnaddress’. The second argument, RECIPIENT ADDRESS,
+is the value passed in the argument to the ‘letter’ environment. By
+default ‘\mlabel’ ignores the first argument, the RETURN ADDRESS,
causing the default behavior described in the prior paragraph.
This illustrates customization. Its output includes a page with two
@@ -16520,15 +16616,15 @@
The first column contains the return address twice. The second column
contains the address for each recipient.
- The package 'envlab' makes formatting the labels easier, with
+ The package ‘envlab’ makes formatting the labels easier, with
standard sizes already provided. The preamble lines
-'\usepackage[personalenvelope]{envlab}' and '\makelabels' are all that
+‘\usepackage[personalenvelope]{envlab}’ and ‘\makelabels’ are all that
you need to print envelopes.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \name, Next: \opening, Prev: \makelabels, Up: Letters
-26.7 '\name'
+26.7 ‘\name’
============
Synopsis:
@@ -16535,13 +16631,13 @@
\name{NAME}
- Optional. Sender's name, used for printing on the envelope together
+ Optional. Sender’s name, used for printing on the envelope together
with the return address.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \opening, Next: \ps, Prev: \name, Up: Letters
-26.8 '\opening'
+26.8 ‘\opening’
===============
Synopsis:
@@ -16548,7 +16644,7 @@
\opening{SALUTATION}
- Required. Follows the '\begin{letter}{...}'. The argument
+ Required. Follows the ‘\begin{letter}{...}’. The argument
SALUTATION is mandatory. For instance:
\opening{Dear John:}
@@ -16556,7 +16652,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \ps, Next: \signature, Prev: \opening, Up: Letters
-26.9 '\ps'
+26.9 ‘\ps’
==========
Synopsis:
@@ -16564,7 +16660,7 @@
\ps{TEXT}
Add a postscript. This command is optional and usually is used after
-'\closing'.
+‘\closing’.
\ps{P.S. After you have read this letter, burn it. Or eat it.}
@@ -16571,7 +16667,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \signature, Next: \telephone, Prev: \ps, Up: Letters
-26.10 '\signature'
+26.10 ‘\signature’
==================
Synopsis:
@@ -16579,24 +16675,24 @@
\signature{FIRST LINE \\
... }
- The sender's name. This command is optional, although its inclusion
+ The sender’s name. This command is optional, although its inclusion
is usual.
The argument text appears at the end of the letter, after the
closing. LaTeX leaves some vertical space for a handwritten signature.
-Separate multiple lines with a double backslash, '\\'. For example:
+Separate multiple lines with a double backslash, ‘\\’. For example:
\signature{J Fred Muggs \\
White House}
- LaTeX's default for the vertical space from the '\closing' text down
-to the '\signature' text is '6\medskipamount', which is six times
-'\medskipamount' (where '\medskipamount' is equal to a '\parskip', which
+ LaTeX’s default for the vertical space from the ‘\closing’ text down
+to the ‘\signature’ text is ‘6\medskipamount’, which is six times
+‘\medskipamount’ (where ‘\medskipamount’ is equal to a ‘\parskip’, which
in turn is defined by default here to 0.7em).
This command is usually in the preamble, to apply to all the letters
in the document. To have it apply to one letter only, put it inside a
-'letter' environment and before the '\closing'.
+‘letter’ environment and before the ‘\closing’.
You can include a graphic in the signature as here.
@@ -16603,13 +16699,13 @@
\signature{\vspace{-6\medskipamount}\includegraphics{sig.png}\\
My name}
-For this you must put '\usepackage{graphicx}' in the preamble (*note
+For this you must put ‘\usepackage{graphicx}’ in the preamble (*note
Graphics::).
File: latex2e.info, Node: \telephone, Prev: \signature, Up: Letters
-26.11 '\telephone'
+26.11 ‘\telephone’
==================
Synopsis:
@@ -16616,8 +16712,8 @@
\telephone{NUMBER}
- The sender's telephone number. This is typically in the preamble,
-where it applies to all letters. This only appears if the 'firstpage'
+ The sender’s telephone number. This is typically in the preamble,
+where it applies to all letters. This only appears if the ‘firstpage’
pagestyle is selected. If so, it appears on the lower right of the
page.
@@ -16644,7 +16740,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \openin & \openout, Next: \read, Up: Input/output
-27.1 '\openin' & '\openout'
+27.1 ‘\openin’ & ‘\openout’
===========================
Synopsis:
@@ -16656,10 +16752,10 @@
\openout NUMBER=FILENAME
Open a file for reading material, or for writing it. In most
-engines, the NUMBER must be between 0 and 15, as in '\openin3'; in
+engines, the NUMBER must be between 0 and 15, as in ‘\openin3’; in
LuaLaTeX, NUMBER can be between 0 and 127.
- Here TeX opens the file 'presidents.tex' for reading.
+ Here TeX opens the file ‘presidents.tex’ for reading.
\newread\presidentsfile
\openin\presidentsfile=presidents
@@ -16667,23 +16763,23 @@
\read\presidentsfile to\presidentline
\typeout{\presidentline}
-The '\newread' command allocates input stream numbers from 0 to 15
-(there is also a '\newwrite'). The '\presidentsfile' is more memorable
-but under the hood it is still a number; the first '\typeout' gives
-something like 'presidentsfile is 1'. In addition, '\newread' keeps
+The ‘\newread’ command allocates input stream numbers from 0 to 15
+(there is also a ‘\newwrite’). The ‘\presidentsfile’ is more memorable
+but under the hood it is still a number; the first ‘\typeout’ gives
+something like ‘presidentsfile is 1’. In addition, ‘\newread’ keeps
track of the allocation so that if you use too many then you get an
-error like '! No room for a new \read'. The second '\typeout' gives the
-first line of the file, something like '1 Washington, George'.
+error like ‘! No room for a new \read’. The second ‘\typeout’ gives the
+first line of the file, something like ‘1 Washington, George’.
Ordinarily TeX will not try to open the file until the next page
-shipout. To change this, use '\immediate\openin NUMBER=FILENAME' or
-'\immediate\openout NUMBER=FILENAME'.
+shipout. To change this, use ‘\immediate\openin NUMBER=FILENAME’ or
+‘\immediate\openout NUMBER=FILENAME’.
- Close files with '\closein NUMBER' and '\closeout NUMBER'.
+ Close files with ‘\closein NUMBER’ and ‘\closeout NUMBER’.
How LaTeX handles filenames varies among distributions, and even can
vary among versions of a distribution. If the file does not have an
-extension then TeX will add a '.tex'. This creates 'presidents.tex',
+extension then TeX will add a ‘.tex’. This creates ‘presidents.tex’,
writes one line to it, and closes it.
\newwrite\presidentsfile
@@ -16692,26 +16788,26 @@
\closeout\presidentsfile
But filenames with a period can cause trouble: if TeX finds a FILENAME
-of 'presidents.dat' it could look first for 'presidents.dat.tex' and
-later for 'presidents.dat', or it could do the opposite. Your
-distribution's documentation should say more, and if you find something
+of ‘presidents.dat’ it could look first for ‘presidents.dat.tex’ and
+later for ‘presidents.dat’, or it could do the opposite. Your
+distribution’s documentation should say more, and if you find something
that works for you then you are good, but to ensure complete portability
the best thing is to use file names containing only the twenty six ASCII
letters (not case-sensitive) and the ten digits, along with underscore
and dash, and in particular with no dot or space.
- For '\openin', if TeX cannot find the file then it does not give an
+ For ‘\openin’, if TeX cannot find the file then it does not give an
error. It just considers that the stream is not open (test for this
-with '\ifeof'; one recourse is the command '\InputIfFileExists', *note
+with ‘\ifeof’; one recourse is the command ‘\InputIfFileExists’, *note
Class and package commands::). If you try to use the same number twice,
-LaTeX won't give you an error. If you try to use a bad number then you
-get an error message like '! Bad number (16). <to be read again> = l.30
-\openin16=test.jh'.
+LaTeX won’t give you an error. If you try to use a bad number then you
+get an error message like ‘! Bad number (16). <to be read again> = l.30
+\openin16=test.jh’.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \read, Next: \typein, Prev: \openin & \openout, Up: Input/output
-27.2 '\read'
+27.2 ‘\read’
============
Synopsis:
@@ -16719,10 +16815,10 @@
\read NUMBER toMACRO
Make the command MACRO contain the next line of input from text
-stream NUMBER, as in '\read5 to\data'.
+stream NUMBER, as in ‘\read5 to\data’.
- This opens the file 'email.tex' for reading, puts the contents of the
-first line into the command '\email', and then closes the file.
+ This opens the file ‘email.tex’ for reading, puts the contents of the
+first line into the command ‘\email’, and then closes the file.
\newread\recipientfile
\openin\recipientfile=email
@@ -16731,21 +16827,21 @@
\closein\recipientfile
If NUMBER is outside the range from 0 to 15 or if no file of that
-number is open, or if the file has ended, then '\read' will take input
+number is open, or if the file has ended, then ‘\read’ will take input
from the terminal (or exit if interaction is not allowed, e.g.,
-'\nonstopmode'; *note interaction modes::). (However, the natural way
-in LaTeX to take input from the terminal is '\typein' (*note \typein::.)
+‘\nonstopmode’; *note interaction modes::). (However, the natural way
+in LaTeX to take input from the terminal is ‘\typein’ (*note \typein::.)
- To read an entire file as additional LaTeX source, use '\input'
-(*note \input::) or '\include' (*note \include & \includeonly::).
+ To read an entire file as additional LaTeX source, use ‘\input’
+(*note \input::) or ‘\include’ (*note \include & \includeonly::).
A common reason to want to read from a data file is to do mail
-merges. CTAN has a number of packages for that; one is 'datatool'.
+merges. CTAN has a number of packages for that; one is ‘datatool’.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \typein, Next: \typeout, Prev: \read, Up: Input/output
-27.3 '\typein'
+27.3 ‘\typein’
==============
Synopsis, one of:
@@ -16767,13 +16863,13 @@
\@typein=Aphra Behn
-gives the output '... never forget Aphra Behn'.
+gives the output ‘... never forget Aphra Behn’.
- The first command version, '\typein{PROMPT-MSG}', causes the input
+ The first command version, ‘\typein{PROMPT-MSG}’, causes the input
you typed to be processed as if it had been included in the input file
-in place of the '\typein' command.
+in place of the ‘\typein’ command.
- In the second command version the optional argument 'CMD' argument
+ In the second command version the optional argument ‘CMD’ argument
must be a command name, that is, it must begin with a backslash, \.
This command name is then defined or redefined to be the input that you
typed. For example, this
@@ -16788,12 +16884,12 @@
\student=John Dee
Recommendation for John Dee.
-where the user has entered 'John Dee.'
+where the user has entered ‘John Dee.’
File: latex2e.info, Node: \typeout, Next: \write, Prev: \typein, Up: Input/output
-27.4 '\typeout'
+27.4 ‘\typeout’
===============
Synopsis:
@@ -16800,7 +16896,7 @@
\typeout{MSG}
- Print 'msg' on the terminal and in the 'log' file.
+ Print ‘msg’ on the terminal and in the ‘log’ file.
This
@@ -16807,16 +16903,16 @@
\newcommand{\student}{John Dee}
\typeout{Recommendation for \student .}
-outputs 'Recommendation for John Dee'. Like what happens here with
-'\student', commands that are defined with '\newcommand' or
-'\renewcommand' (among others) are replaced by their definitions before
+outputs ‘Recommendation for John Dee’. Like what happens here with
+‘\student’, commands that are defined with ‘\newcommand’ or
+‘\renewcommand’ (among others) are replaced by their definitions before
being printed.
- LaTeX's usual rules for treating multiple spaces as a single space
-and ignoring spaces after a command name apply to 'msg'. Use the
-command '\space' to get a single space, independent of surrounding
-spaces. Use '^^J' to get a newline. Get a percent character with
-'\csname @percentchar\endcsname'.
+ LaTeX’s usual rules for treating multiple spaces as a single space
+and ignoring spaces after a command name apply to ‘msg’. Use the
+command ‘\space’ to get a single space, independent of surrounding
+spaces. Use ‘^^J’ to get a newline. Get a percent character with
+‘\csname @percentchar\endcsname’.
This command can be useful for simple debugging, as here:
@@ -16824,12 +16920,12 @@
\setlength{\jhlength}{5pt}
\typeout{The length is \the\jhlength.}
-produces on the command line 'The length is 5.0pt'.
+produces on the command line ‘The length is 5.0pt’.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \write, Prev: \typeout, Up: Input/output
-27.5 '\write'
+27.5 ‘\write’
=============
Synopsis:
@@ -16837,10 +16933,10 @@
\write NUMBER{STRING}
Write STRING to the log file, to the terminal, or to a file opened by
-'\openout'. For instance, '\write6' writes to text stream number 6.
+‘\openout’. For instance, ‘\write6’ writes to text stream number 6.
- If the following appears in 'BASEFILE.tex' then it opens
-'BASEFILE.jh', writes 'Hello World!' and a newline to it, and closes
+ If the following appears in ‘BASEFILE.tex’ then it opens
+‘BASEFILE.jh’, writes ‘Hello World!’ and a newline to it, and closes
that file.
\newwrite\myfile
@@ -16850,10 +16946,10 @@
...
\immediate\closeout\myfile
-The '\newwrite' allocates a stream number, giving it a symbolic name to
-make life easier, so that 'stream \newwrite\myfile\the\myfile' produces
-something like 'stream 3'. Then '\openout' associates the stream number
-with the given file name. TeX ultimately executed '\write3' which puts
+The ‘\newwrite’ allocates a stream number, giving it a symbolic name to
+make life easier, so that ‘stream \newwrite\myfile\the\myfile’ produces
+something like ‘stream 3’. Then ‘\openout’ associates the stream number
+with the given file name. TeX ultimately executed ‘\write3’ which puts
the string in the file.
Typically NUMBER is between 0 and 15, because typically LaTeX authors
@@ -16862,25 +16958,25 @@
an open file then LaTeX writes STRING to the log file. If NUMBER is
positive then in addition LaTeX writes STRING to the terminal.
- Thus, 'test \write-1{Hello World!}' puts 'Hello World!' followed by a
-newline in the log file. (This is what the '\wlog' command does; *note
-\wlog::). And '\write100{Hello World!}' puts the same in the log file
-but also puts 'Hello World!' followed by a newline in the terminal
+ Thus, ‘test \write-1{Hello World!}’ puts ‘Hello World!’ followed by a
+newline in the log file. (This is what the ‘\wlog’ command does; *note
+\wlog::). And ‘\write100{Hello World!}’ puts the same in the log file
+but also puts ‘Hello World!’ followed by a newline in the terminal
output. (But 16, 17, and 18 are special as NUMBER; see below.)
In LuaTeX, instead of 16 output streams there are 256 (*note TeX
engines::).
- Use '\write\@auxout{STRING}' to write to the current '.aux' file,
+ Use ‘\write\@auxout{STRING}’ to write to the current ‘.aux’ file,
which is associated with either the root file or with the current
-include file; and use '\write\@mainaux{STRING}' to write to the main
-'.aux'. These symbolic names are defined by LaTeX.
+include file; and use ‘\write\@mainaux{STRING}’ to write to the main
+‘.aux’. These symbolic names are defined by LaTeX.
By default LaTeX does not write STRING to the file right away. This
-is because, for example, you may need '\write' to save the current page
-number, but when TeX comes across a '\write' it typically does not know
+is because, for example, you may need ‘\write’ to save the current page
+number, but when TeX comes across a ‘\write’ it typically does not know
what the page number is, since it has not yet done the page breaking.
-So, you use '\write' in one of three contexts:
+So, you use ‘\write’ in one of three contexts:
\immediate\write\@auxout{STRING} %1
\write\@auxout{STRING} %2
@@ -16887,22 +16983,22 @@
\protected at write\@auxout{}{STRING} %3
1. With the first, LaTeX writes STRING to the file immediately. Any
- macros in STRING are fully expanded (just as in '\edef') so to
- prevent expansion you must use '\noexpand', 'toks', etc., except
- that you should use '#' instead of '##').
+ macros in STRING are fully expanded (just as in ‘\edef’) so to
+ prevent expansion you must use ‘\noexpand’, ‘toks’, etc., except
+ that you should use ‘#’ instead of ‘##’).
2. With the second, STRING is stored on the current list of things (as
- a TeX "whatsit" item) and kept until the page is shipped out and
- likewise the macros are unexpanded until '\shipout'. At
- '\shipout', STRING is fully expanded.
+ a TeX “whatsit” item) and kept until the page is shipped out and
+ likewise the macros are unexpanded until ‘\shipout’. At
+ ‘\shipout’, STRING is fully expanded.
- 3. The third, '\protected at write', is like the second except that you
- can use '\protect' to avoid expansion. The extra first argument
+ 3. The third, ‘\protected at write’, is like the second except that you
+ can use ‘\protect’ to avoid expansion. The extra first argument
allows you to locally insert extra definitions to make more macros
protected or to have some other special definition for the write.
- As a simple example of expansion with '\write', STRING here contains
-a control sequence '\triplex' which we've defined to be the text 'XYZ':
+ As a simple example of expansion with ‘\write’, STRING here contains
+a control sequence ‘\triplex’ which we’ve defined to be the text ‘XYZ’:
\newwrite\jhfile
\openout\jhfile=test.jh
@@ -16909,19 +17005,19 @@
\newcommand{\triplex}{XYZ}
\write\jhfile{test \triplex test}
-This results in the file 'test.jh' containing the text 'test XYZtest'
+This results in the file ‘test.jh’ containing the text ‘test XYZtest’
followed by a newline.
The cases where NUMBER is 16, 17, or 18 are special. Because of
-'\write''s behavior when NUMBER is outside the range from 0 to 15
-described above, in Plain TeX '\write16' and '\write17' were sometimes
+‘\write’’s behavior when NUMBER is outside the range from 0 to 15
+described above, in Plain TeX ‘\write16’ and ‘\write17’ were sometimes
used to write to the log file and the terminal; however, in LaTeX, the
-natural way to do that is with '\typeout' (*note \typeout::). The
-'\write18' command is even more special; modern TeX systems use it for
+natural way to do that is with ‘\typeout’ (*note \typeout::). The
+‘\write18’ command is even more special; modern TeX systems use it for
giving commands to the operating system (*note \write18::).
- Ordinarily '\write' outputs a single line. You can include a newline
-with '^^J'. Thus, this produces two lines in the log file:
+ Ordinarily ‘\write’ outputs a single line. You can include a newline
+with ‘^^J’. Thus, this produces two lines in the log file:
\wlog{Parallel lines have a lot in common.^^JBut they never meet.}
@@ -16928,7 +17024,7 @@
A common case where authors need to write their own file is for
answers to exercises, or another situation where you want to write out
verbatim, without expanding the macros. CTAN has a number of packages
-for this; one is 'answers'.
+for this; one is ‘answers’.
* Menu:
@@ -16940,7 +17036,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \write and security, Next: \message, Up: \write
-27.5.1 '\write' and security
+27.5.1 ‘\write’ and security
----------------------------
The ability to write files raises security issues. If you compiled a
@@ -16960,14 +17056,14 @@
! I can't write on file `../test.jh'
You can get just such an error when using commands such as
-'\include{../filename}' because LaTeX will try to open
-'../filename.aux'. The simplest solution is to put the included files
+‘\include{../filename}’ because LaTeX will try to open
+‘../filename.aux’. The simplest solution is to put the included files
in the same directory as the root file, or in subdirectories.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \message, Next: \wlog, Prev: \write and security, Up: \write
-27.5.2 '\message'
+27.5.2 ‘\message’
-----------------
Synopsis:
@@ -16976,10 +17072,10 @@
Write STRING to the log file and the terminal.
- Typically, LaTeX authors use '\typeout' (*note \typeout::). It
-allows you to use '\protect' on any fragile commands in STRING (*note
-\protect::). But '\typeout' always inserts a newline at the end of
-STRING while '\message' does not, so the latter can be useful.
+ Typically, LaTeX authors use ‘\typeout’ (*note \typeout::). It
+allows you to use ‘\protect’ on any fragile commands in STRING (*note
+\protect::). But ‘\typeout’ always inserts a newline at the end of
+STRING while ‘\message’ does not, so the latter can be useful.
With this example document body.
@@ -16992,22 +17088,22 @@
One Two Three Four
I declare a thumb war.
-The '^^J' produces a newline. Also, in the output document, between
-'before' and 'After' will be a single space (from the end of line
-following 'I}').
+The ‘^^J’ produces a newline. Also, in the output document, between
+‘before’ and ‘After’ will be a single space (from the end of line
+following ‘I}’).
- While '\message' allows you more control over formatting, a gotcha is
+ While ‘\message’ allows you more control over formatting, a gotcha is
that LaTeX may mess up that formatting because it inserts line breaks
depending on what it has already written. Contrast this document body,
-where the 'Two' has moved, to the one given above.
+where the ‘Two’ has moved, to the one given above.
before\message{One}\message{Two Three}\message{Four^^JI}
\message{declare a thumb war.}After
This can happen: when LaTeX is outputting the messages to the
-terminal, now the message with 'One' is shorter and it fits at the end
+terminal, now the message with ‘One’ is shorter and it fits at the end
of the output terminal line, and so LaTeX breaks the line between it and
-the 'Two Three'. That line break appears also in the log file. This
+the ‘Two Three’. That line break appears also in the log file. This
line break insertion can depend on, for instance, the length of the full
path names of included files. So producing finely-formatted lines in a
way that is portable is hard, likely requiring starting your message at
@@ -17016,7 +17112,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \wlog, Next: \write18, Prev: \message, Up: \write
-27.5.3 '\wlog'
+27.5.3 ‘\wlog’
--------------
Synopsis:
@@ -17028,7 +17124,7 @@
\wlog{Did you hear about the mathematician who hates negatives?}
\wlog{He'll stop at nothing to avoid them.}
- Ordinarily STRING appears in a single separate line. Use '^^J' to
+ Ordinarily STRING appears in a single separate line. Use ‘^^J’ to
insert a newline.
\wlog{Helvetica and Times Roman walk into a bar.}
@@ -17037,7 +17133,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \write18, Prev: \wlog, Up: \write
-27.5.4 '\write18'
+27.5.4 ‘\write18’
-----------------
Synopsis:
@@ -17045,7 +17141,7 @@
\write18{SHELL_COMMAND}
Issue a command to the operating system shell. The operating system
-runs the command and LaTeX's execution is blocked until that finishes.
+runs the command and LaTeX’s execution is blocked until that finishes.
This sequence (on Unix)
@@ -17053,31 +17149,31 @@
...
\newcommand{\fignum}{1}
\immediate\write18{cd pix && asy figure\fignum}
- \includegraphics{pix\figure\fignum.pdf}
+ \includegraphics{pix/figure\fignum.pdf}
-will run Asymptote (the 'asy' program) on 'pix/figure1.asy', so that the
+will run Asymptote (the ‘asy’ program) on ‘pix/figure1.asy’, so that the
document can later read in the resulting graphic (*note
-\includegraphics::). Like any '\write', here LaTeX expands macros in
-SHELL_COMMAND so that '\fignum' is replaced by '1'.
+\includegraphics::). Like any ‘\write’, here LaTeX expands macros in
+SHELL_COMMAND so that ‘\fignum’ is replaced by ‘1’.
Another example is that you can automatically run BibTeX at the start
of each LaTeX run (*note Using BibTeX::) by including
-'\immediate\write18{bibtex8 \jobname}' as the first line of the file.
-Note that '\jobname' expands to the basename of the root file unless the
-'--jobname' option is passed on the command line, in which case this is
+‘\immediate\write18{bibtex8 \jobname}’ as the first line of the file.
+Note that ‘\jobname’ expands to the basename of the root file unless the
+‘--jobname’ option is passed on the command line, in which case this is
the option argument.
You sometimes need to do a multi-step process to get the information
that you want. This will insert into the input a list of all PDF files
-in the current directory (but see 'texosquery' below):
+in the current directory (but see ‘texosquery’ below):
\immediate\write18{ls *.pdf > tmp.dat}
\input{tmp.dat}
- The standard behavior of any '\write' is to wait until a page is
+ The standard behavior of any ‘\write’ is to wait until a page is
being shipped out before expanding the macros or writing to the stream
(*note \write::). But sometimes you want it done now. For this, use
-'\immediate\write18{SHELL_COMMAND}'.
+‘\immediate\write18{SHELL_COMMAND}’.
There are obvious security issues with allowing system commands
inside a LaTeX file. If you download a file off the net and it contains
@@ -17084,33 +17180,33 @@
commands to delete all your files then you would be unhappy. The
standard settings in modern distributions turn off full shell access.
You can turn it on, if you are sure the shell commands are safe, by
-compiling with 'latex --enable-write18 FILENAME' (*note Command line
-options::). (The '--shell-escape' option is a synonym, in TeX Live.)
+compiling with ‘latex --enable-write18 FILENAME’ (*note Command line
+options::). (The ‘--shell-escape’ option is a synonym, in TeX Live.)
In the place of full shell access, modern distributions by default
use a restricted version that allows some commands to work, such as
those that run Metafont to generate missing fonts, even if you do not
-use the 'enable-write18' option. By default this list of allowed
+use the ‘enable-write18’ option. By default this list of allowed
commands is short and features only commands that are under the control
of the distribution maintainers (*note Command line options::).
- The SHELL_COMMAND text is always passed to '/bin/sh' on Unix-like
-operating systems, and the DOS command interpreter 'cmd.exe' on Windows.
-Any different shell set by the user, and the 'SHELL' environment
+ The SHELL_COMMAND text is always passed to ‘/bin/sh’ on Unix-like
+operating systems, and the DOS command interpreter ‘cmd.exe’ on Windows.
+Any different shell set by the user, and the ‘SHELL’ environment
variable, is ignored.
If what you need is system information, such as the operating system
name, locale information, or directory contents, take a look at the
-'texosquery' package, which provides a convenient and secure interface
-for this, unlike the above examples using the raw '\write18':
+‘texosquery’ package, which provides a convenient and secure interface
+for this, unlike the above examples using the raw ‘\write18’:
<https://ctan.org/pkg/texosquery>.
- LaTeX provides a package 'shellesc' on top of the primitive
-'\write18' command. Its primary purpose is to provide a command
-'\ShellEscape' which works identically on all TeX engines; LuaTeX
-intentionally did not retain '\write18' as a way to invoke a shell
-command, so some engine-specific code is needed. The 'shellesc' package
-also provides a command '\DelayedShellEscape', executed at '\output'
+ LaTeX provides a package ‘shellesc’ on top of the primitive
+‘\write18’ command. Its primary purpose is to provide a command
+‘\ShellEscape’ which works identically on all TeX engines; LuaTeX
+intentionally did not retain ‘\write18’ as a way to invoke a shell
+command, so some engine-specific code is needed. The ‘shellesc’ package
+also provides a command ‘\DelayedShellEscape’, executed at ‘\output’
time, for the same reason.
@@ -17123,16 +17219,16 @@
pdflatex OPTIONS ARGUMENT
- Run LaTeX on ARGUMENT. In place of 'pdflatex' you can also use (for
-PDF output) 'xelatex' or 'lualatex', or (for DVI output) 'latex' or
-'dvilualatex', among others (*note TeX engines::).
+ Run LaTeX on ARGUMENT. In place of ‘pdflatex’ you can also use (for
+PDF output) ‘xelatex’ or ‘lualatex’, or (for DVI output) ‘latex’ or
+‘dvilualatex’, among others (*note TeX engines::).
- For example, this will run LaTeX on the file 'thesis.tex', creating
-the output 'thesis.pdf'.
+ For example, this will run LaTeX on the file ‘thesis.tex’, creating
+the output ‘thesis.pdf’.
pdflatex thesis
-Note that '.tex' is the default file name extension.
+Note that ‘.tex’ is the default file name extension.
pdfTeX is an extension of the original TeX program, as are XeTeX and
LuaTeX (*note TeX engines::). The first two are completely backward
@@ -17141,10 +17237,10 @@
format, while the newer ones can output directly to PDF. This allows
them to take advantage of the extra features in PDF such as hyperlinks,
support for modern image formats such as JPG and PNG, and ubiquitous
-viewing programs. In short, if you run 'pdflatex' or 'xelatex' or
-'lualatex' then you will by default get PDF and have access to all its
-modern features. If you run 'latex', or 'dvilualatex', then you will
-get DVI. The description here assumes pdfLaTeX.
+viewing programs. In short, if you run ‘pdflatex’ or ‘xelatex’ or
+‘lualatex’ then you will by default get PDF and have access to all its
+modern features. If you run ‘latex’, or ‘dvilualatex’, then you will
+get DVI. The description here assumes ‘pdflatex’.
*Note Command line options::, for a selection of the most useful
command line options. As to ARGUMENT, the usual case is that it does
@@ -17153,8 +17249,8 @@
then the system will interpret it as a line of LaTeX input, which can be
used for special effects (*note Command line input::).
- If you gave no arguments or options then 'pdflatex' prompts for input
-from the terminal. You can escape from this by entering 'CTRL-D'.
+ If you gave no arguments or options then ‘pdflatex’ prompts for input
+from the terminal. You can escape from this by entering ‘CTRL-D’.
If LaTeX finds an error in your document then by default it stops and
asks you about it. *Note Recovering from errors::, for an outline of
@@ -17174,34 +17270,34 @@
=========================
These are the command-line options relevant to ordinary document
-authoring. For a full list, try running 'latex --help' from the command
+authoring. For a full list, try running ‘latex --help’ from the command
line.
With many implementations you can specify command line options by
-prefixing them with '-' or '--'. This is the case for both TeX Live
+prefixing them with ‘-’ or ‘--’. This is the case for both TeX Live
(including MacTeX) and MiKTeX. We will use both conventions
interchangeably. If an option takes a value, it can be specified either
-as a separate argument ('--foo val'), or as one argument with an '='
-sign ('--foo=val'), but there can be no spaces around the '='. We will
-generally use the '=' syntax.
+as a separate argument (‘--foo val’), or as one argument with an ‘=’
+sign (‘--foo=val’), but there can be no spaces around the ‘=’. We will
+generally use the ‘=’ syntax.
-'-version'
- Show the current version, like 'pdfTeX 3.14159265-2.6-1.40.16 (TeX
- Live 2015/Debian)' along with a small amount of additional
+‘-version’
+ Show the current version, like ‘pdfTeX 3.14159265-2.6-1.40.16 (TeX
+ Live 2015/Debian)’ along with a small amount of additional
information, and exit.
-'-help'
+‘-help’
Give a brief usage message that is useful as a prompt and exit.
-'-interaction=MODE'
+‘-interaction=MODE’
TeX compiles a document in one of four interaction modes:
- 'batchmode', 'nonstopmode', 'scrollmode', 'errorstopmode'. In
- "errorstopmode" (the default), TeX stops at each error and asks for
- user intervention. In "batchmode" it prints nothing on the
- terminal, errors are scrolled as if the user hit 'RETURN' at every
- error, and missing files cause the job to abort. In "nonstopmode",
+ ‘batchmode’, ‘nonstopmode’, ‘scrollmode’, ‘errorstopmode’. In
+ “errorstopmode” (the default), TeX stops at each error and asks for
+ user intervention. In “batchmode” it prints nothing on the
+ terminal, errors are scrolled as if the user hit ‘RETURN’ at every
+ error, and missing files cause the job to abort. In “nonstopmode”,
diagnostic message appear on the terminal but as in batch mode
- there is no user interaction. In "scrollmode", TeX stops for
+ there is no user interaction. In “scrollmode”, TeX stops for
missing files or keyboard input, but nothing else.
For instance, starting LaTeX with this command line
@@ -17210,16 +17306,16 @@
eliminates most terminal output.
-'-jobname=STRING'
- Set the value of TeX's "jobname" to the string. The log file and
- output file will then be named 'STRING.log' and 'STRING.pdf'.
+‘-jobname=STRING’
+ Set the value of TeX’s “jobname” to the string. The log file and
+ output file will then be named ‘STRING.log’ and ‘STRING.pdf’.
*note Jobname::.
-'-output-directory=DIRECTORY'
+‘-output-directory=DIRECTORY’
Write files in the directory DIRECTORY. It must already exist.
This applies to all external files created by TeX or LaTeX, such as
- the '.log' file for the run, the '.aux', '.toc', etc., files
- created by LaTeX, as well as the main '.pdf' or '.dvi' output file
+ the ‘.log’ file for the run, the ‘.aux’, ‘.toc’, etc., files
+ created by LaTeX, as well as the main ‘.pdf’ or ‘.dvi’ output file
itself.
When specified, the output directory DIRECTORY is also
@@ -17228,30 +17324,30 @@
current directory (in which LaTeX was run) remains unchanged, and
is also checked for input files.
-'--enable-write18'
-'--disable-write18'
-'--shell-escape'
-'--no-shell-escape'
- Enable or disable '\write18{SHELL_COMMAND}' (*note \write18::).
+‘--enable-write18’
+‘--disable-write18’
+‘--shell-escape’
+‘--no-shell-escape’
+ Enable or disable ‘\write18{SHELL_COMMAND}’ (*note \write18::).
The first two options are supported by both TeX Live and MiKTeX,
while the second two are synonyms supported by TeX Live.
Enabling this functionality has major security implications, since
it allows a LaTeX file to run any command whatsoever. Thus, by
- default, unrestricted '\write18' is not allowed. (The default for
+ default, unrestricted ‘\write18’ is not allowed. (The default for
TeX Live, MacTeX, and MiKTeX is to allow the execution of a limited
number of TeX-related programs, which they distribute.)
- For example, if you invoke LaTeX with the option 'no-shell-escape',
- and in your document you call '\write18{ls -l}', then you do not
- get an error but the log file says 'runsystem(ls -l)...disabled'.
+ For example, if you invoke LaTeX with the option ‘no-shell-escape’,
+ and in your document you call ‘\write18{ls -l}’, then you do not
+ get an error but the log file says ‘runsystem(ls -l)...disabled’.
-'-halt-on-error'
+‘-halt-on-error’
Stop processing at the first error.
-'-file-line-error'
-'-no-file-line-error'
- Enable or disable 'FILENAME:LINENO:ERROR'-style error messages.
+‘-file-line-error’
+‘-no-file-line-error’
+ Enable or disable ‘FILENAME:LINENO:ERROR’-style error messages.
These are only available with TeX Live or MacTeX.
@@ -17268,7 +17364,7 @@
backslash. (All the engines support this.) This allows you to do some
special effects.
- For example, this file (which uses the 'hyperref' package for
+ For example, this file (which uses the ‘hyperref’ package for
hyperlinks) can produce two kinds of output, one to be read on physical
paper and one to be read online.
@@ -17282,8 +17378,8 @@
\href{https://www.ctan.org}{CTAN} % in body
...
-Compiling this document 'book.tex' with the command line 'pdflatex book'
-will give the 'CTAN' link in blue. But compiling it with
+Compiling this document ‘book.tex’ with the command line ‘pdflatex book’
+will give the ‘CTAN’ link in blue. But compiling it with
pdflatex "\def\paperversion{}\input book.tex"
@@ -17292,18 +17388,18 @@
Unix and Windows systems, but there are many peculiarities to shell
quoting, so read your system documentation if need be.)
- In a similar way, from the single file 'main.tex' you can compile two
+ In a similar way, from the single file ‘main.tex’ you can compile two
different versions.
pdflatex -jobname=students "\def\student{}\input{main}"
pdflatex -jobname=teachers "\def\teachers{}\input{main}"
-The 'jobname' option is there because otherwise both files would be
-called 'main.pdf' and the second would overwrite the first. (*note
+The ‘jobname’ option is there because otherwise both files would be
+called ‘main.pdf’ and the second would overwrite the first. (*note
Jobname::.)
In this example we use the command line to select which parts of a
-document to include. For a book named 'mybook.tex' and structured like
+document to include. For a book named ‘mybook.tex’ and structured like
this.
\documentclass{book}
@@ -17329,34 +17425,34 @@
Running LaTeX creates a number of files, including the main PDF (or DVI)
output but also including others. These files are named with the
-so-called "jobname". The most common case is also the simplest, where
-for instance the command 'pdflatex thesis' creates 'thesis.pdf' and also
-'thesis.log' and 'thesis.aux'. Here the job name is 'thesis'.
+so-called “jobname”. The most common case is also the simplest, where
+for instance the command ‘pdflatex thesis’ creates ‘thesis.pdf’ and also
+‘thesis.log’ and ‘thesis.aux’. Here the job name is ‘thesis’.
- In general, LaTeX is invoked as 'LATEX-ENGINE OPTIONS ARGUMENT',
-where LATEX-ENGINE is 'pdflatex', 'lualatex', etc. (*note TeX
+ In general, LaTeX is invoked as ‘LATEX-ENGINE OPTIONS ARGUMENT’,
+where LATEX-ENGINE is ‘pdflatex’, ‘lualatex’, etc. (*note TeX
engines::). If ARGUMENT does not start with a backslash, as is the case
-above with 'thesis', then TeX considers it to be the name of the file to
-input as the main document. This file is referred to as the "root file"
+above with ‘thesis’, then TeX considers it to be the name of the file to
+input as the main document. This file is referred to as the “root file”
(*note Splitting the input::, and *note \input::). The name of that
-root file, without the '.tex' extension if any, is the jobname. If
+root file, without the ‘.tex’ extension if any, is the jobname. If
ARGUMENT does start with a backslash, or if TeX is in interactive mode,
-then it waits for the first '\input' command, and the jobname is the
-argument to '\input'.
+then it waits for the first ‘\input’ command, and the jobname is the
+argument to ‘\input’.
There are two more possibilities for the jobname. It can be directly
-specified with the '-jobname' option, as in 'pdflatex -jobname=myname'
+specified with the ‘-jobname’ option, as in ‘pdflatex -jobname=myname’
(*note Command line input:: for a real example).
- The final possibility is 'texput', which is the final fallback
-default if no other name is available to TeX. That is, if no '-jobname'
+ The final possibility is ‘texput’, which is the final fallback
+default if no other name is available to TeX. That is, if no ‘-jobname’
option was specified, and the compilation stops before any input file is
-met, then the log file will be named 'texput.log'.
+met, then the log file will be named ‘texput.log’.
A special case of this is that in LaTeX versions of (approximately)
-2020 or later, the jobname is also 'texput' if the first '\input' occurs
-as a result of being called by either '\documentclass' or
-'\RequirePackage'. So this will produce a file named 'texput.pdf':
+2020 or later, the jobname is also ‘texput’ if the first ‘\input’ occurs
+as a result of being called by either ‘\documentclass’ or
+‘\RequirePackage’. So this will produce a file named ‘texput.pdf’:
pdflatex "\documentclass{minimal}\begin{document}Hello!\end{document}"
@@ -17365,21 +17461,21 @@
pdflatex "\documentclass{article}\usepackage{lipsum}\input{thesis}"
-the output file is 'lipsum.pdf', as '\usepackage' calls '\input'.
+the output file is ‘lipsum.pdf’, as ‘\usepackage’ calls ‘\input’.
- Within the document, the macro '\jobname' expands to the jobname.
+ Within the document, the macro ‘\jobname’ expands to the jobname.
(When you run LaTeX on a file whose name contains spaces, the string
-returned by '\jobname' contains matching start and end quotes.) In the
+returned by ‘\jobname’ contains matching start and end quotes.) In the
expansion of that macro, all characters are of catcode 12 (other) except
that spaces are category 10, including letters that are normally
catcode 11.
Because of this catcode situation, using the jobname in a conditional
-can become complicated. One solution is to use the macro '\IfBeginWith'
-from the 'xstring' package in its star variant, which is insensitive to
-catcode. For example, in the following text the footnote "Including
-Respublica Bananensis Francorum." is only present if the task name
-starts with 'my-doc'.
+can become complicated. One solution is to use the macro ‘\IfBeginWith’
+from the ‘xstring’ package in its star variant, which is insensitive to
+catcode. For example, in the following text the footnote “Including
+Respublica Bananensis Francorum.” is only present if the task name
+starts with ‘my-doc’.
If a democracy is just a regime where citizens vote then
all banana republics \IfBeginWith*{\jobname}{my-doc}%
@@ -17386,7 +17482,7 @@
{\footnote{Including Respublica Bananensis Francorum.}}{} are
democracies.
- Manipulating the value of '\jobname' inside of a document does not
+ Manipulating the value of ‘\jobname’ inside of a document does not
change the name of the output file or the log file.
@@ -17396,7 +17492,7 @@
===========================
If LaTeX finds an error in your document then it gives you an error
-message and prompts you with a question mark, '?'. For instance,
+message and prompts you with a question mark, ‘?’. For instance,
running LaTeX on this file
\newcommand{\NP}{\ensuremath{\textbf{NP}}}
@@ -17409,17 +17505,17 @@
{} problem is a million dollar one.
?
-The simplest thing is to enter 'x' and 'RETURN' and fix the typo. You
-could instead enter '?' and 'RETURN' to see other options.
+The simplest thing is to enter ‘x’ and ‘RETURN’ and fix the typo. You
+could instead enter ‘?’ and ‘RETURN’ to see other options.
There are two other error scenarios. The first is that you forgot to
-include the '\end{document}' or misspelled it. In this case LaTeX gives
-you a '*' prompt. You can get back to the command line by typing
-'\stop' and 'RETURN'; this command does its best to exit LaTeX
+include the ‘\end{document}’ or misspelled it. In this case LaTeX gives
+you a ‘*’ prompt. You can get back to the command line by typing
+‘\stop’ and ‘RETURN’; this command does its best to exit LaTeX
immediately, whatever state it may be in.
The last scenario is that you mistyped the filename. For instance,
-instead of 'pdflatex test' you might type 'pdflatex tste'.
+instead of ‘pdflatex test’ you might type ‘pdflatex tste’.
! I can't find file `tste'.
<*> tste
@@ -17427,7 +17523,7 @@
(Press Enter to retry, or Control-D to exit)
Please type another input file name:
-The simplest thing is to enter 'CTRL d' (holding the Control and d keys
+The simplest thing is to enter ‘CTRL d’ (holding the Control and d keys
down at the same time), and then retype the correct command line.
@@ -17450,10 +17546,10 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: beamer template, Next: article template, Up: Document templates
-A.1 'beamer' template
+A.1 ‘beamer’ template
=====================
-The 'beamer' class creates presentation slides. It has a vast array of
+The ‘beamer’ class creates presentation slides. It has a vast array of
features, but here is a basic template:
\documentclass{beamer}
@@ -17483,7 +17579,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: article template, Next: book template, Prev: beamer template, Up: Document templates
-A.2 'article' template
+A.2 ‘article’ template
======================
A simple template for an article.
@@ -17509,7 +17605,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: book template, Next: Larger book template, Prev: article template, Up: Document templates
-A.3 'book' template
+A.3 ‘book’ template
===================
This is a straightforward template for a book. *Note Larger book
@@ -17536,24 +17632,24 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: Larger book template, Prev: book template, Up: Document templates
-A.4 Larger 'book' template
+A.4 Larger ‘book’ template
==========================
This is a somewhat elaborate template for a book. *Note book
template::, for a simpler one.
- This template uses '\frontmatter', '\mainmatter', and '\backmatter'
+ This template uses ‘\frontmatter’, ‘\mainmatter’, and ‘\backmatter’
to control the typography of the three main areas of a book (*note
\frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter::). The book has a
bibliography and an index.
- Also notable is that it uses '\include' and '\includeonly' (*note
+ Also notable is that it uses ‘\include’ and ‘\includeonly’ (*note
Splitting the input::). While you are working on a chapter you can
comment out all the other chapter entries from the argument to
-'\includeonly'. That will speed up compilation without losing any
+‘\includeonly’. That will speed up compilation without losing any
information such as cross-references. (Material that does not need to
-come on a new page is brought in with '\input' instead of '\include'.
-You don't get the cross-reference benefit with '\input'.)
+come on a new page is brought in with ‘\input’ instead of ‘\include’.
+You don’t get the cross-reference benefit with ‘\input’.)
\documentclass[titlepage]{book}
\usepackage{makeidx}\makeindex
@@ -17604,7 +17700,7 @@
* $ inline math: math. (line 12)
* $$...$$ plain TeX display math: displaymath. (line 32)
-* & for table cells: tabular. (line 32)
+* & (for table cells): tabular. (line 32)
* * prompt: Recovering from errors.
(line 23)
* *, to \nocite all keys: Using BibTeX. (line 61)
@@ -17612,7 +17708,7 @@
(line 27)
* *-form of sectioning commands: Sectioning. (line 31)
* *-form, defining new commands: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
- (line 27)
+ (line 28)
* --disable-write18 command-line option: Command line options.
(line 61)
* --enable-write18 command-line option: Command line options.
@@ -17672,9 +17768,9 @@
(line 14)
* 12pt option: Document class options.
(line 14)
-* : for math: Colon character & \colon.
+* : (for math): Colon character & \colon.
(line 6)
-* [...] for optional arguments: LaTeX command syntax.
+* [...] (for optional arguments): LaTeX command syntax.
(line 6)
* \ (backslash-space): \(SPACE). (line 6)
* \ character starting commands: LaTeX command syntax.
@@ -17746,7 +17842,7 @@
(line 19)
* \alsoname: \index. (line 58)
* \amalg: Math symbols. (line 27)
-* \and for \author: \maketitle. (line 43)
+* \and (for \author): \maketitle. (line 43)
* \angle: Math symbols. (line 30)
* \appendix: \appendix. (line 6)
* \approx: Math symbols. (line 34)
@@ -17798,37 +17894,43 @@
* \bibname: thebibliography. (line 44)
* \bibstyle: BibTeX error messages.
(line 19)
+* \bigbreak: \bigbreak & \medbreak & \smallbreak.
+ (line 6)
* \bigcap: Math symbols. (line 54)
* \bigcirc: Math symbols. (line 58)
* \bigcup: Math symbols. (line 61)
+* \bigl: \bigl & \bigr etc.. (line 6)
* \bigodot: Math symbols. (line 65)
* \bigoplus: Math symbols. (line 68)
* \bigotimes: Math symbols. (line 71)
+* \bigr: \bigl & \bigr etc.. (line 6)
* \bigskip: \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip.
+ (line 6)
+* \bigskip <1>: \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip.
(line 28)
* \bigskipamount: \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip.
(line 29)
-* \bigsqcup: Math symbols. (line 80)
+* \bigsqcup: Math symbols. (line 82)
* \bigtriangledown: Math symbols. (line 74)
-* \bigtriangleup: Math symbols. (line 77)
-* \biguplus: Math symbols. (line 83)
-* \bigvee: Math symbols. (line 87)
-* \bigwedge: Math symbols. (line 90)
+* \bigtriangleup: Math symbols. (line 78)
+* \biguplus: Math symbols. (line 85)
+* \bigvee: Math symbols. (line 89)
+* \bigwedge: Math symbols. (line 92)
* \bmod: Math functions. (line 21)
* \boldmath: \boldmath & \unboldmath.
(line 6)
* \boldmath <1>: \boldmath & \unboldmath.
(line 14)
-* \bot: Math symbols. (line 93)
+* \bot: Math symbols. (line 95)
* \bottomfraction: Floats. (line 94)
* \bottomfraction <1>: Floats. (line 95)
-* \bowtie: Math symbols. (line 97)
-* \Box: Math symbols. (line 100)
+* \bowtie: Math symbols. (line 99)
+* \Box: Math symbols. (line 102)
* \breve: Math accents. (line 16)
-* \bullet: Math symbols. (line 105)
+* \bullet: Math symbols. (line 107)
* \c (cedilla accent): Accents. (line 61)
* \cal: Font styles. (line 78)
-* \cap: Math symbols. (line 108)
+* \cap: Math symbols. (line 110)
* \capitalacute: Accents. (line 29)
* \capitalbreve: Accents. (line 89)
* \capitalcaron: Accents. (line 93)
@@ -17848,7 +17950,7 @@
* \caption <1>: figure. (line 43)
* \caption <2>: table. (line 42)
* \cc: \cc. (line 6)
-* \cdot: Math symbols. (line 112)
+* \cdot: Math symbols. (line 114)
* \cdots: Dots. (line 17)
* \centering: \centering. (line 6)
* \chapter: Sectioning. (line 6)
@@ -17858,8 +17960,8 @@
(line 21)
* \CheckCommand*: Class and package commands.
(line 21)
-* \chi: Math symbols. (line 115)
-* \circ: Math symbols. (line 118)
+* \chi: Math symbols. (line 117)
+* \circ: Math symbols. (line 120)
* \circle: \circle. (line 6)
* \citation: BibTeX error messages.
(line 22)
@@ -17884,7 +17986,7 @@
* \closein: \openin & \openout. (line 6)
* \closeout: \openin & \openout. (line 6)
* \closing: \closing. (line 6)
-* \clubsuit: Math symbols. (line 122)
+* \clubsuit: Math symbols. (line 124)
* \colon: Colon character & \colon.
(line 6)
* \columnsep: \twocolumn. (line 20)
@@ -17902,13 +18004,13 @@
(line 8)
* \columnwidth <2>: Page layout parameters.
(line 9)
-* \complement: Math symbols. (line 125)
-* \cong: Math symbols. (line 131)
+* \complement: Math symbols. (line 127)
+* \cong: Math symbols. (line 133)
* \contentsline: Table of contents etc..
(line 62)
* \contentsline <1>: \addcontentsline. (line 10)
* \contentsline <2>: \contentsline. (line 6)
-* \coprod: Math symbols. (line 134)
+* \coprod: Math symbols. (line 136)
* \copyright: Text symbols. (line 13)
* \cos: Math functions. (line 24)
* \cosh: Math functions. (line 27)
@@ -17915,14 +18017,14 @@
* \cot: Math functions. (line 30)
* \coth: Math functions. (line 33)
* \csc: Math functions. (line 36)
-* \cup: Math symbols. (line 137)
+* \cup: Math symbols. (line 139)
* \CurrentOption: Class and package commands.
(line 60)
* \d (dot-under accent): Accents. (line 65)
* \dag: Text symbols. (line 17)
-* \dagger: Math symbols. (line 141)
+* \dagger: Math symbols. (line 143)
* \dashbox: \dashbox. (line 6)
-* \dashv: Math symbols. (line 144)
+* \dashv: Math symbols. (line 146)
* \date{TEXT}: \maketitle. (line 50)
* \day: \day & \month & \year.
(line 6)
@@ -17932,7 +18034,7 @@
* \dbltopfraction: \twocolumn. (line 45)
* \dbltopnumber: \twocolumn. (line 84)
* \ddag: Text symbols. (line 20)
-* \ddagger: Math symbols. (line 148)
+* \ddagger: Math symbols. (line 150)
* \ddot: Math accents. (line 22)
* \ddots: Dots. (line 21)
* \DeclareFontEncoding: \DeclareFontEncoding.
@@ -17956,8 +18058,6 @@
(line 6)
* \DeclareTextCommand: \DeclareTextCommand & \ProvideTextCommand.
(line 6)
-* \DeclareTextCommand <1>: \DeclareTextCommandDefault & \ProvideTextCommandDefault.
- (line 6)
* \DeclareTextCommandDefault: \DeclareTextCommandDefault & \ProvideTextCommandDefault.
(line 6)
* \DeclareTextComposite: \DeclareTextComposite.
@@ -17973,19 +18073,19 @@
(line 6)
* \deg: Math functions. (line 39)
* \DelayedShellEscape: \write18. (line 71)
-* \Delta: Math symbols. (line 151)
-* \delta: Math symbols. (line 154)
+* \Delta: Math symbols. (line 153)
+* \delta: Math symbols. (line 156)
* \det: Math functions. (line 42)
* \dh (ð): Additional Latin letters.
(line 20)
* \DH (Ð): Additional Latin letters.
(line 20)
-* \Diamond: Math symbols. (line 157)
-* \diamond: Math symbols. (line 161)
-* \diamondsuit: Math symbols. (line 165)
+* \Diamond: Math symbols. (line 159)
+* \diamond: Math symbols. (line 163)
+* \diamondsuit: Math symbols. (line 167)
* \dim: Math functions. (line 45)
* \displaystyle: Math styles. (line 29)
-* \div: Math symbols. (line 168)
+* \div: Math symbols. (line 170)
* \dj: Additional Latin letters.
(line 26)
* \DJ: Additional Latin letters.
@@ -17993,16 +18093,21 @@
* \documentclass: Document classes. (line 6)
* \documentclass, and texput jobname: Jobname. (line 32)
* \dot: Math accents. (line 25)
-* \doteq: Math symbols. (line 171)
+* \doteq: Math symbols. (line 173)
* \dotfill: \hrulefill & \dotfill.
(line 6)
-* \dots: Text symbols. (line 37)
+* \dots: Dots. (line 26)
+* \dots <1>: Dots. (line 49)
+* \dots <2>: Text symbols. (line 38)
+* \dotsb: Dots. (line 49)
+* \dotsc: Dots. (line 49)
+* \dotsi: Dots. (line 49)
* \doublerulesep: tabular. (line 168)
-* \downarrow: Math symbols. (line 175)
-* \Downarrow: Math symbols. (line 179)
-* \ell: Math symbols. (line 183)
+* \downarrow: Math symbols. (line 177)
+* \Downarrow: Math symbols. (line 181)
+* \ell: Math symbols. (line 185)
* \emph: Font styles. (line 60)
-* \emptyset: Math symbols. (line 186)
+* \emptyset: Math symbols. (line 188)
* \encl: \encl. (line 6)
* \end: Environments. (line 6)
* \endinput: \endinput. (line 6)
@@ -18013,9 +18118,9 @@
* \enumii: enumerate. (line 47)
* \enumiii: enumerate. (line 47)
* \enumiv: enumerate. (line 47)
-* \epsilon: Math symbols. (line 189)
-* \equiv: Math symbols. (line 195)
-* \eta: Math symbols. (line 198)
+* \epsilon: Math symbols. (line 191)
+* \equiv: Math symbols. (line 197)
+* \eta: Math symbols. (line 200)
* \evensidemargin: Document class options.
(line 84)
* \evensidemargin <1>: Page layout parameters.
@@ -18024,7 +18129,7 @@
(line 68)
* \ExecuteOptions: Class and package commands.
(line 172)
-* \exists: Math symbols. (line 201)
+* \exists: Math symbols. (line 203)
* \exp: Math functions. (line 48)
* \externaldocument: xr package. (line 6)
* \extracolsep: tabular. (line 108)
@@ -18036,7 +18141,7 @@
* \fboxsep <1>: \fbox & \framebox. (line 43)
* \fboxsep <2>: \fbox & \framebox. (line 42)
* \fill: \hfill. (line 18)
-* \flat: Math symbols. (line 204)
+* \flat: Math symbols. (line 206)
* \floatpagefraction: Floats. (line 98)
* \floatpagefraction <1>: Floats. (line 99)
* \floatsep: Floats. (line 114)
@@ -18066,7 +18171,7 @@
(line 26)
* \footskip <1>: Page layout parameters.
(line 27)
-* \forall: Math symbols. (line 207)
+* \forall: Math symbols. (line 209)
* \frac: \frac. (line 6)
* \frame: \frame. (line 6)
* \framebox: \framebox (picture). (line 6)
@@ -18075,15 +18180,15 @@
(line 6)
* \frontmatter: \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter.
(line 6)
-* \frown: Math symbols. (line 210)
+* \frown: Math symbols. (line 212)
* \fussy: \fussy & \sloppy. (line 6)
-* \Gamma: Math symbols. (line 213)
-* \gamma: Math symbols. (line 216)
+* \Gamma: Math symbols. (line 215)
+* \gamma: Math symbols. (line 218)
* \gcd: Math functions. (line 51)
-* \ge: Math symbols. (line 219)
-* \geq: Math symbols. (line 223)
-* \gets: Math symbols. (line 227)
-* \gg: Math symbols. (line 230)
+* \ge: Math symbols. (line 221)
+* \geq: Math symbols. (line 225)
+* \gets: Math symbols. (line 229)
+* \gg: Math symbols. (line 232)
* \gls: \gls. (line 6)
* \graphicspath: \graphicspath. (line 6)
* \graphpaper: \graphpaper. (line 6)
@@ -18094,7 +18199,7 @@
* \guilsinglright (›): Text symbols. (line 32)
* \H (Hungarian umlaut accent): Accents. (line 69)
* \hat: Math accents. (line 31)
-* \hbar: Math symbols. (line 233)
+* \hbar: Math symbols. (line 235)
* \headheight: Page layout parameters.
(line 14)
* \headheight <1>: Page layout parameters.
@@ -18103,12 +18208,14 @@
(line 19)
* \headsep <1>: Page layout parameters.
(line 20)
-* \heartsuit: Math symbols. (line 236)
+* \heartsuit: Math symbols. (line 238)
* \hfill: \hfill. (line 6)
* \hline: \hline. (line 6)
* \hom: Math functions. (line 54)
-* \hookleftarrow: Math symbols. (line 239)
-* \hookrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 242)
+* \hookleftarrow: Math symbols. (line 241)
+* \hookrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 244)
+* \hphantom: \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom.
+ (line 6)
* \hrulefill: \hrulefill & \dotfill.
(line 6)
* \hsize: Page layout parameters.
@@ -18122,7 +18229,7 @@
* \hyphenation: \hyphenation. (line 6)
* \i (dotless i): Accents. (line 19)
* \IfBeginWith* macro from xstring: Jobname. (line 53)
-* \iff: Math symbols. (line 245)
+* \iff: Math symbols. (line 247)
* \IfFileExists: Class and package commands.
(line 128)
* \ignorespaces: \ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterend.
@@ -18133,10 +18240,10 @@
(line 32)
* \IJ (IJ): Additional Latin letters.
(line 32)
-* \Im: Math symbols. (line 249)
-* \imath: Math symbols. (line 252)
+* \Im: Math symbols. (line 251)
+* \imath: Math symbols. (line 254)
* \immediate\write: \write. (line 60)
-* \in: Math symbols. (line 256)
+* \in: Math symbols. (line 258)
* \include: \include & \includeonly.
(line 6)
* \includegraphics: \includegraphics. (line 6)
@@ -18150,15 +18257,15 @@
(line 22)
* \indexspace <1>: makeindex. (line 59)
* \inf: Math functions. (line 57)
-* \infty: Math symbols. (line 260)
+* \infty: Math symbols. (line 262)
* \input: \input. (line 6)
* \inputencoding: inputenc package. (line 50)
* \InputIfFileExists: Class and package commands.
(line 128)
-* \int: Math symbols. (line 263)
+* \int: Math symbols. (line 265)
* \intextsep: Floats. (line 118)
* \intextsep <1>: Floats. (line 119)
-* \iota: Math symbols. (line 266)
+* \iota: Math symbols. (line 268)
* \it: Font styles. (line 81)
* \item: description. (line 31)
* \item <1>: enumerate. (line 29)
@@ -18170,12 +18277,12 @@
* \itemsep: list. (line 88)
* \itshape: Font styles. (line 34)
* \j (dotless j): Accents. (line 19)
-* \jmath: Math symbols. (line 272)
+* \jmath: Math symbols. (line 274)
* \jobname: Jobname. (line 6)
* \jobname <1>: Jobname. (line 46)
-* \Join: Math symbols. (line 269)
+* \Join: Math symbols. (line 271)
* \k (ogonek): Accents. (line 73)
-* \kappa: Math symbols. (line 276)
+* \kappa: Math symbols. (line 278)
* \ker: Math functions. (line 60)
* \kill: tabbing. (line 107)
* \l (ł): Additional Latin letters.
@@ -18196,10 +18303,10 @@
* \labelitemiv: itemize. (line 42)
* \labelsep: list. (line 100)
* \labelwidth: list. (line 105)
-* \Lambda: Math symbols. (line 279)
-* \lambda: Math symbols. (line 282)
-* \land: Math symbols. (line 285)
-* \langle: Math symbols. (line 289)
+* \Lambda: Math symbols. (line 281)
+* \lambda: Math symbols. (line 284)
+* \land: Math symbols. (line 287)
+* \langle: Math symbols. (line 291)
* \large: Font sizes. (line 11)
* \Large: Font sizes. (line 11)
* \LARGE: Font sizes. (line 11)
@@ -18207,19 +18314,19 @@
(line 6)
* \LaTeX: Text symbols. (line 23)
* \LaTeXe: Text symbols. (line 26)
-* \lbrace: Math symbols. (line 293)
-* \lbrack: Math symbols. (line 296)
-* \lceil: Math symbols. (line 299)
+* \lbrace: Math symbols. (line 295)
+* \lbrack: Math symbols. (line 298)
+* \lceil: Math symbols. (line 301)
* \ldots: Dots. (line 24)
* \ldots <1>: Text symbols. (line 36)
-* \le: Math symbols. (line 303)
-* \leadsto: Math symbols. (line 306)
+* \le: Math symbols. (line 305)
+* \leadsto: Math symbols. (line 308)
* \left: \left & \right. (line 6)
-* \Leftarrow: Math symbols. (line 312)
-* \leftarrow: Math symbols. (line 316)
+* \Leftarrow: Math symbols. (line 314)
+* \leftarrow: Math symbols. (line 318)
* \lefteqn: eqnarray. (line 44)
-* \leftharpoondown: Math symbols. (line 320)
-* \leftharpoonup: Math symbols. (line 323)
+* \leftharpoondown: Math symbols. (line 322)
+* \leftharpoonup: Math symbols. (line 325)
* \leftmargin: itemize. (line 58)
* \leftmargin <1>: list. (line 125)
* \leftmargini: itemize. (line 58)
@@ -18228,12 +18335,12 @@
* \leftmarginiv: itemize. (line 58)
* \leftmarginv: itemize. (line 58)
* \leftmarginvi: itemize. (line 58)
-* \Leftrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 326)
-* \leftrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 330)
-* \leq: Math symbols. (line 334)
-* \lfloor: Math symbols. (line 337)
+* \Leftrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 328)
+* \leftrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 332)
+* \leq: Math symbols. (line 336)
+* \lfloor: Math symbols. (line 339)
* \lg: Math functions. (line 63)
-* \lhd: Math symbols. (line 340)
+* \lhd: Math symbols. (line 342)
* \lim: Math functions. (line 66)
* \liminf: Math functions. (line 69)
* \limsup: Math functions. (line 72)
@@ -18260,9 +18367,9 @@
(line 6)
* \listoftables <1>: \contentsline. (line 6)
* \listparindent: list. (line 142)
-* \ll: Math symbols. (line 346)
+* \ll: Math symbols. (line 348)
* \ln: Math functions. (line 75)
-* \lnot: Math symbols. (line 349)
+* \lnot: Math symbols. (line 351)
* \LoadClass: Class and package commands.
(line 148)
* \LoadClassWithOptions: Class and package commands.
@@ -18270,15 +18377,19 @@
* \location: \location. (line 6)
* \log: Math functions. (line 78)
* \long: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
- (line 27)
-* \longleftarrow: Math symbols. (line 352)
-* \longleftrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 356)
-* \longmapsto: Math symbols. (line 360)
-* \longrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 364)
-* \lor: Math symbols. (line 368)
-* \lq: Text symbols. (line 42)
+ (line 28)
+* \longleftarrow: Math symbols. (line 354)
+* \longleftrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 358)
+* \longmapsto: Math symbols. (line 362)
+* \longrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 366)
+* \lor: Math symbols. (line 370)
+* \lq: Text symbols. (line 43)
* \mainmatter: \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter.
(line 6)
+* \makeatother: \makeatletter & \makeatother.
+ (line 6)
+* \makeatother <1>: \makeatletter & \makeatother.
+ (line 6)
* \makebox: \mbox & \makebox. (line 6)
* \makebox (for picture): \makebox (picture). (line 6)
* \makeglossary: Glossaries. (line 6)
@@ -18287,7 +18398,7 @@
* \makelabel: list. (line 61)
* \makelabels: \makelabels. (line 6)
* \maketitle: \maketitle. (line 6)
-* \mapsto: Math symbols. (line 372)
+* \mapsto: Math symbols. (line 374)
* \marginpar: Marginal notes. (line 6)
* \marginparpush: Page layout parameters.
(line 40)
@@ -18304,26 +18415,31 @@
(line 41)
* \marginsep <1>: Page layout parameters.
(line 43)
-* \markboth{LEFT-HEAD}{RIGHT-HEAD}: \pagestyle. (line 75)
-* \markright{RIGHT}: \pagestyle. (line 84)
+* \markboth{LEFT-HEAD}{RIGHT-HEAD}: \pagestyle. (line 76)
+* \markright{RIGHT-HEAD}: \pagestyle. (line 85)
* \mathbf: Font styles. (line 111)
* \mathcal: Font styles. (line 127)
-* \mathdollar: Math symbols. (line 832)
+* \mathdollar: Math symbols. (line 834)
+* \mathellipsis: Dots. (line 25)
* \mathnormal: Font styles. (line 124)
-* \mathparagraph: Math symbols. (line 835)
+* \mathparagraph: Math symbols. (line 837)
* \mathring: Math accents. (line 34)
* \mathrm: Font styles. (line 108)
-* \mathsection: Math symbols. (line 838)
+* \mathsection: Math symbols. (line 840)
* \mathsf: Font styles. (line 114)
-* \mathsterling: Math symbols. (line 841)
+* \mathsterling: Math symbols. (line 843)
* \mathstrut: \mathstrut. (line 6)
* \mathtt: Font styles. (line 117)
-* \mathunderscore: Math symbols. (line 844)
+* \mathunderscore: Math symbols. (line 846)
* \mathversion: Font styles. (line 129)
* \max: Math functions. (line 81)
* \mbox: \mbox & \makebox. (line 6)
* \mdseries: Font styles. (line 37)
+* \medbreak: \bigbreak & \medbreak & \smallbreak.
+ (line 6)
* \medskip: \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip.
+ (line 6)
+* \medskip <1>: \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip.
(line 33)
* \medskipamount: \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip.
(line 34)
@@ -18330,24 +18446,24 @@
* \medspace: Spacing in math mode.
(line 36)
* \message: \message. (line 6)
-* \mho: Math symbols. (line 376)
-* \mid: Math symbols. (line 379)
+* \mho: Math symbols. (line 378)
+* \mid: Math symbols. (line 381)
* \min: Math functions. (line 84)
-* \models: Math symbols. (line 389)
+* \models: Math symbols. (line 391)
* \month: \day & \month & \year.
(line 6)
-* \mp: Math symbols. (line 393)
-* \mu: Math symbols. (line 396)
+* \mp: Math symbols. (line 395)
+* \mu: Math symbols. (line 398)
* \multicolumn: \multicolumn. (line 6)
* \multiput: \multiput. (line 6)
-* \nabla: Math symbols. (line 399)
+* \nabla: Math symbols. (line 401)
* \name: \name. (line 6)
-* \natural: Math symbols. (line 402)
-* \ne: Math symbols. (line 405)
-* \nearrow: Math symbols. (line 408)
+* \natural: Math symbols. (line 404)
+* \ne: Math symbols. (line 407)
+* \nearrow: Math symbols. (line 410)
* \NeedsTeXFormat: Class and package commands.
(line 182)
-* \neg: Math symbols. (line 411)
+* \neg: Math symbols. (line 413)
* \negmedspace: Spacing in math mode.
(line 42)
* \negthickspace: Spacing in math mode.
@@ -18356,7 +18472,7 @@
(line 61)
* \negthinspace <1>: \thinspace & \negthinspace.
(line 6)
-* \neq: Math symbols. (line 415)
+* \neq: Math symbols. (line 417)
* \newcommand: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
(line 6)
* \newcounter: \newcounter. (line 6)
@@ -18376,7 +18492,7 @@
(line 40)
* \NG: Additional Latin letters.
(line 40)
-* \ni: Math symbols. (line 418)
+* \ni: Math symbols. (line 420)
* \nocite: \nocite. (line 6)
* \nocite and internal \citation: BibTeX error messages.
(line 23)
@@ -18396,11 +18512,11 @@
* \normalmarginpar: Marginal notes. (line 22)
* \normalsfcodes: \normalsfcodes. (line 6)
* \normalsize: Font sizes. (line 11)
-* \not: Math symbols. (line 422)
-* \notin: Math symbols. (line 430)
-* \nu: Math symbols. (line 434)
+* \not: Math symbols. (line 424)
+* \notin: Math symbols. (line 432)
+* \nu: Math symbols. (line 436)
* \numberline: \numberline. (line 6)
-* \nwarrow: Math symbols. (line 437)
+* \nwarrow: Math symbols. (line 439)
* \o (ø): Additional Latin letters.
(line 44)
* \O (Ø): Additional Latin letters.
@@ -18413,32 +18529,32 @@
(line 66)
* \oddsidemargin <2>: Page layout parameters.
(line 68)
-* \odot: Math symbols. (line 440)
+* \odot: Math symbols. (line 442)
* \oe (œ): Additional Latin letters.
(line 48)
* \OE (Œ): Additional Latin letters.
(line 48)
-* \oint: Math symbols. (line 444)
+* \oint: Math symbols. (line 446)
* \oldstylenums: Font styles. (line 133)
-* \Omega: Math symbols. (line 447)
-* \omega: Math symbols. (line 450)
-* \ominus: Math symbols. (line 453)
+* \Omega: Math symbols. (line 449)
+* \omega: Math symbols. (line 452)
+* \ominus: Math symbols. (line 455)
* \onecolumn: \onecolumn. (line 6)
* \openin: \openin & \openout. (line 6)
* \opening: \opening. (line 6)
* \openout: \openin & \openout. (line 6)
-* \oplus: Math symbols. (line 456)
+* \oplus: Math symbols. (line 458)
* \OptionNotUsed: Class and package commands.
(line 200)
-* \oslash: Math symbols. (line 460)
-* \otimes: Math symbols. (line 463)
+* \oslash: Math symbols. (line 462)
+* \otimes: Math symbols. (line 465)
* \oval: \oval. (line 6)
* \overbrace{MATH}: Over- and Underlining.
(line 39)
* \overline{TEXT}: Over- and Underlining.
(line 20)
-* \owns: Math symbols. (line 467)
-* \P: Text symbols. (line 45)
+* \owns: Math symbols. (line 469)
+* \P: Text symbols. (line 46)
* \PackageError: Class and package commands.
(line 41)
* \PackageInfo: Class and package commands.
@@ -18466,10 +18582,10 @@
* \paragraph: Sectioning. (line 6)
* \paragraph <1>: \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph.
(line 6)
-* \parallel: Math symbols. (line 471)
+* \parallel: Math symbols. (line 473)
* \parbox: \parbox. (line 6)
* \parindent: minipage. (line 103)
-* \parindent <1>: \indent & \noindent. (line 6)
+* \parindent <1>: \indent & \noindent. (line 43)
* \parindent <2>: \parindent & \parskip.
(line 6)
* \parsep: list. (line 148)
@@ -18478,7 +18594,7 @@
* \parskip example: itemize. (line 78)
* \part: Sectioning. (line 6)
* \part <1>: \part. (line 6)
-* \partial: Math symbols. (line 474)
+* \partial: Math symbols. (line 476)
* \partopsep: list. (line 157)
* \PassOptionsToClass: Class and package commands.
(line 206)
@@ -18488,22 +18604,24 @@
(line 40)
* \pdfpagewidth: Document class options.
(line 40)
-* \perp: Math symbols. (line 477)
-* \Phi: Math symbols. (line 481)
-* \phi: Math symbols. (line 484)
-* \Pi: Math symbols. (line 488)
-* \pi: Math symbols. (line 491)
-* \pm: Math symbols. (line 495)
+* \perp: Math symbols. (line 479)
+* \phantom: \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom.
+ (line 6)
+* \Phi: Math symbols. (line 483)
+* \phi: Math symbols. (line 486)
+* \Pi: Math symbols. (line 490)
+* \pi: Math symbols. (line 493)
+* \pm: Math symbols. (line 497)
* \pmod: Math functions. (line 87)
* \poptabs: tabbing. (line 113)
* \poptabs <1>: tabbing. (line 114)
-* \pounds: Text symbols. (line 49)
+* \pounds: Text symbols. (line 50)
* \Pr: Math functions. (line 90)
-* \prec: Math symbols. (line 498)
-* \preceq: Math symbols. (line 501)
+* \prec: Math symbols. (line 500)
+* \preceq: Math symbols. (line 503)
* \prevdepth: \baselineskip & \baselinestretch.
(line 45)
-* \prime: Math symbols. (line 505)
+* \prime: Math symbols. (line 507)
* \printglossaries: Glossaries. (line 6)
* \printglossaries <1>: Glossaries. (line 43)
* \printindex: \printindex. (line 6)
@@ -18511,8 +18629,8 @@
(line 243)
* \ProcessOptions*: Class and package commands.
(line 243)
-* \prod: Math symbols. (line 514)
-* \propto: Math symbols. (line 517)
+* \prod: Math symbols. (line 516)
+* \propto: Math symbols. (line 519)
* \protect: \protect. (line 6)
* \protected at write: \write. (line 70)
* \providecommand: \providecommand. (line 6)
@@ -18524,13 +18642,11 @@
(line 281)
* \ProvideTextCommand: \DeclareTextCommand & \ProvideTextCommand.
(line 6)
-* \ProvideTextCommand <1>: \DeclareTextCommandDefault & \ProvideTextCommandDefault.
- (line 6)
* \ProvideTextCommandDefault: \DeclareTextCommandDefault & \ProvideTextCommandDefault.
(line 6)
* \ps: \ps. (line 6)
-* \Psi: Math symbols. (line 520)
-* \psi: Math symbols. (line 523)
+* \Psi: Math symbols. (line 522)
+* \psi: Math symbols. (line 525)
* \pushtabs: tabbing. (line 116)
* \put: \put. (line 6)
* \qbezier: \qbezier. (line 6)
@@ -18542,23 +18658,25 @@
(line 69)
* \quad <1>: \enspace & \quad & \qquad.
(line 6)
-* \quotedblbase („): Text symbols. (line 53)
-* \quotesinglbase (‚): Text symbols. (line 54)
+* \quotedblbase („): Text symbols. (line 54)
+* \quotesinglbase (‚): Text symbols. (line 55)
* \r (ring accent): Accents. (line 77)
* \raggedbottom: \raggedbottom. (line 6)
* \raggedleft: \raggedleft. (line 6)
* \raggedright: \raggedright. (line 6)
* \raisebox: \raisebox. (line 6)
-* \rangle: Math symbols. (line 526)
-* \rbrace: Math symbols. (line 530)
-* \rbrack: Math symbols. (line 533)
-* \rceil: Math symbols. (line 537)
-* \Re: Math symbols. (line 540)
+* \rangle: Math symbols. (line 528)
+* \rbrace: Math symbols. (line 532)
+* \rbrack: Math symbols. (line 535)
+* \rceil: Math symbols. (line 539)
+* \Re: Math symbols. (line 542)
* \read: \read. (line 6)
* \ref: \ref. (line 6)
* \reflectbox: \scalebox. (line 6)
* \refname: thebibliography. (line 44)
* \refstepcounter: \refstepcounter. (line 6)
+* \renewcommand: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
+ (line 6)
* \renewenvironment: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment.
(line 6)
* \RequirePackage: Class and package commands.
@@ -18569,18 +18687,18 @@
* \resizebox: \resizebox. (line 6)
* \restorecr: \obeycr & \restorecr.
(line 6)
-* \restriction: Math symbols. (line 545)
-* \revemptyset: Math symbols. (line 550)
+* \restriction: Math symbols. (line 547)
+* \revemptyset: Math symbols. (line 552)
* \reversemarginpar: Marginal notes. (line 22)
-* \rfloor: Math symbols. (line 555)
-* \rhd: Math symbols. (line 559)
-* \rho: Math symbols. (line 565)
+* \rfloor: Math symbols. (line 557)
+* \rhd: Math symbols. (line 561)
+* \rho: Math symbols. (line 567)
* \right: \left & \right. (line 6)
-* \Rightarrow: Math symbols. (line 569)
-* \rightarrow: Math symbols. (line 573)
-* \rightharpoondown: Math symbols. (line 577)
-* \rightharpoonup: Math symbols. (line 580)
-* \rightleftharpoons: Math symbols. (line 583)
+* \Rightarrow: Math symbols. (line 571)
+* \rightarrow: Math symbols. (line 575)
+* \rightharpoondown: Math symbols. (line 579)
+* \rightharpoonup: Math symbols. (line 582)
+* \rightleftharpoons: Math symbols. (line 585)
* \rightmargin: list. (line 172)
* \rm: Font styles. (line 84)
* \rmfamily: Font styles. (line 31)
@@ -18589,9 +18707,9 @@
* \Roman{COUNTER}: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
(line 32)
* \rotatebox: \rotatebox. (line 6)
-* \rq: Text symbols. (line 57)
+* \rq: Text symbols. (line 58)
* \rule: \rule. (line 6)
-* \S: Text symbols. (line 60)
+* \S: Text symbols. (line 61)
* \samepage: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak.
(line 44)
* \savebox: \sbox & \savebox. (line 6)
@@ -18602,7 +18720,7 @@
* \scriptsize: Font sizes. (line 11)
* \scriptstyle: Math styles. (line 29)
* \scshape: Font styles. (line 52)
-* \searrow: Math symbols. (line 586)
+* \searrow: Math symbols. (line 588)
* \sec: Math functions. (line 93)
* \section: Sectioning. (line 6)
* \section <1>: \section. (line 6)
@@ -18611,21 +18729,21 @@
(line 118)
* \setcounter: \setcounter. (line 6)
* \setlength: \setlength. (line 6)
-* \setminus: Math symbols. (line 589)
+* \setminus: Math symbols. (line 591)
* \settodepth: \settodepth. (line 6)
* \settoheight: \settoheight. (line 6)
* \settowidth: \settowidth. (line 6)
* \sf: Font styles. (line 90)
* \sffamily: Font styles. (line 49)
-* \sharp: Math symbols. (line 594)
+* \sharp: Math symbols. (line 596)
* \ShellEscape: \write18. (line 71)
* \shipout and expansion: \write. (line 65)
* \shortstack: \shortstack. (line 6)
-* \Sigma: Math symbols. (line 597)
-* \sigma: Math symbols. (line 600)
+* \Sigma: Math symbols. (line 599)
+* \sigma: Math symbols. (line 602)
* \signature: \signature. (line 11)
-* \sim: Math symbols. (line 604)
-* \simeq: Math symbols. (line 607)
+* \sim: Math symbols. (line 606)
+* \simeq: Math symbols. (line 609)
* \sin: Math functions. (line 96)
* \sinh: Math functions. (line 99)
* \sl: Font styles. (line 93)
@@ -18632,12 +18750,16 @@
* \sloppy: \fussy & \sloppy. (line 6)
* \slshape: Font styles. (line 46)
* \small: Font sizes. (line 11)
-* \smallint: Math symbols. (line 610)
+* \smallbreak: \bigbreak & \medbreak & \smallbreak.
+ (line 6)
+* \smallint: Math symbols. (line 612)
* \smallskip: \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip.
+ (line 6)
+* \smallskip <1>: \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip.
(line 38)
* \smallskipamount: \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip.
(line 39)
-* \smile: Math symbols. (line 614)
+* \smile: Math symbols. (line 616)
* \<SPACE>: \(SPACE). (line 6)
* \<SPACE> <1>: \(SPACE). (line 6)
* \space: \include & \includeonly.
@@ -18645,20 +18767,20 @@
* \space <1>: \input. (line 32)
* \space <2>: \typeout. (line 22)
* \spacefactor: \spacefactor. (line 10)
-* \spadesuit: Math symbols. (line 617)
-* \sqcap: Math symbols. (line 620)
-* \sqcup: Math symbols. (line 624)
+* \spadesuit: Math symbols. (line 619)
+* \sqcap: Math symbols. (line 622)
+* \sqcup: Math symbols. (line 626)
* \sqrt: \sqrt. (line 6)
-* \sqsubset: Math symbols. (line 628)
-* \sqsubseteq: Math symbols. (line 633)
-* \sqsupset: Math symbols. (line 637)
-* \sqsupseteq: Math symbols. (line 642)
+* \sqsubset: Math symbols. (line 630)
+* \sqsubseteq: Math symbols. (line 635)
+* \sqsupset: Math symbols. (line 639)
+* \sqsupseteq: Math symbols. (line 644)
* \ss (ß): Additional Latin letters.
(line 52)
* \SS (SS): Additional Latin letters.
(line 52)
* \stackrel: \stackrel. (line 6)
-* \star: Math symbols. (line 646)
+* \star: Math symbols. (line 648)
* \stepcounter: \stepcounter. (line 6)
* \stop: Recovering from errors.
(line 23)
@@ -18671,22 +18793,24 @@
(line 6)
* \subsection: Sectioning. (line 6)
* \subsection <1>: \subsection. (line 6)
-* \subset: Math symbols. (line 653)
-* \subseteq: Math symbols. (line 656)
+* \subset: Math symbols. (line 655)
+* \subseteq: Math symbols. (line 658)
* \subsubitem: Produce the index manually.
(line 22)
* \subsubsection: Sectioning. (line 6)
* \subsubsection <1>: \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph.
(line 6)
-* \succ: Math symbols. (line 659)
-* \succeq: Math symbols. (line 662)
-* \sum: Math symbols. (line 666)
+* \succ: Math symbols. (line 661)
+* \succeq: Math symbols. (line 664)
+* \sum: Math symbols. (line 668)
* \sup: Math functions. (line 102)
* \suppressfloats: Floats. (line 87)
-* \supset: Math symbols. (line 669)
-* \supseteq: Math symbols. (line 672)
-* \surd: Math symbols. (line 675)
-* \swarrow: Math symbols. (line 680)
+* \supset: Math symbols. (line 671)
+* \supseteq: Math symbols. (line 674)
+* \surd: Math symbols. (line 677)
+* \swarrow: Math symbols. (line 682)
+* \symbf: OpenType bold math. (line 20)
+* \symbfit: OpenType bold math. (line 20)
* \symbol: Symbols by font position.
(line 6)
* \t (tie-after accent): Accents. (line 83)
@@ -18698,79 +18822,79 @@
* \tableofcontents <1>: \contentsline. (line 6)
* \tan: Math functions. (line 105)
* \tanh: Math functions. (line 108)
-* \tau: Math symbols. (line 683)
+* \tau: Math symbols. (line 685)
* \telephone: \telephone. (line 6)
-* \TeX: Text symbols. (line 64)
-* \textascendercompwordmark: Text symbols. (line 102)
-* \textasciicircum: Text symbols. (line 67)
-* \textasciitilde: Text symbols. (line 70)
-* \textasteriskcentered: Text symbols. (line 73)
+* \TeX: Text symbols. (line 65)
+* \textascendercompwordmark: Text symbols. (line 110)
+* \textasciicircum: Text symbols. (line 68)
+* \textasciitilde: Text symbols. (line 71)
+* \textasteriskcentered: Text symbols. (line 74)
* \textbackslash: Reserved characters. (line 18)
-* \textbackslash <1>: Text symbols. (line 76)
-* \textbar: Text symbols. (line 79)
-* \textbardbl: Text symbols. (line 82)
+* \textbackslash <1>: Text symbols. (line 77)
+* \textbar: Text symbols. (line 85)
+* \textbardbl: Text symbols. (line 88)
* \textbf: Font styles. (line 40)
-* \textbigcircle: Text symbols. (line 85)
-* \textbraceleft: Text symbols. (line 88)
-* \textbraceright: Text symbols. (line 91)
-* \textbullet: Text symbols. (line 94)
-* \textcapitalcompwordmark: Text symbols. (line 101)
-* \textcircled{LETTER}: Text symbols. (line 97)
-* \textcompwordmark: Text symbols. (line 100)
+* \textbigcircle: Text symbols. (line 91)
+* \textbraceleft: Text symbols. (line 94)
+* \textbraceright: Text symbols. (line 98)
+* \textbullet: Text symbols. (line 102)
+* \textcapitalcompwordmark: Text symbols. (line 109)
+* \textcircled{LETTER}: Text symbols. (line 105)
+* \textcompwordmark: Text symbols. (line 108)
* \textcopyright: Text symbols. (line 14)
-* \textdagger: Text symbols. (line 109)
-* \textdaggerdbl: Text symbols. (line 112)
-* \textdollar (or \$): Text symbols. (line 115)
-* \textellipsis: Text symbols. (line 38)
-* \textemdash (or ---): Text symbols. (line 118)
-* \textendash (or --): Text symbols. (line 124)
-* \texteuro: Text symbols. (line 127)
-* \textexclamdown (or !`): Text symbols. (line 135)
-* \textfiguredash: Text symbols. (line 138)
+* \textdagger: Text symbols. (line 117)
+* \textdaggerdbl: Text symbols. (line 120)
+* \textdollar (or \$): Text symbols. (line 123)
+* \textellipsis: Text symbols. (line 37)
+* \textemdash (or ---): Text symbols. (line 126)
+* \textendash (or --): Text symbols. (line 132)
+* \texteuro: Text symbols. (line 135)
+* \textexclamdown (or !`): Text symbols. (line 143)
+* \textfiguredash: Text symbols. (line 146)
* \textfloatsep: Floats. (line 123)
* \textfloatsep <1>: Floats. (line 124)
* \textfraction: Floats. (line 102)
* \textfraction <1>: Floats. (line 103)
-* \textgreater: Text symbols. (line 145)
+* \textgreater: Text symbols. (line 153)
* \textheight: Page layout parameters.
(line 91)
* \textheight <1>: Page layout parameters.
(line 92)
-* \texthorizontalbar: Text symbols. (line 148)
+* \texthorizontalbar: Text symbols. (line 156)
* \textit: Font styles. (line 34)
-* \textleftarrow: Text symbols. (line 156)
-* \textless: Text symbols. (line 153)
+* \textleftarrow: Text symbols. (line 164)
+* \textless: Text symbols. (line 161)
* \textmd: Font styles. (line 37)
-* \textnonbreakinghyphen: Text symbols. (line 159)
+* \textnonbreakinghyphen: Text symbols. (line 167)
* \textnormal: Font styles. (line 58)
-* \textordfeminine: Text symbols. (line 165)
-* \textordmasculine: Text symbols. (line 166)
-* \textparagraph: Text symbols. (line 46)
-* \textperiodcentered: Text symbols. (line 169)
-* \textquestiondown (or ?`): Text symbols. (line 172)
-* \textquotedblleft (or ``): Text symbols. (line 175)
-* \textquotedblright (or ''): Text symbols. (line 178)
-* \textquoteleft (or `): Text symbols. (line 181)
-* \textquoteright (or '): Text symbols. (line 184)
-* \textquotesingle: Text symbols. (line 187)
-* \textquotestraightbase: Text symbols. (line 190)
-* \textquotestraightdblbase: Text symbols. (line 191)
-* \textregistered: Text symbols. (line 194)
-* \textrightarrow: Text symbols. (line 197)
+* \textordfeminine: Text symbols. (line 173)
+* \textordmasculine: Text symbols. (line 174)
+* \textparagraph: Text symbols. (line 47)
+* \textperiodcentered: Text symbols. (line 177)
+* \textquestiondown (or ?`): Text symbols. (line 180)
+* \textquotedblleft (or ``): Text symbols. (line 183)
+* \textquotedblright (or ''): Text symbols. (line 186)
+* \textquoteleft (or `): Text symbols. (line 189)
+* \textquoteright (or '): Text symbols. (line 192)
+* \textquotesingle: Text symbols. (line 195)
+* \textquotestraightbase: Text symbols. (line 198)
+* \textquotestraightdblbase: Text symbols. (line 199)
+* \textregistered: Text symbols. (line 202)
+* \textrightarrow: Text symbols. (line 205)
* \textrm: Font styles. (line 31)
* \textsc: Font styles. (line 52)
-* \textsection: Text symbols. (line 61)
+* \textsection: Text symbols. (line 62)
* \textsf: Font styles. (line 49)
* \textsl: Font styles. (line 46)
-* \textsterling: Text symbols. (line 50)
+* \textsterling: Text symbols. (line 51)
* \textstyle: Math styles. (line 29)
-* \textthreequartersemdash: Text symbols. (line 200)
-* \texttrademark: Text symbols. (line 203)
+* \textthreequartersemdash: Text symbols. (line 208)
+* \texttrademark: Text symbols. (line 211)
* \texttt: Font styles. (line 55)
-* \texttwelveudash: Text symbols. (line 206)
-* \textunderscore: Text symbols. (line 209)
+* \texttwelveudash: Text symbols. (line 214)
+* \textunderscore: Text symbols. (line 217)
* \textup: Font styles. (line 43)
-* \textvisiblespace: Text symbols. (line 212)
+* \textvisiblespace: Text symbols. (line 220)
* \textwidth: Page layout parameters.
(line 99)
* \textwidth <1>: Page layout parameters.
@@ -18780,7 +18904,7 @@
* \TH (Þ): Additional Latin letters.
(line 56)
* \thanks{TEXT}: \maketitle. (line 56)
-* \theta: Math symbols. (line 686)
+* \theta: Math symbols. (line 688)
* \thicklines: \thicklines. (line 6)
* \thickspace: Spacing in math mode.
(line 23)
@@ -18791,12 +18915,12 @@
(line 6)
* \thispagestyle: \thispagestyle. (line 6)
* \tilde: Math accents. (line 37)
-* \times: Math symbols. (line 690)
+* \times: Math symbols. (line 692)
* \tiny: Font sizes. (line 11)
* \title{TEXT}: \maketitle. (line 63)
-* \to: Math symbols. (line 693)
+* \to: Math symbols. (line 695)
* \today: \today. (line 6)
-* \top: Math symbols. (line 697)
+* \top: Math symbols. (line 699)
* \topfraction: Floats. (line 107)
* \topfraction <1>: Floats. (line 108)
* \topmargin: Page layout parameters.
@@ -18806,9 +18930,9 @@
(line 131)
* \topskip <1>: Page layout parameters.
(line 132)
-* \triangle: Math symbols. (line 701)
-* \triangleleft: Math symbols. (line 704)
-* \triangleright: Math symbols. (line 710)
+* \triangle: Math symbols. (line 703)
+* \triangleleft: Math symbols. (line 706)
+* \triangleright: Math symbols. (line 712)
* \tt: Font styles. (line 96)
* \ttfamily: Font styles. (line 55)
* \twocolumn: \twocolumn. (line 6)
@@ -18825,17 +18949,17 @@
* \underline{TEXT}: Over- and Underlining.
(line 9)
* \unitlength: picture. (line 28)
-* \unlhd: Math symbols. (line 716)
-* \unrhd: Math symbols. (line 722)
-* \Uparrow: Math symbols. (line 728)
-* \uparrow: Math symbols. (line 732)
-* \Updownarrow: Math symbols. (line 736)
-* \updownarrow: Math symbols. (line 741)
-* \upharpoonright: Math symbols. (line 746)
-* \uplus: Math symbols. (line 751)
+* \unlhd: Math symbols. (line 718)
+* \unrhd: Math symbols. (line 724)
+* \Uparrow: Math symbols. (line 730)
+* \uparrow: Math symbols. (line 734)
+* \Updownarrow: Math symbols. (line 738)
+* \updownarrow: Math symbols. (line 743)
+* \upharpoonright: Math symbols. (line 748)
+* \uplus: Math symbols. (line 753)
* \upshape: Font styles. (line 43)
-* \Upsilon: Math symbols. (line 756)
-* \upsilon: Math symbols. (line 759)
+* \Upsilon: Math symbols. (line 758)
+* \upsilon: Math symbols. (line 761)
* \usebox: \usebox. (line 6)
* \usecounter: \usecounter. (line 6)
* \usefont: Low-level font commands.
@@ -18847,32 +18971,34 @@
(line 6)
* \v (breve accent): Accents. (line 93)
* \value: \value. (line 6)
-* \vanothing: Math symbols. (line 767)
-* \varepsilon: Math symbols. (line 762)
-* \varphi: Math symbols. (line 772)
-* \varpi: Math symbols. (line 776)
-* \varrho: Math symbols. (line 780)
-* \varsigma: Math symbols. (line 784)
-* \vartheta: Math symbols. (line 788)
+* \vanothing: Math symbols. (line 769)
+* \varepsilon: Math symbols. (line 764)
+* \varphi: Math symbols. (line 774)
+* \varpi: Math symbols. (line 778)
+* \varrho: Math symbols. (line 782)
+* \varsigma: Math symbols. (line 786)
+* \vartheta: Math symbols. (line 790)
* \vbox (plain TeX): minipage. (line 57)
-* \vdash: Math symbols. (line 792)
-* \vdots: Dots. (line 33)
+* \vdash: Math symbols. (line 794)
+* \vdots: Dots. (line 35)
* \vec: Math accents. (line 40)
* \vector: \vector. (line 6)
-* \vee: Math symbols. (line 796)
+* \vee: Math symbols. (line 798)
* \verb: \verb. (line 6)
-* \Vert: Math symbols. (line 800)
-* \vert: Math symbols. (line 804)
+* \Vert: Math symbols. (line 802)
+* \vert: Math symbols. (line 806)
* \vfill: \vfill. (line 6)
* \vline: \vline. (line 6)
+* \vphantom: \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom.
+ (line 6)
* \vspace: \vspace. (line 6)
* \vtop plain TeX: minipage. (line 53)
-* \wedge: Math symbols. (line 810)
+* \wedge: Math symbols. (line 812)
* \widehat: Math accents. (line 43)
* \widetilde: Math accents. (line 46)
* \wlog: \wlog. (line 6)
-* \wp: Math symbols. (line 814)
-* \wr: Math symbols. (line 817)
+* \wp: Math symbols. (line 816)
+* \wr: Math symbols. (line 819)
* \write: \write. (line 6)
* \write and security: \write and security. (line 6)
* \write streams 16, 17, 18: \write. (line 86)
@@ -18879,25 +19005,25 @@
* \write18: \write18. (line 6)
* \write18, enabling: Command line options.
(line 61)
-* \Xi: Math symbols. (line 820)
-* \xi: Math symbols. (line 823)
+* \Xi: Math symbols. (line 822)
+* \xi: Math symbols. (line 825)
* \xspace: xspace package. (line 6)
* \year: \day & \month & \year.
(line 6)
-* \zeta: Math symbols. (line 826)
+* \zeta: Math symbols. (line 828)
* \[...\] display math: displaymath. (line 26)
* \\ (for center): center. (line 16)
* \\ (for eqnarray): eqnarray. (line 29)
+* \\ (for flushleft): flushleft. (line 14)
* \\ (for flushright): flushright. (line 12)
+* \\ (for letters): Letters. (line 48)
+* \\ (for tabular): tabular. (line 36)
+* \\ (for verse): verse. (line 21)
+* \\ (for \author): \maketitle. (line 43)
* \\ (for \shortstack objects): \shortstack. (line 35)
+* \\ (for \title): \maketitle. (line 64)
+* \\ (force line break): \\. (line 6)
* \\ (tabbing): tabbing. (line 66)
-* \\ for flushleft: flushleft. (line 14)
-* \\ for letters: Letters. (line 48)
-* \\ for tabular: tabular. (line 36)
-* \\ for verse: verse. (line 21)
-* \\ for \author: \maketitle. (line 43)
-* \\ for \title: \maketitle. (line 64)
-* \\ force line break: \\. (line 6)
* \\* (for eqnarray): eqnarray. (line 35)
* \^: Reserved characters. (line 18)
* \^ (circumflex accent): Accents. (line 40)
@@ -18914,7 +19040,7 @@
* ^^J, in \write: \write. (line 94)
* _ subscript: Subscripts & superscripts.
(line 6)
-* {...} for required arguments: LaTeX command syntax.
+* {...} (for required arguments): LaTeX command syntax.
(line 6)
* ~: ~. (line 6)
* a4paper option: Document class options.
@@ -18961,7 +19087,7 @@
* amsmath package <5>: Math formulas. (line 61)
* amsmath package <6>: \left & \right. (line 30)
* amsmath package <7>: \bigl & \bigr etc.. (line 67)
-* amsmath package <8>: Dots. (line 36)
+* amsmath package <8>: Dots. (line 38)
* amsmath package <9>: Math functions. (line 111)
* amsmath package <10>: Spacing in math mode.
(line 23)
@@ -18979,23 +19105,25 @@
* answers package: \write. (line 99)
* appendices: \appendix. (line 6)
* appendix: \appendix. (line 6)
-* appendix package: \appendix. (line 29)
+* appendix package: \appendix. (line 30)
+* arguments, optional, defining and using: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
+ (line 49)
* aring: Additional Latin letters.
(line 12)
* array environment: array. (line 6)
* array package: array. (line 74)
* arrays, math: array. (line 6)
-* arrow, left, in text: Text symbols. (line 157)
-* arrow, right, in text: Text symbols. (line 198)
+* arrow, left, in text: Text symbols. (line 165)
+* arrow, right, in text: Text symbols. (line 206)
* arrows: Arrows. (line 6)
* article class: Document classes. (line 11)
-* ascender height: Text symbols. (line 103)
-* ASCII circumflex, in text: Text symbols. (line 68)
-* ASCII tilde, in text: Text symbols. (line 71)
-* asterisk, centered, in text: Text symbols. (line 74)
+* ascender height: Text symbols. (line 111)
+* ASCII circumflex, in text: Text symbols. (line 69)
+* ASCII tilde, in text: Text symbols. (line 72)
+* asterisk, centered, in text: Text symbols. (line 75)
* Asymptote package: \line. (line 35)
* Asymptote package <1>: \strut. (line 62)
-* Asymptote package <2>: \mbox & \makebox. (line 74)
+* Asymptote package <2>: \mbox & \makebox. (line 73)
* Asymptote package <3>: \write18. (line 13)
* at clause, in font definitions: \newfont. (line 19)
* at-sign: \@. (line 6)
@@ -19013,9 +19141,10 @@
* back matter of a book: \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter.
(line 6)
* background, colored: Colored pages. (line 6)
-* backslash, in text: Text symbols. (line 77)
-* bar, double vertical, in text: Text symbols. (line 83)
-* bar, vertical, in text: Text symbols. (line 80)
+* backslash, in text: Text symbols. (line 78)
+* badness: Page breaking. (line 11)
+* bar, double vertical, in text: Text symbols. (line 89)
+* bar, vertical, in text: Text symbols. (line 86)
* bar-over accent: Accents. (line 36)
* bar-over accent, math: Math accents. (line 14)
* bar-under accent: Accents. (line 51)
@@ -19032,7 +19161,7 @@
* BibTeX error messages: BibTeX error messages.
(line 6)
* bibTeX, using: Using BibTeX. (line 6)
-* big circle symbols, in text: Text symbols. (line 86)
+* big circle symbols, in text: Text symbols. (line 92)
* big point: Units of length. (line 20)
* bigfoot package: Footnotes of footnotes.
(line 6)
@@ -19039,8 +19168,9 @@
* black boxes, omitting: Document class options.
(line 53)
* blackboard bold: Blackboard bold. (line 6)
-* bm package: \boldmath & \unboldmath.
- (line 32)
+* blanks, after control sequences: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
+ (line 87)
+* bm package: bm. (line 6)
* bold font: Font styles. (line 76)
* bold math: Font styles. (line 129)
* bold typewriter, avoiding: description. (line 36)
@@ -19066,8 +19196,8 @@
* box, use saved box: \usebox. (line 6)
* boxes: Boxes. (line 6)
* bp: Units of length. (line 19)
-* brace, left, in text: Text symbols. (line 89)
-* brace, right, in text: Text symbols. (line 92)
+* brace, left, in text: Text symbols. (line 95)
+* brace, right, in text: Text symbols. (line 99)
* braces: Delimiters. (line 6)
* brackets: Delimiters. (line 6)
* breaking lines: Line breaking. (line 6)
@@ -19077,12 +19207,12 @@
* breve accent, math: Math accents. (line 17)
* bug reporting: About this document. (line 24)
* bullet lists: itemize. (line 6)
-* bullet symbol: Math symbols. (line 106)
-* bullet, in text: Text symbols. (line 95)
+* bullet symbol: Math symbols. (line 108)
+* bullet, in text: Text symbols. (line 103)
* bulleted lists: itemize. (line 6)
* calligraphic fonts: Calligraphic. (line 6)
* calligraphic letters for math: Font styles. (line 79)
-* cap height: Text symbols. (line 103)
+* cap height: Text symbols. (line 111)
* caption package: \caption. (line 72)
* captions: \caption. (line 6)
* caron accent: Accents. (line 93)
@@ -19094,10 +19224,10 @@
* cc list, in letters: \cc. (line 6)
* cedilla accent: Accents. (line 61)
* center environment: center. (line 6)
-* centered asterisk, in text: Text symbols. (line 74)
+* centered asterisk, in text: Text symbols. (line 75)
* centered equations: Document class options.
(line 57)
-* centered period, in text: Text symbols. (line 170)
+* centered period, in text: Text symbols. (line 178)
* centering text, declaration for: \centering. (line 6)
* centering text, environment for: center. (line 6)
* centimeter: Units of length. (line 27)
@@ -19122,11 +19252,11 @@
* check accent: Accents. (line 93)
* check accent, math: Math accents. (line 20)
* cicero: Units of length. (line 33)
-* circle symbol, big, in text: Text symbols. (line 86)
-* circled letter, in text: Text symbols. (line 98)
+* circle symbol, big, in text: Text symbols. (line 92)
+* circled letter, in text: Text symbols. (line 106)
* circumflex accent: Accents. (line 40)
* circumflex accent, math: Math accents. (line 32)
-* circumflex, ASCII, in text: Text symbols. (line 68)
+* circumflex, ASCII, in text: Text symbols. (line 69)
* citation key: \bibitem. (line 15)
* class and package commands: Class and package commands.
(line 6)
@@ -19153,7 +19283,7 @@
* clock option to slides class: Document class options.
(line 99)
* closing letters: \closing. (line 6)
-* closing quote: Text symbols. (line 58)
+* closing quote: Text symbols. (line 59)
* cm: Units of length. (line 26)
* cm-super package: fontenc package. (line 36)
* cmd.exe, used by \write18: \write18. (line 60)
@@ -19193,12 +19323,15 @@
(line 6)
* commands, run from LaTeX: \write18. (line 6)
* commands, star-variants: \@ifstar. (line 6)
-* composite word mark, in text: Text symbols. (line 103)
+* composite word mark, in text: Text symbols. (line 111)
* comprehensive package: Math symbols. (line 6)
* computer programs, typesetting: verbatim. (line 6)
* configuration, graphics package: Graphics package configuration.
(line 6)
* contents file: Output files. (line 43)
+* control sequences: Control sequences. (line 6)
+* control symbol, defined: Control sequences. (line 17)
+* control word, defined: Control sequences. (line 13)
* copyright symbol: Text symbols. (line 15)
* counters, a list of: Counters. (line 6)
* counters, defining new: \newcounter. (line 6)
@@ -19218,15 +19351,15 @@
* cross referencing, symbolic: \ref. (line 6)
* CTAN: CTAN. (line 6)
* curly braces: Delimiters. (line 6)
-* currency, dollar: Text symbols. (line 116)
-* currency, euro: Text symbols. (line 128)
-* dagger, double, in text: Text symbols. (line 113)
+* currency, dollar: Text symbols. (line 124)
+* currency, euro: Text symbols. (line 136)
+* dagger, double, in text: Text symbols. (line 121)
* dagger, in text: Text symbols. (line 18)
-* dagger, in text <1>: Text symbols. (line 110)
+* dagger, in text <1>: Text symbols. (line 118)
* DANTE e.V.: CTAN. (line 20)
* datatool package: \read. (line 31)
* date, for titlepage: \maketitle. (line 51)
-* date, today's: \today. (line 6)
+* date, today’s: \today. (line 6)
* datetime package: \today. (line 27)
* dbltopnumber: Floats. (line 134)
* dbltopnumber <1>: Floats. (line 135)
@@ -19280,28 +19413,28 @@
* document environment: document. (line 6)
* document root name: Jobname. (line 6)
* document templates: Document templates. (line 6)
-* dollar sign: Text symbols. (line 116)
+* dollar sign: Text symbols. (line 124)
* dot accent: Accents. (line 32)
* dot over accent, math: Math accents. (line 26)
* dot-over accent: Accents. (line 32)
* dot-under accent: Accents. (line 65)
* dotless i: Accents. (line 19)
-* dotless i, math: Math symbols. (line 253)
+* dotless i, math: Math symbols. (line 255)
* dotless j: Accents. (line 19)
-* dotless j, math: Math symbols. (line 273)
+* dotless j, math: Math symbols. (line 275)
* dots: Dots. (line 6)
* double angle quotation marks: Text symbols. (line 33)
* double dagger, in text: Text symbols. (line 21)
-* double dagger, in text <1>: Text symbols. (line 113)
+* double dagger, in text <1>: Text symbols. (line 121)
* double dot accent, math: Math accents. (line 23)
* double guillemets: Text symbols. (line 33)
-* double left quote: Text symbols. (line 176)
-* double low-9 quotation mark: Text symbols. (line 55)
-* double quote, straight base: Text symbols. (line 192)
-* double right quote: Text symbols. (line 179)
+* double left quote: Text symbols. (line 184)
+* double low-9 quotation mark: Text symbols. (line 56)
+* double quote, straight base: Text symbols. (line 200)
+* double right quote: Text symbols. (line 187)
* double spacing: \baselineskip & \baselinestretch.
(line 6)
-* double vertical bar, in text: Text symbols. (line 83)
+* double vertical bar, in text: Text symbols. (line 89)
* doublestruck: Blackboard bold. (line 6)
* draft option: Document class options.
(line 49)
@@ -19309,15 +19442,17 @@
* dvipdfmx command: Output files. (line 10)
* dvips command: Output files. (line 10)
* dvitype command: Output files. (line 10)
-* e-dash: Text symbols. (line 125)
+* e-dash: Text symbols. (line 133)
* e-TeX: TeX engines. (line 16)
* ellipses: Dots. (line 6)
* ellipsis: Text symbols. (line 39)
+* ellipsis, in Unicode (U+2026): Dots. (line 66)
+* ellipsis, traditional (three periods): Dots. (line 66)
* em: Units of length. (line 46)
* em <1>: Units of length. (line 45)
-* em-dash: Text symbols. (line 119)
-* em-dash, three-quarters: Text symbols. (line 201)
-* em-dash, two-thirds: Text symbols. (line 207)
+* em-dash: Text symbols. (line 127)
+* em-dash, three-quarters: Text symbols. (line 209)
+* em-dash, two-thirds: Text symbols. (line 215)
* emphasis: Font styles. (line 60)
* enclosure list: \encl. (line 6)
* encoding, font: \DeclareFontEncoding.
@@ -19403,12 +19538,12 @@
(line 20)
* etoolbox package: Class and package commands.
(line 110)
-* euro symbol: Text symbols. (line 128)
-* eurosym package: Text symbols. (line 128)
-* eurosym package <1>: Text symbols. (line 129)
+* euro symbol: Text symbols. (line 136)
+* eurosym package: Text symbols. (line 136)
+* eurosym package <1>: Text symbols. (line 137)
* ex: Units of length. (line 42)
* ex <1>: Units of length. (line 41)
-* exclamation point, upside-down: Text symbols. (line 136)
+* exclamation point, upside-down: Text symbols. (line 144)
* executivepaper option: Document class options.
(line 19)
* expl3 package: LaTeX command syntax.
@@ -19429,9 +19564,9 @@
* fancyhdr package <1>: \pagestyle. (line 13)
* fancyvrb package: tabbing. (line 146)
* fancyvrb package <1>: verbatim. (line 41)
-* feminine ordinal symbol: Text symbols. (line 167)
+* feminine ordinal symbol: Text symbols. (line 175)
* figure counter: Counters. (line 15)
-* figure dash character: Text symbols. (line 139)
+* figure dash character: Text symbols. (line 147)
* figure environment: figure. (line 6)
* figure number, cross referencing: \ref. (line 6)
* figures, footnotes in: minipage. (line 107)
@@ -19480,6 +19615,7 @@
* fonts, new commands for: \newfont. (line 6)
* fonts, script: Calligraphic. (line 6)
* fontspec package: fontenc package. (line 17)
+* fontspec package <1>: OpenType bold math. (line 6)
* footer style: \pagestyle. (line 6)
* footer, parameters for: Page layout parameters.
(line 6)
@@ -19544,7 +19680,7 @@
* graphpap package: \graphpaper. (line 11)
* grave accent: Accents. (line 44)
* grave accent, math: Math accents. (line 29)
-* greater than symbol, in text: Text symbols. (line 146)
+* greater than symbol, in text: Text symbols. (line 154)
* greek letters: Math symbols. (line 6)
* Greek letters: Greek letters. (line 6)
* grfext package: \DeclareGraphicsExtensions.
@@ -19562,7 +19698,7 @@
* hello, world: Starting and ending. (line 6)
* here, putting floats: Floats. (line 52)
* home page for manual: About this document. (line 6)
-* horizontal bar character: Text symbols. (line 149)
+* horizontal bar character: Text symbols. (line 157)
* horizontal paragraph indentation: \parindent & \parskip.
(line 6)
* horizontal space: \hss. (line 6)
@@ -19572,10 +19708,10 @@
* hungarian umlaut accent: Accents. (line 69)
* hyperref package: \footnotemark. (line 48)
* hyperref package <1>: \footnotemark. (line 57)
-* hyperref package <2>: \pagenumbering. (line 45)
+* hyperref package <2>: \pagenumbering. (line 46)
* hyperref package <3>: \contentsline. (line 37)
* hyperref package <4>: Command line input. (line 14)
-* hyphen character, non-breaking: Text symbols. (line 160)
+* hyphen character, non-breaking: Text symbols. (line 168)
* hyphenation, defining: \hyphenation. (line 6)
* hyphenation, discretionary: \discretionary. (line 6)
* hyphenation, forcing: \- (hyphenation). (line 6)
@@ -19606,7 +19742,7 @@
* indent_length: makeindex. (line 137)
* indent_space: makeindex. (line 133)
* index entries, subentries: \index. (line 26)
-* index entries, 'see' and 'see also': \index. (line 58)
+* index entries, ‘see’ and ‘see also’: \index. (line 58)
* index entry: \index. (line 6)
* index package: \index. (line 103)
* index, multiple: Indexes. (line 51)
@@ -19685,11 +19821,11 @@
* leading: \baselineskip & \baselinestretch.
(line 6)
* left angle quotation marks: Text symbols. (line 33)
-* left arrow, in text: Text symbols. (line 157)
-* left brace, in text: Text symbols. (line 89)
-* left quote: Text symbols. (line 43)
-* left quote, double: Text symbols. (line 176)
-* left quote, single: Text symbols. (line 182)
+* left arrow, in text: Text symbols. (line 165)
+* left brace, in text: Text symbols. (line 95)
+* left quote: Text symbols. (line 44)
+* left quote, double: Text symbols. (line 184)
+* left quote, single: Text symbols. (line 190)
* left-hand equation numbers: Document class options.
(line 63)
* left-justifying text: \raggedright. (line 6)
@@ -19703,7 +19839,7 @@
* lengths, setting: \setlength. (line 6)
* leqno option: Document class options.
(line 49)
-* less than symbol, in text: Text symbols. (line 154)
+* less than symbol, in text: Text symbols. (line 162)
* lethead_flag: makeindex. (line 65)
* lethead_prefix: makeindex. (line 74)
* lethead_suffix: makeindex. (line 78)
@@ -19747,10 +19883,10 @@
* log file, writing to: \write. (line 30)
* logo, LaTeX: Text symbols. (line 24)
* logo, LaTeX2e: Text symbols. (line 27)
-* logo, TeX: Text symbols. (line 65)
+* logo, TeX: Text symbols. (line 66)
* long command: Class and package commands.
(line 23)
-* low-9 quotation marks, single and double: Text symbols. (line 55)
+* low-9 quotation marks, single and double: Text symbols. (line 56)
* low-level font commands: Low-level font commands.
(line 6)
* lowercase: Upper and lower case.
@@ -19780,7 +19916,7 @@
* making a title page: titlepage. (line 6)
* making paragraphs: Making paragraphs. (line 6)
* marginal notes: Marginal notes. (line 6)
-* masculine ordinal symbol: Text symbols. (line 167)
+* masculine ordinal symbol: Text symbols. (line 175)
* matching brackets: \left & \right. (line 6)
* matching parentheses: \left & \right. (line 6)
* math accents: Math accents. (line 6)
@@ -19801,6 +19937,8 @@
* math symbols: Math symbols. (line 6)
* math, arrows: Arrows. (line 6)
* math, bold: Font styles. (line 129)
+* mathematics, boldface: \boldmath & \unboldmath.
+ (line 6)
* mathtools package: Math formulas. (line 61)
* mathtools package <1>: Delimiters. (line 41)
* mathtools package <2>: \left & \right. (line 30)
@@ -19841,7 +19979,7 @@
(line 106)
* new class commands: Class and package construction.
(line 6)
-* new command, check: Class and package commands.
+* new command, checking: Class and package commands.
(line 21)
* new command, definition: Class and package commands.
(line 96)
@@ -19855,7 +19993,7 @@
* new page, starting: \newpage. (line 6)
* newline, in \write: \write. (line 94)
* noheader option for filecontents: filecontents. (line 34)
-* non-breaking hyphen character: Text symbols. (line 160)
+* non-breaking hyphen character: Text symbols. (line 168)
* non-English characters: Additional Latin letters.
(line 6)
* nonstopmode: Command line options.
@@ -19882,11 +20020,13 @@
(line 78)
* openbib option: Document class options.
(line 49)
-* opening quote: Text symbols. (line 43)
+* opening quote: Text symbols. (line 44)
* openright option: Document class options.
(line 78)
* OpenType fonts: TeX engines. (line 6)
* operating system information: \write18. (line 65)
+* optional arguments, defining and using: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
+ (line 49)
* options, class: Class and package commands.
(line 66)
* options, color package: Color package options.
@@ -19904,7 +20044,7 @@
(line 6)
* options, package <1>: Class and package commands.
(line 66)
-* ordinals, feminine and masculine: Text symbols. (line 167)
+* ordinals, feminine and masculine: Text symbols. (line 175)
* oslash: Additional Latin letters.
(line 44)
* OT1: fontenc package. (line 6)
@@ -19937,7 +20077,7 @@
* package, amsmath <5>: Math formulas. (line 61)
* package, amsmath <6>: \left & \right. (line 30)
* package, amsmath <7>: \bigl & \bigr etc.. (line 67)
-* package, amsmath <8>: Dots. (line 36)
+* package, amsmath <8>: Dots. (line 38)
* package, amsmath <9>: Math functions. (line 111)
* package, amsmath <10>: Spacing in math mode.
(line 23)
@@ -19952,11 +20092,11 @@
* package, amsthm: theorem. (line 28)
* package, amsthm <1>: \rule. (line 18)
* package, answers: \write. (line 99)
-* package, appendix: \appendix. (line 29)
+* package, appendix: \appendix. (line 30)
* package, array: array. (line 74)
* package, Asymptote: \line. (line 35)
* package, Asymptote <1>: \strut. (line 62)
-* package, Asymptote <2>: \mbox & \makebox. (line 74)
+* package, Asymptote <2>: \mbox & \makebox. (line 73)
* package, Asymptote <3>: \write18. (line 13)
* package, babel: \chapter. (line 71)
* package, babel <1>: thebibliography. (line 53)
@@ -19968,8 +20108,7 @@
* package, beamer: beamer template. (line 6)
* package, bigfoot: Footnotes of footnotes.
(line 6)
-* package, bm: \boldmath & \unboldmath.
- (line 32)
+* package, bm: bm. (line 6)
* package, caption: \caption. (line 72)
* package, cleveref: Cross references. (line 38)
* package, cleveref <1>: \ref. (line 29)
@@ -19986,8 +20125,8 @@
* package, envlab: \makelabels. (line 55)
* package, etoolbox: Class and package commands.
(line 110)
-* package, eurosym: Text symbols. (line 128)
-* package, eurosym <1>: Text symbols. (line 129)
+* package, eurosym: Text symbols. (line 136)
+* package, eurosym <1>: Text symbols. (line 137)
* package, expl3: LaTeX command syntax.
(line 35)
* package, expl3 <1>: Upper and lower case.
@@ -19999,6 +20138,7 @@
* package, flafter: Floats. (line 82)
* package, float: Floats. (line 52)
* package, fontspec: fontenc package. (line 17)
+* package, fontspec <1>: OpenType bold math. (line 6)
* package, geometry: Document class options.
(line 40)
* package, geometry <1>: Document class options.
@@ -20008,7 +20148,7 @@
(line 39)
* package, hyperref: \footnotemark. (line 48)
* package, hyperref <1>: \footnotemark. (line 57)
-* package, hyperref <2>: \pagenumbering. (line 45)
+* package, hyperref <2>: \pagenumbering. (line 46)
* package, hyperref <3>: \contentsline. (line 37)
* package, hyperref <4>: Command line input. (line 14)
* package, indentfirst: \part. (line 50)
@@ -20048,11 +20188,11 @@
* package, polyglossia: Accents. (line 6)
* package, polyglossia <1>: \today. (line 13)
* package, polyglossia <2>: Table of contents etc..
- (line 124)
+ (line 123)
* package, polyglossia <3>: \index. (line 58)
* package, PSTricks: \line. (line 35)
* package, setspace: \baselineskip & \baselinestretch.
- (line 79)
+ (line 80)
* package, shellesc: \write18. (line 71)
* package, showidx: Indexes. (line 51)
* package, siunitx: minipage. (line 137)
@@ -20063,6 +20203,7 @@
* package, texosquery: \write18. (line 65)
* package, textcase: Upper and lower case.
(line 42)
+* package, textcomp: Text symbols. (line 6)
* package, TikZ: \line. (line 35)
* package, TikZ <1>: \strut. (line 62)
* package, TikZ <2>: \mbox & \makebox. (line 73)
@@ -20081,7 +20222,9 @@
* package, tocloft <1>: \contentsline. (line 34)
* package, ulem: Over- and Underlining.
(line 15)
-* package, unicode-math: Greek letters. (line 37)
+* package, unicode-math: OpenType bold math. (line 20)
+* package, unicode-math <1>: Dots. (line 59)
+* package, unicode-math <2>: Greek letters. (line 37)
* package, url: \verb. (line 39)
* package, verbatimbox: verbatim. (line 41)
* package, xparse: LaTeX command syntax.
@@ -20119,7 +20262,7 @@
(line 6)
* paragraph mode: Modes. (line 12)
* paragraph mode <1>: \parbox. (line 6)
-* paragraph symbol: Text symbols. (line 47)
+* paragraph symbol: Text symbols. (line 48)
* paragraph, ending: \par. (line 6)
* paragraph, in a box: \parbox. (line 6)
* paragraphs: Making paragraphs. (line 6)
@@ -20126,6 +20269,8 @@
* parameters, for footnotes: \footnote. (line 34)
* parameters, page layout: Page layout parameters.
(line 6)
+* parameters, substituting: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
+ (line 81)
* parent directories, cannot write to: \write and security. (line 22)
* parentheses: Delimiters. (line 6)
* part: Sectioning. (line 6)
@@ -20140,7 +20285,7 @@
* pdfTeX: Output files. (line 20)
* pdfTeX engine: TeX engines. (line 16)
* period, abbreviation-ending: \@. (line 6)
-* period, centered, in text: Text symbols. (line 170)
+* period, centered, in text: Text symbols. (line 178)
* period, sentence-ending: \@. (line 6)
* period, spacing after: \@. (line 6)
* pica: Units of length. (line 14)
@@ -20147,7 +20292,7 @@
* pict2e package: \line. (line 35)
* picture environment: picture. (line 6)
* pictures, creating: picture. (line 6)
-* pilcrow: Text symbols. (line 47)
+* pilcrow: Text symbols. (line 48)
* placement of floats: Floats. (line 31)
* platex: TeX engines. (line 54)
* platex-dev: TeX engines. (line 67)
@@ -20160,17 +20305,15 @@
* polyglossia package: Accents. (line 6)
* polyglossia package <1>: \today. (line 13)
* polyglossia package <2>: Table of contents etc..
- (line 124)
+ (line 123)
* polyglossia package <3>: \index. (line 58)
* portrait orientation: Document class options.
(line 60)
* position, in picture: picture. (line 64)
-* positional parameter: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
- (line 54)
* postamble: makeindex. (line 54)
* PostScript point: Units of length. (line 20)
* postscript, in letters: \ps. (line 6)
-* pounds symbol: Text symbols. (line 51)
+* pounds symbol: Text symbols. (line 52)
* preamble: makeindex. (line 50)
* preamble, defined: Starting and ending. (line 22)
* prerelease testing: TeX engines. (line 70)
@@ -20181,12 +20324,12 @@
* pt: Units of length. (line 9)
* quad: Spacing in math mode.
(line 69)
-* question mark, upside-down: Text symbols. (line 173)
+* question mark, upside-down: Text symbols. (line 181)
* quotation environment: quotation & quote. (line 6)
* quotation marks, French: Text symbols. (line 33)
* quote environment: quotation & quote. (line 6)
-* quote, single straight: Text symbols. (line 188)
-* quote, straight base: Text symbols. (line 192)
+* quote, single straight: Text symbols. (line 196)
+* quote, straight base: Text symbols. (line 200)
* quoted text with paragraph indentation, displaying: quotation & quote.
(line 6)
* quoted text without paragraph indentation, displaying: quotation & quote.
@@ -20197,11 +20340,13 @@
* ragged right text: \raggedright. (line 6)
* ragged right text, environment for: flushleft. (line 6)
* read a file: \read. (line 6)
+* redefining a command: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
+ (line 6)
* redefining environments: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment.
(line 6)
* reference, forward: Cross references. (line 27)
* references, resolving forward: Output files. (line 33)
-* registered symbol: Text symbols. (line 195)
+* registered symbol: Text symbols. (line 203)
* relation, text above: \stackrel. (line 6)
* release candidates: TeX engines. (line 70)
* remarks in the margin: Marginal notes. (line 6)
@@ -20212,11 +20357,11 @@
* resizing <1>: \resizebox. (line 6)
* restricted shell access: \write18. (line 53)
* right angle quotation marks: Text symbols. (line 33)
-* right arrow, in text: Text symbols. (line 198)
-* right brace, in text: Text symbols. (line 92)
-* right quote: Text symbols. (line 58)
-* right quote, double: Text symbols. (line 179)
-* right quote, single: Text symbols. (line 185)
+* right arrow, in text: Text symbols. (line 206)
+* right brace, in text: Text symbols. (line 99)
+* right quote: Text symbols. (line 59)
+* right quote, double: Text symbols. (line 187)
+* right quote, single: Text symbols. (line 193)
* right-hand equation numbers: Document class options.
(line 63)
* right-justifying text: \raggedleft. (line 6)
@@ -20250,14 +20395,14 @@
* scriptscript style: Math styles. (line 26)
* scrollmode: Command line options.
(line 27)
-* secnumdepth: Sectioning. (line 69)
-* secnumdepth counter: Sectioning. (line 70)
+* secnumdepth: Sectioning. (line 70)
+* secnumdepth counter: Sectioning. (line 71)
* section: Sectioning. (line 6)
* section <1>: \section. (line 6)
* section counter: Counters. (line 15)
* section number, cross referencing: \ref. (line 6)
-* section numbers, printing: Sectioning. (line 70)
-* section symbol: Text symbols. (line 62)
+* section numbers, printing: Sectioning. (line 71)
+* section symbol: Text symbols. (line 63)
* section, redefining: \@startsection. (line 6)
* sectioning commands: Sectioning. (line 6)
* sectioning, part: \part. (line 6)
@@ -20267,7 +20412,7 @@
* series, of fonts: Low-level font commands.
(line 48)
* setspace package: \baselineskip & \baselinestretch.
- (line 79)
+ (line 80)
* setting counters: \setcounter. (line 6)
* sh, used by \write18: \write18. (line 60)
* shapes, of fonts: Low-level font commands.
@@ -20283,10 +20428,10 @@
* simulating typed text: verbatim. (line 6)
* single angle quotation marks: Text symbols. (line 33)
* single guillemets: Text symbols. (line 33)
-* single left quote: Text symbols. (line 182)
-* single low-9 quotation mark: Text symbols. (line 55)
-* single quote, straight: Text symbols. (line 188)
-* single right quote: Text symbols. (line 185)
+* single left quote: Text symbols. (line 190)
+* single low-9 quotation mark: Text symbols. (line 56)
+* single quote, straight: Text symbols. (line 196)
+* single right quote: Text symbols. (line 193)
* siunitx package: minipage. (line 137)
* siunitx package <1>: ~. (line 42)
* sizes of text: Font sizes. (line 6)
@@ -20323,7 +20468,7 @@
* spacing, math mode: \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom.
(line 6)
* spacing, math mode <1>: \mathstrut. (line 6)
-* Spanish ordinals, feminine and masculine: Text symbols. (line 167)
+* Spanish ordinals, feminine and masculine: Text symbols. (line 175)
* special characters: Reserved characters. (line 6)
* special characters <1>: Additional Latin letters.
(line 6)
@@ -20334,7 +20479,7 @@
* stack math: \stackrel. (line 6)
* star-variants, commands: \@ifstar. (line 6)
* starred form, defining new commands: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
- (line 27)
+ (line 28)
* starting a new page: \newpage. (line 6)
* starting a new page and clearing floats: \clearpage & \cleardoublepage.
(line 6)
@@ -20341,10 +20486,10 @@
* starting and ending: Starting and ending. (line 6)
* starting on a right-hand page: \clearpage & \cleardoublepage.
(line 6)
-* sterling symbol: Text symbols. (line 51)
-* straight double quote, base: Text symbols. (line 192)
-* straight quote, base: Text symbols. (line 192)
-* straight single quote: Text symbols. (line 188)
+* sterling symbol: Text symbols. (line 52)
+* straight double quote, base: Text symbols. (line 200)
+* straight quote, base: Text symbols. (line 200)
+* straight single quote: Text symbols. (line 196)
* stretch, infinite horizontal: \hfill. (line 6)
* stretch, infinite vertical: \vfill. (line 6)
* stretch, omitting vertical: \raggedbottom. (line 6)
@@ -20372,8 +20517,7 @@
* symbol: \newglossaryentry. (line 59)
* symbol, defining: \DeclareTextSymbol. (line 6)
* symbols, arrows: Arrows. (line 6)
-* symbols, boldface: \boldmath & \unboldmath.
- (line 6)
+* symbols, boldface: bm. (line 6)
* symbols, math: Math symbols. (line 6)
* symbols, text: Text symbols. (line 6)
* system commands, run from LaTeX: \write18. (line 6)
@@ -20392,7 +20536,7 @@
(line 6)
* table of contents, creating: Table of contents etc..
(line 6)
-* table of contents, sectioning numbers printed: Sectioning. (line 81)
+* table of contents, sectioning numbers printed: Sectioning. (line 82)
* tablefootnote package: Footnotes in a table.
(line 53)
* tables, creating: table. (line 6)
@@ -20406,7 +20550,7 @@
* terminal input/output: Input/output. (line 6)
* terminal, writing to: \write. (line 30)
* TeX format (.fmt) files: TeX engines. (line 6)
-* TeX logo: Text symbols. (line 65)
+* TeX logo: Text symbols. (line 66)
* texosquery package: \write18. (line 65)
* texput, jobname default: Jobname. (line 27)
* text style: Math styles. (line 21)
@@ -20438,7 +20582,7 @@
(line 6)
* thorn, Icelandic letter: Additional Latin letters.
(line 56)
-* three-quarters em-dash: Text symbols. (line 201)
+* three-quarters em-dash: Text symbols. (line 209)
* tie: ~. (line 6)
* tie-after accent: Accents. (line 83)
* TikZ package: \line. (line 35)
@@ -20447,7 +20591,7 @@
* tikz-cd package: Arrows. (line 41)
* tilde accent: Accents. (line 48)
* tilde accent, math: Math accents. (line 38)
-* tilde, ASCII, in text: Text symbols. (line 71)
+* tilde, ASCII, in text: Text symbols. (line 72)
* title page, separate or run-in: Document class options.
(line 71)
* title pages, creating: titlepage. (line 6)
@@ -20465,12 +20609,12 @@
(line 63)
* tocbibbind package: Table of contents etc..
(line 110)
-* tocdepth: Sectioning. (line 80)
-* tocdepth counter: Sectioning. (line 81)
+* tocdepth: Sectioning. (line 81)
+* tocdepth counter: Sectioning. (line 82)
* tocloft package: Table of contents etc..
(line 110)
* tocloft package <1>: \contentsline. (line 34)
-* today's date: \today. (line 6)
+* today’s date: \today. (line 6)
* tombstone: \rule. (line 13)
* topmargin: Page layout parameters.
(line 125)
@@ -20478,12 +20622,12 @@
* topnumber <1>: Floats. (line 139)
* totalnumber: Floats. (line 142)
* totalnumber <1>: Floats. (line 143)
-* trademark symbol: Text symbols. (line 204)
+* trademark symbol: Text symbols. (line 212)
* transcript file: Output files. (line 28)
* TrueType fonts: TeX engines. (line 6)
* TS1 encoding: Text symbols. (line 6)
* two-column output: \twocolumn. (line 6)
-* two-thirds em-dash: Text symbols. (line 207)
+* two-thirds em-dash: Text symbols. (line 215)
* twocolumn option: Document class options.
(line 78)
* twoside option: Document class options.
@@ -20501,10 +20645,12 @@
* underbar: Accents. (line 53)
* underlining: Over- and Underlining.
(line 6)
-* underscore, in text: Text symbols. (line 210)
+* underscore, in text: Text symbols. (line 218)
* Unicode: inputenc package. (line 15)
* Unicode input, native: TeX engines. (line 6)
-* unicode-math package: Greek letters. (line 37)
+* unicode-math package: OpenType bold math. (line 20)
+* unicode-math package <1>: Dots. (line 59)
+* unicode-math package <2>: Greek letters. (line 37)
* units, of length: Units of length. (line 6)
* unofficial nature of this manual: About this document. (line 20)
* unordered lists: itemize. (line 6)
@@ -20524,8 +20670,8 @@
* verbatim text, inline: \verb. (line 6)
* verbatimbox package: verbatim. (line 41)
* verse environment: verse. (line 6)
-* vertical bar, double, in text: Text symbols. (line 83)
-* vertical bar, in text: Text symbols. (line 80)
+* vertical bar, double, in text: Text symbols. (line 89)
+* vertical bar, in text: Text symbols. (line 86)
* vertical mode: Modes. (line 36)
* vertical space: \vspace. (line 6)
* vertical space <1>: \addvspace. (line 6)
@@ -20536,7 +20682,7 @@
* vertical spacing <1>: \mathstrut. (line 6)
* vertical spacing, math mode: \smash. (line 6)
* visible space: \verb. (line 31)
-* visible space symbol, in text: Text symbols. (line 213)
+* visible space symbol, in text: Text symbols. (line 221)
* weights, of fonts: Low-level font commands.
(line 58)
* whatsit item: \write. (line 65)
@@ -20568,549 +20714,635 @@
Tag Table:
-Node: Top1861
-Node: About this document3668
-Node: Overview5406
-Node: Starting and ending7186
-Ref: Starting & ending7321
-Node: Output files8498
-Ref: output files dvi8777
-Ref: output files pdf9289
-Ref: output files log9614
-Ref: output files aux9811
-Node: TeX engines10780
-Ref: tex engines latex11316
-Ref: tex engines lualatex12151
-Ref: tex engines xelatex12612
-Node: LaTeX command syntax14572
-Node: Environment16499
-Node: CTAN17726
-Node: Document classes19182
-Ref: document classes article19622
-Ref: document classes book19710
-Ref: document classes letter19895
-Ref: document classes report19971
-Ref: document classes slides20123
-Node: Document class options20576
-Node: Additional packages23658
-Node: Class and package construction24289
-Node: Class and package structure25739
-Node: Class and package commands28034
-Node: Fonts45639
-Ref: Typefaces45742
-Node: fontenc package47704
-Node: \DeclareFontEncoding51956
-Node: \DeclareTextAccent53376
-Node: \DeclareTextAccentDefault54295
-Node: \DeclareTextCommand & \ProvideTextCommand55370
-Node: \DeclareTextCommandDefault & \ProvideTextCommandDefault57622
-Node: \DeclareTextComposite58934
-Node: \DeclareTextCompositeCommand60019
-Node: \DeclareTextSymbol60701
-Node: \DeclareTextSymbolDefault61810
-Node: \LastDeclaredEncoding62770
-Node: \UseTextSymbol & \UseTextAccent63394
-Node: Font styles64604
-Node: Font sizes68834
-Node: Low-level font commands71713
-Ref: low level font commands fontencoding71997
-Ref: low level font commands fontfamily72553
-Ref: low level font commands fontseries73316
-Ref: low level font commands fontshape74448
-Ref: low level font commands fontsize74765
-Ref: low level font commands linespread75342
-Ref: low level font commands selectfont75623
-Ref: low level font commands usefont75949
-Node: Layout76192
-Node: \onecolumn76758
-Node: \twocolumn77117
-Ref: twocolumn columnsep77740
-Ref: twocolumn columnseprule77984
-Ref: twocolumn columnwidth78284
-Ref: twocolumn dbltopfraction78867
-Ref: twocolumn dblfloatpagefraction79833
-Ref: twocolumn dblfloatsep80071
-Ref: twocolumn dbltextfloatsep80380
-Ref: twocolumn dbltopnumber80560
-Node: \flushbottom81509
-Node: \raggedbottom82609
-Node: Page layout parameters83145
-Ref: page layout parameters columnsep83374
-Ref: page layout parameters columnseprule83374
-Ref: page layout parameters columnwidth83374
-Ref: page layout parameters headheight83628
-Ref: page layout parameters headsep83795
-Ref: page layout parameters footskip84107
-Ref: page layout parameters linewidth84441
-Ref: page layout parameters marginparpush84794
-Ref: page layout parameters marginsep84794
-Ref: page layout parameters marginparwidth84794
-Ref: page layout parameters oddsidemargin85834
-Ref: page layout parameters evensidemargin85834
-Ref: page layout parameters paperheight86379
-Ref: page layout parameters paperwidth86605
-Ref: page layout parameters textheight86829
-Ref: page layout parameters textwidth87218
-Ref: page layout parameters hsize88156
-Ref: page layout parameters topmargin88353
-Ref: page layout parameters topskip88657
-Node: \baselineskip & \baselinestretch88873
-Node: Floats94043
-Ref: floats bottomfraction98381
-Ref: floats floatpagefraction98508
-Ref: floats textfraction98619
-Ref: floats topfraction98821
-Ref: floats floatsep99073
-Ref: floats intextsep99183
-Ref: floats textfloatsep99398
-Ref: floats bottomnumber99662
-Ref: floats dbltopnumber99770
-Ref: floats topnumber99889
-Ref: floats totalnumber99993
-Node: \caption100610
-Node: Sectioning103336
-Ref: sectioning secnumdepth106445
-Ref: Sectioning/secnumdepth106445
-Ref: sectioning tocdepth107071
-Ref: Sectioning/tocdepth107071
-Node: \part108111
-Node: \chapter110283
-Node: \section114056
-Node: \subsection117323
-Node: \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph120037
-Node: \appendix122694
-Node: \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter123987
-Node: \@startsection125396
-Ref: startsection name126885
-Ref: \@startsection/name126885
-Ref: startsection level127339
-Ref: \@startsection/level127339
-Ref: startsection indent128220
-Ref: \@startsection/indent128220
-Ref: startsection beforeskip128483
-Ref: \@startsection/beforeskip128483
-Ref: startsection afterskip130004
-Ref: \@startsection/afterskip130004
-Ref: startsection style131315
-Ref: \@startsection/style131315
-Node: Cross references135016
-Node: \label137165
-Node: \pageref138985
-Node: \ref139775
-Node: xr package140770
-Node: Environments142591
-Node: abstract144593
-Node: array146182
-Node: center149095
-Node: \centering150848
-Node: description152345
-Node: displaymath154562
-Node: document156258
-Node: \AtBeginDocument156688
-Node: \AtEndDocument157312
-Node: enumerate157956
-Ref: enumerate enumi159819
-Ref: enumerate enumii159819
-Ref: enumerate enumiii159819
-Ref: enumerate enumiv159819
-Ref: enumerate labelenumi160217
-Ref: enumerate labelenumii160217
-Ref: enumerate labelenumiii160217
-Ref: enumerate labelenumiv160217
-Node: eqnarray160756
-Node: equation162752
-Node: figure163420
-Node: filecontents165593
-Node: flushleft167502
-Node: \raggedright168529
-Node: flushright169727
-Node: \raggedleft170551
-Node: itemize171422
-Ref: itemize labelitemi172970
-Ref: itemize labelitemii172970
-Ref: itemize labelitemiii172970
-Ref: itemize labelitemiv172970
-Ref: itemize leftmargin173629
-Ref: itemize leftmargini173629
-Ref: itemize leftmarginii173629
-Ref: itemize leftmarginiii173629
-Ref: itemize leftmarginiv173629
-Ref: itemize leftmarginv173629
-Ref: itemize leftmarginvi173629
-Node: letter175111
-Node: list175349
-Ref: list makelabel177796
-Ref: list itemindent179181
-Ref: list itemsep179318
-Ref: list labelsep179971
-Ref: list labelwidth180134
-Ref: list leftmargin181145
-Ref: list listparindent181998
-Ref: list parsep182229
-Ref: list partopsep182697
-Ref: list rightmargin183495
-Ref: list topsep183680
-Ref: list beginparpenalty187256
-Ref: list itempenalty187355
-Ref: list endparpenalty187459
-Node: \item188330
-Node: trivlist189576
-Node: math191104
-Node: minipage191410
-Node: picture197007
-Node: \put203237
-Node: \multiput203802
-Node: \qbezier204541
-Node: \graphpaper206014
-Node: \line206808
-Node: \linethickness208782
-Node: \thinlines209247
-Node: \thicklines209658
-Node: \circle210043
-Node: \oval210585
-Node: \shortstack211600
-Node: \vector213298
-Node: \makebox (picture)214212
-Node: \framebox (picture)215394
-Node: \frame216867
-Node: \dashbox217307
-Node: quotation & quote218442
-Node: tabbing219338
-Node: table225241
-Node: tabular227324
-Ref: tabular arrayrulewidth233661
-Ref: tabular arraystrech233901
-Ref: tabular doublerulesep234122
-Ref: tabular tabcolsep234258
-Node: \multicolumn234779
-Node: \vline238656
-Node: \cline240047
-Node: \hline240757
-Node: thebibliography241439
-Node: \bibitem243922
-Node: \cite246224
-Node: \nocite248092
-Node: Using BibTeX248600
-Node: BibTeX error messages250980
-Node: theorem251885
-Node: titlepage252807
-Node: verbatim254090
-Node: \verb255903
-Node: verse257996
-Node: Line breaking259223
-Node: \\260589
-Node: \obeycr & \restorecr263019
-Node: \newline263830
-Node: \- (hyphenation)264871
-Node: \discretionary266511
-Node: \fussy & \sloppy267402
-Node: sloppypar268217
-Node: \hyphenation269363
-Node: \linebreak & \nolinebreak269983
-Node: Page breaking271163
-Node: \clearpage & \cleardoublepage273193
-Node: \newpage274713
-Node: \enlargethispage276011
-Node: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak276967
-Node: Footnotes278938
-Node: \footnote280084
-Ref: footnote footnoterule281352
-Ref: footnote footnotesep281963
-Node: \footnotemark283029
-Node: \footnotetext285386
-Node: Footnotes in section headings285988
-Node: Footnotes in a table286821
-Node: Footnotes of footnotes289752
-Node: Definitions290450
-Node: \newcommand & \renewcommand291497
-Node: Control sequences296932
-Node: \providecommand298286
-Node: \makeatletter & \makeatother299449
-Node: \@ifstar301551
-Node: \newcounter305036
-Node: \newlength306756
-Node: \newsavebox307679
-Node: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment308658
-Node: \newtheorem313982
-Node: \newfont317554
-Node: \protect318787
-Node: \ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterend321175
-Node: xspace package323925
-Node: Counters326124
-Node: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol327825
-Node: \usecounter330460
-Node: \value331319
-Node: \setcounter332372
-Node: \addtocounter332968
-Node: \refstepcounter333422
-Node: \stepcounter334091
-Node: \day & \month & \year334644
-Node: Lengths335553
-Node: Units of length340131
-Ref: units of length pt340334
-Ref: units of length pc340451
-Ref: units of length in340474
-Ref: units of length bp340500
-Ref: units of length mm340631
-Ref: units of length cm340663
-Ref: units of length dd340692
-Ref: units of length cc340724
-Ref: units of length sp340749
-Ref: Lengths/ex340891
-Ref: units of length ex340891
-Ref: Lengths/em341034
-Ref: units of length em341034
-Ref: units of length mu341375
-Node: \setlength341904
-Node: \addtolength343016
-Node: \settodepth344439
-Node: \settoheight345427
-Node: \settowidth346425
-Node: \stretch347430
-Node: Expressions348632
-Node: Making paragraphs353446
-Node: \par355761
-Node: \indent & \noindent357807
-Node: \parindent & \parskip359342
-Node: Marginal notes360671
-Ref: marginal notes marginparpush362067
-Ref: marginal notes marginparsep362241
-Ref: marginal notes marginparwidth362373
-Node: Math formulas362722
-Node: Subscripts & superscripts365770
-Node: Math symbols367931
-Node: Arrows391702
-Node: \boldmath & \unboldmath392890
-Node: Blackboard bold394409
-Node: Calligraphic395211
-Node: Delimiters395742
-Node: \left & \right397929
-Node: \bigl & \bigr etc.401966
-Node: Dots404736
-Ref: ellipses cdots405167
-Ref: ellipses ddots405312
-Ref: ellipses ldots405393
-Ref: ellipses vdots405810
-Node: Greek letters406994
-Node: Math functions408673
-Node: Math accents410317
-Node: Over- and Underlining411216
-Node: Spacing in math mode413043
-Ref: spacing in math mode thickspace413974
-Ref: spacing in math mode medspace414425
-Ref: Spacing in math mode/\thinspace414881
-Ref: spacing in math mode thinspace414881
-Ref: spacing in math mode negthinspace415362
-Ref: spacing in math mode quad415735
-Ref: spacing in math mode qquad415991
-Node: \smash416329
-Node: \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom418546
-Node: \mathstrut421120
-Node: Math styles422082
-Node: Math miscellany424816
-Node: Colon character & \colon425313
-Node: \*426006
-Node: \frac426586
-Node: \sqrt426957
-Node: \stackrel427543
-Node: Modes427816
-Ref: modes paragraph mode428266
-Ref: modes lr mode428578
-Ref: modes math mode429184
-Ref: modes vertical mode429519
-Ref: modes internal vertical mode429737
-Ref: modes inner paragraph mode430260
-Ref: modes outer paragraph mode430260
-Node: \ensuremath430674
-Node: Page styles431379
-Node: \maketitle432142
-Node: \pagenumbering435160
-Node: \pagestyle437147
-Node: \thispagestyle440655
-Node: Spaces441609
-Node: \enspace & \quad & \qquad442929
-Node: \hspace443844
-Node: \hfill445701
-Node: \hss446765
-Node: \spacefactor447459
-Node: \@450866
-Ref: \AT450986
-Node: \frenchspacing & \nonfrenchspacing452926
-Ref: \frenchspacing453044
-Node: \normalsfcodes453846
-Node: \(SPACE)454114
-Ref: Leading blanks456054
-Node: ~456367
-Node: \thinspace & \negthinspace459177
-Node: \/460375
-Node: \hrulefill & \dotfill462333
-Node: \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip463693
-Ref: bigskip464511
-Ref: medskip464715
-Ref: smallskip464924
-Node: \bigbreak & \medbreak & \smallbreak465585
-Node: \strut466571
-Node: \vspace469808
-Node: \vfill471369
-Node: \addvspace472297
-Node: Boxes474343
-Node: \mbox & \makebox475049
-Ref: mbox makebox depth476317
-Ref: mbox makebox height476317
-Ref: mbox makebox width476317
-Ref: mbox makebox totalheight476317
-Node: \fbox & \framebox478412
-Ref: fbox framebox fboxrule479719
-Ref: fbox framebox fboxsep479909
-Node: \parbox481011
-Node: \raisebox483317
-Ref: raisebox depth484290
-Ref: raisebox height484290
-Ref: raisebox width484290
-Ref: raisebox totalheight484290
-Node: \sbox & \savebox484991
-Node: lrbox488077
-Node: \usebox488963
-Node: Color489402
-Node: Color package options490201
-Node: Color models491847
-Ref: color models cmyk492644
-Ref: color models gray493007
-Ref: color models rgb493156
-Ref: color models RGB493493
-Ref: color models named493868
-Node: Commands for color494156
-Node: Define colors494571
-Node: Colored text495296
-Node: Colored boxes497693
-Node: Colored pages499082
-Node: Graphics499775
-Node: Graphics package options501901
-Node: Graphics package configuration504654
-Node: \graphicspath505456
-Node: \DeclareGraphicsExtensions508414
-Node: \DeclareGraphicsRule510232
-Node: Commands for graphics513411
-Node: \includegraphics513916
-Ref: includegraphics width518979
-Ref: includegraphics height519512
-Ref: includegraphics totalheight519918
-Ref: includegraphics keepaspectratio520182
-Ref: includegraphics viewport521868
-Ref: includegraphics trim522263
-Ref: includegraphics clip522719
-Ref: includegraphics page522979
-Ref: includegraphics pagebox523070
-Ref: includegraphics interpolate523935
-Ref: includegraphics quiet524140
-Ref: includegraphics draft524301
-Ref: includegraphics bb525106
-Ref: includegraphics bbllx525504
-Ref: includegraphics bblly525504
-Ref: includegraphics bburx525504
-Ref: includegraphics bbury525504
-Ref: includegraphics natwidth525646
-Ref: includegraphics natheight525646
-Ref: includegraphics hiresbb525832
-Ref: includegraphics type526594
-Ref: includegraphics ext526634
-Ref: includegraphics read526737
-Ref: includegraphics command526854
-Node: \rotatebox527100
-Node: \scalebox529954
-Node: \resizebox531034
-Node: Special insertions532228
-Node: Reserved characters533096
-Node: Upper and lower case534356
-Node: Symbols by font position536742
-Node: Text symbols537421
-Node: Accents542405
-Node: \accent544690
-Node: Additional Latin letters546516
-Ref: Non-English characters546698
-Node: inputenc package547717
-Ref: \inputencoding549933
-Node: \rule550269
-Node: \today551457
-Node: Splitting the input552393
-Node: \endinput554135
-Node: \include & \includeonly555438
-Node: \input559735
-Node: Front/back matter560950
-Node: Table of contents etc.561283
-Node: \@dottedtocline567044
-Node: \addcontentsline568631
-Node: \addtocontents571694
-Node: \contentsline573911
-Node: \nofiles575689
-Node: \numberline576440
-Node: Indexes577604
-Node: Produce the index manually580398
-Node: \index581562
-Node: makeindex586773
-Ref: makeindex preamble588441
-Ref: makeindex postamble588587
-Ref: makeindex group skip588683
-Ref: makeindex letheadflag589023
-Ref: makeindex lethead prefix589484
-Ref: makeindex lethead suffix589636
-Ref: makeindex item 0589784
-Ref: makeindex item 1589864
-Ref: makeindex item 2589939
-Ref: makeindex item 01590017
-Ref: makeindex item x1590122
-Ref: makeindex item 12590327
-Ref: makeindex item x2590435
-Ref: makeindex delim 0590595
-Ref: makeindex delim 1590725
-Ref: makeindex delim 2590855
-Ref: makeindex delim n590981
-Ref: makeindex delim r591116
-Ref: makeindex line max591224
-Ref: makeindex indent space591359
-Ref: makeindex indent length591454
-Ref: makeindex page precedence591639
-Node: \printindex592676
-Node: Glossaries593149
-Node: \newglossaryentry595116
-Node: \gls596583
-Node: Letters597377
-Node: \address600995
-Node: \cc601806
-Node: \closing602248
-Node: \encl602562
-Node: \location602976
-Node: \makelabels603240
-Node: \name605557
-Node: \opening605798
-Node: \ps606079
-Node: \signature606368
-Node: \telephone607596
-Node: Input/output607961
-Node: \openin & \openout608691
-Node: \read611451
-Node: \typein612638
-Node: \typeout613898
-Node: \write614938
-Node: \write and security619665
-Node: \message620609
-Node: \wlog622438
-Node: \write18622939
-Node: Command line interface626430
-Ref: Command line626594
-Node: Command line options628747
-Ref: interaction modes629750
-Ref: output directory630704
-Node: Command line input632403
-Node: Jobname634520
-Node: Recovering from errors637763
-Node: Document templates639191
-Node: beamer template639625
-Node: article template640267
-Node: book template640730
-Node: Larger book template641209
-Node: Index642751
-Ref: Command Index642837
+Node: Top1879
+Node: About this document3690
+Node: Overview5438
+Node: Starting and ending7240
+Ref: Starting & ending7375
+Node: Output files8600
+Ref: output files dvi8893
+Ref: output files pdf9441
+Ref: output files log9774
+Ref: output files aux9975
+Node: TeX engines10966
+Ref: tex engines latex11518
+Ref: tex engines lualatex12395
+Ref: tex engines xelatex12878
+Node: LaTeX command syntax14934
+Node: Environment16919
+Node: CTAN18178
+Node: Document classes19646
+Ref: document classes article20092
+Ref: document classes book20184
+Ref: document classes letter20373
+Ref: document classes report20453
+Ref: document classes slides20617
+Node: Document class options21074
+Node: Additional packages24372
+Node: Class and package construction25019
+Node: Class and package structure26505
+Node: Class and package commands28866
+Node: Fonts47177
+Ref: Typefaces47280
+Node: fontenc package49250
+Node: \DeclareFontEncoding53640
+Node: \DeclareTextAccent55108
+Node: \DeclareTextAccentDefault56059
+Node: \DeclareTextCommand & \ProvideTextCommand57166
+Ref: \DeclareTextCommand57471
+Ref: \ProvideTextCommand57471
+Node: \DeclareTextCommandDefault & \ProvideTextCommandDefault59478
+Ref: \DeclareTextCommandDefault59809
+Ref: \ProvideTextCommandDefault59809
+Node: \DeclareTextComposite60822
+Node: \DeclareTextCompositeCommand61939
+Node: \DeclareTextSymbol62653
+Node: \DeclareTextSymbolDefault63790
+Node: \LastDeclaredEncoding64778
+Node: \UseTextSymbol & \UseTextAccent65414
+Ref: \UseTextSymbol65623
+Ref: \UseTextAccent65623
+Node: Font styles66652
+Ref: \nocorrlist67592
+Ref: \nocorr67592
+Ref: \mathversion70347
+Ref: \oldstylenums70517
+Node: Font sizes71090
+Node: Low-level font commands74093
+Ref: low level font commands fontencoding74377
+Ref: low level font commands fontfamily74947
+Ref: low level font commands fontseries75794
+Ref: low level font commands fontshape77050
+Ref: low level font commands fontsize77395
+Ref: low level font commands linespread78000
+Ref: low level font commands selectfont78297
+Ref: low level font commands usefont78639
+Node: Layout78906
+Node: \onecolumn79480
+Node: \twocolumn79847
+Ref: twocolumn columnsep80482
+Ref: twocolumn columnseprule80734
+Ref: twocolumn columnwidth81042
+Ref: twocolumn dbltopfraction81657
+Ref: twocolumn dblfloatpagefraction82669
+Ref: twocolumn dblfloatsep82921
+Ref: twocolumn dbltextfloatsep83254
+Ref: twocolumn dbltopnumber83442
+Node: \flushbottom84401
+Node: \raggedbottom85572
+Node: Page layout parameters86114
+Ref: page layout parameters columnsep86355
+Ref: page layout parameters columnseprule86355
+Ref: page layout parameters columnwidth86355
+Ref: page layout parameters headheight86617
+Ref: page layout parameters headsep86804
+Ref: page layout parameters footskip87144
+Ref: page layout parameters linewidth87510
+Ref: page layout parameters marginparpush87901
+Ref: page layout parameters marginsep87901
+Ref: page layout parameters marginparwidth87901
+Ref: page layout parameters oddsidemargin89027
+Ref: page layout parameters evensidemargin89027
+Ref: page layout parameters paperheight89616
+Ref: page layout parameters paperwidth89850
+Ref: page layout parameters textheight90082
+Ref: page layout parameters textwidth90503
+Ref: page layout parameters hsize91509
+Ref: page layout parameters topmargin91714
+Ref: page layout parameters topskip92036
+Node: \baselineskip & \baselinestretch92256
+Ref: \baselineskip92469
+Ref: \baselinestretch92469
+Node: Floats97648
+Ref: floats bottomfraction102144
+Ref: floats floatpagefraction102279
+Ref: floats textfraction102398
+Ref: floats topfraction102608
+Ref: floats floatsep102872
+Ref: floats intextsep102990
+Ref: floats textfloatsep103217
+Ref: floats bottomnumber103493
+Ref: floats dbltopnumber103605
+Ref: floats topnumber103728
+Ref: floats totalnumber103836
+Node: \caption104461
+Node: Sectioning107287
+Ref: sectioning secnumdepth110546
+Ref: Sectioning/secnumdepth110546
+Ref: sectioning tocdepth111222
+Ref: Sectioning/tocdepth111222
+Node: \part112288
+Node: \chapter114522
+Node: \section118377
+Node: \subsection121716
+Node: \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph124498
+Ref: \subsubsection124744
+Ref: \paragraph124744
+Ref: \subparagraph124744
+Node: \appendix127231
+Node: \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter128616
+Ref: \frontmatter128856
+Ref: \mainmatter128856
+Ref: \backmatter128856
+Node: \@startsection130061
+Ref: startsection name131614
+Ref: \@startsection/name131614
+Ref: startsection level132094
+Ref: \@startsection/level132094
+Ref: startsection indent133007
+Ref: \@startsection/indent133007
+Ref: startsection beforeskip133278
+Ref: \@startsection/beforeskip133278
+Ref: startsection afterskip134831
+Ref: \@startsection/afterskip134831
+Ref: startsection style136188
+Ref: \@startsection/style136188
+Node: Cross references140031
+Node: \label142266
+Node: \pageref144158
+Node: \ref144968
+Node: xr package146007
+Node: Environments147880
+Node: abstract149898
+Node: array151515
+Node: center154540
+Node: \centering156313
+Node: description157886
+Node: displaymath160153
+Node: document161905
+Node: \AtBeginDocument162343
+Node: \AtEndDocument162975
+Node: enumerate163631
+Ref: enumerate enumi165592
+Ref: enumerate enumii165592
+Ref: enumerate enumiii165592
+Ref: enumerate enumiv165592
+Ref: enumerate labelenumi166006
+Ref: enumerate labelenumii166006
+Ref: enumerate labelenumiii166006
+Ref: enumerate labelenumiv166006
+Node: eqnarray166557
+Node: equation168609
+Node: figure169301
+Node: filecontents171534
+Node: flushleft173487
+Node: \raggedright174526
+Node: flushright175757
+Node: \raggedleft176601
+Node: itemize177506
+Ref: itemize labelitemi179098
+Ref: itemize labelitemii179098
+Ref: itemize labelitemiii179098
+Ref: itemize labelitemiv179098
+Ref: itemize leftmargin179791
+Ref: itemize leftmargini179791
+Ref: itemize leftmarginii179791
+Ref: itemize leftmarginiii179791
+Ref: itemize leftmarginiv179791
+Ref: itemize leftmarginv179791
+Ref: itemize leftmarginvi179791
+Node: letter181329
+Node: list181571
+Ref: list makelabel184090
+Ref: list itemindent185527
+Ref: list itemsep185676
+Ref: list labelsep186411
+Ref: list labelwidth186596
+Ref: list leftmargin187689
+Ref: list listparindent188608
+Ref: list parsep188855
+Ref: list partopsep189377
+Ref: list rightmargin190237
+Ref: list topsep190430
+Ref: list beginparpenalty194144
+Ref: list itempenalty194251
+Ref: list endparpenalty194363
+Node: \item195246
+Node: trivlist196524
+Node: math198102
+Node: minipage198424
+Node: picture204169
+Node: \put210547
+Node: \multiput211128
+Node: \qbezier211871
+Node: \graphpaper213376
+Node: \line214184
+Node: \linethickness216185
+Node: \thinlines216662
+Node: \thicklines217077
+Node: \circle217466
+Node: \oval218028
+Node: \shortstack219083
+Node: \vector220851
+Node: \makebox (picture)221784
+Node: \framebox (picture)223010
+Node: \frame224511
+Node: \dashbox224952
+Node: quotation & quote226113
+Ref: quotation226275
+Ref: quote226275
+Node: tabbing227037
+Node: table233230
+Node: tabular235341
+Ref: \extracolsep239383
+Ref: tabular arrayrulewidth241924
+Ref: tabular arraystrech242196
+Ref: tabular doublerulesep242437
+Ref: tabular tabcolsep242585
+Node: \multicolumn243118
+Node: \vline247137
+Node: \cline248594
+Node: \hline249324
+Node: thebibliography250034
+Node: \bibitem252615
+Node: \cite255001
+Node: \nocite256917
+Node: Using BibTeX257433
+Node: BibTeX error messages259883
+Node: theorem260840
+Node: titlepage261782
+Node: verbatim263077
+Node: \verb264950
+Node: verse267128
+Node: Line breaking268365
+Node: \\269731
+Node: \obeycr & \restorecr272263
+Ref: \obeycr272429
+Ref: \restorecr272429
+Node: \newline273108
+Node: \- (hyphenation)274197
+Node: \discretionary275861
+Node: \fussy & \sloppy276776
+Ref: \fussy276946
+Ref: \sloppy276946
+Node: sloppypar277615
+Node: \hyphenation278777
+Node: \linebreak & \nolinebreak279409
+Ref: \linebreak279583
+Ref: \nolinebreak279583
+Node: Page breaking280605
+Node: \clearpage & \cleardoublepage282647
+Ref: \clearpage282831
+Ref: \cleardoublepage282831
+Node: \newpage284317
+Node: \enlargethispage285661
+Node: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak286633
+Ref: \pagebreak286813
+Ref: \nopagebreak286813
+Node: Footnotes288648
+Node: \footnote289802
+Ref: footnote footnoterule291090
+Ref: footnote footnotesep291719
+Node: \footnotemark292847
+Node: \footnotetext295232
+Node: Footnotes in section headings295842
+Node: Footnotes in a table296687
+Node: Footnotes of footnotes299662
+Node: Definitions300366
+Node: \newcommand & \renewcommand301413
+Ref: \newcommand301596
+Ref: \renewcommand301596
+Node: Control sequences308007
+Node: \providecommand309474
+Node: \makeatletter & \makeatother310698
+Ref: \makeatletter310901
+Ref: \makeatother310901
+Node: \@ifstar312884
+Node: \newcounter316495
+Node: \newlength318267
+Node: \newsavebox319226
+Node: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment320217
+Ref: \newenvironment320440
+Ref: \renewenvironment320440
+Node: \newtheorem325673
+Node: \newfont329345
+Node: \protect330618
+Node: \ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterend333112
+Ref: \ignorespaces333335
+Ref: \ignorespacesafterend333335
+Node: xspace package335924
+Node: Counters338198
+Node: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol339939
+Node: \usecounter342708
+Node: \value343587
+Node: \setcounter344676
+Node: \addtocounter345290
+Node: \refstepcounter345752
+Node: \stepcounter346445
+Node: \day & \month & \year347018
+Ref: \day347185
+Ref: \month347185
+Ref: \year347185
+Node: Lengths347959
+Node: Units of length352683
+Ref: units of length pt352890
+Ref: units of length pc353011
+Ref: units of length in353038
+Ref: units of length bp353068
+Ref: units of length mm353203
+Ref: units of length cm353238
+Ref: units of length dd353270
+Ref: units of length cc353306
+Ref: units of length sp353335
+Ref: Lengths/ex353481
+Ref: units of length ex353481
+Ref: Lengths/em353632
+Ref: units of length em353632
+Ref: units of length mu353981
+Node: \setlength354518
+Node: \addtolength355660
+Node: \settodepth357135
+Node: \settoheight358155
+Node: \settowidth359189
+Node: \stretch360226
+Node: Expressions361440
+Node: Making paragraphs366478
+Node: \par368821
+Node: \indent & \noindent370951
+Ref: \indent371135
+Ref: \noindent371135
+Node: \parindent & \parskip372532
+Ref: \parindent372730
+Ref: \parskip372730
+Node: Marginal notes373931
+Ref: marginal notes marginparpush375365
+Ref: marginal notes marginparsep375555
+Ref: marginal notes marginparwidth375703
+Node: Math formulas376084
+Node: Subscripts & superscripts379178
+Ref: superscript379338
+Ref: subscript379338
+Node: Math symbols381471
+Node: Arrows406951
+Node: \boldmath & \unboldmath408275
+Ref: \boldmath408466
+Ref: \unboldmath408466
+Node: bm409576
+Node: OpenType bold math410328
+Node: Blackboard bold411766
+Node: Calligraphic412595
+Node: Delimiters413130
+Node: \left & \right415441
+Ref: \left415595
+Ref: \right415595
+Node: \bigl & \bigr etc.419602
+Ref: \bigl419764
+Ref: \bigr419764
+Node: Dots422460
+Ref: ellipses cdots422891
+Ref: ellipses ddots423044
+Ref: ellipses ldots423129
+Ref: ellipses vdots423549
+Node: Greek letters425675
+Node: Math functions427524
+Node: Math accents429373
+Node: Over- and Underlining430332
+Node: Spacing in math mode432231
+Ref: spacing in math mode thickspace433196
+Ref: spacing in math mode medspace433679
+Ref: Spacing in math mode/\thinspace434163
+Ref: spacing in math mode thinspace434163
+Ref: spacing in math mode negthinspace434660
+Ref: spacing in math mode quad435057
+Ref: spacing in math mode qquad435321
+Node: \smash435659
+Node: \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom437930
+Ref: \phantom438159
+Ref: \vphantom438159
+Ref: \hphantom438159
+Node: \mathstrut440574
+Node: Math styles441576
+Node: Math miscellany444382
+Node: Colon character & \colon444881
+Ref: colon445054
+Node: \*445610
+Node: \frac446214
+Node: \sqrt446597
+Node: \stackrel447244
+Node: Modes447517
+Ref: modes paragraph mode447969
+Ref: modes lr mode448289
+Ref: modes math mode448908
+Ref: modes vertical mode449257
+Ref: modes internal vertical mode449479
+Ref: modes inner paragraph mode450022
+Ref: modes outer paragraph mode450022
+Node: \ensuremath450456
+Node: Page styles451169
+Node: \maketitle451929
+Node: \pagenumbering455082
+Node: \pagestyle457210
+Node: \thispagestyle460874
+Node: Spaces461852
+Node: \enspace & \quad & \qquad463172
+Ref: \enspace463344
+Ref: \quad463344
+Ref: \qquad463344
+Node: \hspace464111
+Node: \hfill466020
+Node: \hss467114
+Node: \spacefactor467834
+Node: \@471301
+Ref: \AT471425
+Node: \frenchspacing & \nonfrenchspacing473417
+Ref: \frenchspacing473535
+Ref: \nonfrenchspacing473636
+Node: \normalsfcodes474349
+Node: \(SPACE)474621
+Ref: Leading blanks476613
+Node: ~476946
+Node: \thinspace & \negthinspace479935
+Ref: \thinspace480107
+Ref: \negthinspace480107
+Node: \/481181
+Node: \hrulefill & \dotfill483193
+Ref: \hrulefill483383
+Ref: \dotfill483383
+Node: \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip484569
+Ref: \bigskip484822
+Ref: \medskip484822
+Ref: \smallskip484822
+Ref: bigskip485401
+Ref: medskip485625
+Ref: smallskip485854
+Node: \bigbreak & \medbreak & \smallbreak486551
+Ref: \bigbreak486795
+Ref: \medbreak486795
+Ref: \smallbreak486795
+Node: \strut487580
+Node: \vspace490913
+Node: \vfill492507
+Node: \addvspace493459
+Node: Boxes495576
+Node: \mbox & \makebox496294
+Ref: \mbox496440
+Ref: \makebox496440
+Ref: mbox makebox depth497606
+Ref: mbox makebox height497606
+Ref: mbox makebox width497606
+Ref: mbox makebox totalheight497606
+Node: \fbox & \framebox499802
+Ref: \fbox499966
+Ref: \framebox499966
+Ref: fbox framebox fboxrule501149
+Ref: fbox framebox fboxsep501347
+Node: \parbox502487
+Node: \raisebox504851
+Ref: raisebox depth505828
+Ref: raisebox height505828
+Ref: raisebox width505828
+Ref: raisebox totalheight505828
+Node: \sbox & \savebox506559
+Ref: \sbox506711
+Ref: \savebox506711
+Node: lrbox509751
+Node: \usebox510665
+Node: Color511124
+Node: Color package options511941
+Node: Color models513715
+Ref: color models cmyk514530
+Ref: color models gray514897
+Ref: color models rgb515050
+Ref: color models RGB515391
+Ref: color models named515790
+Node: Commands for color516122
+Node: Define colors516541
+Node: Colored text517272
+Node: Colored boxes519707
+Node: Colored pages521138
+Node: Graphics521835
+Node: Graphics package options523981
+Node: Graphics package configuration526908
+Node: \graphicspath527720
+Node: \DeclareGraphicsExtensions530792
+Node: \DeclareGraphicsRule532646
+Node: Commands for graphics535924
+Node: \includegraphics536437
+Ref: includegraphics width541600
+Ref: includegraphics height542161
+Ref: includegraphics totalheight542583
+Ref: includegraphics keepaspectratio542851
+Ref: includegraphics viewport544643
+Ref: includegraphics trim545054
+Ref: includegraphics clip545522
+Ref: includegraphics page545794
+Ref: includegraphics pagebox545893
+Ref: includegraphics interpolate546784
+Ref: includegraphics quiet546997
+Ref: includegraphics draft547170
+Ref: includegraphics bb547997
+Ref: includegraphics bbllx548407
+Ref: includegraphics bblly548407
+Ref: includegraphics bburx548407
+Ref: includegraphics bbury548407
+Ref: includegraphics natwidth548553
+Ref: includegraphics natheight548553
+Ref: includegraphics hiresbb548751
+Ref: includegraphics type549561
+Ref: includegraphics ext549605
+Ref: includegraphics read549716
+Ref: includegraphics command549841
+Node: \rotatebox550099
+Node: \scalebox553061
+Node: \resizebox554169
+Node: Special insertions555409
+Node: Reserved characters556283
+Node: Upper and lower case557602
+Node: Symbols by font position560076
+Node: Text symbols560783
+Node: Accents566752
+Node: \accent569209
+Node: Additional Latin letters571067
+Ref: Non-English characters571249
+Node: inputenc package572370
+Ref: \inputencoding574646
+Node: \rule575022
+Node: \today576226
+Node: Splitting the input577216
+Node: \endinput578998
+Node: \include & \includeonly580355
+Ref: \include580543
+Ref: \includeonly580543
+Node: \input584840
+Node: Front/back matter586083
+Node: Table of contents etc.586416
+Node: \@dottedtocline592364
+Node: \addcontentsline594015
+Node: \addtocontents597204
+Node: \contentsline599497
+Node: \nofiles601387
+Node: \numberline602170
+Node: Indexes603398
+Node: Produce the index manually606288
+Node: \index607476
+Node: makeindex612917
+Ref: makeindex preamble614633
+Ref: makeindex postamble614787
+Ref: makeindex group skip614891
+Ref: makeindex letheadflag615251
+Ref: makeindex lethead prefix615728
+Ref: makeindex lethead suffix615888
+Ref: makeindex item 0616044
+Ref: makeindex item 1616132
+Ref: makeindex item 2616215
+Ref: makeindex item 01616301
+Ref: makeindex item x1616414
+Ref: makeindex item 12616633
+Ref: makeindex item x2616749
+Ref: makeindex delim 0616919
+Ref: makeindex delim 1617057
+Ref: makeindex delim 2617195
+Ref: makeindex delim n617329
+Ref: makeindex delim r617472
+Ref: makeindex line max617588
+Ref: makeindex indent space617733
+Ref: makeindex indent length617836
+Ref: makeindex page precedence618033
+Node: \printindex619114
+Node: Glossaries619603
+Node: \newglossaryentry621622
+Node: \gls623125
+Node: Letters623939
+Node: \address627655
+Node: \cc628482
+Node: \closing628936
+Node: \encl629256
+Node: \location629682
+Node: \makelabels629954
+Node: \name632331
+Node: \opening632578
+Node: \ps632867
+Node: \signature633164
+Node: \telephone634440
+Node: Input/output634815
+Node: \openin & \openout635545
+Ref: \openin635692
+Ref: \openout635692
+Ref: \closein635692
+Ref: \closeout635692
+Node: \read638413
+Node: \typein639640
+Node: \typeout640924
+Node: \write642014
+Node: \write and security646929
+Node: \message647885
+Node: \wlog649766
+Node: \write18650275
+Node: Command line interface653876
+Ref: Command line654040
+Node: Command line options656259
+Ref: interaction modes657306
+Ref: output directory658318
+Node: Command line input660093
+Node: Jobname662242
+Node: Recovering from errors665621
+Node: Document templates667097
+Node: beamer template667531
+Node: article template668181
+Node: book template668648
+Node: Larger book template669131
+Node: Index670715
+Ref: Command Index670801
End Tag Table
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/ChangeLog
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/ChangeLog 2023-01-15 20:55:35 UTC (rev 65551)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/ChangeLog 2023-01-15 20:55:58 UTC (rev 65552)
@@ -1,8 +1,318 @@
2022-01-26 Karl Berry <karl at freefriends.org>
+ January 2023 release to CTAN.
+ * NEWS: update.
+
+ * mirroring.html,
+ * writing.html: use https, $Date.
+
+2023-01-14 Karl Berry <karl at freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e-es.texi: install another updated translation from
+ Nachec <nachopacheco at gmail.com>, latexrefman mail
+ of 14 Jan 2023 04:35:07.
+
+2023-01-11 Karl Berry <karl at freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e-es.texi: install updated translation from
+ Nachec <nachopacheco at gmail.com>, latexrefman mail
+ of 11 Jan 2023 04:26:49. Regenerate all.
+
+2023-01-10 Karl Berry <karl at freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (bm): new section, split from
+ \boldmath & \unboldmath): here and revised per advice from Carlisle.
+ (OpenType bold math): another new node based on Carlisle's information.
+ https://github.com/latex3/latex2e/issues/974
+
+2022-12-26 Karl Berry <karl at freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Dots): say more about amsmath's overwriting of the
+ kernel's \dots, and about Unicode vs. traditional output.
+ (@microtype on): use this, per Texinfo 7.0.
+ (thoughout): avoid some use of "very", fix under/overfull boxes.
+
+2022-11-19 Karl Berry <karl at freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\frame): "is put" typo, from Pieter van Oostrum.
+ https://puszcza.gnu.org.ua/bugs/?580
+
+2022-09-17 Karl Berry <karl at freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Math symbols): \bigtriangle{up,down} are binary
+ operators (mathbin), not [big] operators (mathop), per fontdef.dtx.
+ And \varbigtriangle{up,down} are synonyms.
+ Report from Masato Shinokawa, 18 Apr 2022 10:36:24.
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\lastlinefit): reset to 0 (latest texinfo.tex sets
+ to 500) to avoid numerous new underfull box warnings for last
+ lines of paragraphs.
+ (Class and package commands): use @itemx for second and subsequent
+ items.
+ (Text symbols) <\textbackslash>: note that \texttt{\textbackslash}
+ does not produce a typewriter backslash without [T1]{fontenc}.
+ <\textbraceleft, \textbraceright>: likewise.
+
+2022-09-07 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Page breaking): @dfn{...}-ize word ``badness''.
+ (\clearpage & \cleardoublepage): Clarifies that changing
+ \cleardooublepage will affect it everywhere, not only in \chapter.
+ (\enlargethispage): @var{...}-ize word ``size'' in synopsis.
+ (\pagebreak & \nopagebreak): ``this command'' -> ``these commands''.
+ (Colored text): ``specification'' -> ``color specification'' for
+ the sake of consistency.
+
+2022-08-27 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ [fr] More typoes (bis) + regenerate all files.
+
+ * README-fr: About word ``standard'' and example translation.
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\pagestyle): ``right'' -> ``right-head''.
+ (\write18): Fix example.
+ (Command line interface): @code{...} -> @command{...}
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: More typoes, bis.
+
+2022-08-23 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ [fr] More typoes + regenerate HTML outputs.
+
+ Fix typoes reported on fr.comp.text.tex & gut at ens.fr. Thanks to @'Eric
+ Guichard, Paul Gaborit, G@'erard Fleuter for their reports.
+
+2022-08-22 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ [fr] Calligraphic: distinguish the French version description from the English one
+
+ Specific to the French version:
+ - use just ``script'' and not ``script-like''
+ - do not use ``cursive''
+ - introduce font name ``Math Calligraphic''
+
+2022-08-22 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Fonts, Font styles)
+ (\newenvironment & \renewenvironment, Text symbols): Align on en.
+ (Using BibTeX, Bib at TeX{} error messages): Typo
+
+2022-08-22 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ [fr] Typoes
+
+ latex2e-fr.texi: Replace some ``x'' in column width specifiers by
+ ``@ '' for the spell checker not to find x as a typo.
+
+2022-08-22 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ [fr] Propagate Jim's r677.
+
+2022-08-22 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ [fr] complete propagating Jim's r643.
+
+2022-08-22 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ [fr] translate ``material'' by ``mati`ere'', not by ``mat'eriel''.
+
+2022-08-22 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ [fr] Propagate Jim's r641.
+
+2022-08-22 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ [fr] Propagate Jim's r644.
+
+2022-08-22 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\hspace): Use consistent wording ``non
+ suppressible'' for ``non discardable''.
+ (\vspace): ``@'etoil@'ee'' -> ``en @code{*}'' to stick to en.
+
+2022-08-22 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ [fr] Finalize propagating Jim's r639.
+
+ Notably nodes ``\indent & \noindent'' and ``\ensuremath''.
+
+2022-08-22 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ [fr] Propagate Karl's r1086.
+
+2022-08-22 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ [fr] Propagate Karl's r1083.
+
+ Clarify ``sequences of read characters'' -> ``stream of read
+ characters'', after discussing this with Karl.
+
+2022-08-22 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ [fr] Propate Jim's r370.
+
+2022-08-22 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Font styles): ``text'' -> ``@var{text}''
+ (Text symbols): @PkgIndex{...}-ize textcomp index.
+
+2022-08-21 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Font styles, tabular)
+ (\bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip): Add anchors.
+ (Font styles): Comment for asking English natives to improve some
+ wording.
+ (\flushbottom): ``documents'' -> ``document'' --- confirmed by Jim.
+ (\raggedbottom): ``twoside'' -> ``twocolumn'' --- confirmed by Karl.
+ (\appendix, tabular, Control sequences, Making paragraphs)
+ (Math functions, Over- and Underlining, \sqrt, \pagenumbering)
+ (\bigbreak & \medbreak & \smallbreak): Improve wording.
+ (abstract): Fix @PkgIndex call.
+ (tabular): fix => ``|'' does not remove \tabcolsep.
+ (Control sequences): ``sequences'' -> ``the stream'' --- confirmed by Karl.
+ (Subscripts & superscripts): Clarify why ``\(3^3^3\)''
+ fails. ``parenthesis'' -> ``curly braces''. ``error'' -> ``TeX error''.
+ (\left & \right): @dfn{...}-ize ``null delimiter''.
+ (Math functions): Fix @math{...} display. Typo --- Infimum. Fix extra @iftex.
+ (\stackrel): suppress useless ``one of''.
+ (\pagenumbering): Clarify how \pagenumbering is global.
+ (\bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip): Add @findex.
+ (Accents): Fix @ref-erence.
+
+2022-08-14 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ [en,fr] Use (...) brackets in index ``(for ...)'' qualifications.
+
+2022-08-14 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * README-fr: Elaborate on translating ``empty curly brackets'' to
+ ``accolades vides''.
+
+2022-08-13 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ [fr] Propagate Karl's r1077.
+
+2022-08-13 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ [fr] Propagate changes about BibTeX from Karl's r1069 & r1070.
+
+2022-08-13 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ [fr] Propagates changes on nodes \pagestyle, \maketitle from Jim's r644.
+
+2022-08-13 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: (\openin & \openout): After Karl's r1073, LuaTeX
+ max open stream count can be 127.
+
+2022-08-13 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Footnotes in a table): Align on English.
+
+2022-08-13 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\newtheorem): align on English, ie propagate Jim's
+ r483.
+
+2022-08-13 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\hrulefill & \dotfill): Realign on English.
+
+2022-08-13 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\addtocontents): Align on English version.
+
+2022-08-13 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ [fr] Various translation improvements.
+
+2022-08-13 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ [fr] list, fix translation.
+
+2022-08-13 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\newenvironment & \renewenvironment): Fix translation.
+
+2022-08-13 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Class and package commands): Fix translation.
+ (\DeclareGraphicsRule): ``fichier bitmap'' -> ``fichier .bmp''.
+
+2022-08-13 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (fontenc package): Fix translation.
+ (list): Fix translation.
+ (Accents): Fix translation.
+
+2022-08-13 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (center): fix translation.
+
+2022-08-13 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\accent): Translate this node.
+
+2022-08-13 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\resizebox): Translation.
+
+2022-08-13 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Fonts): Typo.
+ (\scalebox): Translate node.
+
+2022-08-13 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (html intro): Point at the French version of
+ learnlatex.org.
+ (\rotatebox): Translate this node.
+ (\scalebox): @file{...} -> @package{...}
+
+2022-08-12 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ [fr] typoes.
+
+2022-08-12 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\bibitem): Improve wording.
+ (\footnote): Improve wording.
+ (\footnotemark): Typoes.
+ (Footnotes in a table): Improve wording. Translate example.
+ (\includegraphics): Typoes.
+
+ * README-fr: add info about at-sign translation.
+
+2022-08-11 Vincent Bela\"iche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Units of length): @dmn{...} where applicable.
+ (\maketitle): ``footnote'' -> ``footnote mark''. Clarifies that
+ the No \title error happens on \maketitle.
+ (\pagestyle): ``blank'' -> ``empty content''.
+
+2022-05-13 Karl Berry <karl at freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (.* & .*): for each node name "foo & bar",
+ uniformly provide @anchor{foo} and @anchor{bar}, for possible ease
+ of searching and referencing, especially online.
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\newcommand & \renewcommand): had an extra
+ [@var{nargs}] in synopsis. Report from Vladimir Ivanovic,
+ 11 May 2022. Also correct and (hopefully) clarify optional
+ argument description.
+
+2022-01-26 Karl Berry <karl at freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e-es.xml: remove bogus CR characters. CTAN complained.
+
+2022-01-26 Karl Berry <karl at freefriends.org>
+
January 2022 release to CTAN.
* NEWS: update.
+ * mirroring.html,
+ * writing.html: use https, $Date.
+
2022-01-26 Karl Berry <karl at freefriends.org>
* latex2e.texi (Units of length): correct pt/mm/cm conversions.
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/Makefile
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/Makefile 2023-01-15 20:55:35 UTC (rev 65551)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/Makefile 2023-01-15 20:55:58 UTC (rev 65552)
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-# $Id: Makefile 1073 2021-11-13 21:50:34Z karl $
+# $Id: Makefile 1142 2023-01-11 16:09:29Z karl $
# Public domain. Originally written 2006, Karl Berry.
# Makefile for latexrefman.
@@ -29,8 +29,14 @@
texi2txt = $(makeinfo) --plaintext --no-split
texi2xml = $(makeinfo) --xml
#
-htmlopts = --html --css-include=latex2e.css $(t2html_top) $(t2html_home) -c WORDS_IN_PAGE=10000
+htmlopts = --html $(html_css) $(t2html_top) $(t2html_home) $(html_pagewords)
#
+html_css = --css-include=latex2e.css
+#
+# Nodes must be larger than this to get navigation panel at bottom of
+# page; default is 300.
+html_pagewords = -c WORDS_IN_PAGE=10000
+#
# Go somewhere useful from Top:
t2html_top = -c TOP_NODE_UP_URL=https://tug.org/texinfohtml/
#
@@ -46,7 +52,7 @@
#
%.dbk: %.texi
$(texi2docbook) -o $@ $<
-%.html: %.texi %.css
+%.html: %.texi latex2e.css
$(texi2html) $<
%.info: %.texi
$(texi2info) $<
@@ -106,7 +112,7 @@
rm -f $(distzip)
zip -q $(distzip) \
$(addprefix $(distname)/, $(txt_files) \
- latex2e.texi common.texi $(en_mi_output) latex2e.pdf) \
+latex2e.texi common.texi $(en_mi_output) latex2e.pdf) \
$(addprefix $(distname)/spanish/, $(es_mi_output) latex2e-es.pdf) \
$(addprefix $(distname)/latex2e-figures/, $(figure_files)) \
$(addprefix $(distname)/graphics/, README $(figure_source_files))
@@ -120,9 +126,12 @@
&& rm -rf testdist && mkdir -p testdist \
&& cp ../latex2e-help-texinfo-tree.zip testdist \
&& rm -rf latex2e && unzip -q testdist/latex2e-help-texinfo-tree \
- && ./easyurls.py --directory latex2e --action softlink --lower_case --rewrite_index --debug \
+ && $(easyurls_python) ./easyurls.py $(easyurls_opt) \
&& zip -rq ../latex2e-help-texinfo-tree-easyurls.zip latex2e
+easyurls_python = python3.6 # depends on bs4 (beautifulsoup4)
+easyurls_opt = --directory latex2e --action softlink --lower_case --rewrite_index --debug
+
# To update web site, after basic build is ok (check-dw, spelling, etc.),
# first undo temporary build results:
# make svr # revert generated single files
@@ -133,18 +142,32 @@
# make
# make htmlsplit
# make dist
-# make easyurls
-# make commitready
-# svn commit # to commit regenerated files
+# make easyurls # depends htmlsplit and dist
+# make commitready # many files will have status !
+# svn commit # to commit regenerated files
# then:
-# svn update # to restore easy url stubs
-#
+# svn update # restore easy url stubs
+# make svrsplit # restore generated split html
+#
+# If uploading to CTAN:
+# (update NEWS, write announcement)
+# upload latex2e-help-texinfo.zip
+#
+# Clean up:
+# rm -rf src/testdist src/latex2e
+# rm -rf latex2e-help-texinfo
+# rm latex2e-help-texinfo-tree{,-easyurls}.zip
+# rm latex2e-help-texinfo.zip
+# In Texinfo 7.0, the default output directory changed to foo_html.
+# Change it back.
+html_split_opts = $(htmlopts) -o latex2e
+
# Get many small .html files.
htmlsplit: en
rm -rf $(htmlsplit)
mkdir $(htmlsplit) && cd $(htmlsplit) && ln -s ../* .
- cd $(htmlsplit) && $(makeinfo) $(htmlopts) latex2e.texi
+ cd $(htmlsplit) && $(makeinfo) $(html_split_opts) latex2e.texi
cd $(htmlsplit)/latex2e && ln -s ../../latex2e-figures .
# Right before a commit, delete html files that are gone and add new ones.
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/NEWS
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/NEWS 2023-01-15 20:55:35 UTC (rev 65551)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/NEWS 2023-01-15 20:55:58 UTC (rev 65552)
@@ -1,12 +1,31 @@
-$Id: NEWS 1078 2022-01-26 18:12:17Z karl $
+$Id: NEWS 1145 2023-01-15 16:23:59Z karl $
NEWS for latex2e.texi, aka the latex2e-help-texinfo package.
Public domain. Originally written 1995, Torsten Martinsen.
-French translation originally from Vincent Belaiche.
-Spanish translation originally from Nacho Pacheco (currently looking for
-a maintainer).
-
Some changes in January 2022 release:
+French translation from Vincent Belaiche.
+Spanish translation from Nacho Pacheco.
+Updates are welcome.
+
Notable changes in January 2023 release:
+
+Additions:
+* For each node name "foo & bar", provide separate anchors for foo and
+bar, so they can be referenced individually, especially online.
+* Brief discussion of bold math alternatives, including for OpenType.
+
+Fixes:
+* description of definition and use of optional arguments somewhat clarified.
+* \texttt{\textbackslash} (and \textbraceleft and \textbraceright)
+require T1 or other non-default encoding to produce typewriter characters.
+* \dots description extended, with more about the amsmath redefinition,
+and Unicode vs. traditional typesetting.
+* Spanish translation brought up to date.
+
+Formatting:
+* For the TeX output, enable microtype, since Texinfo now supports it.
+
+
Notable changes in January 2022 release:
+
New sections:
* \caption
* BibTeX error messages
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/aspell.en.pws
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/aspell.en.pws 2023-01-15 20:55:35 UTC (rev 65551)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/aspell.en.pws 2023-01-15 20:55:58 UTC (rev 65552)
@@ -289,3 +289,4 @@
unimagined
vitalism
tablefootnote
+Infimum
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/common.texi
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/common.texi 2023-01-15 20:55:35 UTC (rev 65551)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/common.texi 2023-01-15 20:55:58 UTC (rev 65552)
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
- at c $Id: common.texi 1031 2021-09-01 17:02:05Z vincentb1 $
+ at c $Id: common.texi 1089 2022-08-12 20:30:20Z vincentb1 $
@c Public domain.
@set LTXREFMAN_HOME_PAGE https://latexref.xyz
@set LTXREFMAN_BUGS latexrefman@@tug.org
@@ -17,6 +17,10 @@
@macro package {packagename}
@code{\packagename\}
@end macro
+ at c used to remove something form the spell checker
+ at macro identity {x}
+\x\
+ at end macro
@tex
\globaldefs=1
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.dbk
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.dbk 2023-01-15 20:55:35 UTC (rev 65551)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.dbk 2023-01-15 20:55:58 UTC (rev 65552)
@@ -1,45 +1,20 @@
<?xml version="1.0"?>
-<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.2//EN" "http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.2/docbookx.dtd" [
+<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.5//EN" "http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.5/docbookx.dtd" [
<!ENTITY tex "TeX">
<!ENTITY latex "LaTeX">
]>
<book id="latex2e.dbk" lang="en">
-<!-- $Id: common.texi 1031 2021-09-01 17:02:05Z vincentb1 $ -->
-<!-- Public domain. -->
-
-<title>&latex;2e unofficial reference manual (January 2022)</title>
-<!-- %**end of header (This is for running Texinfo on a region.) -->
-
-<!-- latex 2.09 commands should all be present now, -->
-<!-- xx but latex2e stuff is missing. -->
-<!-- xx random list of a few of the missing items is at the end of this file -->
-<!-- xx read through latex2e news for things to update. -->
-<!-- -->
-<!-- xx ctan, distributions, components of TeX -->
-<!-- xx classes and packages: required, additional, useful; oberdiek; fonts -->
-<!-- xx merge permuted-index -->
-<!-- xx merge latex-manual from savannah -->
-<!-- xx merge display style math -->
-<!-- xx check recent ltnews for (lots of) changes -->
-<!-- xx \write of non-ASCII chars (vincent mail of 14 Mar 2020 21:39:41) -->
-<!-- xx \nonstopmode etc., if they are officially supported by LaTeX? -->
-<!-- xx JH explain nfss somewhere -->
-<!-- xx JH expand BiBTeX -->
-<!-- xx JH expand theorem, AMS math -->
-<!-- xx JH something on code listings -->
-<!-- xx JH ligatures -->
-<!-- -->
-<!-- xx \NewCommandCopy et al. (Brian Dunn, 21 Dec 2021 06:50:17). -->
-<!-- -->
-<!-- xx The typeset source2e has an index with all kernel -->
-<!-- xx commands, though some are internal and shouldn't be included. -->
-<!-- xx classes.dtx et al. define additional commands. -->
-<!-- xx See also http://ctan.org/pkg/macros2e. -->
-<!-- -->
-<!-- xx All the special characters should be definitively described. -->
-
-<bookinfo><legalnotice><para>This document is an unofficial reference manual for &latex;, a
-document preparation system, version of January 2022.
+<title>&latex;2e: An unofficial reference manual</title>
+<subtitle>January 2023</subtitle>
+<titleabbrev>&latex;2e unofficial reference manual (January 2023)</titleabbrev>
+<bookinfo><title>&latex;2e: An unofficial reference manual</title>
+<subtitle>January 2023</subtitle>
+<titleabbrev>&latex;2e unofficial reference manual (January 2023)</titleabbrev>
+<authorgroup>
+<collab><collabname><ulink url="https://latexref.xyz">https://latexref.xyz</ulink></collabname></collab>
+</authorgroup>
+<legalnotice><para>This document is an unofficial reference manual for &latex;, a
+document preparation system, version of January 2023.
</para>
<para>This manual was originally translated from <filename>LATEX.HLP</filename> v1.0a in the
VMS Help Library. The pre-translation version was written by
@@ -77,62 +52,6 @@
into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions.
<!-- end of License -->
</para></legalnotice></bookinfo>
-<!-- Merge into one index (arbitrarily chosen to be the concept index). -->
-
-
-
-
-<para>This document is an unofficial reference manual for &latex;, a
-document preparation system, version of January 2022.
-</para>
-<para>This manual was originally translated from <filename>LATEX.HLP</filename> v1.0a in the
-VMS Help Library. The pre-translation version was written by
-George D. Greenwade of Sam Houston State University. The
-&latex; 2.09 version was written by Stephen Gilmore. The
-&latex;2e version was adapted from this by Torsten Martinsen. Karl
-Berry made further updates and additions, and gratefully acknowledges
-using <citetitle>Hypertext Help with &latex;</citetitle>, by Sheldon Green, and
-<citetitle>&latex; Command Summary</citetitle> (for &latex; 2.09) by
-L. Botway and C. Biemesderfer (published by the &tex; Users
-Group as <citetitle>&tex;niques</citetitle> number 10), as reference material. We also
-gratefully acknowledge additional material appearing in
-latex2e-reference by Martin Herbert Dietze. (From these references no
-text was directly copied.)
-</para>
-<para>Copyright 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011, 2012, 2013,
-2014, 2015, 2016, 2017, 2018, 2019, 2020, 2021, 2022 Karl Berry.
-
-Copyright 1988, 1994, 2007 Stephen Gilmore.
-
-Copyright 1994, 1995, 1996 Torsten Martinsen.
-</para>
-<!-- start of License -->
-<para>Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
-this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
-are preserved on all copies.
-</para>
-
-<para>Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
-manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the entire
-resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a permission
-notice identical to this one.
-</para>
-<para>Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual
-into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions.
-<!-- end of License -->
-</para>
-
-<!-- Best Effort Symbol -->
-
-
-<chapter label="" id="Top">
-<title>&latex;2e: An unofficial reference manual</title>
-
-<para>This document is an unofficial reference manual (version of
-January 2022) for &latex;2e, a document preparation system.
-</para>
-
-</chapter>
<chapter label="1" id="About-this-document">
<title>About this document</title>
@@ -461,8 +380,8 @@
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>command syntax</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ character starting commands</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>[...] for optional arguments</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>{...} for required arguments</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>[...] (for optional arguments)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>{...} (for required arguments)</primary></indexterm>
<para>In the &latex; input file, a command name starts with a backslash
character, <literal>\</literal>. The name itself then consists of either
(a) a string of letters or (b) a single non-letter.
@@ -910,7 +829,7 @@
at the beginning of the shipout of the first page of the document.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\AtEndOfClass{<replaceable>code</replaceable>}</literal>
-</term></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\AtEndOfPackage{<replaceable>code</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><term><literal>\AtEndOfPackage{<replaceable>code</replaceable>}</literal>
</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\AtEndOfClass</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\AtEndOfPackage</primary></indexterm>
<para>Hook to insert <replaceable>code</replaceable> to be executed when &latex; finishes
@@ -919,10 +838,10 @@
called it. See also <link linkend="_005cAtBeginDocument">\AtBeginDocument</link>.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\CheckCommand{<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}[<replaceable>num</replaceable>][<replaceable>default</replaceable>]{<replaceable>definition</replaceable>}</literal>
-</term></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\CheckCommand*{<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}[<replaceable>num</replaceable>][<replaceable>default</replaceable>]{<replaceable>definition</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><term><literal>\CheckCommand*{<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}[<replaceable>num</replaceable>][<replaceable>default</replaceable>]{<replaceable>definition</replaceable>}</literal>
</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\CheckCommand</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\CheckCommand*</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="cp"><primary>new command, check</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>new command, checking</primary></indexterm>
<para>Like <literal>\newcommand</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand">\newcommand & \renewcommand</link>) but does
not define <replaceable>cmd</replaceable>; instead it checks that the current definition of
<replaceable>cmd</replaceable> is exactly as given by <replaceable>definition</replaceable> and is or is not
@@ -935,15 +854,15 @@
redefined this command.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\ClassError{<replaceable>class name</replaceable>}{<replaceable>error text</replaceable>}{<replaceable>help text</replaceable>}</literal>
-</term></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\PackageError{<replaceable>package name</replaceable>}{<replaceable>error text</replaceable>}{<replaceable>help text</replaceable>}</literal>
-</term></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\ClassWarning{<replaceable>class name</replaceable>}{<replaceable>warning text</replaceable>}</literal>
-</term></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\PackageWarning{<replaceable>package name</replaceable>}{<replaceable>warning text</replaceable>}</literal>
-</term></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\ClassWarningNoLine{<replaceable>class name</replaceable>}{<replaceable>warning text</replaceable>}</literal>
-</term></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\PackageWarningNoLine{<replaceable>package name</replaceable>}{<replaceable>warning text</replaceable>}</literal>
-</term></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\ClassInfo{<replaceable>class name</replaceable>}{<replaceable>info text</replaceable>}</literal>
-</term></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\PackageInfo{<replaceable>package name</replaceable>}{<replaceable>info text</replaceable>}</literal>
-</term></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\ClassInfoNoLine{<replaceable>class name</replaceable>}{<replaceable>info text</replaceable>}</literal>
-</term></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\PackageInfoNoLine{<replaceable>package name</replaceable>}{<replaceable>info text</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><term><literal>\ClassWarning{<replaceable>class name</replaceable>}{<replaceable>warning text</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><term><literal>\ClassWarningNoLine{<replaceable>class name</replaceable>}{<replaceable>warning text</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><term><literal>\ClassInfo{<replaceable>class name</replaceable>}{<replaceable>info text</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><term><literal>\ClassInfoNoLine{<replaceable>class name</replaceable>}{<replaceable>info text</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><term><literal>\PackageError{<replaceable>package name</replaceable>}{<replaceable>error text</replaceable>}{<replaceable>help text</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><term><literal>\PackageWarning{<replaceable>package name</replaceable>}{<replaceable>warning text</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><term><literal>\PackageWarningNoLine{<replaceable>package name</replaceable>}{<replaceable>warning text</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><term><literal>\PackageInfo{<replaceable>package name</replaceable>}{<replaceable>info text</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><term><literal>\PackageInfoNoLine{<replaceable>package name</replaceable>}{<replaceable>info text</replaceable>}</literal>
</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ClassError</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\PackageError</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ClassWarning</primary></indexterm>
@@ -980,7 +899,7 @@
or <literal>\DeclareOption*</literal>.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\DeclareOption{<replaceable>option</replaceable>}{<replaceable>code</replaceable>}</literal>
-</term></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\DeclareOption*{<replaceable>code</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><term><literal>\DeclareOption*{<replaceable>code</replaceable>}</literal>
</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\DeclareOption</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\DeclareOption*</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>class options</primary></indexterm>
@@ -1016,7 +935,7 @@
\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{article}}}
</screen>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\DeclareRobustCommand{<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}[<replaceable>num</replaceable>][<replaceable>default</replaceable>]{<replaceable>definition</replaceable>}</literal>
-</term></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\DeclareRobustCommand*{<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}[<replaceable>num</replaceable>][<replaceable>default</replaceable>]{<replaceable>definition</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>* \DeclareRobustCommand*{<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}[<replaceable>num</replaceable>][<replaceable>default</replaceable>]{<replaceable>definition</replaceable>}</literal>
</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\DeclareRobustCommand</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\DeclareRobustCommand*</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>new command, definition</primary></indexterm>
@@ -1052,9 +971,8 @@
<replaceable>cmd</replaceable> that already exists, in that case you need to use either
<literal>\renew…</literal> or <literal>\provide…</literal> or you get an error.
</para></listitem></orderedlist>
-
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\IfFileExists{<replaceable>filename</replaceable>}{<replaceable>true code</replaceable>}{<replaceable>false code</replaceable>}</literal>
-</term></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\InputIfFileExists{<replaceable>filename</replaceable>}{<replaceable>true code</replaceable>}{<replaceable>false code</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><term><literal>\InputIfFileExists{<replaceable>filename</replaceable>}{<replaceable>true code</replaceable>}{<replaceable>false code</replaceable>}</literal>
</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\IfFileExists</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\InputIfFileExists</primary></indexterm>
<para>Execute <replaceable>true code</replaceable> if &latex; finds the file <filename><replaceable>file
@@ -1076,7 +994,7 @@
extensions see <link linkend="_005cinput">\input</link>.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\LoadClass[<replaceable>options list</replaceable>]{<replaceable>class name</replaceable>}[<replaceable>release date</replaceable>]</literal>
-</term></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\LoadClassWithOptions{<replaceable>class name</replaceable>}[<replaceable>release date</replaceable>]</literal>
+</term><term><literal>\LoadClassWithOptions{<replaceable>class name</replaceable>}[<replaceable>release date</replaceable>]</literal>
</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\LoadClass</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\LoadClassWithOptions</primary></indexterm>
<para>Load a class, as with <literal>\documentclass[<replaceable>options
@@ -1147,7 +1065,7 @@
<!-- reaches @code{\begin@{document@}}. -->
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\PassOptionsToClass{<replaceable>option list</replaceable>}{<replaceable>class name</replaceable>}</literal>
-</term></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\PassOptionsToPackage{<replaceable>option list</replaceable>}{<replaceable>package name</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><term><literal>\PassOptionsToPackage{<replaceable>option list</replaceable>}{<replaceable>package name</replaceable>}</literal>
</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\PassOptionsToClass</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\PassOptionsToPackage</primary></indexterm>
<para>Adds the options in the comma-separated list <replaceable>option list</replaceable> to the
@@ -1186,7 +1104,7 @@
<literal>\PassOptionsToPackage{draft}{graphicx}\documentclass{foo}</literal>.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\ProcessOptions</literal>
-</term></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\ProcessOptions*<replaceable>\@options</replaceable></literal>
+</term><term><literal>\ProcessOptions*<replaceable>\@options</replaceable></literal>
</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ProcessOptions</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ProcessOptions*</primary></indexterm>
<para>Execute the code for each option that the user has invoked. Include it
@@ -1225,9 +1143,9 @@
means that the global options are processed first.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\ProvidesClass{<replaceable>class name</replaceable>}[<replaceable>release date</replaceable> <replaceable>brief additional information</replaceable>]</literal>
-</term></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\ProvidesClass{<replaceable>class name</replaceable>}[<replaceable>release date</replaceable>]</literal>
-</term></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\ProvidesPackage{<replaceable>package name</replaceable>}[<replaceable>release date</replaceable> <replaceable>brief additional information</replaceable>]</literal>
-</term></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\ProvidesPackage{<replaceable>package name</replaceable>}[<replaceable>release date</replaceable>]</literal>
+</term><term><literal>\ProvidesClass{<replaceable>class name</replaceable>}[<replaceable>release date</replaceable>]</literal>
+</term><term><literal>\ProvidesPackage{<replaceable>package name</replaceable>}[<replaceable>release date</replaceable> <replaceable>brief additional information</replaceable>]</literal>
+</term><term><literal>\ProvidesPackage{<replaceable>package name</replaceable>}[<replaceable>release date</replaceable>]</literal>
</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ProvidesClass</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ProvidesPackage</primary></indexterm>
<para>Identifies the class or package, printing a message to the screen and
@@ -1271,7 +1189,7 @@
‘<literal>2017/10/12 config file for test.cls</literal>’.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\RequirePackage[<replaceable>option list</replaceable>]{<replaceable>package name</replaceable>}[<replaceable>release date</replaceable>]</literal>
-</term></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\RequirePackageWithOptions{<replaceable>package name</replaceable>}[<replaceable>release date</replaceable>]</literal>
+</term><term><literal>\RequirePackageWithOptions{<replaceable>package name</replaceable>}[<replaceable>release date</replaceable>]</literal>
</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\RequirePackage</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\RequirePackageWithOptions</primary></indexterm>
<para>Load a package, like the command <literal>\usepackage</literal> (see <link linkend="Additional-packages">Additional
@@ -1562,9 +1480,8 @@
<sect2 label="4.1.4" id="_005cDeclareTextCommand-_0026-_005cProvideTextCommand">
<title><literal>\DeclareTextCommand</literal> & <literal>\ProvideTextCommand</literal></title>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\DeclareTextCommand</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="_005cDeclareTextCommand"/><anchor id="_005cProvideTextCommand"/><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\DeclareTextCommand</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ProvideTextCommand</primary></indexterm>
-
<para>Synopsis, one of:
</para>
<screen>\DeclareTextCommand{\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}{<replaceable>encoding</replaceable>}{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
@@ -1620,9 +1537,7 @@
<sect2 label="4.1.5" id="_005cDeclareTextCommandDefault-_0026-_005cProvideTextCommandDefault">
<title><literal>\DeclareTextCommandDefault</literal> & <literal>\ProvideTextCommandDefault </literal></title>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\DeclareTextCommand</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\DeclareTextCommandDefault</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ProvideTextCommand</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="_005cDeclareTextCommandDefault"/><anchor id="_005cProvideTextCommandDefault"/><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\DeclareTextCommandDefault</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ProvideTextCommandDefault</primary></indexterm>
<para>Synopsis:
@@ -1800,7 +1715,7 @@
<sect2 label="4.1.11" id="_005cUseTextSymbol-_0026-_005cUseTextAccent">
<title><literal>\UseTextSymbol</literal> & <literal>\UseTextAccent</literal></title>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\UseTextSymbol</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="_005cUseTextSymbol"/><anchor id="_005cUseTextAccent"/><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\UseTextSymbol</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\UseTextAccent</primary></indexterm>
<para>Synopsis:
@@ -1864,7 +1779,7 @@
you can get bold sans serif by saying either of
<literal>\sffamily\bfseries</literal> or <literal>\bfseries\sffamily</literal>.
</para>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\nocorrlist</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="_005cnocorrlist"/><anchor id="_005cnocorr"/><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\nocorrlist</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\nocorr</primary></indexterm>
<para>One advantage of these commands is that they automatically insert italic
corrections if needed (see <link linkend="_005c_002f">\/</link>). Specifically, they insert the
@@ -1928,7 +1843,7 @@
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>emphasis</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\emph</primary></indexterm>
<para>Although it also changes fonts, the <literal>\emph{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}</literal> command
-is semantic, for text to be emphasized, and should not be used as a
+is semantic, for <replaceable>text</replaceable> to be emphasized, and should not be used as a
substitute for <literal>\textit</literal>. For example, <literal>\emph{<replaceable>start
text</replaceable> \emph{<replaceable>middle text</replaceable>} <replaceable>end text</replaceable>}</literal> will result in the
<replaceable>start text</replaceable> and <replaceable>end text</replaceable> in italics, but <replaceable>middle text</replaceable>
@@ -2018,7 +1933,7 @@
<para>Calligraphic letters, for use in math mode.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\mathversion</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="_005cmathversion"/><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\mathversion</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>math, bold</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>bold math</primary></indexterm>
<para>In addition, the command <literal>\mathversion{bold}</literal> can be used for
@@ -2025,7 +1940,7 @@
switching to bold letters and symbols in
formulas. <literal>\mathversion{normal}</literal> restores the default.
</para>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\oldstylenums</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="_005coldstylenums"/><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\oldstylenums</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>numerals, old-style</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>old-style numerals</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>lining numerals</primary></indexterm>
@@ -2481,7 +2396,7 @@
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\flushbottom</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Make all pages in the documents after this declaration have the same
+<para>Make all pages in the document after this declaration have the same
height, by stretching the vertical space where necessary to fill out the
page. This is most often used when making two-sided documents since the
differences in facing pages can be glaring.
@@ -2497,7 +2412,8 @@
(see <link linkend="_005cenlargethispage">\enlargethispage</link>).
</para>
<para>The <literal>\flushbottom</literal> state is the default only if you select the
-<literal>twoside</literal> document class option (see <link linkend="Document-class-options">Document class options</link>).
+<literal>twocolumn</literal> document class option (see <link linkend="Document-class-options">Document class options</link>),
+and for indexes made using <literal>makeidx</literal>.
</para>
</sect1>
@@ -2512,7 +2428,7 @@
document the facing pages may be different heights. This command can go
at any point in the document body. See <link linkend="_005cflushbottom">\flushbottom</link>.
</para>
-<para>This is the default unless you select the <literal>twoside</literal> document class
+<para>This is the default unless you select the <literal>twocolumn</literal> document class
option (see <link linkend="Document-class-options">Document class options</link>).
</para>
@@ -2688,7 +2604,7 @@
<sect1 label="5.6" id="_005cbaselineskip-_0026-_005cbaselinestretch">
<title><literal>\baselineskip</literal> & <literal>\baselinestretch</literal></title>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\baselineskip</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="_005cbaselineskip"/><anchor id="_005cbaselinestretch"/><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\baselineskip</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\baselinestretch</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\linespread</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>space between lines</primary></indexterm>
@@ -2758,24 +2674,25 @@
between lines can approach zero but if it becomes zero (or less than
zero) then the lines jump to 1pt apart.
</para>
-<para>Sometimes authors must, for editing purposes, put the document in double
-space or one-and-a-half space. The right way to influence the interline
-distance is via <literal>\baselinestretch</literal>. It scales
-<literal>\baselineskip</literal>, and has a default value of 1.0. It is a command,
-not a length, so change the scale factor as in
+<para>Sometimes authors must, for editing purposes, put the document in
+double space or one-and-a-half space. The right way to influence the
+interline distance is via <literal>\baselinestretch</literal>. It scales
+<literal>\baselineskip</literal>, and has a default value of 1.0. It is a
+command, not a length, and does not take effect until a font change
+happens, so set the scale factor like this:
<literal>\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{1.5}\selectfont</literal>.
</para>
<para>The most straightforward way to change the line spacing for an entire
document is to put <literal>\linespread{<replaceable>factor</replaceable>}</literal> in the preamble.
For double spacing, take <replaceable>factor</replaceable> to be 1.6 and for one-and-a-half
-spacing use 1.3. These number are rough: for instance, since the
+spacing use 1.3. These numbers are rough: for instance, since the
<literal>\baselineskip</literal> is about 1.2 times the font size, multiplying by
1.6 gives a baseline skip to font size ratio of about 2. (The
<literal>\linespread</literal> command is defined as
-<literal>\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{<replaceable>factor</replaceable>}</literal> so it won’t
-take effect until a font setting happens. But that always takes place at
-the start of a document, so there you don’t need to follow it with
-<literal>\selectfont</literal>.)
+<literal>\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{<replaceable>factor</replaceable>}</literal> so it also
+won’t take effect until a font setting happens. But that always takes
+place at the start of a document, so there you don’t need to follow it
+with <literal>\selectfont</literal>.)
</para>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>setspace</literal></primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>setspace</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
@@ -3150,9 +3067,11 @@
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>titlesec</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
<para>&latex; lets you change the appearance of the sectional units. As a
-simple example, you can change the section numbering to upper-case
-letters with <literal>\renewcommand\thesection{\Alph{section}}</literal> in the
-preamble (see <link linkend="_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol">\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</link>). CTAN
+simple example, you can change the section numbering to uppercase
+letters with this (in the preamble):
+
+<literal>\renewcommand\thesection{\Alph{section}}</literal> .
+(See <link linkend="_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol">\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</link>.) CTAN
has many packages that make this adjustment easier, notably
<literal>titlesec</literal>.
</para>
@@ -3533,15 +3452,16 @@
</para>
</sect1>
-
<sect1 label="6.5" id="_005csubsubsection-_0026-_005cparagraph-_0026-_005csubparagraph">
<title><literal>\subsubsection</literal>, <literal>\paragraph</literal>, <literal>\subparagraph</literal></title>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\subsubsection</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="_005csubsubsection"/><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\subsubsection</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>subsubsection</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\paragraph</primary></indexterm>
+<!-- -->
+<anchor id="_005cparagraph"/><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\paragraph</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>paragraph</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\subparagraph</primary></indexterm>
+<!-- -->
+<anchor id="_005csubparagraph"/><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\subparagraph</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>subparagraph</primary></indexterm>
<para>Synopsis, one of:
@@ -3615,10 +3535,10 @@
</para>
</sect1>
-
<sect1 label="6.6" id="_005cappendix">
<title><literal>\appendix</literal></title>
+
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\appendix</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>appendix</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>appendices</primary></indexterm>
@@ -3627,12 +3547,12 @@
</para>
<screen>\appendix
</screen>
-<para>This does not directly produce any output. But in a book or report it
-declares that subsequent <literal>\chapter</literal> commands start an appendix. In
-an article it does the same, for <literal>\section</literal> commands. It also
-resets the <literal>chapter</literal> and <literal>section</literal> counters to 0 in a
-book or report, and in an article resets the <literal>section</literal> and
-<literal>subsection</literal> counters.
+<para>This does not directly produce any output. But in a <literal>book</literal> or
+<literal>report</literal> document it declares that subsequent <literal>\chapter</literal>
+commands start an appendix. In an article it does the same, for
+<literal>\section</literal> commands. It also resets the <literal>chapter</literal> and
+<literal>section</literal> counters to 0 in a book or report, and in an article
+resets the <literal>section</literal> and <literal>subsection</literal> counters.
</para>
<para>In this book
</para>
@@ -3664,13 +3584,15 @@
<sect1 label="6.7" id="_005cfrontmatter-_0026-_005cmainmatter-_0026-_005cbackmatter">
<title><literal>\frontmatter</literal>, <literal>\mainmatter</literal>, <literal>\backmatter</literal></title>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\frontmatter</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="_005cfrontmatter"/><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\frontmatter</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>book, front matter</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>front matter of a book</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\mainmatter</primary></indexterm>
+<!-- -->
+<anchor id="_005cmainmatter"/><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\mainmatter</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>book, main matter</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>main matter of a book</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\backmatter</primary></indexterm>
+<!-- -->
+<anchor id="_005cbackmatter"/><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\backmatter</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>book, back matter</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>book, end matter</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>back matter of a book</primary></indexterm>
@@ -4241,7 +4163,7 @@
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>abstract</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
<para>The next example produces a one column abstract in a two column document (for
-a more flexible solution, use the package <filename>abstract</filename>).
+a more flexible solution, use the package <literal>abstract</literal>).
</para>
<!-- Adopted from http://www.tex.ac.uk/FAQ-onecolabs.html -->
<screen>\documentclass[twocolumn]{article}
@@ -5006,7 +4928,7 @@
...
\end{flushleft}
</screen>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\\ for <literal>flushleft</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\\ (for <literal>flushleft</literal>)</primary></indexterm>
<para>An environment that creates a paragraph whose lines are flush to the
left-hand margin, and ragged right. If you have lines that are too long
then &latex; will linebreak them in a way that avoids hyphenation and
@@ -5057,10 +4979,10 @@
scope of the declaration must contain the blank line or <literal>\end</literal>
command that ends the paragraph unit.
</para>
-<para>Here <literal>\raggedright</literal> in each second column keeps &latex; from doing
-very awkward typesetting to fit the text into the narrow column. Note
-that <literal>\raggedright</literal> is inside the curly braces <literal>{...}</literal> to
-delimit its effect.
+<para>Here <literal>\raggedright</literal> in each second column keeps &latex; from
+doing awkward typesetting to fit the text into the narrow column.
+Note that <literal>\raggedright</literal> is inside the curly braces
+<literal>{...}</literal> to delimit its effect.
</para>
<screen>\begin{tabular}{rp{2in}}
Team alpha &{\raggedright This team does all the real work.} \\
@@ -6480,10 +6402,11 @@
</para>
<screen>\frame{<replaceable>contents</replaceable>}
</screen>
-<para>Puts a rectangular frame around <replaceable>contents</replaceable>. The reference point is
-the bottom left corner of the frame. In contrast to <literal>\framebox</literal>
-(see <link linkend="_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029">\framebox (picture)</link>), this command puts no extra space is put
-between the frame and the object. It is fragile (see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
+<para>Puts a rectangular frame around <replaceable>contents</replaceable>. The reference point
+is the bottom left corner of the frame. In contrast to
+<literal>\framebox</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029">\framebox (picture)</link>), this command puts no
+extra space between the frame and the object. It is fragile
+(see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
</para>
</sect2>
@@ -6526,13 +6449,13 @@
<sect1 label="8.20" id="quotation-_0026-quote">
<title><literal>quotation</literal> & <literal>quote</literal></title>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>environment, <literal>quotation</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="quotation"/><indexterm role="fn"><primary>environment, <literal>quotation</literal></primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>quotation</literal> environment</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>quoted text with paragraph indentation, displaying</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>displaying quoted text with paragraph indentation</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>paragraph indentations in quoted text</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>environment, <literal>quote</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="quote"/><indexterm role="fn"><primary>environment, <literal>quote</literal></primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>quote</literal> environment</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>quoted text without paragraph indentation, displaying</primary></indexterm>
@@ -6857,12 +6780,12 @@
<para>The output will have two left-aligned columns with a vertical bar
between them. This is specified in <literal>tabular</literal>’s argument
<literal>{l|l}</literal>.
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>& for table cells</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>& (for table cells)</primary></indexterm>
Put the entries into different columns by separating them with an
ampersand, <literal>&</literal>. The end of each row is marked with a double
backslash, <literal>\\</literal>. Put a horizontal rule below a row, after a double
backslash, with <literal>\hline</literal>.
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\\ for <literal>tabular</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\\ (for <literal>tabular</literal>)</primary></indexterm>
After the last row the <literal>\\</literal> is optional, unless an <literal>\hline</literal>
command follows to put a rule below the table.
</para>
@@ -6901,14 +6824,14 @@
or space</replaceable> material is typeset in LR mode. This text is fragile
(see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
</para>
-<para>If between two columns there is no @-expression then &latex;’s
-<literal>book</literal>, <literal>article</literal>, and <literal>report</literal> classes will put on
-either side of each column a space of length <literal>\tabcolsep</literal>, which by
-default is 6pt. That is, by default adjacent columns are
+<para>If between two column specifiers there is no @-expression then
+&latex;’s <literal>book</literal>, <literal>article</literal>, and <literal>report</literal> classes will
+put on either side of each column a space of width <literal>\tabcolsep</literal>,
+which by default is 6pt. That is, by default adjacent columns are
separated by 12pt (so <literal>\tabcolsep</literal> is misleadingly named
since it is only half of the separation between tabular columns). In
-addition, a space of 6pt also comes before the first column and
-after the final column, unless you put a <literal>@{...}</literal> or <literal>|</literal>
+addition, a space of <literal>\tabcolsep</literal> also comes before the first
+column and after the final column, unless you put a <literal>@{...}</literal>
there.
</para>
<para>If you override the default and use an @-expression then &latex; does
@@ -6934,7 +6857,7 @@
$9$ &$80665$
\end{tabular}
</screen>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\extracolsep</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="_005cextracolsep"/><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\extracolsep</primary></indexterm>
<para>An <literal>\extracolsep{<replaceable>wd</replaceable>}</literal> command in an @-expression causes an
extra space of width <replaceable>wd</replaceable> to appear to the left of all subsequent
columns, until countermanded by another <literal>\extracolsep</literal>. Unlike
@@ -7760,7 +7683,7 @@
<screen>Then plainly know my heart's dear love is set \\
On the fair daughter of rich Capulet.
</screen>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\\ for <literal>verse</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\\ (for <literal>verse</literal>)</primary></indexterm>
<para>Separate the lines of each stanza with <literal>\\</literal>, and use one or more
blank lines to separate the stanzas.
</para>
@@ -7809,7 +7732,7 @@
<sect1 label="9.1" id="_005c_005c">
<title><literal>\\</literal></title>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\\ force line break</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\\ (force line break)</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>new line, starting</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>line break, forcing</primary></indexterm>
@@ -7883,7 +7806,7 @@
<sect1 label="9.2" id="_005cobeycr-_0026-_005crestorecr">
<title><literal>\obeycr</literal> & <literal>\restorecr</literal></title>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\obeycr</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="_005cobeycr"/><anchor id="_005crestorecr"/><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\obeycr</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\restorecr</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>new line, output as input</primary></indexterm>
@@ -7990,10 +7913,10 @@
better fit.
</para>
<para>The <literal>\-</literal> command only allows &latex; to break there, it does not
-require that it break there. You can force a split with something like
-<literal>Hef-\linebreak feron</literal>. Of course, if you later change the text
-then this forced break may look very odd, so this approach requires
-care.
+require that it break there. You can force a split with something
+like <literal>Hef-\linebreak feron</literal>. Of course, if you later change the
+text then this forced break may look out of place, so this approach
+requires care.
</para>
</sect1>
@@ -8030,7 +7953,7 @@
<sect1 label="9.6" id="_005cfussy-_0026-_005csloppy">
<title><literal>\fussy</literal> & <literal>\sloppy</literal></title>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\fussy</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="_005cfussy"/><anchor id="_005csloppy"/><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\fussy</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\sloppy</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>line breaks, changing</primary></indexterm>
@@ -8115,7 +8038,7 @@
<sect1 label="9.8" id="_005clinebreak-_0026-_005cnolinebreak">
<title><literal>\linebreak</literal> & <literal>\nolinebreak</literal></title>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\linebreak</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="_005clinebreak"/><anchor id="_005cnolinebreak"/><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\linebreak</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\nolinebreak</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>line breaks, forcing</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>line breaks, preventing</primary></indexterm>
@@ -8164,12 +8087,13 @@
understand how to influence its actions.
</para>
<!-- credit: H Vogt https://tex.stackexchange.com/a/115563 -->
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>badness</primary></indexterm>
<para>&latex;’s algorithm for splitting a document into pages is more complex
than just waiting until there is enough material to fill a page and
outputting the result. Instead, &latex; typesets more material than
would fit on the page and then chooses a break that is optimal in some
-way (it has the smallest badness). An example of the advantage of this
-approach is that if the page has some vertical space that can be
+way (it has the smallest <firstterm>badness</firstterm>). An example of the advantage of
+this approach is that if the page has some vertical space that can be
stretched or shrunk, such as with rubber lengths between paragraphs,
then &latex; can use that to avoid widow lines (where a new page starts
with the last line of a paragraph; &latex; can squeeze the extra line
@@ -8193,10 +8117,10 @@
<sect1 label="10.1" id="_005cclearpage-_0026-_005ccleardoublepage">
<title><literal>\clearpage</literal> & <literal>\cleardoublepage</literal></title>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\clearpage</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="_005cclearpage"/><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\clearpage</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>flushing floats and starting a page</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>starting a new page and clearing floats</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\cleardoublepage</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="_005ccleardoublepage"/><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\cleardoublepage</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>starting on a right-hand page</primary></indexterm>
<para>Synopsis:
@@ -8231,7 +8155,9 @@
}
</screen>
<para>If you want &latex;’s standard <literal>\chapter</literal> command to do this then
-add the line <literal>\let\cleardoublepage\clearemptydoublepage</literal>.
+add the line <literal>\let\cleardoublepage\clearemptydoublepage</literal>. (Of
+course this affects all uses of <literal>\cleardoublepage</literal>, not just the
+one in <literal>\chapter</literal>.)
</para>
<para>The command <literal>\newpage</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cnewpage">\newpage</link>) also ends the current
page, but without clearing pending floats. And, if &latex; is in
@@ -8289,8 +8215,8 @@
<para>Synopsis, one of:
</para>
-<screen>\enlargethispage{size}
-\enlargethispage*{size}
+<screen>\enlargethispage{<replaceable>size</replaceable>}
+\enlargethispage*{<replaceable>size</replaceable>}
</screen>
<para>Enlarge the <literal>\textheight</literal> for the current page. The required
argument <replaceable>size</replaceable> must be a rigid length (see <link linkend="Lengths">Lengths</link>). It may be
@@ -8314,7 +8240,7 @@
<sect1 label="10.4" id="_005cpagebreak-_0026-_005cnopagebreak">
<title><literal>\pagebreak</literal> & <literal>\nopagebreak</literal></title>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\pagebreak</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="_005cpagebreak"/><anchor id="_005cnopagebreak"/><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\pagebreak</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\nopagebreak</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>page break, forcing</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>page break, preventing</primary></indexterm>
@@ -8337,8 +8263,8 @@
the more insistent the request. Both commands are fragile
(see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
</para>
-<para>&latex;’s page endings are optimized so ordinarily you only use this
-command in a document body to polish the final version, or inside
+<para>&latex;’s page endings are optimized so ordinarily you only use these
+commands in a document body to polish the final version, or inside
commands.
</para>
<para>If you use these inside a paragraph, they apply to the point following
@@ -8704,13 +8630,15 @@
<sect1 label="12.1" id="_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand">
<title><literal>\newcommand</literal> & <literal>\renewcommand</literal></title>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\newcommand</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="_005cnewcommand"/><anchor id="_005crenewcommand"/><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\newcommand</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\renewcommand</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>commands, defining new ones</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>commands, redefining</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>defining a new command</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>redefining a command</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>new commands, defining</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Synopses, one of:
+<para>Synopses, one of (three regular forms, three starred forms):
</para>
<screen>\newcommand{\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
\newcommand{\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>]{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
@@ -8719,9 +8647,10 @@
\newcommand*{\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>]{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
\newcommand*{\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>][<replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>]{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
</screen>
-<para>or one of these.
+<para>or all the same possibilities with <literal>\renewcommand</literal> instead of
+<literal>\newcommand</literal>:
</para>
-<screen>\renewcommand{\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>]{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
+<screen>\renewcommand{\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
\renewcommand{\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>]{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
\renewcommand{\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>][<replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>]{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
\renewcommand*{\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
@@ -8728,25 +8657,25 @@
\renewcommand*{\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>]{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
\renewcommand*{\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>][<replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>]{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
</screen>
-<para>Define or redefine a command (see also the discussion of
-<literal>\DeclareRobustCommand</literal> in <link linkend="Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</link>).
+
+<para>Define or redefine a command (see also <literal>\DeclareRobustCommand</literal> in
+<link linkend="Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</link>).
</para>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>starred form, defining new commands</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>*-form, defining new commands</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\long</primary></indexterm>
<para>The starred form of these two forbids the arguments from containing
-multiple paragraphs of text (in plain &tex; terms, the commands
+multiple paragraphs of text (in plain &tex; terms: the commands
are not <literal>\long</literal>). With the default form, arguments can be
multiple paragraphs.
</para>
-<para>These are the parameters:
+<para>These are the parameters (examples follow):
</para>
<variablelist><varlistentry><term><replaceable>cmd</replaceable>
-</term><listitem>
-<para>Required; <literal>\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable></literal> is the command name. It must begin with a backslash, <literal>\</literal>,
-and must not begin with the four character string <literal>\end</literal>. For
-<literal>\newcommand</literal>, it must not be already defined. For
-<literal>\renewcommand</literal>, this name must already be defined.
+</term><listitem><para>Required; <literal>\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable></literal> is the command name. It must begin with a
+backslash, <literal>\</literal>, and must not begin with the four character string
+<literal>\end</literal>. For <literal>\newcommand</literal>, it must not be already defined.
+For <literal>\renewcommand</literal>, this name must already be defined.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>nargs</replaceable>
</term><listitem><para>Optional; an integer from 0 to 9, specifying the number of arguments
@@ -8756,37 +8685,53 @@
different number of arguments than the old version.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>
-</term><listitem><para>Optional; if this argument is present then the first argument of
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>optional arguments, defining and using</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>arguments, optional, defining and using</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Optional; if this argument is present then the first argument of
<literal>\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable></literal> is optional, with default value <replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>
-(which may be the empty string). If <replaceable>optargsdefault</replaceable> is not present
+(which may be the empty string). If <replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable> is not present
then <literal>\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable></literal> does not take an optional argument.
</para>
-<indexterm role="cp"><primary>positional parameter</primary></indexterm>
-<para>That is, if <literal>\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable></literal> is used with square brackets, as in
-<literal>\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>[<replaceable>optval</replaceable>]{...}...</literal>, then within <replaceable>defn</replaceable> the
-parameter <literal>#1</literal> is set to the value of <replaceable>optval</replaceable>. On the
-other hand, if <literal>\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable></literal> is called without the square brackets
-then within <replaceable>defn</replaceable> the parameter <literal>#1</literal> is set to the value of
-<replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>. In either case, the required arguments start with
-<literal>#2</literal>.
+<para>That is, if <literal>\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable></literal> is called with a following argument in
+square brackets, as in <literal>\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>[<replaceable>optval</replaceable>]{...}...</literal>, then
+within <replaceable>defn</replaceable> the parameter <literal>#1</literal> is set to <replaceable>optval</replaceable>.
+On the other hand, if <literal>\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable></literal> is called without following
+square brackets then within <replaceable>defn</replaceable> the parameter <literal>#1</literal> is set
+to <replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>. In either case, the required arguments start
+with <literal>#2</literal>.
</para>
-<para>Omitting <literal>[<replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>]</literal> is different from having the
-square brackets with no contents, as in <literal>[]</literal>. The former sets
-<literal>#1</literal> to the value of <replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>; the latter sets <literal>#1</literal>
-to the empty string.
+<para>Omitting <literal>[<replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>]</literal> from the definition is entirely
+different from giving the square brackets with empty contents, as in
+<literal>[]</literal>. The former says the command being defined takes no
+optional argument, so <literal>#1</literal> is the first required argument (if
+<inlineequation><mathphrase><replaceable>nargs</replaceable> ≥ 1</mathphrase></inlineequation>); the latter sets the optional argument
+<literal>#1</literal> to the empty string as the default, if no optional argument
+was given in the call.
</para>
+<para>Similarly, omitting <literal>[<replaceable>optval</replaceable>]</literal> from a call is also entirely
+different from giving the square brackets with empty contents. The
+former sets <literal>#1</literal> to the value of <replaceable>optval</replaceable> (assuming the
+command was defined to take an optional argument); the latter sets
+<literal>#1</literal> to the empty string, just as with any other value.
+</para>
+<para>If a command is not defined to take an optional argument, but is
+called with an optional argument, the results are unpredictable: there
+may be a &latex; error, there may be incorrect typeset output, or both.
+</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>defn</replaceable>
-</term><listitem><para>Required; the text to be substituted for every occurrence of
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>parameters, substituting</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Required; the text to be substituted for every occurrence of
<literal>\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable></literal>. The parameters <literal>#1</literal>, <literal>#2</literal>,
-... <literal>#<replaceable>nargs</replaceable></literal> are replaced by the values that you supply when
-you call the command (or by the default value if there is an optional
-argument and you don’t exercise the option).
+…, <literal>#<replaceable>nargs</replaceable></literal> are replaced by the values supplied when
+the command is called (or by <replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable> in the case of an
+optional argument not specified in the call, as just explained).
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>blanks, after control sequences</primary></indexterm>
<para>&tex; ignores blanks in the source following a control word
-(see <link linkend="Control-sequences">Control sequences</link>), as in ‘<literal>\cmd </literal>’. If you actually want a
-space there, one solution is to type <literal>{}</literal> after the command
-(‘<literal>\cmd{} </literal>’, and another solution is to use an explicit control
+(see <link linkend="Control-sequences">Control sequences</link>), as in ‘<literal>\cmd </literal>’. If you want a space
+there, one solution is to type <literal>{}</literal> after the command
+(‘<literal>\cmd{} </literal>’), and another solution is to use an explicit control
space (‘<literal>\cmd\ </literal>’).
</para>
<para>A simple example of defining a new command:
@@ -8794,14 +8739,15 @@
replaced by the longer text. Redefining an existing command is similar:
<literal>\renewcommand{\qedsymbol}{{\small QED}}</literal>.
</para>
-<para>If you try to define a command and the name has already been used then
-you get something like ‘<literal>LaTeX Error: Command \fred already
-defined. Or name \end... illegal, see p.192 of the manual</literal>’. If you try
-to redefine a command and the name has not yet been used then you get
-something like ‘<literal>LaTeX Error: \hank undefined</literal>’.
+<para>If you use <literal>\newcommand</literal> and the command name has already been
+used then you get something like ‘<literal>LaTeX Error: Command \fred
+already defined. Or name \end... illegal, see p.192 of the manual</literal>’.
+Similarly, If you use <literal>\renewcommand</literal> and the command name has
+not been defined then you get something like ‘<literal>LaTeX Error: \hank
+undefined</literal>’.
</para>
<para>Here the first definition creates a command with no arguments, and the
-second, one with one required argument.
+second, a command with one required argument:
</para>
<screen>\newcommand{\student}{Ms~O'Leary}
\newcommand{\defref}[1]{Definition~\ref{#1}}
@@ -8828,12 +8774,12 @@
<screen>\newcommand{\lawyers}[3][company]{#2, #3, and~#1}
I employ \lawyers[Howe]{Dewey}{Cheatem}.
</screen>
-<para>The output is ‘<literal>I employ Dewey, Cheatem, and Howe</literal>’. The optional
-argument, the <literal>Howe</literal>, is associated with <literal>#1</literal>, while
+<para>The output is ‘<literal>I employ Dewey, Cheatem, and Howe.</literal>’. The optional
+argument, <literal>Howe</literal>, is associated with <literal>#1</literal>, while
<literal>Dewey</literal> and <literal>Cheatem</literal> are associated with <literal>#2</literal>
and <literal>#3</literal>. Because of the optional argument,
-<literal>\lawyers{Dewey}{Cheatem}</literal> will give the output ‘<literal>I employ
-Dewey, Cheatem, and company</literal>’.
+<literal>\lawyers{Dewey}{Cheatem}</literal> will give the output ‘<literal>I
+employ Dewey, Cheatem, and company.</literal>’.
</para>
<para>The braces around <replaceable>defn</replaceable> do not define a group, that is, they do not
delimit the scope of the result of expanding <replaceable>defn</replaceable>. For example,
@@ -8841,39 +8787,46 @@
</para>
<screen>The \shipname{Monitor} met the \shipname{Merrimac}.
</screen>
-<para>the words ‘<literal>met the</literal>’ would incorrectly be in italics. The solution
-is to put another pair of braces inside the definition:
-<literal>\newcommand{\shipname}[1]{{\it #1}}</literal>.
+<para>the words ‘<literal>met the</literal>’, and the period, would incorrectly be in
+italics. The solution is to put another pair of braces inside the
+definition: <literal>\newcommand{\shipname}[1]{{\it #1}}</literal>.
</para>
<sect2 label="12.1.1" id="Control-sequences">
<title>Control sequence, control word and control symbol</title>
-<para>When reading input &tex; converts the sequences of read characters into
-a sequence of <firstterm>tokens</firstterm>. When &tex; sees a backslash <literal>\</literal>, it
-will handle the following characters in a special way in order to make a
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>control sequences</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>When reading input &tex; converts the stream of read characters into a
+sequence of <firstterm>tokens</firstterm>. When &tex; sees a backslash <literal>\</literal>, it will
+handle the following characters in a special way in order to make a
<firstterm>control sequence</firstterm> token.
</para>
<para>The control sequences fall into two categories:
</para>
-<itemizedlist><listitem><para><firstterm>control word</firstterm>, when the control sequence is gathered from a
-<literal>\</literal> followed by at least one ASCII letter, followed by at least one
-blank. The sequence of at least one ASCII letter is called the
-<firstterm>control sequence name</firstterm>.
-</para></listitem><listitem><para><firstterm>control symbol</firstterm>, when the control sequence is gathered from a
+<itemizedlist><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>control word, defined</primary></indexterm>
+<para><firstterm>control word</firstterm>, when the control sequence is gathered from a
+<literal>\</literal> followed by at least one ASCII letter (<literal>A-Z</literal> and
+<literal>a-z</literal>), followed by at least one non-letter.
+</para>
+</listitem><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>control symbol, defined</primary></indexterm>
+<para><firstterm>control symbol</firstterm>, when the control sequence is gathered from a
<literal>\</literal> followed by one non-letter character.
</para></listitem></itemizedlist>
+<para>The sequence of characters so found after the <literal>\</literal> is also called
+the <firstterm>control sequence name</firstterm>.
+</para>
<para>Blanks after a control word are ignored and do not produce any
whitespace in the output (see <link linkend="_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand">\newcommand & \renewcommand</link> and
<link linkend="_005c_0028SPACE_0029">\(SPACE)</link>).
</para>
-<para>Just as the <literal>\relax</literal> command does nothing, the following will print
-‘<literal>Hello!</literal>’:
+<para>Just as the <literal>\relax</literal> command does nothing, the following input
+will simply print ‘<literal>Hello!</literal>’ :
</para>
<screen>Hel\relax <!-- /@w --> <!-- /@w --> <!-- /@w -->
<!-- /@w --> <!-- /@w --> <!-- /@w -->lo!
</screen>
-<para>This is because blanks after <literal>\relax</literal>, including the newline are
+<para>This is because blanks after <literal>\relax</literal>, including the newline, are
ignored, and blanks at the beginning of a line are also ignored
(see <link linkend="Leading-blanks">Leading blanks</link>).
</para>
@@ -8909,14 +8862,17 @@
\providecommand{\myaffiliation}{Lyc\'ee Henri IV}
From \myaffiliation.
</screen>
-<para>outputs ‘<literal>From Saint Michael's College</literal>’. Unlike <literal>\newcommand</literal>,
-the repeated use of <literal>\providecommand</literal> does not give an error.
+<para>outputs ‘<literal>From Saint Michael's College.</literal>’. Unlike
+<literal>\newcommand</literal>, the repeated use of <literal>\providecommand</literal> to (try
+to) define <literal>\myaffiliation</literal> does not give an error.
</para>
-
</sect1>
<sect1 label="12.3" id="_005cmakeatletter-_0026-_005cmakeatother">
<title><literal>\makeatletter</literal> & <literal>\makeatother</literal></title>
+<anchor id="_005cmakeatletter"/><anchor id="_005cmakeatother"/><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\makeatother</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\makeatother</primary></indexterm>
+
<para>Synopsis:
</para>
<screen>\makeatletter
@@ -9177,7 +9133,7 @@
<sect1 label="12.8" id="_005cnewenvironment-_0026-_005crenewenvironment">
<title><literal>\newenvironment</literal> & <literal>\renewenvironment</literal></title>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\newenvironment</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="_005cnewenvironment"/><anchor id="_005crenewenvironment"/><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\newenvironment</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\renewenvironment</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>environments, defining</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>defining new environments</primary></indexterm>
@@ -9554,7 +9510,7 @@
<sect1 label="12.12" id="_005cignorespaces-_0026-_005cignorespacesafterend">
<title><literal>\ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterend</literal></title>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ignorespaces</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="_005cignorespaces"/><anchor id="_005cignorespacesafterend"/><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ignorespaces</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ignorespacesafterend</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>spaces, ignore around commands</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>commands, ignore spaces</primary></indexterm>
@@ -9570,7 +9526,7 @@
<para>Both commands cause &latex; to ignore blanks (that is, characters of
catcode 10 such as space or tabulation) after the end of the
command up to the first box or non-blank character. The first is a
-command from plain &tex;, and the second is &latex;-specific.
+primitive command of &tex;, and the second is &latex;-specific.
</para>
<para>The <literal>\ignorespaces</literal> is often used when defining commands via
<literal>\newcommand</literal>, or <literal>\newenvironment</literal>, or <literal>\def</literal>. The
@@ -9670,7 +9626,7 @@
<literal>\ </literal> for this. See <link linkend="_005c_0028SPACE_0029">\(SPACE)</link>.)
</para>
<para>The <literal>xspace</literal> package provides <literal>\xspace</literal>. It is for writing
-commands which are designed to be used mainly in text. It must be place
+commands which are designed to be used mainly in text. It must be placed
at the very end of the definition of these commands. It inserts a space
after that command unless what immediately follows is in a list of
exceptions. In this example, the empty braces are not needed.
@@ -9969,7 +9925,7 @@
<sect1 label="13.8" id="_005cday-_0026-_005cmonth-_0026-_005cyear">
<title><literal>\day</literal> & <literal>\month</literal> & <literal>\year</literal></title>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\day</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="_005cday"/><anchor id="_005cmonth"/><anchor id="_005cyear"/><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\day</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\month</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\year</primary></indexterm>
@@ -10134,11 +10090,11 @@
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>mm</primary></indexterm><literal>mm</literal>
</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>millimeter</primary></indexterm>
-<anchor id="units-of-length-mm"/><para>Millimeter, 2.845 pt
+<anchor id="units-of-length-mm"/><para>Millimeter, 2.845pt
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>cm</primary></indexterm><literal>cm</literal>
</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>centimeter</primary></indexterm>
-<anchor id="units-of-length-cm"/><para>Centimeter, 10 mm
+<anchor id="units-of-length-cm"/><para>Centimeter, 10mm
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>dd</primary></indexterm><literal>dd</literal>
</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>didot point</primary></indexterm>
@@ -10518,12 +10474,12 @@
``My dear Mr. Bennet,'' said his lady to him one day,
``have you heard that Netherfield Park is let at last?''
</screen>
-<para>A paragraph separator is made of a sequence of at least one blank
-line, at least one of which is not terminated by a comment. A blank
-line is a line that is empty or made only of blank characters such as
-space or tab. Comments in source code are started with a <literal>%</literal> and
-span up to the end of line. In the following example the two columns
-are identical:
+<para>A paragraph separator can be made of a sequence of at least one blank
+line, at least one of which is not terminated by a comment. A blank line
+is a line that is empty or made only of blank characters such as space
+or tab. Comments in source code are started with a <literal>%</literal> and span up
+to the end of line. In the following example the two columns are
+identical:
</para>
<screen>\documentclass[twocolumn]{article}
\begin{document}
@@ -10626,9 +10582,8 @@
<sect1 label="15.2" id="_005cindent-_0026-_005cnoindent">
<title><literal>\indent</literal> & <literal>\noindent</literal></title>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\indent</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="_005cindent"/><anchor id="_005cnoindent"/><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\indent</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\noindent</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\parindent</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>indent, forcing</primary></indexterm>
<para>Synopsis:
@@ -10668,6 +10623,7 @@
\noindent shows this clearly.
</screen>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\parindent</primary></indexterm>
<para>To omit indentation in the entire document put
<literal>\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}</literal> in the preamble. If you do that,
you may want to also set the length of spaces between paragraphs,
@@ -10685,7 +10641,7 @@
<sect1 label="15.3" id="_005cparindent-_0026-_005cparskip">
<title><literal>\parindent</literal> & <literal>\parskip</literal></title>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\parindent</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="_005cparindent"/><anchor id="_005cparskip"/><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\parindent</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\parskip</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>paragraph indentation</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>horizontal paragraph indentation</primary></indexterm>
@@ -10886,7 +10842,7 @@
<sect1 label="16.1" id="Subscripts-_0026-superscripts">
<title>Subscripts & superscripts</title>
-<indexterm role="cp"><primary>superscript</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="superscript"/><anchor id="subscript"/><indexterm role="cp"><primary>superscript</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>subscript</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>^ superscript</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>_ subscript</primary></indexterm>
@@ -10926,8 +10882,9 @@
subscript on a subscript, or supers on subs, or subs on supers. So,
expressions such as <literal>e^{x^2}</literal> and <literal>x_{i_0}</literal> give correct
output. Note the use in those expressions of curly braces to give the
-<replaceable>base</replaceable> a determined <replaceable>exp</replaceable>. If you enter <literal>\(3^3^3\)</literal> then
-you get ‘<literal>Double superscript</literal>’.
+<replaceable>base</replaceable> a determined <replaceable>exp</replaceable>. If you enter <literal>\(3^3^3\)</literal>, this
+interpreted as <literal>\(3^{3}^{3}\)</literal> and then you get &tex; error
+‘<literal>Double superscript</literal>’.
</para>
<para>&latex; does the right thing when something has both a subscript and a
superscript. In this example the integral has both. They come out in
@@ -10937,7 +10894,7 @@
\int_{x=a}^b f'(x)\,dx = f(b)-f(a)
\end{displaymath}
</screen>
-<para>Note the parentheses around <literal>x=a</literal> to make the entire expression a
+<para>Note the curly braces around <literal>x=a</literal> to make the entire expression a
subscript.
</para>
<para>To put a superscript or subscript before a symbol, use a construct like
@@ -10947,7 +10904,7 @@
</para>
<para>Using the subscript or superscript character outside of math mode or
display math mode, as in <literal>the expression x^2</literal>, will get you
-the error ‘<literal>Missing $ inserted</literal>’.
+the &tex; error ‘<literal>Missing $ inserted</literal>’.
</para>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>mhchem</literal></primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>mhchem</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
@@ -11044,11 +11001,12 @@
</term><listitem><para>⨂ Variable-sized, or n-ary, circled times operator (operator).
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bigtriangledown</primary></indexterm><literal>\bigtriangledown</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>▽ Variable-sized, or n-ary, open triangle pointing down
-(operator).
+</term><listitem><para>▽ Variable-sized, or n-ary, open triangle
+pointing down (binary). Synonym: <replaceable>\varbigtriangledown</replaceable>.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bigtriangleup</primary></indexterm><literal>\bigtriangleup</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>△ Variable-sized, or n-ary, open triangle pointing up (operator).
+</term><listitem><para>△ Variable-sized, or n-ary, open triangle
+pointing up (binary). Synonym: <replaceable>\varbigtriangleup</replaceable>.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bigsqcup</primary></indexterm><literal>\bigsqcup</literal>
</term><listitem><para>⨆ Variable-sized, or n-ary, square union (operator).
@@ -11851,7 +11809,7 @@
</term><listitem><para>Paragraph sign (pilcrow) in math mode, ¶.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\mathsection</primary></indexterm><literal>\mathsection</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>Section sign in math mode §.
+</term><listitem><para>Section sign in math mode: §.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\mathsterling</primary></indexterm><literal>\mathsterling</literal>
</term><listitem><para>Sterling sign in math mode: £.
@@ -11896,10 +11854,10 @@
<sect2 label="16.2.2" id="_005cboldmath-_0026-_005cunboldmath">
<title><literal>\boldmath</literal> & <literal>\unboldmath</literal></title>
+<anchor id="_005cboldmath"/><anchor id="_005cunboldmath"/><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\boldmath</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\unboldmath</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>boldface mathematics</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="cp"><primary>symbols, boldface</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\boldmath</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\unboldmath</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>mathematics, boldface</primary></indexterm>
<para>Synopsis (used in paragraph mode or LR mode):
</para>
@@ -11913,9 +11871,9 @@
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\unboldmath</primary></indexterm>
<para>Declarations to change the letters and symbols in <replaceable>math</replaceable> to be in
a bold font, or to countermand that and bring back the regular
-(non-bold) default. They must be used when not in math mode or display
-math mode (see <link linkend="Modes">Modes</link>). Both commands are fragile
-(see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
+(non-bold) default, respectively. They must be used when <emphasis>not</emphasis> in
+math mode or display math mode (see <link linkend="Modes">Modes</link>). Both commands are
+fragile (see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
</para>
<para>In this example each <literal>\boldmath</literal> command takes place inside an
<literal>\mbox</literal>,
@@ -11923,30 +11881,76 @@
<screen>we have $\mbox{\boldmath \( v \)} = 5\cdot\mbox{\boldmath \( u \)$}$
</screen>
<para>which means <literal>\boldmath</literal> is only called in a text mode, here LR
-mode, and explains why &latex; must switch to math mode to set <literal>v</literal>
-and <literal>u</literal>.
+mode, and explains why we must switch &latex; into math mode to set
+<literal>v</literal> and <literal>u</literal>.
</para>
<para>If you use either command inside math mode, as with <literal>Trouble: \(
\boldmath x \)</literal>, then you get something like ‘<literal>LaTeX Font Warning:
-Command \boldmath invalid in math mode on input line 11</literal>’ and ‘<literal>LaTeX
-Font Warning: Command \mathversion invalid in math mode on input line
-11</literal>’.
+Command \boldmath invalid in math mode</literal>’ and ‘<literal>LaTeX Font Warning:
+Command \mathversion invalid in math mode</literal>’.
</para>
+
+<sect3 label="16.2.2.1" id="bm">
+<title><literal>bm</literal>: Individual bold math symbols</title>
+
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>bm</literal></primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>bm</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>symbols, boldface</primary></indexterm>
-<para>There are many issues with <literal>\boldmath</literal>. New documents should use
-the <literal>bm</literal> package provided by the &latex; Project team. A complete
-description is outside the scope of this document (see the full
-documentation on CTAN) but even this small example
+<!-- https://github.com/latex3/latex2e/issues/974 -->
+<para>Specifying <literal>\boldmath</literal> is the best method for typesetting a whole
+math expression in bold. But to typeset individual symbols within an
+expression in bold, the <literal>bm</literal> package provided by the &latex;
+Project team is better. Its usage is outside the scope of this
+document (see its documentation at <ulink url="https://ctan.org/pkg/bm">https://ctan.org/pkg/bm</ulink> or in
+your installation) but the spacing in the output of this small example
+will show that it is an improvement over <literal>\boldmath</literal> within an
+expression:
</para>
<screen>\usepackage{bm} % in preamble
...
we have $\bm{v} = 5\cdot\bm{u}$
</screen>
-<para>shows that it is an improvement over <literal>\boldmath</literal>.
+</sect3>
+<sect3 label="16.2.2.2" id="OpenType-bold-math">
+<title>OpenType bold math</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>fontspec</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>fontspec</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+
+<para>Unfortunately, when using the Unicode engines (Xe&latex;,
+Lua&latex;), neither <literal>\boldmath</literal> nor <literal>bm</literal> usually work
+well, because the OpenType math fonts normally used with those engines
+rarely come with a bold companion, and both <literal>\boldmath</literal> and
+<literal>bm</literal> require this. (The implementation of <literal>bm</literal> relies
+on <literal>\boldmath</literal>, so the requirements are the same.) If you do have
+a bold math font, though, then <literal>\boldmath</literal> and <literal>bm</literal> work
+fine.
</para>
+<para>If no such font is available, one alternative is to construct fake
+bold fonts with the <literal>fontspec</literal> package’s <literal>FakeBold=1</literal>
+parameter (see its documentation,
+<ulink url="https://ctan.org/pkg/fontspec">https://ctan.org/pkg/fontspec</ulink>). This may be acceptable for
+drafting or informal distribution, but the results are far from a true
+bold font.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>unicode-math</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>unicode-math</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\symbf</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\symbfit</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Another alternative to handling bold for OpenType math fonts is to use
+the <literal>\symbf</literal> (bold), <literal>\symbfit</literal> (bold italic), and related
+commands from the <literal>unicode-math</literal> package. These do not change
+the current font, but rather change the (Unicode) “alphabet” used,
+which in practice is more widely supported than a separate bold font.
+Many variations are possible, and so there are subtleties to getting the
+desired output. As usual, see the package documentation
+(<ulink url="https://ctan.org/pkg/unicode-math">https://ctan.org/pkg/unicode-math</ulink>).
+</para>
+</sect3>
</sect2>
<sect2 label="16.2.3" id="Blackboard-bold">
<title>Blackboard bold</title>
@@ -11971,8 +11975,9 @@
<para>the <literal>\mathbb{N}</literal> gives blackboard bold symbol ℕ,
representing the natural numbers.
</para>
-<para>If you use other than an uppercase letter then you do not get an error
-but you get strange results, including unexpected characters.
+<para>If the argument contains something other than an uppercase letter, you
+do not get an error but you do get strange results, including
+unexpected characters.
</para>
<para>There are packages that give access to symbols other than just the
capital letters; look on CTAN.
@@ -12061,13 +12066,13 @@
<sect3 label="16.2.5.1" id="_005cleft-_0026-_005cright">
<title><literal>\left</literal> & <literal>\right</literal></title>
+<anchor id="_005cleft"/><anchor id="_005cright"/><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\left</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\right</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>delimiters, paired</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>paired delimiters</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>matching parentheses</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>matching brackets</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>null delimiter</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\left</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\right</primary></indexterm>
<!-- Credit: SE userPhilipp https://tex.stackexchange.com/a/12793 -->
@@ -12104,7 +12109,7 @@
<para>However, <replaceable>delimiter1</replaceable> and <replaceable>delimiter2</replaceable> need not match. A common
case is that you want an unmatched brace, as below. Use a period,
-‘<literal>.</literal>’, as a null delimiter.
+‘<literal>.</literal>’, as a <firstterm>null delimiter</firstterm>.
</para>
<screen>\begin{equation}
f(n)=\left\{\begin{array}{ll}
@@ -12190,6 +12195,9 @@
<sect3 label="16.2.5.2" id="_005cbigl-_0026-_005cbigr-etc_002e">
<title><literal>\bigl</literal>, <literal>\bigr</literal>, etc.</title>
+<anchor id="_005cbigl"/><anchor id="_005cbigr"/><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bigl</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bigr</primary></indexterm>
+
<para>Synopsis, one of:
</para>
<screen>\bigl<replaceable>delimiter1</replaceable> ... \bigr<replaceable>delimiter2</replaceable>
@@ -12312,14 +12320,15 @@
usage.
</para>
<anchor id="ellipses-ldots"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ldots</primary></indexterm><literal>\ldots</literal>
+</term><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\mathellipsis</primary></indexterm><literal>\mathellipsis</literal>
+</term><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\dots</primary></indexterm><literal>\dots</literal>
</term><listitem><para>Ellipsis on the baseline, …. Used as: <literal>\(
-x_0,\ldots x_{n-1} \)</literal>. Another example is the above array example. A
-synonym is <literal>\mathellipsis</literal>. A synonym from the <literal>amsmath</literal>
-package is <literal>\hdots</literal>.
+x_0,\ldots x_{n-1} \)</literal>. Another example is the above array example.
+Synonyms are <literal>\mathellipsis</literal> and <literal>\dots</literal>. A synonym from
+the <literal>amsmath</literal> package is <literal>\hdots</literal>.
</para>
<para>You can also use this command outside of mathematical text, as in
-<literal>The gears, brakes, \ldots{} are all broken</literal>. (In a paragraph
-mode or LR mode a synonym for <literal>\ldots</literal> is <literal>\dots</literal>.)
+<literal>The gears, brakes, \ldots{} are all broken</literal>.
</para>
<anchor id="ellipses-vdots"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\vdots</primary></indexterm><literal>\vdots</literal>
</term><listitem><para>Vertical ellipsis, ⋮. See the above array example for a
@@ -12340,6 +12349,10 @@
multiple of any \( p_i \).
Conclusion: there are infinitely many primes \( p_0, p_1, \dotsc \).
</screen>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\dotsc</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\dotsb</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\dotsi</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\dots</primary></indexterm>
<para>In the first line &latex; looks to the comma following <literal>\dots</literal> to
determine that it should output an ellipsis on the baseline. The second
line has a <literal>\cdot</literal> following <literal>\dots</literal> so &latex; outputs an
@@ -12351,7 +12364,29 @@
or relation symbol, <literal>\dotsi</literal> for dots with integrals, or
<literal>\dotso</literal> for others.
</para>
+<!-- https://github.com/latex3/latex2e/issues/976 -->
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>unicode-math</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>unicode-math</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+<para>The <literal>\dots</literal> command from <literal>amsmath</literal> differs from the
+&latex; kernel’s <literal>\dots</literal> command in another way: it outputs a
+thin space after the ellipsis. Furthermore, the <literal>unicode-math</literal>
+package automatically loads <literal>amsmath</literal>, so <literal>amsmath</literal>’s
+<literal>\dots</literal> may be active even when you did not explicitly load it,
+thus changing the output from <literal>\dots</literal> in both text and math mode.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>ellipsis, in Unicode (U+2026)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>ellipsis, traditional (three periods)</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Yet more about the ellipsis commands: when running under Unicode
+engines (<literal>lualatex</literal>, <literal>xelatex</literal>), &latex; will use the
+Unicode ellipsis character (U+2026) in the font if it’s available;
+under traditional &tex; engines (<literal>pdflatex</literal>, <literal>latex</literal>), it
+will typeset three spaced periods. Generally, the Unicode
+single-character ellipsis has almost no space between the three
+periods, while the spacing of the non-Unicode ellipsis is looser, more
+in accordance with traditional typography.
+</para>
+
</sect2>
<sect2 label="16.2.7" id="Greek-letters">
<title>Greek letters</title>
@@ -12458,7 +12493,7 @@
</term><listitem><para>Homomorphism
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\inf</primary></indexterm><literal>\inf</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>Infinum
+</term><listitem><para>Infimum
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ker</primary></indexterm><literal>\ker</literal>
</term><listitem><para>Kernel
@@ -12503,7 +12538,8 @@
</term><listitem><para>Hyperbolic sine
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\sup</primary></indexterm><literal>\sup</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>sup
+</term><listitem><para>Supremum
+sup
<!-- don't try to use \sup with dvi/pdf output since that turned into a -->
<!-- Texinfo command and it's not worth hassling with different versions -->
<!-- when it's just three roman letters anyway. -->
@@ -12518,13 +12554,14 @@
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>amsmath</literal></primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>amsmath</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
-<para>The <literal>amsmath</literal> package adds improvements on some of these, and also
-allows you to define your own. The full documentation is on CTAN, but
-briefly, you can define an identity operator with
+<para>The <literal>amsmath</literal> package adds improvements on some of these, and
+also allows you to define your own. The full documentation is on CTAN,
+but briefly, you can define an identity operator with
<literal>\DeclareMathOperator{\identity}{id}</literal> that is like the ones
above but prints as ‘<literal>id</literal>’. The starred form
-<literal>\DeclareMathOperator*{\op}{op}</literal> sets any limits above and
-below, as is traditional with <literal>\lim</literal>, <literal>\sup</literal>, or <literal>\max</literal>.
+<literal>\DeclareMathOperator*{\op}{op}</literal> sets any superscript or
+subscript to be above and below, as is traditional with <literal>\lim</literal>,
+<literal>\sup</literal>, or <literal>\max</literal>.
</para>
</sect1>
@@ -12633,8 +12670,8 @@
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\underbrace{<replaceable>math</replaceable>}</primary></indexterm><literal>\underbrace{<replaceable>math</replaceable>}</literal>
</term><listitem><para>Put a brace under <replaceable>math</replaceable>. For example, this
<literal>(1-\underbrace{1/2)+(1/2}-1/3)</literal> emphasizes the telescoping part.
-Attach text to the brace by using subscript, <literal>_</literal>, or superscript,
-<literal>^</literal>, as here.
+Attach text to the brace by using the subscript command, <literal>_</literal>, or
+superscript, <literal>^</literal>, as here.
</para>
<screen>\begin{displaymath}
1+1/2+\underbrace{1/3+1/4}_{>1/2}+
@@ -12830,6 +12867,10 @@
<sect2 label="16.6.2" id="_005cphantom-_0026-_005cvphantom-_0026-_005chphantom">
<title><literal>\phantom</literal> & <literal>\vphantom</literal> & <literal>\hphantom</literal></title>
+<anchor id="_005cphantom"/><anchor id="_005cvphantom"/><anchor id="_005chphantom"/><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\phantom</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\vphantom</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\hphantom</primary></indexterm>
+
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>spacing, math mode</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>horizontal spacing</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>vertical spacing</primary></indexterm>
@@ -13032,8 +13073,8 @@
<sect2 label="16.8.1" id="Colon-character-_0026-_005ccolon">
<title>Colon character <literal>:</literal> & <literal>\colon</literal></title>
-<indexterm role="cp"><primary>colon character</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>: for math</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="colon"/><indexterm role="cp"><primary>colon character</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>: (for math)</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\colon</primary></indexterm>
<para>Synopsis, one of:
@@ -13119,11 +13160,12 @@
<para>The square root, or optionally other roots, of <replaceable>arg</replaceable>. The optional
argument <replaceable>root-number</replaceable> gives the root, i.e., enter the cube root of
<literal>x+y</literal> as <literal>\sqrt[3]{x+y}</literal>.
-The radical grows with the size of <replaceable>arg</replaceable> (as the height of the
-radical grows, the angle on the leftmost part gets steeper, until for
-a large enough <literal>arg</literal>, it is vertical).
+The size of the radical grows with that of <replaceable>arg</replaceable> (as the height of
+the radical grows, the angle on the leftmost part gets steeper, until
+for a tall enough <literal>arg</literal>, it is vertical).
</para>
-<para>&latex; has a separate <literal>\surd</literal> character (see <link linkend="Math-symbols">Math symbols</link>).
+<para>&latex; has a separate <literal>\surd</literal> symbol for making a square root
+without <replaceable>arg</replaceable> (see <link linkend="Math-symbols">Math symbols</link>).
</para>
</sect2>
@@ -13134,7 +13176,7 @@
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>relation, text above</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\stackrel</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Synopsis, one of:
+<para>Synopsis:
</para>
<screen>\stackrel{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}{<replaceable>relation</replaceable>}
</screen>
@@ -13172,7 +13214,7 @@
in paragraph mode, in LR mode &latex; never starts a new line, it just
keeps going from left to right. (Although &latex; will not complain
that the LR box is too long, when it is finished and next tries to put
-that box into a line, it could very well complain that the finished LR
+that box into a line, it might well complain that the finished LR
box won’t fit there.)
</para>
</listitem><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>math mode</primary></indexterm>
@@ -13255,8 +13297,8 @@
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>fancyhdr</literal></primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>fancyhdr</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
-<para>The package <literal>fancyhdr</literal> is very helpful for constructing page
-styles. See its documentation on CTAN.
+<para>The package <literal>fancyhdr</literal> is commonly used for constructing page
+styles. See its documentation.
</para>
@@ -13304,8 +13346,8 @@
</para>
<variablelist><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\author{<replaceable>name1</replaceable> \and <replaceable>name2</replaceable> \and ...}</primary></indexterm><literal>\author{<replaceable>name1</replaceable> \and <replaceable>name2</replaceable> \and ...}</literal>
</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>author, for titlepage</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\\ for <literal>\author</literal></primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\and for <literal>\author</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\\ (for <literal>\author</literal>)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\and (for <literal>\author</literal>)</primary></indexterm>
<para>Required. Declare the document author or authors. The argument is a
list of authors separated by <literal>\and</literal> commands. To separate lines
within a single author’s entry, for instance to give the author’s
@@ -13325,17 +13367,17 @@
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>credit footnote</primary></indexterm>
<para>Optional. Produce a footnote. You can use it in the author information
for acknowledgements as illustrated above, but you can also use it in
-the title, or any place a footnote makes sense. It can be any text at
-all so you can use it for any purpose, such as to print an email
+the title, or any place a footnote mark makes sense. It can be any text
+at all so you can use it for any purpose, such as to print an email
address.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\title{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}</primary></indexterm><literal>\title{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}</literal>
</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>title, for titlepage</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\\ for <literal>\title</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\\ (for <literal>\title</literal>)</primary></indexterm>
<para>Required. Declare <replaceable>text</replaceable> to be the title of the document. Get line
breaks inside <replaceable>text</replaceable> with a double backslash, <literal>\\</literal>. If you
-omit the <literal>\title</literal> declaration then you get ‘<literal>LaTeX Error: No
-\title given</literal>’.
+omit the <literal>\title</literal> declaration then the <literal>\maketitle</literal> command
+yields error ‘<literal>LaTeX Error: No \title given</literal>’.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
<para>To make your own title page, see <link linkend="titlepage">titlepage</link>. You can either
@@ -13359,11 +13401,13 @@
<para>Specifies the style of page numbers, and resets the page number. The
numbering style is reflected on the page, and also in the table of
contents and other page references. This declaration has global scope
-so its effect is not delimited by braces or environments.
+so its effect is not stopped by an end of group such as a closing brace
+or an end of environment.
</para>
-<para>In this example, before the Main section the pages are numbered
-‘<literal>a</literal>’, etc. Starting on the page containing that section, the pages
-are numbered ‘<literal>1</literal>’, etc.
+<para>In this example, before the ‘<literal>Main</literal>’ section the pages are numbered
+‘<literal>a</literal>’, etc. Starting on the page containing the
+<literal>\pagenumbering</literal> call in that section, the pages are numbered
+‘<literal>1</literal>’, etc.
</para>
<screen>\begin{document}\pagenumbering{alph}
...
@@ -13487,8 +13531,8 @@
the right hand page.
</para>
<para>To accomplish this, in a two-sided article, &latex; has <literal>\section</literal>
-issue a command <literal>\markboth</literal>, setting <literal>\leftmark</literal>
-to ‘<literal>Section 2</literal>’ and setting <literal>\rightmark</literal> to blank.
+issue a command <literal>\markboth</literal>, setting <literal>\leftmark</literal> to
+‘<literal>Section 2</literal>’ and setting <literal>\rightmark</literal> to an empty content.
And, &latex; has <literal>\subsection</literal> issue a command <literal>\markright</literal>,
setting <literal>\rightmark</literal> to ‘<literal>Subsection 2.1</literal>’, etc.
</para>
@@ -13503,7 +13547,7 @@
<literal>\markright</literal> that comes on the page if there is one, otherwise by
the last one that came before that page.
</para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\markright{<replaceable>right</replaceable>}</primary></indexterm><literal>\markright{<replaceable>right</replaceable>}</literal>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\markright{<replaceable>right-head</replaceable>}</primary></indexterm><literal>\markright{<replaceable>right-head</replaceable>}</literal>
</term><listitem><para>Sets the right hand page heading, leaving the left unchanged.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
@@ -13560,7 +13604,7 @@
<sect1 label="19.1" id="_005censpace-_0026-_005cquad-_0026-_005cqquad">
<title><literal>\enspace</literal> & <literal>\quad</literal> & <literal>\qquad</literal></title>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\enspace</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="_005censpace"/><anchor id="_005cquad"/><anchor id="_005cqquad"/><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\enspace</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\quad</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\qquad</primary></indexterm>
@@ -13835,11 +13879,11 @@
</para>
</sect2>
-<anchor id="_005cfrenchspacing"/><!-- old node name -->
<sect2 label="19.5.2" id="_005cfrenchspacing-_0026-_005cnonfrenchspacing">
<title><literal>\frenchspacing</literal> & <literal>\nonfrenchspacing</literal></title>
+<anchor id="_005cfrenchspacing"/><!-- old node name -->
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\frenchspacing</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="_005cnonfrenchspacing"/><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\frenchspacing</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\nonfrenchspacing</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>spacing, inter-sentence</primary></indexterm>
@@ -14032,7 +14076,7 @@
<sect1 label="19.8" id="_005cthinspace-_0026-_005cnegthinspace">
<title><literal>\thinspace</literal> & <literal>\negthinspace</literal></title>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\thinspace</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="_005cthinspace"/><anchor id="_005cnegthinspace"/><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\thinspace</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\negthinspace</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>thin space</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>space, thin</primary></indexterm>
@@ -14127,7 +14171,7 @@
<sect1 label="19.10" id="_005chrulefill-_0026-_005cdotfill">
<title><literal>\hrulefill</literal> & <literal>\dotfill</literal></title>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\hrulefill</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="_005chrulefill"/><anchor id="_005cdotfill"/><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\hrulefill</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\dotfill</primary></indexterm>
<para>Synopsis, one of:
@@ -14181,6 +14225,10 @@
<sect1 label="19.11" id="_005cbigskip-_0026-_005cmedskip-_0026-_005csmallskip">
<title><literal>\bigskip</literal> & <literal>\medskip</literal> & <literal>\smallskip</literal></title>
+<anchor id="_005cbigskip"/><anchor id="_005cmedskip"/><anchor id="_005csmallskip"/><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bigskip</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\medskip</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\smallskip</primary></indexterm>
+
<para>Synopsis, one of:
</para>
<screen>\bigskip
@@ -14236,6 +14284,10 @@
<sect1 label="19.12" id="_005cbigbreak-_0026-_005cmedbreak-_0026-_005csmallbreak">
<title><literal>\bigbreak</literal> & <literal>\medbreak</literal> & <literal>\smallbreak</literal></title>
+<anchor id="_005cbigbreak"/><anchor id="_005cmedbreak"/><anchor id="_005csmallbreak"/><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bigbreak</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\medbreak</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\smallbreak</primary></indexterm>
+
<para>Synopsis, one of:
</para>
<screen>\bigbreak
@@ -14244,7 +14296,8 @@
</screen>
<para>Produce a vertical space that is big or medium-sized or small, and
suggest to &latex; that this is a good place to break the page. (The
-associated penalties are -200, -100, and -50.)
+associated penalties are respectively −200, −100, and
+−50.)
</para>
<para>See <link linkend="_005cbigskip-_0026-_005cmedskip-_0026-_005csmallskip">\bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip</link>, for more. These commands
produce the same vertical space but differ in that they also remove a
@@ -14528,7 +14581,7 @@
<sect1 label="20.1" id="_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox">
<title><literal>\mbox</literal> & <literal>\makebox</literal></title>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\mbox</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="_005cmbox"/><anchor id="_005cmakebox"/><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\mbox</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\makebox</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>box</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>make a box</primary></indexterm>
@@ -14552,9 +14605,10 @@
</para>
<screen>The soviet tank \mbox{T-34} is a symbol of victory against nazism.
</screen>
-<para>The first two command synopsis versions, <literal>\mbox</literal> and <literal>\makebox</literal>, are
-roughly equivalent. They create a box just wide enough to contain the
-<replaceable>text</replaceable>. (They are like plain &tex;’s <literal>\hbox</literal>.)
+<para>The first two command invocations shown, <literal>\mbox</literal> and
+<literal>\makebox</literal>, are roughly the same. They create a box just wide
+enough to contain the <replaceable>text</replaceable>. (They are like plain &tex;’s
+<literal>\hbox</literal>.)
</para>
<para>In the third version the optional argument <replaceable>width</replaceable> specifies the
width of the box. Note that the space occupied by the text need not
@@ -14607,9 +14661,9 @@
\pts{90}An African or European swallow?
</screen>
-<para><indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>TikZ</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>TikZ</literal></primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>TikZ</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
-</para>
+
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>Asymptote</literal></primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>Asymptote</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
@@ -14638,7 +14692,7 @@
<sect1 label="20.2" id="_005cfbox-_0026-_005cframebox">
<title><literal>\fbox</literal> & <literal>\framebox</literal></title>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\fbox</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="_005cfbox"/><anchor id="_005cframebox"/><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\fbox</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\framebox</primary></indexterm>
<para>Synopses, one of:
@@ -14831,7 +14885,7 @@
<sect1 label="20.5" id="_005csbox-_0026-_005csavebox">
<title><literal>\sbox</literal> & <literal>\savebox</literal></title>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\sbox</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="_005csbox"/><anchor id="_005csavebox"/><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\sbox</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\savebox</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>box, save</primary></indexterm>
@@ -14863,13 +14917,13 @@
<literal>\newcommand</literal> macro variable is efficiency, that &latex; need not
repeatedly retypeset the contents. See the example below.
</para>
-<para>The first two command invocations,
+<para>The first two command invocations shown above,
<literal>\sbox{<replaceable>box-cmd</replaceable>}{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}</literal> and
-<literal>\savebox{<replaceable>box-cmd</replaceable>}{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}</literal>, are roughly equivalent.
-As to the third and fourth, the optional arguments allow you to specify
-the box width as <replaceable>width</replaceable>, and the position of the text inside that
-box as <replaceable>position</replaceable>. See <link linkend="_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox">\mbox & \makebox</link>, for the full
-description.
+<literal>\savebox{<replaceable>box-cmd</replaceable>}{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}</literal>, are roughly the same.
+As to the third and fourth, the optional arguments allow you to
+specify the box width as <replaceable>width</replaceable>, and the position of the text
+inside that box as <replaceable>position</replaceable>. See <link linkend="_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox">\mbox & \makebox</link>, for the
+full description.
</para>
<para>In the <literal>\sbox</literal> and <literal>\savebox</literal> commands the <replaceable>text</replaceable> is
typeset in LR mode so it does not have line breaks (see <link linkend="Modes">Modes</link>). If
@@ -15143,11 +15197,11 @@
<para>or
</para>
<screen>\color{<replaceable>name</replaceable>}
-\color[<replaceable>color model</replaceable>]{<replaceable>specification</replaceable>}
+\color[<replaceable>color model</replaceable>]{<replaceable>color specification</replaceable>}
</screen>
<para>The affected text gets the color. This line
</para>
-<screen>\textcolor{magenta}{My name is Ozymandias, king of kings:}
+<screen>\textcolor{magenta}{My name is Ozymandias, King of Kings;}
Look on my works, ye Mighty, and despair!
</screen>
<para>causes the first half to be in magenta while the rest is in black. You
@@ -15597,9 +15651,8 @@
other format is available.)
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>command</replaceable>
-</term><listitem><para>A command that will be applied to the
-file. This is very often left empty. This command must start with a
-single backward quote. Thus,
+</term><listitem><para>A command that will be applied to the file. This is often left
+empty. This command must start with a single backward quote. Thus,
<literal>\DeclareGraphicsRule{.eps.gz}{eps}{.eps.bb}{`gunzip -c
#1}</literal> specifies that any file with the extension <filename>.eps.gz</filename> should
be treated as an <literal>eps</literal> file, with the BoundingBox information
@@ -16170,8 +16223,8 @@
the text body, enter <literal>\textbackslash{}</literal>.
</para>
<para>To produce the reserved characters in a typewriter font use
-<literal>\verb!!</literal> as below (the double backslash <literal>\\</literal> is only
-there to split the lines in the output).
+<literal>\verb!!</literal> as below (the double backslash <literal>\\</literal> in the
+example is only there to split the lines in the output).
</para>
<screen>\begin{center}
\# \$ \% \& \{ \} \_ \~{} \^{} \textbackslash \\
@@ -16279,7 +16332,9 @@
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>text symbols</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>symbols, text</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>textcomp package</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>textcomp</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>textcomp</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>TS1 encoding</primary></indexterm>
<para>&latex; provides commands to generate a number of non-letter symbols
in running text. Some of these, especially the more obscure ones, are
@@ -16327,11 +16382,12 @@
Double and single angle quotation marks, commonly used in French.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ldots</primary></indexterm><literal>\ldots</literal>
+</term><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textellipsis</primary></indexterm><literal>\textellipsis</literal>
</term><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\dots</primary></indexterm><literal>\dots</literal>
-</term><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textellipsis</primary></indexterm><literal>\textellipsis</literal>
</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>ellipsis</primary></indexterm>
-<para>… An ellipsis (three dots at the baseline): <literal>\ldots</literal>
-and <literal>\dots</literal> also work in math mode.
+<para>… An ellipsis (three dots at the baseline): <literal>\ldots</literal> and
+<literal>\dots</literal> also work in math mode (see <link linkend="Dots">Dots</link>). See that math
+mode ellipsis description for additional general information.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\lq</primary></indexterm><literal>\lq</literal>
</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>left quote</primary></indexterm>
@@ -16390,8 +16446,14 @@
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textbackslash</primary></indexterm><literal>\textbackslash</literal>
</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>backslash, in text</primary></indexterm>
-<para>\ Backslash.
+<para>\ Backslash. However, <literal>\texttt{\textbackslash}</literal> produces a roman
+(not typewriter) backslash by default; for a typewriter backslash, it
+is necessary to use the T1 (or other non-default) font encoding, as
+in:
</para>
+<screen>\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+</screen><!-- https://github.com/latex3/latex2e/issues/824 -->
+
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textbar</primary></indexterm><literal>\textbar</literal>
</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>vertical bar, in text</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>bar, vertical, in text</primary></indexterm>
@@ -16411,12 +16473,14 @@
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textbraceleft</primary></indexterm><literal>\textbraceleft</literal>
</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>left brace, in text</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>brace, left, in text</primary></indexterm>
-<para>{ Left brace.
+<para>{ Left brace. See remarks at <literal>\textbackslash</literal> above about
+making <literal>\texttt{\textbraceleft}</literal> produce a typewriter brace.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textbraceright</primary></indexterm><literal>\textbraceright</literal>
</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>right brace, in text</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>brace, right, in text</primary></indexterm>
-<para>} Right brace.
+<para>} Right brace. See remarks at <literal>\textbackslash</literal> above about
+making <literal>\texttt{\textbraceright}</literal> produce a typewriter brace.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textbullet</primary></indexterm><literal>\textbullet</literal>
</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>bullet, in text</primary></indexterm>
@@ -16697,7 +16761,7 @@
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\b</literal>
</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\b (bar-under accent)</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>bar-under accent</primary></indexterm>
-<para>o_ Bar accent underneath.
+<para>o̲ Bar accent underneath.
</para>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\underbar</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>underbar</primary></indexterm>
@@ -16705,7 +16769,7 @@
<replaceable>text</replaceable>. The argument is always processed in LR mode
(see <link linkend="Modes">Modes</link>). The bar is always a fixed position under the baseline,
thus crossing through descenders. See also <literal>\underline</literal> in
-<link linkend="Math-miscellany">Math miscellany</link>.
+<link linkend="Over_002d-and-Underlining">Over- and Underlining</link>.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\c</literal>
</term><term><literal>\capitalcedilla</literal>
@@ -16740,7 +16804,7 @@
</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\r (ring accent)</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\capitalring</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>ring accent</primary></indexterm>
-<para>o* Ring accent.
+<para>o̊ Ring accent.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\t</literal>
</term><term><literal>\capitaltie</literal>
@@ -17172,7 +17236,7 @@
<sect1 label="24.2" id="_005cinclude-_0026-_005cincludeonly">
<title><literal>\include</literal> & <literal>\includeonly</literal></title>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\include</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="_005cinclude"/><anchor id="_005cincludeonly"/><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\include</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\includeonly</primary></indexterm>
<para>Synopsis:
@@ -17490,9 +17554,9 @@
\renewcommand{\listfigurename}{Plots}
\renewcommand{\listtablename}{Specifications}
</screen>
-<para><indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>babel</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>babel</literal></primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>babel</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
-</para>
+
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>polyglossia</literal></primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>polyglossia</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
@@ -18500,7 +18564,7 @@
Each <literal>letter</literal> environment body typically ends with a
<literal>\closing</literal> command such as <literal>\closing{Yours,}</literal>.
</para>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\\ for letters</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\\ (for letters)</primary></indexterm>
<para>Additional material may come after the <literal>\closing</literal>. You can say who
is receiving a copy of the letter with a command like <literal>\cc{the
Boss \\ the Boss's Boss}</literal>. There’s a similar <literal>\encl</literal> command for
@@ -18826,7 +18890,7 @@
<sect1 label="27.1" id="_005copenin-_0026-_005copenout">
<title><literal>\openin</literal> & <literal>\openout</literal></title>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\openin</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="_005copenin"/><anchor id="_005copenout"/><anchor id="_005cclosein"/><anchor id="_005ccloseout"/><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\openin</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\openout</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\closein</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\closeout</primary></indexterm>
@@ -19297,7 +19361,7 @@
...
\newcommand{\fignum}{1}
\immediate\write18{cd pix && asy figure\fignum}
-\includegraphics{pix\figure\fignum.pdf}
+\includegraphics{pix/figure\fignum.pdf}
</screen>
<para>will run Asymptote (the <literal>asy</literal> program) on <filename>pix/figure1.asy</filename>,
so that the document can later read in the resulting graphic
@@ -19404,8 +19468,8 @@
</para>
<screen>pdflatex thesis
</screen>
-<para><indexterm role="fn"><primary>.tex, default extension</primary></indexterm>
-Note that <filename>.tex</filename> is the default file name extension.
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>.tex, default extension</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Note that <filename>.tex</filename> is the default file name extension.
</para>
<para>pdf&tex; is an extension of the original &tex; program, as are
Xe&tex; and Lua&tex; (see <link linkend="TeX-engines">&tex; engines</link>). The first two are
@@ -19417,8 +19481,8 @@
PNG, and ubiquitous viewing programs. In short, if you run
<command>pdflatex</command> or <command>xelatex</command> or <command>lualatex</command> then you
will by default get PDF and have access to all its modern features.
-If you run <command>latex</command>, or <literal>dvilualatex</literal>, then you will get
-DVI. The description here assumes pdf&latex;.
+If you run <command>latex</command>, or <command>dvilualatex</command>, then you will get
+DVI. The description here assumes <command>pdflatex</command>.
</para>
<para>See <link linkend="Command-line-options">Command line options</link>, for a selection of the most useful
command line options. As to <replaceable>argument</replaceable>, the usual case is that it
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.html
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.html 2023-01-15 20:55:35 UTC (rev 65551)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.html 2023-01-15 20:55:58 UTC (rev 65552)
@@ -1,10 +1,10 @@
-<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/html4/loose.dtd">
+<!DOCTYPE html>
<html>
-<!-- Created by GNU Texinfo 6.8, https://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ -->
+<!-- Created by GNU Texinfo 7.0.1, https://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ -->
<head>
<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=utf-8">
<!-- This document is an unofficial reference manual for LaTeX, a
-document preparation system, version of January 2022.
+document preparation system, version of January 2023.
This manual was originally translated from LATEX.HLP v1.0a in the
VMS Help Library. The pre-translation version was written by
@@ -39,10 +39,10 @@
Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual
into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions. -->
-<title>LaTeX2e unofficial reference manual (January 2022)</title>
+<title>LaTeX2e unofficial reference manual (January 2023)</title>
-<meta name="description" content="LaTeX2e unofficial reference manual (January 2022)">
-<meta name="keywords" content="LaTeX2e unofficial reference manual (January 2022)">
+<meta name="description" content="LaTeX2e unofficial reference manual (January 2023)">
+<meta name="keywords" content="LaTeX2e unofficial reference manual (January 2023)">
<meta name="resource-type" content="document">
<meta name="distribution" content="global">
<meta name="Generator" content="makeinfo">
@@ -60,21 +60,20 @@
Originally written by Jim Hefferon and Karl Berry, 2018. */
-a.copiable-anchor {visibility: hidden; text-decoration: none; line-height: 0em}
-a.summary-letter {text-decoration: none}
-blockquote.indentedblock {margin-right: 0em}
-div.display {margin-left: 3.2em}
+a.copiable-link {visibility: hidden; text-decoration: none; line-height: 0em}
+a.summary-letter-printindex {text-decoration: none}
div.example {margin-left: 3.2em}
-kbd {font-style: oblique}
-pre.display {font-family: inherit}
-pre.format {font-family: inherit}
-pre.menu-comment {font-family: serif}
-pre.menu-preformatted {font-family: serif}
-span.nolinebreak {white-space: nowrap}
-span.roman {font-family: initial; font-weight: normal}
-span.sansserif {font-family: sans-serif; font-weight: normal}
-span:hover a.copiable-anchor {visibility: visible}
-ul.no-bullet {list-style: none}
+kbd.kbd {font-style: oblique}
+kbd.key {font-style: normal}
+span.r {font-family: initial; font-weight: normal; font-style: normal}
+span.w-nolinebreak-text {white-space: nowrap}
+span:hover a.copiable-link {visibility: visible}
+td.printindex-index-entry {vertical-align: top}
+td.printindex-index-section {vertical-align: top}
+th.entries-header-printindex {text-align:left}
+th.sections-header-printindex {text-align:left}
+ul.mark-bullet {list-style-type: disc}
+ul.toc-numbered-mark {list-style: none}
BODY {
margin-top: 1em;
margin-left: 1em; /* auto results in two-digit <ol> lost off left */
@@ -102,7 +101,6 @@
</head>
<body lang="en">
-<h1 class="settitle" align="center">LaTeX2e unofficial reference manual (January 2022)</h1>
@@ -110,6 +108,7 @@
+
<div class='intro'> <p>This is an unofficial reference manual for
LaTeX. See below for the <a href='#SEC_Overview'>Table of Contents</a>.
If you want a tutorial then please instead visit <a
@@ -140,26 +139,26 @@
-<div class="top" id="Top">
-<div class="header">
+<div class="top-level-extent" id="Top">
+<div class="nav-panel">
<p>
Next: <a href="#About-this-document" accesskey="n" rel="next">About this document</a>, Up: <a href="https://tug.org/texinfohtml/" accesskey="u" rel="up">(dir)</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
-<span id="LaTeX2e_003a-An-unofficial-reference-manual"></span><h1 class="top">LaTeX2e: An unofficial reference manual</h1>
+<h1 class="top" id="LaTeX2e_003a-An-unofficial-reference-manual">LaTeX2e: An unofficial reference manual</h1>
<p>This document is an unofficial reference manual (version of
-January 2022) for LaTeX2e, a document preparation system.
+January 2023) for LaTeX2e, a document preparation system.
</p>
-<div class="Contents_element" id="SEC_Contents">
+<div class="element-contents" id="SEC_Contents">
<h2 class="contents-heading">Table of Contents</h2>
<div class="contents">
-<ul class="no-bullet">
+<ul class="toc-numbered-mark">
<li><a id="toc-About-this-document-1" href="#About-this-document">1 About this document</a></li>
<li><a id="toc-Overview-of-LaTeX" href="#Overview">2 Overview of LaTeX</a>
- <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <ul class="toc-numbered-mark">
<li><a id="toc-Starting-and-ending-1" href="#Starting-and-ending">2.1 Starting and ending</a></li>
<li><a id="toc-Output-files-1" href="#Output-files">2.2 Output files</a></li>
<li><a id="toc-TeX-engines-1" href="#TeX-engines">2.3 TeX engines</a></li>
@@ -168,30 +167,30 @@
<li><a id="toc-CTAN_003a-The-Comprehensive-TeX-Archive-Network" href="#CTAN">2.6 CTAN: The Comprehensive TeX Archive Network</a></li>
</ul></li>
<li><a id="toc-Document-classes-1" href="#Document-classes">3 Document classes</a>
- <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <ul class="toc-numbered-mark">
<li><a id="toc-Document-class-options-1" href="#Document-class-options">3.1 Document class options</a></li>
<li><a id="toc-Additional-packages-1" href="#Additional-packages">3.2 Additional packages</a></li>
<li><a id="toc-Class-and-package-construction-1" href="#Class-and-package-construction">3.3 Class and package construction</a>
- <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <ul class="toc-numbered-mark">
<li><a id="toc-Class-and-package-structure-1" href="#Class-and-package-structure">3.3.1 Class and package structure</a></li>
<li><a id="toc-Class-and-package-commands-1" href="#Class-and-package-commands">3.3.2 Class and package commands</a></li>
</ul></li>
</ul></li>
<li><a id="toc-Fonts-1" href="#Fonts">4 Fonts</a>
- <ul class="no-bullet">
- <li><a id="toc-fontenc-package-1" href="#fontenc-package">4.1 <code>fontenc</code> package</a>
- <ul class="no-bullet">
- <li><a id="toc-_005cDeclareFontEncoding-1" href="#g_t_005cDeclareFontEncoding">4.1.1 <code>\DeclareFontEncoding</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cDeclareTextAccent-1" href="#g_t_005cDeclareTextAccent">4.1.2 <code>\DeclareTextAccent</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cDeclareTextAccentDefault-1" href="#g_t_005cDeclareTextAccentDefault">4.1.3 <code>\DeclareTextAccentDefault</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cDeclareTextCommand-_0026-_005cProvideTextCommand-1" href="#g_t_005cDeclareTextCommand-_0026-_005cProvideTextCommand">4.1.4 <code>\DeclareTextCommand</code> & <code>\ProvideTextCommand</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cDeclareTextCommandDefault-_0026-_005cProvideTextCommandDefault-" href="#g_t_005cDeclareTextCommandDefault-_0026-_005cProvideTextCommandDefault">4.1.5 <code>\DeclareTextCommandDefault</code> & <code>\ProvideTextCommandDefault </code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cDeclareTextComposite-1" href="#g_t_005cDeclareTextComposite">4.1.6 <code>\DeclareTextComposite</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cDeclareTextCompositeCommand-1" href="#g_t_005cDeclareTextCompositeCommand">4.1.7 <code>\DeclareTextCompositeCommand</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cDeclareTextSymbol-1" href="#g_t_005cDeclareTextSymbol">4.1.8 <code>\DeclareTextSymbol</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cDeclareTextSymbolDefault-1" href="#g_t_005cDeclareTextSymbolDefault">4.1.9 <code>\DeclareTextSymbolDefault</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cLastDeclaredEncoding-1" href="#g_t_005cLastDeclaredEncoding">4.1.10 <code>\LastDeclaredEncoding</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cUseTextSymbol-_0026-_005cUseTextAccent-1" href="#g_t_005cUseTextSymbol-_0026-_005cUseTextAccent">4.1.11 <code>\UseTextSymbol</code> & <code>\UseTextAccent</code></a></li>
+ <ul class="toc-numbered-mark">
+ <li><a id="toc-fontenc-package-1" href="#fontenc-package">4.1 <code class="code">fontenc</code> package</a>
+ <ul class="toc-numbered-mark">
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cDeclareFontEncoding-1" href="#g_t_005cDeclareFontEncoding">4.1.1 <code class="code">\DeclareFontEncoding</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cDeclareTextAccent-1" href="#g_t_005cDeclareTextAccent">4.1.2 <code class="code">\DeclareTextAccent</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cDeclareTextAccentDefault-1" href="#g_t_005cDeclareTextAccentDefault">4.1.3 <code class="code">\DeclareTextAccentDefault</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cDeclareTextCommand-_0026-_005cProvideTextCommand-1" href="#g_t_005cDeclareTextCommand-_0026-_005cProvideTextCommand">4.1.4 <code class="code">\DeclareTextCommand</code> & <code class="code">\ProvideTextCommand</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cDeclareTextCommandDefault-_0026-_005cProvideTextCommandDefault-" href="#g_t_005cDeclareTextCommandDefault-_0026-_005cProvideTextCommandDefault">4.1.5 <code class="code">\DeclareTextCommandDefault</code> & <code class="code">\ProvideTextCommandDefault </code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cDeclareTextComposite-1" href="#g_t_005cDeclareTextComposite">4.1.6 <code class="code">\DeclareTextComposite</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cDeclareTextCompositeCommand-1" href="#g_t_005cDeclareTextCompositeCommand">4.1.7 <code class="code">\DeclareTextCompositeCommand</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cDeclareTextSymbol-1" href="#g_t_005cDeclareTextSymbol">4.1.8 <code class="code">\DeclareTextSymbol</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cDeclareTextSymbolDefault-1" href="#g_t_005cDeclareTextSymbolDefault">4.1.9 <code class="code">\DeclareTextSymbolDefault</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cLastDeclaredEncoding-1" href="#g_t_005cLastDeclaredEncoding">4.1.10 <code class="code">\LastDeclaredEncoding</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cUseTextSymbol-_0026-_005cUseTextAccent-1" href="#g_t_005cUseTextSymbol-_0026-_005cUseTextAccent">4.1.11 <code class="code">\UseTextSymbol</code> & <code class="code">\UseTextAccent</code></a></li>
</ul></li>
<li><a id="toc-Font-styles-1" href="#Font-styles">4.2 Font styles</a></li>
<li><a id="toc-Font-sizes-1" href="#Font-sizes">4.3 Font sizes</a></li>
@@ -198,211 +197,215 @@
<li><a id="toc-Low_002dlevel-font-commands-1" href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">4.4 Low-level font commands</a></li>
</ul></li>
<li><a id="toc-Layout-1" href="#Layout">5 Layout</a>
- <ul class="no-bullet">
- <li><a id="toc-_005conecolumn-1" href="#g_t_005conecolumn">5.1 <code>\onecolumn</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005ctwocolumn-1" href="#g_t_005ctwocolumn">5.2 <code>\twocolumn</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cflushbottom-1" href="#g_t_005cflushbottom">5.3 <code>\flushbottom</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005craggedbottom-1" href="#g_t_005craggedbottom">5.4 <code>\raggedbottom</code></a></li>
+ <ul class="toc-numbered-mark">
+ <li><a id="toc-_005conecolumn-1" href="#g_t_005conecolumn">5.1 <code class="code">\onecolumn</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005ctwocolumn-1" href="#g_t_005ctwocolumn">5.2 <code class="code">\twocolumn</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cflushbottom-1" href="#g_t_005cflushbottom">5.3 <code class="code">\flushbottom</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005craggedbottom-1" href="#g_t_005craggedbottom">5.4 <code class="code">\raggedbottom</code></a></li>
<li><a id="toc-Page-layout-parameters-1" href="#Page-layout-parameters">5.5 Page layout parameters</a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cbaselineskip-_0026-_005cbaselinestretch-1" href="#g_t_005cbaselineskip-_0026-_005cbaselinestretch">5.6 <code>\baselineskip</code> & <code>\baselinestretch</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cbaselineskip-_0026-_005cbaselinestretch-1" href="#g_t_005cbaselineskip-_0026-_005cbaselinestretch">5.6 <code class="code">\baselineskip</code> & <code class="code">\baselinestretch</code></a></li>
<li><a id="toc-Floats-1" href="#Floats">5.7 Floats</a>
- <ul class="no-bullet">
- <li><a id="toc-_005ccaption-1" href="#g_t_005ccaption">5.7.1 <code>\caption</code></a></li>
+ <ul class="toc-numbered-mark">
+ <li><a id="toc-_005ccaption-1" href="#g_t_005ccaption">5.7.1 <code class="code">\caption</code></a></li>
</ul></li>
</ul></li>
<li><a id="toc-Sectioning-1" href="#Sectioning">6 Sectioning</a>
- <ul class="no-bullet">
- <li><a id="toc-_005cpart-1" href="#g_t_005cpart">6.1 <code>\part</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cchapter-1" href="#g_t_005cchapter">6.2 <code>\chapter</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005csection-1" href="#g_t_005csection">6.3 <code>\section</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005csubsection-1" href="#g_t_005csubsection">6.4 <code>\subsection</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005csubsubsection_002c-_005cparagraph_002c-_005csubparagraph" href="#g_t_005csubsubsection-_0026-_005cparagraph-_0026-_005csubparagraph">6.5 <code>\subsubsection</code>, <code>\paragraph</code>, <code>\subparagraph</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cappendix-1" href="#g_t_005cappendix">6.6 <code>\appendix</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cfrontmatter_002c-_005cmainmatter_002c-_005cbackmatter" href="#g_t_005cfrontmatter-_0026-_005cmainmatter-_0026-_005cbackmatter">6.7 <code>\frontmatter</code>, <code>\mainmatter</code>, <code>\backmatter</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005c_0040startsection_002c-typesetting-sectional-unit-headings" href="#g_t_005c_0040startsection">6.8 <code>\@startsection</code>, typesetting sectional unit headings</a></li>
+ <ul class="toc-numbered-mark">
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cpart-1" href="#g_t_005cpart">6.1 <code class="code">\part</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cchapter-1" href="#g_t_005cchapter">6.2 <code class="code">\chapter</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005csection-1" href="#g_t_005csection">6.3 <code class="code">\section</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005csubsection-1" href="#g_t_005csubsection">6.4 <code class="code">\subsection</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005csubsubsection_002c-_005cparagraph_002c-_005csubparagraph" href="#g_t_005csubsubsection-_0026-_005cparagraph-_0026-_005csubparagraph">6.5 <code class="code">\subsubsection</code>, <code class="code">\paragraph</code>, <code class="code">\subparagraph</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cappendix-1" href="#g_t_005cappendix">6.6 <code class="code">\appendix</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cfrontmatter_002c-_005cmainmatter_002c-_005cbackmatter" href="#g_t_005cfrontmatter-_0026-_005cmainmatter-_0026-_005cbackmatter">6.7 <code class="code">\frontmatter</code>, <code class="code">\mainmatter</code>, <code class="code">\backmatter</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005c_0040startsection_002c-typesetting-sectional-unit-headings" href="#g_t_005c_0040startsection">6.8 <code class="code">\@startsection</code>, typesetting sectional unit headings</a></li>
</ul></li>
<li><a id="toc-Cross-references-1" href="#Cross-references">7 Cross references</a>
- <ul class="no-bullet">
- <li><a id="toc-_005clabel-1" href="#g_t_005clabel">7.1 <code>\label</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cpageref-1" href="#g_t_005cpageref">7.2 <code>\pageref</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cref-1" href="#g_t_005cref">7.3 <code>\ref</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-xr-package-1" href="#xr-package">7.4 <code>xr</code> package</a></li>
+ <ul class="toc-numbered-mark">
+ <li><a id="toc-_005clabel-1" href="#g_t_005clabel">7.1 <code class="code">\label</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cpageref-1" href="#g_t_005cpageref">7.2 <code class="code">\pageref</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cref-1" href="#g_t_005cref">7.3 <code class="code">\ref</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-xr-package-1" href="#xr-package">7.4 <code class="code">xr</code> package</a></li>
</ul></li>
<li><a id="toc-Environments-1" href="#Environments">8 Environments</a>
- <ul class="no-bullet">
- <li><a id="toc-abstract-1" href="#abstract">8.1 <code>abstract</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-array-1" href="#array">8.2 <code>array</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-center-1" href="#center">8.3 <code>center</code></a>
- <ul class="no-bullet">
- <li><a id="toc-_005ccentering-1" href="#g_t_005ccentering">8.3.1 <code>\centering</code></a></li>
+ <ul class="toc-numbered-mark">
+ <li><a id="toc-abstract-1" href="#abstract">8.1 <code class="code">abstract</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-array-1" href="#array">8.2 <code class="code">array</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-center-1" href="#center">8.3 <code class="code">center</code></a>
+ <ul class="toc-numbered-mark">
+ <li><a id="toc-_005ccentering-1" href="#g_t_005ccentering">8.3.1 <code class="code">\centering</code></a></li>
</ul></li>
- <li><a id="toc-description-1" href="#description">8.4 <code>description</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-displaymath-1" href="#displaymath">8.5 <code>displaymath</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-document-1" href="#document">8.6 <code>document</code></a>
- <ul class="no-bullet">
- <li><a id="toc-_005cAtBeginDocument-1" href="#g_t_005cAtBeginDocument">8.6.1 <code>\AtBeginDocument</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cAtEndDocument-1" href="#g_t_005cAtEndDocument">8.6.2 <code>\AtEndDocument</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-description-1" href="#description">8.4 <code class="code">description</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-displaymath-1" href="#displaymath">8.5 <code class="code">displaymath</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-document-1" href="#document">8.6 <code class="code">document</code></a>
+ <ul class="toc-numbered-mark">
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cAtBeginDocument-1" href="#g_t_005cAtBeginDocument">8.6.1 <code class="code">\AtBeginDocument</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cAtEndDocument-1" href="#g_t_005cAtEndDocument">8.6.2 <code class="code">\AtEndDocument</code></a></li>
</ul></li>
- <li><a id="toc-enumerate-1" href="#enumerate">8.7 <code>enumerate</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-eqnarray-1" href="#eqnarray">8.8 <code>eqnarray</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-equation-1" href="#equation">8.9 <code>equation</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-figure-1" href="#figure">8.10 <code>figure</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-filecontents-1" href="#filecontents">8.11 <code>filecontents</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-flushleft-1" href="#flushleft">8.12 <code>flushleft</code></a>
- <ul class="no-bullet">
- <li><a id="toc-_005craggedright-1" href="#g_t_005craggedright">8.12.1 <code>\raggedright</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-enumerate-1" href="#enumerate">8.7 <code class="code">enumerate</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-eqnarray-1" href="#eqnarray">8.8 <code class="code">eqnarray</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-equation-1" href="#equation">8.9 <code class="code">equation</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-figure-1" href="#figure">8.10 <code class="code">figure</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-filecontents-1" href="#filecontents">8.11 <code class="code">filecontents</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-flushleft-1" href="#flushleft">8.12 <code class="code">flushleft</code></a>
+ <ul class="toc-numbered-mark">
+ <li><a id="toc-_005craggedright-1" href="#g_t_005craggedright">8.12.1 <code class="code">\raggedright</code></a></li>
</ul></li>
- <li><a id="toc-flushright-1" href="#flushright">8.13 <code>flushright</code></a>
- <ul class="no-bullet">
- <li><a id="toc-_005craggedleft-1" href="#g_t_005craggedleft">8.13.1 <code>\raggedleft</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-flushright-1" href="#flushright">8.13 <code class="code">flushright</code></a>
+ <ul class="toc-numbered-mark">
+ <li><a id="toc-_005craggedleft-1" href="#g_t_005craggedleft">8.13.1 <code class="code">\raggedleft</code></a></li>
</ul></li>
- <li><a id="toc-itemize-1" href="#itemize">8.14 <code>itemize</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-letter-environment_003a-writing-letters" href="#letter">8.15 <code>letter</code> environment: writing letters</a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-list-1" href="#list">8.16 <code>list</code></a>
- <ul class="no-bullet">
- <li><a id="toc-_005citem_003a-An-entry-in-a-list" href="#g_t_005citem">8.16.1 <code>\item</code>: An entry in a list</a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-trivlist_003a-A-restricted-form-of-list" href="#trivlist">8.16.2 <code>trivlist</code>: A restricted form of <code>list</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-itemize-1" href="#itemize">8.14 <code class="code">itemize</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-letter-environment_003a-writing-letters" href="#letter">8.15 <code class="code">letter</code> environment: writing letters</a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-list-1" href="#list">8.16 <code class="code">list</code></a>
+ <ul class="toc-numbered-mark">
+ <li><a id="toc-_005citem_003a-An-entry-in-a-list" href="#g_t_005citem">8.16.1 <code class="code">\item</code>: An entry in a list</a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-trivlist_003a-A-restricted-form-of-list" href="#trivlist">8.16.2 <code class="code">trivlist</code>: A restricted form of <code class="code">list</code></a></li>
</ul></li>
- <li><a id="toc-math-1" href="#math">8.17 <code>math</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-minipage-1" href="#minipage">8.18 <code>minipage</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-picture-1" href="#picture">8.19 <code>picture</code></a>
- <ul class="no-bullet">
- <li><a id="toc-_005cput-1" href="#g_t_005cput">8.19.1 <code>\put</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cmultiput-1" href="#g_t_005cmultiput">8.19.2 <code>\multiput</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cqbezier-1" href="#g_t_005cqbezier">8.19.3 <code>\qbezier</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cgraphpaper-1" href="#g_t_005cgraphpaper">8.19.4 <code>\graphpaper</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cline-1" href="#g_t_005cline">8.19.5 <code>\line</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005clinethickness-1" href="#g_t_005clinethickness">8.19.6 <code>\linethickness</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cthinlines-1" href="#g_t_005cthinlines">8.19.7 <code>\thinlines</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cthicklines-1" href="#g_t_005cthicklines">8.19.8 <code>\thicklines</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005ccircle-1" href="#g_t_005ccircle">8.19.9 <code>\circle</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005coval-1" href="#g_t_005coval">8.19.10 <code>\oval</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cshortstack-1" href="#g_t_005cshortstack">8.19.11 <code>\shortstack</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cvector-1" href="#g_t_005cvector">8.19.12 <code>\vector</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029-1" href="#g_t_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029">8.19.13 <code>\makebox</code> (picture)</a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029-1" href="#g_t_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029">8.19.14 <code>\framebox</code> (picture)</a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cframe-1" href="#g_t_005cframe">8.19.15 <code>\frame</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cdashbox-1" href="#g_t_005cdashbox">8.19.16 <code>\dashbox</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-math-1" href="#math">8.17 <code class="code">math</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-minipage-1" href="#minipage">8.18 <code class="code">minipage</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-picture-1" href="#picture">8.19 <code class="code">picture</code></a>
+ <ul class="toc-numbered-mark">
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cput-1" href="#g_t_005cput">8.19.1 <code class="code">\put</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cmultiput-1" href="#g_t_005cmultiput">8.19.2 <code class="code">\multiput</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cqbezier-1" href="#g_t_005cqbezier">8.19.3 <code class="code">\qbezier</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cgraphpaper-1" href="#g_t_005cgraphpaper">8.19.4 <code class="code">\graphpaper</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cline-1" href="#g_t_005cline">8.19.5 <code class="code">\line</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005clinethickness-1" href="#g_t_005clinethickness">8.19.6 <code class="code">\linethickness</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cthinlines-1" href="#g_t_005cthinlines">8.19.7 <code class="code">\thinlines</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cthicklines-1" href="#g_t_005cthicklines">8.19.8 <code class="code">\thicklines</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005ccircle-1" href="#g_t_005ccircle">8.19.9 <code class="code">\circle</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005coval-1" href="#g_t_005coval">8.19.10 <code class="code">\oval</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cshortstack-1" href="#g_t_005cshortstack">8.19.11 <code class="code">\shortstack</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cvector-1" href="#g_t_005cvector">8.19.12 <code class="code">\vector</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029-1" href="#g_t_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029">8.19.13 <code class="code">\makebox</code> (picture)</a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029-1" href="#g_t_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029">8.19.14 <code class="code">\framebox</code> (picture)</a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cframe-1" href="#g_t_005cframe">8.19.15 <code class="code">\frame</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cdashbox-1" href="#g_t_005cdashbox">8.19.16 <code class="code">\dashbox</code></a></li>
</ul></li>
- <li><a id="toc-quotation-_0026-quote-1" href="#quotation-_0026-quote">8.20 <code>quotation</code> & <code>quote</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-tabbing-1" href="#tabbing">8.21 <code>tabbing</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-table-1" href="#table">8.22 <code>table</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-tabular-1" href="#tabular">8.23 <code>tabular</code></a>
- <ul class="no-bullet">
- <li><a id="toc-_005cmulticolumn-1" href="#g_t_005cmulticolumn">8.23.1 <code>\multicolumn</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cvline-1" href="#g_t_005cvline">8.23.2 <code>\vline</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005ccline-1" href="#g_t_005ccline">8.23.3 <code>\cline</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005chline-1" href="#g_t_005chline">8.23.4 <code>\hline</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-quotation-_0026-quote-1" href="#quotation-_0026-quote">8.20 <code class="code">quotation</code> & <code class="code">quote</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-tabbing-1" href="#tabbing">8.21 <code class="code">tabbing</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-table-1" href="#table">8.22 <code class="code">table</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-tabular-1" href="#tabular">8.23 <code class="code">tabular</code></a>
+ <ul class="toc-numbered-mark">
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cmulticolumn-1" href="#g_t_005cmulticolumn">8.23.1 <code class="code">\multicolumn</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cvline-1" href="#g_t_005cvline">8.23.2 <code class="code">\vline</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005ccline-1" href="#g_t_005ccline">8.23.3 <code class="code">\cline</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005chline-1" href="#g_t_005chline">8.23.4 <code class="code">\hline</code></a></li>
</ul></li>
- <li><a id="toc-thebibliography-1" href="#thebibliography">8.24 <code>thebibliography</code></a>
- <ul class="no-bullet">
- <li><a id="toc-_005cbibitem-1" href="#g_t_005cbibitem">8.24.1 <code>\bibitem</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005ccite-1" href="#g_t_005ccite">8.24.2 <code>\cite</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cnocite-1" href="#g_t_005cnocite">8.24.3 <code>\nocite</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-thebibliography-1" href="#thebibliography">8.24 <code class="code">thebibliography</code></a>
+ <ul class="toc-numbered-mark">
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cbibitem-1" href="#g_t_005cbibitem">8.24.1 <code class="code">\bibitem</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005ccite-1" href="#g_t_005ccite">8.24.2 <code class="code">\cite</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cnocite-1" href="#g_t_005cnocite">8.24.3 <code class="code">\nocite</code></a></li>
<li><a id="toc-Using-BibTeX-1" href="#Using-BibTeX">8.24.4 Using BibTeX</a>
- <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <ul class="toc-numbered-mark">
<li><a id="toc-BibTeX-error-messages-1" href="#BibTeX-error-messages">8.24.4.1 BibTeX error messages</a></li>
</ul></li>
</ul></li>
- <li><a id="toc-theorem-1" href="#theorem">8.25 <code>theorem</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-titlepage-1" href="#titlepage">8.26 <code>titlepage</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-verbatim-1" href="#verbatim">8.27 <code>verbatim</code></a>
- <ul class="no-bullet">
- <li><a id="toc-_005cverb-1" href="#g_t_005cverb">8.27.1 <code>\verb</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-theorem-1" href="#theorem">8.25 <code class="code">theorem</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-titlepage-1" href="#titlepage">8.26 <code class="code">titlepage</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-verbatim-1" href="#verbatim">8.27 <code class="code">verbatim</code></a>
+ <ul class="toc-numbered-mark">
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cverb-1" href="#g_t_005cverb">8.27.1 <code class="code">\verb</code></a></li>
</ul></li>
- <li><a id="toc-verse-1" href="#verse">8.28 <code>verse</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-verse-1" href="#verse">8.28 <code class="code">verse</code></a></li>
</ul></li>
<li><a id="toc-Line-breaking-1" href="#Line-breaking">9 Line breaking</a>
- <ul class="no-bullet">
- <li><a id="toc-_005c_005c-1" href="#g_t_005c_005c">9.1 <code>\\</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cobeycr-_0026-_005crestorecr-1" href="#g_t_005cobeycr-_0026-_005crestorecr">9.2 <code>\obeycr</code> & <code>\restorecr</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cnewline-1" href="#g_t_005cnewline">9.3 <code>\newline</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005c_002d-_0028discretionary-hyphen_0029" href="#g_t_005c_002d-_0028hyphenation_0029">9.4 <code>\-</code> (discretionary hyphen)</a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cdiscretionary-_0028generalized-hyphenation-point_0029" href="#g_t_005cdiscretionary">9.5 <code>\discretionary</code> (generalized hyphenation point)</a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cfussy-_0026-_005csloppy-1" href="#g_t_005cfussy-_0026-_005csloppy">9.6 <code>\fussy</code> & <code>\sloppy</code></a>
- <ul class="no-bullet">
- <li><a id="toc-sloppypar-1" href="#sloppypar">9.6.1 <code>sloppypar</code></a></li>
+ <ul class="toc-numbered-mark">
+ <li><a id="toc-_005c_005c-1" href="#g_t_005c_005c">9.1 <code class="code">\\</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cobeycr-_0026-_005crestorecr-1" href="#g_t_005cobeycr-_0026-_005crestorecr">9.2 <code class="code">\obeycr</code> & <code class="code">\restorecr</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cnewline-1" href="#g_t_005cnewline">9.3 <code class="code">\newline</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005c_002d-_0028discretionary-hyphen_0029" href="#g_t_005c_002d-_0028hyphenation_0029">9.4 <code class="code">\-</code> (discretionary hyphen)</a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cdiscretionary-_0028generalized-hyphenation-point_0029" href="#g_t_005cdiscretionary">9.5 <code class="code">\discretionary</code> (generalized hyphenation point)</a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cfussy-_0026-_005csloppy-1" href="#g_t_005cfussy-_0026-_005csloppy">9.6 <code class="code">\fussy</code> & <code class="code">\sloppy</code></a>
+ <ul class="toc-numbered-mark">
+ <li><a id="toc-sloppypar-1" href="#sloppypar">9.6.1 <code class="code">sloppypar</code></a></li>
</ul></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005chyphenation-1" href="#g_t_005chyphenation">9.7 <code>\hyphenation</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005clinebreak-_0026-_005cnolinebreak-1" href="#g_t_005clinebreak-_0026-_005cnolinebreak">9.8 <code>\linebreak</code> & <code>\nolinebreak</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005chyphenation-1" href="#g_t_005chyphenation">9.7 <code class="code">\hyphenation</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005clinebreak-_0026-_005cnolinebreak-1" href="#g_t_005clinebreak-_0026-_005cnolinebreak">9.8 <code class="code">\linebreak</code> & <code class="code">\nolinebreak</code></a></li>
</ul></li>
<li><a id="toc-Page-breaking-1" href="#Page-breaking">10 Page breaking</a>
- <ul class="no-bullet">
- <li><a id="toc-_005cclearpage-_0026-_005ccleardoublepage-1" href="#g_t_005cclearpage-_0026-_005ccleardoublepage">10.1 <code>\clearpage</code> & <code>\cleardoublepage</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cnewpage-1" href="#g_t_005cnewpage">10.2 <code>\newpage</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cenlargethispage-1" href="#g_t_005cenlargethispage">10.3 <code>\enlargethispage</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cpagebreak-_0026-_005cnopagebreak-1" href="#g_t_005cpagebreak-_0026-_005cnopagebreak">10.4 <code>\pagebreak</code> & <code>\nopagebreak</code></a></li>
+ <ul class="toc-numbered-mark">
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cclearpage-_0026-_005ccleardoublepage-1" href="#g_t_005cclearpage-_0026-_005ccleardoublepage">10.1 <code class="code">\clearpage</code> & <code class="code">\cleardoublepage</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cnewpage-1" href="#g_t_005cnewpage">10.2 <code class="code">\newpage</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cenlargethispage-1" href="#g_t_005cenlargethispage">10.3 <code class="code">\enlargethispage</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cpagebreak-_0026-_005cnopagebreak-1" href="#g_t_005cpagebreak-_0026-_005cnopagebreak">10.4 <code class="code">\pagebreak</code> & <code class="code">\nopagebreak</code></a></li>
</ul></li>
<li><a id="toc-Footnotes-1" href="#Footnotes">11 Footnotes</a>
- <ul class="no-bullet">
- <li><a id="toc-_005cfootnote-1" href="#g_t_005cfootnote">11.1 <code>\footnote</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cfootnotemark-1" href="#g_t_005cfootnotemark">11.2 <code>\footnotemark</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cfootnotetext-1" href="#g_t_005cfootnotetext">11.3 <code>\footnotetext</code></a></li>
+ <ul class="toc-numbered-mark">
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cfootnote-1" href="#g_t_005cfootnote">11.1 <code class="code">\footnote</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cfootnotemark-1" href="#g_t_005cfootnotemark">11.2 <code class="code">\footnotemark</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cfootnotetext-1" href="#g_t_005cfootnotetext">11.3 <code class="code">\footnotetext</code></a></li>
<li><a id="toc-Footnotes-in-section-headings-1" href="#Footnotes-in-section-headings">11.4 Footnotes in section headings</a></li>
<li><a id="toc-Footnotes-in-a-table-1" href="#Footnotes-in-a-table">11.5 Footnotes in a table</a></li>
<li><a id="toc-Footnotes-of-footnotes-1" href="#Footnotes-of-footnotes">11.6 Footnotes of footnotes</a></li>
</ul></li>
<li><a id="toc-Definitions-1" href="#Definitions">12 Definitions</a>
- <ul class="no-bullet">
- <li><a id="toc-_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand-1" href="#g_t_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand">12.1 <code>\newcommand</code> & <code>\renewcommand</code></a>
- <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <ul class="toc-numbered-mark">
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand-1" href="#g_t_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand">12.1 <code class="code">\newcommand</code> & <code class="code">\renewcommand</code></a>
+ <ul class="toc-numbered-mark">
<li><a id="toc-Control-sequence_002c-control-word-and-control-symbol" href="#Control-sequences">12.1.1 Control sequence, control word and control symbol</a></li>
</ul></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cprovidecommand-1" href="#g_t_005cprovidecommand">12.2 <code>\providecommand</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cmakeatletter-_0026-_005cmakeatother-1" href="#g_t_005cmakeatletter-_0026-_005cmakeatother">12.3 <code>\makeatletter</code> & <code>\makeatother</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005c_0040ifstar-1" href="#g_t_005c_0040ifstar">12.4 <code>\@ifstar</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cnewcounter_003a-Allocating-a-counter" href="#g_t_005cnewcounter">12.5 <code>\newcounter</code>: Allocating a counter</a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cnewlength-1" href="#g_t_005cnewlength">12.6 <code>\newlength</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cnewsavebox-1" href="#g_t_005cnewsavebox">12.7 <code>\newsavebox</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cnewenvironment-_0026-_005crenewenvironment-1" href="#g_t_005cnewenvironment-_0026-_005crenewenvironment">12.8 <code>\newenvironment</code> & <code>\renewenvironment</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cnewtheorem-1" href="#g_t_005cnewtheorem">12.9 <code>\newtheorem</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cnewfont-1" href="#g_t_005cnewfont">12.10 <code>\newfont</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cprotect-1" href="#g_t_005cprotect">12.11 <code>\protect</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cignorespaces-_0026-_005cignorespacesafterend-1" href="#g_t_005cignorespaces-_0026-_005cignorespacesafterend">12.12 <code>\ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterend</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cprovidecommand-1" href="#g_t_005cprovidecommand">12.2 <code class="code">\providecommand</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cmakeatletter-_0026-_005cmakeatother-1" href="#g_t_005cmakeatletter-_0026-_005cmakeatother">12.3 <code class="code">\makeatletter</code> & <code class="code">\makeatother</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005c_0040ifstar-1" href="#g_t_005c_0040ifstar">12.4 <code class="code">\@ifstar</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cnewcounter_003a-Allocating-a-counter" href="#g_t_005cnewcounter">12.5 <code class="code">\newcounter</code>: Allocating a counter</a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cnewlength-1" href="#g_t_005cnewlength">12.6 <code class="code">\newlength</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cnewsavebox-1" href="#g_t_005cnewsavebox">12.7 <code class="code">\newsavebox</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cnewenvironment-_0026-_005crenewenvironment-1" href="#g_t_005cnewenvironment-_0026-_005crenewenvironment">12.8 <code class="code">\newenvironment</code> & <code class="code">\renewenvironment</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cnewtheorem-1" href="#g_t_005cnewtheorem">12.9 <code class="code">\newtheorem</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cnewfont-1" href="#g_t_005cnewfont">12.10 <code class="code">\newfont</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cprotect-1" href="#g_t_005cprotect">12.11 <code class="code">\protect</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cignorespaces-_0026-_005cignorespacesafterend-1" href="#g_t_005cignorespaces-_0026-_005cignorespacesafterend">12.12 <code class="code">\ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterend</code></a></li>
<li><a id="toc-xspace-package-1" href="#xspace-package">12.13 xspace package</a></li>
</ul></li>
<li><a id="toc-Counters-1" href="#Counters">13 Counters</a>
- <ul class="no-bullet">
- <li><a id="toc-_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol_003a-Printing-counters" href="#g_t_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol">13.1 <code>\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</code>: Printing counters</a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cusecounter-1" href="#g_t_005cusecounter">13.2 <code>\usecounter</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cvalue-1" href="#g_t_005cvalue">13.3 <code>\value</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005csetcounter-1" href="#g_t_005csetcounter">13.4 <code>\setcounter</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005caddtocounter-1" href="#g_t_005caddtocounter">13.5 <code>\addtocounter</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005crefstepcounter-1" href="#g_t_005crefstepcounter">13.6 <code>\refstepcounter</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cstepcounter-1" href="#g_t_005cstepcounter">13.7 <code>\stepcounter</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cday-_0026-_005cmonth-_0026-_005cyear-1" href="#g_t_005cday-_0026-_005cmonth-_0026-_005cyear">13.8 <code>\day</code> & <code>\month</code> & <code>\year</code></a></li>
+ <ul class="toc-numbered-mark">
+ <li><a id="toc-_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol_003a-Printing-counters" href="#g_t_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol">13.1 <code class="code">\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</code>: Printing counters</a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cusecounter-1" href="#g_t_005cusecounter">13.2 <code class="code">\usecounter</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cvalue-1" href="#g_t_005cvalue">13.3 <code class="code">\value</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005csetcounter-1" href="#g_t_005csetcounter">13.4 <code class="code">\setcounter</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005caddtocounter-1" href="#g_t_005caddtocounter">13.5 <code class="code">\addtocounter</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005crefstepcounter-1" href="#g_t_005crefstepcounter">13.6 <code class="code">\refstepcounter</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cstepcounter-1" href="#g_t_005cstepcounter">13.7 <code class="code">\stepcounter</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cday-_0026-_005cmonth-_0026-_005cyear-1" href="#g_t_005cday-_0026-_005cmonth-_0026-_005cyear">13.8 <code class="code">\day</code> & <code class="code">\month</code> & <code class="code">\year</code></a></li>
</ul></li>
<li><a id="toc-Lengths-1" href="#Lengths">14 Lengths</a>
- <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <ul class="toc-numbered-mark">
<li><a id="toc-Units-of-length-1" href="#Units-of-length">14.1 Units of length</a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005csetlength-1" href="#g_t_005csetlength">14.2 <code>\setlength</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005caddtolength-1" href="#g_t_005caddtolength">14.3 <code>\addtolength</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005csettodepth-1" href="#g_t_005csettodepth">14.4 <code>\settodepth</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005csettoheight-1" href="#g_t_005csettoheight">14.5 <code>\settoheight</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005csettowidth-1" href="#g_t_005csettowidth">14.6 <code>\settowidth</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cstretch-1" href="#g_t_005cstretch">14.7 <code>\stretch</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005csetlength-1" href="#g_t_005csetlength">14.2 <code class="code">\setlength</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005caddtolength-1" href="#g_t_005caddtolength">14.3 <code class="code">\addtolength</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005csettodepth-1" href="#g_t_005csettodepth">14.4 <code class="code">\settodepth</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005csettoheight-1" href="#g_t_005csettoheight">14.5 <code class="code">\settoheight</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005csettowidth-1" href="#g_t_005csettowidth">14.6 <code class="code">\settowidth</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cstretch-1" href="#g_t_005cstretch">14.7 <code class="code">\stretch</code></a></li>
<li><a id="toc-Expressions-1" href="#Expressions">14.8 Expressions</a></li>
</ul></li>
<li><a id="toc-Making-paragraphs-1" href="#Making-paragraphs">15 Making paragraphs</a>
- <ul class="no-bullet">
- <li><a id="toc-_005cpar-1" href="#g_t_005cpar">15.1 <code>\par</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cindent-_0026-_005cnoindent-1" href="#g_t_005cindent-_0026-_005cnoindent">15.2 <code>\indent</code> & <code>\noindent</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cparindent-_0026-_005cparskip-1" href="#g_t_005cparindent-_0026-_005cparskip">15.3 <code>\parindent</code> & <code>\parskip</code></a></li>
+ <ul class="toc-numbered-mark">
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cpar-1" href="#g_t_005cpar">15.1 <code class="code">\par</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cindent-_0026-_005cnoindent-1" href="#g_t_005cindent-_0026-_005cnoindent">15.2 <code class="code">\indent</code> & <code class="code">\noindent</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cparindent-_0026-_005cparskip-1" href="#g_t_005cparindent-_0026-_005cparskip">15.3 <code class="code">\parindent</code> & <code class="code">\parskip</code></a></li>
<li><a id="toc-Marginal-notes-1" href="#Marginal-notes">15.4 Marginal notes</a></li>
</ul></li>
<li><a id="toc-Math-formulas-1" href="#Math-formulas">16 Math formulas</a>
- <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <ul class="toc-numbered-mark">
<li><a id="toc-Subscripts-_0026-superscripts-1" href="#Subscripts-_0026-superscripts">16.1 Subscripts & superscripts</a></li>
<li><a id="toc-Math-symbols-1" href="#Math-symbols">16.2 Math symbols</a>
- <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <ul class="toc-numbered-mark">
<li><a id="toc-Arrows-1" href="#Arrows">16.2.1 Arrows</a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cboldmath-_0026-_005cunboldmath-1" href="#g_t_005cboldmath-_0026-_005cunboldmath">16.2.2 <code>\boldmath</code> & <code>\unboldmath</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cboldmath-_0026-_005cunboldmath-1" href="#g_t_005cboldmath-_0026-_005cunboldmath">16.2.2 <code class="code">\boldmath</code> & <code class="code">\unboldmath</code></a>
+ <ul class="toc-numbered-mark">
+ <li><a id="toc-bm_003a-Individual-bold-math-symbols" href="#bm">16.2.2.1 <code class="code">bm</code>: Individual bold math symbols</a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-OpenType-bold-math-1" href="#OpenType-bold-math">16.2.2.2 OpenType bold math</a></li>
+ </ul></li>
<li><a id="toc-Blackboard-bold-1" href="#Blackboard-bold">16.2.3 Blackboard bold</a></li>
<li><a id="toc-Calligraphic-1" href="#Calligraphic">16.2.4 Calligraphic</a></li>
<li><a id="toc-Delimiters-1" href="#Delimiters">16.2.5 Delimiters</a>
- <ul class="no-bullet">
- <li><a id="toc-_005cleft-_0026-_005cright-1" href="#g_t_005cleft-_0026-_005cright">16.2.5.1 <code>\left</code> & <code>\right</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cbigl_002c-_005cbigr_002c-etc_002e" href="#g_t_005cbigl-_0026-_005cbigr-etc_002e">16.2.5.2 <code>\bigl</code>, <code>\bigr</code>, etc.</a></li>
+ <ul class="toc-numbered-mark">
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cleft-_0026-_005cright-1" href="#g_t_005cleft-_0026-_005cright">16.2.5.1 <code class="code">\left</code> & <code class="code">\right</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cbigl_002c-_005cbigr_002c-etc_002e" href="#g_t_005cbigl-_0026-_005cbigr-etc_002e">16.2.5.2 <code class="code">\bigl</code>, <code class="code">\bigr</code>, etc.</a></li>
</ul></li>
<li><a id="toc-Dots_002c-horizontal-or-vertical" href="#Dots">16.2.6 Dots, horizontal or vertical</a></li>
<li><a id="toc-Greek-letters-1" href="#Greek-letters">16.2.7 Greek letters</a></li>
@@ -411,72 +414,72 @@
<li><a id="toc-Math-accents-1" href="#Math-accents">16.4 Math accents</a></li>
<li><a id="toc-Over_002d-and-Underlining-1" href="#Over_002d-and-Underlining">16.5 Over- and Underlining</a></li>
<li><a id="toc-Spacing-in-math-mode-1" href="#Spacing-in-math-mode">16.6 Spacing in math mode</a>
- <ul class="no-bullet">
- <li><a id="toc-_005csmash-1" href="#g_t_005csmash">16.6.1 <code>\smash</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cphantom-_0026-_005cvphantom-_0026-_005chphantom-1" href="#g_t_005cphantom-_0026-_005cvphantom-_0026-_005chphantom">16.6.2 <code>\phantom</code> & <code>\vphantom</code> & <code>\hphantom</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cmathstrut-1" href="#g_t_005cmathstrut">16.6.3 <code>\mathstrut</code></a></li>
+ <ul class="toc-numbered-mark">
+ <li><a id="toc-_005csmash-1" href="#g_t_005csmash">16.6.1 <code class="code">\smash</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cphantom-_0026-_005cvphantom-_0026-_005chphantom-1" href="#g_t_005cphantom-_0026-_005cvphantom-_0026-_005chphantom">16.6.2 <code class="code">\phantom</code> & <code class="code">\vphantom</code> & <code class="code">\hphantom</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cmathstrut-1" href="#g_t_005cmathstrut">16.6.3 <code class="code">\mathstrut</code></a></li>
</ul></li>
<li><a id="toc-Math-styles-1" href="#Math-styles">16.7 Math styles</a></li>
<li><a id="toc-Math-miscellany-1" href="#Math-miscellany">16.8 Math miscellany</a>
- <ul class="no-bullet">
- <li><a id="toc-Colon-character-_003a-_0026-_005ccolon" href="#Colon-character-_0026-_005ccolon">16.8.1 Colon character <code>:</code> & <code>\colon</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005c_002a-1" href="#g_t_005c_002a">16.8.2 <code>\*</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cfrac-1" href="#g_t_005cfrac">16.8.3 <code>\frac</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005csqrt-1" href="#g_t_005csqrt">16.8.4 <code>\sqrt</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cstackrel-1" href="#g_t_005cstackrel">16.8.5 <code>\stackrel</code></a></li>
+ <ul class="toc-numbered-mark">
+ <li><a id="toc-Colon-character-_003a-_0026-_005ccolon" href="#Colon-character-_0026-_005ccolon">16.8.1 Colon character <code class="code">:</code> & <code class="code">\colon</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005c_002a-1" href="#g_t_005c_002a">16.8.2 <code class="code">\*</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cfrac-1" href="#g_t_005cfrac">16.8.3 <code class="code">\frac</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005csqrt-1" href="#g_t_005csqrt">16.8.4 <code class="code">\sqrt</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cstackrel-1" href="#g_t_005cstackrel">16.8.5 <code class="code">\stackrel</code></a></li>
</ul></li>
</ul></li>
<li><a id="toc-Modes-1" href="#Modes">17 Modes</a>
- <ul class="no-bullet">
- <li><a id="toc-_005censuremath-1" href="#g_t_005censuremath">17.1 <code>\ensuremath</code></a></li>
+ <ul class="toc-numbered-mark">
+ <li><a id="toc-_005censuremath-1" href="#g_t_005censuremath">17.1 <code class="code">\ensuremath</code></a></li>
</ul></li>
<li><a id="toc-Page-styles-1" href="#Page-styles">18 Page styles</a>
- <ul class="no-bullet">
- <li><a id="toc-_005cmaketitle-1" href="#g_t_005cmaketitle">18.1 <code>\maketitle</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cpagenumbering-1" href="#g_t_005cpagenumbering">18.2 <code>\pagenumbering</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cpagestyle-1" href="#g_t_005cpagestyle">18.3 <code>\pagestyle</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cthispagestyle-1" href="#g_t_005cthispagestyle">18.4 <code>\thispagestyle</code></a></li>
+ <ul class="toc-numbered-mark">
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cmaketitle-1" href="#g_t_005cmaketitle">18.1 <code class="code">\maketitle</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cpagenumbering-1" href="#g_t_005cpagenumbering">18.2 <code class="code">\pagenumbering</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cpagestyle-1" href="#g_t_005cpagestyle">18.3 <code class="code">\pagestyle</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cthispagestyle-1" href="#g_t_005cthispagestyle">18.4 <code class="code">\thispagestyle</code></a></li>
</ul></li>
<li><a id="toc-Spaces-1" href="#Spaces">19 Spaces</a>
- <ul class="no-bullet">
- <li><a id="toc-_005censpace-_0026-_005cquad-_0026-_005cqquad-1" href="#g_t_005censpace-_0026-_005cquad-_0026-_005cqquad">19.1 <code>\enspace</code> & <code>\quad</code> & <code>\qquad</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005chspace-1" href="#g_t_005chspace">19.2 <code>\hspace</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005chfill-1" href="#g_t_005chfill">19.3 <code>\hfill</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005chss-1" href="#g_t_005chss">19.4 <code>\hss</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cspacefactor-1" href="#g_t_005cspacefactor">19.5 <code>\spacefactor</code></a>
- <ul class="no-bullet">
- <li><a id="toc-_005c_0040-1" href="#g_t_005c_0040">19.5.1 <code>\@</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cfrenchspacing-_0026-_005cnonfrenchspacing-1" href="#g_t_005cfrenchspacing-_0026-_005cnonfrenchspacing">19.5.2 <code>\frenchspacing</code> & <code>\nonfrenchspacing</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cnormalsfcodes-1" href="#g_t_005cnormalsfcodes">19.5.3 <code>\normalsfcodes</code></a></li>
+ <ul class="toc-numbered-mark">
+ <li><a id="toc-_005censpace-_0026-_005cquad-_0026-_005cqquad-1" href="#g_t_005censpace-_0026-_005cquad-_0026-_005cqquad">19.1 <code class="code">\enspace</code> & <code class="code">\quad</code> & <code class="code">\qquad</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005chspace-1" href="#g_t_005chspace">19.2 <code class="code">\hspace</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005chfill-1" href="#g_t_005chfill">19.3 <code class="code">\hfill</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005chss-1" href="#g_t_005chss">19.4 <code class="code">\hss</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cspacefactor-1" href="#g_t_005cspacefactor">19.5 <code class="code">\spacefactor</code></a>
+ <ul class="toc-numbered-mark">
+ <li><a id="toc-_005c_0040-1" href="#g_t_005c_0040">19.5.1 <code class="code">\@</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cfrenchspacing-_0026-_005cnonfrenchspacing-1" href="#g_t_005cfrenchspacing-_0026-_005cnonfrenchspacing">19.5.2 <code class="code">\frenchspacing</code> & <code class="code">\nonfrenchspacing</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cnormalsfcodes-1" href="#g_t_005cnormalsfcodes">19.5.3 <code class="code">\normalsfcodes</code></a></li>
</ul></li>
- <li><a id="toc-Backslash_002dspace_002c-_005c-" href="#g_t_005c_0028SPACE_0029">19.6 Backslash-space, <code>\ </code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_007e-1" href="#g_t_007e">19.7 <code>~</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cthinspace-_0026-_005cnegthinspace-1" href="#g_t_005cthinspace-_0026-_005cnegthinspace">19.8 <code>\thinspace</code> & <code>\negthinspace</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005c_002f-1" href="#g_t_005c_002f">19.9 <code>\/</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005chrulefill-_0026-_005cdotfill-1" href="#g_t_005chrulefill-_0026-_005cdotfill">19.10 <code>\hrulefill</code> & <code>\dotfill</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cbigskip-_0026-_005cmedskip-_0026-_005csmallskip-1" href="#g_t_005cbigskip-_0026-_005cmedskip-_0026-_005csmallskip">19.11 <code>\bigskip</code> & <code>\medskip</code> & <code>\smallskip</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cbigbreak-_0026-_005cmedbreak-_0026-_005csmallbreak-1" href="#g_t_005cbigbreak-_0026-_005cmedbreak-_0026-_005csmallbreak">19.12 <code>\bigbreak</code> & <code>\medbreak</code> & <code>\smallbreak</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cstrut-1" href="#g_t_005cstrut">19.13 <code>\strut</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cvspace-1" href="#g_t_005cvspace">19.14 <code>\vspace</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cvfill-1" href="#g_t_005cvfill">19.15 <code>\vfill</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005caddvspace-1" href="#g_t_005caddvspace">19.16 <code>\addvspace</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-Backslash_002dspace_002c-_005c-" href="#g_t_005c_0028SPACE_0029">19.6 Backslash-space, <code class="code">\ </code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_007e-1" href="#g_t_007e">19.7 <code class="code">~</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cthinspace-_0026-_005cnegthinspace-1" href="#g_t_005cthinspace-_0026-_005cnegthinspace">19.8 <code class="code">\thinspace</code> & <code class="code">\negthinspace</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005c_002f-1" href="#g_t_005c_002f">19.9 <code class="code">\/</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005chrulefill-_0026-_005cdotfill-1" href="#g_t_005chrulefill-_0026-_005cdotfill">19.10 <code class="code">\hrulefill</code> & <code class="code">\dotfill</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cbigskip-_0026-_005cmedskip-_0026-_005csmallskip-1" href="#g_t_005cbigskip-_0026-_005cmedskip-_0026-_005csmallskip">19.11 <code class="code">\bigskip</code> & <code class="code">\medskip</code> & <code class="code">\smallskip</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cbigbreak-_0026-_005cmedbreak-_0026-_005csmallbreak-1" href="#g_t_005cbigbreak-_0026-_005cmedbreak-_0026-_005csmallbreak">19.12 <code class="code">\bigbreak</code> & <code class="code">\medbreak</code> & <code class="code">\smallbreak</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cstrut-1" href="#g_t_005cstrut">19.13 <code class="code">\strut</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cvspace-1" href="#g_t_005cvspace">19.14 <code class="code">\vspace</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cvfill-1" href="#g_t_005cvfill">19.15 <code class="code">\vfill</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005caddvspace-1" href="#g_t_005caddvspace">19.16 <code class="code">\addvspace</code></a></li>
</ul></li>
<li><a id="toc-Boxes-1" href="#Boxes">20 Boxes</a>
- <ul class="no-bullet">
- <li><a id="toc-_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox-1" href="#g_t_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox">20.1 <code>\mbox</code> & <code>\makebox</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cfbox-_0026-_005cframebox-1" href="#g_t_005cfbox-_0026-_005cframebox">20.2 <code>\fbox</code> & <code>\framebox</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cparbox-1" href="#g_t_005cparbox">20.3 <code>\parbox</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005craisebox-1" href="#g_t_005craisebox">20.4 <code>\raisebox</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005csbox-_0026-_005csavebox-1" href="#g_t_005csbox-_0026-_005csavebox">20.5 <code>\sbox</code> & <code>\savebox</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-lrbox-1" href="#lrbox">20.6 <code>lrbox</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cusebox-1" href="#g_t_005cusebox">20.7 <code>\usebox</code></a></li>
+ <ul class="toc-numbered-mark">
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox-1" href="#g_t_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox">20.1 <code class="code">\mbox</code> & <code class="code">\makebox</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cfbox-_0026-_005cframebox-1" href="#g_t_005cfbox-_0026-_005cframebox">20.2 <code class="code">\fbox</code> & <code class="code">\framebox</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cparbox-1" href="#g_t_005cparbox">20.3 <code class="code">\parbox</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005craisebox-1" href="#g_t_005craisebox">20.4 <code class="code">\raisebox</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005csbox-_0026-_005csavebox-1" href="#g_t_005csbox-_0026-_005csavebox">20.5 <code class="code">\sbox</code> & <code class="code">\savebox</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-lrbox-1" href="#lrbox">20.6 <code class="code">lrbox</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cusebox-1" href="#g_t_005cusebox">20.7 <code class="code">\usebox</code></a></li>
</ul></li>
<li><a id="toc-Color-1" href="#Color">21 Color</a>
- <ul class="no-bullet">
- <li><a id="toc-color-package-options" href="#Color-package-options">21.1 <code>color</code> package options</a></li>
+ <ul class="toc-numbered-mark">
+ <li><a id="toc-color-package-options" href="#Color-package-options">21.1 <code class="code">color</code> package options</a></li>
<li><a id="toc-Color-models-1" href="#Color-models">21.2 Color models</a></li>
<li><a id="toc-Commands-for-color-1" href="#Commands-for-color">21.3 Commands for color</a>
- <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <ul class="toc-numbered-mark">
<li><a id="toc-Define-colors-1" href="#Define-colors">21.3.1 Define colors</a></li>
<li><a id="toc-Colored-text-1" href="#Colored-text">21.3.2 Colored text</a></li>
<li><a id="toc-Colored-boxes-1" href="#Colored-boxes">21.3.3 Colored boxes</a></li>
@@ -484,97 +487,97 @@
</ul></li>
</ul></li>
<li><a id="toc-Graphics-1" href="#Graphics">22 Graphics</a>
- <ul class="no-bullet">
- <li><a id="toc-graphics-package-options" href="#Graphics-package-options">22.1 <code>graphics</code> package options</a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-graphics-package-configuration" href="#Graphics-package-configuration">22.2 <code>graphics</code> package configuration</a>
- <ul class="no-bullet">
- <li><a id="toc-_005cgraphicspath-1" href="#g_t_005cgraphicspath">22.2.1 <code>\graphicspath</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cDeclareGraphicsExtensions-1" href="#g_t_005cDeclareGraphicsExtensions">22.2.2 <code>\DeclareGraphicsExtensions</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cDeclareGraphicsRule-1" href="#g_t_005cDeclareGraphicsRule">22.2.3 <code>\DeclareGraphicsRule</code></a></li>
+ <ul class="toc-numbered-mark">
+ <li><a id="toc-graphics-package-options" href="#Graphics-package-options">22.1 <code class="code">graphics</code> package options</a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-graphics-package-configuration" href="#Graphics-package-configuration">22.2 <code class="code">graphics</code> package configuration</a>
+ <ul class="toc-numbered-mark">
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cgraphicspath-1" href="#g_t_005cgraphicspath">22.2.1 <code class="code">\graphicspath</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cDeclareGraphicsExtensions-1" href="#g_t_005cDeclareGraphicsExtensions">22.2.2 <code class="code">\DeclareGraphicsExtensions</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cDeclareGraphicsRule-1" href="#g_t_005cDeclareGraphicsRule">22.2.3 <code class="code">\DeclareGraphicsRule</code></a></li>
</ul></li>
<li><a id="toc-Commands-for-graphics-1" href="#Commands-for-graphics">22.3 Commands for graphics</a>
- <ul class="no-bullet">
- <li><a id="toc-_005cincludegraphics-1" href="#g_t_005cincludegraphics">22.3.1 <code>\includegraphics</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005crotatebox-1" href="#g_t_005crotatebox">22.3.2 <code>\rotatebox</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cscalebox-1" href="#g_t_005cscalebox">22.3.3 <code>\scalebox</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cresizebox-1" href="#g_t_005cresizebox">22.3.4 <code>\resizebox</code></a></li>
+ <ul class="toc-numbered-mark">
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cincludegraphics-1" href="#g_t_005cincludegraphics">22.3.1 <code class="code">\includegraphics</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005crotatebox-1" href="#g_t_005crotatebox">22.3.2 <code class="code">\rotatebox</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cscalebox-1" href="#g_t_005cscalebox">22.3.3 <code class="code">\scalebox</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cresizebox-1" href="#g_t_005cresizebox">22.3.4 <code class="code">\resizebox</code></a></li>
</ul></li>
</ul></li>
<li><a id="toc-Special-insertions-1" href="#Special-insertions">23 Special insertions</a>
- <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <ul class="toc-numbered-mark">
<li><a id="toc-Reserved-characters-1" href="#Reserved-characters">23.1 Reserved characters</a></li>
<li><a id="toc-Upper-and-lower-case-1" href="#Upper-and-lower-case">23.2 Upper and lower case</a></li>
<li><a id="toc-Symbols-by-font-position-1" href="#Symbols-by-font-position">23.3 Symbols by font position</a></li>
<li><a id="toc-Text-symbols-1" href="#Text-symbols">23.4 Text symbols</a></li>
<li><a id="toc-Accents-1" href="#Accents">23.5 Accents</a>
- <ul class="no-bullet">
- <li><a id="toc-_005caccent-1" href="#g_t_005caccent">23.5.1 <code>\accent</code></a></li>
+ <ul class="toc-numbered-mark">
+ <li><a id="toc-_005caccent-1" href="#g_t_005caccent">23.5.1 <code class="code">\accent</code></a></li>
</ul></li>
<li><a id="toc-Additional-Latin-letters-1" href="#Additional-Latin-letters">23.6 Additional Latin letters</a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-inputenc-package-1" href="#inputenc-package">23.7 <code>inputenc</code> package</a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005crule-1" href="#g_t_005crule">23.8 <code>\rule</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005ctoday-1" href="#g_t_005ctoday">23.9 <code>\today</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-inputenc-package-1" href="#inputenc-package">23.7 <code class="code">inputenc</code> package</a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005crule-1" href="#g_t_005crule">23.8 <code class="code">\rule</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005ctoday-1" href="#g_t_005ctoday">23.9 <code class="code">\today</code></a></li>
</ul></li>
<li><a id="toc-Splitting-the-input-1" href="#Splitting-the-input">24 Splitting the input</a>
- <ul class="no-bullet">
- <li><a id="toc-_005cendinput-1" href="#g_t_005cendinput">24.1 <code>\endinput</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cinclude-_0026-_005cincludeonly-1" href="#g_t_005cinclude-_0026-_005cincludeonly">24.2 <code>\include</code> & <code>\includeonly</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cinput-1" href="#g_t_005cinput">24.3 <code>\input</code></a></li>
+ <ul class="toc-numbered-mark">
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cendinput-1" href="#g_t_005cendinput">24.1 <code class="code">\endinput</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cinclude-_0026-_005cincludeonly-1" href="#g_t_005cinclude-_0026-_005cincludeonly">24.2 <code class="code">\include</code> & <code class="code">\includeonly</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cinput-1" href="#g_t_005cinput">24.3 <code class="code">\input</code></a></li>
</ul></li>
<li><a id="toc-Front_002fback-matter-1" href="#Front_002fback-matter">25 Front/back matter</a>
- <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <ul class="toc-numbered-mark">
<li><a id="toc-Table-of-contents_002c-list-of-figures_002c-list-of-tables" href="#Table-of-contents-etc_002e">25.1 Table of contents, list of figures, list of tables</a>
- <ul class="no-bullet">
- <li><a id="toc-_005c_0040dottedtocline-1" href="#g_t_005c_0040dottedtocline">25.1.1 <code>\@dottedtocline</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005caddcontentsline-1" href="#g_t_005caddcontentsline">25.1.2 <code>\addcontentsline</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005caddtocontents-1" href="#g_t_005caddtocontents">25.1.3 <code>\addtocontents</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005ccontentsline-1" href="#g_t_005ccontentsline">25.1.4 <code>\contentsline</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cnofiles-1" href="#g_t_005cnofiles">25.1.5 <code>\nofiles</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cnumberline-1" href="#g_t_005cnumberline">25.1.6 <code>\numberline</code></a></li>
+ <ul class="toc-numbered-mark">
+ <li><a id="toc-_005c_0040dottedtocline-1" href="#g_t_005c_0040dottedtocline">25.1.1 <code class="code">\@dottedtocline</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005caddcontentsline-1" href="#g_t_005caddcontentsline">25.1.2 <code class="code">\addcontentsline</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005caddtocontents-1" href="#g_t_005caddtocontents">25.1.3 <code class="code">\addtocontents</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005ccontentsline-1" href="#g_t_005ccontentsline">25.1.4 <code class="code">\contentsline</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cnofiles-1" href="#g_t_005cnofiles">25.1.5 <code class="code">\nofiles</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cnumberline-1" href="#g_t_005cnumberline">25.1.6 <code class="code">\numberline</code></a></li>
</ul></li>
<li><a id="toc-Indexes-1" href="#Indexes">25.2 Indexes</a>
- <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <ul class="toc-numbered-mark">
<li><a id="toc-Produce-the-index-manually-1" href="#Produce-the-index-manually">25.2.1 Produce the index manually</a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cindex-1" href="#g_t_005cindex">25.2.2 <code>\index</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-makeindex-1" href="#makeindex">25.2.3 <code>makeindex</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cprintindex-1" href="#g_t_005cprintindex">25.2.4 <code>\printindex</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cindex-1" href="#g_t_005cindex">25.2.2 <code class="code">\index</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-makeindex-1" href="#makeindex">25.2.3 <code class="command">makeindex</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cprintindex-1" href="#g_t_005cprintindex">25.2.4 <code class="command">\printindex</code></a></li>
</ul></li>
<li><a id="toc-Glossaries-1" href="#Glossaries">25.3 Glossaries</a>
- <ul class="no-bullet">
- <li><a id="toc-_005cnewglossaryentry-1" href="#g_t_005cnewglossaryentry">25.3.1 <code>\newglossaryentry</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cgls-1" href="#g_t_005cgls">25.3.2 <code>\gls</code></a></li>
+ <ul class="toc-numbered-mark">
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cnewglossaryentry-1" href="#g_t_005cnewglossaryentry">25.3.1 <code class="code">\newglossaryentry</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cgls-1" href="#g_t_005cgls">25.3.2 <code class="code">\gls</code></a></li>
</ul></li>
</ul></li>
<li><a id="toc-Letters-1" href="#Letters">26 Letters</a>
- <ul class="no-bullet">
- <li><a id="toc-_005caddress-1" href="#g_t_005caddress">26.1 <code>\address</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005ccc-1" href="#g_t_005ccc">26.2 <code>\cc</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cclosing-1" href="#g_t_005cclosing">26.3 <code>\closing</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cencl-1" href="#g_t_005cencl">26.4 <code>\encl</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005clocation-1" href="#g_t_005clocation">26.5 <code>\location</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cmakelabels-1" href="#g_t_005cmakelabels">26.6 <code>\makelabels</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cname-1" href="#g_t_005cname">26.7 <code>\name</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005copening-1" href="#g_t_005copening">26.8 <code>\opening</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cps-1" href="#g_t_005cps">26.9 <code>\ps</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005csignature-1" href="#g_t_005csignature">26.10 <code>\signature</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005ctelephone-1" href="#g_t_005ctelephone">26.11 <code>\telephone</code></a></li>
+ <ul class="toc-numbered-mark">
+ <li><a id="toc-_005caddress-1" href="#g_t_005caddress">26.1 <code class="code">\address</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005ccc-1" href="#g_t_005ccc">26.2 <code class="code">\cc</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cclosing-1" href="#g_t_005cclosing">26.3 <code class="code">\closing</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cencl-1" href="#g_t_005cencl">26.4 <code class="code">\encl</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005clocation-1" href="#g_t_005clocation">26.5 <code class="code">\location</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cmakelabels-1" href="#g_t_005cmakelabels">26.6 <code class="code">\makelabels</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cname-1" href="#g_t_005cname">26.7 <code class="code">\name</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005copening-1" href="#g_t_005copening">26.8 <code class="code">\opening</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cps-1" href="#g_t_005cps">26.9 <code class="code">\ps</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005csignature-1" href="#g_t_005csignature">26.10 <code class="code">\signature</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005ctelephone-1" href="#g_t_005ctelephone">26.11 <code class="code">\telephone</code></a></li>
</ul></li>
<li><a id="toc-Input_002foutput-1" href="#Input_002foutput">27 Input/output</a>
- <ul class="no-bullet">
- <li><a id="toc-_005copenin-_0026-_005copenout-1" href="#g_t_005copenin-_0026-_005copenout">27.1 <code>\openin</code> & <code>\openout</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cread-1" href="#g_t_005cread">27.2 <code>\read</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005ctypein-1" href="#g_t_005ctypein">27.3 <code>\typein</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005ctypeout-1" href="#g_t_005ctypeout">27.4 <code>\typeout</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cwrite-1" href="#g_t_005cwrite">27.5 <code>\write</code></a>
- <ul class="no-bullet">
- <li><a id="toc-_005cwrite-and-security-1" href="#g_t_005cwrite-and-security">27.5.1 <code>\write</code> and security</a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cmessage-1" href="#g_t_005cmessage">27.5.2 <code>\message</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cwlog-1" href="#g_t_005cwlog">27.5.3 <code>\wlog</code></a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-_005cwrite18-1" href="#g_t_005cwrite18">27.5.4 <code>\write18</code></a></li>
+ <ul class="toc-numbered-mark">
+ <li><a id="toc-_005copenin-_0026-_005copenout-1" href="#g_t_005copenin-_0026-_005copenout">27.1 <code class="code">\openin</code> & <code class="code">\openout</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cread-1" href="#g_t_005cread">27.2 <code class="code">\read</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005ctypein-1" href="#g_t_005ctypein">27.3 <code class="code">\typein</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005ctypeout-1" href="#g_t_005ctypeout">27.4 <code class="code">\typeout</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cwrite-1" href="#g_t_005cwrite">27.5 <code class="code">\write</code></a>
+ <ul class="toc-numbered-mark">
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cwrite-and-security-1" href="#g_t_005cwrite-and-security">27.5.1 <code class="code">\write</code> and security</a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cmessage-1" href="#g_t_005cmessage">27.5.2 <code class="code">\message</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cwlog-1" href="#g_t_005cwlog">27.5.3 <code class="code">\wlog</code></a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-_005cwrite18-1" href="#g_t_005cwrite18">27.5.4 <code class="code">\write18</code></a></li>
</ul></li>
</ul></li>
<li><a id="toc-Command-line-interface-1" href="#Command-line-interface">28 Command line interface</a>
- <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <ul class="toc-numbered-mark">
<li><a id="toc-Command-line-options-1" href="#Command-line-options">28.1 Command line options</a></li>
<li><a id="toc-Command-line-input-1" href="#Command-line-input">28.2 Command line input</a></li>
<li><a id="toc-Jobname-1" href="#Jobname">28.3 Jobname</a></li>
@@ -581,21 +584,21 @@
<li><a id="toc-Recovering-from-errors-1" href="#Recovering-from-errors">28.4 Recovering from errors</a></li>
</ul></li>
<li><a id="toc-Document-templates-1" href="#Document-templates">Appendix A Document templates</a>
- <ul class="no-bullet">
- <li><a id="toc-beamer-template-1" href="#beamer-template">A.1 <code>beamer</code> template</a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-article-template-1" href="#article-template">A.2 <code>article</code> template</a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-book-template-1" href="#book-template">A.3 <code>book</code> template</a></li>
- <li><a id="toc-Larger-book-template-1" href="#Larger-book-template">A.4 Larger <code>book</code> template</a></li>
+ <ul class="toc-numbered-mark">
+ <li><a id="toc-beamer-template-1" href="#beamer-template">A.1 <code class="code">beamer</code> template</a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-article-template-1" href="#article-template">A.2 <code class="code">article</code> template</a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-book-template-1" href="#book-template">A.3 <code class="code">book</code> template</a></li>
+ <li><a id="toc-Larger-book-template-1" href="#Larger-book-template">A.4 Larger <code class="code">book</code> template</a></li>
</ul></li>
<li><a id="toc-Index-1" href="#Index" rel="index">Index</a></li>
</ul>
</div>
</div>
-<div class="Overview_element" id="SEC_Overview">
+<div class="element-shortcontents" id="SEC_Shortcontents">
<h2 class="shortcontents-heading">Short Table of Contents</h2>
<div class="shortcontents">
-<ul class="no-bullet">
+<ul class="toc-numbered-mark">
<li><a id="stoc-About-this-document-1" href="#toc-About-this-document-1">1 About this document</a></li>
<li><a id="stoc-Overview-of-LaTeX" href="#toc-Overview-of-LaTeX">2 Overview of LaTeX</a></li>
<li><a id="stoc-Document-classes-1" href="#toc-Document-classes-1">3 Document classes</a></li>
@@ -630,60 +633,60 @@
</div>
</div>
<hr>
-<div class="chapter" id="About-this-document">
-<div class="header">
+<div class="chapter-level-extent" id="About-this-document">
+<div class="nav-panel">
<p>
Next: <a href="#Overview" accesskey="n" rel="next">Overview of LaTeX</a>, Previous: <a href="#Top" accesskey="p" rel="prev">LaTeX2e: An unofficial reference manual</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">LaTeX2e: An unofficial reference manual</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
-<span id="About-this-document-1"></span><h2 class="chapter">1 About this document</h2>
+<h2 class="chapter" id="About-this-document-1">1 About this document</h2>
-<span id="index-home-page-for-manual"></span>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-home-page-for-manual"></a>
<p>This is an unofficial reference manual for the LaTeX2e document
preparation system, which is a macro package for the TeX
-typesetting program (see <a href="#Overview">Overview of LaTeX</a>).
+typesetting program (see <a class="pxref" href="#Overview">Overview of LaTeX</a>).
</p>
-<p>This document’s home page is <a href="https://latexref.xyz">https://latexref.xyz</a>; it has
+<p>This document’s home page is <a class="url" href="https://latexref.xyz">https://latexref.xyz</a>; it has
separate web pages for each topic. Alternatively.
-<a href="https://latexref.xyz/dev/latex2e.html">https://latexref.xyz/dev/latex2e.html</a> has the entire document on
+<a class="url" href="https://latexref.xyz/dev/latex2e.html">https://latexref.xyz/dev/latex2e.html</a> has the entire document on
a single page. For other output formats, the sources, and plenty more
-information, see <a href="https://latexref.xyz/dev/">https://latexref.xyz/dev/</a>.
+information, see <a class="url" href="https://latexref.xyz/dev/">https://latexref.xyz/dev/</a>.
</p>
-<span id="index-LaTeX-vs_002e-LaTeX2e"></span>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-LaTeX-vs_002e-LaTeX2e"></a>
<p>In this document, we will mostly just use ‘LaTeX’ rather than
‘LaTeX2e’, since the previous version of LaTeX (2.09) was
frozen decades ago.
</p>
-<span id="index-unofficial-nature-of-this-manual"></span>
-<span id="index-LaTeX-Project-team"></span>
-<span id="index-latexrefman_0040tug_002eorg-email-address"></span>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-unofficial-nature-of-this-manual"></a>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-LaTeX-Project-team"></a>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-latexrefman_0040tug_002eorg-email-address"></a>
<p>LaTeX is maintained by a group of volunteers
-(<a href="https://latex-project.org">https://latex-project.org</a>). The official documentation written
+(<a class="url" href="https://latex-project.org">https://latex-project.org</a>). The official documentation written
by the LaTeX project is available from their web site. The present
document is completely unofficial and has not been written or reviewed
by the LaTeX maintainers.
-<span id="index-bug-reporting"></span>
-<span id="index-reporting-bugs"></span>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-bug-reporting"></a>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-reporting-bugs"></a>
Do not send bug reports or anything else about this document to them.
-Instead, please send all comments to <a href="mailto:latexrefman at tug.org">latexrefman at tug.org</a>.
+Instead, please send all comments to <a class="email" href="mailto:latexrefman at tug.org">latexrefman at tug.org</a>.
</p>
<p>This document is a reference, not a tutorial. There is a vast array
of other information available about LaTeX, at all levels. Here
are a few introductions.
</p>
-<dl compact="compact">
-<dt id='index-latex_002ddoc_002dptr-document'><span><a href="https://ctan.org/pkg/latex-doc-ptr">https://ctan.org/pkg/latex-doc-ptr</a><a href='#index-latex_002ddoc_002dptr-document' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dl class="table">
+<dt id='index-latex_002ddoc_002dptr-document'><span><a class="url" href="https://ctan.org/pkg/latex-doc-ptr">https://ctan.org/pkg/latex-doc-ptr</a><a class="copiable-link" href='#index-latex_002ddoc_002dptr-document'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><p>Two pages of recommended references to LaTeX documentation.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt id='index-first_002dlatex_002ddoc-document'><span><a href="https://ctan.org/pkg/first-latex-doc">https://ctan.org/pkg/first-latex-doc</a><a href='#index-first_002dlatex_002ddoc-document' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dt id='index-first_002dlatex_002ddoc-document'><span><a class="url" href="https://ctan.org/pkg/first-latex-doc">https://ctan.org/pkg/first-latex-doc</a><a class="copiable-link" href='#index-first_002dlatex_002ddoc-document'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><p>Writing your first document, with a bit of both text and math.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt id='index-lshort-document'><span><a href="https://ctan.org/pkg/lshort">https://ctan.org/pkg/lshort</a><a href='#index-lshort-document' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dt id='index-lshort-document'><span><a class="url" href="https://ctan.org/pkg/lshort">https://ctan.org/pkg/lshort</a><a class="copiable-link" href='#index-lshort-document'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><p>A longer introduction to LaTeX, translated to many languages.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><span><a href="https://tug.org/begin.html">https://tug.org/begin.html</a></span></dt>
+<dt><a class="url" href="https://tug.org/begin.html">https://tug.org/begin.html</a></dt>
<dd><p>Introduction to the TeX system, including LaTeX, with further
references.
</p>
@@ -693,26 +696,26 @@
<hr>
</div>
-<div class="chapter" id="Overview">
-<div class="header">
+<div class="chapter-level-extent" id="Overview">
+<div class="nav-panel">
<p>
Next: <a href="#Document-classes" accesskey="n" rel="next">Document classes</a>, Previous: <a href="#About-this-document" accesskey="p" rel="prev">About this document</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">LaTeX2e: An unofficial reference manual</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
-<span id="Overview-of-LaTeX"></span><h2 class="chapter">2 Overview of LaTeX</h2>
+<h2 class="chapter" id="Overview-of-LaTeX">2 Overview of LaTeX</h2>
-<span id="index-overview-of-LaTeX"></span>
-<span id="index-basics-of-LaTeX"></span>
-<span id="index-Knuth_002c-Donald-E_002e"></span>
-<span id="index-Lamport_002c-Leslie"></span>
-<span id="index-LaTeX-overview"></span>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-overview-of-LaTeX"></a>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-basics-of-LaTeX"></a>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-Knuth_002c-Donald-E_002e"></a>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-Lamport_002c-Leslie"></a>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-LaTeX-overview"></a>
<p>LaTeX is a system for typesetting documents. It was originally
created by Leslie Lamport in 1984, but has been maintained by a group
-of volunteers for many years now (<a href="https://latex-project.org">https://latex-project.org</a>).
+of volunteers for many years now (<a class="url" href="https://latex-project.org">https://latex-project.org</a>).
It is widely used, particularly but not exclusively for mathematical
and technical documents.
</p>
-<span id="index-UTF_002d8_002c-default-LaTeX-input-encoding"></span>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-UTF_002d8_002c-default-LaTeX-input-encoding"></a>
<p>A LaTeX user writes an input file containing text to be typeset
along with interspersed commands. The default encoding for the text is
UTF-8 (as of 2018). The commands specify, for example, how the text
@@ -728,16 +731,16 @@
the input document is marked up, that is, to mean the set of commands
available to a LaTeX user.
</p>
-<span id="index-Lamport-TeX"></span>
-<span id="index-pronunciation"></span>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-Lamport-TeX"></a>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-pronunciation"></a>
<p>The name LaTeX is short for “Lamport TeX”. It is pronounced
LAH-teck or LAY-teck, or sometimes LAY-tecks. Inside a document,
-produce the logo with <code>\LaTeX</code>. Where use of the logo is not
-sensible, such as in plain text, write it as ‘<samp>LaTeX</samp>’.
+produce the logo with <code class="code">\LaTeX</code>. Where use of the logo is not
+sensible, such as in plain text, write it as ‘<samp class="samp">LaTeX</samp>’.
</p>
-<ul class="section-toc">
+<ul class="mini-toc">
<li><a href="#Starting-and-ending" accesskey="1">Starting and ending</a></li>
<li><a href="#Output-files" accesskey="2">Output files</a></li>
<li><a href="#TeX-engines" accesskey="3">TeX engines</a></li>
@@ -746,48 +749,48 @@
<li><a href="#CTAN" accesskey="6">CTAN: The Comprehensive TeX Archive Network</a></li>
</ul>
<hr>
-<div class="section" id="Starting-and-ending">
-<div class="header">
+<div class="section-level-extent" id="Starting-and-ending">
+<div class="nav-panel">
<p>
Next: <a href="#Output-files" accesskey="n" rel="next">Output files</a>, Up: <a href="#Overview" accesskey="u" rel="up">Overview of LaTeX</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
-<span id="Starting-and-ending-1"></span><h3 class="section">2.1 Starting and ending</h3>
+<h3 class="section" id="Starting-and-ending-1">2.1 Starting and ending</h3>
-<span id="Starting-_0026-ending"></span><span id="index-starting-and-ending"></span>
-<span id="index-ending-and-starting"></span>
-<span id="index-hello_002c-world"></span>
+<a class="anchor" id="Starting-_0026-ending"></a><a class="index-entry-id" id="index-starting-and-ending"></a>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-ending-and-starting"></a>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-hello_002c-world"></a>
<p>LaTeX files have a simple global structure, with a standard beginning
and ending. This is a small example.
</p>
<div class="example">
-<pre class="example">\documentclass{article}
+<pre class="example-preformatted">\documentclass{article}
\begin{document}
Hello, \LaTeX\ world.
\end{document}
</pre></div>
-<p>Every LaTeX document has a <code>\begin{document}</code> line and an
-<code>\end{document}</code> line.
+<p>Every LaTeX document has a <code class="code">\begin{document}</code> line and an
+<code class="code">\end{document}</code> line.
</p>
-<span id="index-document-class_002c-defined"></span>
-<p>Here, the ‘<samp>article</samp>’ is the <em>document class</em>. It is implemented
-in a file <samp>article.cls</samp>. You can use any document class on your
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-document-class_002c-defined"></a>
+<p>Here, the ‘<samp class="samp">article</samp>’ is the <em class="dfn">document class</em>. It is implemented
+in a file <samp class="file">article.cls</samp>. You can use any document class on your
system. A few document classes are defined by LaTeX itself, and vast
-array of others are widely available. See <a href="#Document-classes">Document classes</a>.
+array of others are widely available. See <a class="xref" href="#Document-classes">Document classes</a>.
</p>
-<span id="index-preamble_002c-defined"></span>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-preamble_002c-defined"></a>
<p>You can include other LaTeX commands between the
-<code>\documentclass</code> and the <code>\begin{document}</code> commands.
-This area is called the <em>preamble</em>.
+<code class="code">\documentclass</code> and the <code class="code">\begin{document}</code> commands.
+This area is called the <em class="dfn">preamble</em>.
</p>
-<p>The <code>\begin{document}</code>, <code>\end{document}</code> pair defines an
-<span id="index-environment"></span>
-<em>environment</em>; the ‘<samp>document</samp>’ environment (and no others) is
-required in all LaTeX documents (see <a href="#document"><code>document</code></a>). LaTeX make
+<p>The <code class="code">\begin{document}</code>, <code class="code">\end{document}</code> pair defines an
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-environment"></a>
+<em class="dfn">environment</em>; the ‘<samp class="samp">document</samp>’ environment (and no others) is
+required in all LaTeX documents (see <a class="pxref" href="#document"><code class="code">document</code></a>). LaTeX make
available to you many environments that are documented here
-(see <a href="#Environments">Environments</a>). Many more are available to you from external
-packages, most importantly those available at CTAN (see <a href="#CTAN">CTAN: The Comprehensive TeX Archive Network</a>).
+(see <a class="pxref" href="#Environments">Environments</a>). Many more are available to you from external
+packages, most importantly those available at CTAN (see <a class="pxref" href="#CTAN">CTAN: The Comprehensive TeX Archive Network</a>).
</p>
<p>The following sections discuss how to produce PDF or other output from
a LaTeX input file.
@@ -795,38 +798,38 @@
<hr>
</div>
-<div class="section" id="Output-files">
-<div class="header">
+<div class="section-level-extent" id="Output-files">
+<div class="nav-panel">
<p>
Next: <a href="#TeX-engines" accesskey="n" rel="next">TeX engines</a>, Previous: <a href="#Starting-and-ending" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Starting and ending</a>, Up: <a href="#Overview" accesskey="u" rel="up">Overview of LaTeX</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
-<span id="Output-files-1"></span><h3 class="section">2.2 Output files</h3>
+<h3 class="section" id="Output-files-1">2.2 Output files</h3>
<p>LaTeX produces a main output file and at least two auxiliary files.
-The main output file’s name ends in either <samp>.dvi</samp> or <samp>.pdf</samp>.
+The main output file’s name ends in either <samp class="file">.dvi</samp> or <samp class="file">.pdf</samp>.
</p>
-<dl compact="compact">
-<dt id='index-_002edvi-file'><span><code>.dvi</code><a href='#index-_002edvi-file' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-latex-command"></span>
-<span id="index-xdvi-command"></span>
-<span id="index-dvips-command"></span>
-<span id="index-dvipdfmx-command"></span>
-<span id="index-dvitype-command"></span>
-<span id="output-files-dvi"></span><p>If LaTeX is invoked with the system command <code>latex</code> then it
-produces a DeVice Independent file, with extension <samp>.dvi</samp>. You
-can view this file with a command such as <code>xdvi</code>, or convert
-it to a PostScript <code>.ps</code> file with <code>dvips</code> or to a
-Portable Document Format <code>.pdf</code> file with <code>dvipdfmx</code>.
+<dl class="table">
+<dt id='index-_002edvi-file'><span><code class="code">.dvi</code><a class="copiable-link" href='#index-_002edvi-file'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><a class="index-entry-id" id="index-latex-command"></a>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-xdvi-command"></a>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-dvips-command"></a>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-dvipdfmx-command"></a>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-dvitype-command"></a>
+<a class="anchor" id="output-files-dvi"></a><p>If LaTeX is invoked with the system command <code class="command">latex</code> then it
+produces a DeVice Independent file, with extension <samp class="file">.dvi</samp>. You
+can view this file with a command such as <code class="command">xdvi</code>, or convert
+it to a PostScript <code class="code">.ps</code> file with <code class="command">dvips</code> or to a
+Portable Document Format <code class="code">.pdf</code> file with <code class="command">dvipdfmx</code>.
The contents of the file can be dumped in human-readable form with
-<code>dvitype</code>. A vast array of other DVI utility programs are
-available (<a href="https://mirror.ctan.org/dviware">https://mirror.ctan.org/dviware</a>).
+<code class="command">dvitype</code>. A vast array of other DVI utility programs are
+available (<a class="url" href="https://mirror.ctan.org/dviware">https://mirror.ctan.org/dviware</a>).
</p>
</dd>
-<dt id='index-_002epdf-file'><span><code>.pdf</code><a href='#index-_002epdf-file' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-pdfTeX"></span>
-<span id="index-pdflatex-command"></span>
-<span id="output-files-pdf"></span><p>If LaTeX is invoked via the system command <code>pdflatex</code>,
-among other commands (see <a href="#TeX-engines">TeX engines</a>), then the main output is
+<dt id='index-_002epdf-file'><span><code class="code">.pdf</code><a class="copiable-link" href='#index-_002epdf-file'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><a class="index-entry-id" id="index-pdfTeX"></a>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-pdflatex-command"></a>
+<a class="anchor" id="output-files-pdf"></a><p>If LaTeX is invoked via the system command <code class="command">pdflatex</code>,
+among other commands (see <a class="pxref" href="#TeX-engines">TeX engines</a>), then the main output is
a Portable Document Format (PDF) file. Typically this is a
self-contained file, with all fonts and images included.
</p>
@@ -835,27 +838,27 @@
<p>LaTeX always produces at least two additional files.
</p>
-<dl compact="compact">
-<dt id='index-transcript-file'><span><code>.log</code><a href='#index-transcript-file' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-log-file"></span>
-<span id="index-_002elog-file"></span>
-<span id="output-files-log"></span><p>This transcript file contains summary information such as a list of
+<dl class="table">
+<dt id='index-transcript-file'><span><code class="code">.log</code><a class="copiable-link" href='#index-transcript-file'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><a class="index-entry-id" id="index-log-file"></a>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-_002elog-file"></a>
+<a class="anchor" id="output-files-log"></a><p>This transcript file contains summary information such as a list of
loaded packages. It also includes diagnostic messages and perhaps
additional information for any errors.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt id='index-auxiliary-file'><span><code>.aux</code><a href='#index-auxiliary-file' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-_002eaux-file"></span>
-<span id="index-cross-references_002c-resolving"></span>
-<span id="index-forward-references_002c-resolving"></span>
-<span id="index-references_002c-resolving-forward"></span>
-<span id="output-files-aux"></span><p>Auxiliary information is used by LaTeX for things such as
+<dt id='index-auxiliary-file'><span><code class="code">.aux</code><a class="copiable-link" href='#index-auxiliary-file'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><a class="index-entry-id" id="index-_002eaux-file"></a>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-cross-references_002c-resolving"></a>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-forward-references_002c-resolving"></a>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-references_002c-resolving-forward"></a>
+<a class="anchor" id="output-files-aux"></a><p>Auxiliary information is used by LaTeX for things such as
cross references. For example, the first time that LaTeX finds a
forward reference—a cross reference to something that has not yet
appeared in the source—it will appear in the output as a doubled
-question mark <code>??</code>. When the referred-to spot does eventually
+question mark <code class="code">??</code>. When the referred-to spot does eventually
appear in the source then LaTeX writes its location information to
-this <code>.aux</code> file. On the next invocation, LaTeX reads the
+this <code class="code">.aux</code> file. On the next invocation, LaTeX reads the
location information from this file and uses it to resolve the
reference, replacing the double question mark with the remembered
location.
@@ -863,129 +866,129 @@
</dd>
</dl>
-<span id="index-_002elof-file"></span>
-<span id="index-list-of-figures-file"></span>
-<span id="index-_002elot-file"></span>
-<span id="index-list-of-tables-file"></span>
-<span id="index-_002etoc-file"></span>
-<span id="index-table-of-contents-file"></span>
-<span id="index-contents-file"></span>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-_002elof-file"></a>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-list-of-figures-file"></a>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-_002elot-file"></a>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-list-of-tables-file"></a>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-_002etoc-file"></a>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-table-of-contents-file"></a>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-contents-file"></a>
<p>LaTeX may produce yet more files, characterized by the filename
-ending. These include a <code>.lof</code> file that is used to make a list of
-figures, a <code>.lot</code> file used to make a list of tables, and a
-<code>.toc</code> file used to make a table of contents (see <a href="#Table-of-contents-etc_002e">Table of contents, list of figures, list of tables</a>). A particular class may create others; the list is
+ending. These include a <code class="code">.lof</code> file that is used to make a list of
+figures, a <code class="code">.lot</code> file used to make a list of tables, and a
+<code class="code">.toc</code> file used to make a table of contents (see <a class="pxref" href="#Table-of-contents-etc_002e">Table of contents, list of figures, list of tables</a>). A particular class may create others; the list is
open-ended.
</p>
<hr>
</div>
-<div class="section" id="TeX-engines">
-<div class="header">
+<div class="section-level-extent" id="TeX-engines">
+<div class="nav-panel">
<p>
Next: <a href="#LaTeX-command-syntax" accesskey="n" rel="next">LaTeX command syntax</a>, Previous: <a href="#Output-files" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Output files</a>, Up: <a href="#Overview" accesskey="u" rel="up">Overview of LaTeX</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
-<span id="TeX-engines-1"></span><h3 class="section">2.3 TeX engines</h3>
+<h3 class="section" id="TeX-engines-1">2.3 TeX engines</h3>
-<span id="index-engines_002c-TeX"></span>
-<span id="index-implementations-of-TeX"></span>
-<span id="index-UTF_002d8_002c-engine-support-for"></span>
-<span id="index-Unicode-input_002c-native"></span>
-<span id="index-TrueType-fonts"></span>
-<span id="index-OpenType-fonts"></span>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-engines_002c-TeX"></a>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-implementations-of-TeX"></a>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-UTF_002d8_002c-engine-support-for"></a>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-Unicode-input_002c-native"></a>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-TrueType-fonts"></a>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-OpenType-fonts"></a>
-<span id="index-TeX-format-_0028_002efmt_0029-files"></span>
-<span id="index-LaTeX-format-_0028_002efmt_0029-files"></span>
-<span id="index-format-files_002c-TeX"></span>
-<span id="index-_002efmt-file"></span>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-TeX-format-_0028_002efmt_0029-files"></a>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-LaTeX-format-_0028_002efmt_0029-files"></a>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-format-files_002c-TeX"></a>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-_002efmt-file"></a>
<p>LaTeX is a large set of commands that is executed by a TeX
-program (see <a href="#Overview">Overview of LaTeX</a>). Such a set of commands is called a
-<em>format</em>, and is embodied in a binary <code>.fmt</code> file, which can
+program (see <a class="pxref" href="#Overview">Overview of LaTeX</a>). Such a set of commands is called a
+<em class="dfn">format</em>, and is embodied in a binary <code class="code">.fmt</code> file, which can
be read much more quickly than the corresponding TeX source.
</p>
<p>This section gives a terse overview of the TeX programs that are
-commonly available (see also <a href="#Command-line-interface">Command line interface</a>).
+commonly available (see also <a class="ref" href="#Command-line-interface">Command line interface</a>).
</p>
-<dl compact="compact">
-<dt id='index-latex'><span><code>latex</code><a href='#index-latex' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
-<dt id='index-pdflatex'><span><code>pdflatex</code><a href='#index-pdflatex' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-etex-command"></span>
-<span id="index-pdfTeX-engine"></span>
-<span id="index-e_002dTeX"></span>
-<span id="tex-engines-latex"></span><p>In TeX Live (<a href="https://tug.org/texlive">https://tug.org/texlive</a>), if LaTeX is invoked
-via either the system command <code>latex</code> or <code>pdflatex</code>,
-then the pdfTeX engine is run (<a href="https://ctan.org/pkg/pdftex">https://ctan.org/pkg/pdftex</a>).
-When invoked as <code>latex</code>, the main output is a <samp>.dvi</samp>
-file; as <code>pdflatex</code>, the main output is a <samp>.pdf</samp> file.
+<dl class="ftable">
+<dt id='index-latex'><span><code class="code">latex</code><a class="copiable-link" href='#index-latex'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dt id='index-pdflatex'><span><code class="code">pdflatex</code><a class="copiable-link" href='#index-pdflatex'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><a class="index-entry-id" id="index-etex-command"></a>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-pdfTeX-engine"></a>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-e_002dTeX"></a>
+<a class="anchor" id="tex-engines-latex"></a><p>In TeX Live (<a class="url" href="https://tug.org/texlive">https://tug.org/texlive</a>), if LaTeX is invoked
+via either the system command <code class="command">latex</code> or <code class="command">pdflatex</code>,
+then the pdfTeX engine is run (<a class="url" href="https://ctan.org/pkg/pdftex">https://ctan.org/pkg/pdftex</a>).
+When invoked as <code class="command">latex</code>, the main output is a <samp class="file">.dvi</samp>
+file; as <code class="command">pdflatex</code>, the main output is a <samp class="file">.pdf</samp> file.
</p>
<p>pdfTeX incorporates the e-TeX extensions to Knuth’s original
-program (<a href="https://ctan.org/pkg/etex">https://ctan.org/pkg/etex</a>), including additional
+program (<a class="url" href="https://ctan.org/pkg/etex">https://ctan.org/pkg/etex</a>), including additional
programming features and bi-directional typesetting, and has plenty of
extensions of its own. e-TeX is available on its own as the system
-command <code>etex</code>, but this is plain TeX (and produces
-<samp>.dvi</samp>).
+command <code class="command">etex</code>, but this is plain TeX (and produces
+<samp class="file">.dvi</samp>).
</p>
-<p>In other TeX distributions, <code>latex</code> may invoke e-TeX
+<p>In other TeX distributions, <code class="command">latex</code> may invoke e-TeX
rather than pdfTeX. In any case, the e-TeX extensions can be
assumed to be available in LaTeX.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt id='index-lualatex'><span><code>lualatex</code><a href='#index-lualatex' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-LuaTeX"></span>
-<span id="tex-engines-lualatex"></span><p>If LaTeX is invoked via the system command <code>lualatex</code>, the
-LuaTeX engine is run (<a href="https://ctan.org/pkg/luatex">https://ctan.org/pkg/luatex</a>). This
+<dt id='index-lualatex'><span><code class="code">lualatex</code><a class="copiable-link" href='#index-lualatex'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><a class="index-entry-id" id="index-LuaTeX"></a>
+<a class="anchor" id="tex-engines-lualatex"></a><p>If LaTeX is invoked via the system command <code class="command">lualatex</code>, the
+LuaTeX engine is run (<a class="url" href="https://ctan.org/pkg/luatex">https://ctan.org/pkg/luatex</a>). This
program allows code written in the scripting language Lua
-(<a href="http://luatex.org">http://luatex.org</a>) to interact with TeX’s typesetting.
+(<a class="url" href="http://luatex.org">http://luatex.org</a>) to interact with TeX’s typesetting.
LuaTeX handles UTF-8 Unicode input natively, can handle OpenType
-and TrueType fonts, and produces a <samp>.pdf</samp> file by default.
-There is also <code>dvilualatex</code> to produce a <samp>.dvi</samp> file.
+and TrueType fonts, and produces a <samp class="file">.pdf</samp> file by default.
+There is also <code class="command">dvilualatex</code> to produce a <samp class="file">.dvi</samp> file.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt id='index-xelatex'><span><code>xelatex</code><a href='#index-xelatex' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-XeTeX"></span>
-<span id="index-_002exdv-file"></span>
-<span id="index-xdvipdfmx"></span>
-<span id="tex-engines-xelatex"></span><p>If LaTeX is invoked with the system command <code>xelatex</code>, the
-XeTeX engine is run (<a href="https://tug.org/xetex">https://tug.org/xetex</a>). Like LuaTeX,
+<dt id='index-xelatex'><span><code class="code">xelatex</code><a class="copiable-link" href='#index-xelatex'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><a class="index-entry-id" id="index-XeTeX"></a>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-_002exdv-file"></a>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-xdvipdfmx"></a>
+<a class="anchor" id="tex-engines-xelatex"></a><p>If LaTeX is invoked with the system command <code class="command">xelatex</code>, the
+XeTeX engine is run (<a class="url" href="https://tug.org/xetex">https://tug.org/xetex</a>). Like LuaTeX,
XeTeX natively supports UTF-8 Unicode and TrueType and OpenType
fonts, though the implementation is completely different, mainly using
external libraries instead of internal code. XeTeX produces a
-<samp>.pdf</samp> file as output; it does not support DVI output.
+<samp class="file">.pdf</samp> file as output; it does not support DVI output.
</p>
-<p>Internally, XeTeX creates an <code>.xdv</code> file, a variant of DVI,
-and translates that to PDF using the (<code>x</code>)<code>dvipdfmx</code>
-program, but this process is automatic. The <code>.xdv</code> file is only
+<p>Internally, XeTeX creates an <code class="code">.xdv</code> file, a variant of DVI,
+and translates that to PDF using the (<code class="code">x</code>)<code class="code">dvipdfmx</code>
+program, but this process is automatic. The <code class="code">.xdv</code> file is only
useful for debugging.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt id='index-platex'><span><code>platex</code><a href='#index-platex' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
-<dt id='index-uplatex'><span><code>uplatex</code><a href='#index-uplatex' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dt id='index-platex'><span><code class="code">platex</code><a class="copiable-link" href='#index-platex'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dt id='index-uplatex'><span><code class="code">uplatex</code><a class="copiable-link" href='#index-uplatex'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><p>These commands provide significant additional support for Japanese and
-other languages; the <code>u</code> variant supports Unicode. See
-<a href="https://ctan.org/pkg/ptex">https://ctan.org/pkg/ptex</a> and <a href="https://ctan.org/pkg/uptex">https://ctan.org/pkg/uptex</a>.
+other languages; the <code class="code">u</code> variant supports Unicode. See
+<a class="url" href="https://ctan.org/pkg/ptex">https://ctan.org/pkg/ptex</a> and <a class="url" href="https://ctan.org/pkg/uptex">https://ctan.org/pkg/uptex</a>.
</p></dd>
</dl>
-<p>As of 2019, there is a companion <code>-dev</code> command and format for
+<p>As of 2019, there is a companion <code class="code">-dev</code> command and format for
all of the above:
</p>
-<dl compact="compact">
-<dt id='index-dvilualatex_002ddev'><span><code>dvilualatex-dev</code><a href='#index-dvilualatex_002ddev' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
-<dt id='index-latex_002ddev'><span><code>latex-dev</code><a href='#index-latex_002ddev' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
-<dt id='index-lualatex_002ddev'><span><code>lualatex-dev</code><a href='#index-lualatex_002ddev' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
-<dt id='index-pdflatex_002ddev'><span><code>pdflatex-dev</code><a href='#index-pdflatex_002ddev' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
-<dt id='index-platex_002ddev'><span><code>platex-dev</code><a href='#index-platex_002ddev' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
-<dt id='index-uplatex_002ddev'><span><code>uplatex-dev</code><a href='#index-uplatex_002ddev' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
-<dt id='index-xelatex_002ddev'><span><code>xelatex-dev</code><a href='#index-xelatex_002ddev' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-release-candidates"></span>
-<span id="index-prerelease-testing"></span>
+<dl class="ftable">
+<dt id='index-dvilualatex_002ddev'><span><code class="code">dvilualatex-dev</code><a class="copiable-link" href='#index-dvilualatex_002ddev'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dt id='index-latex_002ddev'><span><code class="code">latex-dev</code><a class="copiable-link" href='#index-latex_002ddev'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dt id='index-lualatex_002ddev'><span><code class="code">lualatex-dev</code><a class="copiable-link" href='#index-lualatex_002ddev'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dt id='index-pdflatex_002ddev'><span><code class="code">pdflatex-dev</code><a class="copiable-link" href='#index-pdflatex_002ddev'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dt id='index-platex_002ddev'><span><code class="code">platex-dev</code><a class="copiable-link" href='#index-platex_002ddev'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dt id='index-uplatex_002ddev'><span><code class="code">uplatex-dev</code><a class="copiable-link" href='#index-uplatex_002ddev'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dt id='index-xelatex_002ddev'><span><code class="code">xelatex-dev</code><a class="copiable-link" href='#index-xelatex_002ddev'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><a class="index-entry-id" id="index-release-candidates"></a>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-prerelease-testing"></a>
<p>These are candidates for an upcoming LaTeX release. The main
purpose is to find and address compatibility problems before an
official release.
</p>
-<p>These <code>-dev</code> formats make it easy for anyone to help test
-documents and code: you can run, say, <code>pdflatex-dev</code> instead of
-<code>pdflatex</code>, without changing anything else in your environment.
-Indeed, it is easiest and most helpful to always run the <code>-dev</code>
+<p>These <code class="code">-dev</code> formats make it easy for anyone to help test
+documents and code: you can run, say, <code class="code">pdflatex-dev</code> instead of
+<code class="code">pdflatex</code>, without changing anything else in your environment.
+Indeed, it is easiest and most helpful to always run the <code class="code">-dev</code>
versions instead of bothering to switch back and forth. During quiet
times after a release, the commands will be equivalent.
</p>
@@ -994,8 +997,8 @@
before being released.
</p>
<p>For more information, see “The LaTeX release workflow and the
-LaTeX <code>dev</code> formats” by Frank Mittelbach, <cite>TUGboat</cite> 40:2,
-<a href="https://tug.org/TUGboat/tb40-2/tb125mitt-dev.pdf">https://tug.org/TUGboat/tb40-2/tb125mitt-dev.pdf</a>.
+LaTeX <code class="code">dev</code> formats” by Frank Mittelbach, <cite class="cite">TUGboat</cite> 40:2,
+<a class="url" href="https://tug.org/TUGboat/tb40-2/tb125mitt-dev.pdf">https://tug.org/TUGboat/tb40-2/tb125mitt-dev.pdf</a>.
</p>
</dd>
</dl>
@@ -1002,57 +1005,57 @@
<hr>
</div>
-<div class="section" id="LaTeX-command-syntax">
-<div class="header">
+<div class="section-level-extent" id="LaTeX-command-syntax">
+<div class="nav-panel">
<p>
Next: <a href="#Environment" accesskey="n" rel="next">Environment</a>, Previous: <a href="#TeX-engines" accesskey="p" rel="prev">TeX engines</a>, Up: <a href="#Overview" accesskey="u" rel="up">Overview of LaTeX</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
-<span id="LaTeX-command-syntax-1"></span><h3 class="section">2.4 LaTeX command syntax</h3>
+<h3 class="section" id="LaTeX-command-syntax-1">2.4 LaTeX command syntax</h3>
-<span id="index-command-syntax"></span>
-<span id="index-_005c-character-starting-commands"></span>
-<span id="index-_005b_002e_002e_002e_005d-for-optional-arguments"></span>
-<span id="index-_007b_002e_002e_002e_007d-for-required-arguments"></span>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-command-syntax"></a>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-_005c-character-starting-commands"></a>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-_005b_002e_002e_002e_005d-_0028for-optional-arguments_0029"></a>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-_007b_002e_002e_002e_007d-_0028for-required-arguments_0029"></a>
<p>In the LaTeX input file, a command name starts with a backslash
-character, <code>\</code>. The name itself then consists of either
+character, <code class="code">\</code>. The name itself then consists of either
(a) a string of letters or (b) a single non-letter.
</p>
-<p>LaTeX commands names are case sensitive so that <code>\pagebreak</code>
-differs from <code>\Pagebreak</code> (the latter is not a standard command).
+<p>LaTeX commands names are case sensitive so that <code class="code">\pagebreak</code>
+differs from <code class="code">\Pagebreak</code> (the latter is not a standard command).
Most command names are lowercase, but in any event you must enter all
commands in the same case as they are defined.
</p>
<p>A command may be followed by zero, one, or more arguments. These
arguments may be either required or optional. Required arguments are
-contained in curly braces, <code>{...}</code>. Optional arguments are
-contained in square brackets, <code>[...]</code>. Generally, but not
+contained in curly braces, <code class="code">{...}</code>. Optional arguments are
+contained in square brackets, <code class="code">[...]</code>. Generally, but not
universally, if the command accepts an optional argument, it comes
first, before any required arguments.
</p>
<p>Inside of an optional argument, to use the character close square
-bracket (<code>]</code>) hide it inside curly braces, as
-in <code>\item[closing bracket {]}]</code>. Similarly, if an optional
+bracket (<code class="code">]</code>) hide it inside curly braces, as
+in <code class="code">\item[closing bracket {]}]</code>. Similarly, if an optional
argument comes last, with no required argument after it, then to make
the first character of the following text be an open square bracket,
hide it inside curly braces.
</p>
-<p>LaTeX has the convention that some commands have a <code>*</code> form that
-is related to the form without a <code>*</code>, such as <code>\chapter</code> and
-<code>\chapter*</code>. The exact difference in behavior varies from command
+<p>LaTeX has the convention that some commands have a <code class="code">*</code> form that
+is related to the form without a <code class="code">*</code>, such as <code class="code">\chapter</code> and
+<code class="code">\chapter*</code>. The exact difference in behavior varies from command
to command.
</p>
-<p>This manual describes all accepted options and <code>*</code>-forms for the
+<p>This manual describes all accepted options and <code class="code">*</code>-forms for the
commands it covers (barring unintentional omissions, a.k.a. bugs).
</p>
-<span id="index-package_002c-expl3"></span>
-<span id="index-expl3-package"></span>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-package_002c-expl3"></a>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-expl3-package"></a>
-<span id="index-package_002c-xparse"></span>
-<span id="index-xparse-package"></span>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-package_002c-xparse"></a>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-xparse-package"></a>
-<span id="index-LaTeX3-syntax"></span>
-<p>As of the 2020-10-01 release of LaTeX, the <code>expl3</code> and
-<code>xparse</code> packages are part of the LaTeX2e format. They
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-LaTeX3-syntax"></a>
+<p>As of the 2020-10-01 release of LaTeX, the <code class="code">expl3</code> and
+<code class="code">xparse</code> packages are part of the LaTeX2e format. They
provide a completely different underlying programming language
syntax. We won’t try to cover them in this document; see the related
package documentation and other LaTeX manuals.
@@ -1059,39 +1062,39 @@
</p>
<hr>
</div>
-<div class="section" id="Environment">
-<div class="header">
+<div class="section-level-extent" id="Environment">
+<div class="nav-panel">
<p>
Next: <a href="#CTAN" accesskey="n" rel="next">CTAN: The Comprehensive TeX Archive Network</a>, Previous: <a href="#LaTeX-command-syntax" accesskey="p" rel="prev">LaTeX command syntax</a>, Up: <a href="#Overview" accesskey="u" rel="up">Overview of LaTeX</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
-<span id="Environment-1"></span><h3 class="section">2.5 Environment</h3>
+<h3 class="section" id="Environment-1">2.5 Environment</h3>
<p>Synopsis:
</p>
<div class="example">
-<pre class="example">\begin{<var>environment-name</var>}
+<pre class="example-preformatted">\begin{<var class="var">environment-name</var>}
...
-\end{<var>environment-name</var>}
+\end{<var class="var">environment-name</var>}
</pre></div>
-<p>An <em>environment</em> is an area of LaTeX source, inside of which
+<p>An <em class="dfn">environment</em> is an area of LaTeX source, inside of which
there is a distinct behavior. For instance, for poetry in LaTeX
-put the lines between <code>\begin{verse}</code> and <code>\end{verse}</code>.
+put the lines between <code class="code">\begin{verse}</code> and <code class="code">\end{verse}</code>.
</p>
<div class="example">
-<pre class="example">\begin{verse}
+<pre class="example-preformatted">\begin{verse}
There once was a man from Nantucket \\
...
\end{verse}
</pre></div>
-<p>See <a href="#Environments">Environments</a>, for a list of environments. Particularly notable is
-that every LaTeX document must have a <code>document</code> environment,
-a <code>\begin{document} ... \end{document}</code> pair.
+<p>See <a class="xref" href="#Environments">Environments</a>, for a list of environments. Particularly notable is
+that every LaTeX document must have a <code class="code">document</code> environment,
+a <code class="code">\begin{document} ... \end{document}</code> pair.
</p>
-<p>The <var>environment-name</var> at the beginning must exactly match that at
-the end. This includes the case where <var>environment-name</var> ends in a
-star (<code>*</code>); both the <code>\begin</code> and <code>\end</code> texts must
+<p>The <var class="var">environment-name</var> at the beginning must exactly match that at
+the end. This includes the case where <var class="var">environment-name</var> ends in a
+star (<code class="code">*</code>); both the <code class="code">\begin</code> and <code class="code">\end</code> texts must
include the star.
</p>
<p>Environments may have arguments, including optional arguments. This
@@ -1100,7 +1103,7 @@
required (it specifies the formatting of columns).
</p>
<div class="example">
-<pre class="example">\begin{tabular}[t]{r|l}
+<pre class="example-preformatted">\begin{tabular}[t]{r|l}
... rows of table ...
\end{tabular}
</pre></div>
@@ -1108,19 +1111,19 @@
<hr>
</div>
-<div class="section" id="CTAN">
-<div class="header">
+<div class="section-level-extent" id="CTAN">
+<div class="nav-panel">
<p>
Previous: <a href="#Environment" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Environment</a>, Up: <a href="#Overview" accesskey="u" rel="up">Overview of LaTeX</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
-<span id="CTAN_003a-The-Comprehensive-TeX-Archive-Network"></span><h3 class="section">2.6 CTAN: The Comprehensive TeX Archive Network</h3>
+<h3 class="section" id="CTAN_003a-The-Comprehensive-TeX-Archive-Network">2.6 CTAN: The Comprehensive TeX Archive Network</h3>
-<span id="index-CTAN"></span>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-CTAN"></a>
<p>The Comprehensive TeX Archive Network, CTAN, is the TeX and
LaTeX community’s repository of free material. It is a set of
Internet sites around the world that offer material related to LaTeX
-for download. Visit CTAN on the web at <a href="https://ctan.org">https://ctan.org</a>.
+for download. Visit CTAN on the web at <a class="url" href="https://ctan.org">https://ctan.org</a>.
</p>
<p>This material is organized into packages, discrete bundles that
typically offer some coherent functionality and are maintained by one
@@ -1128,10 +1131,10 @@
a package that allows authors to format papers to that publisher’s
specifications.
</p>
-<p>In addition to the massive holdings, the <code>ctan.org</code> web site
+<p>In addition to the massive holdings, the <code class="code">ctan.org</code> web site
offers features such as search by name or by functionality.
</p>
-<span id="index-DANTE-e_002eV_002e"></span>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-DANTE-e_002eV_002e"></a>
<p>CTAN is not a single host, but instead is a set of hosts, one of which
is the so-called “master”. The master host actively manages the
material, for instance, by accepting uploads of new or updated
@@ -1138,810 +1141,809 @@
packages. For many years, it has been hosted by the German TeX
group, DANTE e.V.
</p>
-<span id="index-mirrors-of-CTAN"></span>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-mirrors-of-CTAN"></a>
<p>Other sites around the world help out by mirroring, that is,
automatically syncing their collections with the master site and then
in turn making their copies publicly available. This gives users close
to their location better access and relieves the load on the master
-site. The list of mirrors is at <a href="https://ctan.org/mirrors">https://ctan.org/mirrors</a>.
+site. The list of mirrors is at <a class="url" href="https://ctan.org/mirrors">https://ctan.org/mirrors</a>.
</p>
<hr>
</div>
</div>
-<div class="chapter" id="Document-classes">
-<div class="header">
+<div class="chapter-level-extent" id="Document-classes">
+<div class="nav-panel">
<p>
Next: <a href="#Fonts" accesskey="n" rel="next">Fonts</a>, Previous: <a href="#Overview" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Overview of LaTeX</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">LaTeX2e: An unofficial reference manual</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
-<span id="Document-classes-1"></span><h2 class="chapter">3 Document classes</h2>
+<h2 class="chapter" id="Document-classes-1">3 Document classes</h2>
-<span id="index-document-classes"></span>
-<span id="index-classes-of-documents"></span>
-<span id="index-_005cdocumentclass"></span>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-document-classes"></a>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-classes-of-documents"></a>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-_005cdocumentclass"></a>
<p>The document’s overall class is defined with this command, which is
normally the first command in a LaTeX source file.
</p>
<div class="example">
-<pre class="example">\documentclass[<var>options</var>]{<var>class</var>}
+<pre class="example-preformatted">\documentclass[<var class="var">options</var>]{<var class="var">class</var>}
</pre></div>
-<span id="index-article-class"></span>
-<span id="index-report-class"></span>
-<span id="index-book-class"></span>
-<span id="index-letter-class"></span>
-<span id="index-slides-class"></span>
-<p>The following document <var>class</var> names are built into LaTeX.
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-article-class"></a>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-report-class"></a>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-book-class"></a>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-letter-class"></a>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-slides-class"></a>
+<p>The following document <var class="var">class</var> names are built into LaTeX.
(Many other document classes are available as separate packages;
-see <a href="#Overview">Overview of LaTeX</a>.)
+see <a class="pxref" href="#Overview">Overview of LaTeX</a>.)
</p>
-<dl compact="compact">
-<dt><span><code>article</code></span></dt>
-<dd><span id="document-classes-article"></span><p>For a journal article, a presentation, and miscellaneous general use.
+<dl class="table">
+<dt><code class="code">article</code></dt>
+<dd><a class="anchor" id="document-classes-article"></a><p>For a journal article, a presentation, and miscellaneous general use.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><span><code>book</code></span></dt>
-<dd><span id="document-classes-book"></span><p>Full-length books, including chapters and possibly including front
+<dt><code class="code">book</code></dt>
+<dd><a class="anchor" id="document-classes-book"></a><p>Full-length books, including chapters and possibly including front
matter, such as a preface, and back matter, such as an appendix
-(see <a href="#Front_002fback-matter">Front/back matter</a>).
+(see <a class="pxref" href="#Front_002fback-matter">Front/back matter</a>).
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><span><code>letter</code></span></dt>
-<dd><span id="document-classes-letter"></span><p>Mail, optionally including mailing labels
-(see <a href="#Letters">Letters</a>).
+<dt><code class="code">letter</code></dt>
+<dd><a class="anchor" id="document-classes-letter"></a><p>Mail, optionally including mailing labels
+(see <a class="pxref" href="#Letters">Letters</a>).
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><span><code>report</code></span></dt>
-<dd><span id="document-classes-report"></span><p>For documents of length between an <code>article</code> and a <code>book</code>,
+<dt><code class="code">report</code></dt>
+<dd><a class="anchor" id="document-classes-report"></a><p>For documents of length between an <code class="code">article</code> and a <code class="code">book</code>,
such as technical reports or theses, which may contain several chapters.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><span><code>slides</code></span></dt>
-<dd><span id="document-classes-slides"></span><p>For slide presentations—rarely used nowadays. The
-<code>beamer</code> package is perhaps the most prevalent
-(<a href="https://ctan.org/pkg/beamer">https://ctan.org/pkg/beamer</a>). See <a href="#beamer-template"><code>beamer</code> template</a>, for a
+<dt><code class="code">slides</code></dt>
+<dd><a class="anchor" id="document-classes-slides"></a><p>For slide presentations—rarely used nowadays. The
+<code class="code">beamer</code> package is perhaps the most prevalent
+(<a class="url" href="https://ctan.org/pkg/beamer">https://ctan.org/pkg/beamer</a>). See <a class="xref" href="#beamer-template"><code class="code">beamer</code> template</a>, for a
small template for a beamer document.
</p>
</dd>
</dl>
-<p>Standard <var>options</var> are described in the next section.
+<p>Standard <var class="var">options</var> are described in the next section.
</p>
-<ul class="section-toc">
+<ul class="mini-toc">
<li><a href="#Document-class-options" accesskey="1">Document class options</a></li>
<li><a href="#Additional-packages" accesskey="2">Additional packages</a></li>
<li><a href="#Class-and-package-construction" accesskey="3">Class and package construction</a></li>
</ul>
<hr>
-<div class="section" id="Document-class-options">
-<div class="header">
+<div class="section-level-extent" id="Document-class-options">
+<div class="nav-panel">
<p>
Next: <a href="#Additional-packages" accesskey="n" rel="next">Additional packages</a>, Up: <a href="#Document-classes" accesskey="u" rel="up">Document classes</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
-<span id="Document-class-options-1"></span><h3 class="section">3.1 Document class options</h3>
+<h3 class="section" id="Document-class-options-1">3.1 Document class options</h3>
-<span id="index-document-class-options"></span>
-<span id="index-options_002c-document-class"></span>
-<span id="index-class-options"></span>
-<span id="index-global-options"></span>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-document-class-options"></a>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-options_002c-document-class"></a>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-class-options"></a>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-global-options"></a>
-<p>You can specify <em>global options</em> or <em>class options</em> to the
-<code>\documentclass</code> command by enclosing them in square brackets. To
-specify more than one <var>option</var>, separate them with a comma.
+<p>You can specify <em class="dfn">global options</em> or <em class="dfn">class options</em> to the
+<code class="code">\documentclass</code> command by enclosing them in square brackets. To
+specify more than one <var class="var">option</var>, separate them with a comma.
</p>
<div class="example">
-<pre class="example">\documentclass[<var>option1</var>,<var>option2</var>,...]{<var>class</var>}
+<pre class="example-preformatted">\documentclass[<var class="var">option1</var>,<var class="var">option2</var>,...]{<var class="var">class</var>}
</pre></div>
<p>Here is the list of the standard class options.
</p>
-<span id="index-10pt-option"></span>
-<span id="index-11pt-option"></span>
-<span id="index-12pt-option"></span>
-<p>All of the standard classes except <code>slides</code> accept the following
-options for selecting the typeface size (default is <code>10pt</code>):
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-10pt-option"></a>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-11pt-option"></a>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-12pt-option"></a>
+<p>All of the standard classes except <code class="code">slides</code> accept the following
+options for selecting the typeface size (default is <code class="code">10pt</code>):
</p>
<div class="example">
-<pre class="example">10pt 11pt 12pt
+<pre class="example-preformatted">10pt 11pt 12pt
</pre></div>
-<span id="index-a4paper-option"></span>
-<span id="index-a5paper-option"></span>
-<span id="index-b5paper-option"></span>
-<span id="index-executivepaper-option"></span>
-<span id="index-legalpaper-option"></span>
-<span id="index-letterpaper-option"></span>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-a4paper-option"></a>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-a5paper-option"></a>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-b5paper-option"></a>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-executivepaper-option"></a>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-legalpaper-option"></a>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-letterpaper-option"></a>
<p>All of the standard classes accept these options for selecting the paper
size (these show height by width):
</p>
-<dl compact="compact">
-<dt><span><code>a4paper</code></span></dt>
-<dd><p>210 by 297mm (about 8.25 by 11.75 inches)
+<dl class="table">
+<dt><code class="code">a4paper</code></dt>
+<dd><p>210 by 297<span class="dmn">mm</span> (about 8.25 by 11.75 inches)
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><span><code>a5paper</code></span></dt>
-<dd><p>148 by 210mm (about 5.8 by 8.3 inches)
+<dt><code class="code">a5paper</code></dt>
+<dd><p>148 by 210<span class="dmn">mm</span> (about 5.8 by 8.3 inches)
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><span><code>b5paper</code></span></dt>
-<dd><p>176 by 250mm (about 6.9 by 9.8 inches)
+<dt><code class="code">b5paper</code></dt>
+<dd><p>176 by 250<span class="dmn">mm</span> (about 6.9 by 9.8 inches)
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><span><code>executivepaper</code></span></dt>
+<dt><code class="code">executivepaper</code></dt>
<dd><p>7.25 by 10.5 inches
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><span><code>legalpaper</code></span></dt>
+<dt><code class="code">legalpaper</code></dt>
<dd><p>8.5 by 14 inches
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><span><code>letterpaper</code></span></dt>
+<dt><code class="code">letterpaper</code></dt>
<dd><p>8.5 by 11 inches (the default)
</p></dd>
</dl>
-<span id="index-_005cpdfpagewidth"></span>
-<span id="index-_005cpdfpageheight"></span>
-<span id="index-package_002c-geometry"></span>
-<span id="index-geometry-package"></span>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-_005cpdfpagewidth"></a>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-_005cpdfpageheight"></a>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-package_002c-geometry"></a>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-geometry-package"></a>
<p>When using one of the engines pdfLaTeX, LuaLaTeX, or XeLaTeX
-(see <a href="#TeX-engines">TeX engines</a>), options other than <code>letterpaper</code> set
+(see <a class="pxref" href="#TeX-engines">TeX engines</a>), options other than <code class="code">letterpaper</code> set
the print area but you must also set the physical paper size. One way
-to do that is to put <code>\pdfpagewidth=\paperwidth</code> and
-<code>\pdfpageheight=\paperheight</code> in your document’s preamble.
-<span id="index-package_002c-geometry-1"></span>
-<span id="index-geometry-package-1"></span>
+to do that is to put <code class="code">\pdfpagewidth=\paperwidth</code> and
+<code class="code">\pdfpageheight=\paperheight</code> in your document’s preamble.
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-package_002c-geometry-1"></a>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-geometry-package-1"></a>
</p>
-<p>The <code>geometry</code> package provides flexible ways of setting the print
+<p>The <code class="code">geometry</code> package provides flexible ways of setting the print
area and physical page size.
</p>
-<span id="index-draft-option"></span>
-<span id="index-final-option"></span>
-<span id="index-fleqn-option"></span>
-<span id="index-landscape-option"></span>
-<span id="index-leqno-option"></span>
-<span id="index-openbib-option"></span>
-<span id="index-titlepage-option"></span>
-<span id="index-notitlepage-option"></span>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-draft-option"></a>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-final-option"></a>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-fleqn-option"></a>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-landscape-option"></a>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-leqno-option"></a>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-openbib-option"></a>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-titlepage-option"></a>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-notitlepage-option"></a>
<p>Miscellaneous other options:
</p>
-<dl compact="compact">
-<dt id='index-black-boxes_002c-omitting'><span><code>draft</code><a href='#index-black-boxes_002c-omitting' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span><code>final</code></span></dt>
-<dd><p>Mark (<code>draft</code>) or do not mark (<code>final</code>) overfull boxes with a
-black box in the margin; default is <code>final</code>.
+<dl class="table">
+<dt id='index-black-boxes_002c-omitting'><span><code class="code">draft</code><a class="copiable-link" href='#index-black-boxes_002c-omitting'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dt><code class="code">final</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Mark (<code class="code">draft</code>) or do not mark (<code class="code">final</code>) overfull boxes with a
+black box in the margin; default is <code class="code">final</code>.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt id='index-flush-left-equations'><span><code>fleqn</code><a href='#index-flush-left-equations' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-centered-equations"></span>
-<span id="index-equations_002c-flush-left-vs_002e-centered"></span>
+<dt id='index-flush-left-equations'><span><code class="code">fleqn</code><a class="copiable-link" href='#index-flush-left-equations'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><a class="index-entry-id" id="index-centered-equations"></a>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-equations_002c-flush-left-vs_002e-centered"></a>
<p>Put displayed formulas flush left; default is centered.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt id='index-landscape-orientation'><span><code>landscape</code><a href='#index-landscape-orientation' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-portrait-orientation"></span>
+<dt id='index-landscape-orientation'><span><code class="code">landscape</code><a class="copiable-link" href='#index-landscape-orientation'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><a class="index-entry-id" id="index-portrait-orientation"></a>
<p>Selects landscape format; default is portrait.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt id='index-left_002dhand-equation-numbers'><span><code>leqno</code><a href='#index-left_002dhand-equation-numbers' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-right_002dhand-equation-numbers"></span>
-<span id="index-equation-numbers_002c-left-vs_002e-right"></span>
+<dt id='index-left_002dhand-equation-numbers'><span><code class="code">leqno</code><a class="copiable-link" href='#index-left_002dhand-equation-numbers'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dd><a class="index-entry-id" id="index-right_002dhand-equation-numbers"></a>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-equation-numbers_002c-left-vs_002e-right"></a>
<p>Put equation numbers on the left side of equations; default is the right side.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt id='index-bibliography-format_002c-open'><span><code>openbib</code><a href='#index-bibliography-format_002c-open' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dt id='index-bibliography-format_002c-open'><span><code class="code">openbib</code><a class="copiable-link" href='#index-bibliography-format_002c-open'> ¶</a></span></dt>
<dd><p>Use “open” bibliography format.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt id='index-title-page_002c-separate-or-run_002din'><span><code>titlepage</code><a href='#index-title-page_002c-separate-or-run_002din' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span><code>notitlepage</code></span></dt>
+<dt id='index-title-page_002c-separate-or-run_002din'><span><code class="code">titlepage</code><a class="copiable-link" href='#index-title-page_002c-separate-or-run_002din'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dt><code class="code">notitlepage</code></dt>
<dd><p>Specifies whether there is a separate page for the title information and
for the abstract also, if there is one. The default for the
-<code>report</code> class is <code>titlepage</code>, for the other classes it is
-<code>notitlepage</code>.
+<code class="code">report</code> class is <code class="code">titlepage</code>, for the other classes it is
+<code class="code">notitlepage</code>.
</p></dd>
</dl>
-<p>The following options are not available with the <code>slides</code> class.
+<p>The following options are not available with the <code class="code">slides</code> class.
</p>
-<span id="index-onecolumn-option"></span>
-<span id="index-twocolumn-option"></span>
-<span id="index-oneside-option"></span>
-<span id="index-twoside-option"></span>
-<span id="index-openright-option"></span>
-<span id="index-openany-option"></span>
-<dl compact="compact">
-<dt><span><code>onecolumn</code></span></dt>
-<dt><span><code>twocolumn</code></span></dt>
-<dd><p>Typeset in one or two columns; default is <code>onecolumn</code>.
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-onecolumn-option"></a>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-twocolumn-option"></a>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-oneside-option"></a>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-twoside-option"></a>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-openright-option"></a>
+<a class="index-entry-id" id="index-openany-option"></a>
+<dl class="table">
+<dt><code class="code">onecolumn</code></dt>
+<dt><code class="code">twocolumn</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Typeset in one or two columns; default is <code class="code">onecolumn</code>.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt id='index-_005cevensidemargin'><span><code>oneside</code><a href='#index-_005cevensidemargin' class='copiable-anchor'> ¶</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span><code>twoside</code></span></dt>
-<dd><span id="index-_005coddsidemargin"></span>
-<p>Selects one- or two-sided layout; default is <code>oneside</code>, except
-that in the <code>book</code> class the default is <code>twoside</code>.
+<dt id='index-_005cevensidemargin'><span><code class="code">oneside</code><a class="copiable-link" href='#index-_005cevensidemargin'> ¶</a></span></dt>
+<dt><code class="code">twoside</code></dt>
+<dd><a class="index-entry-id" id="index-_005coddsidemargin"></a>
+<p>Selects one- or two-sided layout; default is <code class="code">oneside</code>, except
+that in the <code class="code">book</code> class the default is <code class="code">twoside</code>.
</p>
<p>For one-sided printing, the text is centered on the page. For two-sided
@@ Diff output truncated at 1234567 characters. @@
More information about the tex-live-commits
mailing list.